6,Z5VO/ 


Stom  t^e  £i6rare  of 

Q^equeaf^e^  fig  ^im  to 
t^e  feifirarg  of 

(Princeton  C^eofo^caf  ^emtndtg 

1/.  I 


GRAMMAR 


OF   TPTE 


HEBREW  LANGUAGE. 


BY  / 

WILLIAM    HENRY   GREEN, 

PROFESSOR  IN  THE   THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY  AT  PRINCETON,   N.  J. 


jarto  ISiJttton. 

(CAREFULLY  RKVISED   THROUGHOUT 
AND  THE   SYNTAX    GREATLY    ENLARGED. 


Part  I.— Orthoaraphy  and.    Etyixiology. 


NEW    YORK: 

JOHN   WILEY  &  SONS,  PUBLISHERS, 
15  AsTOR  Place. 

1888. 


Copyright,  1888,  by 
JOHN  WILEY  &  SONSk 


PREFACE. 


The  twenty-seven  years,  which  have  elapsed  since 
the  first  publication  of  this  Grammar,  have  been  exceed- 
ingly fruitful  in  the  philological  and  exegetical  study  of 
the  Old  Testament.  And  important  progress  has  been 
made  toward  a  more  thorough  and  accurate  knowledge 
of  the  grammatical  structure  of  the  Hebrew  language. 
This  edition  of  the  Grammar  has  been  carefully  revised 
throughout  that  it  may  better  represent  the  advanced 
state  of  scholarship  on  this  subject.  Nearly  every  page 
exhibits  corrections  or  additions  of  greater  or  less  conse- 
quence. And  the  Syntax  particularly,  which  was  not 
fully  elaborated  before,  has  been  greatly  enlarged,  and 
for  the  most  part  entirely  rewritten.  The  plan  of  the 
Grammar,  the  method  of  treatment,  and  in  general  the 
order  of  the  sections  are  unchanged.  And  little  occasion 
has  been  found  to  alter  the  more  general  and  comprehen- 
sive statements,  which  are  distinguished  by  being  printed 
in  large  type.  The  changes  are  chiefly  in  the  addition 
of  fuller  details  enlarging  and  multiplying  the  para- 
graphs in  small  type. 

The  principle  of  eschewing  all  supposititious  forms  and 
adducing  none  but  such  as  really  occur  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, has  been  steadfastly  adhered  to  as  heretofore,  with 
the  view  of  rigorously  conforming  all  rules  and  examples 
to  the  actual  phenomena  of  the  language.  The  text  of 
Baer  is  preferred  so  far  as  published,  the  disputed  ortho- 
phonic  Daghesh-forte  excepted,  though  it  is  recog- 
nized and  its  rules  are  stated.     In  the  discussion  of  the 


iv  PREFACE. 

poetic  accents  free  use  has  been  made  of  tlie  elaborate 
treatises  of  Baer  and  Wickes ;  and  the  names  which  they 
emplo}'  are  given  as  well  as  those  which  previously  were 
more  familiar.  The  intricate  rules  for  the  employment 
of  Metheo-h  are  also  drawn  from  Baer.  The  position  of 
the  accent  is  indicated  as  in  previous  editions  by  a  small 
vertical  stroke  above  all  Hebrew  words  except  mono- 
syllables. 

The  convenience  of  students  has  been  consulted  in 
removing  the  paradigms  of  pronouns,  verbs,  and  nouns 
from  the  body  of  the  volume  and  placing  them  together 
at  the  end.  A  new  paradigm  has  been  introduced,  afford- 
ing a  succinct  view  of  the  formation  of  nouns  of  different 
classes,  with  their  respective  significations.  The  declen- 
sions of  nouns  have  been  simplified  by  an  arrangement 
which  corresponds  at  once  with  their  etymological  struc- 
ture and  with  the  vowel  changes  to  which  they  are 
severally  liable.  While  every  part  of  the  Syntax  is 
much  more  fully  developed  than  before,  special  atten- 
tion has  been  j^aid  to  the  use  of  the  tenses,  which  is  so 
thorouirhh'  discussed  in  the  admirable  treatise  of  Dr. 
Di'iver.  The  old  names  preterite  and  future  are,  for 
reasons  given  on  pp.  299-302,  preferred  to  perfect  and 
imperfect,  which  are  now  so  generally  adopted ;  but  the 
latter  are  used  in  conjunction  with  the  former  for  the 
convenience  of  those  who  like  them  better.  The  various 
kinds  of  compound  sentences,  involving  relative,  condi- 
tional, circumstantial,  and  co-ordinate  clauses,  receive  the 
attention  which  is  due  to  their  peculiar  character  and 
separate  importance.  The  ditferent  rules  and  statements 
of  the  Grammar,  and  particularly  of  the  Syntax,  are 
illustrated  and  confirmed  by  a  copious  citation  of  pas- 
sages in  which  they  are  exemplified.  Full  indexes,  as 
before,  accompany  the  Grammar  to  facilitate  its  use. 

ritiNCKTON',  August 2^2,  1888. 


C0]^TEI:^TS. 


PART  I.— ORTHOGRAPHY. 
Divisions  of  Grammar,  §1. 

OETHOGEAPHIO     SYMBOLS. 

The   Lettees. — Alphabet,  §2;    Sounds,  §3;    Double  forms,  §4;    Names, 

§5;     Order,  §6;     Classification,  §7;     Words  never  divided,  §8; 

Abbreviations  and  Signs  of  Number,  §  9. 
The  Vowels. — Masoretic  Points,  §10;    Vowel  Letters,  §11;    Signs  for  the 

Vowels,  §12;    Mutual  Relation  of  this  twofold  Notation,  §§13,  14; 

Pure  and  Diphthongal  Vowels,  §  15. 
Sh'va,  silent  and  vocal,  simple  and  compound,  §  16. 
Pattahh  Furtive,  §17. 
Syllables,  §18. 
Amliguous  Signs. — Hhirik,  Shurek,  and  Klbbuts,  §19.1;   Kamets  and 

KametsTIhatuph,  §  19.  2  ;    Silent  and  Vocal  Sh'va,  §20. 
PonsiTs  AFFECTING  OoxsoNANTs : — Daghesh-lcue,  §§21,  22. 

Daghesh-forte,  §23;  different  kinds,  §24;  omission  of,  §25. 
Mappik,  §26. 
Raphe,  §27. 
Points   attached    to   Woeds. — Accents,   their  design,   §  28 ;    forms  and 

classes,  §29;    like  forms  distinguished,  §30;    poetic  accents,  §31; 

position  as  determined  by  the  character  of  the  syllables,  §  32. 1 ;  in 

uninflected  words,  §32.  2.  3;  with  affixes,  suffixes  and  prefixes,  §33; 

use  in  distinguishing  words,  §  34 ;  shifted  in  special  cases,  §  35. 
Consecution  of  the  Accents  in  Prose. — Clauses  and  their  subdivisions, 

§  36 ;  tabular  view,  §  37 ;  explanation  of  tie  table,  §  38 ;  adaptation  of 

the  trains  of  accents  to  sentences,  §  39. 


Vi  CONTENTS. 

Poetic  Consecvtion.—Clmses  and  their  subdivisions,  §40;  tabular  view 
and  explanation,  §  41 ;  adaptation  of  tlie  trains  of  accents  to  sen- 
tences, §42. 

Makkeph,  §43. 

Metliegli,  its  form  and  position,  §44;  special  rules,  §45;  K'ri  and 
K'thibh,  meaning  of  the  terms,  §46 ;  constant  K'ris  not  noted  in  the 
margin,  §  47 ;  their  design  and  value,  §  48. 

Accuracy  of  the  points,  §  49. 

OETHOGEAPHIO     0HAKGE8. 

Significant  mutations  belong  to  the  domain  of  the  lexicon,  §§  50,  51 ;  eu' 
phonic  mutations  to  the  domain  of  grammar,  §  52. 

Mutations  of  Consonants  at  the  beginning  of  syllables,  §53  ;  at  the  close 
of  syllables,  §54;  at  the  end  of  words,  §55  ;  special  rules,  §56. 

Changes  of  Consonants  to  Vowels  in  reduplicated  syllables  and  letters 
and  in  quiescents,  §  57. 

Mutations  of  Vowels,  significant  and  euphonic,  §58;  due  to  syllabic 
changes,  §  59  ;  to  contiguous  gutturals,  §  60 ;  to  concurrent  conso- 
nants, §  61 ;  concurring  vowels,  §  62 ;  proximity  of  vowels,  §  63 ;  the 
accent,  §  64 ;  pause  accents,  §  65 ;  shortening  or  lengthening  of 
words,  §66. 


PART  IL— ETYMOLOGY. 

Roots  of  "Woeds. — Design  of  Etymology,  three  stages  in  the  growth  of 

words,  §67;    pronominal   and  verbal  roots,  §68;    formation   and 

inflection  of  words  by  external  and  internal  changes,  §  69 ;  parts  of 

speech,  §70. 

Peonouns  personal,  §  71 ;    pronominal  suflSxes,  §  72 ;   demonstrative,  §  73 ; 

relative,  §  74  ;  interrogative  and  indefinite,  §  75  ;  paradigm  I. 
Verbs,  the  species  and  their  signification,  §§  76-80. 

Pebfect  Verbs,  §  81  ;  formation  of  the  species,  §§  82,  83 ;  their  infiection, 
§§84,  85  ;  paradigm  II. 
Remarks  on   the   Perfect    Verbs. — Kal    preterite,   §86;    Infinitive,   87; 
Future,  §88;  Imperative,  §89;  Participles,  §90  ;  Niphal,  §91  ;  Piel, 
§  93  ;  Pual,  §  93;  Hiphil,  §  94  ;  Hophal,  §  95  ;  Hithpael,  §  96. 
Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Future,  §97;  and  Imperative,  98. 
Vav  Consecutive  with  the  Future,  §  99  ;  with  the  Preterite,  §  100. 
Verbs  witli  suffixes,  §§  101,  102  ;  Remarks  on  the  Perfect  Verbs  with  suf- 
fixes.  Preterite,  §  104  ;  Future,  105  ;  Infinitive  and  Imperative,  §  106  ; 
paradigm  III, 
iMPERFRrT  Verbs,  classified,  §107. 

Pe  Guttural  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§108,  109;  Remarks,  §§111-115; 
paradigm  IV. 


CONTENTS.  VU 

Ayin  Guttural  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §  116  ;  Remarks,  §§  118-122  ; 
paradigm  V. 

Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §123;  Remarks,  §§125-128; 
paradigm  VI. 

Pe  Nun  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §  129  ;  Remarks,  §§  131,  132  ;  paradigm 
VII. 

Ayin  Doubled  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  g§  133-137;  Remarks,  §§139-142; 
paradigm  VIII. 

Pe  Yodh  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§  144-146  ;  Remarks,  §§  148-153  ;  para- 
digm X. 

Ayiu  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs,  their  pec tdiari ties,  §§  154-156  ;  Remarks, 
§§  158^161  ;  paradigm  IX. 

Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §  164  ;  Remarks,  §§  166-169  ; 
paradigm  XI. 

Lamedh  He  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§  170,  171  ;  shortened  future  and 
imperative,  §173;  Remarks,  §§174-179  ;  paradigm  XII. 

Doubly  Imperfect  Verbs,  §  180. 

Defective  Verbs,  §  181. 

Quadriliteral  Verbs,  §  182. 
Nouns,  their  formation,  §183;    Class  I.  §§184-188;  Class  II.  §§189,   190; 
Class  III.  §§  191-194 ;  Class  IV.  §§  195,  196  ;  paradigm,  XIII. 

Multiliterals,  §  197. 

Gender  and  Numher. — Feminine  endings,  §  198  ;  anomalies  in  the  use  of, 
§199;  employment  in  the  formation  of  words,  §200;  plural  endings, 
§  201 ;  anomalies,  §  202 ;  nouns  confined  to  one  number,  §  203 ; 
Dual  ending,  204  ;  usage  of  the  dual,  205  ;  changes  consequent  upon 
affixing  the  endings  for  gender  and  number,  §§  206-213. 

The  Construct  State,  its  meaning  and  formation,  §§  214-218. 

Nouns  with  suffixes,  §  219,  220. 

Declensions  of  Nouns,  §221;  paradigms  XIV,  XV,  XVI. 

Paragogic  Vowels  added  to  Nouns,  §§  222,  223. 
Numerals.— Cardinal  numbers,  §§224-227;  Ordinals,  etc.,  §228. 
Prefixed   Particles,    §  229 ;   the   Article,    §  230  ;    He  Interrogative,   §  231; 

Inseparable  prepositions,  §§232-234;  Vav  Conjunctive.  §235. 
Sepakate  Particles.— Adverbs,  §  236  ;   with  suffixes,  §  237  ;   Prepositions, 
§238;    with  suffixes,    §§239,240;    Conjuuctions,    §241;    Interjec- 
tions, §242. 


PART  III.— SYNTAX. 


Simple  and  Compound  Sentences,  §243.  2;  Office  of  Syntax,  243.  1  ;  Elements 
of  the  sentence,  §  243.  3. 

The  Subject,  a  noun  or  pronoun,  §244;  when  omitted,  245  ;  personal  pro- 
noun, §  246 ;  its  extension,  §  247. 

The  Article,  when  used,  §248;  nouns  definite  without  it,  §249;  omitted 
in  poetry,  §250;  indefinite  nouns,  §  251. 

Attributive  adjectives  and  demonstratives,  §  252. 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 

Numerals.— C&Td'mal  numbers,  §§253,  254;  Ordinals,  etc.,  §255.  1,  2;  frac- 
tional parts,  §  255.  3  ;  distributive  numbers  and  numeral  adverbs, 
§  255.  4. 

Apposition  or  subordination.  §  256. 

The  Construct  State  and  Suffixes,  §§  257-259  ;  resolved  by  the  preposition  ^ 
§  260. 

The  Predicate,  Copula,  §  261  ;  Nouns,  §  262  ;  Adjectives  and  demonstratives, 
§263. 

Comparison  of  adjectives,  §  264. 

Verbs. — Hebrew  conception  of  time,  §265.  1,  2  ;  subjective  use  of  the  tenses, 
§  265.  3  ;  different  names  applied  to  them,  §  265.  3,  a ;  the  primary 
tenses;  use  of  the  preterite  or  perfect,  §  266  ;  the  future  or  imperfect, 
§  2G7  ;  the  preterite  and  future  in  combination,  §§  288,  269;  the  modal 
forms,  §270  ;  the  intentional  or  paragogic  future,  §271;  the  jussive 
or  apocopated  future,  §  272  ;  the  imperative,  §  273;  the  precative  parti- 
cle, §274  ;  the  primary  tenses  with  Vav  Conjunctive,  §  275;  the  second- 
ary tenses,  Vav  Consecutive  with  the  future,  §  276 ;  Vav  Consecutive 
with  the  preterite,  §  277  ;  participles,  §  278  ;  the  infinitive,  §  279  ;  ab- 
solute infinitive,  §  280  ;  its  emphatic  use,  §  281  ;  change  of  construc- 
tion to  finite  tenses,  §  282 ;  co-ordinate  instead  of  dependent  relation 
of  verbs,  §  283. 

Object  of  Verbs. — The  direct  object  of  transitive  verbs,  §284;  transitive  con- 
struction of  intransitive  verbs,  §  285  ;  indirect  object  of  verbs,  §  286  ; 
verbs  with  more  than  one  object,  §  287. 

Adverbs  and  adverbial  expressions,  §  288. 

Neglect  of  agreement,  §289  ;  compound  subject,  §290;  dual  nouns,  §292  ; 
nouns  in  the  construct,  §  293  ;  changes  of  person,  §  294  ;  ellipsis, 
§295. 

Repetition  of  nouns,  §  296  ;  pronouns,  §  297. 

Intehrogative,  §  298,  and  Negative  Sentences,  §  299. 

Compound  Sentences.— Relative  clauses,  §§300,  301;  the  relative  omitted, 
§  302  ;  poetic  use  of  the  demonstrative,  §  303  ;  indefinite  pronouns, 
§  304  ;  relative  conjunction,  §  305  ;  hypothetical  sentences,  §§  306-308 ; 
circumstantial  clauses,  §  309  ;  the  conjunction  Vav,  §§310-312. 


PART  FIRST. 

OETHOaRAPHY. 

§  1.  Language  is  the  communication  of  thought  by 
means  of  spoken  or  written  sounds.  The  utterance  of  a 
single  thought  constitutes  a  sentence.  Each  sentence  is 
composed  of  words  expressing  indi^ddual  conceptions  or 
their  relations.  And  words  are  made  up  of  sounds  pro- 
duced by  the  organs  of  speech  and  represented  by  written 
signs.  It  is  the  province  of  grammar  as  the  science  of 
language  to  investigate  these  several  elements.  It  hence 
consists  of  three  parts.  First,  Orthography,  which  treats 
of  the  sounds  employed  and  the  mode  of  representing 
them.  Second,  Etymology,  which  treats  of  the  different 
kinds  of  words,  their  formation,  and  the  changes  which 
they  undergo.  Third,  Syntax,  wliich  treats  of  sentences, 
or  the  manner  in  which  words  are  joined  together  to  ex- 
press ideas.  The  task  of  the  Hebrew  grammarian  is  to 
furnish  a  complete  exhibition  of  the  phenomena  of  this 
particular  language,  carefully  digested  and  referred  as 
far  as  practicable  to  their  appropriate  causes  in  the 
organs  of  speech  and  the  operations  of  the  mind. 

The  Lettees. 

§  2.  The  Hebrew  being  no  longer  a  spoken  tongue,  is 
only  known  as  the  language  of  books,  and  particularly 
of  the  Old  Testament,  which  is  the  most  interesting  and 


2  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §  3 

important  as  well  as  the  only  pure  monument  of  it.  The 
first  step  towards  its  investigation  must  accordingly  be 
to  ascertain  the  meaning  of  the  symbols  in  wliich  it  is 
recorded.  Then  having  learned  its  sounds,  as  they  are 
thus  represented,  it  will  be  possible  to  advance  one  step 
further,  and  inquire  into  the  laws  by  which  these  are 
governed  in  their  employment  and  mutations. 

The  symbols  used  in  writing  Hebrew  are  of  two  sorts, 
viz.  letters  (ni-rii^)  and  points  (D'l^p:).  The  number  of 
the  letters  is  twenty-two ;  these  are  written  from  right  to 
left,  and  are  exclusively  consonants.  The  alphabetical 
table  upon  the  opposite  page  exhibits  theu^  forms,  Eng- 
lish equivalents,  names,  and  numerical  values,  together 
with  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  Rabbinical  character 
employed  to  a  considerable  extent  in  the  commentaries 
and  other  writings  of  the  modern  Jews. 

§  3.  There  is  always  more  or  less  difficulty  in  rep- 
resenting the  sounds  of  one  language  by  those  of  another. 
But  this  is  in  the  case  of  the  Hebrew  greatly  aggravated 
by  its  having  been  for  ages  a  dead  language,  so  that 
some  of  its  sounds  cannot  now  be  accurately  determined, 
and  also  by  its  belonging  to  a  different  family  or  group 
of  tongues  from  our  own,  possessing  sounds  entirely 
foreign  to  the  EngHsh,  for  which  it  consequently  affords 
no  equivalent,  and  which  are  in  fact  incapable  of  being 
pronounced  by  our  organs.  The  equivalents  of  the  follow- 
ing table  are  not  therefore  to  be  regarded  as  in  every 
instance  exact  representations  of  the  proper  powers  of 
the  letters.  They  are  sunply  approximations  sufficiently 
near  the  truth  for  every  practical  purpose,  the  best  wliich 
can  now  be  proposed,  and  sanctioned  by  tradition  and 
the  conventional  usage  of  the  best  Hebraists. 

1.  It  will  be  observed  that  a  double  pronunciation  has 
been  assigned  to  seven  of  the  letters.    A  native  Hebrew 


§3 


LETTERS. 


Order. 

Forms  and  Equivalents. 

Names. 

Rabbinical 
Alphabet. 

Numerical 
values. 

1 

i^ 

t|b5<  Aleph 

ts 

1 

2 

n 

Bh,  B 

n-S  Beth 

3 

2 

3 

^ 

Gh,  G 

b'Th  Glmel 

Jl 

3 

4 

^ 

Dh,  D 

nb'^  Daleth 

V  T 

1 

4 

5 

n 

H 

u^n  He 

0 

5 

6 

1 

VorW 

r\  Vav  (Waw) 

) 

6 

7 

T 

Z 

■j^T  Zayin 

r 

7 

8 

n 

Hh 

m^n  Hheth 

D 

8 

9 

t2 

T 

n^t?  Teth 

D 

9 

10 

1 

Y 

li-^  Yodh 

"» 

10 

11 

=  1 

Kb,  K 

C|5  Kaph 

15 

20 

12 

b 

L 

"irb  Lamedh 

VT 

b 

30 

13 

12  D 

M 

Wq  Mem 

on 

40 

14 

M 

N 

•jilD  Nun 

p 

50 

15 

0 

S 

1\'2b  Samekh 

D 

60 

16 

3? 

]y__  Ayin 

1? 

70 

17 

sq 

Ph,P 

iiS  Pe 

qp 

80 

18 

^T 

Ts 

nt  Tsadhe 

••    T 

T^ 

90 

19 

P 

K 

rpp  Koph 

P 

100 

20 

-1 

R 

UJ^n  Resh 

") 

200 

21 

12: 

Sh,  S 

■j^u:  Shin 

D 

300 

22 

n 

Th,  T 

in  Tav 

T 

D 

400 

would  readily  decide  without  assistance  which  of  these 
was  to  be  adopted  in  any  given  case,  just  .as  we  are 
sensible  of  no  inconvenience  from  the  various  sounds  of 
the  Enghsh  letters  which  are  so  embarrassing  to  foreigners 
learning  our  language.    The  ambiguity  is  m  every  case 


4  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §  3 

removed,  however,  by  the  addition  of  a  dot  or  point 
indicating  which  sound  they  are  to  receive.  Thus  21  with 
a  point  in  its  bosom  has  the  sound  of  h,  1  unpointed  that 
of  the  corresponding  t),  or  as  it  is  commonly  represented 
for  the  sake  of  uniformity  in  notation,  hh;  3  is  pro- 
nomiced  as  g,  ji  unpointed  had  an  aspirated  sound  which 
may  accordingly  be  represented  by  gh,  but  as  it  is  diffi- 
cult to  produce  it,  or  even  to  determine  with  exactness 
what  it  was,  and  as  there  is  no  corresponding  sound  in 
English,  the  aspiration  is  mostly  neglected,  and  the  letter, 
whether  pointed  or  not,  sounded  indifferently  as  g;  *^  is  cl^ 
1  unpointed  is  the  aspirate  dli,  equivalent  to  tli  in  the; 
3  is  A:,  S  unpointed  its  aspirate  kh,  perhaps  resembhng 
the  German  cli  in  icli,  though  its  aspiration,  like  that  of 
J,  is  commonly  neglected  in  modern  reading;  E  is 7;,  S  uw- 
pointed jj/i  or/;  ri  is  ^,  H  unpointed  tli  in  thin.  The  letter 
id  with  a  dot  over  its  right  arm  is  pronounced  like  sh,  and 
called  Shin;  "D  with  a  dot  over  its  left  arm  is  called  Sin, 
and  pronounced  like  s,  no  attempt  being  made  in  modern 
usage  to  discriminate  between  its  sound  and  that  of  0 
Samekh.  Although  there  may  anciently  have  been  a 
distinction  between  them,  this  can  no  longer  be  defined 
nor  even  positively  asserted;  it  has  therefore  been  thought 
unnecessary  to  preserve  the  individuality  of  these  letters 
in  the  notation,  and  both  of  them  will  accordingly  be 
represented  by  s. 

a.  The  double  sound  of  the  first  six  of  the  letters  just  named  is  purely 
euphonic,  and  has  no  effect  whatever  upon  the  meaning  of  the  words  in 
which  they  stand.  The  case  of  ©  is  diflferent.  Its  primary  sound  was  that 
of  sh,  as  is  evident  from  the  contrast  in  Jndg.  12  :  6  of  riVid  fihihbdhth 
with  n^2D  sibbulcth.  In  certain  words,  however,  and  sometimes  for  the 
sake  of  creating  a  distinction  between  different  words  of  like  ortliographj', 
it  received  the  sound  of  s,  thus  almost  assuming  the  character  of  a  distinct 
letter,  e.  g.  "irJ  to  break,  -irr  to  hopr.  That  Sin  and  Samekh  were  dis- 
tinguishable to  the  ear,  appears  probable  from  the  fact  that  there  are  woids 
of  separate  significations  which  difl'er  only  in  the  use  of  one  or  the  other 
of  these  letters,  and  in  whicli  they  are  never  interchanged,  e.  g.  ^rd  to  be 


§  3  LETTERS.  5 

bereaved,  Viir  to  be  wise,  ^ia  to  be  foolish;  -li'r  to  be  drunken,  -i?b  to  hire, 
"130  to  shut  up;  l!id  to  look,  "ira  to  rule,  ^^iD  to  turn  back;  nsb  a  lip,  nbo 
to  destroy.  The  close  affinity  between  the  sounds  which  they  represent  is, 
however,  shown  by  the  equivalence  of  such  roots  as  "SO  and  lE'r,  pS5  and 
P?'^)  C:rO  and  ^C^,  and  by  the  fact  that  D  is  in  a  few  instances  written  for 
ia,  e.  g.  noi  Ps.  4  :  7  from  xbi,  n^i^Db  Eccles.  1:17  for  nVirp;  niionn  Jer. 
19  :  2  from  bnn,  nriEG  but  HQb  Isa.  3: 17.  The  original  identity  of  d  and  b 
is  apparent  from  their  being  used  interchangeably  in  the  alphabetic  psalms 
Ps.  119  :  161 — 168  and  other  biblical  acrostics  Lam.  3  :61— 63,  as  well  as 
from  the  etymological  connection  between  iX"i  leaven  and  ri'ixp?  a  vessel 
in  which  bread  is  leavened;  ^rb  to  shudder,  "iTnrd  horrible,  causing  a 
shudder;  "15b  to  hire,  "libx  a  recompense.  In  Arabic  the  division  of  single 
letters  into  two  distinguished  by  diacritical  points  is  carried  to  a  much 
greater  length,  the  alphabet  of  that  language  being  by  this  means  enlarged 
from  twenty-two  to  twenty-eight  letters. 

b.  The  palatal  aspirate  gh  is  still  preserved  in  the  spelling  of  many 
English  words,  although  it  is  now  lost  in  pronunciation,  being  either  com- 
pensated by  lengthening  the  vowel,  e.  g.  light  (Ger.  licht),  knight  (Ger. 
knecht),  plough  (Ger.  pflug),  or  changed  to  a  labial,  e.  g.  laugh,  tough,  or  to 
an  unaspirated  surd,  e.  g.  hough. 

2.  In  their  original  power  t:  t  differed  from  n  t,  and 
3  h  from  p  k,  for  these  letters  are  not  confused  nor  Hable 
to  interchange,  and  the  distinction  is  preserved  to  this 
day  in  the  cognate  Arabic;  yet  it  is  not  easy  to  state 
intelligibly  wherein  the  difference  consisted.  They  are 
currently  pronounced  precisely  alike. 

3.  The  letter  n  has  a  stronger  sound  than  fl  the 
simple  /i,  and  is  accordingly  represented  by  hli;  1  is  re- 
presented by  r,  although  it  had  some  pecuharity  of  sound 
which  we  cannot  at  this  day  attempt  to  reproduce,  by 
which  it  was  allied  to  the  gutturals. 

4.  For  two  letters,  i<  and  :?,  no  equivalent  has  been 
given  in  the  table,  and  they  are  commonly  altogether 
neglected  in  pronunciation.  !J<  is  the  weakest  of  the  letters, 
and  was  probably  always  inaudible.  It  stands  for  the 
slight  and  involuntary  emission  of  breath  necessary  to 
the  utterance  of  a  vowel  unattended  by  a  more  distinct 
consonant  sound.  It  therefore  merely  serves  to  mark  the 
beginning  or  the  close  of  the  syllable  of  which  it  is  a 


6  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  4 

part,  while  to  the  ear  it  is  entirety  lost  in  the  accom- 
panying or  preceding  vowel.  Its  power  has  been  likened 
to  that  of  the  smooth  breathing  (')  of  the  Greeks  or  the 
English  silent  h  in  liotir.  On  the  other  hand  y  had  a  deep 
guttural  sound  which  was  always  heard,  but  like  that 
of  the  corresponding  letter  among  the  Arabs  is  very 
difficult  of  utterance  by  occidental  organs;  consequently 
no  attempt  is  made  to  reproduce  it.  In  the  Septuagint 
it  is  sometimes  represented  by  7,  sometimes  by  the  rough 
and  sometimes  by  the  smooth  breathing;  thus  rSllV 
Tojuoppa,  *'^y  'HX/,  p?!"'^?  'A^juaX^K.  Some  of  the  modern 
Jews  give  it  the  sound  of  ng  or  of  the  French  gn  in 
campagne,  either  wherever  it  occurs  or  only  at  the  end 
of  words,  e.  g.  5'J"*r  Sh'mang,  'i'U^  gndmodh. 

§  4.  The  forms  of  the  letters  exhibited  in  the  pre- 
ceding table,  though  found  without  important  variation 
in  all  existing  manuscripts,  are  not  the  original  ones.  An 
older  character  is  preserved  upon  the  Jewish  coins  struck 
in  the  age  of  the  Maccabees,  which  bears  a  considerable 
resemblance  to  the  Samaritan  and  still  more  to  the  Phe- 
nician.  Some  of  the  steps  in  the  transition  from  one  to 
the  other  can  still  be  traced  upon  extant  monuments. 
There  was  first  a  cursive  tendency,  disposing  to  unite  the 
different  letters  of  the  same  word,  which  is  the  established 
practice  in  Syriac  and  Arabic.  This  was  followed  by  a 
predominance  of  the  calligraphic  principle,  which  again 
separated  the  letters  and  reduced  them  to  their  present 
rectangular  forms  and  nearly  uniform  size.  The  cursive 
stage  has,  however,  left  its  traces  upon  the  five  letters 
which  appear  in  the  table  with  double  forms;  i  ''J  3  3  ^2 
when  standing  at  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  words 
terminate  in  a  bottom  horizontal  stroke,  which  is  the 
remnant  of  the  connecting  link  with  the  following  letter; 
at  the  end  of  words  no  such  link  was  needed,  and  the 


§5 


LETTEES. 


letter  was  continued  vertically  downward  in  a  sort  of 
terminal  flourish  thus,  "^  "j  C]  V,  or  closed  up  by  joining 
its  last  with  its  initial  stroke,  thus  D. 

a.  The  few  instances  in  which  final  letters  are  found  in  the  middle  of 
words,  as  n2"]n3  Isa.  9:6,  or  their  ordinary  forms  at  the  end,  as  TDtl  Neh. 
2  :  13,  3^  Job  38  :  1,  are  probably  due  to  the  inadvertence  of  early  tran- 
scribers which  has  been  faithfully  perpetuated  since,  or  if  intentional  they 
may  have  had  a  connection  now  unknown  with  the  enumeration  of  letters 
or  the  signification  of  words.  The  same  may  be  said  of  letters  larger  than 
usual,  as  tisD"!  Ps.  80:16,  or  smaller,  as  BX"i3\'3  Gen.  2:  4,  or  above  the 
line,  as  ^?"3  Ps.  80  :  14,  or  inverted,  as  ?bca  Num.  10  :  35  (in  manuscripts 
and  the  older  editions,  e.g.  that  of  Stephanus  in  1541),  or  with  extraordinary 
points,  as  J|."i,b'i;fi  Gen.  33  :  4,  i6^i  Ps.  27  :  13,  in  all  which  the  Rabbins  find 
concealed  meanings  of  the  most  fanciful  and  absurd  character.  Thus  in 
their  opinion  the  suspended  3  in  STy"?  Judg.  18:  30  suggests  that  the  idola- 
ters described  were  descended  from  Moses  but  had  the  character  of  Ma- 
nasseh.  In  "jlm  Lev.  11:42  theVav,  which  is  of  unusual  size,  is  the  middle 
letter  of  the  Pentateuch;  ^"'3'^5^  Gen.  16:5  with  an  extraordinary  point 
over  the  second  Yodh,  is  the  only  instance  in  which  the  word  is  written 
with  that  letter  (the  correct  reading  1  Kin.  15:19  is  ^3"'21);  the  large  letters 
in  Deut.  6  :  4  emphasize  the  capital  article  of  the  Jewish  faith.  AU  such 
anomalous  forms  or  marks,  with  the  conceits  of  the  Rabbins  respecting 
them,  are  reviewed  in  detail  in  Buxtorf's  Tiberias,  pp.  152  etc. 

§  5.  All  the  names  of  the  letters  were  probably  signi- 
ficant at  first,  although  the  meanings  of  some  of  them 
are  now  doubtful  or  obscure.  It  is  commonly  supposed 
that  these  describe  the  objects  to  which  their  forms 
originally  bore  a  rude  resemblance.  If  this  be  so,  how- 
ever, the  mutations  which  they  have  since  undergone  are 
such,  that  the  relation  is  no  longer  traceable,  unless  it 
be  faintly  in  a  few.  The  power  of  the  letter  is  in  every 
instance  the  initial  sound  of  its  name. 

a.  The  opinion  advocated  by  Schultens,  Fundamenta  Ling.  Heb.  p.  10, 
that  the  invention  of  the  letters  was  long  anterior  to  that  of  their  names, 
and  that  the  latter  was  a  pedagogical  expedient  to  facilitate  the  learning  of 
the  letters  by  associating  their  forms  and  sounds  with  familiar  objects,  has 
met  with  little  favour  and  possesses  little  intrinsic  probability.  An  interest- 
ing corroboration  of  the  antiquity  of  these  names  is  found  in  their  preserva- 
tion in  the  Greek  alphabet,  though  destitute  of  meaning  in  that  language, 
the  Greeks  having  borrowed  their  letters  at  an  early  period  from  the  Phe- 
nicians,  and  hence  the  appended  a  of  'AXcpa,  etc.,  which  points  to  the  Ara- 
mseic  form  X3PX. 


8  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  6 

b.  The  Semitic  derivation  of  the  names  proves  incontestably  that  the 
alphabet  had  its  origin  among  a  people  speaking  a  language  kindred  to 
the  Hebrew.  Their  most  probable  meanings,  so  far  as  they  are  still  ex- 
plicable, are  as  follows,  viz:  Aleph,  an  ox;  Beth,  a  house;  Gimel,  a  camel; 
Daleth,  a  door;  He,  doubtful,  possibly  a  window;  Vav,  a  hook;  Zayin,  a 
weapon;  Hheth,  probably  a  fence;  Teth,  a  snake  or  a  hag;  Yodh,  a  hand; 
Kaph,  the  palm  of  the  hand;  Lamedh,  an  ox-goad;  Mem,  water;  Nun,  a 
fish;  Samekh,  a  prop;  Ayin,  an  eye;  Pe,  a  mouth;  Tsadhe,  a  fish-hook  or 
a  hunter's  dart;  Koph,  perhaps  an  axe-head;  Resh,  a  head;  Shin,  a  tooth; 
Tav,  a  cross  mark. 

Eusebius  (Praep.  Evang.  x.  5)  and  Jerome  give  a  mystical  explanation 
of  the  alphabet,  in  which  the  names  of  the  letters  are  read  as  a  continuous 
sentence.    See  Fiirst's  Aramiiisches  Lehrgebaude,  p.  26. 

§  6.  The  order  of  the  letters  appears  to  be  entirely 
arbitrary,  though  it  has  been  remarked  that  the  three 
middle  mutes  2  3  1  succeed  each  other,  as  in  like  manner 
the  three  hquids  b  '2  1  The  juxtaposition  of  a  few  of 
the  letters  may  perhaps  be  owing  to  the  kindred  signifi- 
cation of  their  names,  e.  g.  Yodh  and  Kaph  the  hand, 
Mem  tvater  and  Nun  a  fish,  Resh  the  head  and  Shin  a 
tooth.  The  antiquity  of  the  existing  arrangement  of  the 
alphabet  is  shown,  1.  by  psalms  and  other  portions  of 
the  Old  Testament  in  which  successive  clauses  or  verses 
begin  with  the  letters  disposed  in  regular  order,  viz. 
Ps.  25  (p  omitted),  34,  37  (alternate  verses,  3?  omitted), 
111  (every  clause),  112  (every  clause),  119  (each  letter 
eight  times),  145  (D  omitted).  Pro  v.  31 :  10 — 31,  Lam. 
ch.  1,  2,  3  (each  letter  three  times),4.  In  the  first  chapter 
of  Lamentations  the  order  is  exactly  preserved,  but  in 
the  remaining  three  chapters  V  and  S  are  transposed. 
2.  By  the  correspondence  of  the  Greek  and  Roman 
alphabets,  which  have  sprung  from  the  same  origin  with 
the  Hebrew. 

a.  The  most  ingenious  attempt  to  discover  a  regular  structure  in  the 
Hebrew  alphabet  is  that  of  Lepsius,  in  an  essay  upon  this  subject  published 
in  1836.  Omitting  the  sibilants  and  Resh,  he  finds  the  following  ti'iple 
correspondence  of  a  breathing  succeeded  by  the  same  three  mutes  carried 
through  each  of  the  three  orders,  the  second  rank  being  enlarged  by  the 
additiou  of  the  liquids. 


§7 


LETTERS. 


Breathings. 

Mutes. 

Liquids. 

Middle 

Smooth 

Rough 

n 

1  n  l2 
s  p  n 

C=) 

h  a  3 

Curious  as  this  result  certainly  is,  it  must  be  confessed  that  the  alleged 
correspondence  is  in  part  imaginary,  and  the  method  by  which  it  is  reached 
is  too  arbitrary  to  warrant  the  conclusion  that  this  scheme  was  really  in 
the  mind  of  the  author  of  the  alphabet,  much  less  to  sustain  the  further 
speculations  built  upon  it,  reducing  the  original  number  and  modifying  the 
powers  of  the  letters. 

b.  It  is  curious  to  see  how,  in  the  adaptation  of  the  alphabet  to  different 
languages,  the  sounds  of  the  letters  have  been  moditied,  needless  ones 
dropped,  and  others  found  necessary  added  at  the  end,  without  disturbing 
the  arrangement  of  the  original  stock.  Thus  the  Greeks  dropped  1  and  p, 
only  retaining  them  as  numerical  signs,  while  the  Roman  alphabet  has  F 
and  Q;  on  the  other  hand  the  Romans  found  D  and  0  superfluous,  while 
the  Greeks  made  of  them  6  and  ^;  A  and  T,  in  Greek  y  and  C,  become  in 
Latin  C  and  G,  while  M,  in  Latin  H,  is  in  Greek  converted  like  the  rest  of 
the  gutturals  into  a  vowel  •7. 

§  7.  The  letters  may  be  variously  divided: 
1.  First,  with  respect  to  the  organs  by  which  they  are 
pronounced. 


Gutturals 

i< 

n 

n 

:? 

Palatals 

: 

1 

s 

P 

Linguals 

1 

ti 

b 

D 

Dentals 

T 

D 

22 

12: 

Labials 

n 

1 

•n 

S} 

^  has  been  differently  classed,  but  as  its  pecuharities 
are  those  of  the  gutturals  (n^D'^'^Si  fiiti)  it  is  usually 
reckoned  with  them. 

2.  Secondly,  according  to  their  respective  strength, 
into  three  classes,  which  may  be  denominated  weak, 
medium,  and  strong.  The  strong  consonants  offer  the 
greatest  resistance  to  change,  and  are  capable  of  entering 
into  any  combinations  which  the  formation  or  inflection 
of  words  may  require.  The  weak  have  not  this  capacity, 


10  OETHOGRAPHT.  §  7 

but  when  analogy  would  bring  them  into  combinations 
foreign  to  their  nature,  they  are  either  hable  to  mutation 
themselves  or  occasion  changes  in  the  rest  of  the  word. 
Those  of  medium  strength  have  neither  the  absolute 
stability  of  the  former  nor  the  feeble  and  fluctuating 
character  of  the  latter. 

rrrr    ■,        j  i<  tl  ^   ^     Yowel-Lctters, 
^®^^'       U5  n  n  y     Gutturals. 


Medium    J    ^  ^^    =  ^     Liquids, 
iViedmm,  ^    .  .  Sibilants. 


\    b  12    2   ^ 
I    T   D  2  123 


(13  ] 

Strong,     <    J  ID  p     \  Aspirates  and  Mutes. 
[  1  n  a     J 

The  special  characteristics  of  these  several  classes  and 
the  influence  wliich  they  exert  upon  the  constitution  of 
words  will  be  considered  hereafter.  It  is  sufficient  to  re- 
mark here  that  vowel-letters  are  so  called  because  they 
sometimes  represent  not  consonant  but  vowel-sounds. 

a.  It  will  be  observed  that  while  the  p,  k,  and  i-mutes  agree  iu  having 
smooth  S  3  n  and  middle  forms  3  J  1,  which  may  be  either  aspirated  or 
unaspirated,  the  two  last  have  each  an  additional  representative  p  13  which 
is  lacking  to  the  first.  This,  coupled  with  the  fact  that  two  of  the  alpha- 
betic Psalms,  Ps.  25,  34,  repeat  S  as  the  initial  of  the  closing  verse,  has 
given  rise  to  the  conjecture  that  the  missing  p  mute  was  supplied  by  this 
letter,  having  a  double  sound  and  a  double  place  in  the  alphabet.  In  curi- 
ous coincidence  with  this  ingenious  but  unsustained  hypothesis,  the  Ethiopic 
has  an  additional  p,  as  the  Greek  alphabet  has  both  tt  and  (f>. 

3.  Tliirdly,  the  letters  may  be  divided,  with  respect 
to  their  function  in  the  formation  of  words,  into  radicals 
(ni^TCn-^  ni^niii)  and  serviles  (izj^iatsn  ni^ni5<).  The  former, 
which  comprise  just  one  half  of  the  alphabet,  are  never 
employed  except  in  the  roots  or  radical  portions  of  words. 
The  latter  may  also  enter  into  the  constitution  of  roots, 
but  they  are  likewise  put  to  the  less  independent  use  of 
the  formation  of  derivatives  and  inflections,  of  prefixes 
and  suffixes.  The  serviles  are  embraced  in  the  memorial 


§  8  LETTEES.  11 

words  ib^'!  niS/^  ir^2!^  (Ethan  Moses  and  Caleb);  of  these, 
besides  other  uses,  ■p'^lj^  are  prefixed  to  form  the  future 
of  verbs,  and  the  remainder  are  prefixed  as  particles  to 
nouns.  The  letters  TTID'-Zi^n  are  used  in  the  formation  of 
nouns  from  their  roots.  The  only  exception  to  the  division 
now  stated  is  the  substitution  of  t2  for  servile  ri  in  a 
certain  class  of  cases,  as  explained  §  54.  4. 

a.  Kimchi  in  his  Mikhlol  (^'i^3'2)  fol.  46,  gives  several  additional  ana- 
grams of  the  serviles  made  out  by  different  grammarians  as  aids  to  the 
memory,  e.  g.  i^yo.  inaxb^TU  for  his  tvork  is  understanding ;  ti^bllJ  i3i^ 
anlD  I  Solomon  am  writing;  nsan  "jx  "I'slblU  only  build  thou  my  peace, 
'p^Dn  2X  biJi^ua  like  a  branch  of  the  father  of  multitude;  13'^bs  nna  nirna 
Moses  has  tvritten  to  us.  To  which  Ehas  Levita  added  nn33  inibx  Diy  the 
name  of  Elias  is  written;  and  Nordheimer  "^nns^  'lin  bxiu  consult  the  riches 
of  my  book. 

§  8.  In  Hebrew  writing  and  printing,  words  are  never 
divided.  Hence  various  expedients  are  resorted  to  upon 
occasion,  in  manuscripts  and  old  printed  editions,  to  fill 
out  the  lines,  such  as  giving  a  broad  form  to  certain 
letters,  st  rn  S  Q  m,  occupying  the  vacant  space  with 
some  letter,  as  p,  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  necessary, 
or  with  the  first  letters  of  the  next  word,  which  were 
not,  however,  accounted  part  of  the  text,  as  they  were 
left  without  vowels,  and  the  word  was  written  in  full  at 
the  beginning  of  the  following  fine.  The  same  end  is 
accomplished  more  neatly  in  modern  printing  by  judi- 
cious spacing. 

§  9.  1.  The  later  Jews  make  frequent  use  of  abbre- 
viations. There  are  none,  however,  in  the  text  of  the 
Hebrew  Bible;  those  which  are  found  in  the  margin  are 
explained  in  a  special  lexicon  at  the  back  of  the  editions 
in  most  common  use,  e.  g.  "1j1  for  *T/Tij)  et  comi3letio=Qtc. 

2.  The  numerical  employment  of  the  letters,  common 
to  the  Hebrews  with  the  Grreeks,  is  indicated  in  the  table 
of  the  alphabet.  The  hundreds  from  500  to  900  are  re- 
presented either  by  the  five  final  letters  or  by  the  combin- 


12  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §  10 

ation  of  Pi  with  the  letters  immediately  preceding;  thus 
"]  or  pn  500,  D  or  nn  600,  ]  ^r\  or  pin  700,  ^  or  T\r\  800, 
Y  or  prn  900.  Thousands  are  represented  by  units  with 
two  dots  placed  over  them,  thus  i<  1000,  etc.  Compound 
numbers  are  formed  by  joining  the  appropriate  units  to 
the  tens  and  hundreds,  thus  SSri  421.  Fifteen  is,  how- 
ever, made  not  by  IT',  which  are  the  initial  letters  of  the 
divine  name  Jehovah,  niri"',  but  by  It:  9  +  6. 

Tliis  use  of  the  letters  is  found  in  the  accessories  of 
the  Hebrew  text,  e.  g.  in  the  numeration  of  the  chapters 
and  verses,  and  in  the  Massoretic  notes,  but  not  in  the 
text  itself.  Whether  these  or  any  other  signs  of  number 
were  ever  employed  by  the  original  writers  of  Scripture, 
or  by  the  scribes  in  copjdng  it,  may  be  a  doubtful  matter. 
It  has  been  ingeniously  conjectured,  and  with  a  show  of 
plausibility,  that  some  of  the  discrepancies  of  numbers 
in  the  Old  Testament  may  be  accounted^  for  by  assuming 
the  existence  of  such  a  system  of  symbols,  in  which  errors 
might  more  easily  arise  than  in  fuUy  written  words. 

The  Vowels. 

§  10.  The  letters  now  explained  constitute  the  body 
of  the  Hebrew  text.  These  are  all  that  belonged  to  it  in 
its  original  form,  and  so  long  as  the  language  was  a  hv- 
ing  one  nothing  more  was  necessary,  for  the  reader  could 
mentally  supply  the  deficiencies  of  the  notation  from  his 
famiharity  with  his  native  tongue.  But  when  Hebrew 
ceased  to  be  spoken  the  case  was  different;  the  know- 
ledge of  the  true  pronunciation  could  no  longer  be  pre- 
sumed, and  difficulties  would  arise  from  the  ambiguity 
of  individual  words  and  their  doubtful  relation  to  one 
another.  It  is  the  design  of  the  Massoretic  points  (rrhlD'^ 
tradition)  to  remedy  or  obviate  these  inconveniences  by 
supplying  what  was  lacking  in  this  mode  of  writing.  The 


§  ir  VOWELS.  13 

authors  of  this  system  did  not  venture  to  make  any 
change  in  the  letters  of  the  sacred  text.  The  signs  which 
they  introduced  were  entirely  supplementary,  consisting 
of  dots  and  marks  about  the  text  fixing  its  true  pronun- 
ciation and  auxiliary  to  its  proper  interpretation.  This 
has  been  done  with  the  utmost  nicety  and  minuteness, 
and  with  such  evident  accuracy  and  care  as  to  make 
them  reliable  and  efficient  if  not  indispensable  helps. 
These  points  or  signs  are  of  three  kinds,  1.  those  repre- 
senting the  vowels,  2.  those  affecting  the  consonants, 
3.  those  attached  to  words. 

a.  As  illustrations  of  the  ambigiiity  both  as  to  sound  and  sense  of  indi- 
vidual words,  when  written  by  the  letters  only,  it  may  be  stated  that  im 
is  in  Gen.  12;  4  iz'n  he  spake,  in  Ex.  6:  29  is?  speak  and  ihn  speaking,  in 
Prov.  25:  11  "ii;n  spoken,  in  Gen.  37:  14  ih'n  ivord,  in  1  Kin.  6:  16  inn  the 
oracle  or  most  holy  place  of  the  temple,  in  Ex.  9:  3  'n^'n  pestilence.  So 
pl25i1  is  in  Gen.  29:  10  pipi^l  and  he  watered,  and  in  the  next  verse  pt"'';' 
and  he  kissed;  XS'^I  occurs  twice  in  Gen.  29:  23,  the  first  time  it  is  Xa^T  and 
he  brought,  the  second  xh^T  and  he  came;  d"'nairn'i  is  in  Jer.  32:  37  first 
tjinbiiir]!  and  I  will  bring  them  again,  and  then  d^'ria'jm  and  I  will  cause 
them  to  dn-ell;  Qit^'IJ  is  in  Gen.  14:  19  D";r:3  heaven,  and  in  Isa.  5:  20  C^b 
putting.  This  ambiguity  is,  however,  in  most  cases  removed  by  the  con- 
nection in  which  the  words  are  found,  so  that  there  is  little  practical  diffi- 
culty for  one  who  is  well  acquainted  with  the  language.  Modern  Hebrew 
is  commonly  written  and  read  without  the  points:  and  the  same  is  true  of 
its  kindred  tongues  the  Syriac  and  Arabic,  though  each  of  these  has  a 
system  of  points  additional  to  the  letters. 

§  11.  1.  The  alphabet,  as  has  been  seen,  consisted 
exclusively  of  consonants,  since  these  were  regarded  as 
a  sufficiently  exact  representation  of  the  syllables  into 
which  in  Hebrew  they  invariably  enter.  And  the  omission 
of  the  vowels  occasioned  less  embarrassment,  because  in 
the  Semitic  family  of  languages  generally,  unlike  the 
Indo-European,  they  form  no  part,  properly  speaking,  of 
the  radical  structure  of  the  word,  and  consequently  do 
not  aid  in  expressing  its  essential  meaning,  but  only  its 
nicer  shades  and  modifications.  Still  some  notation  of 
vowels  was  always  necessary,  and  this  was  furnished  in 


14  OBTHOGRAPHY.  '§11 

a  scanty  measure  by  the  vowel-letters,  or,  as  they  are 
also  called,  quiescents,  or  niatres  ledionis  (guides  in  read- 
ing). The  weakest  of  the  palatals  "^  was  taken  as  the  re- 
presentative of  the  vowels  I  and  e  of  the  same  organ  to 
which  in  sound  it  bears  a  close  affinity;  the  weakest  of 
the  labials  1  was  in  hke  mamier  made  to  represent  its 
cognates  ii  and  o;  and  the  two  weak  gutturals  5<  and  H 
were  written  for  the  guttural  vowel  a,  as  well  as  for  the 
compound  vowels  e  and  o  of  which  a  is  one  of  the  ele- 
ments. Letters  were  more  rarely  employed  to  represent 
short  vowels;  m  or  "^  for  e  is  the  most  frequent  case; 
others  are  exceptional. 

fl.  Medial  a  when  written  at  all,  as  it  very  rarely  is,  is  denoted  by  X, 
e.  g.  -JwSb  Idt.  Judg.  4:  21,  SX"!  dag  Neh.  13:  16  K'thibh,  CXp  A-om  Hos.  10: 14, 
\^^»^^J  "zdzel  Lev.  16:  8,  \yN"i  rash  Prov.  10:  4  and  in  a  few  other  passages, 
max"!  sometimes  for  rdmoth,  "iNi:J  tsavvdr,  "jXDXriX  Hos.  4:  6  if  not  an 
error  in  the  text  perhaps  for  enidfdk;  final  d  which  is  much  more  frequently 
written,  is  denoted  by  n,  e.  g.  ri^5  gdld,  nsbo  malkd,  nnx  attd,  rarely  and 
only  as  an  Aramseism  by  X,  e.g.  NSn  hhoggd  Isa.  19:  17,  xnip  korhhd  Ezek. 
27:  31  K'lhibh,  xnnn  gdbh'hd  Ezek.  31:  5  K'thibh.  The  writing  of  e  and  7, 
0  and  a  is  optional  in  the  middle  of  words  but  necessary  at  the  end,  e.  g. 
nn"''i:i  or  ninii:!  tsivvltJdm,  in"^"!:!  tsiwUhl;  i3'j  or  iina:  shubbu.  In  the 
former  position  '^  stands  for  the  first  pair  of  vowels,  and  1  for  the  second, 
e.  g.  np"'D"''a  menikoth,  '^nJIGS  n'siighothl;  X  for  e  and  o  so  situated  is  rare 
and  exceptional,  e.  g.  ITXn  resh  Prov.  6:  11,  30:  S,  and  perhaps  ■j-X3"'  ydnets 
Eccles.  12:  5;  nXT  zoth,  nx"ia  poroth  Ezek.  31:  8,  inxs2  bitstsothdv  Ezek. 
47:  11.  At  the  end  of  words  e  is  commonly  expressed  by  ">,  and  5  by  1, 
though  n  is  frequently  and  X  rarely  employed  for  the  same  purpose,  e.  g. 
i^bo  malkhe,  i3b"2  malkd;  IT^n  h^ge,  runs  j^aro;  xb  15.  Final  e  is  represented 
bj'  ti,  medial  e  by  ^,  though  this  is  only  written  in  a  few  particular  forms, 
e.  g.  n'''n'^  yih'ye,  •^31^■^n  or  nmn  tili'yend;  t:^pxb?3  millethem  Ezek.  11:  6, 
if  not  a  textual  error,  is  at  least  quite  unusual. 

h.  The  employment  of  the  vowel-letters  in  conformity  with  the  scale 
just  given,  is  further  governed,  (1.)  By  usage,  which  is  in  many  words  and 
forms  almost  or  quite  invariable;  in  others  it  fluctuates,  tlius  sohhebh  is 
commonly  2^0  or  331D,  only  once  ll^-O  2  Kin.  8:  21;  yaHohh  is  np^i  ex- 
cept in  Jer.  33:  26  where  it  is  Sp""";  (hense  is  ii'CVr^,  but  in  Ex.  25:  31 
niUjJ'^n;  etiidm  according  to  the  analogy  of  similar  grammatical  forms  would 
be  Unx,  but  in  Ps.  19:  14  it  is  Drr^X;  hemlr  is  in  Jer.  2:  11  written  in  both 
the  usual  and  an  unusual  way,  "i"'^n  and  -I'^-a'^ln;  mUdkhim  is  D^sb^S  except 
in  2  Sam.  11:  1,  where  it  is  D^DX^-a;  g'bhiildth  is  in  Deut.  32:  8  n^23,  in 
Isa.  10:  13  nbiaj,  in  Ps.  74:  17  niP'Si;   Id  meaning  not  is  xls,    meaning  to 


§  12  VOWELS.  15 

him  is  1^,  though  these  are   occasionally  interchanged ;  zo  is  written  hoth 

iiT  and  n;  and  po  ns,  IS  and  NS.  (2.)  The  indisposition  to  multiply  the 
vowel-letters  unduly  in  the  same  word,  e.  g.  Ho'^h  mbx,  Holiim  Din^X; 
ndthun  '|in3,  n'tJmmm  D'^DriD  or  D3in3.  (3.)  The  increased  tendency  to  their 
employment  in  the  later  books  of  the  Bible,  e.  g.  HID  ko^hh  Dan.  11 :  6, 
always  elsewhere  MD;  TUTip  kodhesh  Dan.  11:  30,  for  U5"ip;  1^"n  ddvldh  in 
the  books  of  Chronicles  Ezra,  Nehemiah  and  Zechariah,  elsewhere  com- 
monly ll'i.  This  must,  however,  be  taken  with  considerable  abatement, 
as  is  shown  by  such  examples  as  addlrim  Clinx  Ex.  15:  10,  ^"nx  Ezek. 
32:  18. 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  those  cases  in  which  >t  is  used  to  record 
vowels  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  those  in  which  it  properly  be- 
longs to  the  consonantal  structure  of  the  word,  though  from  its  weakness 
it  may  have  lost  its  sound,  as  X::o  mdtsd,  IICNI  rlshon,  §  57,  2. 

^  2.  When  used  to  represent  the  Hebrew  vowels,  a  is 
sounded  as  in  father,  a  as  in  fat,  e  as  in  there,  e  as  in 
met,  i  as  m  machine,  i  as  in  ])in,  o  as  in  note,  o  as  m  not, 
u  as  in  rule,  and  ii  as  in  full.  The  quantity  will  be  marked 
when  the  vowels  are  long,  but  not  when  they  are  short. 
§  12.  There  are  nine  points  or  massoretic  signs  re- 
presenting vowels  (nii?^Dri  motions,  viz.,  by  wliich  con- 
sonants are  moved  or  pronounced);  of  these  three  are 
long,  three  short,  and  three  doubtful.  They  are  show^n 
in  the  following  table,  the  horizontal  stroke  indicating 
their  position  with  reference  to  the  letters  of  the  text. 

Long  Vowels.  Short  Vowels. 

^22]^  Kamets     a  —  nns  Pattahh                  a  -^ 

^::±  Tsere         e  ^  bi:*D  Seghol                    e  — 

Dbin  Hholem    b  —  t^tr]  y-Jib  Kamets  Hhattiph  o  — 

Doubtful  Vowels. 

p*i^n  HMrik        -^       lort 

p^^iz:  Shurek     — -  ) 

ynjb  Kibbuts    —   J 

All  these  vowel-points  are  written  under  the  letter 
after  wliich  they  are  pronounced  except  two,  viz.,  Hholem 


16  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  12 

and  Shiirek.  Hliolem  is  placed  over  the  left  edge  of  the 
letter  to  which  it  belongs,  and  is  thus  distinguished  from 
the  accent  R'bhi*,  which  is  a  dot  over  its  centre.  When 
followed  by  T2J  or  preceded  by  '"u:  it  coincides  with  the  dia- 
critical point  over  the  letter,  e.  g.  Hir"^  rnoshe,  iJiil^  sone; 
when  it  follows  IT  or  precedes  ifl  it  is  written  over  its 
opposite  ann,  e.  g.  ID'J:  shum'er,  TTS'iri  tirjjos.  Its  presence 
in  these  cases  must  accordingly  be  determined  by  the 
circumstances.  Since  a  vowel-sign  (or  Sh'va  §  16)  is 
regularly  written  with  every  initial  or  medial  consonant, 
IT  must  be  ash  and  123'  os,  whenever  it  is  preceded  by  a^ 
consonant  without  a  vowel-sign;  if  it  have  itself  no 
vowel-sign,  is  will  be  so  and  T23'  sho,  except  at  the  end  of 
words.  If  Shin  be  preceded  by  a  letter  w^hich  itself  repre- 
sents a  vowel  the  point  over  its  right  arm  will  not  be 
Hholem,  e.  g.  W"^  'isli  not  iybsh,  D^'ijji'n  rdshlm,  "p'ii""! 
r'lshdn,  but  iru^ni  Vosh  where  N  is  a  consonant.  Shurek  is 
a  dot  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter  Yav,  thus  ^.  It  will  be 
observed  that  there  is  a  double  notation  of  the  vowel  ti. 
When  there  is  a  1  in  the  text  this  vowel,  whether  long 
or  short,  is  indicated  by  a  single  dot  within  it,  and  called 
Shurek;  in  the  absence  of  1  it  is  indicated  by  three  dots 
placed  obliquely  beneath  the  letter  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  called  Kibbuts. 

a.  The  division  of  the  vowels  given  above  differs  from  the  common 
one  into  five  long  and  five  short,  according  to  which  Hhirik  is  counted  as 
two,  viz.,  Hhirik  magnum  '^.  =  i,  and  Hhirik  parvum  —^=t;  and  Shurek 
is  reckoned  a  distinct  vowel  from  Kibbuts,  the  former  being  u  and  the  latter 
■ii.  To  this  there  are  two  objections,  (1.)  It  confuses  the  massoretic  signs 
with  the  letters  of  the  text,  as  though  they  were  coeval  with  them  and 
formed  part  of  the  same  primitive  mode  of  writing,  instead  of  being  quite 
distinct  in  origin  and  character.  The  massoretic  vowel-sign  is  not  "'.  but 
-7  .  The  punctuators  never  introduced  the  letter  "^  into  the  text;  they  found 
it  already  written  precisely  where  it  is  at  present,  and  all  that  they  did 
was  to  add  the  point.  And  instead  of  using  two  signs  for  i,  as  they  had 
done  in  the  case  of  a,  e,  and  0,  they  used  but  one,  viz.,  a  dot  beneath  the 
letter,  whether  i  was  long  or  short.  The  confusion  of  things  thus  separate 
in  their  nature  was  pardonable  at  a  time  when  the  points  were  supposed 


§  13  VOWELS.  17 

to  be  an  original  constituent  of  the  sacred  text,  but  not  now  when  their 
more  recent  origan  is  universally  admitted.  (2.)  It  is  inaccurate.  The 
distinction  between  ^.  and  — ,  i\  and  — ,  is  not  one  of  quantity,  for  i  and 
u  are  expressed  indiffeiently  with  or  without  Todh  and  Vav. 

Gesenius,  in  his  LehrgebJiude,  while  he  retains  the  division  of  the  vowels 
into  five  long  and  five  short,  admits  that  it  is  erroneous  and  calculated  to 
mislead;  and  it  has  been  discarded  in  the  latest  editions  of  his  smaller 
grammar.  That  which  was  proposed  by  Gesenius,  however,  as  a  substitute, 
is  perplexed  and  obscure,  and  for  this  reason,  if  there  were  no  others,  is 
unfitted  for  the  wants  of  pupils  in  the  early  stage  of  their  progress.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  triple  arrangement  here  adopted  after  the  example  cf 
Ewald,  has  the  recommendation  not  only  of  clearness  and  correctness,  but  of 
being,  instead  of  an  innovation,  a  return  to  old  opinions.  The  scheme  uf 
five  long  and  five  short  vowels  originated  with  Moses  and  David  Kimchi, 
who  were  led  to  it  by  a  comparison  of  the  Latin  and  its  derivatives.  From 
them  it  was  adopted  by  Reuchlin  in  his  Rudimenta  Hebraica,  and  thus 
became  current  among  Christians.  The  Jewish  grammarians,  before  the 
Kimchis,  however,  reckoned  Kibbuts  and  Shurek  as  one  vowel,  Hhirik  as 
one,  and  even  Karaets  and  Kamets  Hhatuph  as  one  on  account  of  the 
identity  of  the  symbol  employed  to  represent  them.  They  thus  made  out 
seven  vowels,  the  same  number  as  in  Greek,  where  the  distinction  into  long, 
short  and  doubtful  also  prevails. 

b.  The  names  of  the  vowels,  with  the  exception  of  Kamets-Hhatuph, 
contain  the  sounds  of  the  vowels  which  they  are  intended  to  represent, 
Kibbuts  in  the  last,  the  others  in  their  first  syllable.  Their  signification 
is  indicative  either  of  the  figure  of  the  vowel  or  the  mode  of  pronouncing 
it.  Kamets  and  Kibbuts,  cnrdraction,  i.  e.  of  the  mouth;  Pattahh,  opening; 
Tsere,  hurxting  forth;  Seghol,  cluster  of  grapes;  Hhirik,  gnashing;  Hholem', 
strength;  Kamets-Hhatuph,  hurried  Kamets;  Shurek,  rvhistling.  It  is  a 
curious  circumstance  that  notwithstanding  the  diversity  of  the  vowel- 
systems  in  the  Syriac,  Arabic,  and  Hebrew,  the  name  Pattahh  is  common 
to  them  all. 

§  13.  This  later  and  more  complete  method  of  noting 
the  vowels  does  not  displace  but  is  superinduced  upon 
the  scanty  one  previously  described.  Hence  it  comes  to 
pass  that  such  vowels  as  were  indicated  by  letters  in  the 
first  instance  are  now  doubly  written,  i.  e.  both  by  letters 
and  points.  By  this  combination  each  of  the  two  methods 
serves  to  illustrate  and  explain  the  other.  Thus  the  added 
signs  determine  whether  the  letters  ^IHN  (which  have 
been  formed  into  the  technical  word  ^T\)^_Eh'm)  are  in  any 
given  case  to  be  regarded  as  vowels  or  as  consonants.  If 
these  letters  are  themselves  followed  by  a  vowel  or  a 


18  OETHOGRAPHY.  §   14 

Sh'va,  §  16,  or  have  a  Daghesh-forte,  §  23,  they  retain 
theh^  consonant  sound;  for  two  vowels  never  come 
together  in  Hebrew,  and  Sh'va  and  Daghesh-forte  belong 
only  to  consonants:  thus  ^Ti'Vp  kovekd,  "|i^  twdn,  riili?-? 
mitsvbth  (where  22  being  provided  with  a  separate  point, 
the  Hholem  must  belong  after  l),  ri1">  edh'voth,  T'Cty] 
vliuyd,  Di'p  kiyyam.  Otherwise  they  quiesce  in  a  preced- 
ing or  accompanying  vowel-sign,  that  is  to  say,  they  have 
the  sound  indicated  by  it,  the  vowel-sign  merely  inter- 
preting what  was  originally  denoted  by  the  letter.  At 
the  end  of  words,  where  Sh'va  and  Daghesh-forte  are 
rarely  written,  "'  is  a  vowel-letter  if  pi-eceded  by  the  sign 
for  either  of  its  homogeneous  vowels  e  or  «,  and  1  if  ac- 
companied by  the  sign  for  o  or  u;  otherwise  they  are 
consonants,  thus  "21  In,  "2  me,  Ji""^  ge,  is  ho,  ^b  lu,  but  ""lia 
sdray,  ^\^  gay,  '''^'^  gciluy,  ^7\tdv,  i^X  sh'diiv,  y[  sw;  the 
combination  V^  is  pronounced  dv,  vi^  and  lil/  dndv,  Vrc 
and  irp  sHhdv.  In  consequence  of  its  extreme  weakness, 
U5  not  only  quiesces  when  it  is  properly  a  vowel-letter, 
but  may  give  up  its  consonant  character  after  any  vowel 
whatever,  e.  g.  !J<l:st:  t'tt'.'.,  "pcN"^  rlslion,  r.'Si^E  purd;  final 
^5  is  always  either  quiescent  or  otiant,  §16.1;  H  is  never 
used  as  a  vowel-letter  except  at  the  end  of  words,  and 
there  it  always  quiesces  unless  it  receives  a  Mappik,  §  26. 

a.  As  a  letter  was  scarcely  ever  used  to  express  o,  the  quiescence  of  1 
in  Kamets-Hliatuph  is  very  rare,  and  wliere  it  does  occur  the  margin  al- 
ways substitutes  a  reading  without  the  1,  e.  g.  i^^^l^"^  Jer.  27:  20,  D'^inm 
E/.ek.  27:  15,  "I'ii:""''!'^'^^  Ps.  30:  4,  'iVmrG";  Isa.  44:  17,  "blzls  Jer.  33:  8, 
nx-'-Ti;!l  Nah.  1:3.  In  ni'DiS  2  Chron.  8:  18,  and  T-'i^i  Deut.  32:  13,  1  rep- 
resents or  quiesces  in  the  still  briefer  0  of  Hhateph-Kamets,  §  16.  3. 

b.  In  a  few  proper  names  medial  n  quiesces  at  the  end  of  the  first 
member  of  the  compound,  e.  g.  "n^lklTiS  Num.  1:  10,  ^xni?;  2  Sam.  2:  19, 
also  written  bx-nrs  l  Chron.  2:  16.  In  such  words  as  nndi:  Jer.  22:  6, 
firE"^"  Deut.  21:  7,  T^  does  not  quiesce  in  Kibbuts,  for  the  points  belong  to 
the  marginal  readings  I3"ri3,  irSD  §  46. 

§  14.  On  the  other  hand  the  vowel-letters  shed  light 
upon  the  stability  of  the  vowels  and  the  quantity  of  the 


§  15,  16  VOWELS.  19 

doubtful  signs.  1.  As  ^  was  scarcely  ever  and  it  seldom 
represented  by  a  vowel-letter,  Hliirik  with  Yodli  (\)  is 
almost  invariably  long  and  Shurek  (^)  commonly  so. 
2.  The  occasional  absence  in  individual  cases  of  the  vowel- 
letters,  does  not  determine  the  quantity  of  the  signs  for 
i  and  u;  but  their  uniform  absence  in  any  particular 
words  or  forms  makes  it  almost  certain  that  the  vowel 
is  short.  3.  The  occasional  presence  of  1  and  "^  to  repre- 
sent one  of  their  homogeneous  long  vowels  proves  no- 
thing as  to  its  character;  but  if  in  any  word  or  form  these 
letters  are  regularly  written,  the  vowel  is,  as  a  general 
rule,  immutable.  When  1  and  ^  stand  for  their  long 
homogeneous  vowels,  these  latter  are  said  to  be  written 
fully,  e.  g.  bip  kol,  n-D  7iir,  n^"J  miWi;  ^^ithout  these  quies- 
cent letters  they  are  said  to  be  written  defectively,  e.  g. 
^nrpri  h''k'imdt1u,  C!i3  kdmus. 

^  a.  Hhirik  with  Yodli  is  short  in  1'^n-2ni  vah^'mitnv  1  Sam.  17:  35, 
'^S^'rf^'^T^bihk'rdthehha  Ps.45:  10,  TriH'^b  likk'hath  Vvov. 30 -.17,  ^'is^b  lissodh 
2  Chron.  31:  7.  In  S^p-^S  1  Chron.  12:'l,  20,  i  is  prohably  long,  although 
the  word  is  always  elsewhere  written  without  the  Yodh;  as  it  sometimes 
has  a  secondary  accent  on  the  first  syllable  and  sometimes  not  (see  1  Sam. 
30:  1),  it  may  have  had  a  twofold  pronunciation  tslk'Iaff,  and  isiklag. 
Shurek  as  u  is  of  much  more  frequent  occurrence,  e.  g.  "^jsJin  hhukke  d"i:ixb 
Vummim,  ^Isi  yulladh,  t^'^z^'n  hhukkd  Ps.  102:5,  Q'^r^i^bN  2  Chron.  2:  7,  nhi 
Ezek.  16:  34.  ^  '     '' '  .'     '    '     - 

§  15.  The  vowels  may  be  further  distinguished  into 
pure,  a,  i,  u,  and  diphthongal,  e,  o;  e  being  a  combination 
of  a  and  i,  or  intermediate  between  them,  and  o  holding 
the  same  relation  to  a  and  u. 


ShVa. 

§  16.  1.  The  absence  of  a  vowel  is  indicated  by  — 
Sh'va  (i^lir  emptiness,  or  as  written  by  Chayug,  the  oldest 
of  Jewish  grammarians,  NITT),  which  serves  to  assure  the 
reader  that  one  has  not  been  inadvertently  omitted.    It 

2* 


20  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  16 

is  accordingly  placed  under  all  vowelless  consonants  ex- 
cept at  the  end  of  words,  where  it  is  regarded  as  un- 
necessary, the  absence  of  a  vowel  being  there  a  matter 
of  course.  If,  however,  the  last  letter  of  a  word  be  *],  or 
if  it  be  immediately  preceded  by  another  vowelless  letter, 
or  be  doubled  by  the  point  called  Daghesh-forte,  §  23, 
ShVa  is  written  to  preclude  the  doubt  which  is  possible 
in  these  cases,  e.  g.  QD^^TT-J,  T]3b-2,  t2"i^p,  n-;i25J,  TJ?,  TDD. 
Sh'va  is  not  given  to  a  quiescent  letter,  since  it  repre- 
sents not  a  consonant  but  a  vowel,  e.  g.  rij^^rn,  nor  as  a 
general  rule  to  a  final  consonant  preceded  by  a  quiescent; 
thus  Vii^brj,  ir^h'^  Ruth  3:4;  ti-'^ri)  Isa.  62:  3,  though  in 
this  case  it  is  sometimes  written,  e.  g.  ri*ili^  2  Sam.  14:  3; 
n^:-']  2  Sam.  14:  2;  T\''yr\  Judg.  13:' 3;  n^iiin  1  Kin. 
17:13.  !«  at  the  end  of  a  word,  preceded  either  by  a 
vowelless  letter  or  a  quiescent,  is  termed  otiant,  and  is 
left  unpointed,  e.  g.  U<pn,  U^I'lll,  5^'^iii'],  MH;  so  hkewise  in 
the  middle  of  a  word,  when  followed  by  a  vowel-letter 
and  preceded  by  a  consonant  to  which  it  has  surrendered 
this  vowel,  its  own  consonant  character  being  lost,  §  57, 
2  (3),  e.  g.  ^>^n';  y'ril  Josh.  24: 14,  blJ^^JT  s'mol  Num.  20: 17, 
■jiia^^n  r'lshon  Job  15:  7,  n:\Hii3n  tissena  Ezek.  23:  49. 

a.  Final  ~  nia}*  receive  Sh'va  for  the  sake  of  distinction  not  only  from 
?],  as  already  suggested,  but  also  from  1  with  Avhich  it  might  be  in  danger 
of  being  confounded  in  manuscripts;  Freytag  conjectures  that  it  is  prop- 
erly a  part  of  the  letter,  like  the  stroke  in  the  corresponding  final  ^  in 
Arabic.  In  such  forms  as  1"^^?^  Sh'va  is  omitted  with  the  closing  letters 
because  the  "^  is  not  sounded. 

2.  Sh'va  may  be  either  silent  (nD  quiescens),  or  vocal 
(53  mobile).  At  the  close  of  syllables  it  is  silent.  But  at 
the  beginning  of  a  syllable  the  Hebrews  always  facilitated 
the  pronunciation  of  concurrent  consonants  by  the  in- 
troduction of  a  hiatus  or  slight  breathing  between  them; 
a  Sh'va  so  situated  is  consequently  said  to  be  vocal,  and 
has  a  sound  approaching  that  of  a  hastily  uttered  e,  as 


§16  VOWELS.  21 

in  given.  This  will  be  represented  by  an  apostrophe,  thus, 
'13'1':?S  Vmidlibar,  DnipB  jfJcadJitem. 

a.  According  to  Kimchi  (Mikhlol  fol.  189)  Sh'va  was  pronounced  in 
three  different  ways,  according  to  circumstances.  (1.)  Before  a  guttural 
it  inclined  to  the  sound  of  the  following  vowel,  e.  g.  "ISX";  y'^abbedh,  rxb 
s^efh,  >l2;'n  d^il,  and  if  accompanied  by  Methegh,  §  44,  it  had  the  full  sound 
of  that  vowel,  e.  g.  ixb  suii,  "^nn  tihhi,  ciii"?  looldm.  (2.)  Before  Yodh 
it  inclined  to  i,  e.  g.  2p?!3  h^ya^kobh,  Drs  k'ydm,  and  with  Methegh  was 
sounded  as  Hhirik,  e.  g.  "i'^Ti  hiyadh.  (3.)  Before  any  other  letter  it  inclined 
to  a,  e.  g.  ri3i3  b"'rdl<hd,  tt-^'i>'bl  g^llllm,  and  with  Methegh  was  pi-onounced 
as  Pattahh  e.  g.  nfinppa  bamakheloth. 

3.  Sh'va  may,  again,  be  simple  or  compound.  Some- 
times, particularly  when  the  first  consonant  is  a  guttural, 
which  from  its  weakness  is  in  danger  of  not  being  dis- 
tinctly heard,  the  hiatus  becomes  still  more  audible,  and 
is  assimilated  in  sound  to  the  short  guttural  vowel  a,  or 
the  diphthongal  e  or  o ,  into  which  it  enters.  This  assi- 
milation is  represented  by  combining  the  sign  for  Sh'va 
with  those  for  the  short  vowels,  thus  forming  what  are 
called  the  compound  Sh'vas  in  distinction  from  the  simple 
Sh'va  previously  explained. 
These  are, 

Hhateph-Pattahh  ^7;     thus,  'lia?  "modh. 

Hhateph-Seghol     -7^;     thus,  "i'D^^  ^mor. 

Hhateph-Kamets  — ;     thus,    ''b'^.  JihH'i. 

a.  Hhateph  ("wtl  snatching)  denotes  the  rapidity  of  utterance  or  the 
hurried  character  of  the  sounds  represented  by  these  symbols. 

b.  The  compound  Sh'vas,  though  for  the  most  part  restricted  to  the 
giTtturalp,  are  occasionally  written  under  other  consonants  in  place  of  simple 
Sh'va,  to  indicate  more  distinctly  that  it  is  vocal.  Luzzatto  specifies  the 
following  cases:  Hhateph  Pattahh  is  found  under  the  first  of  two  similar 
letter-',  e.g.  ri'ibl'i  Num.  10:  36,  or  a  letter  from  which  Daghesh-forte  has 
been  omitted  !^=";?!^  Gen.  27:38,  after  initial  1,  ^h^  Gen.  2:  12,  i-^'iji  Dan. 
9:  18,  f^7^1  Lev.  25:  34,  "^tpnn^  Ezek.  26:  21,  after  a  vowel  which  has 
arisen  from  Sh'va  "^r^D,  and  in  certain  forms  of  bzX  to  eat  and  T)"?3  to  bless, 
e-  g-  -^^"nr^^  Gen.  3:  17,  "p?!!^'?  Gen.  12:  3.  Hhateph-Kamets  is  less  fre- 
quent, but  sometimes  occurs  where  Hholem  has  been  dropped  iS^pn  (from 
npn)  Num.  23:  25,  'inip.'ip  Job  2:  7,  fi-^bnpn  Ezek.  41:  4,  D"^^a':3  Gen.  41 :  5, 
te'^np^  Ps.  104:  17,  nsy^X  Isa.  27:3,  !^^iP!=^?  Jer.  31:33,  and  in  a  few  other 


22  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §   17,  18 

instances  "nr;;^'-  Gen.  2:  23,  ni:~r'X  Ruth  2:  2,  7,  f^T:"5^  1  Kin.  13:  7,  "^h'^^l. 
Hhatepli-Seghol  occurs  but  once  C"'i^^:i  2  Sam.  6:  6  (edition  of  Stephanus). 
Manuscripts  and  editions  differ  greatly  in  this  use  of  the  compound  Sh'vas; 
and  the  same  word  is  differently  written  in  the  current  text,  e.  g.  n-rea 
2  Kin.  2:  1,  'r\'^t'p^  ver.  11. 


Pattahh  Furtive. 

§  17.  A  similar  hiatus  or  slight  transition  sound  was 
used  at  the  end  of  words  in  connection  with  the  gutturals. 
When  y,  n,  or  the  consonantal  T\  at  the  end  of  words  is 
preceded  by  a  long  heterogeneous  vowel  (i.  e.  another 
than  a),  or  is  followed  by  another  vowelless  consonant,  it 
receives  a  Pattahh  furtive  —  ,  which  resembles  in  sound 
an  extremely  short  a,  and  is  pronounced  before  the  letter 
under  which  it  is  written,  e.  g.  tj^l  ru^Jih,  ^12':^  sMmo", 
»n^il"C  niaghb'i''/i,  ri>'^UJ  slidmaH,  "nrj";  yrlilid. 

a.  Some  grammarians  deny  that  Pattahh  furtive  (113a  stolen)  can  be 
found  under  a  penultimate  guttural,  contending  that  the  vowel-sign  is  in 
such  cases  a  proper  Pattahh,  and  that  ri^'t^^  should  accordingly  be  read 
shminat,  and  'nri"]  yihhad.  But  both  the  Sh'va  under  the  final  letter,  §  16, 
and  tlie  Daghesh-lene  in  it,  §  21,  show  that  the  guttural  is  not  followed  hy 
a  vowel.  The  sign  beneath  it  must  consequently  be  Pattahh  furtive,  and 
represent  an  antecedent  vowel-soiind.  In  some  manuscripts  Pattahh  furtive 
is  written  as  Hhateph-Pattahh,  or  even  as  simple  Sh'va;  thus,  ^"'^pl  or  S)^p"i 
for  S-ip^ 


Syllables. 

§  18.  1.  Syllables  are  formed  by  the  combination  of 
consonants  and  vowels.  As  two  vowels  never  come 
together  in  the  same  word  in  Hebrew  without  an  inter- 
vening consonant,  there  can  never  be  more  than  one 
vowel  in  the  same  syllable;  and  with  the  single  excejition 
of  ^  occurring  at  the  beginning  of  words,  no  syllable  ever 
consists  of  a  vowel  alone.  Every  syllable,  with  the  ex- 
ception just  stated,  must  begin  with  a  consonant,  and 
may  begin  with  two,  but  never  with  more  than  two. 
Syllables  ending  with  a  vowel,  whether  represented  by 


§   18  SYLLABLES.  23 

a  quiescent  letter  or  not,  are  called  simple,  e.  g.  ^rjb  Vkhd, 
'rbiv  o-ll.  (The  first  syllable  of  this  second  example 
begins,  it  will  be  perceived,  with  the  consonant  2?,  though 
this  disappears  in  the  notation  given  of  its  sound.)  Syl- 
lables endmg  with  a  consonant,  or,  as  is  possible  at  the 
close  of  a  word,  with  two  consonants,  are  said  to  be 
mixed:  thus  ^rc^lt  kcon-tem,  P^bn  hd-lakJit.  As  the  vocal 
ShVas,  whether  simple  or  compound,  are  not  vowels 
properly  speaking,  but  simply  involuntary  transition 
sounds,  they,  with  the  consonants  under  which  they 
stand,  cannot  form  distinct  syllables,  but  are  attached 
to  that  of  the  following  vowel.  Pattahh  furtive  in  like 
manner  belongs  to  the  syllable  formed  by  the  preceding- 
vowel.  Thus  ?i"»T  ^^ro",  "^^  °ni  are  monosyllables. 

2.  Long  vowels  always  stand  in  simple  syllables,  and 
short  vowels  in  mixed  syllables,  unless  they  be  accented. 
But  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  may 
contain  indifferently  a  long  or  a  short  vowel. 

a.  The  folluwiiig  may  serve  as  a  specinaen  of  the  division  of  Hebrew 
words  into  their  proper  syllables;    thus, 

n-iN         B^rj'^N      xna       era         cnx  n^Vipi  -isp       ni 

a-dhcim      *16-liim      b'ro      b'yoni       a-dLani        to-l'dhoth       se-pher      ze 
Gen.  5:  1.     irx      nr>      t3^ri3S        wi-ia 

o-tlio      a-sa      "^lo-him      bidh-milth 

b.  The  reason  of  the  rule  for  the  quantity  of  syllables  appears  to  be 
this.  In  consequence  of  their  brevity,  the  short  vowels  required  the  ad- 
dition of  a  following  consonant  to  make  the  utterance  full  and  complete, 
unless  the  want  of  this  was  compensated  by  the  greater  energy  of  pronun- 
ciation due  to  the  accent.  The  long  vowels  were  sufficiently  comi^lete 
without  any  such  addition,  though  thf^y  were  capable  of  receiving  it  under 
the  new  energy  imparted  by  the  accent.  This  pervading  regularitj',  which 
is  so  striking  a  feature  of  the  Hebrew  language,  was  the  foundation  of  the 
f^/stema  morarum  advocated  by  some  of  the  older  grammarians  of  Holland 
and  Germany.  The  idea  of  this  was,  that  each  syllable  was  equal  to  three 
niorae,  that  is,  three  rests,  or  a  bar  of  three  beats;  a  long  vowel  being 
equivalent  to  two  morae,  or  two  beats,  a  short  vowel  to  one,  and  the 
initial  or  final  consonant  or  consonants  also  to  one:  thns  pVipp  A;  (1)  + 
d  (2)  =  3,  t  (I)  -\-  a  (1)  +  /i  (1)  =  3.  An  accented  syllable  might  have  one 
mora  or  beat  either  more  or  less  than  the  normal  quantity.     This  system 


24  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §   19 

was  not  only  proposed  by  way  of  grammatical  explanation,  but  also  made 
the  basis  of  a  peculiar  theory  of  Hebrew  prosody.  See  Gesenius,  Geschichte 
d.  Heb.  Sprache.  p.  123. 

c.  The  cases  in  which  short  vowels  occur  in  unaccented  simple  sylla- 
bles, are  mostly  due  to  the  disturbing  influence  exerted  by  the  weak  letters 
upon  the  normal  forms  of  words;  thus,  Nr^;,  X-i:?,  tibfe,  nsfi,  n^p.  and  the 
like  are  formed  after  the  analogy  of  -'"C.  A  long  vowel  in  an  unaccented 
mixed  syllable  is  found  in  but  one  word,  and  that  of  foreign  origin, 
"ikx"r::32  lel-Vshafstsar,  though  here,  the  syllable  receives,  if  not  the 
primary,  yet  the  secondary  accent.  The  same  is  the  case  when  a  long 
vowel  is  retained  before  Makkeph,  e.  g.  ''V^'-lj;  ^u  also  in  the  proper  names 
!in'''Z^3,  fin^*3b'::,  in  which  the  first  member  of  the  compound  preserves  its 
segholate  form  as  though  it  were  a  separate  word.  In  the  Arabic,  which  is 
exceedingly  rich  in  vowels,  there  are  comparatively  few  mixed  syllables; 
nearly  every  consonant  has  its  own  vowel,  and  this  mol-e  frequently  short 
than  long.  The  Chaldee,  which  is  more  sparing  in  its  use  of  vowels  than 
the  Hebrew,  observes  in  general  the  same  rule  with  respect  to  the  quantity 
of  syllables,  though  not  with  the  same  inflexible  consistencj'. 

3.  When  the  consonant  which  concludes  one  syllable 
is  at  the  same  time  attached  to  that  which  follows,  the 
first  syllable  is  in  strictness  neither  simple  nor  mixed  but 
may  be  denominated  intermediate.  The  vowel  in  an 
intermediate  syllable  is  short  as  though  the  following 
consonant  belonged  to  it  entirely,  while  yet  tliis  is  like- 
wise hnked  to  a  succeeding  vowel  or  vocal  ShVa,  thus 
niiin  hhar'hhOth. 

a.  Such  syllables  are  often  occasioned  by  the  special  characteristics  of 
the  guttural  letters,  thus  T\bti  in  which  S  belongs  in  a  measure  to  both  sylla- 
bles is  for  n^rn,  Xinii  hahu  is  for  hah-hu,  §  23.  3.  a,  Snn'^  yah'^rdg  is  for 
avn  pah-rog,  izEtiD  neheph'khu  is'  for  ^b'lf}':  neh-p'khu.  See  also  §  20.  2 
and  §  22.  a. 

Ambiguous  Signs. 

§  19.  It  will  now  be  possible,  by  aid  of  the  principles 
already  recited,  to  determine  the  quantity  of  the  doubt- 
ful vowels,  and  to  remove  the  ambiguity  wliich  appears 
to  exist  in  certain  vowel-signs. 

1.  Hhirik,  Shurek,  and  Kibbuts,  in  unaccented  simple 
syllables,  must  be  long,  and  in  unaccented  mixed  syllables, 
short,  e.  g.  liT!  o^'  "^^l  yi-rash,  ^Z'21  yibh-nu,  ib^33  or  i^i^y 


§  19  AMBIGUOUS  SIGNS.  25 

g^bhu-lo,  "i|^  or  ^|^^  yul-ladh,  tfis  or  D*i^3  kul-lam,  ''k/($12 
or  "-H'^a  mauzzi.  In  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or 
mixed,  they  are  always  long,  e.  g.  DH^to  or  D^n"'''l2p  si-hhhn, 
"b  li,  biy  or  b*Gy  5f'&/i«?,  ^~'^"^'^.  or  •n^lr'^'n.  d'rd-shu-hu,  the 
only  exception  being  that  Hhirik  is  short  in  the  mono- 
syllabic particles  Di<,  ITS?,  0^,  yc,  in  l^l,  and  in  some  ab- 
breviated verbal  forms  of  the  class  called  Lamedh-He, 
e.  g.  T'^.^,  S'^r^_^,  l'n\  The  only  cases  of  remaining  doubt 
are  those  in  which  these  vowels  are  followed  by  a  letter 
with  Sh'va,  either  simple  or  compound.  If  the  former,  it 
might  be  a  question  whether  it  was  silent  or  vocal,  and 
consequently  whether  the  syllable  was  simple  or  mixed. 
If  the  latter,  though  the  syllable  is  of  course  simple,  the 
weak  letter  which  follows  may  interfere  with  the  operation 
of  the  law.  Here  the  etymology  must  decide. 

a.  The  vowel  is  long  or  short  as  the  grammatical  form  may  require; 
thus  in  ni^n;;,  "^nn,  iir-ns"i;;  Gen.  22:  8,  which  follow  the  analogy  of  Vtip"^, 
and  in  ^bza  Isa.  10:  34,  'ik'^p  the  first  vowel  is  short;  in  C)i;'bn:«,  ^ab"]  the 
first  vowel  is  long.  In  a  few  instances  the  grammatical  form  in  which 
Hhirik  is  employed  is  itself  doubtful;  the  distinction  is  then  made  by  means 
of  Methegh,  §  44,  which  is  added  to  the  vowel-sign  if  it  is  long,  but  not  if 
it  is  short;  thus,  ^IN^"^  yi-r''u,  from  xS'^  to  fear,  and  ^yj";  yi-sWnu  from  ylr^ 
to  sleep;  but  ik"!"^  yir-u  from  iix'^  to  see,  and  liTrJ";  yish-nu  from  n;o  to  do 
a  second  time. 

2.  Kamets  a  and  Kamets-Hhatuph  o  are  both  repre- 
sented by  the  same  sign  ( ^ ),  but  may  be  distinguished 
by  rules  similar  to  those  just  given.  In  an  unaccented 
simple  syllable  it  is  Kamets;  in  an  unaccented  mixed 
syllable  it  is  Kamets-Hhatuph;  in  an  accented  syllable, 
whether  simple  or  mixed  it  is  Kamets,  e.  g.  "D'n  dd-hhdr, 
^'OSn  hhoph-sM.  Before  a  letter  with  simple  Sh'va,  the 
distinction  is  mostly  made  by  Methegh,  §  44;  without 
Methegh  it  is  always  Kamets-Hhatuph,  with  it  commonly 
Kamets  e.  g.  ntssr;  JiJiokJi-md,  nb^n  liJid-kli^md.  Before  a 
guttui-al  with  Hhateph-Kamets  or  Kamets-Hhatuph  it 
is  frequently  o ,  though  standing  in  a  simple  syllable  and 


26  OETHOGRAPHT.  §19 

accompanied  by  Metliegli,  e.  g.  '"^."^  ho-liWrl,  tnZL'Jp 
to-ohJidJteui.  The  surest  criterion,  however,  and  in  many 
cases  the  only  decisive  one,  is  found  in  the  etymology. 
If  the  vowel  be  derived  from  Hholem,  or  the  gramma- 
tical form  requires  an  o  or  a  short  vowel,  it  is  Kaniets- 
Hhatujoh;  but  if  it  be  derived  from  Pattahh,  or  the  form 
requires  an  a  or  a  long  vowel,  it  is  Kamets. 

a.  Thus  n"'':xi  with  the  prefixed  conjunction  vo'^niyyoth,  ri*3xn  Avith 
the  article  lid^niyyd;  Tcr^  in  the  Hophal  yo^madh,  ^'n''^.ii.r'^  Isa.  44:  13  in 
the  Piel  y'thaP-rehu.  Tije  first  vowel  is  o  in  ti";^n^  from  '^^:k,  D-'inp?  from 
C-p,  ri''zi"j  from  ^na,  i|-ni?'rr  Isa.  38:  14,  "S-ni;;?  Num.  22:  11,  "^ii-nnx 
Num.  23:  7  and  the  like,  and  the  first  two  vowels  in  sUch  words  as  DD5"3 
from  \v'i,  cbtJX^  Isa.  30:  12  from  DXp,  cbn-ip^  Deut.  20  :  2,  t^T-^i?^  hos. 
13:  14,  "ibp^  2  Chron.  10:  10,  tDiJ-bnp^'  2  Kin, '^15:  10,  because  they  are 
shortened  from  Hholetn.  On  the  other  hand  the  first  vowel  is  a  in  inn,:: 
Job  16:  19  from  ipr,  t:"^i''nn  from  ^T^n,  "r^a  from  nis.  Tiie  word  Irnp'j 
is  in  Ps.  86:  2  the  imperative  shomrd,  in  Job  10:  12  the  preterite  ahdni'rd. 
The  medial  vowel  is  o  in  the  infiniiive  ^-i'^V  Obad.  ver.  11,  and  the  future 
?i'r;S';;  Gen.  32:  18,  but  a  in  the  preterite  r,;ri:  1  Sam.  24:  11.  The  best 
authorities  decide  that  t:"'ri3  should  be  pronounced  bdtttm,  not  buftlm,  as 
the  rule  would  seem  to  require. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  Kamets-Hhatuph  is  found  in  a  syllable 
bearing  a  conjunctive  accent,  viz.:  "Et^  Ps.  38:  21  (in  some  editions),  b'^ 
Ps.  35:  10,  Prov.  19:7,  and  in  tlie  judgment  of  Ewald  iro  Judg.  19:  5 
comp.  ver.  8,  and  ^'J  Ezek.  41:  25;  in  Dan.  11:  12  D^"i";  the  points  belong  to 
the  marginal  reading  DTl,  and  the  vowel  is  consequently  Kamets.  There 
are  also  a  few  cases  in  which  Kamets  remains  in  a  mixed  syllable,  deprived 
of  its  accent  by  Makkeph,  §  43,  without  receiving  Methegh,  viz.:  -nap  Ps. 
16:  5  (in  some  editions),  -D.'^]D  Ps.  65:  19.  22,  "np  Ps.  74:  5;  and  a  final 
unaccented  Kamets  is  not  affected  -by  the  insertion  of  Daghesli-forte  con- 
junctive, §  24,  in  the  initial  letter  of  the  following  word,  e.  g.  Ct'  nnj-c  Gen. 
31:  13.  When  an  accent  takes  the  place  of  Methegh,  it  serves  equally  to 
distinouish  a  from  o,  e.  g.  ^sr^JI.  Ex.  21:  22  v'ndgh'phii,  nnj^^l  Ex.  21:  35 
unidkli.\u,  §  45.  5. 

c.  Inasmuch  as  rnr;-:i  is  derived  from  ^frs  mdhlidr,  its  first  vowel  might 
be  suspected  to  be  o;  but  as  it  is  so  constantl3^  written  with  Hliateph- 
Kamets,  the  preceding  vowel  is  probably  conformed  to  it.  It  is  consequently 
regarded  and  pronounced  as  o.  Kimchi  (Mikhlol,  foL  188)  declares  that  the 
first  vowel  in  '{^-n  1  Sam.  13:  21,  niSh-^'n  Eccles.  12:  11  and  ^^]l  Num.  24:  7 
■was  universally  held  to  be  Kamets,  and  that  with  the  exception  of  Rabbi 
Jonah  ben  Gannach,  who  was  of  a  contrary  mind,  the  same  unanimity 
prevailed  in  regard  to  the  first  vowel  of  'p"!p  Ezek.  40:  43.  As,  however, 
this  last  word  is  in  every  other  place  written  without  the  Met'iegh,  and 
there  is  no  analogy   for  such  words  as  those  mentioned  above  having  a  in 


§  20  AMBIGUOUS  SIGNS.  27 

their  initial  sj'Uable,  the  best  authorities  are  now  agreed  that  the  vowel  is 
0,  and  the  words  are  accordingly  read  dorhhdn,  etc.  In  t^z':i^  jasper,  and 
r'|b'73  emerald,  Ezek.  28:13,  which  are  mentioned  by  Kimchi  in  the  same 
connection,  the  first  vowel  is  Kamets. 

d.  In  some  manuscripts  and  a  few  of  the  older  printed  books,  e.  g. 
Stephanus'  Hebrew  Bible  and  Eeuchlin's  Eudimenta  Hebraica,  Kamets- 
Hhatuph  is  denoted  by  (  ).  It  then  differs  from  Kamets,  but  is  liable  to 
be  confounded  with  Hhateph-Kamets.  It  can,  however,  be  distinguished 
from  it  by  the  circumstance  tliat  Kamets-Hhatiiph  is  alwaj's  followed  either 
by  simide  Sh'va,  Paghesh-forte,  or  Methegl) :  none  of  which  ever  immediately 
succeed  Hhateph-Kamets.  Such  a  form  as  "^i'^  Ezek.  26  :  9  in  some  editions 
is  an  impossible  one  if  (  .)  have  its  ordinary  meaning. 

e.  It  is  surpi'isiiig  that  in  so  minute  and  careful  a  system  of  ortho- 
graphy as  that  of  the  Massoritea,  there  should  be  no  symbol  for  o  distinct 
from  that  for  a/  and  some  have  felt  constrained  in  consequence  to  suppose 
that  the  signs  for  these  two  vowels  were  originally  different,  but  became 
assimilated  in  the  course  of  transcription.  This  seems  unlikely,  however. 
The  probability  is  that  a,  and  o,  whose  resemblance  even  we  can  perceive, 
were  so  closely  allied  in  the  genuine  Hebrew  pronunciation,  that  one  sign 
was  thought  sufficient  to  represent  them,  especialh'  as  the  Massorites  were 
intent  simply  on  indicating  sounds  Avithout  concerning  themselves  with 
grammatical  relations.  This  is  further  confirmed  by  the  occasional  selection 
of  Hhateph-Kamets  to  accompany  Kamets,  as  1'^f  ?'^'?>  "^"i"^?)  "^iT^^''  J^r. 
22:  20,  JijJ'^SJ^  Isa.  27:4,  or  to  replace  it,  as  nid'nn  from  nnn  Ezek.  36: 35, 38, 
and  by  the  fact  that  the  article  undergoes  the  same  euphonic  change  be- 
fore n  and  n,  §  231.  4. 

§  20.  1.  As  simple  Sh'va  is  vocal  at  the  beginning  of 
a  syllable  and  silent  at  its  close,  there  can  be  no  doubt 
as  to  its  character  when  it  stands  under  initial  or  final 
letters.  Preceding  the  first  vowel  of  a  word  it  must  of 
course  be  vocal,  and  following  the  last  vowel  it  must  be 
silent,  t:n"!5T  ^'khartcim,  ri"b7  zdlcliart.  In  the  middle  of  a 
word,  the  question  whether  it  belongs  to  the  syllable  of 
the  preceding  or  the  following  vowel  must  be  determined 
by  the  circumstances.  If  a  complete  syllable  precedes, 
that  is,  either  an  unaccented  long  vowel  or  a  vowelless 
consonant  serving  as  the  complement  of  a  previous  short 
vowel,  it  is  vocal.  If  it  be  preceded  by  a  short  vowel 
which  cannot  make  a  complete  syllable  without  the  aid 
of  a  following  consonant,  or  by  a  long  accented  vowel, 
it  is  silent:    ^"i5T  zo-kh're,   i^'^'V}   tk-k'rii,    HDIlb   libli-ne. 


28  ORTHOGEAPHT.  §  21 

rijbtpr  tiJddl-ncl.  Sli'va  under  a  letter  doubled  by  Dagliesli- 
forte,  §  23,  is  vocal,  such  a  letter  being  equivalent  to 
two,  the  first  of  which  completes  the  previous  syllable, 
and  the  second  begins  the  syllable  which  follows:  D'^'n.-TIl 
=  D^"^.5T"n  liaz-zldm'Lm.  Inasmuch  as  no  syllable  can 
begin  with  more  than  two  consonants,  §  18. 1,  two  vocal 
Sh'vas  can  never  come  together.  And  two  silent  Sh'vas 
can  never  come  together  except  at  the  end  of  a  word, 
since  none  but  final  syllables  can  close  with  two  conson- 
ants. When  two  simple  Sh'vas  concur  in  the  middle  of 
a  word,  therefore,  the  first  is  necessarily  silent  and  the 
second  vocal:  rrHSTX  ez-kWa. 

2.  In  addition  to  this  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  Sh'va 
is  vocal  after  intermediate  syllables;  that  is  to  say,  when 
the  consonant  under  wliich  it  stands  performs  the  double 
office  of  completing  one  syllable  and  beginning  the  next. 
Thus,  when  it  follows  a  consonant  from  which  Daghesh- 
forte  has  been  omitted,  ^irp3";'l  vay^hhak'shu  for  vay- 
y'bJiak-k'shil,  or  the  first  of  two  similar  letters,  in  order 
that  the  reduplication  may  be  made  more  distinct,  ^5bn 
hariu,  n^bp  kiVlath,  ibbii  tsiVlo,  ^bbi^  aVlay,  ^j^pn  Jihikice, 
and  in  several  other  cases,  which  will  be  more  partic- 
ularly described  in  §  22. 

a.  Elias  Levita  ingeniously  represented  the  rules  for  vocal  Sh'va  by 
the  first  five  letters  of  the  Hebrew  Alphabet,  thus  S<  (=1)  when  it  stands 
under  the  first  letter  of  a  word;  3  (=2)  after  another  Sh'va;  5  (=  ti^inr.  long) 
after  a  long  vowel;  1  (=  o: n)  after  Daghesh-forte;  il  (=D"'^^.n  the  similar) 
Uiider  the  first  of  two  similar  letters. 


Daghesh-Lene. 

§  21.  The  second  class  of  signs  added  to  the  Hebrew 
text  are  those  which  are  designed  to  guide  in  the  pro- 
nunciation of  the  consonants.  These  are  the  diacritical 
point  over  Shin,  Dagliesh-lene,  Daghesh-forte,  Mappik, 


§21  DAGHESH-LENE.  29 

and  Raphe.    The  use  of  the  first  of  these  has  abeady 
been  sufficiently  explained,  §  3.  1. 

1.  Daghesh-lene  (bp  iTj'l)  is  a  point  inserted  in  the  six 
letters  tl  3  D  T  j  S  (technically  called  B'ghadh  K'2:)hatJi), 
to  indicate  the  loss  of  their  aspiration,  e.  g.  1  hh,  3i  b,  etc. 
As  these  letters  are  always  aspirated  after  a  vowel- 
sound,  however  slight,  and  never  as  an  initial  utterance 
or  when  following  a  consonant,  they  invariably  require 
Daghesh-lene  whenever  they  are  not  immediately  pre- 
ceded by  a  vowel  or  a  vocal  Sh'va.  It  is  consequently 
inserted  in  the  initial  aspirate  of  a  word  which  begins  a 
verse,  n'iri^"]::!  Gen.  1 :  1,  or  which  follows  a  word  bear- 
ing a  disjunctive  accent  (inasmuch  as  this  represents  a 
pause  of  longer  or  shorter  duration),  ^i<S  iri'^l^  Ex.  1:1, 
■|B  I  nri?  Gen.  3:  22,  or  ending  in  a  consonant,  ■'p>l''!?5, 
^^yi  ^^)P^  Gen.  24:  42;  but  not  if  it  follows  a  word 
ending  in  a  vowel  and  having  a  conjunctive  accent, 
Dihn  ^33,  ^nh  nn-n  Gen.  l:  2.    The  sacred  name  riin^ 

:       J"  :'  .   :  IT  t       ! 

is  followed  by  Daghesh-lene,  even  though  it  may  have  a 
conjunctive  accent.  Num.  10: 29,  Deut.  3: 26,  Josh.  10:  30, 
11:  8,  Ps.  18:  21,  because  in  reading  the  Jews  always 
substitute  for  it  the  word  "i'lN,  which  ends  in  a  conson- 

T      -:' 

ant.  In  three  instances,  however,  e.g.  tDl  "'DIJ^,  Ps. 68: 18, 
iinin"1p  Isa.  34:  11,  Pin  lb"^  Ezek.  23:  42,  Daghesh-lene  is 
not  inserted  after  a  vowel-letter,  which  retains  its  con- 
sonant sound. 

2.  Daghesh-lene  is  inserted  in  a  medial  or  final  aspi- 
rate preceded  by  a  voweUess  consonant,  whether  this 
be  accompanied  by  silent  Sh'va  or  Pattahh  furtive,  e.  g. 
ri'iPCD,  r^i^ir;  but  not  if  it  be  preceded  by  a  vowel  or 
vocal  Sh'va,  whether  simple  or  compound,  e.  g.  ri^lili^ 

a.  The  primary  signification  of  the  name  Daghesh  is  commonly  ex- 

V 

plained   from  the  Syriac    -.a.^?    ("O^"^),    to  which  Castellus   in  his  lexicon 


30  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  22 

gives  the  sense  of  piercing.  This  is  by  some  applied  to  the  puncture  or 
point  which  is  its  written  sign,  by  others  to  its  power  of  sharpening  the 
sound  of  letters  by  removing  their  aspiration  or  doubhng  them.  Buxtorf, 
however,  in  his  Chaldee  Lexicon,  disputes  the  existence  of  such  a  root  in 
either  Syriac  or  Chaldee,  alleging  that  in  Prov.  12:  18,  the  passage  quoted 
to  prove  the  word,  the  true  reading  is  |■^>-^^  >  (X'OJI).  The  six  letters  which 
receive  Daghesh-lene  in  Hebrew  have  the  same  twofold  pronunciation  in 
Syriac,  a  red  dot  called  Eukhokh  (-^soi  softness),  being  written  beneath 
them  when  they  were  to  be  aspirated,  and  another  called  Kushoi  {^*.m.zud 
hardness),  being  written  above  them  when  they  were  not. 

b.  Grammarians  are  not  agreed  whether  the  aspirated  or  unaspirated 
sound  of  these  consonants  was  the  original  one.  There  being  no  data  for 
the  settlement  of  the  question,  each  decides  it  by  his  own  theory  of  pho- 
netic changes.  The  correctness  of  the  Massoretic  punctuation  has  some- 
times been  questioned  in  regard  to  this  matter,  on  the  jjround  of  the  im- 
probability of  such  fluctuation  in  the  sound  of  these  letters  in  the  same 
word.  But  besides  the  Syriac  analogy  just  referred  to,  the  Sanskrit  lan- 
guage shows  the  almost  unlimited  extent  to  which  euphonic  changes  may 
be  carried  by  a  people  posse.^^sing  a  sensitive  and  discriminating  ear.  The 
Sanskrit  aspirates,  besides  being  subjected  to  other  mutations  which  can- 
not here  be  detailed,  regularly  lose  their  aspiration  when  finals,  and  under 
certain  conditions  when  medials,  throwing  it  back,  where  this  is  possible, 
upon  a  previous  letter.  Bopp  Kritische  Grammatik,  pp.30.  42.  Similar  laws 
prevail  to  some  extent  in  Greek,  e.  g.  Spi%  Tpiyoq;  rpscfxn,  Spiipcj^;  6-Jca, 
irudijv,  ovK  sxco,  ovx  b^^;  pLsff  ifLlv. 

§  22.  The  absence  of  Daghesh-lene  in  an  aspirate 
sometimes  shows  a  preceding  simple  Sh'va  to  be  vocal 
when  this  would  not  otherx^dse  have  been  known.  In 
most  of  the  cases  referred  to,  a  letter  originally  belong- 
ing to  the  succeeding  syllable  is  by  the  prefixing  of  a 
short  vowel  drawn  back  to  complete  the  syllable  before 
it;  instead,  however,  of  giving  up  its  previous  connection 
altogether,  it  forms  an  intermediate  syllable,  §  20.  2,  the 
Sh'va  remaining  vocal  though  the  antecedent  vowel  is 
short;  thus,  nzb  Vhliahli  with  the  prefix  ^  becomes  3nb:a 
bil'bhabh,  not  2!nbn  bil-babh. 

a.  The  particular  instances  in  which  this  may  occur  are  the  following, 
viz.:  (1)  The  Kal  imperative  of  verbs  and  the  Kal  infinitive  with  suffixes, 
6.  g.  ^IZV,  il^^,  S'l^^,  ^-1?:^  from  H-r;  yet  with  occasional  exceptions,  as 
CZDCX3  Lev.  23:  39,  where  0  necessarily  closes  the  syllable,  otherwise  two 
successive  letters  would  have  vocal  Sh'va,  contrary  to  §  20.  1.     (2)  Those 


§   22  DAGHESH-LENE.  31 

forms  of  Pe  Guttural  -verbs  in  which  the  first  radical  assumes  a  short  vowel 
in  p'ace  of  the  silent  Sh'va  in  the  regular  inflexion,  e.  g.  'n^"^,  CnH-ri  for 
sns";:,  tansrn.  (3)  The  construct  plural  of  nouns  inny  from  n^n::^,  r'srs 
from  riErs,"  rii;i"iri  fiom  nis'^n.  though  with  occasional  exceptions,  as  'S:iT 
Cant.  8:  6,  but  "^Eld-i  Ps.  76:  4;  "i^-ati  Isa.  5:  10,  nis-n  Ps.  69:  10,  "isia  Gen. 
50:  23,  but  Dri^="i3  Judg.  7:  6;  ■'i?3,  ii^n  from  n;2  are  peculiar  in  omit- 
ting Daghesh  in  the  singular  with  suffixes.  (4)  Three  feminine  nouns  ending 
in  ni,  Wsbp  from  ~Vp,  r^nb?  fiom  'ib^,  T'n^S'  (only  occurring  with  suffixes) 
from  "i'ZV,  but  not  W^'n'a.  Also  a  few  other  nouns  of  different  forms,  viz.: 
°"^^'^^  but  '^^^■^^  !^=S"^',  "'S'l?,  '^"il'-;;,  n^^^'^-g,  •(■isn.  (5)  After  prefixes,  as 
He  interrogative,  e.g.  tjr;'"T;ri  Gen.  29:  5  from  chvT.t  and  inseparable  prep- 
ositions, e.  g.  'i'^i;l^  from  "i"^3'^,  W"i3  from  nS"!,  "nhis  from  "iin.  Usage  is 
not  uniform  in  the  case  of  Kal  infinitives  following  inseparable  prepositions, 
e.  g.  Siri^b,  nirra;  bs:3,  ^2:3,  Vs:b;  ikish  Isa.  31:  4,  H'i^h  Num.  4:  23.  8:  24; 
nnsb,  "i3J3.  (6)  The  suffixes  of  the  second  person  ^^,  D2,  )Zi  never  receive 
Daghesh-lene,  V^rs,  DD"i;?3,  except  once  after  Nun  Epenthetic,  §  101,  2  (5), 
r^rjrnx  Jer.  22:  24. 

These  rules  are  sometimes  of  importance  in  etymology;  thus,  ~'^5'i3TS5 
Ezek.  27:  12  must  have  as  its  ground  form  "pSTS,  not  'pSfS';  and  C31N  Hos. 
7:  6,  t:3"'n  Ps.  90:  10  cannot  be  infinitives  with  suffixes,  but  must  be  from 
the  segbolates  n^i's,  Stni. 

b.  The  omission  of  Daghesh-lene  from  the  final  letter  of  plpin  Prov. 
30:  6,  abbreviated  from  C]'^bin  or  "piri,  and  from  the  aspirate  in  the  proper 
names  Vxnp^  Josh.  15:  38,  2  Kin.  14:  7,  and  tjjip^  Josh.  15:  56  is  ex- 
ceptional. The  Daghesh  occasionally  occurring  in  initial  aspirates  after 
Avords  ending  in  a  vowel  and  having  a  conjunctive  accent,  is  for  the  most 
part  Daiihesh-forte  conjunctive,  §  24,  e.  g.  )v'^'2  iTj;"iX  Gen.  11:  31  and  else- 
where, -rr.  n:i-;X  Gen.  46;  28,  nj<r>  nxs  Ex.  15:  1.  21,  nbxs  !1T  Ex.  15:  13, 
nOE  v"'-^:^;"!  Deut.  16:  1  (comp.  ^  n"-.!-:;  Gen.  20  :  9),  dk  !^~"'j:"5$1.  Dent.  31:28 
(comp.  "lb  ^~l'''^.^]  Isa.  8:  2),  -jna  r|-";;;^  Gen.  35:  29,  ia  njZ'j'lsa.  40:  7,  also 
Ex.  15:  11.  16,  Isa.  54:  12,  Jer.  20:  9.  But  Daghesh-lene  may  be  inserted 
in  the  first  of  two  similar  aspirates,  if  it  have  no  vowel,  for  greater  distinct- 
ness of  pronunciation;  viz.  in  3  followed  by  3  Gen.  39:  12,  Jer.  3:  25  or  by 
a  Ex.  14:  4.  17,  Lev.  25:  53,  or  by  53  (in  Baer's  text)  Gen.  32:  11,  40:  7; 
in  3  followed  by  3  Josh.  8:  24,  10:  20,  Isa.  10:  9;  also  in  biblical  Arnniaeic 
in  "I  fo  lowed  by  n  Dan.  3 :  3  (in  some  copies)  and  in  3  followed  by  n  Dan. 
3:  3.  The  old  strife  as  to  the  Daghesh  in  the  word  C'r-j:  two  is  not  yet 
settled.  Kimchi  explained  it  as  Daghesh-lene  upon  the  supposition  that  the 
word  was  abridged  from  C^rcX;  Schultens  as  Daghesh-forte  arising  from 
an  assimilated  5,  contending  that  it  was  for  D'^H"'^  from  D";ri3'J;  Nordheimer 
as  an  anomalous  Daghesh-lene,  introduced  as  a  euphonic  expedient  to  pre- 
vent the  combination  of  an  aspii-ated  n  with  a  sibilant,  such  as  is  obviated 
in  the  Hithpael  of  verbs  by  a  transposition  that  would  here  be  inadmis-sible. 
The  puzzle  is  still  further  perplexed  by  the  circumstance  that  it  once 
appears  with  the  preposition  '|53  without  the  Daghesh,  ^rc"3  Judg.  16:  28, 
and  again  with  the  same  preposition  with  it,  n"^r,3-2  Jon.  4:11,  the  Methegh 
showing  the  Sh'va  to  be  vocal,  as  might  also  be  inferred  from  the  fact  that 
Daghesh-forte  has  been  omitted. 


32  orthogeapht.  §  23 

Daghesh-Forte. 

§  23.  1.  Wlien  the  same  consonant  was  repeated  with 
a  vowel  or  even  the  sHghtest  hiatus  intervening,  so  that 
successive  movements  of  the  organs  of  speech  were  re- 
quired in  the  pronunciation,  the  Hebrews  invariably 
wrote  the  letter  twice.  When,  however,  there  was  no 
interval  between  the  reduplicated  consonants,  and  the 
only  audible  result  was  a  more  protracted  or  vehement 
utterance  of  the  same  sound  effected  by  a  single  effort 
of  the  organs,  the  letter  was  written  but  once.  This  fact 
the  Massoretic  punctuators  have  indicated  by  placing  a 
point  called  Daghesh-forte  (pTn  -^Tj"!)  in  the  bosom  of  a 
letter  so  affected,  to  show  that  it  is  to  be  doubled  in  the 
pronunciation;  thus,  bia^l  vayyimmal.  Daghesh-forte  may 
be  found  in  any  letter  with  the  exception  of  the  gutturals 
5<  n  M  3^,  which  on  account  of  their  weakness  do  not 
admit  of  reduplication.  The  letter  '^,  partaking  of  tliis 
with  other  peculiarities  of  the  gutturals,  receives  it  only 
in  a  very  few  exceptional  cases,  e.  g.  "ir&^'n'i  Cant.  5:  2, 
r\^:2  Prov.  14:  10. 

-     T 

a.  For  other  examples  of  Eesh  with  Daghesh-forte  see  Prov.  11:21,  15:1, 
Jer.  39:  12,  Ezek.  16:  4,  also  §  24.  b. 

2.  The  aspirates,  when  doubled,  always  at  the  same 
time  lose  their  aspiration;  thus,  "pS"'^  yippakedli.  Daghesh- 
forte  in  these  letters  is  readily  distinguishable  from 
Daghesh-lene  by  the  consideration  that  a  consonant  can- 
not be  pronounced  double  except  after  a  vowel.  A  point 
in  one  of  the  aspirates  is,  therefore,  Daghesh-forte  if  a 
vowel  precedes,  otherwise  it  is  Daghesh-lene. 

3.  Daghesh-forte  in  1  may  be  distinguished  from 
Shurek  in  the  same  way.  Inasmuch  as  two  vowels  cannot 
come  together  in  the  same  word,  if  a  vowel  precedes  it 
is  Daghesh-forte,  if  not  it  is  Shurek. 


§  24  DAGHESH-FOETE.  S3 

a.  Some  Grammarians  speak  of  Daghesh-forte  impHcifum  in  the  gut- 
turals, by  which  they  mean  that  these  letters  appear  in  certain  cases  to 
complete  a  foregoing  syllable  as  well  as  to  begin  that  in  which  they  prop- 
erly stand,  in  spite  of  the  omission  of  Daghesh,  which  analogy  would  re- 
quire them  to  receive. 

b.  The  Arabs  have  a  sign  of  reduphcation,  Teshdid  (-),  which  is 
written  above  the  doubled  letter.  The  Syrians  have  no  written  sign  for 
this  purpose,  and  it  is  disputed  whether  their  letters  were  ever  doubled  in 
pronunciation.  According  to  Asseman  Biblioth.  Orient.  III.  2.  p.  379,  the 
Western  differed  from  the  Eastern  Syrians  in  this  respect,  "Occidentales 
nullibi  literas  geminant." 

§  24.  Different  epithets  have  been  applied  to  Daghesh- 
forte  to  describe  its  various  uses  or  the  occasions  of  its 
employment.  1.  When  separate  letters,  whether  origin- 
ally alike,  or  made  so  by  assimilation,  are  by  the  in- 
flection or  formation  of  words  brought  into  juxtaposition, 
the  Daghesh-forte  which  represents  such  a  doubling  is 
called  compensative;  e.g.  ^T\^_'^,  formed  by  appending  the 
syllable  "P  to  the  root  n^^;  ^rihj  composed  of  the  same 
syllable  and  the  root  "jPiD,  whose  last  letter  is  changed  to 
n  to  conform  with  that  which  follows;  ^!Ilb  from  zhc 
2.  When  the  reduplication  is  indicative  of  a  particular 
grammatical  form  the  Daghesh-forte  is  called  charac- 
teristic, e.  g.  in  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  of  verbs;  as, 
T]"in,  Tj>rjri»7,  and  certain  forms  of  nouns,  as,  "liiaB.  3.  When 
it  has  arisen  from  the  necessity  of  converting  a  previous 
simple  syllable  into  a  mixed  one  in  order  to  preserve  the 
quantity  of  a  short  vowel  which  it  contains,  it  is  Daghesh- 
forte  conservative;  e.  g.  it)"  for  2b\  4.  When  the  initial 
letter  of  a  word  is  doubled  under  the  influence  of  the 
final  vowel  of  the  word  preceding,  it  is  Daghesh-forte 
conjunctive;  e.  g.  nrn^,  ^"r^.^n^  ^'^21  TJ^p.  5.  When  the 
last  letter  of  an  intermediate  syllable  is  doubled  in  order 
to  make  the  follomng  hiatus  or  vocal  Sli'va  more  distinct, 
it  is  Daghesh-forte  dirimens  or  separative,  because  the 
letter  which  receives  it  is  thus  separated  in  part  from 
the  syllable  to  which  it  belongs;  e.  g.  ^h^^  inn'hlie  iov 


34  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  24 

"hlV  in'hhe.  6.  When  the  first  letter  of  a  final  syllable  is 
doubled  under  the  influence  of  a  previous  vowel  bearing 
the  accent  (mostly  a  pause  accent,  §  36.  2.  a.),  for  the 
sake  of  increased  fullness  and  force  of  pronunciation,  .it 
is  Daghesh-forte  emphatic;  e.  g.  ^^^'IH  for  ^b"in.  7.  A  letter 
following  a  guttural  mth  silent  Sh'va  is  in  some  manu- 
scripts and  in  the  edition  of  Baer  and  Dehtzsch  regularly 
doubled  by  what  is  called  Daghesh-forte  orthophonic  to 
show  that  there  is  no  hiatus  after  the  guttural;  e.  g. 
Tlhy'l  ranimd,  not  rwma  Gen.  10:  7,  "^h^  yazz'er  Isa.  16:  9. 
In  the  first  three  uses  named  above  Daghesh-forte  is 
said  to    be    essential,   in  the  last  four  it  is  euphonic 

(nk^lpn  nn.s£nb). 

a.  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive  occurs  regularly  after  the  pronouns  fr: 
and  nt  followed  hy  Makkeph,  e.  g.  D^i'S-ir?!!  2ri-n?  Ps,  133:  1,  n>-i^-n: 
Num.  34:  6.  7.  9;  also  in  the  initial  letter  of  monosyllables  and  of  words 
accented  on  the  first  syllable  after  a  final  Kamets  or  Seghol  in  words 
followed  by  Makkeph  rxi-nn^rb  Gen.  2:  23,  qps-nrr^!]  Gen.  43:  15,  or 
having  a  conjunctive  accent  on  the  penult,  rw  r"^-"^'  Gen.  3:14,  Tj^  rizX  Gen. 
33:  5,  provided  this  was  originally  the  accented  syllable,  or,  if  the  accent 
has  been  shifted  from  the  ultimate,  was  the  place  of  the  secondary  accent 
Methegh  iT^a  nx-j:j3  (for  HN-j^)  Ps.  84:  4,  but  TO  H:io  Deut.  24:  1,  ::rL:  rriu; 
Ezek.  17:  8;  this  proviso  does  not  attach  to  the  futures  and  participles  of 
n"b  verbs  "i-is  nris?  Gen.  1:  11,  ^h  nii;;;!  Ex.  21:31.  Final  Kamets  before 
Makkeph  is  not  followed  by  Daghesh-forte  unless  the  syllable  containing 
the  Kamets  begins  with  two  consonants  NiTira  Gen.  27:  26  or  is  im- 
mediately preceded  by  Methegh  ■'^-nr^n  Gen.  30:  1,  but  p"!k-!T^3r'l  Ps.  45:5. 
Words  having  the  secondary  accent  Methegh  on  the  first  syllable  likewise 
admit  Daghesh  after  a  final  unaccented  Kamets  or  Seghol,  unless  they 
begin  with  an  aspirate  ^h'Z'^^  Tva'd  Gen.  49:  31,  but  ni'ib'ir  n^k  Gen.  2:  4. 
The  inseparable  particles  3,  D,  h,  "l,  when  prefixed  without  a  vowel,  do  not 
admit  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive,  except  T]^  which  follows  the  ordinary 
rule  r^  r^w^'1  Deut.  10:  1,  and  one  additional  instance  tlb-Vz;  nV"Bn  Ps.  19:3. 
Sibilants  and  liquids  may  be  doubled  after  an  unaccented  final  il  >1X3  l^^ip 
Gen.  19:  14,  N^  n-QX^I  Gen.  19:  2,  1  Sam.  8:  19.  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive 
is  rarely  found  after  an  accented  vowel,  yet  N3  ri2in  Gen.  19:  2,  "i^ixb  rr.^''^ 
Ex.  6:  10,  29,  13:  1,  14:  1,  Num.  31:  25.  It  also  occurs  in  a  few  exceptional 
cases  not  embraced  in  the  rules  above  given.  See  the  preface  to  Baer's 
edition  of  Proverbs,  In  a  few  instances  words  thus  united  are  written  as 
one,  e.  g.  W^  Ex.  4:  2  for  TO  np,  so  Ci:^^  Isa.  3:  15,  nk^n-a  Mai.  1:  13, 
nksxta  Isa.  27:  8. 


§25 


DAGHESH-FOETE. 


35 


b.  Daghesh-forte  separative  occurs  only  in  the  following  example* 

nn;3-'b  Prov.  30:  17. 
T^n;?-;  1  Sam.  28:  10. 
n5i"'n'inS3  (?)  Ezek.  13: 
20. 


n-;3X  Hos,  3:  2. 
tjiniip-a  Ps.  45:  10. 
!2''n^-"r}  Am.  5:  25. 
:in;r:;pn  Gen.  18:  21. 
nsron  Gen,  37 :  32. 
■(hin  Gen.  17:  17. 
tJni5<^n  1  Sam.  10:  24, 
17:25.  2  Kin 
6:  32. 
dni-isn  Job  17:  2. 
irsan  Ex.  2:  3. 
sins-'n'iin  (?)  Judg.  20: 
43. 
t^h^'^ri  1  Sam.  i:  6. 
-^■pir\  Isa.  57 :  6. 
nn;37  Gen.  49:  10. 


^nibss  Isa.  33 :  1. 
niniao  Joel  l:  17. 
D'^S-is?  Job  9:  18. 
•T^-^nTS^  Nah.  3:  17. 
Vihjs-Q  Ex.  15:  17. 
-nnp3-a  Deut.  23:  11. 
n^:^?  Ps.  141:  3. 
tiy4:  Prov.  4:  13. 
iin^iinr.:  Judg.  20:  32. 
•1=30  Jer.  4:  7. 
■iPXD  Isa.  9:  3,  10: 
27,  14:  25. 


-^^i'J  Deut.  32:  32. 
''nhs?  2  Sam.  23 :  27. 
Jer.  29;  27. 
Cb-^^^y  Isa.  58:  3. 
tDD-^nia?  Am.  5:  21. 
-"laisS"  Gen.  49:  17. 
Judg.  5:  22. 

nidpy  Ps.  8y :  52. 
?j^ni3p:3  Ps.  77 :  20. 
nirijy  Prov.  27:  25. 

•^innriis  Ps.  ii9:  139. 

•'Siinnas  Ps.  88:  17. 
drirr;?  (?)  Ps.  37: 15. 
Isa.  5:  28. 
blbsii  Ps.  58 :  9. 


This  list  is  corrected  and  enlarged  from  Gesen.  Lehrg.  pp.  86  S.  Those 
words  which  are  followed  by  a  note  of  interrogation  (?)  are  found  in  some 
editions  but  not  in  others.  Daghesh  separative  may  be  found  after  He 
interrogative  in  some  instances  not  included  in  the  above  list. 

e.  Daghesh-forte  emphatic  occurs  only  in  ^5Tn  Jndg.  5:  7.  1  Sam.  2:5; 
sian  Job  22:  12  (Edit.  Baer);  ^hn-^)  Job  29:  21;  ^X^rr;  or  ^'nrp  Job  21:  13; 
sink-;  Isa.  33:  12,  Jer.  51 :  58;  na'nt  Ezek.  21 :  15,  16;  iLpj  Ezek.  6:9;  nniij: 
Isa.  41:  17;  >l3r3  Ezek.  27:  19;  i\Th^  (?)  Isa.  19:  6;  and  probably  i^rnn  Job 
13:  9  (not  in  pause). 

d.  Daghesh-forte  orthophonic  also  occurs  according  to  the  Massora  in 
the  initial  letter  of  a  word,  when  the  preceding  word  ends  in  the  same 
letter;  accordingly  the  edition  of  Baer  and  Delitzsch  has  ::!ir!53"DX  Gen. 
14:  23,  Dn|-b=xb  Gen.  31:  54,  and  some  manuscripts  have  fi'i  din  Gen. 
5:  6.  Occasional  instances  also  occur  of  the  doubling  of  an  initial  liquid 
after  another  final  liquid,  e.  g.  xb  i  "rgx*])  (suggesting  the  pronunciation 
vayyomel-lo)  1  Kin.  11:  22  and  in  certain  manuscripts  X^i  "yivh  Gen.  3:  17, 
risxba"'?3  Ex.  20:  10,  and  even  (in  manuscripts)  of  an  initial  sibilant  after 
a  final  n,  e.  g.  d'bi:s;-nx  probably  esh-sWrndm  Gen.  5 :  2,  13X3  r\i'n=3-3  Gen. 
4:  4,  Si^T-nnDii:  Lev.  15:  32.   See  Gesenius'  Lehrgebaude  pp.  90.  91. 

§  25,  In  order  to  the  distinct  utterance  of  a  redupli- 
cated consonant,  it  must  be  followed  as  well  as  preceded 
by  a  vowel-sound.  Dagliesh-forte  is  consequently  never 
written  in  a  final  vowelless  letter,  with  the  exception  of 
the  two  words  ri5<,  riin;,  both  of  which  end  in  aspirates 
whose  pronunciation  would  be  changed  by  the  removal 
of  the  Daghesh.  In  every  other  instance  the  doubling  is 

3* 


36  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  26 

neglected,  even  tliougli  the  letter  be  an  aspirate,  which 
will  for  this  reason  resume  its  aspiration;  e.  g.  bp,  ^'~|5; 
nb,  ^jlt;  TiM-.l  abridged  from  mSSHIV,  C]!:';^  from  nS"^':^  In 
a  medial  letter  with  Sh'va  Daghesh  may  be  written,  be- 
cause the  Sh'va  being  thus  rendered  vocal  the  reduph- 
cation  can  be  made  audible  by  means  of  the  hiatus 
which  it  represents;  it  is,  however,  quite  as  frequently 
omitted,  the  Sh'va  commonly  remaining  vocal  as  if  it 
were  inserted,  and  compound  Sh'va  being  occasionally 
substituted  for  simple  to  indicate  this  fact,  §  16.  3.  h.; 

e.  g.  n^n^r  for  D-n^^:?,  ikes  for  iND3,  ^h]:^  for  ^hp":,  ^n^bi^ni 

Judg.  16:  16,  particularly  after  prefixes,  as  Vav  Con- 
versive,  the  article  and  preposition  12,  so  ^h^^,  ^^Z'cri, 
Dh'n'l3"»'a.  It  is  seldom  omitted  from  a  medial  aspirate  on 
account  of  the  change  in  its  sound  involved:  yet  even 
tliis  is  done  occasionally,  e.  g.  *i^i?Il'^  Judg.  8 :  2  for  Til!n?J, 
siiSinn  Isa.  22:  10  for  ^kl^n,  "jinST  from  liiST.  In  a  few  rare 
instances  it  is  dropped  from  a  letter  followed  by  a  vowel, 
when  the  laws  of  syllables  will  permit  and  the  pronun- 
ciation will  not  be  materially  affected;  e.  g.  n^rj^ri  Ruth 
1:  13  for  nsiyn,  so  :nrc^T\  Isa.  60:  4. 

r  ••  T     ••'  T    I-   T    I" 


Mappik. 

§  26.  Mappik  (p^b'D  hringing  out  or  littering),  is  a 
point  in  one  of  the  letters  5^  H  1  ""j  showing  that  it  rep- 
resents a  consonant  and  not  a  vowel,  or  in  other  words 
that  it  does  not  quiesce  in  the  preceding  vowel-sign.  It 
is  unnecessary,  however,  to  employ  any  notation  for  this 
purpose  in  the  case  of  J}^  1  and  "',  for  their  quiescence 
can  be  readily  determined  in  all  cases  by  the  rules  al- 
ready given,  §  13.  Although  it  is  much  more  extensively 
used  in  manuscripts,  therefore,  Mappik  is  in  modern 
editions  of  the  Hebrew  Bible  only  inserted  in  final  H 


§  27,28  ACCENTS.  37 

when  it  retains  its  consonantal  power;  e.  g.  »^ii'^i<  artsdh, 
nsii<  afisd,  J^nJ^b  Vkdhhdh,  nnpb  Idk'hhd.  The  point  four 
times  found  in  ij5,  ^^^^^  Gen.  43:  26,  Ezra  8:  18,  ^is^^in 
Lev.  23:  17,  ^Si*^  Job  33:  21,  though  called  a  Daghesh  in 
the  Massoretic  notes  in  the  margin,  is  probably  to  be 
regarded  as  Mappik. 

a.  In  some  manuscripts   and  in  the  Hebrew  Bible  printed  at  Brescia 
in  1494  Mappik  is  placed  not  in  the  body  of  the  letter  He,  but  underneath  it. 


Raphe. 

§  27.  Raphe  (n^'l  weak),  is  a  small  horizontal  stroke 
placed  over  a  letter,  and  denotes  the  opposite  of  Daghesh- 
lene,  Daghesh-forte,  or  Mappik,  as  the  case  may  be.  As 
no  inconvenience  can  arise  from  its  omission,  it  is  only 
occasionally  used  in  modern  Bibles,  and  not  with  entire 
uniformity  in  the  different  editions.  It  is  chiefly  found 
where  a  Mappik  has  been  omitted  in  tl,  which  according 
to  analogy  might  be  expected  to  be  inserted,  e.  g.  HlC^n 
Ex.  9:18,  rns'w^  Lev.  13:4,  nkt^nn  Num.  15:  28,  nb  Num. 

T  T    ;  '  T    ;    V    :  '  r 

32:  42,  n7JS-*a'2  Job  31:  22  in  some  copies.  Li  "lirn'-ffiS^n 
Ex.  20:  4,  Deut.  5:  8,  it  is  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-forte, 
and  shows  that  b  may  either  be  doubled  agreeably  to 
the  point  in  its  bosom  or  not.  In  nil";ri  5<b  Ex.  20:  13, 
Deut.  5: 17,  it  is  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-lene,  and  shows 
that  the  Sn  may  either  have  its  unaspirated  sound,  as  the 
Daghesh  indicates,  or  may  be  aspirated. 

Accents. 

§  28.  The  third  class  of  Massoretic  additions  to  the 
text  are  those  which  relate  to  the  words.  These  are  the 
accents,  Makkepb,  Methegh,  and  the  K'ri.  An  accent 
(D>"ti)  is  written  upon  every  word  with  a  twofold  design, 
1st,  of  marking  its  tone-syllable,  and  2dly,  of  indicating 


38  OETHOGRAPHT.  §  28 

its  relation  to  other  words  in  the  sentence.  The  great 
number  of  the  accents  has  respect  entirely  to  this  second 
function,  there  being  no  difference  in  the  quality  of  the 
stress  laid  upon  particular  syllables,  such  for  example  as 
is  marked  by  the  Greek  acute,  grave,  and  circumflex, 
but  only  that  difference  in  its  amount  which  arises  from 
the  unequal  emphasis  naturally  laid  upon  the  different 
members  of  a  clause  or  period.  The  punctuators  have 
attempted  not  only  to  indicate  the  pauses  to  be  made 
in  reading,  as  is  done  by  the  stops  in  use  in  other  lan- 
guages, but  to  represent  to  the  eye  the  precise  position 
held  by  each  word  in  the  structure  of  the  sentence,  and 
the  various  grades  of  attraction  or  repulsion  arising 
from  the  relations  whether  co-ordinate  or  subordinate 
which  subsist  among  them.  Every  sentence  is  fancifully 
regarded  as  a  territory,  which,  partitioned  into  its  several 
clauses,  forms  empires,  kingdoms,  and  principalities, 
ruled  by  their  respective  sovereigns,  each  of  whom  has 
his  own  train  of  inferiors  and  dependants.  The  accents 
are  accordingly  divided  into  Disjunctives  or  Rulers 
(□"bb"::),  and  Conjunctives  or  Servants  (D^lZJ).  The 
former  indicate  that  the  word  upon  which  they  are 
placed  is  mpre  or  less  separated  from  those  that  follow; 
they  mark  thus  the  end  of  a  clause  or  of  the  section  of 
a  clause  over  which  they  exert  control.  The  latter  indi- 
cate that  the  word  over  or  under  which  they  are  written 
is  connected  with  what  follows  and  belongs  to  the  clause 
or  section  ruled  by  the  next  succeeding  Disjunctive. 

■  a.  The  stress  of  voice  denoted  by  the  accent  must  not  be  confounded 
with  quantity.  An  accented  syllable  may  nevertheless  be  short,  the  energy 
with  which  it  is  pronounced  not  necessarily  affecting  its  length. 

b.  The  Jews  made  use  of  the  accents  as  musical  notes  in  the  cautilla- 
tion  of  the  synagogue,  whence  they  are  also  called  n'i3"'23.  In  the  judgment 
of  some  this  is  a  part,  and  pei'haps  a  leading  part,  of  their  original  design. 
Their  great  variety,  the  frequent  occurrence  of  accents  of  opposite  powers 
upon  the  same  word,  and  the  distinct  system  of  poetical  accents,    favor 


29 


ACCENTS. 


39 


this  opinion.  Such  as  are  curious  to  know  the  details  may  find  the  mode 
of  their  employment  for  this  purpose  explained  at  length  in  Bartoloccii 
Bibliotheca  Magna  Eabbinica,  vol.  iv.  pp.  427—444. 

§  29.  The  Disjunctive  accents  may  be  divided  into 
four  classes  of  various  rank  or  power,  as  follows,  viz: 


Class  I.   Emperors. 

*1.  Silluk 

(,) 

jpsiVt? 

*2.  Athnahh 

Class  II.   Kings. 

«  :  - 

3.  S'gholta 

O 

RinVjo  postp. 

4.  Zakeph  Katon 

(') 

i; 

r^;^  =iDi 

5,  Zakeph  Gadhol 

() 

^■1^5  ^P.l 

*6.  Tiphhha 

(.) 

Class  III.   Dukes. 

^D?'^ 

*7.  E'bhP 

(•) 

T^%"} 

*8.  Shalsheleth 

(') 

'^)>k^'^ 

*9.  Zarka 

(") 

Srs"!]  postp. 

10.  Pashta 

(') 

x-j'v^?  postp. 

11.  y'thibh 

(,) 

^''Tp,^  prep. 

12.  T'bhir 

Class  IV.    Counts. 

■r  I 

*13.  Pazer 

(') 

••  T 

14.  Karne  Phara 

(") 

^'^5  ^^l)? 

15.  T'lisha  Gh'dhola 

(') 

rtiHa  »t'a''^Fi  prep. 

16.  Geresh 

(') 

^■^5 

17.  G'rashayim 

(") 

ST^'^3' 

*18.  P'sik 

0) 

ipiDQ 

The  Conjunctive 

accents,  or  Servants,  are  the  fo 

ing,  viz: 

*19.  Merka 

o 

»3'ia 

*20.  Miinahh 

(.) 

na!)^ 

40 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 

21. 

Merka  Kh'phula 

(.) 

!  KS"!^ 

*22. 

Malipakh 

(.) 

r^cng 

23. 

Darga 

(,) 

it  1- 

*24. 

Kadhina 

(•) 

^^115 

*25. 

Yerahh  ben  Yomo              (v) 

i^ii- 

1?  i^ti!? 

26. 

T'lisha  K'tanna 

( ) 

fTJVP 

5<";3^bn  jjosfp. 

a.  Merka  Kh'phula  has  sometimes  been  reckoned  among  the  Disjunc- 
tives, as  by  Gesenius  in  his  Lehrgebaude;  but  the  absence  of  Daghesh-lene 
in  the  word  following  that  on  which  it  stands  in  Ex.  5:  15,  Ezek.  14:  4, 
proves  that  it  is  a  Conjunctive. 

b.  According  to  their  most  probable  significations,  the  names  of  the 
accents  appear  to  be  in  part  borrowed  from  their  forins  and  in  part  fronx 
their  uses.  Thus  the  Disjunctives:  Silluk,  end;  Athnahh,  rest;  Segholta. 
bunch  of  grapes;  Zakeph,  small  and  great,  causing  suspension;  Tiphhha, 
palm  of  the  hand ;  'R'hhi^,  square  or  rejjosing ;  Shalsheleth,  C/iam;  Zarka, 
dispersion;  Pashta,  expansion  or  letting  down  (the  voice);  Y'thibh,  sitting 
still;  T'bhir,  interruption;  Pazer,  separator;  Karne  Phara,  a  heifer's  horns; 
T'lisha,  great  and  small,  shield;  Geresh,  expulsion;  G'rasbaj'im,  double 
Geresh;  P'sik,  cut  off.  Conjunctives:  Merka,  prolofigi7ig;  Muiialih,  (a  trumpet) 
at  rest,  i.  e.,  in  its  proper  position;  Merka  Kh'phula,  double  Merka;  Mah- 
pakh,  (a.  truimpet)  inverted ;  Bavga,  progress ;  Kadhma,  beginnitig ,  Yerahh 
ben-Yomo,  moon  a  day  old. 

§  30.  1.  Fourteen  of  the  accents  are  written  over,  and 
eleven  under,  the  words  to  which  they  are  attached. 
P'sik,  whose  only  use  is  to  modify  the  power  of  other 
accents,  is  written  after  the  word  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  in  the  same  line  with  it.  The  place  of  the  accents 
is  either  over  or  under  the  letter  preceding  the  tone- 
vowel,  with  the  exception  of  the  prepositives  Y'thibh 
and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola,  wliich  always  accompany  the  initial 
letter  of  the  word,  and  the  postpositives  S'gholta,  Zarka, 
Pashta,  and  T'lisha  K'tanna,  which  stand  upon  the  final 
letter.  Y'thibh  is  only  used  wdien  the  first  is  the  tone- 
syllable.  Pashta  is  repeated  if  the  word  on  which  it 
stands  is  accented  on  the  penult,  e.  g.  ^nh  Gen.  1:2,  or 
ends  with  two  vowelless  letters,  e.  g.  ri'^^1  Ruth  3:7,  or 
if  the  last  letter  has  Pattahh  furtive,  e.  g.  ^T  Gen.  33: 13, 
and  in  some  manuscripts  and  editions  there  is  a  like  re- 


§  31  ACCENTS.  41 

petition  of  S'gliolta,  Zarka  and  T'lisha  K'tanna.  When 
this  is  not  the  case,  there  is  nothing  to  mark  the  tone- 
syllable  of  the  word  unless  this  may  chance  to  be  the 
one  upon  which  the  nature  of  the  accent  in  question 
requires  it  to  be  placed. 

2.  Silluk  has  the  same  form  as  Methegh,  §  44;  but 
the  former  invariably  stands  on  the  tone-syllable  of  the 
last  word  in  the  verse,  wliile  Methegh  is  never  written 
under  a  tone-syllable.  Pashta  is  hkewise  distinguished 
from  Kadhma  only  by  its  position  upon  the  last  letter 
of  the  word,  and  after  the  superscribed  vowel,  if  there 
be  one,  e.  g.  Vu;&5  Gen.  1:  7,  "^^^^'^  Glen.  24:  7,  while 
Kadhma  is  placed  upon  the  letter  precedmg  the  tone- 
vowel,  e.  g.  ^iriJJ;  Gen.  2:19,  where  this  chances  to  be  a 
final  letter  the  laws  of  consecution  only  can  decide;  thus, 
in  Tj?*:!  Gen.  26:4,  ?jn5<".^  Dent.  16:3,  the  accent  is  Pashta, 
but  in  ^?"]Tb^  Gen.  17:8,  r{n«^  1  Sam.  29:  6,  it  is  Kadhma. 
Y'tliibh  is  distinguished  from  Mahpakh  by  being  written 
under  the  first  letter  of  the  word  and  taking  precedence 
of  its  vowel  if  this  be  subscribed,  e.  g.  H^??^  Gen.  1:11, 
%  Gen.  31:  6,  Deut.  10:  17;  Mahpakh  belongs  under 
the  consonant  which  precedes  the  tone-vowel,  and  after 
its  vowel-sign  if  this  be  subscribed,  e.  g.  ^m?~  Gen.  2: 14, 
^^  Gen.  32:  33,  Deut,  4:  7.  When  the  initial  syllable 
bears  the  tone  and  there  is  no  subscribed  vowel,  the  laws 
of  consecution  must  decide;  thus,  in  Jjs^m  the  accent  is 
Y'tliibh  in  Gen.  3: 15,  44: 17;  Deut.  10:  17^;  but  Mahpakh 
in  Josh.  17:  1. 

§  31.  The  accents  already  explained  are  called  the 
prosaic  accents,  and  are  found  in  all  the  books  of  the 
Old  Testament  with  the  exception  of  the  Psalms  (D'^'inri), 
Proverbs  (''^O'^),  and  the  poetic  portion  of  Job  (ui^Ni), 
whose  initials  form  the  technical  word  ri'Ji*.  Here  a 
different  system  of  accentuation  prevails.    Thirteen  of 


42 


OETHOGEAPHT. 


§31 


the  prosaic  accents,  one-half  of  the  whole  number,  no- 
where occur  in  the  books  just  named,  viz.:  S'gholta, 
Zakeph-Katon,  and  Zakejih-Gadhol  of  the  Kings,  Pashta, 
Y'thibh,  and  T'bhir  of  the  Dukes,  Karne  Phara,  T'lisha 
Gh'dhola,  Geresh,  and  G'rashayim,  of  the  Counts,  Merka 
Kh'phula,  Darga,  and  T'lisha  K'tanna  of  the  Conjunc- 
tives. Such  as  are  common  to  both  systems  are  in  the 
previous  table  distinguished  by  an  asterisk.  The  powers 
of  some  of  these,  however,  are  altered,  so  that  a  new 
arrangement  of  them  is  necessary;  and  they  are  supple- 
mented by  additional  signs  formed  by  combining  the 
prosaic  accents  or  assigning  them  unusual  positions.  The 
scale  of  the  poetical  or  metrical  accents  thus  constituted 
is  as  follows,  viz.: 


Disjunctive 

Accents. 

Class  I. 

1. 

Silluk 

(,) 

Ipsi^O 

2. 

Merka-Mahpakh 

-    < « 

or  Olev'^oredh 

(, ) 

r      : 

8. 

Atbnalih 

(.) 

rnnx 

Class  II. 

4. 

K'bhi* 

- 

(•) 

T^T\, 

5. 

B'bhP  Mugrash 

(•') 

T  :  \    -     •    : 

6. 

Zarka  or  Tsinnor 

O 

'lis::  'posti^. 

7. 

Tiphhha  initial  or  D'hlii 

(,) 

''ri'n  ■]^re]p. 

8. 

Pazer 

(') 

"    T 

9. 

Great  Shalsheleth 

0') 

'  ^^^ 

10. 

Azla  L'gliarmeh 

«') 

Iinp"i5^  N^TX 

11. 

Mahpakli  L'gharmeh 

«J 

1  i^2"i?b  -sinia 

12. 

P'sik 

(I) 

ip-iDB 

§31 


I 

ACCENTS. 

CoNjTJNCTivK  Accents. 

13. 

Merka 

v' 

n   :  v 

14. 

Munahh 

^j  -' 

JT 

15. 

Muuahh  superior  or  Illuy 

,j  , 

i>iV? 

16. 

Tiphbha  or  Tarhha 

^v  ' 

^0"^'^ 

17. 

Yerahh  bea  Yomo  or  Galgal 

\  v/ 

bjh^ 

18. 

Mabpakh 

o 

MSn? 

19. 

Kadbma  or  Azla 

/  ^\ 

i^y^>< 

20. 

Shalsbeleth 

/'\ 

^^ 

43 


Tsinnoritli  (")  is  not  a  distinct  accent,  but  is  written 
over  a  simple  syllable  preceding  Merka  or  Malipakh  in 
the  same  word,  D^'^p,  ^T1J2^.  or  in  an  antecedent  mono- 
syllable,  in  which  case  it  supplies  the  place  of  JSIakkeph 
nnn  ^3,  b^  xb^for  n-irr-S,  bj^-^b.  The  disjunctive  Tsmnor 
has  the  same  form  but  is  written  over  the  last  letter  of 
the  word  on  which  it  stands,  C''^^. 

a.  Olev'yoredh  has  a  compound  sign,  resembling  in  form  a  combina- 
tion of  Merka  and  Mahpakh,  the  former  written  under  tlie  tone  syllable, 
the  latter  over  the  syllable  next  preceding,  S^"i;"i;  or  (if  the  tone  be  on 
the  initial  syllable)  over  the  last  syllable  or  letier  of  the  preceding  word, 
*|1J<;  '^rb  (Wickes)  or  ■|']N;  ^x;q  (Baer);  or  (if  this  word  be  accented  on  the 
ultimate)  over  the  first  letter  of  the  word  to  which  it  properly  belongs  or 
between  the  two  Avords,  s:  2Tr  (Wickes)  or  N3'3TJ  (Baer).  When  the  sign 
for  Olev'yoredh  is  divided  between  two  words,  which  should  be  united  by 
Makkeph,  Makkeph  is  not  written  pH'bx  or  ph  Vii  for  ph~bN.  The  sign 
for  R'bhi'*  Mugiash  resembles  a  combination  of  R'bhi^  and  Geresh,  the 
former  on  the  tone  syllable,  the  latter  on  the  initial  letter  of  the  word, 
ri*|53TN1,  bis'.  P'sik  is  occasionally  used  as  with  the  prose  accents,  §  38.  1.  a, 
to  indicate  a  slight  pause  without  affecting  the  consecution;  but  it  may 
likewise,  when  combined  with  three  of  the  Conjunctives  Shalsbeleth,  Kadhma 
or  Azla,  and  Mahpakh,  convert  them  into  weak  Disjunctives,  capable  of 
governing  small  sections  of  their  own. 

b.  The  names  of  the  accents  occurring  in  prose  are  explained  §  29.  b. 
Olev'yoredh  means  ascending  and  descending ;  R'bhi*  Mugrash,  Gereshed- 
R'bhi'^;  Tsinnorand  Tsinnorith,  a  wafer- course;  D'hhi,  thrust  bacK;  L'ghar- 
meh,  by  itself,  i.  e.  independent;  Ilkiy,  hi[ih;  Tarhha,  toiling  along;  Galgal, 
wheel;  Azla,  going  on.  Tiphbha  and  Shalsbeleth,  though  Disjunctives  in 
prose,  are  Conjunctives  in  poetry,  hence  the  absence  of  Daghesh-lene  after 
the  former  in  D'^nrs  N'iS'a  Prov.  8:  3,  and  the  presence  of  Daghesh-forte 
Conjunctive  after  the  latter  in  ib  tiri'lUi'^  Ps.  3:  3. 


44  oethogeapht.  §  32 

Position  of  the  Accent. 

§  32.  The  accent  in  Hebrew  may  fall  either  upon  the 
ultimate  or  the  penultimate  syllable,  but  never  at  a 
greater  remove  from  the  end  of  the  word.  In  the  former 
case  words  are  technically  termed  Milra  ("^^^12  from  he- 
low),  and  in  the  latter  Milel  {^^b'Z  from  cibove). 

1.  The  position  of  the  accent  may  be  considered  in 
relation  either  to  the  syllabic  or  to  the  etymological 
structure  of  a  word,  that  is  to  say,  as  effected  by  the 
nature  of  its  syllables  on  the  one  hand  or  of  the  elements 
of  which  it  is  composed  as  a  significant  part  of  speech 
on  the  other.  It  is  so  far  determined  by  the  syllabic 
structure  of  words,  that  a  long  mixed  syllable  or  a  short 
simple  syllable,  whether  in  the  ultimate  or  the  penulti- 
mate, must  receive  the  accent,  §  18.2,  thus:  pHJ?"],  nw"^^;r|1, 
HTiT,  n']"'.  But  the  accent  can  never  fall  upon  a  vocal 
Sh'va,  or  upon  a  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va. 

2.  Considered  in  reference  to  their  etymological 
structure,  words  exist  in  two  conditions,  (1.)  their  primary 
unmflected  state,  by  which  their  essential  and  proper 
meaning  is  conveyed;  (2.)  with  added  af&xes  and  pre- 
fixes, by  which  that  meaning  is  variously  modified.  In 
their  nude  or  primary  state  all  words,  whether  primi- 
tives or  derivatives,  are  accented  upon  the  ultimate,  and 
so  continue  to  whatever  flexion,  involving  no  terminational 
appendages,  the}^  may  be  subjected.     Thus,  "jbs,   "pS, 

ips,  nps,  -pD,  ipir^,  nj^^rir:;  -p-^T,  -pnipT;  ni--j,  '%Tq\ 

3.  The  only  exception  is  a  class  of  words  called  Se- 
gholates,  in  which  the  last  vowel  does  not  belong  origin- 
ally or  essentially  to  the  form,  but  is  introduced  for 
the  sake  of  softening  the  pronunciation,  §  CI.  2;  these 


§  33  POSITION  OF  THE  ACCENT.  45 

are  accented  on  the  penultimate,  as  lf^2,  ^Sp,  rill^S,  m'ln, 

a.  !Ti^"5  Is.  50:  8  is  said  to  be  the  only  instance  of  a  word  accented  on 
the  antepenult.  The  proper  tone-syllable  of  this  word  is  the  ultimate,  but 
upon  the  recession  of  the  accent  by  §  35,  the  vowel  next  preceding,  which 
has  arisen  from  Sh'va  and  is  unessential  to  the  form,  cannot  receive  it,  so 
that  it  necessarily  faUs  upon  the  one  still  further  back.  In  "1^'^"3  Ex.  15:  8, 
a  word  of  the  same  formation  the  accent  takes  the  place  of  Methegh,  §  45 :  5, 
comp.  -sts'^yn  Isa.  40: 18,  ">l3Sn;;l  Job  12:  15;  n^ni*?^  and  rTni;ij  are  the  only 
words  in  which  the  principal  accent  is  followed  by  a  compound  Sh'va. 

§  33.  The  additions  which  words  may  receive  at  the 
beginning  or  end  affect  the  accent  in  proportion  to  the 
respective  weight  accorded  to  them.  Additions  to  the 
end  of  words  are  of  two  sorts,  which  may  be  distin- 
guished as  affixes  and  suffixes.  Affixes  are  so  welded  to 
the  word  or  merged  in  it  that  in  the  popular  conscious- 
ness they  have  become  an  integral  part  of  it,  and  their 
independent  existence  or  separate  origin  is  no  longer 
thought  of;  such  are  the  personal  inflections  of  verbs  and 
the  terminations  indicating  gender  and  number  in  nouns 
and  adjectives.  Suffixes  are  not  so  intimately  blended 
with  the  word  to  which  they  are  attached  as  to  have 
lost  their  individual  identity  and  independent  character, 
and  consequently  are  of  greater  weight  as  respects  the 
accent;  such  are  the  fragmentary  pronouns  appended  to 
verbs,  nouns,  and  prepositions. 

1.  If  the  appendage  consists  of  a  vowel  (as  n^,  rf,  ^, 
i,  ''.,  ^..),  or  begins  with  one  (as  n^,  \,  V^,  D^,,  T\\  1\^,  Tj.., 
D^,  1^,  U^,  t]";.),  and  can  consequently  only  be  pronounced 
by  the  aid  of  the  final  consonant  of  the  word  to  which 
it  is  attached,  it  will  attract  the  accent  to  itself  or  to  its 
initial  vowel  from  a  noun,  adjective,  participle,  or  pre- 
position, as  ^nn%  in^'i,  n'^2%  ^^2^,  ^;'^n"n,  riz'n  from  "^n-n; 
D^izJ'ij^,  ^i2?"|>  from  TTjp.  Such  an  appendage  to  a  verb,  if 
a  suffix,  win  receive  the  accent,  unless  the  verb  be  in  the 
3  fem.  sing,  of  the  preterite,  when  the  accent  will  retain 


46  OBTHOGRAPHY.  §  33 

its  original  position  unchanged.  The  accent  will  also 
remain  in  its  original  position  on  the  verb,  if  the  appen- 
dage be  an  affix,  unless  it  is  either  dissyllabic  or  causes 
the  rejection  of  the  vowel  previously  accented;  D^i"vi 
with  a  suffix  ffb^irivi'  ^^^  ^'^^^  ^^  ^^^  ^"^^it]\3;  ^t?  "^'i^h 
a  suffix  iiny,  but  with  an  affix  when  the  vowel  is  re- 
tained  Tq^^,  when  it  is  rejected  ^12T,  HCn,  mI'wm,  ^CH;  5j? 
with  affixes  ri^jb,  ^bp_,  ^Ti^p;  3  fem.  sing.  pret.  with  suf- 
fixes, Dn5;s;  from  fl)'^^  (primitive  form  t6~^),  so  DnirpS, 
tir^irii^?;-  It  is  to  be  observed,  however,  that  a  paragogic 
n  or  n.,  §  61.  6,  attached  to  nouns,  pronouns,  and  ad- 
verbs, and  occasionally  a  paragogic  \  does  not  disturb 
the  position  of  the  accent,  e.  g.  yiN,  T'C^'^i^;  nb,  nr5;  so 
n^h,  ri-^k,  M^iiJ,  ^nnn  Lam.  1:  1,  but  ^n^^V^  Isa.  1:  21; 
neither  does  the  feminine  ending  n,,  which  is  a  Segholate 
formation,  §  185,  e.  g.  ^hl'Z,  H'^^Tf 

a.  The  affix  receives  the  accent  in  "^^^3^!^  Ruth  2:8  from  "liiP),  but 
not  in  the  corresponding  form  !ii:!lb-i'^  Ex.  18:26  from  t:Q'^";i;  though  in  the 
latter  instance  a  monosyllable  follows,  in  consequence  of  which  the  accent 
would  have  been  shifted  to  the  penult  by  §  35.  1,  even  though  its  proper 
place  had  been  on  the  ultimate.  Paragogic  n  receives  the  accent,  though 
the  preceding  vowel  remains,  in  the  verbal  form  ■iX'^pN^  1  Sam.  28:  5. 

2.  The  appending  of  a  simple  syllable,  such  as  the 
suffixes  ^:,  ^D,  ^H,  t],  i'2,  or  the  verbal  suffixes  T,  ^ri,  ^D,  HD, 
will  not  alter  the  position  of  the  accent  provided  it  ori- 
ginally stood  upon  the  ultimate;  if,  however,  its  original 
place  was  the  penult,  or  if  the  syllable  in  question  be 
attached  to  the  word  by  a  union  vowel,  the  accent  must 
be  carried  forward  one  syllable  to  prevent  its  standing 
on  the  antepenult,  which  is  never  admissible:  mD3,  ^riDS, 

i:::s3,  "rs3;  ck'^,  ricx"^,  ^sncs^-f,  bp,  ni^Ti'ip.  Suffixes 

appended  to  a  word  ending  with  a  consonant  mostly 
require  a  connecting  vowel,  and  consequently  shift  the 
position  of  the  accent.  Affixes,  by  reason  of  the  less 
weight  accorded  to  them,  commonly  do  not.    The  suffix 


§  34  POSITION  OF  THE  ACCENT.  47 

^  follows  the  general  rule  when  preceded  by  a  union 
vowel,  but  draws  the  accent  upon  itself  when  it  is  not, 
e.  g.  T,  Yj"!.^,  t|*l^,  '^j'iij.  A  consonantal  appendage  to  a 
long  unaccented  vowel,  inasmuch  as  it  converts  the  ulti- 
mate into  a  mixed  syllable,  necessarily  draws  the  accent 
upon  it  from  the  penult,   §  32.  1,  e.  g.  TlCk'^,  I^Fipl^l^, 

3.  A  mixed  syllable,  whether  an  affix  as  Dri,  '^T),  or 
suffix  as  UD,  "j^,  Dn,  ■»!,  will  attract  the  accent  to  itself, 

anrbn  from  i\iri;  obsb"^,  Db;5b-^  from  r\)b',  on^anrifrom 

D^'hfl.  In  the  unusual  form  Dn>3  2  Sam.  23:  6,  the  accent 

-AT    S  ' 

stands  upon  the  union  vowel. 

4.  The  only  prefixes  which  exercise  any  influence 
upon  the  position  of  the  accent,  are  the  Yav  conversive 
of  the  future,  which  draws  back  the  accent  from  a  mixed 
ultimate  to  a  simple  penult,  '"!''2ik^,  '^'r^^),  zifl"^,  iuj^l;  and 
the  Vav  conversive  of  the  preterite,  which  throws  it  for- 
ward from  the  penult  to  a  simple  ultimate,  T]^J2iH,  Snl^JJ'], 

T  :    -t'      t  ;    -  t  :'        •  I"  -:i- 

a.  Some  languages  invariably  accent  the  same  part  of  the  word;  thus, 
Bohemian  and  Lettish  the  initial  syllable,  Polish  and  Lazian,  one  of  the 
Caucasian  tongues,  the  penult  of  all  polysyllables.  Others,  in  which  more 
freedom  is  allowed,  have  no  respect  to  the  etymological  structure  of  words, 
but  are  guided  entirely  by  the  character  of  their  syllables.  Thus,  in  Arabic 
and  Latin  words  are  accented  according  to  the  quantity  of  the  penult;  the 
accent  is  given  to  the  penult  if  it  is  long,  to  the  antepenult  if  the  penult 
is  short.  In  others  still  the  etymological  principle  is  the  prevailing  one, 
and  this  often  has  a  wider  scope  than  in  Hebrew.  Thus,  in  Greek  the 
accent  has  the  range  of  the  last  three  syllables.  In  Sanscrit  it  may  stand 
upon  any  syllable  whatever  even  of  the  longest  words.  In  English  it  is 
almost  equally  free,  e.  g.  peremptorily,  inconsideration,  its  removal  from 
its  primary  position  upon  the  radical  portion  of  the  word  being  conditioned 
by  the  respective  weight  of  the  formative  syllables  appended,  e.  g.  person, 
personate,  personally,  personify,  personality,  personification. 

§  34.  The  location  of  the  accent  being  thus  influenced 
by  the  etymological  structure  of  words,  it  may  serve  to 
distinguish  words  of  hke  appearance  but  diff'erent  for- 
mation. Thus,  ftcq  G-en.  30:  1,  rj^2  Gen.  29:  6,  are  parti- 


43  OETHOGRAPHT.  ^35 

ciples,  but  Tiff 2  Gen.  35:  18,  Hijn  Gen.  29:  9,  are  prete- 
rites, the  feminine  affix  receiving  the  accent  in  one  case 
but  not  in  the  other,  §  33. 1.  So  ^i^  they  built,  from  mD^, 
but  ^Dia  in  us;  ^zna  they  carried  captive  from  niTfl,  but  ^iz: 
thei/  returned  from  n^UJ;  ihi^  he  has  seized,  but  THJ^  Job 
23:  9  I  shall  see  from  nTn;  :J'T'  «^  shall  be  evil  from  :?y"i, 

T    T   '  -••  -  t' 

y^i?.  he  shall  feed  from  n>"i ;  Tn'2  he  was  rebellious,  rr^'h  it 
was  bitter  from  ^53;  ""^^p  ame  ^/io^«  (fern.),  *h^p  my  ris- 
ing up. 

§  35.  The  position  of  the  accent  may  be  shifted  from 
the  following  causes,  viz: 

1.  A  Conjunctive  is  frequently  removed  from  the 
ultimate  to  a  simple  penult  if  a  Disjunctive  immediately 
follows,  whether  upon  a  monosyllable  or  a  dissyllable 
accented  on  the  penult,  in  order  to  prevent  the  un- 
pleasant concurrence  of  two  accented  syllables  in  closely 
connected  words,  e.  g.  n^b  ^*yg  Gen.  1 :  5,  T2?  rivh  Gen. 
4:  17,  t  nbi^  Deut.  32:  36,  T]TI  ^ini^n']  Ps.  2:  12.'  In  a 
few  exceptional  cases  the  secondary  accent  Methegh 
remains  to  mark  the  original  tone-syllable,  after  the 
principal  accent  has  been  thrown  back,  'j^j^^  ^^nb  Num. 
24:  22,  r±  bn3  Isa.  40:  7,  D2?  yi2'u:n  Deut.  4:^33."' 

a.  But  the  accent  will  not  be  shifted  from  one  of  the  so-called  grave 
suffixes  Sn,  -n,  C3,  '3,  §  33.  3,  '^n  CS-irix  Gen.  43:  7;  nor  to  a  penult  which 
is  a  mixed  syllable,  n^  '^"Jp''.!!  Num.  32:  42;  nor  ordinarily  from  a  mixed 
ultimate  having  a  long  vowel,  §  32.  1,  ih  'Z'^'^l  Judg.  6:  31,  "^  Dp;  Ps, 
94:  16.  A  mutable  Tsere  or  Hholem  may,  however,  be  shortened  and  the 
accent  removed  iV  'S^^  (for  "2^"^)  Judg.  6:  31,  Isa.  36:  8.  In  the  preterite 
infinitive  and  participles  of  verbs  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  cannot  be  shortened 
to  Seghol,  but  the  accent  maj'  still  be  shifted  and  the  secondary  accent 
Methegh,  §  44,  be  placed  on  the  original  tone-syllable  '"^p^  "^r!jr'-?  Num.  24:  22, 
y^  briD^  Isa.  40:  7.  8,  49:  7,  66:  3,  Ezek.  22:  25.  Methegh  Avill  also  stand 
on  the  ultimate  after  the  removal  of  the  accent,  if  the  word  ends  with  the 
same  letter  with  Avhich  the  next  begins,  in  order  that  the  stress  of  the 
voice  may  keep  them  distinct  T^irn  nbd  Ps.  105:  28,  D?  ^.'prn  Deut.  4:  33, 
Num.  17:  23,  or  if  it  ends  with  the  weak  letter  5  preceded  by  Pattahh 
•iV  ynui'l  Gen.  24:  9. 


§  36       CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PEOSE.         49 

2.  The  special  emphasis  given  to  the  last  word  of  a 
clause  or  section,  and  represented  by  what  are  called  the 
pause  accents,  §  36,  2,  a,  is  sometimes  rendered  more 
bistinct  by  a  change  of  the  accented  syllable  from  the 
ultimate  to  the  penult,  e.  g.  ^bbi^,  ^!jb^;  mFS:,  TiP^^;  rirjy, 
r.P^j  ^bs,  ilbS;  or  from  the  penult  to  the  ultimate,  parti- 
cularly in  the  case  of  forms  with  Vav  conversive  of  the 
future  ^)^^,  Tj^V,  so  b'^ri^l,  dj^^l,  "1"^^^^  The  accent  is  in 
a  few  instances  attracted  to  a  short  final  syllable  ending 
in  a  weak  letter,  e.  g.  ^i^";  Gen.  41:  33  for  5^T;  so  t^in 
Zech.  9:  5,  Mic.  7:  10,  T^ri  Ps.  39:  14  for  Tah;  or  to  "a 
final  n^  followed  by  an  initial  guttural,  when  greater 
energy  of  voice  is  necessary  to  distinctness  of  utterance, 
thus  niab  becames  fh^b  before  !J<  Gen.  27:  45,  before  H 

T   T  T  T  ' 

Num.  20:  4.  5,  21:  5,  before  y  Judg.  12:  3,  15:  10;  ni^'l 
becomes  tlh''^  before  "^  Ps.  74:  22;  so  nin  Gen.  29:  21, 
n^^D  Judg.  4:  18,  niV::  Isa.  44:  22. 

a.  nali,  iTa^p,  na^^  rinTb  are  accented  on  the  ultimate  before  tlini, 
which  the  Jews  read  ''i"!^?.  In  like  manner  la'pin  becames  ^E^oin  before  ^X"!?"^ 
Isa.47: 1,  5,  to  prevent  the  confusion  of  similar  sounds  concurring  at  the  end 
of  one  word  and  the  beginning  of  the  next.  In  C"iJs  nrns  Gen.  28:  2,  5,  6,  7 
the  accent  cannot  be  shifted,  §  32.  1,  but  the  secondary  accent  Methegh  is 
given  to  the  final  syllable;  so  frequently  to  a  final  guttural  preceded  by 
Pattahh  "a^X  HDi]  Hos.  4:  4,  or  Pattahh  furtive,  ric|ri  S-^na  Gen.  44:  2. 

Consecution  of  Accents  in  Peose. 

§  36.  1.  The  second  use  of  the  accents  is  to  point  out 
the  relation  of  words  to  one  another.  The  Disjunctives 
indicate  a  greater  or  less  separation  between  the  word 
on  which  they  stand  and  the  following  one;  the  Con- 
junctives indicate  a  connection.  The  greatest  separation 
of  all  is  effected  by  Silluk,  which  is  written  under  the 
last  word  of  every  verse,  and  is  followed  invariably  hy 
two  dots  vertically  placed  (j),  called  SophPasuk  (p^DS  CpO 
end  of  the  verse).  The  next  in  power  are  Athnahh  and 
S'gholta.     When  a  verse  was  to  be   divided  into  two 

4 


50  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  36 

clauses,  AthnaWi  was  placed  under  the  last  word  of  the 
first  clause,  Silluk  maintaining  its  position  at  the  end  of 
the  verse.  If  it  was  to  be  divided  into  three  clauses, 
which  is  the  greatest  number  that  any  verse  can  have, 
the  last  word  of  the  first  clause  receives  S'gholta,  the 
last  word  of  the  second  Athnahh,  and  the  last  of  all 
Silluk.  Verses  of  one  clause  range  from  Gen.  26:  6,  con- 
taining three  words,  to  such  as  Jer.  13:13  and  1  Chron. 
28:  1,  containing  more  than  twenty:  the  most  common 
division  is  into  two  clauses,  e.  g.  Gen.  1:11  y^XH . . .  cnbiii^; 
three  clauses  are  much  less  frequent.  Gen.  1:7  ...  <"'p'^n 
.♦p.rp'^b  23:  16,  24:30,  26:28. 

a.  In  Job  1 :  8  (except  in  Baer"s  edition)  S'gholta  occurs  in  a  verse  of 
two  clauses  without  Athnahh,  probably  because  the  accentuation  is  con- 
formed to  that  of  Job  2 :  3. 

2.  Each  of  these  clauses  is  capable  of  subdivision  to 
whatever  extent  its  lenoi-th  or  character  mav  seem  to 
demand  by  the  Disjunctives  Zakeph  Katon,  Zakeph 
Gadhol,  R'bhi",  Pazer,  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola,  according 
to  the  number  of  sections  to  be  made  and  the  various 
degrees  of  their  completeness.  Thus,  in  Josh.  1 :  8 
the  clause  of  Athnahh  is  divided  into  five  sections, 
^:n  .  nfeb  . .  nb-;!? . . .  ^-B!a  . . .  mii,  in  2  Kin.  l:  6  into 
six,  "ji^py  . . .  izjn^b  nb'ti:".  bknic^n  .  .  rHrr^  .  .  rbx.    The 

choice  of  the  accent  to  govern  a  particular  section  de- 
pends not  only  upon  its  power,  but  likewise  upon  its 
rank,  the  more  exalted  officer  standing  in  ordinary  cases 
nearer  the  sovereign.  Accordingly  toward  the  beginning 
of  a  clause  an  inferior  Disjunctive  will  be  used,  even 
though  the  separation  is  such  as  would  require  an  ac- 
cent of  much  higher  power  to  indicate  it  in  a  more 
advanced  portion  of  the  same  clause.  These  accents, 
moreover,  have  not  a  fixed  value  like  the  stops  in  other 
languages;  their  power  is  not  absolute  but  relative,  and 


§37,38         CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PEOSE.  51 

varies  endlessly  with  the  circumstances  of  the  case. 
Athnahh.  in  Gen.  1 :  1  marks  the  greatest  division  in  the 
verse,  but  that  is  not  sufficient  to  require  a  comma.  In  the 
next  verse  Zakepli  Katon  is  equal  to  a  semicolon  in  the 
first  clause  and  less  than  a  comma  in  the  second.  In 
Gren.  27:  16  the  separation  indicated  by  R'bhr  is  whoUy 
rhythmical. 

a.  Those  accents  which,  as  above  described,  mark  the  Umits  of  clauses 
and  sections,  are  denominated  pause  accents. 

§  37.  In  the  sections  thus  created  the  accents  are 
disposed  relatively  to  the  Disjunctive  wliich  marks  its 
close.  Each  ruler  has  his  servant  and  subordinate  officer, 
whose  function  it  is  to  wjait  upon  him.  In  other  words, 
each  Disjunctive  is  regularly  preceded  by  ^  particular 
Conjunctive  and  inferior  Disjunctive;  and  the  train  of 
accents  in  each  section  is  formed  by  arranging  the  Dis- 
junctives in  their  fixed  order  of  succession  with  or  with- 
out their  regular  Conjunctives  until  all  its  words  are 
supplied.  The  trains  proper  to  the  different  sections  are 
shown  in  the  following  table  (p.  52). 

a.  Accents  of  like  forms  are  readily  distinguishable  in  the  table  by  the 
column  in  which  they  stand.  Where  perspicuity  requires  it  the  distinction 
will  hereafter  be  made  by  appending  their  initial  letters,  thus:  Kadhma  * 
Pashta  '*,  Mahpakh  <»»,  Y'thibh  <  y. 

§  38.  Explanation  of  the  Table. — The  trains  preceding 
the  three  principal  accents  are  exhibited  in  the  hori- 
zontal hues  of  the  uppermost  division;  those  of  the 
ordinary  dependent  sections  in  tlie  middle  division,  and 
those  of  rare  occurrence  at  the  bottom. 

1.  Train  of  Silluk. — If  Silluk  be  immediately  pre- 
ceded by  a  Conjunctive,  it  will  be  Merka;  if  a  Disjunctive 
precede  it  in  the  same  section,  with  or  without  an  inter- 
vening Merka,  it  will  be  Tiphhha,  Gren.  1:  1.  If  there  be 
a  Conjunctive  before  Tiphhha,  it  will  be  Merka,  Gren.  1:1; 
if  two  Conjunctives,  which  occurs  but  fourteen  times, 


52 


OETHOGKAPHY. 


§38 


Primary 
Sections. 

>M 

Q 

s 

> 

H 
O 

ti 

s 

o 

D  M 

Is 

P 

H 

z 

7. 
O 

O    CO 

a  < 

> 

H 
O 

9 

s 

is; 

Conjunctives. 

* 

^ 

\ 

,(„) 

y 

.(,)'(/ 

'(') 

'oXx. 

h 

J 

••• 

..(.) 

- 

//(.)' 

Skcondaky 

Sections. 

! 

J  J 

'(.) 

<UX)* 

=' 

• 

J.W 

H 

'    JJJJ 

P 

UWDSUAIj 

Sections. 

! 
1 

<>P 

V-I  J  J  J  J 

they  will  be  Merka  Kh'phula  and  Darga,  Gen.  27:  25,  , 
Lev.  10:  1,  2   Chron.  20:  30.  The  next  Disjunctive  before 
Tiphhha,  in  the  same  section,  will  be  T'bhir,  Gen.  1:4.  If 
T'bliir  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will  be  Darga, 


§  38  CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PEOSE.  53 

Gen.  1:  12,  or  Merka,  Gen.  1:  26;  if  by  two,  the  second 
will  be  Kadhma,  1  Sam.  15:  33,  or  Munahh,  Gen.  2:  4; 
and  if  by  three,  the  third  will  be  T'hsha  K'tanna,  Gen. 
2:19.  The  next  Disjunctive  before  T'bliir,  in  the  same 
section,  will  be  Geresh,  Gen.  26: 11,  27:4,  or  G'rashayim, 
Ex.  23:  4.  If  Geresh  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive, 
it  will  be  Kadhma,  Gen.  24:  7,  or  Munahh,  Isa.  60:  17; 
if  by  a  second,  it  will  be  T'lisha  K'tanna,  Gen.  2:5,  or 
Munahh  with  P'sik,  Gen.  28:  9;  if  by  a  third,  it  wiU  be 
Munahh,  1  Sam.  14:  34;  if  by  a  fourth,  it  will  also  be 
Munahh,  Deut.  1:  19. 

a.  The  parentheses  of  the  table  contain  alternate  accents.  Thus,  Merka 
is  substituted  for  Darga  and  for  Mahpakh  (before  Pashta  in  the  clause  of 
Zakej)]!  Katon)  if  no  more  than  one  vowel  intervenes  between  the  Con- 
junctive and  the  king  which  it  precedes,  e.  g.  Gen.  1:  22;  Gen.  1:  24,  26; 
Gen.  5:  17;  Deut,  1:  2,  35.  Munahh  is  also  regularly  substituted  for 
Kadhma,  whenever  the  accent  stands  on  the  initial  letter  of  the  word.  Gen. 
25:  8;  Gen.  19:  35;  1  Kin.  19:  7;  Deut.  1:  28;  Gen.  19:  12;  Eccl.  6:  7,  un- 
less T'lisha  K'tanna  precedes  Gen.  2:  5.  G'rashayim  takes  the  place  of 
Geresh  provided  the  accent  is  on  the  ultimate  and  it  is  not  preceded  by 
Kadhma  either  on  the  same  or  the  previous  woi'd,  Ex.  16:  23,  36:  3.  When 
two  accents  are  included  in  a  parenthesis  the  meaning  is  that  if  an  ad- 
ditional accent  is  required,  these  tAvo  will  take  the  place  of  the  one  before 
the  parenthesis.  P'sik  has  no  separate  place  in  the  consecution,  but  is 
joined  with  the  other  accents  to  modify  their  power.  It  is  constantly 
associated  with  the  Disjunctive  Shalsheleth  to  add  to  its  strength,  and 
occasionally  with  the  different  Conjunctives  to  reduce  their  strength,  but 
without  disturbing  the  order  of  their  consecution,  e.  g.  with  Merka  Ex.  16:5, 
Munahh  Gen.  22:  11,  Mahpakh  Ex.  30 :  34,  Kadhma  Lev.  11 :  32,  Darga  Gen. 
42:  13,  T'lisha  K'tanna  1  Sam.  12:  3.  It  is  frequently  used  to  indicate  a 
slight  pause  between  closely  related  words,  as  where  the  same  word  is 
repeated,  Gen.  22:  11,  46:  2,  Ex.  16:  5,  or  before  or  after  the  name  of  God 
Gen.  1:  5,  10,  27. 

2.  Train  of  Athnahh. — If  Athnahh  be  preceded  by  a 
Conjunctive,  it  will  be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:1;  if  by  a  Dis- 
junctive in  its  own  section,  it  will  be  Tiphhha,  Gen.  1:1. 
The  accents  which  precede  Tiphhha  have  already  been 
mentioned  in  explaining  the  train  of  Silluk. 

3.  Train  of  S'ghoUa. — The  first  Conjunctive  before 
S'gholta  will  be  Munahh,  Gen.  3 :  3 ;  if  there  be  two,  the 


54  OKTHOGEAPHT.  §  38 

second  will  be  Mimahh,  Lev.  8:  31,  or  Mcrka,  Gen.  3:  14. 
The  first  Disjunctive  in  its  section  will  be  Zarka,  Gen. 
1 :  28;  and  if  this  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will 
be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:7,  or  Merka,  1  Chron.  5:  18;  if  by 
two,  the  second  will  be  Kadhma,  Gen.  30:  16,  31:  32,  or 
Munahh  Ex.  20:  9;  if  by  three,  the  third  will  be  T'hsha 
K'tanna  Gen.  3:  14,  or  the  second  may  be  Munahh  and 
the  third  Kadhma,  Lev.  4:35.  The  next  Disjunctive  be- 
fore Zarka  will  be  Geresh,  Gen.  24:  7,  or  G'rashayim, 
Ex.  39:  3.  The  accents  preceding  these  have  been  ex- 
plained in  1. 

4.  Train  of  ZakepJi  Katon. — The  first  Conjunctive 
before  Zakeph  Katon  will  be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:  2,  the 
second  hkewise  Munahh,  Gen.  3:  12,  27:  45.  The  first 
Disjunctive  will  be  Pashta,  Gen.  1:2;  or,  if  the  proper 
place  of  the  accent  be  the  first  letter  of  the  word,  Y'thibh, 
Gen.  1:  11,  2:  11.  The  first  Conjunctive  before  Pashta 
wiU  be  Mahpakh,  Gen.  1:9,  or  Merka,  Gen.  1:  2;  the 
second,  Kadhma,  Gen.  39:  19,  or  Munahh,  Gen.  1:  12; 
the  third  will  be  T'lisha  K'tanna,  Ezr.  3:11.  The  Dis- 
junctive before  Pashta  wiU  be  Geresh,  Gen.  1:  24,  or 
G'rashayim,  Gen.  1:  11;  the  further  consecution  is  ex- 
plained in  1. 

a.  In  some  instances  Pashta  is  found  not  in  the  train  of  Zakeph  Katon, 
but  seeming  to  govern  an  independent  section,  e.  g.  Gen.  27:  37,  Ex.  29:20, 
Deut.  9:  6,  Josh.  10:  11,  1  Sam.  14:  45,  2  Sam.  14:  7,  1  Kin.  18:  21,  2  Chron. 
18:  23. 

5.  Zakeph  Gadhol  is  mostly  used  instead  of  Zakeph 
Katon  when  no  other  accent  precedes  it  in  its  own 
section,  whether  upon  the  same  word  or  one  before  it. 

6.  Tram  of  R'bJu". — The  first  Conjunctive  before 
R'bhi*  will  be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:9;  the  second,  Munahh 
commonly  with  Fsik,  Gsn.  2:  5,  or  Darga,  Gen,  G:  15; 
the  third,  Munahh  with  P'sik,  Gen.  7:  23,  19:  14,  31:  29, 
or  Merka,  Ex.  14:  10.  The  Disjunctive  before  E'bhl*  will 


§  oO  CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PEOSE.  55 

be  Geresli,  Ex.  16:  3,  or  Gr'rashayim,  Deut.  1:11,  which 
are  preceded  as  m  1. 

7.  Train  of  Pazer. — Pazer  may  be  preceded  by  one 
Mnnahh,  1  Sam.  14:  34,  by  two,  Ezek.  9:  2,  by  three, 
1  Sam.  14:  34,  or  by  four,  Isa.  66:  20. 

8.  Train  of  T'lisha  Gh'clJiola. — T'lisha  Grh'dhola  is  the 
weakest  of  the  Disjunctives  which  are  ever  set  to  rule 
independent  sections.  Its  weakness  is  in  fact  such,  that 
it  is  sometimes  drawn  into  the  section  of  a  stronger  Dis- 
junctive; thus,  in  Gen.  1:  12,  Lev.  4:  7,  1  Sam.  17:  51, 
Isa.  9:  5,  Neh.  5:  18,  it  takes  the  place  of  T'lisha  K'tanna 
among  the  antecedents  of  Pashta,  standing  between  it 
and  Geresh  or  G'rashayim;  in  Gen.  13:  1,  21:  14,  Deut. 
26:  12,  it  stands  similarly  between  T'bhir  and  Geresh  or 
G'rashayim.  And  in  many  cases,  perhaps  in  most,  when 
it  rules  a  section  of  its  own,  this  is  a  mere  subsection, 
not  so  much  a  division  of  one  of  the  principal  clauses  as 
a  fragment  broken  off  from  one  of  the  larger  sections  at 
a  point  where  T'lisha  K'tanna  would  have  stood  had  the 
connection  been  sufficiently  close  to  require  a  Conjunc- 
tive, e.  g.  Gen.  19:2,  1  Kin.  20:  28.  That  this  is  not 
always  so  appears,  however,  from  examples  like  Gen.  7:  7, 
37:  7,  1  Sam.  17:  51,  2  Sam.  14:  32,  Isa.  66:  19,  Jer. 
39:5.  T'hsha  Gh'dhola  may  be  preceded  by  one  Munahh, 
Gen.  27:  46,  by  two,  Josh.  2:  1,  by  three,  or  by  four, 
1  Kin.  2:  5. 

9.  Shalsheleth  occurs  but  seven  times,  viz.,  Gen.l9: 1 6, 
24:  12,  39:  8,  Lev.  8:  23,  Isa.  13:  8,  Am.  1:2,  Ezr.  5:  12, 
and  in  every  instance  stands  upon  the  initial  word  of  the 
verse,  and  is  accompanied  by  P'sik.  It  has  consequently 
no  antecedents. 

10.  Kaine  Phara  is  only  used  sixteen  times.  Its  section 
never  contains  less  than  three  words:  its  immediate  prede- 
cessor is  always  Yerahh  ben  Yomo,  to  which  may  be 


56  OBTHOGBAPHY.  §39 

added  oneMimaMi,  Num.  35:  5,  Neli.  5: 13,  13:  5,  2  Cliron. 
24:  5;  two,  2  Kin.  10:  5,  Jer.  38:  25,  Est.  7:  9,  Neli.  1 :  6, 
2  Cliron.  35:  7;  three.  Josh.  19:51,2  Sam.4: 2,  Jer.  13:13; 
four,  1  Chron.  28:  1;  or  five,  Ezek.  48:  21. 

§  39.  1.  The  complete  trams  of  the  several  accents  con- 
taui  one  Disjunctive  from  each  of  the  inferior  orders,  dis- 
posed in  due  succession  of  rank,  with  one  Conjunctive 
inamediately  preceding  the  first  class  of  Disjunctives,  two 
Conjunctives  preceding  the  second  class,  three  the  tliird 
class,  four  or  more  the  fourth  class.  These  trains  are 
adapted  to  sections  of  different  length  and  character  by 
omitting  such  of  the  Conjunctives,  and  more  rarely  by 
repeating  such  of  the  Disjunctives,  as  the  mutual  relations 
of  the  words  may  seem  to  require,  and  bre;  king  off  the 
series  as  soon  as  every  word  in  the  section  is  supplied. 
Thus,  while  the  general  order  of  consecution  is  fixed  and 
invariable,  there  is  the  utmost  Hberty  and  variety  in 
particular  cases. 

a-  In  a  very  few  instances  the  Conjunctives  go  beyond  the  number 
here  assigned.  Thus,  Athnahh  is  preceded  by  two  Munahhs  in  Gen.  40:  16, 
Ex.  3:  4,  1  Sam.  17:  39,  Isa.48:  11.  T'bhir  is  preceded  by  four  Conjunctives, 
Josh.  10:  11,  2  Chron.  22:  11,  Isa,  66:  20;  Pashta  by  four,  Ex.  5:  8,  1  Sam. 
15:  9,  2  Kin.  5:  1,  and  even  by  five,  Jos.  19:  51,  1  Sam.  7:  10. 

2.  If  a  section  consists  of  but  a  single  word,  this  will 
receive  the  appropriate  Disjunctive,  the  entire  antecedent 
series  of  the  table  being  then  omitted  as  unnecessary 
thus,  Silluk  IT^m  Gen.  5:5;  Atlmalih  ^t^^'^  Gen.  24:  34 
Zakeph  KatonVlilO^  Isa.  1:  30;  R'bhi''  D^:2ni  Gen.  7:  19 
Pazer  r^lik^']  Gen.' 22:  2;  T'lisha  Gh'dhola  pn  Gen.  19:8. 
This,  as  has  been  already  said,  is  the  regular  length  of 
the  sections  of  Zakeph  Gadhol  andShalsheleth;  but  those 
of  S'gholta  are  never  composed  of  less  than  two  words, 
and  those  of  Karne  Phara  never  of  less  than  three. 

3.  In  sections  of  greater  length  there  is  a  disposition 
towards  a  regular  alternation  of  Disjunctives  and  Con- 


§  39  CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PKOSE.  57 

junctives  upon  successive  words,  e.  g.  Gen.  23:  11,  24:  7, 
and  consequently  thougli  two  or  more  Conjunctives  may 
be  allowed  before  a  particular  Disjunctive,  only  the  first 
of  tliese  is  in  the  majority  of  cases  employed.  The  actual 
relations  of  words  may,  however,  so  interfere  with  this 
regularity  as  on  the  one  hand  to  cause  the  intervening 
Conjunctives  to  be  dropped  entirely,  e.  g.  Gen.  1:  22, 
1  Chron.  15:  18,  or,  on  the  other,  to  introduce  as  many 
Conjunctives  as  the  table  will  admit,  e.  g.  Gen.  3:  14. 
But  if  either  of  the  three  primary  sections  consist  of  but 
two  words,  the  first  must  have  a  Disjunctive  accent, 
however  close  its  relation  may  be  to  the  second,  e.  g. 
:d"3  :-ti]^i  Gen.  9:  20,  nrr:?  ^-p£:l  Gen.  3:  5,  'bs'i:^  B"!: 
Gen.  19:  4. 

a.  Sometimes  an  excluded  term  of  the  series  will  take  the  pl-^ce  of  the 
secondary  accent  Methegli,  §  44.  Tiphhha  is  thus  five  times  written  upon 
the  same  word  with  Silluk,  e.  g.  Num.  15:  21,  and  eleven  times  with  Ath- 
nahh,  e.  g.  Num.  28:  26.  Munahh,  Gen.  21:  17,  often  stands  upon  the  same 
word  Avitli  Zakeph  Katon;  if  the  accent  stands  upon  a  mixed  syllable  and 
upon  another  than  the  initial  letter  Kadhuia  will  take  its  place,  Gen.  18:  20, 
44:  24,  45:  14.  Kadhma  is  also  joined  in  this  manner  with  Darga,  Job  1 :  15, 
Munahh,  Lev.  10:  12,  Meika,  Jndg.  21 :  21,  Neh.  12:  44,  Mahpakh,  Lev.  25:  46, 
and  Geresh,  Ex.  16:  15,  21:  22,  35.   Mahpakh  with  Munahh,  Lam,  4:  9. 

4.  Occasionally  a  subordinate  Disjunctive  or  its  alter- 
nate is  repeated  in  the  same  section  with  or  without  its 
antecedents.  Thus,  T'bliir,  Deut.  26:  2  ,^^^.,/^, .  '\  so 
Deut.  30:  20,  1  Sam.  20:  21,  2  Kin.  17:  36.' ZarkaV2  Kin. 
1:  16  ■■//  ""/,  so  ver.  6,  Gen.  42:  21,  Jer.  21:  4,  Neh. 
2:  12.  '  Pashta,  Gen.  24:  14,  42,  48,  65;  1  Kin.  20:  9. 
Pashta,  Pashta  and  Y'thibh,  2  Kin.  10:  30,  Ezr.  7:  25. 
Geresh  and  G'rashayim,  Gen.  28:  9. 

a.  There  is  a  double  accentuation  of  a  part  of  Gen.  35 :  22,  and  of  the 
entire  decalogue,  both  in  Ex.  20:  2-17,  and  Deut.  5:  6-21,  which  involves 
a  double  vocalization  in  certain  words,  e.  g.  ^33  Ex.  20:  3,  1.  e.  either 
:"^2Q  or  ""Sa.  Single  words  also  occur  with  alternative  accents,  e.  g.  with 
G'rashayim  or  Geresh  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola  nt"  Gen.  5:  29,  ^Z"'^  Lev.  10:  4, 
Qa'  2  Kin.  17:  13,  n^xb^  Ezek.  48:  10,  ri<i°  Zeph.  2:  15. 


58  obthographt.  §  40 

Poetic  Consecution. 

§  40.  1.  The  principle  of  the  consecution  is  the  same 
in  the  poetic  as  in  the  prosaic  accents,  although  there  is 
considerable  diversity  in  the  details.  There  is  a  like 
division  of  verses  into  clauses  and  sections  ruled  by  a 
Disjunctive  at  the  end,  which  imposes  upon  them  its  own 
special  train  of  accents.  The  sections  are  fewer,  however, 
and  the  trains  shorter  than  in  prose,  on  account  of  the 
greater  brevity  of  the  sentences  in  poetry  for  the  most 
part.  But  this  reduction  is  more  than  Compensated  by 
the  new  complexity  arising  from  the  latitude  allowed  in 
the  choice  of  Conjunctives. 

a.  The  numerous  errors  in  the  poetical  accents  as  found  in  ordinary 
Hebrew  Bibles  have  been  carefully  corrected  hy  Baer  in  his  edition  of  Job, 
Psalms  and  Proverbs;  and  the  laws  of  their  consecution  are  elaborately 
stated  by  him  in  the  Appendix  to  Delitzsch's  Commentary  on  the  Psalter 
(1860)  and  by  Dr.  William  Wickes  in  his  Treatise  on  the  Accentuation  of 
the  three  so-called  Poetical  Books  of  the  Old  Testament  (1881). 

2.  Verses  may  consist  of  one,  two,  or  three  clauses, 
distinguished  by  the  three  Disjunctives  of  the  first  class. 
If  the  verse  contain  but  one  clause,  Silluk  will  be  written 
upon  the  last  word,  Ps.  4:  1,  29:  7;  if  it  contain  two 
clauses,  the  division  will  be  made  by  Athnahh,  Ps.  1 :  4, 
5,  6,  or  by  Olev'yoredh, '  Ps.  1:2,  3:3,  upon  the  last 
word  of  the  first  clause;  if  it  contain  three,  the  last  word 
of  the  first  will  have  Olev'yoredh,  the  last  word  of 
the  second  Athnahh,  and  the  last  word  of  the  third 
Silluk,  Ps.  1 :  1,  2:  7,  3:  6.  Clauses  may  consist  of  a  single 
section  when  no  subdivision  of  them  is  necessary;  or 
they  may  consist  of  two  or  more  sections,  when  the  sub- 
division is  effected  by  R'bhi*,  Pazer,  Great  Shalsheleth 
or  L'gharmeh. 

a.  Thus  the  SiUuk  clause  is  subdivided  by  R'bhi"  and  L'gharmeh  in 

Ps.  18:  51,  and  by  Pazer  Ps.  18:  2;  the  Athnahh  clause  by  E'bhi'*  (twice), 


41 


POETIC  CONSECUTION. 


59 


Pazer,  and  L'gliarmeh  (3  times)  in  Prov.  30:  4;  the  Olev'yoredh  clause  by 
Pazer  Ps.  5:  10  and  by  K'bhP  and  L'gharmeh  Ps.  5:  11.  Great  Shalsheleth 
is  rarely  used  and  only  to  subdivide  the  clause  of  Silluk,  Ps.  34 :  8,  Job 
32:  6;  except  in  Job  11:  6  it  is  only  found  on  the  fourth  word  from  the 
end  of  the  verse. 

§  41.  The  order  of  the  accents  in  the  various  sections 
is  exhibited  in  the  following  table: 


CONJUHCTIVES. 

CONJUKOTIVES . 

Principal 
Sections. 

* 

•« 

t    \   < 

A 

J  J   3 

I 

'{'! 

< 

.0 

<»» 

*  * 

Secondaky 

Sections, 

• 

* 

< 

y 

•  > 

V 

t 
1 

>    ^ 

U 

1 

60  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  41 


Explanation  of  the  Table. 

The  accents,  which  are  disposed  horizontal!)',  exhibit  the  series  by  which 
any  given  Disjunctive  may  be  preceded.  Alternate  accents  are  disposed 
vertically  or  inclosed  in  parentheses,  lUuy  is  represented  thus  ■■*,  in  dis- 
tinction from  Munahh  ^ 

a.  (1)  Train  of  Silluk.  If  Silluk  is  preceded  by  a  single  Conjunctive, 
this  is  almost  invariably  Munahh,  provided  the  tone  is  on  the  first  syllable, 
Ps.  1:  1,  2:  10;  otherwise  it  is  Merka,  Ps.  2:  7,  12,  to  which  Tsinnorith  will 
be  added,  if  a  simple  syllable  precede  in  the  same  word  Ps.  3 :  2,  4,  or  in 
an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps.  18:  8,  20;  if  L'gharmeh  precede,  it  Avill  be 
lUuy,  Ps.  3:1,  10:  14.  If  it  be  preceded  by  two  Conjunctives,  they  will  be 
Munahh,  Tarhha,  Ps.  2:  9,  3:  6,  or,  (as  Baer  affirms,  but  Wickes,  p.  71  denies) 
if  thej'  are  on  adjacent  syllables,  Merka,  Tarhha,  Ps;  12:  8,  Job  15:  22;  in 
the  inscriptions  to  eight  Psalms  (36,  44,  47,  49,  61,  69,  81,  85)  they  are  two 
Illuys,  and  in  three  exceptional  instances  they  arellluy  and  Azla,  Ps.  109:  16, 
Prov.  8:  13  or  llluy  and  Mahpakh  with  Zinnorith  Ps.  68:  20.  If  it  be 
preceded  by  three  Conjunctives,  the  first  two  will  be  Munahh  and  Tarhha, 
and  the  third  Mahpakh,  if  the  tone  is  on  the  first  syllable,  Ps.  24: 10,  39: 12, 
or  Mahpakh  with  Tsinnorith,  if  the  tone  is  preceded  by  a  simple  syllable  in 
the  same  word,  Ps.  3:  5,  28:  8,  or  in  an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps.  25:  15; 
otherwise  it  will  be  Azla,  Ps.  25:  8,  Prov.  3;  27;  the  occurrence  of  llluy, 
Ps.  4:  8  is  exceptional,  and  Wickes,  p.  72,  esteems  it  incorrect.  Four  Con- 
junctives only  occur  in  the  following  instances,  Ps.  3:  3,  32:  5,  42:  2,  47:5, 
and  in  some  editions  54:  5. 

(2)  Fthlil"'  Muffrash.  If  Silluk  be  preceded  by  a  Disjunctive  in  its  own 
section,  it  will  be  E.'bhi'^  Mugrash.  Silluk  sections  cannot  have  less  than 
two,  nor  more  than  five  words.  If  there  be  but  one  word  before  Silluk  in 
its  own  section,  this  must  have  E"bhi'  Mugrash,  however  closel}'  it  may  be 
connected  with  that  which  follows  Ps.  4:  6,  7:  11;  unless  it  have  three 
vowels  or  two  vowels  and  a  vocal  Sli'va,  in  which  case  it  may  have  Merka, 
Ps.  9:  17,  11:  5,  19:  10,  21:  10.  If  there  be  two  or  more  words  before  Silluk, 
these  may  according  to  the  nature  of  the  case  all  have  Conjunctives,  or 
R'bhi^  Mugrash  may  stand  on  the  next  before  Silluk  Ps.  5:  4.  8,  or  on  the 
second  with  Munahh  or  Merka  intervening  Ps.  3:7,  4:  4,  or  on  the  third 
with  llluy  and  Mahpakh  L'garmeh  between  Ps.  3:1,  10:  14.  Two  Conjunc- 
tives never  come  between  Silluk  and  E'blii'*  Mugrash;  Baer  excepts  only 
Ps.46:8,l2,  Wickes  admits  no  exception.  R'b I li'^  Mugrash  may  be  preceded 
by  one  Conjunctive,  Merka  Ps.  5:  4,  with  Tsinnorith  on  a  previous  simple 
syllable  in  the  same  word,  Ps.  5:  7,  or  in  an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps. 
12:  2;  by  two  Conjunctives  Merka,  Tarhha  Ps.  5:  8,  18:  3;  or  by  three, 
Merka,  Tarhha,  Mahpakh,  Ps.  47:  8,  66:  20,  with  Tsinnorith  if  there  be  a 
simple  syllable  before  the  tone  Ps.  119:  52;  Ps.  18:  1,  34:  8,  08:  15,  137:  9 
are  exceptional. 

b.  (1)  Train  of  Athnahh.  If  Athnahh  be  preceded  by  a  single  Conjunc- 
tive this  is  commonly  Munahh,  if  it  come  after  D'hhi,  Ps.  2:  7,  3:  2,  other- 


§41 


POETIC  CONSECUTION.  61 


■wise  it  is  commonly  Merka,  Ps.  3  :  9,  5:  9.  10.  If  it  be  preceded  by  two 
Conjunctives,  these  will  both  be  Munahhs,  Ps.  2:4,  3:  8,  or  with  P'sik  they 
will  be  Merka,  Tarhha,  Ps.  5:  2,  18:  50.  If  by  three,  the  first  two  will  be 
as  before,  and  the  third  will  be  Mahpakh  Ps.  2:  5,  with  Tsinnorith  if  there 
be  a  simple  syllable  before  the  tone,  whether  in  the  same  word,  Prov.  17: 12. 
or  in  an  antecedent  monosyllable,  1  s.  5:  5;  if,  however,  there  be  two  vowels 
or  a  vowel  and  a  vocal  Sh'va  before  the  tone,  the  third  Conjunctive  will 
be  Illuy,  Ps.  32:  2,  40:9.  Ps.  72:  3,  Prov.  1 :  9,  6:27  are  exceptional. 
Athnahh  is  twice  preceded  by  four  Conjunctives,  Ps.  65:  2,  96:  4;  and  once 
by  five,  Prov.  3:  12. 

(2.)  Uhhi.  If  Athnahh  be  preceded  by  a  Disjunctive  in  its  own  section, 
this  will  be  D'hhi.  The  section  of  Athnahh  may  consist  of  but  a  single 
word,  if  Olev'yoredh  immediately  precede  Ps.  3:  6,  5:  13,  29:  9,  otherwise 
of  not  less  than  two.  In  a  section  of  two  words  Athnahh  is  sometimes 
preceded  by  D'hhi  Ps.  7:  11,  11:  3,  more  commonly  by  Merka  Ps.  4:  6. 
10:  10,  which  with  the  sole  exception  of  Job  33:  9  is  always  used  after 
Olev'yoredh  Ps.  10:  18,  14:  3.  In  sections  of  three  or  more  words  D'hhi 
may  stand  on  the  first  word  before  Athnahh,  Ps.  2:  8,  5:  11,  or  on  the 
second,  Ps.  2 :  7,  3 :  4,  but  never  at  a  greater  remove.  D'hhi  may  be  pre- 
ceded by  one  Conjunctive,  Munahh,  Ps.  4:  4,  5:6;  or  by  two,  M'hen  tht- 
first  will  be  Munahh  and  the  second  will  follow  the  same  law  as  the  *.hird 
Conjunctive  before  Athnahh,  thus  it  may  be  Mahpakh,  Ps.  4:  3,  5:  3,  with 
Tsinnorith,  Ps.  6:  11,  32:  5,  or  it  may  be  Illuy,  Ps.  35:  15,  78:  45  It  is 
once  preceded  by  three  Conjunctives,  Job  34:  37;  Baer  finds  two  other 
examples  Ps.  23:  6,  56:  1,  which  Wickes  disputes.  In  a  very  few  instances 
D'hhi  occurs  before  Silluk  in  place  of  R'bhi^  Mugrash,  Ps.  25:  4,  31:  17, 
109:  16,  Prov.  8:  13;  more  frequently  before  E'bhP  Mugrash  in  verses 
which  have  no  Athnahh  clause,  this  being  in  a  manner  thus  replaced,  Ps. 
4:  5,  6:  1,  7:  10,  11:  6,  22:  1. 

c.  (1.)  Train  of  OMyoreAli.  Olev'yoredh  may  be  preceded  by  one  Con- 
junctive, and  one  only,  which  is  almost  always  Galgal,  Ps.  1:1,  3:  3;  but 
three  times  before  P'sik  it  is  Mahpakh,  Ps.  68:  20,  85:  9,  Prov.  30:  15,  and 
three  times  Merka  after  Small  R'bhi^  Ps.  35:  10,  42:  5,  Prov.  30:  9.  The 
section  of  Olev'yoredh  never  has  less  than  two  words.  If  it  has  but  two, 
the  first  must  receive  the  Disjunctive  Small  R'bhP,  Ps.  4:  5,  9:  21.  If  it  has 
three  or  moi'e,  and  a  Disjunctive  stand  on  the  word  next  preceding  Olev'- 
yoredh, it  will  be  Small  E'bliP,  Ps.  3:6,  35:  20;  if  one  stands  on  the  second 
word  before  Olev'yoredh,  whether  followed  by  R'bliP  or  by  Galgal,  or  on 
any  previous  word  of  the  section,  it  will  be  Tsinnor  Ps.  3:  3,  22:  15,  28:  7. 
Small  E'bhP  is  in  but  three  instances  written  on  the  second  word  before- 
Olev'yoredh  viz.  those  in  which,  as  above  stated,  it  is  followed  by  Merka. 
Tsinnor  is  Avith  like  infrequency  written  immediately  before  Olev'yoredh, 
Ps.  55:  22,   106:  47,  Prov.  8:  13. 

(2.)  Small  'Khln"-.  E'bhP,  when  it  immediately  precedes  Olev'yoredh 
and  is  included  in  its  section,  is  called  Small  E'bhP  in  distinction  from 
Great  E'bhP  or  E'bhP  proper,  which,  though  it  has  the  same  sign,  fulfils 


62  OETHOGEAPHT.  §  42 

quite  a  different  function,  viz.  that  of  dividing  the  principal  clauses  of  a 
verse,  and  governing  a  section  of  its  own,  §  40.  2.  Small  R'bliP  may  be 
preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  Merka,  Ps.  9:  7,  15,  or  by  two,  Merka, 
Malipakh,  Ps.  18  :  1,  Prov.  6 :  26,  to  which  Tsinnorith  may  be  add>:;d, 
Prov.  23:  5. 

(3.)  Tsinnor.  Tsinnor  ma3'  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  which  will 
be  Merka,  if  the  tone  is  on  the  first  syllable,  Ps.  24:  8,  32:  9,  or  if  the 
letter  under  which  it  stands  has  Daghesh  either  lene  or  forte,  Ps.  6:3, 
16:  4;  otherwise  it  is  Munahh,  Ps.  12:  7,  18:  7.  If  it  have  two  Conjunctives, 
the  second  will  be  Mahpakh,  Ps.  24:  10.  27:  4. 

d.  Train  of  R'bhi°'.  R'bhP,  when  governing  an  independent  section  of 
its  own,  i.  e.  Great  R'bhi''  may  be  without  any  antecedent,  its  section  con- 
sisting  of  but  a  single  word,  Ps.  4:  4,  5:4,  or  it  may  have  one  Conjunctive, 
which  is  commonly  Mahpakh,  Ps.  2:  8,  Prov.  7:  7,  unless  Pazer  or  L'ghanneh 
precede,  when  it  is  mostly  Illuy,  Ps.  2:  12,  17:  14,  though  if  a  simple  syllable 
stand  immediately  before  the  tone  it  will  be  Mahpakh  with  Tsinnorith, 
Ps.  4:  2,  15:  5;  the  Conjunctive,  however,  is  Merka,  when  another  R'bliP 
precedes,  Ps.  17:  1,  Prov.  4:  4,  and  in  a  few  other  individual  cases,  Ps.  1:  1, 
32:  2,  Job  14:  19.  It  has  two  Conjunctives  according  to  Baer  in  Ps.  55:  24, 
b6:  14;  though  Wickes  points  differently. 

e.  Train  of  Pazer.  The  section  of  Pazer  may  consist  of  but  a  single 
word,  when  it  will  have  no  antecedent,  Ps.  17:14,  18:2.  If  it  have  one  Con- 
junctive, this  will  be  Galgal,  Prov.  23;  29,  except  in  a  very  few  instances 
with  P'sik,  where  it  is  Mahpakh,  Ps,  50:  1,  59:  6.  If  it  have  two  Con- 
junctives, the  first  will  be  as  before,  and  the  second  Mahpakh  if  its  place 
is  on  the  initial  letter  of  the  word,  Ps.  11:  2,  31:  11,  otherwise  it  will  be 
Azla,  Ps.  13:  3,  31:  12.  If  it  have  three  Conjunctives,  the  second  and  third 
will  be  Azla  and  Mahpakh,  Ps.  22:  25,  23:  4,  Prov.  6:  3,  in  all  of  which 
Wickes  changes  the  pointing. 

f.  Train  of  Great  Shalsheleth,  Shalsheleth  is  preceded  by  Conjunctives 
in  but  three  passages;  it  has  Merka  Ps.  89:  2,  and  Merka,  Tarhha  Job  32:  6, 
37:  12. 

g.  Train  of  Vgharmeh.  The  section  of  Mahpakh  L'gharmeh  never 
consists  of  more  than  one  word.  The  Conjunctive  before  Azla  L'gharmeh 
follows  the  same  rule  as  the  third  Conjunctive  before  Athnahh,  see  b  (1); 
thus  it  may  be  Mahpakh,  Ps.  8:  3,  12:  5,  with  Tsinnorith,  Ps.  3:  8,  9:  21, 
or  it  may  be  Illuy,  Ps.  7:  10,  9:  14.  When  it  has  two  Conjunctives,  the 
second  is  Merka;  of  this  there  are  two  examples,  Ps.  117:  2,  143:  3. 

§  42.  The  trains  of  these  several  accents  are  adjusted 
to  sections  of  varying  length  by  expedients  similar  to 
those  employed  with  the  prose  accents,  viz.:  1,  Omitting 
the  Conjunctives  in  whole  or  in  ]MXYt.  2.  Repeating  the 
Disjunctives,  e.  g.  ''  Ps.  !4:  1   (in  some  editions),       Ps. 


g  43  MAKKEPH.  63 

17:  14,  or  their  equivalents,  e.  g.  D'hlii  before  ''  Ps. 
7:  10,  9:  1  §  41.  h  (2).  3.  Writing  two  accents  upon 
the  same  word,  Crrfe'^-J  Ps.  5:  11,  -jTin  Ps.  27:  11, 
ilk'ii.V  Ps.  18:  16.  4.  Uniting  two  or  more  words  by 
Makkeph,  so  that  they  require  but  a  single  accent. 
5.  Writing  the  different  parts  of  a  compound  accent 
upon  separate  words;  thus,  Olev'yoredh  "Dii  b^'IS  Ps. 
6:  3,  Merka-Tsinnorith  'fzr\  ^i  Ps.  22:  9/'Mahpakh- 
Tsinnorith  rii<2  "3  Prov.  6 :  3. 


Makkeph. 

§  43.  Makkeph  ("p^  joining)  is  a  horizontal  stroke 
by  which  two,  three,  or  even  four  words  may  be  united. 
^|"1^:^.'  ^r'^'^:^".^-"°^  Gren.  30:  31,  br^b-U:.^  Gen.  33:  11, 
ib-i'4s-brn>^1  Gen.  12:  20,  25:  5,  Ex.  20: 11,  yzB—^zY-T^^. 
Ex.  22:  8,  ^T^^'^'.^-bTyj  Job  41:  26.  It  belongs  properly 
to  the  accentual  system,  words  which  are  closely  related 
being  often  connected  in  this  manner  in  order  to  obviate 
the  necessity  of  unduly  multiplying  Conjunctive  accents. 
Thus,  the  first  fifteen  words  of  Ex.  22:  8  are  in  this 
manner  reduced  to  eight.  Monosyllables  are  frequently, 
and  some  almost  constantly,  linked  with  the  succeeding 
or  preceding  word,  to  which  they  are  closely  related. 
Examples  are  not  wanting,  however,  of  longer  words 
similarly  united,  e.  g.  D^i>;"riirb"i  Deut.  19:  15,  "b^r'a^SD 
1  Kin.  17:  21,  riin'-T^i^  Isa.  31:  4.  This  use  of  Makkeph 
is  not  to  be  confounded  with  that  of  the  hyphen  in 
modern  languages  between  the  members  of  a  compound, 
as  self-same,  master-builder.  Words  united  by  Makkeph 
are  still  as  separate  as  ever  in  character  and  signification; 
but  they  are  pronounced  together  and  are  accented  as 
though  they  formed  but  one  word.  Hence,  whatever 
number  of  words  be  thus  joined,  the  last  only  will  receive 


64  *  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  44 

an  accent.  And,  as  a  further  consequence,  if  a  word  pre- 
ceding Makkepli  properly  ends  in  a  long  mixed  syllable, 
its  vowel,  if  mutable  will,  by  the  loss  of  the  accent,  be 
shortened,  ^iu:"P^^,  qii>"bs,  r;rT|)nnr),  otherwise  it  will 
commonly  receive  the  secondary  accent  Methegh,  r|bV"D'r, 

ni<^'-7J5,  Mrrnns,  nTr-D>'ri. 

-      :  •       1      I"  '  T    -  'T    ;    '  V     -  IT     T 

a.  The  particles  bx,  bx,  dX,  nx,  "]•;,  ^r,  'Q  are  almost  invariably  followed 
by  Makkeph,  so  ai-e  the  nouns  ",3,  ra  and  Vs  when  in  the  construct  state; 
the  particle  X3  is  commonly  preceded  by  it.  Before  monosyllables  or  dis- 
syllables accented  on  the  penult  Makkeph  is  inserted  after  the  particles  ix, 
"IS,  xb  and  the  pronoun  ^13,  as  well  as  sometimes  after  larger  words  which 
do  not  admit  of  the  retrocession  of  the  accent,  e.g.  Q^bHx  Ex. 22:4,  nnX"" i^ 
Gen.  27:  32,  Trk-^nnVri.  Hos.  8:  14,  'i'i-rii)':]  Gen.  15:  10.  The  pronoun  tl^ 
is  followed  by  Makkeph  before  words  whose  initial  letter  admits  Dagliesh- 
forte  Conjunctive,  cbs-n^il  Iliii-np  Ps.  133: 1.  CX-^S  are  joined  together  by 
Makkeph  in  Gen.  15:4,  Num.  35:  33,  Neh.  2:  2;  in  all  other  passages  CX  ia 
followed  but  not  preceded  by  Makkeph,  rVira-CX  ^2  Ps.  1:  1.  "ib'Trx  avp 
joined  by  Makkeph  but  never  xb  nrx,  the  xb  being  always  linked  to  th'. 
following  word.  xb-^S  are  united  by  Makkt-ph  before  a  word  bearing  th 
disjunctive  accent  Tiphhha,  provided  it  has  Sh'va  under  its  initial  letter: 
otherwise  the  Makkeph  follows  xb,  thus  tjipn  xb-^3  but  Brx^-xb  "^S. 

b.  Tsere  remains  before  Makkeph  in  dx,  "3,  13,  ^V,  yv;  it  sometimes 
remains  and  is  sometimes  shortened  in  lab,  d'j,  d'^  six,  r25  e.  g.  Gen.  16:  13 
riltT^"D'w;,  but  ver.  15  'i:3~D"l\  It  once  remains  according  to  some  editions  in 
~rx  Job  41 :  26,  a  word  which  is  three  times  written  nx  without  Makkeph, 
Ps.  47:  5,  60:  2,  Prov.  3:  12.  Methegh  remains  in  the  place  of  the  accent 
on  ri|Ti"^  and  similar  words  ending  in  Pattahh  and  a  guttm-al,  when  thej'  are 
united  by  Makkeph  to  words  having  a  disjunctive  accent  on  the  first  syllable 
!i:b-n;33  Gen.  34:  16,  '"^b-rsra  Gen.  24:  7. 

c.  Makkeph  is  occasionally  foimd  in  the  middle  of  a  long  word,  whicL 
has  been  erroneously  divided  into  two,  e.  g.  tn^ETiS"^  Jer.  46:  20,  and  per- 
haps riipT^lTQ  Isa.  61:1.  Sometimes  words  are  thus  divided  Avithout  a 
Makkeph  to  unite  the  sundered  parts,  e.  g.  d'^ir'  "^3  Lam.  4:  3,  dfi^Ph  "ina 
2  Chron.  34:  6,  and  probably  ^Ztl  ^hnx  Hos.  4:  18,  rriis  IQnb  Isa.  2:  20. 
(See  Dr.  Alexander's  Commentary  on  this  passage.)  The  last  two  examples 
are  plainly  intended  by  the  punctuators  to  be  read  as  separate  words.  This 
might  likewise  be  done  in  the  preceding  examples  if  they  were  pointed 
d-^ii?  ""s  and  dfiipia  ina. 


Methegh. 

§  44.   Methegh  (jTT2  bridle),  a  small  perpendicular 
stroke  under  the  initial  letter  of  the  syllable  to  which  it 


§  45  METHEGH.  65 

belongs,  is  a  secondary  accent  denoting  a  stress  of  voice 
inferior  to  the  main  accent.  As  this  latter  always  has 
its  place  in  Hebrew  either  upon  the  ultimate  or  the 
penult,  distiactness  was  promoted  and  monotony  reheved, 
especially  in  long  words,  by  gi\dng  prominence  to  one 
or  more  of  the  antecedent  syllables.  There  is  a  natural 
tendency  to  heighten  the  force  of  the  accent  by  passing 
hghtly  over  the  immediately  preceding  syllable,  this 
diminished  force  creating  in  its  turn  a  new  stress  upon 
that  next  beyond  it,  and  so  on  in  alternate  elevations 
and  depressions  to  the  beginning  of  the  word.  Agree- 
ably to  the  principle  just  stated,  Methegh  regularly 
stands  in  polysyllables  upon  the  second  syllable  before 
the  accent,  and  again  upon  the  fourth  if  the  word  have 

so  many,  e.  g.  Di^^n,  "cij;.,  "jj^^^i;,  Dn^rn,  nn^ri-i^c'/S'^, 

riiiijTna^.  And  so  upon  two  or  more  w^ords  connected 
by  Makkeph,  which  are  pronounced  as  one,  e.  g.  iSTiJ^^i;; 
Gen.  22:  8,  cnynS'-S  1  Sam.  21:  7. 

a.  When  the  ratine  of  the  syllables  requires  it,  §  32.  1,  Methegh  takes 
the  place  of  the  principal  accent  before  Makkej^h  irrespective  of  the  position 
of  the  accent  upon  the  following  word,  l3-T^rn  Num.  21:  35,  "("rz!!-"^^ 
Num.  21:  33,  ^ha'-^^  Jer.  34:  1. 

b.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  position  of  Methegh  is  determined  by 
that  of  the  tone-syllable,  not  by  that  of  the  accentual  sign  when  these  are 
not  coincident,  as  frequently'  happens  with  prepositives  and  postpositives, 
e.  g,  '"""I""!!  Deut.  4:  26,  !i:\~'i"i'i'n  Josh.  22:  27,  where  the  tone  falls  on  the 
penult;  D'^J^i'in^  Jer.  26:  21,  where  the  tone  is  upon  the  ultimate. 

§  45.  The  secondary  accent  is  liable  to  be  shifted 
from  its  normal  position  for  the  following  reasons,  viz.: 

1.  If  the  syllable  which  should  receive  it  is  mixed,  it 
may  be  given  in  preference  to  an  antecedent  simple 
syllable,  e.  g.  nni3n"d5«1  2  Sam.  22:  24,  Tl'^r^nri/^^l  Job  1:  7, 
niinnrn-2  Ezek.  42:  5,  'a:^&i--b.^":J  Gen.  43:  7;  or  if  none 
such  precede,  it  may  be  omitted  altogether,  e.  g.  ClbSi/J^.1 
Jer.  33:  24,    '^i<?";T^n  1  Kin.  21:  1,    ni^^rj-brnj^  Deut. 


66  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  45 

6:  25,   except  in   certain   cases  which  require  it,   e.  g. 

nb3nn3  Ex.  l:  lo,  -ns^nnni  Lev.  26:  12. 

a.  Metbegh  regularly  stands  (see  Baer  in  Merx  Archiv  for  1868): 

(1)  On  a  short  vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  (except  Kamets  Hhatuph)  in 
words  baving  a  disjunctive  accent,  provided  it  be  separated  from  the  accent 
or  an  antecedent  Metbegh  by  both  a  vowel  and  a  vocal  Sh'va  (other  than 
Hbolem  before  a  guttural  with  Hbatepb  Pattabb),  'll'"3':3';'1  Gen.  3:  8,  r,b-ri;3r} 
Gen.  7:2,  :  Dn'^ni'ni.pri^  Ps.  18:  46,  nicoiin-a  Zecb.  9:  16,  but  :nhx^-n  Gen. 
24:  11. 

(2)  On  e,  ?  or  M  in  the  first  of  two  mixed  syllables,  immediately  pre- 
ceding a  disjunctive  accent,  when  the  vowel  of  the  second  syllable  is  a  or 
e,  rctn-jsri  Gen.  3:  24,  )i'^'^'^^  Gen.  4:  26,  "^^""iPii*  Gen.  30:  31.  Initial  >! 
followed  by  simple  Sh'va  is  reckoned  a  short  mixed  syllable  in  the  appli- 
cation of  both  the  foregoing  rules  trbsN^^l  Gen.  47:  24,  ^i^&^ri^  Jer.  3:  23. 

(3)  On  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future  sing,  of  perfect  verbs,  when 
the  second  vowel  is  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph  before  Makkeph, 
i''^s--,3rri  Job  3:  5,  but   V hn-iiS':;-:  Ps.  9:  9. 

(4)  With  the  first  syllable  of  t]""it  and  Cr""it,  when  they  have  a  dis- 
junctive accent,  as  Gen.  3:  15,  Lev.  26:  16;  but  TiV-i-T^  Gen.  17:  12,  nrinrpxi. 
Gen.  9:  9,  "i?"?!^^  Deut.  28:  46  and  the  like  follow  rule  (1). 

A  very  few  isolated  instances  are  not  embraced  in  the  preceiling  rules, 
e.  g.  bxJJ'aTL^'^^^  Gen.  17:  20,  nVtan-'i^  Gen.  £0:  16,  nai^Sln-bs  Ex.  29:  21. 

2.  It  is  always  given  to  a  long  vowel  when  followed 
by  a  vocal  Sh'va,  whether  simple  or  compound;  also  to 
a  short  vowel  followed  by  compound  Sh'va  or  a  vowel 
which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va,  the  shght  pronunciation 
proper  to  the  Sh'va  or  its  derivative  giving  new  pro- 
minence to  the  preceding  vowel,  ^TCi^^,  ^^HB";,  ^ilJ5<b, 
minp-u^S  Gen.  30:  38,  ^ioD  Isa.  9:  17,  10:  34,  ^n-in;.;  some- 
times to  other  intermediate  syllables,  §  20.  2,  e.  g.  ^bu?59 
Ex.  12:  21,  nin^>'  Num.  31:  12  (but  niz-)?a  Deut.  34:  1, 
where  a  simple  syllable  precedes),  ^ICn  Isa.  G3:  7,  ^\T--?. 
Obad.  ver.  11,  particularly  before  the  first  radical  of 
TTTl  to  he  and  n^jn  to  live  when  pointed  with  Sh'va  fCT^, 
an'"ni,  riVrib;  rarely  and  only  as  an  exception  to  a  mixed 
syllable  standing  in  the  first  place  before  the  principal 
accent,  e.  g.  i^iL'iF\  Gen.  1:  11,  t3"n:^n  Ex.  12:  7,  Zech 
14:  2,  n3«  Jon.  1:  14,  4:  2. 

'  T    IT  ' 


§45  METHEGH.  67 

a.  Monosyllables  endincf  in  a  long  vowel,  when  followed  by  Makkeph, 
fake  Methegh  in  the  first  place  before  the  accent,  provided  a  vocal  Sh'va 
intervenes,  i\?"^^.  Gen.  19:  12,  Xtl"!""^?  Gen.  22:  12,  ob'IJ-^inX  Gen.  34:  6:  With 
dissyllables  this  is  rare  and  exceptional  ■|Nk''~N''i;'Cl  1  Kin.  1:  19,  '3L-nt'Vj 
1  Chron.  28  :  9. 

b.  Methegh  is  regularly  attached  to  intermediate  syllablea  in  the  follow- 
ing cases  (See  Baer  in  Merx  Archiv  for  1868): 

(1)  To  the  article  n  or  the  inseparable  prepositions  3,  D,  h  with  the 
vowel  of  the  article,  before  a  vowelless  consonant  (other  tban  Yodh)  from 
which  Daghesh  forte  has  been  omitted,  provided  they  stand  in  the  second 
place  before  the  accent,  nib??n  Lev.  3:  3,  nkiO^  Ps.  4:  1,  but  D^nb"^n  Gen. 
33:  6.  a^p?  Ps.  144:  1.  ' 

(2)  To  He  Interrogative  pointed  with  Pattahh  (except  before  Yodh  or 
a  dagheshed  letter),  provided  it  stands  in  the  second  place  before  the  ac- 
cent, the  Methegh  in  this  case  preceding  the  vowel  for  the  sake  of  distinc- 
tion, nB2^ri  Gen.  18:  17,  T\i;^^^  Ex.  2:  7,  but  tin^n'^ri  Gen.  29:  5,  bi-an  Judg. 
9 :  2.  In  the  books  of  Psalms,  Proverbs  and  Job  Methegh  follows  the  vowel, 
as  otherwise  it  might  be  confounded  with  D'hhi  C3"'bn  Ps.  85:6.  Before 
Daghesh-forte,  which  sufficiently  shows  the  following  Sh'va  to  be  vocal, 
Methegh  is  omitted  as  unnecessary,  ns'csn  Isa.  27 :  7. 

(3)  To  the  first  syllable  of  ''h''^  or  "ifl-jl  before  Makkeph  or  with  the 
accent  Pashta,  "iii<"^!7":l  Gen.  1:  3,  'ilri-^l  Gen.  4:  8,  rij-'^ri'il  Gen.  5:  6.  If 
a  simple  syllable  precedes  Methegh  will  in  all  cases  be  transferred  to  it, 
SaCTn-xa  2  Kin.  9:  U. 

c.  It  hence  appears  how  Methegh  comes  to  be  of  use  in  distinguishing 
the  doubtful  vowels,  §  19,  and  to  what  extent  it  can  be  relied  upon  for  this 
end.  As  it  invariably  accompanies  the  vowel  of  a  simple  syllable  when 
followed  by  vocal  Sh'va,  it  must  always  be  found  with  a,  I,  and  u  preced- 
ing Sh'va,  inasmuch  as  this  will  necessarily  be  vocal.  Initial  ^  M,  the  un- 
emphatic  conjunction,  is  an  exception  with  which  it  is  not  written,  e.  g. 
t^bt^II  Gen.  6:  19,  tiN^^'i  Gen.  31:  4,  unless  the  Sh'va  be  compound,  e.g. 
b'^nnnb^  Gen  1 :  18,  nhwl  Judg.5:12,  or  it  be  required  by  the  rule-!  under  \.a. 
The  absence  of  Methegh  except  in  the  case  just  mentioned,  is  consequently 
conclusive  evidence  of  the  shortness  of  the  vowel.  As,  however,  short 
vowels  in  intermediate  syllables,  and  in  a  few  rare  instances  even  in  mixed 
syllables,  may  receive  Methegh,  the  presence  of  this  sign  does  not  of  itself 
determine  the  vowel  to  be  long;  the  uldmate  decision  must  in  this  case 
depend  on  other  considerations. 

3.  When  by  the  operation  of  the  preceding  rule  Me- 
thegh comes  to  stand  in  the  first  place  before  the  accent, 
another  Methegh  is  nevertheless  occasionally  found  in 
the  second  place,  the  two  thus  standing  in  immediate 
succession,  e.  g.  ninsan  Gen.  32:  22,  ^b^:^.1  Gen.  45:  25; 
and  even  three   occur  upon   successive   syllables,   e.  g. 


68  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  45 

^TZV^'Z^  Isa.  22:  19  in  some  editions.  But  commonly 
where  there  is  more  than  one  Methegh,  their  position 
relatively  to  each  other  is  governed  by  the  same  rules 
as  the  position  of  Methegh  generally  with  relation  to 
the  principal  accent,    e.  g.  ?jr^^";Z:^b,    ^^'^ijni,    ^jt^^^nsl, 

4.  Methegh  is  sometimes  written  under  an  initial 
letter  with  Sh'va,  e.  g.  i£wS-^>"^  Job  19:  6,  nj^nDD  Ps.  2:  3, 
nbenrs  Jer.  49:  18. 

a.  A  Methegh  so  situated  is  called  Gaya  (X'^sa  bellowing)  by  Jewish 
grammarians,  and,  according  to  Elias  Levita,  it  occurs  eiglity-four  times, 
the  number  yielded  by  its  name  arithmetically  reckoned.  The  traditional 
rule  was  that  the  Sh'va,  on  which  it  stands,  should  be  pronounced  as  a 
full  vowel.  Baer  and  others  give  the  name  of  Gaya  likewise  to  Methegh  in 
mixed  syllables.  Methegh  upon  a  short  vowel  before  a  compound  Sh'va  was 
called  Ma^rikli  (~''~xp  prolongivg),  with  a  short  Hhirik  it  was  called  Hhiruk 
(psinifi  gnasliing). 

5.  The  place  of  Methegh  is  frequently  supplied  by 
an  accent  chosen  agreeably  to  the  laAvs  of  consecution, 
§  39.  3.  a.,  e.  g.  ^b/2rjj^  Isa.  66:  13,  Dh'nbxb  Dent.  12:  31, 
DH^wS^I  Zech.  7:  14,  i^ni;-b?1  Num.  10:  23,  ^br;.]5^1  Josh. 
22:"l2. 

a,  Methegh  with  Sh'va  occurs  chiefly  in  connection  with  the  poetic 
accents,  and  has  relation  to  the  intoning  which  it  is  one  of  their  functions 
to  direct.  It  indicates  that  the  vowelless  letter,  upon  which  it  stands,  is  to 
be  dwelt  upon  and  thus  additional  space  gained  for  the  various  modulations 
of  the  voice  that  are  prescribed.  Baer  gives  the  following  rules: 

(1)  When  Methegh  would  regularly  fall  upon  an  initial  simple  syllable 
beginning  with  two  consonants,  in  words  having  a  strong  disjunctive  accent 
not  preceded  by  a  Conjunctive,  it  is  transferred  from  the  vowel  to  the 
antecedent  vocal  Sh'va,  Ji:"'b^'"ri05  Ps.  4:7.  If  the  Sh'va  is  compound, 
Methegh  is  interposed  between  its  tAVO  constituents,  Qn'^rtbx  Ps.  79:  10. 

(2)  The  divine  names  rfni,  ^inK,  t]"^ri5X,  ^tihii,  when  accented  with 
R'bhi'^  not  preceded  by  a  Conjunctive,  take  Methegh  on  the  initial  Sh'va, 
e.  g.  Ps.  2:  7,   25:  2,    68:  8,    90:  1. 

(3)  Words  accented  with  Olev'yoredh,  R'bhP  or  D'hhl  not  preceded 
by  a  Conjunctive  take  Methegh  on  initial  Sh'va,  provided  there  is  at  least 
one  vowel  between  it  and  the  accent,  and  this  is  without  Methesh  rpni 
Ps.  1:  3,  Dn-^B-rrib  Ps.  106:  23.    The  Methegh  necessarily  due  to  a  following 


§  46  k'ei  and  k'thtbh.  69 

compound  Sh'va  is  not  reckoned  in  this  and  the  subsequent  rules,  ^N;""'"'nii3 
Ps.  36:  7,  *lri:s:xi  Ps.  91:  15. 

(4)  "^JN  with  Munahh  before  D'hhi  takes  Methegh  on  the  initial  Sh'va, 
Ps.  17:  6,  116:  16. 

Methegh  falls  on  initial  Sh'va  with  the  prose  accents 

(1)  When  the  word  has  G'rashayim  or  Pazer  not  preceded  by  a  Con- 
junctive, provided  there  are  at  least  two  vowels  before  the  tonesyllable  and 
the  first  is  without  Methegh,  (see  rule  (3)  above),  D'^pirsTSI  Gen.  10:  14, 
t|i^.;3'r?3  Ex.  25 :  33.  '  '         ' '' 

(2)  When  the  word  has  Darga  as  the  second  Conjunctive  before  R'bhi% 
or  Kadhma  as  the  second  Conjunctive  before  Pashta  or  T'bhir,  or  Munahh 
as  the  third  Conjunctive  before  T'lisha,  provided  a  vo^vel  precedes  the  tone- 
syllable  and  is  without  Methegh,  (see  rule  (3)  above),  !i;fi5<  nn  n"^'aV:i  Gen. 
34:  21. 

Methegh  in  these  cases  requires  a  more  vigorous  pronunciation  of  the 
vowelless  letter,  which  if  slightly  uttered  might  be  inaudible. 


K'ei  and  K'thlbh. 

§  46.  Various  notes  extracted  from  the  Massora 
(rr^io'r  tradition),  a  collection  of  remarks  upon  the  text, 
are  found  in  the  margin  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  which  are 
explained  in  the  glossary  at  the  end  of  most  editions. 
The  most  important  of  these  are  the  various  readings 
known  as  the  K'ri  (""^p  read),  and  K'thlbh  (3^r}S  luritten). 
If  in  any  instance  traditional  usage  sanctioned  a  reading 
different  from  that  which  was  written  in  the  text  or  the 
K'thibh,  the  punctuators  did  not  venture  to  alter  the 
text  itself  for  the  sake  of  making  the  correction;  they 
went  no  further  than  to  connect  with  the  letters  of  the 
text  the  vowels  of  ihQ  word  to  be  substituted  for  it  in 
reading  or  the  K'ri,  with  a  reference  to  the  margin  where 
the  letters  of  the  substitute  might  be  found.  Thus,  with 
the  word  'n535<^^  Josh.  6: 7  is  connected  the  marginal  note 
'^'^p  n?2S<^l  The  vowels  here  attached  to  the  K'thibh  be- 
long not  to  it  but  to  the  unpointed  word  in  the  margin, 
which  is  accordingly  n53i^^\  The  proper  vowels  for  the 
pronunciation  of  the  K'thibh  are  not  written,  but  must 


70  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  47 

be  supplied  from  a  knowledge  of  the  form  indicated  by 
the  letters,  which  in  this  case  is  ^^1?^^^1.  Again,  in  ver.  9, 
^l^P'ri  in  the  text  refers  to  'p  ^•pn  in  the  margin;  the  K'ri 
is  here  "i^pri,  and  the  K'thibh,  whose  vowels  are  left  to 
be  determined  by  the  reader,  ^j^pp.  Jer.  42:  6  has  ^.Di<5 
where  the  marginal  note  is  ^np  l^nDJ^;  the  K'ri  is  accord- 
ingly ^jm5s|,  and  the  K'thibh  ^DIS:..  In  order  to  indicate 
that  a  given  word  was  to  be  omitted  in  reading,  it  was 
left  unpointed,  and  the  note  ^np  i^bl  z^TO,  written  but  not 
read,  placed  in  the  margin,  e.  g.  'ffi/jn  Ezek.  48:  16,  W 
2  Kin.  5:  18,  l^lT  Jer.  51:  3.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  a 
word  was  to  be  supphed,  its  vowels  were  inserted  in  the 
text  and  its  letters  placed  in  the  margin,  with  the  note 
^^TO  &<bl  ^"^p,  read  but  not  written,  e.  g.  Judg.  20:  13  in 
the  text  ^  ^  and  in  the  margin  ^31,  to  be  read  ^;s ;  so 
Jer.  31:  38  D^i5^.  In  1  Kin.  21:  8  the  first  letter  of 
D^^SCn  is  left  unpointed  as  superfluous,  and  in  Job  2:  7 
^:?^.  is  explained  by  the  margm  to  stand  for  ITl:  so  Jer. 
18':  23  rn  1  for  vri'i. 

a.  The  number  of  these  marginal  readings  differs  in  different  editions. 
Elias  Levita  states  that  there  are  848.  Others  have  computed  them  to  be 
1,000;  others  still,  1,200. 

§  47.  Sometimes  a  different  reading  from  that  of  the 
text  is  suggested  by  the  points  alone  without  a  marginal 
note  being  added  in  explanation,  as  when  a  particular 
word  or  orthography  is  regularly  substituted  for  another 
of  frequent  occurrence.  These  cases  are  presumed  to  be 
so  familiar  to  the  reader  as  to  require  no  other  index  of 
their  existence  than  the  presence  of  the  appropriate 
vowels.  Thus,  the  divine  name  nin'^,  which  the  Jews  had 
a  superstitious  dread  of  pronouncing,  was  and  still  is 
read  by  them  as  if  it  vrere  ^ihi^  Lord,  whose  points  it 
accordingly  receives,  riih^,  unless  these  two  names  stand 
in  immediate  connection,  when,  to  avoid  repetition,  it  is 


§  48  K*EI  AND  k'tHIBH.  71 

read  Q-nb.^  and  pointed  nin;;  Gen.  15:  2,  Hab.  3  :  19. 
The  antiquity  of  this  superstition  is  attested  by  the 
K.vpiog  of  the  Septuagint,  followed  in  the  Enghsh  as 
well  as  in  other  modern  versions  by  the  rendering 
LoED.  The  true  sound  of  the  name  never  having  been 
noted,  is  now  lost;  the  only  clue  that  is  left  being  its 
etymology  and  the  form  which  it  assumes  in  compo- 
sition, §  62.  1,  from  which  the  conclusion  has  been 
drawn  that  it  was  t'i))!'^  Yahve.  The  common  pronun- 
ciation Jehovah  is  manifestly  founded  upon  the  error 
of  combining  the  consonants  of  this  word  with  the 
vowels  of  another  and  an  entirely  different  one. 
Other  standing  K'ris,  unnoted  in  the  margin,  are  5<in, 
which  is  read  J^^n,  though  the  sound  indicated  by  the 
letters  is  K^n.     So  ^b^^^  read  13123%  and  U^'Ji^l^  read 

§  48.  In  the  absence  of  definite  information  respect- 
ing the  origin  and  sources  of  these  various  readings,  it  is 
difficult  to  determine  with  absolute  precision  the  weight 
to  which  they  are  respectively  entitled.  The  current 
opinion  of  the  ablest  Hebraists,  based  upon  a  careful 
scrutiny  of  their  internal  character  and  the  relation  which 
ordinarily  appears  to  subsist  between  them,  is  that  while 
the  K'ri  may  perhaps,  in  a  few  cases,  correct  errors  in 
the  K'thibh,  and  so  restore  the  original  reading,  it  is  in 
the  great  majority  of  instances  an  explanatory  gloss 
rather  than  an  emendation.  "With  the  rare  exceptions 
already  suggested,  the  K'thibh  is  esteemed  the  true  read- 
ing, the  object  of  the  K'ri  being  to  remove  orthographical 
anomalies,  secure  grammatical  uniformity,  substitute 
usual  for  unusual,  prevailing  for  obsolete  words  and 
forms,  and  occasionally  to  introduce  euphemistic  ex- 
pressions. While  the  K'ri  is  probably  not  to  be  esteemed 
the  original  reading,  therefore,  it  deserves  attention  as 


72  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  49 

the  grammatical  or  exegetical  comment  of  a  steadfast 
tradition. 


ACCUBACY  OF  THE  PoiNTS. 

§  49.  1.  All  the  Massoretic  additions  to  the  text  de- 
signed to  facilitate  its  reading  have  now  been  considered. 
The  correctness  of  the  pronunciation,  Avhich  they  yield, 
is  vouched  for  not  only  by  the  esteem  in  which  they  are 
miiversally  held  by  the  Jews,  but  by  the  scrupulous 
mmuteness  of  the  sj^stem,  its  consistency  with  itself  and 
with  the  vowel-letters  of  the  text,  its  affinity  with  and 
yet  independence  of  the  vocalization  of  the  kmdred 
languages  the  Arabic  and  Syriac,  and  the  veneration  for 
the  already  established  text  which  evidently  characterized 
its  authors,  since  they  did  not  venture  to  change  the 
text  even  in  the  slightest  particular. 

2.  The  only  additional  information  which  has  come 
down  to  us  respecting  the  true  sound  of  Hebrew  words, 
is  furnished  by  the  mode  of  writing  proper  names  in  the 
Septuagint  version,  and  the  few  Hebrew  words  preserved 
by  ancient  authors,  particularly  Origen  and  Jerome. 
These  have  been  subjected  to  an  elaborate  comparison 
with  the  Massoretic  punctuation,  and  the  result  has  been 
to  estabhsh  their  substantial  agreement  in  the  main,  with, 
however,  not  a  few  remarkable  points  of  divergence.  In 
relation  to  this  subject  it  should  be  observed,  that  the 
Hebrew  pronunciation  of  the  Seventy  is  inferred  entirely 
from  their  mode  of  spelling  proper  names,  not  from 
words  in  living  use  in  the  language.  The  chances  of  in- 
accuracy, on  the  j)art  of  the  translators,  are  here  pecuh- 
arly  great.  Many  names  were  not  familiar  and  were  of 
rare  occurrence;  and  as  no  system  of  vowel  notation  then 
existed,  they  were  left  entirely  to  their  independent  know- 


§  49  ACCURACY  OF  THE  POINTS.  73 

ledge  of  the  sound  of  each  individual  word.  These  words 
were  written  by  them  in  a  foreign  alphabet,  whose 
sounds  did  not  coincide  precisely  with  those  of  the 
Hebrew,  and  in  which  the  proper  equivalents  varied 
somewhat  according  to  their  combinations.  The  true 
sound  was  also  departed  from  sometimes  because  the 
laws  of  Greek  euphony  forbade  its  exact  reproduction. 
The  negligence  with  which  they  are  chargeable  else- 
where was  also  probably  aggravated  here,  and  in  fact 
there  are  many  instances  in  which  they  not  merely  de- 
viate from  the  vowels  but  transpose  or  change  the  let- 
ters. Leaving  out  of  view,  therefore,  such  incidental  dis- 
crepancies as  are  to  be  accounted  for  in  the  ways  now 
suggested,  a  thorough  and  extended  examination  of  the 
subject  reveals,  with  all  the  general  agreement,  a  number 
of  regular  and  systematic  deviations. 

a.  These  are  thus  stated  by  Ewald,  Lehrbuch,  p.  71.  (1)  An  e  or  «  de- 
rived from  a  is  written  a,  as  ""iri  Qapa,  C"b2  BaXaa/i,  "'il'3;>  TajSaav,  d""i^ 
MapiafC]  and  on  the  other  hand,  a  is  sometimes  written  e,  rT33"^^!-iX 
OXi^s/j-a,  np  Kevs'C.,  na  YsS,  especially  before  Jl  as  'nyp  Ko^t,  n'n't  Zaps. 
(2)  e  is  written  for  i  and  8  for  it,  Q^PiS  XsTTaioi,  CSn^a  Tsewa,  ]'iV]5,  Telscav, 
d'l^'n::-?  Msapaif^,  nnx  Oxo^a^,  n^-T^-  O^ia.  (3)  For  the  diphthongal  e  and  5 
their  constituents  oi  and  an  are  substituted,  ■|;''i?  Ka/vav,  i^J  "S^a^av.  (4)  The 
vowel  letters  are  softened  into  their  homogeneous  vowels  X^P'^I  oviKpa, 
"^^TD  ouila^Y^p.  (6)  Vocal  Sh'va  is  written  as  a  full  vowel,  commonly  a, 
or  if  an  o  follow,  o,  rixn:!  I,ex^.xu9,  bx^yi  VayovTfk,  D'^a^ns  Xepov/3ifji,  Dnp 
XoloiLLa-j  the  final  vowel  of  Segholates  is  also  written  0  if  0  precedes,  Tjbia 
Mokox,  "i^i"  yo/xop. 

3.  The  regularity  of  these  deviations  seems  to  be  best 
accounted  for  by  the  assumption  that  the  pronunciation 
represented  in  the  Septuagint  is  that  which  prevailed 
among  the  Jews  in  Egypt,  which  would  naturally  be  less 
pure  than  that  of  Palestine  represented  in  the  vowel 
points,  and  which,  moreover,  betrays  in  the  particulars 
recited  above  a  strong  leaning  to  Aramaean  forms  and 
sounds.  Accordingly  the  view  now  commonly  entertained 
is  that  the  vowel  notation  of  the  Massorites  is  correct, 


74  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  50 

at  least  in  all  essential  particulars,  and  that  it  is  properly 
to  be  made  the  basis  of  all  investigations  into  the  phe- 
nomena of  the  language. 


Orthographic  Changes. 

§  50.  The  signs  thus  far  described  represent  all  the 
sounds  of  the  Hebrew  language.  Its  stock  of  words  is 
formed  by  combining  these  in  various  significant  ways. 
The  laws  of  such  combinations,  and  especially  the  mu- 
tations to  w^hich  they  are  subject,  or  which  they  occasion, 
next  demand  attention.  When  a  particular  idea  has 
been  attached  to  a  certain  combination  of  sounds,  its 
different  modifications  may  naturally  be  expressed  by 
shghtly  varying  those  sounds.  This  may  take  place, 

1.  By  the  substitution  of  one  letter  for  another 
of  Hke  character,  and  for  the  most  part  of  the  same 
organ,  e.  g.: 

rr^n  to  be,  exist,  n^Ji  to  live;  i'33  to  pour  forth,  X23  the  same  idea  ap- 
plied to  words,  to  prophesy;  p33  to  encircle  the  neck  with  an  ornament,  pDH 
to  stravgle,  p5X  applied  to  sounds  uttered  in  strangulation,  to  groan;  b3"i  to 
go  ahorit  as  a  spy,  bs'i  to  go  about  as  a  merchant;  033  to  collect,  CISJ 
treasures;  r'^25  a  cup,  yais  or  "5'ip  «  helmet  (of  similar  shape);  "!?  tender, 
delicate,  p"^  tliin;  "pri  to  make  straight,  "jSri  to  straighten  the  beam  of  the 
balance,  to  weigh;  Tir2  first  born,  l^isa  first  ripe,  "ip3  the  first  portion  of 
the  day,  the  morning;  n^n  to  suspend,  tih"!  applied  to  a  bucket,  to  let  down; 
"lU  to  cut,  "is;^  to  reap;  anj  gold,  aha  yellow;  "(pu  to  conceal,  "jSband  "SS 
to  hide  away  as  treasures,  'SO  to  cover  ivith  boards;  yn^  to  destroy  bj'  tear- 
ing down,  cnj  to  destroy  by  uprooting;  n2:2  to  slay,  n^t  to  sacrifice;  ban 
to  bind,  bsj  to  bound;  nia  to  break  up,  flee,  ITnQ  to  break  out,  blossom,  p'na 
to  break  in  pieces;  3^p  to  cut  off,  "yin  to  hew  stone,  2::n  to  cut  wood;  ins 
to  surround,  i^^  to  encircle  the  head  tvith  a  crown;  ~ri3  to  pour  out,  T|p3  to 
pour  iti  libation  or  in  casting  metals;  "ina  to  shine,  inu  to  be  pure;  TnTi  to 
engrave,  '-in  to  plough;  '^nz  to  prove,  iri2  to  approve,  cJioose;  nn;a  to  drink, 
its  causative  '^^"l'■^;  "inn  to  break  through,  "ipn  to  investigate;  2^3  to  place, 
its  reflexive  a^rTii. 

2.  By  the  transposition  of  letters,  e.  g.: 

^iQ  to  deal  violently,  "i:se  to  urge ;  i^p  to  cut  loith  the  sickle,  reap,  fjp^ 


§   51  ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES.  75 

to  cut  with  the  teeth,  hite;  tjiIJi  to  hloiv^  rE3  hreafh;  D23  to  collect,  ftSi  riches, 
ni:3p^  storehouses. 

3.  By  the  addition  of  a  letter: 

Thus,  from  the  letters  "12,  in  which  inheres  the  idea  of  compression 
are  formed  'n^2  to  bind,  "i>is  to  press  together,  'nsx  to  heap  up,  "i^i  to  be 
straitened,  "52:  to  guard,  besiege,  "^'41'  to  restrain,  "i^t^  an  enclosure;  from  Ta 
are  formed  175  to  cut,  T^a  to  cut  off",  T^iJ  to  cut  loose,  go  atvay,  Tn  to  shear, 
^75  fo  plunder,  T'^'ta  Aejon  stone;  d'^s  fo  unfold,  make  distinct,  rang  fo  spread 
out;  d"i3  a  vineyard,  b'3";3  a  garden. 

§  51.  Such  literal  changes  as  those  just  recited  not 
only  serve  to  express  new  shades  of  meaning,  but  even 
where  the  meaning  remains  precisely  the  same,  they  may 
represent  diversities  of  other  sorts.  Thus,  the  distinction 
may  be, 

1.  In  point  of  currency  or  style:  One  form  of  the 
word  being  in  more  common  and  familiar  use,  the  other 
more  rare  and  savoring,  perhaps,  of  the  elevated  or  poetic 
style,  e.  g.: 

1S2  to  guard,  "i;:3  poetic;  TTina  cypress,  riia  once  in  poetry;  nao  to  shut, 
rarely  "I3D;  ST^^'O  storm,  trnsb  rare  and  poetic;  "?&  to  cover,  once  ~?b;  ~?'n 
to  be  quenched,  once  "?T;  n?n  to  abhor,  once  :3Xn;  bDD  to  be  foolish,  onc«. 
Vo3;  rt"!?  iniquity,  once  til^S. 

2.  Of  antiquity:  The  pronunciation  of  a  word  or  its 
form  may  undergo  changes  in  the  lapse  of  time.  Of  the 
few  instances  of  tliis  sort,  which  our  imperfect  data 
enable  us  to  fix  upon  with  some  measure  of  confidence, 
the  following  may  be  taken  as  specimens,  e.  g.: 

To  laugh  in  the  Pentateuch  pryj.,  in  other  books  (Judg.  16:  25  ex- 
cepted) pnb;  to  cry  out  in  the  Pentateuch  p?:2,  only  once  (Ex.  2:  23)  p^T 
which  is  the  more  frequent  form  in  other  books;  nis,  n^iS  a  lamb,  occur 
in  the  Pentateuch  interchangeably  Avith  bns,  nr:::3,  which  are  the  only 
forms  found  in  other  books;  a  sceptre  1:3'^,  but  in  the  book  of  Esther  i;"!::^^; 
Damascus  pt;:2n,  in  Chronicles  pbp"i!i;  hoiv  1  Chron.  13:  12,  Dan.  10:  17 
'^'i^,  in  earlier  books  Tj'^N. 

3.  Of  Dialect:  The  same  word  may  come  to  be 
pronounced  difi'erently  by  those  who  speak  distinct 
though  related  languages.  Thus,  the  cognate   dialects, 


76  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  52 

particularly  the  Biblical  Aramaean  and  Syriac,  in  very 
many  words  regularly  substitute  !}<  for  the  Hebrew 
final  n,  and  the  corresponding  Unguals  for  the  Hebrew 
sibilants,  S  being  sometimes  still  further  weakened  by 
the  loss  even  of  the  lingual  sound  to  that  of  the  gut- 
tural ;-',  e.  g.: 

Heb.  n^'tn  to  wander,  Aram.  NJ'IJ,  Syr.  I.L4 ;  Heb.  2nt  gold,  Aram, 
arrn,  Syr.  i^ffiJ;  Heb.  "iia  a  rock,  Aram,  nrj,  Syr.  \ho.i;  Heb.  labuJ 
three,  Aram.  ThV\,  Syr.  h^Z^  Arab,  i^^*;  Heb.  Y"}^  the  earth,  Arab, 
•'f,  Aram.  S."1X,  Syr.  V^M  •  Other  consonant  changes:  Heb.  '|3  a  son, 
Arab.  ^\^,  Aram.  ^3,  Syr.  j-L ;  Heb.  Vb:J5  to  H/Z,  Arab.  J.^ !  ^eb. 
hb'P'],  Syr.  '\a4tflJ;  Heb.  XS3  a  throne,  Aram.  "^DI^S,  Syr.  U^^as,  Arab. 
^*5^'^;   Heb.  njr^n  a  ^M,   Aram,  xbpsn,  Syr.  IIq-,  Eth.  rftTA.:. 

4.  Of  simple  euphony:  An  alternate  form  of  a  word 
may  be  produced  to  facihtate  its  pronunciation  or  make 
its  sound  more  pleasing,  e.  g.: 

'j'ssnN,  y\vy^ 'purple;  Qi^b,  '-jia  to  hate;  <i3^b,  nsa?  chamber;  '■z^s,  "•as 
Achan;  "laNnrw?,  'nax'i"!=l23  Nebuchadnezzar;  axn,  :i.";iin  Doey;  D-^n^a^X, 
QiHlslpx  almug  or  algum  trees;  VKSTh'q,  n'i:5^ro  toeiA. 

a.  Mere  varieties  of  orthographj'  must  not  be  mistaken  for  consonantal 
changes,  e.  g.  N^  occasionally  for  i^  and  vice  versa,  probably  ri^Db  for 
Wb:p,  and  such  permutations  of  gutturals  as  abound  in  the  manuscripts 
of  the  Samaritans,  Avho,  making  no  distinction  in  the  sounds  of  these  letters, 
perpetually  confounded  them  in  writing,  Gesen.  Sam.  Pent.  p.  52.  A  like 
faulty  pronunciation  has  been  attributed  to  the  Galileans,  to  which  there  is 
a  probable  allusion  in  Matt.  26 :  73.  Buxtorf  Lex.  Chald.  p.  434. 

§  52.  The  changes  thus  far  described  result  in  the 
production  of  distinct  words,  and  belong  to  the  domain 
of  the  lexicon  rather  than  of  the  grammar.  The  lexico- 
grapher regards  such  words  as  cognate,  and  traces  them 
back  to  their  common  source;  but,  in  the  view  of  the 
gi\ammarian,  they  are  totally  distinct.  The  mutations 
with  which  the  latter  concerns  himself  are  such  as  take 
place  in  the  direct  derivation  and  inflection  of  words. 
These  are  altogether  euphonic,  are  more  restricted  in 


§  53  CONSONANT  CHANGES.  77 

their  character,  and  take  place  within  far  narrower  hmits, 
than  those  heretofore  considered.  When  words  are  sub- 
jected to  grammatical  changes  their  sounds  are  brought 
into  new  connections,  attended,  it  may  be,  with  a  diffi- 
culty of  utterance  which  demands  some  measure  of  rehef, 
or  they  pass  readily  and  naturally  into  other  sounds, 
which  are  easier  of  pronunciation  or  more  agreeable  to 
the  ear.  The  mutations  thus  induced  are  of  three  sorts, 
viz.:  Consonant  Changes,  the  Conversion  of  Consonants 
into  Vowels,  and  Vowel  Changes.  These  will  require  to 
be  considered  separately. 

Consonant  Changes. 

§  53.  The  first  class  of  changes  embraces  those  which 
affect  the  consonants.  These  mostly  arise  from  the  con- 
currence of  two  consonants,  creating  a  difficulty  in  the 
pronunciation  or  yielding  a  sound  displeasing  to  the  ear. 
This  may  take  place  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  close 
of  a  syllable.  Syllables  in  Hebrew  may,  and  often  do, 
begin  with  two  consonants,  §  18.  1;  but  the  necessity  of 
this  is  avoided  in  certain  cases  by  the  following  ex- 
pedients: 

1.  In  the  beginning  of  words  the  weak  letter  Si  is 
sometimes  prefixed  with  a  short  vowel,  thus  creating  a 
new  initial  syllable  to  which  the  first  consonant  may  be 
transferred. 

a.  The  only  instances  of  this  are  afforded  by  the  second  and  seventh 
conjugations  of  vei'bs,  tlie  Niphal  and  Hithpael,  e.  g.  bi:p!7  =  ^i2p3ri  for  bbp?; 
^i?t'?'7  probably  for  bapr.comp.  Arab.  ^aA-rt^/nZa.  In  C^'nx  Ezek.  14:3  X  is  pre- 
fixed instead  of  il.  Prosthesis  is  more  common  in  the  domain  of  the  lexicon, 
■where  X  is  always  the  letter  used,  e.  g.  ^inT,  SJ'in'TXorm;  blOT,  ^^brx  yester- 
day. A  prefixed  S  is  even  occasionally  employed  to  soften  the  pronunciation 
without  the  necessity  stated  above,  e.  g,  D'^nanx,  U'^S^X,  d''33")n5<,  D''J3]X.  So 
in  Chaldee  D'lX  blood,  Heb.  Q^;  'jJX  garden,  Heb.  "3.  In  Ai-abic  the  con- 
currence of  two  consonants  at  the  bei;inning  of  a  word  is  regularly  obviated 
by  pi-efixing  ^.    Comp.  Greek  x^ic,  sx^k- 


78  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  53 

2.  The  first  of  the  concurrent  consonants,  if  it  has  a 
comparatively  feeble  sound,  is  sometimes  dropped. 

a.  This  occurs  regularly  in  verbs  whose  first  radical  is  "^  or  3,  and  in 
nouns  derived  from  such  verbs,  e.g.  id  for  ib"],  tiy^  for  "lyn";,  h^2.  for  h^b,'', 
'B  for  *n2,  ''n  Ezek.  2:  10  for  'hi,  barn  Ezek.  1:  4  for  brin:,  and  perhaps 
"1X3  Am.  8 :  8  for  IN"]?. 

X  is  thus  dropped  in  T.n  for  ^3n35t,  \2J  for  "i'i|x;  also  in  a  few  instances 
from  the  beginning  of  the  second  syllable  of  words,  e.  g.  ^1?^,^  Ezek.  28:  16 
for  Tiiaxx'i;  'pix  Job  32:  11  for  "pTNX;  Di^^Dtl  Eccl.  4:  14  for  Q'^nTOXIi; 
D^iinn  2  Chron.  22:  5  for  D-'snxn ;  n'^DD  Ezek.  20:  37  for  r":bx^ ;  nVsp 
1  Kin.  5:  25  with  Daghesh-forte  conservative  for  riVi;x"3;  2nx  Prov.  8:  17 
for  anXN;  'pT^a  Prov.  17:  4  for  "pTX^;  "rVJ  1  Sam.  1 :  17  for  TiK^X-i:.  These 
examples  likewise  admit  of  a  different  explanation;  K  may  give  up  its  con- 
sonantal power,  losing  its  sound  in  that  of  the  preceding  vowel,  agreeably 
to  §  57.  2  (2),  after  which  it  may  readily  be  dropped  altogether. 

'O  is  occasionally  dropped  from  the  participles  of  the  Pual  or  fourth 
conjugation,  as  nf?p  for  rii^bp;  b  in  np  for  ri;^'-;  n  in  nkb  Ex.  3:  2  for  rihnb; 
Clh^;;:^  Ex.  7:  22  for  cn-^-Jlib  Ex.  7:  11;  and  perhaps  D  in  nrflO  Gen.  49:  11, 
which  appears  to  be  for  nnTOS. 

6.  The  rejection  of  a  consonant  from  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  when 
not  immediately  followed  by  another  consonant,  is  exceptional;  as  T^  Judg. 
9:  11  for  "in^;  nP.ri  2  Sam.  22:  41  for  nririD;  in  Ezek.  33:  30  for  "inX; 
n'isirn  Neh.  3:  13  for  nisrxn;  "'Pbinn  Judg.  9:  9  for  "'nbnnnn,  and  per- 
haps iid  Jer.  42:  10,  which  seems  to  be  for  niij". 

3.  The  second  consonant  is  sometimes  dropped,  if  it 
is  a  letter  of  feeble  sound. 

a.  This  is  regularly  the  case  with  n  of  the  article  and  of  verbal  pre- 
fixes, and  "^  as  the  final  radical  of  verbs,  e.  g.  H'^ib  for  ri"]zn?;  ba?"  for 
bibisn'^ ;  ^H  ^'^^  ''''^$- 

It  occurs  besides  in  a  few  sporadic  examples  Avith  these  same  letters, 
and  more  rarely  still  with  X,  1,  and  S,  e.  g.  IT  for  in',  "^3  Ezek.  2:10  for 
"^n:,  liE'Iji"'  for  LJEwin*',  IS'iwP'i  and  W^iip  with  Daghesh-forte  conservative 
for  ^n:5-jp';  and  ^inni-jp;  f\r,'^^  Lam.  3:  53  for  ^V'=;l,  "iiin  Gen.  3:  16  for 
-.i'i"'~n;  r.z^-q  Job  35:  U  for  i:b'::i<t),  d"i'is3  Ex.  26:  24  for  B'^HXri,  bn^  Isa. 
13:  20  for  VnX"^,  "'iym  2  Sam  22:  40  for  "^J^INni;  iS  Isa.  3:  24  for  ■''13,  ly 
for  ">'i :?,  'a'^hl  for  ta'^an*^ ;  13  as  a  particle  of  entreaty,  probably  for  ■'SS,  np'^S 
Am.  8:8  (K'thibh)  for  niypr?;  bs  the  name  of  a  Babylonish  deity  for  bs'3 
is  a  foreign  contraction.  The  conjecture  that  "133  Mic.  1:  10  is  for  iz^'S  in 
Accho  is  ingenious  and  favoured  by  the  occurrence  of  n:>3  in  Gtith  in  the 
parallel  clause;  but  it  is  at  variance  with  the  points,  which,  upon  this  hypo- 
thesis, should  be  "133. 

b.  In  rare  cases  this  rejection  occurs  even  after  a  mixed  syllable,  whose 
final  consonant  is  thus  drawn  forward,   e.  g.  n'bx  /or  nr"CX,   n-^Pl  Job  29 :  6 


§  54  CONSONANT  CHANGES.  79 

for  fiN'cn,  -i^T^l  Ex.  2 :  4  for  isk'riPi  and  probably  p!3X  Ps.  139 :  8  with  Daghesh- 
forte  conservative  for  pfex. 

§  54.  When  the  concurrence  takes  place  at  the  close 
of  a  syllable,  whether  the  second  consonant  belongs  to 
the  same  syllable  with  the  first  as  at  the  end  of  words, 
or  to  a  different  syllable  as  in  the  middle  of  words,  the 
following  changes  may  be  produced. 

1.  An  aspirate  following  another  consonant  loses  its 
aspiration,  §  21;  or  if  it  be  brought  into  juxtaposition 
with  its  like  so  as  to  form  a  doubled  letter,  the  aspiration 
of  both  ^\i\\  be  removed,  §  23.2,  unless  the  combination 
occurs  at  the  end  of  a  word,  where  the  reduplication  is 
not  expressed,  §  25.  Thus,  rV2  for  TTp2,  rann  for  Diarnri, 
■;r-ab  for  "hn^b,  but  nn  from  nin,  n^irp  1  Kin.  1: 15  for 
nn^t"^  or  rnnir^j,  nin-^  Ezek.  4:  3  for  nni";^,  T\hz^2  Mai. 
1:  14  for  nnra'J. 

2.  The  first  of  two  concurring  consonants  is  in  certain 
cases  assimilated  to  the  second,  the  doubling  thus  oc- 
casioned being  expressed  as  in  the  case  of  letters  origin- 
ally alike  by  Daghesh-forte,  except  at  the  end  of  words, 
§  25,  where  Daghesh  disappears  or  is  only  virtually  pre- 
sent, being  resumed  upon  the  addition  of  a  fresh  vowel 
or  syllable.  Tliis  is  most  frequently  the  case  with  the 
liquid  D,  rarely  with  b  and  1  and  only  in  particular 
words;  so  T\  of  the  Hithpael  of  verbs  before  1  and  t2, 
and  in  a  few  instances  before  sibilant  and  other  letters, 
and  "  at  the  end  of  a  few  words  before  T\.  Thus,  '^rc 
for  -nr,  nn-j  for  ninD^a;  njs':  for  nj^b":,  nss  Ezek.  27:  23 
for  nibl  Am.  6:  2;  "^'bifl  for  ^b  m£?!St';  '^kl^T.  for  •k^'^T}'^,, 
im^:  for  iXhx:T\^^,  !i3-tri'for  ^3Tnn",  Dbiisn  for  nbrojnp, 
iiNnsn  for  vj<n:nn,  nosn  for  riDsnri;  nb  for  rqb,  nn5< 
for  mrs. 

;    :   -  -  * 

a.  So  perhaps  D  in  iih'O  according  to  Gesenius  for  tiba^  and  Dp  for 
psp.  Compare  Greek  avyysvrjc  for  sv^ys-jric,  TirvfJ-ixai  for  TSTyiTfLai,  and  Eng. 
il-logical,  ir-religion,  im-tnature  formed  by  the  negative  prefix  m. 


80  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  55 

3.  A  few  isolated  cases  occur  of  the  reverse  process 
more  common  in  Biblical  iVramaeic  and  Syriac,  by  which  a 
doubled  letter  is  resolved  into  two  different  consonants  by 
the  change  of  the  first  or  the  second  member  of  the  redupli- 
cation to  a  hquid  n  or  3,  e.  g.  bn")j"^  for  ^i^^"^,  P"'?"91"^  ^^^ 
T'uiai,  rrilTl  Isa.  23:  11  for  rrrJl^,  ^krp  Job  18:  2  in  the 
judgment  of  some  for  ^k])  ends,  though  others  make  the 
3  a  radical,  and  give  the  word  the  sense  of  snares.  The 
conjecture  that  ^D'ln  Ps.  64:  7,  Lam.  3:  22  is  for  ^'a7\  is 
unnecessary  and  unwarranted. 

4.  When  n  of  the  Hithpael  of  verbs  would  stand  be- 
fore a  sibilant,  it  is  transposed  with  D  and  IT,  and  with  .2 
it  is  in  addition  changed  to  t:.  Thus,  ^P.riC"::  for  ""pcritl, 
•nisriTT^  for  "i3"i:n^  'lyru:*'  for  ^3?'!^%  p^tiiz:  for  p'l'.in]. 

a.  In  n;:;i:T;3rn  Jer.  49 : 3  the  tran.sposition  does  not  take  place  in  con- 
sequence of  the  number  of  similar  letters  which  would  thus  be  brought 
into  proximity.  In  the  cognate  languages  ri  is  likewise  transposed  with  T 
and  changed  to  1:  thus,  Aram.  "H^jri  for  '|a]rii7;  so,  also,  in  Syriac  and 
Arabic.  The  only  example  of  a  Hebrew  verb  whose  first  letter  is  T  appearing 
in  this  conjugation  is  ^iS^li  Isa.  1:  16,  where  n  is  assimilated  agreealjly  to  2. 
Compare  with  these  transpositions  the  frequent  Doric  change  of  ^  (=  "he) 
into  dh,  as  avpia^iui  for  avpi^u. 

§  55.  The  occurrence  of  a  consonant  at  the  end  of  a 
word  may,  inasmuch  as  the  succeeding  word  must  ne- 
cessarily begin  with  one,  be  regarded  as  an  additional 
case  of  the  concurrence  of  consonants.  As  the  contact  is 
less  close,  however,  than  when  they  meet  in  the  same 
word,  it  is  less  fruitful  of  changes  than  in  the  cases  al- 
ready considered. 

1.  There  are  three  instances  in  which  it  has  been 
doubtfully  conjectured  that  a  final  "j  has  been  asshnilated 
to  a  following  initial  7^;  viz.  C^'lijlZJ';  Isa.  35:  1  presumed  to 
be  for  'rix-;;  DV-E  Num.  3:  49  for  "ji^-D  Ex.  21:  30,  Ps. 
4^:  9;  diz  Cien.  28:  12. 

a.  Final  consonants  are  in  Sanski-it  perpetually  modified  by  the  initial 
letter  of  the  following  word.    But  it  is  by  no  means  clear  that  this  is  so  in 


§  56  CONSONANT  CHANGES.  81 

Hebrew,  even  in  the  examples  alleged,  as  the  forms  admit  of  a  different 
explanation.  See  in  regard  to  the  first  passage,  Dr.  Alexander's  Com- 
mentary. 

2.  A  few  cases  occur  of  the  rejection  of  a  letter,  cMeflj 
]  and  D,  from  the  end  of  a  word. 

a.  ■]  of  the  verbal  endings  'y\  and  '"i^  is  almost  always  dropped,  being 
only  retained  as  an  archaic  or  emphatic  form,  and  chiefly  at  the  end  of  a 
clause,  e.  g.  'y^i^"^^  Deut.  8:  16,  but  mostly  ^in'^;  "i^l'iann  Gen.  32:  20,  com- 
monly ^~3jFi;  'i'^b^'ri  Ruth  3:  4,  commonly  "^b^n.  So,  too,  in  some  j^roper 
nouns,  "''•i:^  Zech.  12:  11,  'i'i:^  Josh.  12:  21;  "ip-i'vp,  whose  original  ",  is  shown 
in  the  derivative  '^J'^'^d  and  is  perpetuated  in  the  modern  name  Seilun. 

h.  In  like  manner  d  is  rejected  from  the  dual  and  plural  terminations 
of  nouns  upon  their  entering  into  the  close  connection  of  the  construct 
state  with  the  following  word,  "'.ifij  from  Ci'I'STX,  "iria  from  D-^na. 

c.  If  the  feminine  endings  n_  and  n  have,  as  is  probable,  a  common 
origin,  this  may  be  best  explained  by  the  assumption  that  r.  is  in  many 
cases  rejected  from  the  termination,  leaving  only  the  vowel,  though  it  is 
always  retained  when  any  addition  is  made  to  the  word:  thus,  the  con- 
struct state  r?2;n,   absolute  trbnn,  but  with  a  suffix  '^r'arri;    r^^'^p  (comp. 

-  :    t'  ^  T   ;    t'  •    t  :    t  '  t    ;  'it  ^ 

rt'N  Deut.  32:  36),  "^Jri::)?.  It  is  to  be  observed  here,  that  this  phenomenon 
does  not  establish  the  possibility  of  an  interchange  between  the  consonants 
n  and  n,  because  tl  in  this  case  represents  not  h  but  the  vowel  d. 

§  56.  A  few  other  changes  remain  to  be  mentioned 
which  are  due  to  special  causes. 

1.  Nun  is  often  inserted  in  certain  forms  of  verbal 
suffixes  to  prevent  the  hiatus  between  two  vowels,  ^ill^^liyt! 
Jer.  5:  22,  or  §  53.  3.  a  ^-^Dr  Isa.  33:  21  for  ^n^Z^,:, 
5ir;:i9".:hS!^  Ex.  15:  2  for  ^,ri'^pSs.  Comp.  Gr.  dvoaio;  and 
the  English  indefinite  article  an. 

2.  Yav  at  the  beginning  of  words  is  changed  to  '', 
e.  g.  ir  for  l?1,  -y  for  1%  btip":  for  bbpl.  The  only  ex- 
ceptions are  the  four  words  Tl ,  '^T'l  Pro  v.  21:8,  ib^  Gren. 
11:  30,  lbl  2  Sam.  6:  23  (K'ri),  'and  the  prefixes  Vav 
Conjunctive  and  Vav  Conversive. 

3.  Vav,  though  capable  of  being  reduplicated,  e.  g. 
IJJ^U^  is  in  most  instances  reheved  from  this  necessity  by 
the  substitution  of  "',  or  by  doubling  the  following  letter 
in  its  stead,  e.  g.  D^.piS^  or  DbipN  for  D-lplS;. 


82  ORTHOGRArHY.  §  57 

• 

a.  In  one  instance  after  such  a  chanje  of  1  to  •'j  a  following  "^  suffers 
the  contr^rj'  change  to  1  to  prevent  the  triple  recurrence  of  the  same 
letter,  ""^^S  Isa.  16:  9  for  T\''\'!i<. 

4.  Yodh  before  the  plural  termination  W^^  is  in  a  few 
cases  changed  to  5^  to  prevent  the  conjunction  of  like 
sounds,  D-i<^bri  Hos.  11:  7  for  D^^bri  Josh.  10:  26;  D^kiz^S 
Hos.  11:  8  for  n^h:i  Gen.  10:  19;  n^5?7^"l  from  HJi'n;  D^X22J 
(also  niki::)  for  D^^.r^;  ^kib^  Jer.  38:  12  for  ^ibs  (or  as 
some  read,  "'.'^ibli)  ver.  11. 

a.  In  like  manner  1  is  changed  to  !!<  before  ni  in  the  word  nis?  for 
rilD  from  ri'D;  it  is  consequently  unnecessary  to  assume,  as  Gesenius  does, 
a  singular  nxj  which  never  occurs. 

Change  of  Consonants  to  Vowels. 

§  57.  The  second  class  of  changes  is  the  conversion 
of  consonants  into  vowels,  or  the  substitution  of  the 
latter  for  the  former.    This  occurs, 

1.  Occasionally  in  reduplicated  syllables  or  letters, 

nbis  for  n332;  rrttfi'o  for  nikt^sp;  bn:n  for  binba  Gen. 

11:  9;  ninb::'2  Chron.  35:  13  from  n-b:iProv.  19:  24. 

2.  Much  more  frequently  with  the  quiescents. 

(1)  A  prefixed  1  is  softened  to  its  homogeneous  vowel 
u  before  other  labials  or  vowelless  letters,  e.  g.  n''h^,  "lii"^ ; 
the  softening  of  an  initial  "^  to  ^  only  occurs  in  ''UJ'N; 
1  Chron.  2:  13  for  't^I  ver.  12,  ENi  2  Sam.  14:  19,  Mic. 
6:  10  for  ^\ 

(2)  Medial  or  final  quiescents  without  vowels  of  their 
own  often  lose  their  sound  in  that  of  a  preceding  vowel. 
This  is  invariably  the  case  with  1  and  ^  following  their 
homogeneous  vowels,  e.  g.  "in^n  for  ^nlH  §  59,  Mi^n^Iifor 
ni^tr;^,  unless  they  are  doubled,  as  ^iu;*.a,  !l^:2,  and  oc- 
casionally even  then,  e.  g.  ^T^2  for  ^i:^7J.  Final  i5  always, 
and  medial  N  frequently,  gives  up  its  consonant  sound 
after  any  vowel  whatever,  e.  g.  Nl^'r,  s^bzr,  tixkb  for  ^yi:'"C. 


§57 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS  TO  VOWELS.  83 


a.  Medial  X  regularly  loses  its  consonantal  power  in  the  future  Kal  of 
Pe  Aleph  verbs,  e.  g.  ^=5<"^;  in  "ibX  preceded  bj^  b,  thus  ^iix^;  in  Q^H^X 
and  certain  forms  of  'I'i'iX  preceded  by  the  prefixes  3^31,  thus,  D'^iibx^, 
•iHi'bxp  but  Pfi^N^;  "^inxV,  rinxb,  '^inxb  but  "linxb,  ^insb,  iri^xb.  The  follow- 
ing examples  are  of  a  more  individual  character,  e.  g.  ri"lX3  for  iiix3,  HijJXl 
1  Kin.  11:  39  for  nbsi,  ^ibsosn  Num.  11:  4,  S-fsTxa  Jer.'40:  1,  rj^nxiJX-J 
Isa.  14:  23.  In  a  few  cases  this  has  led  to  a  change  of  orthography,  the  X 
Avhich  is  no  longer  heard  being  dropped,  or  another  vowel  letter  substituted 
for  it,  e.  g.  6311  Ezek.  42:  5,  and  b-'bix  Hos.  11:4  from  bsx,  ■|iOi"i  Job  8 :  8 
for  'ptx"!,  Tri*l  Deut.  32 :  32  for  ll3x"i,  and  the  examples  cited  §  53.  2,  a. 

h.  The  consonant  n  never  loses  its  sound  in  that  of  a  preceding  vowel 
like  the  rest  of  the  quiescents.  The  letter  n  is  often  used  to  denote  a  vowel, 
but  if  in  any  word  it  properly  expresses  a  consonant  this  is  never  converted 
into  a  vowel,  or  vice  versa.  The  exceptions  are  apparent  not  real,  as  in  the 
frequent  abbreviation  of  the  ending  >itTi  in  proper  names  to  IT',  thus  ^in'ptn, 
(^^l:31^I.  The  change  here  does  not  consist  in  the  rejection  of  the  vowel  ^ 
and  the  softening  of  the  consonant  n,  but  the  syllable  in  is  dropped,  where- 
upon final  Kamets  is  written  by  its  appropriate  vowel  letter,  §  11.  1,  a,  just 
as  ^n^s'^a  after  the  rejection  of  IH^  becomes  nb"'^.  So  in  those  rare  cases  in 
which  ti  is  substituted  for  the  suffix  T\,  e.  g.  ti'iyb  Lev.  13:  4  for  tn'iSi':?. 
The  proper  name  ^HlinQ  Num.  34:  28  is  derived  not  ft-om  HtS  but  tt'iS,  a 
root  of  kindred  meanhig,  of  whose  existence,  though  otherwise  unattested, 
this  word  is  itself  a  sufficient  voucher. 

(3)  Medial  N  often  gives  its  vowel  to  a  preceding 
vowelless  letter  and  rests  in  its  sound;  "^  occasionally 
does  the  same  with  a  homogeneous  vowel,  when  preceded 
by  a  vowelless  prefix. 

a.  Thus,  K:  Q-^i-X-i  for  d'^ll'N"!,  nNlJPl  for  rx-JD;  ^^^^  Ezek.  25:  6  from 
■JN;^  ver.  1.  ;  KIO;  Is.  139:  20  fur  ikbD,  so  Xl'dr  Jer.  10:  5;  ^il^lXI  from 
'bx-i;  CvSnia  >ieh.  6:  8  for  tX-iiS;  xin  Isa.  51  :  20,  isn  Deut.  14:  5;  n\S'bh 
1  Sam.  14:  33  for  tD-xah;   "i'^2X3  Isa.  10:  13  for  TiaxS;   "itexi   Zech.  11:  5 


25:  36  for  ^3^1;    tiy^^h  Prov.  30:  17   ifor  Tty^'h.    There  is  no  instance  of 
this  with  \  on  the  contrary,  Tiiaip  Cant.  5:  2,  12. 

(4)  At  the  end  of  words  1  and  ""j  when  without  a 
vowel  of  their  own  and  preceded  by  a  vowelless  letter, 
invariably  quiesce  in  their  homogeneous  vowels,  1  in  an 
unaccented  f(,  "  in  ^,  which  draws  the  accent  upon  itself 
and  frequently  causes  the  dissolution  of  a  previous  syl- 
lable and  the  rejection  of  its  vowel,  ^mM  for  inh,  iinnp^ 
for  Yl^^y^  ^"l^  for  ^t]\,  ^nS  for  ^'\B,  ^b^.  for  ':)J'n. 


84  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  58 

(5)  When  preceded  or  accompanied  by  heterogeneous 
vowels,  1  and  "^  are  sometimes  dropped,  or  if  the  vowel 
be  a,  they  not  mifrequently  combine  with  it,  forming  the 
diphthongal  o  and  e,  §  62.  1,  e.  g.  pii^H  for  pk";:!,  T\^ 

for  '^%  r)5a  for  ^ba,  dj^  for  Dip,  n^pn  for  D'ipn,  tl'^  for 
ni53;  nipin  for  Tilj'in,  tilS  forici"]^,  ni/J  construct  state 

of  nia,  n-'S  const,  of  n^iii,  yb%-i  for  b^^n,  nb::  for  ^h:. 

a.  Vav  rarel}'  remains  with  a  heterogeneous  vowel  unless  accompanied 
by  weak  letters,  by  contrast  with  which  it  becomes  comparatively  strong, 
e.  g.  wn,  "1^3?,  ni'i. 

YowEL  Changes. 

§  58.  1.  The  third  class  of  changes  embraces  those 
which  take  place  in  the  vowels.  The  primary  office  of 
the  vowels  is  to  aid  in  pronouncing  the  consonants,  to 
which  consequently  they  are  quite  subordinate,  merely 
occupying,  so  to  speak,  the  interstices  between  them. 
Their  number  and  variety  being  greater,  however,  than 
is  demanded  for  this  single  purpose,  they  have  besides 
to  a  certain  extent  an  independent  value  and  meaning  of 
their  owii  in  the  constitution  of  words.  (1)  Changes  of 
vowels,  while  they  cannot  like  a  difference  of  consonants 
create  distinct  verbal  roots,  are  yet  fruitful  of  those 
minor  modifications  of  which  etymology  takes  cognizance, 
such  as  the  formation  of  derivatives  and  grammatical  in- 
flexions, e.  g.  bis  to  he  great,  h"ii  greatness,  bii^  great;  bbp 
he  killed,  bibp  to  kill,  blip  kill  thou,  bbp  killing,  b^bp 
killed;  C^D  a  horse,  rib^.D  a  mare.  (2)  They  may  indicate 
differences  in  the  forms  of  words  which  have  arisen  in 
the  lapse  of  time;  "^71  in  the  Pentateuch  means  indifferently 
girl  or  hoy,  in  later  books  girl  is  m^?.?.;  i^^n  in  the  Penta- 
teuch he  or  she,  in  other  books  slie  is  always  i^'^n;  the 
form  of  the  demonstrative  T'\i}T]  is  found  only  in  Genesis, 
Tbri  in  writers  after  the  time  of  Moses,  ^Tbn  in  Ezekiel; 


§  58  VOWEL  CHANGES.  85 

the  plural  of  the  demonstrative  in  the  Pentateuch  bi^  or 
fhj:^,  elsewhere,  with  a  single  exception,  fhk.  The  im- 
perfect notation  of  the  vowels  in  the  original  mode  of 
writing  by  letters  alone  has,  however,  left  us  without 
the  means  of  ascertaining  to  what  extent  such  changes 
may  have  taken  place.  (3)  They  may  indicate  diversity 
of  dialect,  e.  g.  bh])  to  kill,  Aram.  bt2p,  Syr.  "^-^^^   Arab. 

J^iJ,  Ethiop.  *tA:. 

2.  The  vowel  changes  with  which  orthography  is 
concerned,  on  the  other  hand,  are  purely  euphonic,  being 
in  themselves  void  of  significance,  and  springing  solely 
from  the  natural  preference  for  what  is  easier  of  utter- 
ance or  more  agreeable  to  the  ear.  Orthographically 
considered,  vowels  are  either  mutable  or  immutable,  the 
latter  being  unaffected  by  those  circumstances  which 
occasion  changes  in  the  former.  A  vowel  may  be  im- 
mutable by  nature,  or  made  so  by  position.  A  short 
vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  before  the  accent  is  ordinarily 
immutable  by  position,  being  beyond  the  reach  of  the 
common  causes  of  mutation,  e.  g.  "ilZL^'J,  TirE'ilJ"^.  Long 
vowels  are  immutable  by  nature  in  certain  words  or 
classes  of  words;  but  they  are  only  distinguishable  as 
such  by  a  knowledge  of  the  etymological  forms  which 
require  them.  It  may,  however,  be  observed,  as  a  general 
though  not  an  invariable  rule,  that  the  vowels  of  such 
words  and  forms  as  are  prevailingly  written  with  the 
vowel  letters  are  less  liable  to  mutation  than  those  wliich 
are  prevailingly  written  without  them.  Mutable  vowels 
are  hable  to  changes  both  of  quantity,  from  long  to  short, 
and  the  reverse,  and  of  quality  from  pure  to  mixed  («  to 
0,  i  to  e,  a  to  e)  and  the  reverse,  these  changes  being 
confined,  except  in  rare  instances,  to  the  cognate  forms; 
thus,  i  never  passes  into  ii  or  o,  nor  these  into  a.  Only 
as  e  stands  in  relation  to  both  i  and  a,  it  serves  to  mediate 


86  OETHOGKAPHT.  §  59,  60 

the  interval  between  them,  and  thus  accounts  for  the 
occasional  changes  of  i  to  a  or  the  reverse,  e.  g.  b"!:}:!!, 

nbbpn;  nn  for  n±,  ^nz;  d^,  tt;2^i  comp.  r,  Dbn-;. 

a.  The  exceptional  change  from  %i  or  o  to  e  occurs  only  in  the  pro- 
nouns, 8.  p-.  tnVj;r,  before  suffixes  ^HrViT;  and  in  the  particle  rx,  before 
suffixes  r's.  There  are  also  a  few  examples  of  the  change  of  short 
vowels  in  mixed  syllables  before  the  accent,  e.  g.  ii23'^'2,  construct  rasip, 
plural  r,",i:3-ia. 

§  59.  The  mutations  of  vowels  are  due  to  one  or 
other  of  the  following  causes,  viz.:  1.  Syllabic  changes. 
2.  The  influence  of  consonants.  3.  The  influence  of  vowels. 
4.  The  accent.  5.  The  shortening  or  lengthening  of  words. 
As  the  vowel  of  unaccented  mixed  syllables  is  always 
short,  and  that  of  simple  syllables  long,  §  18.  2,  it  is 
evident  that  a  change  in  the  character  of  a  syllable  will 
involve  a  corresponding  change  in  its  vowel,  unless  the 
accent  interfere  to  prevent.  Accordingly,  wdien  for  any 
cause  a  mixed  syllable  becomes  simple,  its  short  vowel 
will  be  converted  into  a  long  one;  and  when  a  simple 
syllable  becomes  mixed,  the  reverse  change  will  take 
place,  e.  g.  "^m?  I^'^m;  n^jb,  7\'dp_.  In  the  case  of  the  vowels 
i  and  u  there  is  frequently  an  additional  change  of  quahty, 
viz.,  of  «  to  e  and  u  to  o,  e.  g.  D^pH  for  cipri;  'i?'iS  foi"  '|?1P 
in  place  of  ",53  §  56.  3. 

a.  Daghesh-forte  is  thus  resolved  by  the  prolongation  of  tlie  previous 

vowel  in  uiirp,  ^'i?:"'p;  ir;"^s,  "d;5'>3;  ■'t'an,  ''■!:;'^'ar] ;  ci''J"i'^^>  d'';;'''ii-a;  ',pn, 
•ipW;  t-iiTl"^  Eccles.  9:  12  for  n'^ii)?-?  §  53.  2.  a;  ^^p.'SrX}  for  ^njsann;  nn-^a 
Lam.  1:8,  if  this  is  for  tl^D  see  ver.  17;  and  if  the  conjecture  of  Gesenius 
(Thesaurus,  p.  483)  be  correct  as  to  the  true  reading  in  1  Chron.  23:  6, 
24:  3  c^Vm-;  for  ti^rn"^. 

§  60.  Contiguous  consonants  may  give  rise  to  vowel 
changes  by  their  individual  pecuharities,  as  is  the  case 
with  the  gutturals,  or  by  their  concurrence.  The  pecuh- 
arities of  the  gutturals  are  foui-fold,  viz.: 

1.  A  preference  for  the  vowel  Pattahh  of  the  same 
organ,  into  which,  consequently,  a  preceding  or  accom- 


§60 


VOWEL  CHANGES.  87 


panying  vowel  is  frequently  converted,   e.  g.  nbilj  for 

nbir;  D?2  for  Q5S;  r^_T  for  »'^z;i^;  yia'j:  for  yiauj;  ?JJJD'U3 
from  l^i'ir. 

a.  The  instances  in  which  this  permutation  occurs  cannot  easily  be 
embraced  under  any  general  rules.  In  some  cases  it  was  optional;  in  others, 
usage  decides  for  it  or  against  it  without,  however,  being  absolutely  uni- 
form. The  following  statements  embrace  what  is  of  most  importance. 
(1)  The  stability  of  the  vowel  often  depends  upon  the  weight  attached  to 
it  in  the  etymological  form;  thus,  ""C'^  in  the  imperative  but  not  in  the  in- 
finitive for  "?2'j;  "r'i"'^  for  sh^l,  but  rrJ  not  S'ii'j  for  2.'r'iJ.  (2)  The  vowel 
preceding  the  guttural  is  more  liable  to  change  than  that  which  succeeds 
it,  e.  g.  "^'Ql  always,  but  brp"^  and  Vv^T};  rtrni  but  OHn;i;  ^p"T  but  1'n'aS. 
(3)  An  accented  vowel  is  sometimes  retained  where  one  unaccented  would 
suffer  change,  e.  g.  ^3n^  but  "in'.';  "'Ij'!];  tti^.  (4)  O  and  n  are  less  subject 
to  alteration  than  i  and  e,  e.  g.  V^"3  for  b"2;  d  which  is  already  cognate 
with  the  gutturals  is  mostly  retained,  though  it  occasionally  becomes  a 
before  n,  e.  g.  D'rX  from  nx,  "^fi^i'a  Job  31:24  (in  most  copies)  from  ni:nT2, 
MS"^  from  !^Tja\  (5)  N  in  many  cases  prefers  the  diphthonaal  vowels  e  and 
0,  thus  V6p^,  -r^i^rr'  ^^^^rl^'.  '"■^^!!  ^^u*  ^^^P^?,.;  '^-^  '=^"'-  (6)  "1  partakes 
of  this  preference  for  a  to  a  1  mited  extent,  e.  g.  "lO^I  for  "ID*;!  or  "iD'l; 
X-i;Jl  from  nN-i\ 

2.  The  reception  of  Pattahh  furtive,  §  17,  at  the  end 
of  a  word  after  a  long  heterogeneous  vowel  (i.  e.  any 
other  than  a),  or  before  a  vowelless  final  consonant,  e.  g. 

a.  This  is  necessary  when  the  vowel  preceding  a  final  guttural  cannot 
be  converted  into  Pattahli.  Sometimes  the  form  with  Pattahh  and  that  with 
Pattalih  furtive  occur  interchangeably,  e.  g.  Ki'^"?  and  n|'i3^,  or  with  a 
slight  distinction,  as  r!i^">{,  in  pause  Itltdi*;  Til's,  construct  fi''2.]'0.  In  a 
few  instances  a  guttural  preceding  a  final  vowelless  letter  takes  simple 
Sh'va  instead  of  Pattahh  furtive,  e.  g.  Rr^s  1  Kin.  14:  3,  and  in  most 
editions  trr^rui  Jer.  13:  25.  As  final  X  is  always  either  quiescent  or  otiant, 
it  never  receives  Pattahh  furtive.  The  letter  "i  never  takes  it  unless  it  be 
in  a  single  instance,  and  that  in  a  penultimate  syllable  rj^'^"^  Ps.  7:  6,  which 
is  probably  to  be  read  yi'^rdoph;  though  it  might  be  ^vonovLr\c%A  yiradldph, 
which  some  conceive  to  be  an  anomalous  form  for  ^'\^y^,,  after  the  analogy 
of  pn;0  "^en.  21:  6,  the  compound  Sh'va  being  lengthened  into  a  vowel 
followed  ^y  euphonic  Daghesh,  as  in  the  related  words  trnsian  Isa.  1 :  6, 
and  ri"'3r)  Tsa.  53:  5,  while  others  adopt  the  explanation  of  the  old  Jewish 
Grammarians,  that  it  is  a  peculiar  combination  of  the  Kal  tpT:  and  the 
Piel  q^n-^. 

3.  A  preference  for  compound  rather  than  simple 
Sh'va,  §  16.  3,  whether  silent 'or  vocal,  inasmuch  as  the 


88  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  60 

gutturals  are  more  readily  made  audible  at  the  beginning 
than  at  the  close  of  a  syllable,  and  the  hiatus  accompany- 
ing them  assumes  more  of  the  complexion  of  a  vowel 
than  is  usual  with  stronger  consonants. 

a.  The  gutturals  occasionally  retain  simple  Sli'va  when  silent.  This 
is  regularly  done  by  a  final  radical  n,  n  or  S,  followed  by  a  servile  letter, 
e.  g.  r.nhii,  iiD"'!'',  Cri""i'^,  Sn"pd"3.  inriffJJ'a ,  with  few  exceptions  as  ~|^3^"n^. 
Hos.  8:  2,'  r,^i?3"3  Gen.  26:  29,  cniriTin  2  Sam.  21  :  6.  Other  cases  have 
more  of  a  casual  or  sporadic  character,  and  occur  chiefly  with  the  stronger 
gutturals  n  and  n,  niii^  Tisni,  'n'lr;^,  'bsrin,  >icri::rn,  niirn^  but  rrirJn?. 
t'hrr'  but  ican^,  nSrs  a  possession,  but  n^r-i  from  bni  a  brook;  more 
rarely  with  X  and  S^^S^.  Lev.  4:  13,  N"c;r3  1  Kin.  15:  16,  d^l^i  Isa.  11:  15, 
n^Srr  Deut.  25:  7  but  in  pause  :fT^S"^  Isa.  28:  6,  "'n-'NS  Ex.  15:  6;  ^  has  for 
the  most  part  simple  Sh'va  t^^bn,  ^'^'^.■^'!,  though  in  a  few  instances  it  has 
compound  "ibtlr.)  I'^i?!)-^']]- 

b.  (l)  Among  the  compound  Sh'vas  the  preference,  unless  there  is  some 
reason  for  choosing  anothei",  is  ordinarily  given  to  Hhateph  Pattahh,  as 
the  simplest  and  most  in  accordance  with  the  nature  of  the  gutturals,  and 
to  this  an  antecedent  Hhirik,  when  unessential  to  the  form,  is  commonly 
made  to  correspond,  e.  g.  "i'h",  'lir'^  for  "ib3";.  Sometimes,  particularly  with 
N  (see  1.  a.  5.)  Hhateph  Seghol  is' taken  M^^N,  nj^^X,  f^y^ii^,  r-:x,  nix, 
Dinx,  tin'^frii  ''^T?,  TW,  T\^'^-J  Joel  2:  5,  "^ins^  Jer.  13:  21,  which  not  in- 
frequently becomes  Hhateph  Pattahh  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  word 
^\'!''2^,  -TDX  Prov.  25:  7,  I'Pl-aX,  "pilX,  ^iniinNli  Judg.  10:  2,  or  the  carrying 
forward  of  its  accent  ''ni3i<vl,  ''P15?v!'i,  ''^^CiO'  ^f^r'^nv^l- 

(2)  If,  however, «  or  o,  characteristic  of  the  form,  precede,  this  commonly 
determines  the  Sh'va  to  be  selected,  e.  g.  "i''hy'n_  for  TiJsSrt,  1^>^  for  Tb>:;, 
"^fea  for  i^"a ;  though  sometimes  Hhateph  Pattahh  is  retained  and  the 
intermediate  syllable,  §  18.  3,  resolved  into  a  simple  one  by  prolonging  the 
vowels,  e.  g.  Pi"}?"?!  Josh.  7:  7,  rt^yh,  i^irb  Isa.  1:  31.  Hhirik  may,  how- 
ever, remain  short,  e.  g.  Ti^"!]?],  2JfeuJ,  I'Hlll^  Job  6:  22,  particularly  if  a 
Daghesh-forte  has  been  omitted  from  the  guttural,  e.  g.  •^E^^J!  Jei".  3:  8, 
though  even  in  this  case  the  assimilation  sometimes  takes  j^lace,  e.  g. 
^ht]'^^  Gen.  30:  39  for  ^^n"^,  ^innx  Judg.  5:  28  for  ^l^HX.  If  a  vowel  has  been 
rejected  from  the  form,  the  corresponding  Hhateph  is  generally  preferred, 
e.  g.  S'^^SS;  from  ^eH>,  d-©nn,  'I'lTOn  Ezek.  16:  33,  ''N^  Gen.  16:  13;  "^bptn 
1  Kin.  13:  20  from  ^"'irn;  '^^T'^'n  Gen.  37:  22  from  ^^^^i.  There  are  oc- 
casional instances  of  the  same  word  being  variously  written  in  this  respect, 
e-  g-  ''i™  Ruth  3:  15,  siinx  Cant.  2:  15;  Ifrnxni  and  Itrnxni  Isa.  44:  13; 
^"i?3-i^n  Job  16  :  16  (K'ri  in  some  copies),  1l^"ipn  Lam.  1 :  20,  i'nx'n  Isa.  52: 14, 
•^NPl  1  Sam.  28:  14. 

c.  Before  another  guttural  the  compound  Sh'va  is  frequently  replaced 
by  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  e.  g.  Tt^xri  for  T|5?^t^,  '^nT'^yr!  for  "^nTi"?!, 
t^^'^r^r?  fo""  ^5'^'!!'?^!;  find  occasionally  under  X  by  a  long  vowel  before 
other  letters  as  well  as  gutturals,' or  by  a  short  vowel  with  Daghesh,  e.  g. 


§  61  VOWEL  CHANGES.  89 

Di?>r!X  for  B'^'inx,  I'^rrriis;,  D^inx  for  djizn,  "iitx  for  i'itwN;,  "^bx  for  igx.  This 
disposition  to  render  tlie  gutturals  more  audible  by  the  aid  of  a  vowel  is 
further  shown  by  their  attracting  to  themselves  the  vowel  of  another  letter, 
particularly  in  triliteral  monosyllables,  e.  g.  yi"  for  ^nt  (Si^T),  "'CJri,  Stt?, 
Uyri,  rfjp  2  Kin.  12:  9,  dxa  for  iTxin,  1N2,  also  ■|X'i|:?  Ex.  2:  20  for  JKnp 
Euth  1:  20,  ^iiixn  Prov.  1:  22  for  idliXP,  >l!^^=5<r\  Job  20:  26  8ee§111.2.e", 
D';;i"DX1  Zech.  7:  14  for  D'n^GXi,  and  by  their  sometimes  causing  an  ante- 
cedent or  accom]]anying  vowel  to  be  retained  where  analogy  would  require 
its  rejection,  e.  g.  iXIiia  for  '^kli'i'a  from  xki^,  iK'jn,  '•V'Ji'O,  ^'nk-^'O'^  Dent. 
32:  10;  'r\yj-q,  rfm 

4.  An  incapacy  for  being  doubled,  whence  they  never 
receive  Daghesh-lbrte,  and  the  previous  syllable  thus 
becoming  a  simple  one,  its  vowel  is  generally  lengthened, 
§  59,  «  to  a,  i  to  e,  it  to  o,  e,  g.  "ji^'^  for  ")k"^,  "|ii5"^  for  '|i<"-3, 

■qni:";  for  i\^2] ,  "iTjN,  ^b'ri. 

a.  Sometimes  an  intermediate  syllable,  §  18.  3,  is  formed,  and  the  vowel 
remains  short,  (l)  This  is  commonly  the  case  before  n,  frequently  be- 
fore n,  less  often  before  35,  rarelj'  before  N,  never  before  ^,  e.  g.  CW, 
*iri"j,  "inp,  35?ri,  "j'SJ.  (2)  It  is  more  likely  to  occur  in  the  body  of  a  word 
than  after  a  prefix,  e.  g.  "Tlbr!"^  Ps.  119:  43  from  bn^,  but  phh  Job  38:  24 
from  p^n.  (3)  When  the  guttural  comes  to  stand  at  the  end  of  the  word 
the  short  vowel  is  often  resumed,  e.  g.  "^'!^^  Prov.  22:  24  from  nyipn,  ^VT\ 
Ps.  141:  8  from  I'i'^t^t^  but  ^^rn  Deut.  2:  9.  There  are  a  very  few  in- 
stances in  which  Daghesh-furte  is  found  in  "i,  e.  g.  T\y}'^  f'riS  Ezek.  16:  4, 
rM-2  Prov.  14:  10,  Ti'b"'^.^?^  Prov.  15:  1  (in  some  editions),  iii'^i'nr  Cant.  5:  2, 
see  also  §  24.  b. 

§  61.  The  concurrence  of  consonants  gives  rise  to  the 
following  vowel  changes,  viz.: 

1.  When  two  vowelless  letters  come  together  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable  in  contravention  of  the  law  in 
§  18,  the  impossible  combination  is  relieved  by  giving  to 
the  first  of  them  a  short  vowel.  This,  if  there  be  no  reason 
for  preferring  another,  will  be  the  briefest  of  the  vowels, 
Hhirik,  e.  g.  ^^n'n  for  ^']r'n,  ^hllL  for  ^Z-^l,  ^pTH  for  ^pjn. 
If  a  vowel  has  been  omitted  from  the  word,  the  correspond- 
ing short  vowel  is  frequently  employed,  e.  g.  ^b^'2  for 
^5b7J  from  ?|b53  (l\)p2);  ^bbr  from  r^'2;  ^5nn  from  bin,  7^'2r:i 
for  T^jU)  from  "jfr.  Or  if  one  of  the  consonants  be  a  gut- 
tural, the  vowel  mostly  conforms  to  the  compound  Sh'va, 


90  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  61 

whicli  it  has  or  migiit  have,  e.  g.  ^~{2'J  for  ^^{Z'J,  ^pir:^,  for 
^p-n",  -b-b  for  ^:rb,  -enb  for  -£rb,  ^VQ  for  ?}'::^2. 

I    ;  v:r."'       •  t:  T  •  t:  :'  ;  ~  -:  :        i  :  ■   it  i  :  t;  r 

a.  Vav  before  a  guttural  follows  the  rule  just  given;  befoi-e  "^j  and 
sometimes  before  ft  or  n  followed  hy  "<,  it  takes  Hhirik;  before  other 
vowelless  letters  it  gives  up  its  consonant  sound  and  quiesces  in  its  homo- 
geneous vowel  Shurek,  §  57.  2.  (1),  thus  ^^^?^,  T'^1,  ^^s"]!  and  ^2^),,  -?H 
::nn. 

6.  In  triliteral  monosyllables  or  final  syllables  with  the  vowel  Pattahh, 
the  first  letter  sometimes  receives  an  accented  Seghol,  to  which  the  fol- 
lowing Pattahh  is  then  assimilated,  e.  g.  tf^3  for  rr3  construct  of  ^r3, 
r3!^T2'a  for  fzb'O'g,  the  Seghols  being  liable  to  be  changed  to  Pattahhs  by 
the  presence  uf  h  guttural  rriD':3'a  fur  rijS'::^. 

c.  In  ci:X"4^  Gen.  32:  20  for  ;:=>uo  the  vowelless  letters  belong  to 
different  syllabies,  and  the  introduction  of  the  new  vowel  makes  it  neces- 
sary to  lengthen  the  one  before  it, 

2.  Although  two  vowelless  letters  are  admissible  at 
the  end  of  a  Avord,  §  18,  the  harshness  of  the  combination 
is  commonly  relieved  by  the  insertion  of  Seghol,  e,  g.  z.'y] 
for  nil*;,  rijb  for  ripb.  if  either  letter  is  a  guttural,  Pattahh 
is  mostly  used  instead,  e.  g.  r:i2,  t'JS,  "jr,^.  If  either  letter 
is  ■',  its  homogeneous  vowel  Hhirik  is  used;  if  the  second 
letter  is  1,  it  will  rest  in  Shurek,  §  57.  2.  (4.),  e.  g.  ri'ia, 
^bs,  ^nin,  but  n^j. 

a.  The  only  instances  in  which  two  vowelless  consonants  concur  at  the 
end  of  a  word  are  the  pron.  PX,  the  2  fern.  sing.  pret.  of  verbs  ri\hp,  certain 
jussive  and  Vav  Conversive  forms  of  ii")>  verbs  §§  174.  4,  177.  3,  p|p"in 
§  153.  2,  the  nouns  'n'ti,  li'Cp  and  forms  with  otiant  Aleph. 

b.  When  the  penultimate  letter  is  tl  or  n,  it  in  a  few  instances  takes 
Seghol,  as  ^nx,  "iH^,  cr^,  CH"}.  When  the  final  letter  is  X,  it  either  remains 
otiant,  §  16.  1,  or  requires  Seghol,  i\^^,  X"}»;i,  X""',  X"iQ;  a  penultimate  X  either 
quiesces  in  the  antecedent  vowel  or  attracts  it  to  itself,  §  60.  3.  c,  nx^*,  tMW 
or  J^X'^\  UiX'l.  The  alternate  nioile  of  facilitating  the  pronunciation  of  gut- 
turals before  a  vowelless  letter  at  the  end  of  a  word  by  means  of  Pattahh 
furtive,  has  been  explained  §  60.  2. 

3.  When  the  same  letter  is  repeated  Avith  or  without 
a  mutable  vowel  intervening,  there  is  often  a  contraction 
into  one  doubled  letter,  and  the  vowel  is  rejected  or 
thrown  back  upon  the  preceding  consonant,  e.  g.  '^^b'.  for 
^ilL3'^,  20^  for  IHC";  (Daghesh-forte  disappearing  at  the 
end  of  the  word),  zb  for  2r,b,  ^i^]  Job  31:  15  for  ^::piD: 


§  61  VOWEL  CHANGES.  91 

(see  4.  below);  if  another  consonant  immediately  follow 
the  contracted  letters,  a  diphthongal  vowel  "'__  or  i  may 
be  inserted  to  render  the  reduplication  more  audible 
and  prevent  the  concurrence  of  three  consonants,  ''iniiiC, 

4.  In  accented  syllables  the  diphthongal  vowels  e  and 
0  are  employed  before  two  consonants  or  a  doubled  con- 
sonant in  preference  to  the  pure  i  and  u,  e.  g.  -"irri, 

npiirp;  D^p,  rijw'p;  b^bpp,  r;:bt:j:n,  so  ^ncn,  c-ip,  ^ni;i. 
This  is  still  the  case  when  at  the  end  of  a  word  an 
auxiliary  Seghol  or  Pattahh  has  been  inserted  between 
the  letters  (according  to  2.),  e.  g.  "S31,  '^20,  bs-'S.  ty]:y'2 
from  p^'D"''^.,  or  the  reduplication  of  the  doubled  letter  is 
no  longer  heard  and  the  Daghesh-forte  does  not  ax^pear, 
§  25,  e.  g.  Sbn  comp.  b^tipn. 

a.  The  vowel  e  is  in  like  circumstances  often  reduced  to  one  of  its  con- 
stituents a,  e.  g.  !^3t?5?  from  T)l?»:i,  f^""!"?n,  ^j'^^'^i,  ^^OT,  and  occasionally 
to  its  other  constituent  i,  e.  g.  tr':;~2rn  from  il"ti)r~''7,  tr;r"i'^  from  ■dn^ 
In  '^P>r^i?  from  ^^'^  and  "^ri^ippn  from  ?"i:;rr!,  a  is  the  original  vowel  of 
the  second  syllable,  of  which  e  and  i  are  modifications.  The  only  example 
of  Shurek  in  a  Segholate  form  is  n^cTrri  Lev.  5:  21. 

5.  In  unaccented  syllables  t  and  u  are  preferred  to  e 
and  0  before  doubled  letters,  'fix,  VIS;;  "fiP,  "rir;  riwlj 
from  Dcri;  nc^l,  ^wSC";  ir^'J  comp.  bt:p";2,  "pn,  "pn,  though 
such  forms  as  ^"in  ?:-T2?,  n'hs,  n'ha  hkewise  occur;  so  bi<^V 
but  ^bi^'^Tf 

6.  A  vowel  is  occasionally  given  to  a  final  consonant 
to  soften  the  termination  of  the  word,  and  make  the 
transition  easier  to  the  initial  consonant  of  that  wliich 
foUows;  thus,  b'b,  nb*b;  t~hbi^  for  Ki^;  DJl,  nllh;  b^5,  ftlk; 

^5?,  n^.i?;  Tikh,  ^Dih;  n-z:53,'%^^n:w^;  n^n,  ih^jn;  r±^  Ex. 

15:  10;  ^:rc5-Ex.  15:  5'. 

a.  These  paragogic  vowels  have  established  themselves  in  the  current 
forms  of  certain  words,  as  iTb'^i,  tirn,  tiik,  ii:N,  "irx,  ife.  But,  with  these 
exceptions,  they  are  chiefly  found  in  poetry.  The  vowels  "^  _  and  i  are 
mostly  attached  to  words  in  what  is  called  the  construct  state,  n    to  words 


92  OETHOGRAPHT.  §  62 

in  the  absolute;  and  all  of  them  to  the  feminine  ending  T\.  Examples  of 
V.  "133  Num.  23:  18,  24:  3,  15,  "in'n  several  times,  "ii'yp  Ps.  114:  8.  Examples 
of  ''.:  "^PjZHn  Hos.  10:  11,  "'':ipX  Gen.  49:  11,  "^D^  ibid.,  "'rCD?  Gen.  31:  39, 
•'hli'n  Ps.  110:  4,  ''Zth  Ps.  114-  8,  ''i:':3';i  Ps.  123:  1,  '^n"'22?  Ps.'ilS:  5,  ''i'^fV^ 
ver.  6,  "i-^hP  ver.  7,  "'h^'iliin  ver.  8,  "'i:"'^!^  ver.  9,  "^nsb^  Isa.  1:  21,  "in^Xa 
Ex.  15:  6,  ''i:Ti?  Zech.  11:  17,  ■•na-i  Lam.  1:  1,  '^nSb  ibid.,  •'i="r  Deut.  33:  16. 
It  is  also  attached  to  the  first  member  of  the  compound  in  many  proper 
names,  e.  g.  1:N"''i3:i,  p'ik"'^3bp,  to  certain  particles,  as  '^Pba,  "'flb^T,  "^S^a,  and 
perhaps  to  such  participial  forms  as  "'OniL""^  Jer.  22:  23.  Of  fi  :  '^"■9"'X  Ex. 
15:  16,  lT.5"iNlsa.  8:  23,  Job  34:  13,  37:  12,  JlD-pl  Judg,  14:  18,  nrvTr"]  Ps. 
3:  3,  80:  3,  Jon.  2:  10,  rt^B  almost  constantly,  nrijo  Ps.  116:  15,  nbni  Num. 
34:  5,  Ps.  124:  4,  nr^l?  Ps.  92:  16  (K'ri),  125:  3,"Ezek.  28:  15,  Hos.  10:  13, 
nrBiy  Job  5:  16,  fi'y.'J  Ps.  44:  27,  63:  8,  94:  17,  n^E^  Job  10:  22,  M~Hn 
Jonh.  19:  43,  Judg.  14:  1,  and  regularly  in  the  third  person  feminine  of  the 
preterite  of  ri"b  verbs.  In  modern  Persian  t  is  similarly  appended  to 
nouns  in  close  connection  with  a  following  word,  to  remove  the  obstruc- 
tion of  the  final  consonant  and  serve  as  a  uniting  link.  And  in  Hebrew 
they  seem  to  be  traces  of  forms  once  current  but  which  became  obso- 
lete §  201.  e. 

§  62.  The  changes  due  to  the  influence  of  vowels  may 
arise  from  their  concurrence  or  proximity. 

1.  Concurring  vowels  may  coalesce;  a  uniting  with  ft 
forms  a,  uniting  with  i  or  u  it  forms  the  diphthongal  e 
or  0,  e.  g.  niSoin  Neh.  3:  13  from  niS'JJsn  after  the  re- 

^  CJ  ;      IT  :      ~    IT 

jection  of  }!<  by  §  53.  2.  b;  T\%  after  the  softening  of  ^  to 
i  becomes  tr^S;  ^n5t:p  by  the  rejection  of  tl  becomes  i!^t:p; 
ilT]  prefixed  to  proper  names  i's  from  Tl^  for  In^,  §  57. 2  (4), 
an  abbreviation  of  Til'Tr,  §  47. 

2.  One  of  them  may  be  hardened  into  its  correspond- 
ing semi- vowel;  I  ^^  with  7  "',  may  form  f  ■*,,  or  the  first 
t  may  be  changed  to  ty,  which,  upon  the  reduplication 
of  the  "^  to  preserve  the  brevity  of  the  antecedent  vowel, 
§  24.  3,  becomes  ■'^.,  e.  g.  ^^2^  with  D\  becomes  U^^Zi^  or 
D^';'^-3'.  So,  "^  before  H  forms  rfi  ,  and  before  1  forms  'i^  , 
e.  g.  Mj^'^n:?,  rii'^'izy;  in  like  manner  ^  is  changed  before  i 
into  iiv,  formhig  i^.,  which,  by  §  56.  3,  becomes  1^  ,  e.  g. 
rS^tb-Z,  by  the  substitution  of  ni  for  n,  ni^pb-J.  /  \  fol- 
lowed by  il  ^  forms  w,  ^H'nbpp,  rri:t:p;  ^Trb,  TB;  Tt'lf] 
for  ^l^fc'^n  Josh.  14:  8.  i;  ^    before  i  "^    or  tc  ^  is  resolved 


§  63  VOWEL  CHANGES.  93 

into  ay,  whicL,  joined  with  the  appropriate  semi-vowels, 
becomes  ^_  and  V^,  the  virtual  reduplication  of  the  final 
consonant  in  the  one  case  preserving  the  short  vowel, 
which  is  lengthened  in  the  other;  thus  "b/10  with  ^,  be- 
comes ■'P^D,  and  mth  ^H,  VC^O.  The  same  resolution  of 
''^^  occurs  before  final  T],  forming  Tj';_,  and  by  §  61.  2  Tj*;., 
thus  "H/13'j  with  T|  becomes  T|^^^?3. 

a.  Grammarians  have  disputed  whether  in  such  words  as  fii''']2S, 
ni'D^p  the  point  in  "^  is  Daghesh-forte  or  Mappik,  §  26,  and  accordingly 
whetherthey  are  to  be  read  ibhriyylm,malkhuyybth,  or  ibhrJyim,mall-huyoth. 
If  the  explanation  given  above  be  correct,  it  is  Daghesh-forte  Conserva- 
tive. Comp.  D^;r,  t;";ri. 

b.  Such  forms  as  ''']'^S,  'i''"i9,  Q'^l?  from  "^"iQ  are  only  apparent  excep- 
tions to  the  above  rules.  The  word  is  properly  ';"iQ,  and  to  this  the  addi- 
tions are  made,  the  auxiliary  Hhirik  being  dropped  with  the  cessation  of 
the  cause  from  which  it  originated,  §  57.  2.  (4).  In  t2"'S<i3'iS  2  Chron.  17:  11 
from  ''^"iS  and  D"^  _  the  vowels  are  kept  separate  by  an  interposed  X. 

e.  In  words  of  <T'b  formation,  such  as  niji',  'iiJ:",  CITS'  from  riiiiS  and 
n  ,  i,  Bi_,  it  might  appear  as  though  one  vowel  were  rejected  before 
another.  But  the  correct  explanation  is  that  "^  is  the  true  final  radical,  and 
the  forms  above  given  are  for  n^'O-',  'i'^lUj',  C'^'^i'S.'  (like  DiB::p)  from  which 
■^  is  rejected  by  §  53.  3.  In  the  same  way  ^iby,  T^^,  etc.,  from  tlis'  are  for 
si'^ias,  ^I'^iUS.  In  such  alternate  forms  as  iT"]b  from  iTnb,  the  radical  "i  is 
retained  by  preserving  the  antecedent  vowel,  which,  before  Daghesh-forte 
Conservative,  becomes  Hhirik,  §  61.  5. 

§  63.  The  following  euphonic  changes  are  attribut- 
able to  the  proximity  of  vowels,  viz. : 

1.  Pattahh  before  a  guttural  is  often  changed  to  Seghol 
if  another  a  follows,  and  the  same  change  sometimes 
occurs  after  a  guttural  if  another  a  precedes.       * 

The  particular  cases  are  the  following: 

a.  When  (_)  stands  before  a  guttural  with  (  )  always  before  fi,  e.  g. 
ann  for  ^nn,  nn-JS?3  Prov.  21 :  22,  t-Dnn,  "^inrinrn  (also  when  n  has  Hhateph 
Kamets,  e.  g.  cannrt,  "^rilpnntn  Judg.  9:  9),  often  before  n  and  ",  particul- 
arly if  it  receives  the  secondary  accent,  e.g.  f'lrjv!  for  t""itnn,  nhnb  but 
nanb,  1'^!^^:^!;  f^?^'",  ^'^'J  np,  rarely  before  N  andn,  n^n  Gen.  14  10,  n-ikxa 
Neh.  9:  18,  26  but  ^"^ni^tx:  Ezek.  35:  12. 

b.  When  (_)  before  a  guttural  is  followed  by  another  consonant  with 
(.)  or  (J  b-nni^,  iib^n-;  but  6^n;:,  xsns  but  nxsna,  «i:n|;;,  once  before  the 
liquid  h,  e.  g.  T^lsDX  Ex.  33:  3  for  r\b^^,  and  once  before  3,  e.  g.  RJ^n^ 
for  I'nisnk 


94  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  64,  65 

c.  In  iiX'pNI  1  Sam.  28:  15  and  the  combination  IJJ'i  tV,^"  a  eimilat 
change  takes  place  after  a  guttural  to  prevent  the  repetition  of  the  vowel 
a;  so  in  nri'n-;  Ps.  20:  4,  and  nski  n:k  after  the  liquid  3. 

2.  Pattahh  is  sometimes  assimilated  to  a  following 
Segliol,  or  to  a  preceding  Kamets  or  Tsere. 

a.  The  assimilation  to  (..)  takes  place  regularly  in  what  are  called 
Segholate  forms,  in  which  an  auxiliary  Seghol  has  by  §  61.  2  been  intro- 
duced between  two  vowelless  letters,  ~?'b  for  T\?y?,  S"!"]  for  n~i^,  ■j'■}^t  for 
r^k,  but  r"i2,  C?Q;  only  before  1,  which  can  combine  with  a  and  not 
with  e,  a  is  retained  and  lengthened  to  (^)  by  §  59,  ";X,  ""in.  Rarely  in 
other  cases  da^;^  for  Dd'i^,  where  the  change  is  facilitated  by  the  pre- 
ceding \ 

b.  The  assimilation  to  (  )  occurs  in  a  few  cases  after  a  guttural  with 
n  prefixed,  e.  g.  d!sn  for  nyn,  nnn  for  "inn;  and  in  y-\k  (from  y-\^)  uni- 
formly after  Kamets  Y'M'H'  T'^k^^  'HH)- 

c.  The  assimilation  to  (  j  occurs  in  the  Kal  future  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs 
where  the  alternate  forms  are  3'i;"'  and  l'^^"). 

§  64.  The  following  vowel  changes  are  due  to  the 
accent,  viz.: 

1.  If  a  long  vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  be  deprived  of 
its  accent,  it  will  be  shortened,  §  18,  e.  g.  ^ibiari,  ^^S'isr]; 

nD^  nc^i;  ijir%  dti^v,  -li^^,  -2T>"\ 

T'  TT-  '  ••  t'  VT-'  —.1-'  T  -:l" 

a.  If  a  vowel  preceding  Makkeph  is  incapable  of  being  shortened,  it 
will  receive  the  secondary  accent  Methegh,  agreeably  to  §  43. 

2.  The  accent  prefers  to  be  immediately  preceded  by 
a  simple  syllable  and  a  long  vowel.  Accordingly  an 
antecedent  vowelless  letter  often  receives  what  may  be 
called  a  pretonic  vowel.  This  is  commonly  the  simplest 
of  the  long  vowels  a,  e.  g.  bb;:,  ZC^,  rinpb,  "j^^"^"."^,  occasion- 
ally e,  e.  g.  bp.";,  T\il'q,  ■^ib;;.,  ■(^^2^5^l,  rarely  6,  e.  g.  '^'^^'^\ 
Such  a  vowel  is  sometimes  inserted,  even  though  a  pre- 
existing mixed  syllable  is  thereby  destroyed,  e.  g.  in  the 
plurals  of  Segholates  and  of  feminine  nouns  derived  from 
them,  D^ib";  from  ^b'.:,  T^^jVi  from  nbbl3. 

§  65.  The  special  emphasis,  with  which  the  last  word 
of  a  clause  is  dwelt  upon,  gives  rise  to  certain  vowel 
changes  in  connection  with  the  pause  accents,  §  36.  2.  «. 


§  66  VOWEL  CHANGES.  95 

These  are  (1)  lengthening  short  vowels,  viz.,  (_)  and  not 
infrequently  (  )  which  has  arisen  from  (.)  to  (^),  e.  g. 
-i:!j*,  ■^-^5;  nuhs,  n-rS;  r^k,  "p^*;  l^i?,  in?,  and  brino-inpr 

-  t'          m  t  ■        T    :   -  t"       t  :  at  t  '      1    v  v"     J    vat  '  v  •••'         vat  '  O        O 

back  Kamets  Hhatuph  shortened  from  Hholem  to  its 
original  length  tV2^'],  T\'D'^\  (2)  Restoring  vowels  which 
have  been  dropped  in  the  course  of  inflection,  e.  g.  '^1'2S, 
^nx";  ^nn'n,  ra^;  ^153?,  ^il2y\  (3)  Changing  simple  Sh'va 
in  triliteral  syllables  and  before  the  suffix  ?|  to  Segliol, 
6.  g.  ?jri^n,  ^ri^^l;  ■'n*;,  'n;.;  Ci-^-,  DZUJ.  (4)  Changing  com- 
pound Sh'va  to  the  corresponding  long  vowel,  e.  g.  ^ilS?, 

•  *T  '  •  -:    ^        :   V ' '        •  A"  '         •  t:'        -a 

a.  laitahh  sometimes  remains  without  change,  IS  Pa.  132:  12,  Plia'n 
2  Sam.  2:  27,  la^SJ  Jer.  7,  10,  "'032  5  Prov.  30:  9,  ■^npn:j  Job  34:  5,  !'^P^3X 
Neh.  5:  14,  and  once  restored  in  a  simple  syllable  Iw'jri  2  Sam.  3:  34. 
Seghol  more  frequently,  "^"3,  p^'j:,  Cnp,  Tj^'^.  and  T^'in.  Long  vowels  are 
mostly  unaltered;  only  Tsere  is  in  Uiixed  syllables  occasionally  changed 
to  Pattahh,  itnn  Isa.  18:  5  for  inn,  so  !3dn  Isa.  42:  22,  :^£ri  Gen.  17:  14, 
b^.^^1  Gen.  21:  8,  ~b;sl  Gen.  25:  34;  in  one  word  of  Segholate  formation  it 
is  converted  to  Seghol,  V^^,  "'IJ"].,  and  in  another  to  Kamets,  i:~i:,  i::::^. 
Where  the  same  word  has  alternate  forms,  one  is  sometimes  selected  as  the 
ordinary  and  the  other  as  the  pausal  form,  thus  y'Si'n^,  VCrT^;  d^H'',  HJatl"' ; 
qn-j-;,  ^l^2'■^-•,  ^t^kz-::,  -'Ph^'si  Gen.  43:  14;  Vinn  Eccl.' 12:11,  :  ■(an-;  1  Sam. 
13:  21 ;  13?,  '.TJ  Gen.  49:  3,  nron,  nzirn  Lev.  2(5:  34,  35;  IJ'rS)-^,  siri-S-.  Some- 
times, instead  of  changing  the  Sh'va  before  ~  to  Seghol,  its  vowel  is  shifted, 
thus  r\z,  -3;  T^b,  'hv,  -nk,  and  in  Ex.  29:  35  H^nk.  The  position  of  the 
pause  accent,  so  far  as  it  differs  from  that  of  the  ordinary  accent,  has  been 
explained  §  35.  2. 

b.  Of  tbe  pause  accents,  or  those  which  mark  the  limits  of  clauses 
and  sections,  the  first  class,  viz.,  Silluk,  Atlmahh  and  Olev'yoredh  almost 
ahvaj's  give  rise  to  the  vowel  changes  which  have  been  described;  the 
second  and  third  classes,  S'gholta,  Zakeph  Katon,  Zakeph  Gadhol,  R'bhi'* 
and  Shalsheleth,  e.  g.  ^^nnD"!  Isa.  13:  8,  do  so  frequentl}';  the  fourth 
class,  Pazer,  e.  g.  2  Kin.  3:  25,  Prov.  30:  4,  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola,  e.  g. 
Ezek.  20:  21,  but  seldom.  Pausal  forms  are  occasionally  found  with  other 
Disjunctives,  thus,  Tiphhha  ^i^sn  Deut.  13:  5,  Pashta  '^"it'jn  ibid.,  Geresh 
rb'i  Ezek,  40:  4,  and  even  with  Conjunctives,  e.  g.  ''SX  Isa.  49:  18,  nbri'tn 
Ezek.  17:  15,  ^m  2  Chron.  2J:  31. 

§  66.  1.  The  shortening  and  lengthening  of  words 
has  an  effect  upon  their  vowels.  The  shortening  may 
take  place 

(1)  At  the  end  of  a  word  by  the  rejection  of  a  vowel. 


96  OETHOGBAPHT.  §  66 

This  occurs  only  with  (.. )  or  (.. )  in  certain  forms  of  ^i"!}  verbs,  e.  g. 
VJri  from  n5.-n,  r^-l  for  nv^-^;),  IPII  l  Sam.  21:  14  for  n^ri;i,  n'J'l  fornn'J'.l. 
In  the  last  two  examples  the  short  vowel  is  lengthened  upon  its  receiving 
the  accent,  comp.  §  64.  1,  If  the  rejected  vowel  was  preceded  by  two  con- 
sonants, these  will  now  stand  together  at  the  end  of  the  word,  and  be  liable 
to  the  changes  described  §  61.  2,  e.  g.  v|"n  for  fipnn. 

(2)  In  the  body  of  a  word  by  shortening  a  long  vowel 
in  a  mixed  syllable,  which  must,  of  course,  be  the  one 
bearing  the  accent,  §  32.  1,  or  rejecting  a  long  vowel  in 
a  simple  syllable  before  the  accent  (the  pretonic  vowel, 

§  64.  2),  ^n^,  nn^;  Tj'bi?,  pi2;  ii^;:::,  ^^jp^a 

a.  This  is  in  general  the  only  reduction  possible.  The  vowel  of  a 
mixed  syllable,  if  short  already,  is  capable  of  no  further  abbreviation, 
though  d  and  e  are  in  a  very  few  instances  attenuated  to  «,  yx"!^  const. 
ran^:,  ni^SO  const,  nirisp,  ^i<K"!r?1  ^"^  ^•^t"-'^"^'  *°*^  ^*  cannot  be  rejected, 
or  there  would  be  a  concurrence  of  vowelless  consonants  which  the 
language  seeks  to  avoid  (p)piti  Prov.30:  6  is  an  exception).  And  the  vowel 
of  a  simple  syllable,  if  short,  must  have  the  accent,  §  32.  1,  which  pre- 
serves it  from  rejection.  The  changes  above  recited  are  confined  to  the 
last  two,  or,  in  case  the  accent  is  upon  the  penult,  the  last  three  syllables 
of  the  word;  for  the  antecedent  portions  of  polysyllables  are  already  ab- 
breviated to  the  utmost.  Contractions  due  to  the  peculiarities  of  certain 
letters,  as  the  gutturals  and  quiescents,  which  have  been  before  ex- 
plained, are  not  here  taken  into  the  account,  e.  g.  S-'bd,  yp'J,  V.'vz,  tii^; 
B'l'n;!,  I'll. 

b.  Where  the  last  vowel  cannot  be  shortened,  it  sometimes  experiences 
a  change  of  a  quality  from  pure  to  diphthongal,  such  as  is  produced  by  the 
pressure  of  two    following  consonants,    §  61.  4,   e.  g.  ^'^'i^I!',  ^?^:^;   ^"''^'i'^, 

nnin;  mr;,  rc^;  ^^■::i,  -6;;;  d'^wa,  '^wo. 

2.  If  a  word  be  lengthened  by  additions  at  the  end, 
its  vowels  are  hable  to  changes  in  consequence. 

(1)  Such  additions  create  a  tendency  to  shorten  the 
previous  part  of  the  word  in  the  manner  just  described. 
For  the  normal  length  of  words  in  Hebrew  being  dis- 
syllabic, the  genius  of  the  language  is  opposod  to  trans- 
cending this  limit  any  further  than  is  absolutely'  necessary. 
If  the  addition  is  not  of  sufficient  weight  to  affect  the 
position  of  the  accent,  no  abbreviation  results.  But  if  it 
is  of  weight  enough  to  remove  the  accent,  an  abbreviation 


§  66  VOWEL  CHANGES.  97 

follows  if  it  is  possible  for  one  to  be  made,  e.  g.  Tn"!, 
D^nn^,,  nr"]n'l  for  Dd;")2'1  by  §  61.  1. 

(2)  They  produce  changes  in  an  ultimate  mixed  syl- 
lable. If  the  appendage  begin  with  a  consonant,  the 
antecedent  vowel  will  now  be  succeeded  by  two  con- 
sonants and  be  liable  to  the  changes  consequent  upon 
such  a  position,  §  61.  4,  e.  g.  n^btDpSTl  from  b'^i^pP;  Mj';:p 
from  D^p;  "Pbppn  from  b-bpH;  "Pb^p  from  btDp.  If  the 
appendage  begin  with  a  vowel,  it  will  attach  itself  to  the 
final  consonant,  which  will  in  consequence  be  drawn  away 
from  its  own  syllable  to  begin  the  new  one.  This  may 
occasion  the  following  changes: 

(a)  If  the  preceding  vowel  is  an  auxihary  Seghol  or 
Pattahh,  introduced  to  facilitate  the  pronunciation  of  the 
second  of  two  vowelless  consonants,  §  61.  2,  it  wiU  be 
rejected,  inasmuch  as  it  is  no  longer  required  for  this 
purpose,  e.  g.  isb?^  from  7]bb,  i^S?C  from  'nrb. 

(&)  If  it  be  a  short  vowel,  it  must  either  be  lengthened 
to  adapt  it  to  the  simple  syllable  in  which  it  now  stands, 
or  rejected  on  account  of  the  disposition  to  abbreviate 
words  upon  their  receiving  accessions  at  the  end,  e.  g. 
nb'[:p  and  rib::|j3  from  bbp.  The  cases  are  very  rare  in 
which  a  short  vowel  remains  unchanged  in  consequence 
of  its  having  the  accent,  §  18.  2,  e.g.  n'^ih"!":?  1  Kin.  19:15 
from  -^hrq,  nb^Jirn  Ezek.  8:  2  from  bb'aJ-. 

(c)  If  it  be  a  long  vowel,  it  may  be  rejected,  as  ^bi^p"^^ 
from  btip";,  '^'j:  from  D'JJ,  or  retained  either  unaltered,  as 
ri"':3"'pn  from  D^pH,  "i|"^*^  from  ]3'J^'2,  or  with  a  change 
of  quality  from   pure  to   diphthongal  or  the  reverse, 

nj:^n"j  from  pin/j,  ^r'j^o?  from  yib^,  ^s'tjpn  from  D^pn, 
D'bbs  from  ta-'bB. 


98 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


§66 


TABLE  SHOWING  THE  CHARACTER  AND  AFFINITIES  OF  THE 
VOWELS  AND  THE  ORDINARY  LIMITS  OF  EUPHONIC  CHANGES. 


Long. 


Guttural,  .    .     .  pure 


Palatal,     .     .     A 


Labial, 


[  dqyhthongal    e 


[pure  I 

diphthongal  o 

■ 

pure  u 


PART  SECOND. 

ETYMOLOGY. 

Roots  op  "Woeds. 

§  67.  Etymology  treats  of  the  various  kinds  of  words, 
their  formation  and  inflections.  Three  successive  stages 
are  here  to  be  distinguished.  The  first  is  the  root  or 
radical  portion  of  words.  This  embraces  those  funda- 
mental sounds,  in  which  the  essential  idea  originally  in- 
heres. Roots  do  not  enter,  in  their  nude  or  primitive  form, 
mto  the  current  use  of  language,  but  they  constitute  the 
basis  upon  which  all  actually  occurring  words,  with  the 
exception  of  the  inorganic  interjections,  are  constructed. 
The  second  stage  is  the  word  itself  in  its  simple  unin- 
flected  state;  this  is  formed,  if  a  primitive,  directly  from 
the  root,  if  a  derivative,  from  a  pre-existing  primitive,  by 
certain  changes  or  additions,  which  serve  to  convert  the 
radical  idea  into  the  precise  conception  intended,  which 
is  as  yet,  however,  expressed  absolutely.  The  third  and 
only  remaining  stage  is  the  word  as  it  appears  in  the  ac- 
tual utterances  of  speech,  so  modified  by  inflections  as  to 
suggest  the  definite  qualifications  of  the  idea,  such  as  the 
tense  of  verbs,  the  gender  and  number  of  nouns,  and  the 
degree  of  adjectives,  or  its  relations  whether  of  agree- 
ment or  subordination,  such  as  the  persons  and  modes 
of  verbs  and  the  cases  of  nouns. 

§  68.  There  are  in  Hebrew,  as  in  most  languages,  two 


100  ETYMOLOGY.  §  68 

classes  of  roots,  wliich  may  be  denominated  respectively 
pronominal  and  verbal.  Pronominal  roots  form  tlie  basis 
of  such  words  as  express  tlie  relations  of  things  to  the 
speaker  or  to  one  another,  viz.,  pronouns  and  certain 
prepositions,  adverbs,  and  other  particles.  From  verbal 
roots,  which  are  by  far  the  more  numerous,  spring  words 
expressive  of  ideas,  viz.,  verbs,  nouns,  and  such  particles 
as  are  derived  from  them.  Verbal  roots  consist  exclusively 
of  consonants,  and  are  almost  invariably  trihteral.  The 
introduction  of  a  vowel  or  vowels,  even  for  the  sake  of 
pronouncing  them,  destroys  their  abstract  radical  cha- 
racter, and  converts  them  into  specific  words  of  this  or 
that  description.  Nevertheless,  for  reasons  of  convenience, 
the  letters  of  the  root  are  usually  pronounced  by  the  aid 
of  the  vowels  belonging  to  them  in  the  simplest  form  of 
the  corresponding  verb,  which  is  mostly  the  third  person 
singular  of  the  preterite,  e.  g.  bbj^,  1p_'2.  Tliis  must  not 
be  suffered,  however,  to  lead  to  the  confusion  of  identifj^- 
ing  that  particular  verbal  form  with  the  proper  radical, 
nor  of  supposing  the  verb  to  be  the  radical  part  of  speech 
from  which  nouns  in  all  cases  are  derived:  verbs  and 
nouns  are  rather  to  be  regarded  as  co-ordinate  branches 
springing  from  a  common  root. 

a.  The  few  quadriliterals  and  quinqneliterals  which  occur  are  mostly 
formed  from  pre-existing  triliterals  by  tlie  addition  of  a  weak  letter,  or  a 
letter  similar  to  one  of  the  original  radicals,  e.  g.  tp"?  to  lay  vasit  comp. 
^03;  ^V^!  to  hum  comj).  ri"T;  rias"ip  a  branch  comp.  nbvQ;  D-ESib 
thoughts  comp.  D"^E"'>:;;  '^''Zy^  «  sceptre,  comp.  '^"z'd;  "ixVo  tranquil  comp. 
"i??^^;  ^'^"Q  to  spread  comp.  u:"nB;  or  by  blending  two  different  roots,  e.  g. 
^'SV.'7  to  he  fresh  composed  of  :ii:'i  and  uib".:;  "^ibsQ  a  certain  one  =  "^i?3 
''?^^;  ?^"!?^  «  &og  from  "nr^  to  leap  rnn  (in  Arabic)  a  marsh.  Some, 
which  are  not  thus  reducible,  may  perhaps  be  of  foreign  origin. 

6.  Many  of  the  triliteral  roots  appear  to  be  based  upon  pre-existing 
biliterals.  Thus,  the  cognates  ih,  bh,  th,  nh,  "OJ,  W:.,  have  in  commoa 
the  two  letters  T5  with  the  associated  idea  of  cutting,  §  50.  3.  The  frequent 
examples  of  this  description,  together  with  the  fact  of  the  existence  of  a 
few  biliterals,  e.  g.  nx  father,  MX  brother,  DX  mother,  have  suggested  the 
thought  that  the  ultimate  roots  may  in  all  cases  have  been  biliterals,  and 


§69 


ROOTS  OF  WORDS.  101 


that  the  triliterals  were  a  secondary  formation.  Various  ingenious  but  un- 
successful attempts  have  been  made  to  demonstrate  this  position  by  an 
actual  analysis,  and  to  effect  the  reduction  of  all  roots  to  two  primitive 
letters.  Still  more  extravagant  and  fanciful  is  the  endeavour,  which  has 
actually  been  made,  to  explain  the  origin  of  roots  from  the  individual  letters 
of  which  they  are  composed,  and  to  deduce  their  meanings  from  the  names, 
the  shapes,  or  other  peculiarities  of  those  letters.  The  existence  of  roots 
and  the  meanings  attached  to  them  must  be  accepted  as  ultimate  facts. 
Some  have  arisen,  no  doubt,  from  the  imitation  of  sounds  in  nature;  but 
in  most  cases  no  satisfactory  reason  can  be  given  why  a  given  combination 
of  sounds  has  that  particular  sense,  which  is  in  fact  connected  with  it. 

§  69.  The  formation  of  words  and  their  inflection  are 
accompUshed  partly  by  internal  changes  and  partly  by 
external  additions.  The  internal  changes  are  the  msertion 
of  vowels  and  the  reduplication  of  consonants  in  various 
significant  ways,  e.  g.  bbp,  bbp,  btsp,  bpp.  The  external 
additions  are  significant  syllables  welded  to  the  root  or 
to  the  word,  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  end,  e.  g. 
bbj:,  nbbp,  btip:,  -ob^prn. 

a.  The  triliteral  and  exclusively  consonantal  character  of  Semitic  roots 
is  their  most  remarkable  peculiarity  in  distinction  from  those  of  the  Indo- 
European  languages  which  are  as  prevailingly  monosyllabic,  the  vowel 
being  an  essential  constituent,  while  the  number  of  consonants  is  variable. 
The  fact  of  the  vowel  being  an  integral  part  of  the  root  in  these  languages 
interferes  with  their  employment  of  internal  changes  for  purposes  of 
derivation  and  inflection,  and  confines  them  almost  entirely  to  external 
additions,  e.  g.  voco,  vocabam,  vocatio,  vocahulum,  vocito,  etc.  The  compo- 
sition of  words  of  which  such  large  use  is  made  in  tlie  Indo-European 
tongues,  e.  g.  ad-voco,  in-voco,  etc.,  is  almost  unknown  in  Hebrew  except  in 
the  formation  of  proper  names. 

h.  Different  languages  differ  greatly  in  their  flexibility,  that  is  to  say, 
in  the  variety  of  words  which  may  spring  from  a  common  root,  and  the 
number  of  forms  which  the  same  word  may  assume  to  express  the  various  re- 
lations into  which  it  enters.  Relations,  which  in  some  languages  are  expressed 
by  flection,  as  the  cases  of  nouns,  tenses  of  verbs,  concord  of  adjectives,  are 
in  others  indicated  by  additional  words,  as  prepositions,  auxiliary  verbs,  etc., 
or  suggested  by  the  order  of  words  in  the  sentence. 

c.  Formative  syllables,  added  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  end  of 
words  for  the  sake  of  inflection,  are,  in  the  ordinary  consciousness  of  those 
who  use  the  language,  completely  amalgamated  with  them,  so  that  their 
separate  origin  and  signification  is  never  thought  of.  They  are  thus  to 
be  distinguished  from  those  words  which,  by  reason  of  their  dependent 
character,  are  attached  to  others  as  prefixes  or  suffixes,  but  yet  preserve 


102  ETYMOLOGY.  §  70,  71 

their  separate  identity  as  prefixed  conjunctions  and  prepositions  and  suf- 
fixed pronouns. 

§  70.  The  parts  of  speech  in  Hebrew  are  either  de- 
chnable  as  pronouns,  verbs,  and  nouns  (including  adjec- 
tives); or  indechnable,  as  the  article,  adverbs,  prepositions, 
conjunctions,  and  interjections.  As  most  if  not  all  of  the 
syllables  employed  in  the  formation  and  inflection  of 
verbs  and  nouns  are  of  pronominal  origin,  it  wiU  be 
necessary  to  consider  the  pronouns  first. 

a.  The  classification  usual  with  the  Jewish  grammarians  is  into  verbs 
(D'^lisQ  actions),  nouns  (riijsui  names),  and  particles  (Q''|a  words). 


Pronouns. 

PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 

§  71.  The  Hebrew  pronouns  are  personal,  demon- 
strative, relative,  and  interrogative  or  indefinite.  The 
personal  pronouns  are  the  following,  viz.: 


BINGULAB. 

PLURAIi. 

1.    I             ^bb.^,    ^i« 

We         WDiJ,    mi, 

2  1  Thou  m.  nri5< 
iThou/.     ru?,  ^n^ 

Ye  m.       Din« 
Ye/.         "jini^,  njni^ 

2  1  He            K^in 
■  1  She            fc^^n 

They  m.     Dn,    mh 

They  /     in,    nsn 

There  are,  it  will  be  perceived,  distinct  forms  for 
singular  and  plural  in  the  three  persons,  and  for  mascu- 
line and  feminine  in  the  second  and  third.  There  is  no 
form  for  the  neuter,  as  that  gender  is  not  recognized  in 
Hebrew. 

a.  (1)  The  alternate  forms  of  the  first  person  singular  "'ibx  (in  pause 
■'DDJJ  with  the  accent  on  the  penult  except  Job  33:  9),  and  "^SX  (in  pause 
•'SK)  are  used  interchangeably  and  with  perhaps  equal  frequency.  It  has 
been  observed,  however,  that  while  the  former  is  the  more  common  in  the 
Pentateuch,  it  never  occurs  in  the  books  of  Chronicles,  and  but  once  in 
Ezekiel,  viz..  36:  28,  a  passage  borrowed  from  the  Pentateuch.     The  usual 


§71 


PEONOUNS.  103 


plural  of  this  person  is  ^iriix;  iisni  occurs  but  six  times,  viz.,  Gen.  42:  11, 
Ex.  16:  7.  8,  Num.  32:  32,  2  Sam.  17:  12,  Lam.  S:  42;  >13X  though  common 
in  later  Hebrew,  occurs  but  once  in  the  Old  Testament,  viz.,  Jer.  42:  6 
K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  substitutes  the  usual  form. 

(2)  The  second  person  masc.  sing.  fiPX  (in  pause  occasionally  MPS  Ps. 
2:7,  25:  27,  40:  18,  70:  6,  but  mostly  f^PlJ)  is  in  five  instances  written  ilN: 
without  the  final  He,  which  is  however  restored  in  the  K'ri,  viz.,  1  Sam. 
24:  19,  Ps.  6:  4,  Job  1:  10,  Eccles.  7:  22,  Neh.  9:  6,  and  in  three  instances 
RX  without  the  final  vowel  Num.  11:  15,  Deut.  5:  24,  Ezek.  28:  14.  The 
feminine  RX  is  occasionally  written  ''PiX  Judg.  17:  2,  1  Kin.  14:  2,  2  Kin. 
4:  16,  23,  8:  1,  Jer.  4:  30,  Ezek.  36:  13;  the  K'ri  invariably  retrenches  the 
superfluous  "^j  though  it  is  probable  that  the  original  pronunciation  proper 
to  this  orthography  was  "'riS.  The  feminine  plural  'hx  occurs  only  Ezek. 
34:  31,  where  a  few  manuscx'ipts  read  )h^;  the  alternate  form  njniS:  occurs 
Gen.  81:  6,  Ezek.  13:  11,  34:  17;  in  Ezek.  13:  20  most  editions  have  tiSPiit. 

(3)  The  third  person  fem.  sing.  X'^ri  occurs  but  eleven  times  in  the 
books  of  Moses,  viz.,  Gen.  14:  2,  20:  5,  38:  25,  Lev,  11:  39,  13:  10.  21, 
16:31,  20:  17,  21:  9,  Num.  5:  13,  14.  In  its  stead  is  found  Nin  a  combination 
of  the  letters  of  the  masculine  with  the  vowel  of  the  feminine.  The  ex- 
planation of  this  is  that  XIM  hil  was  at  that  early  period  of  common  gender 
and  used  indifferently  for  both  masculine  and  feminine.  As  this  primitive 
usage  subsequently  became  obsolete,  the  word,  when  used  for  the  feminine, 
was  read  N^fl  hi  according  to  the  uniform  practice  of  the  later  books,  and 
the  punctuators  have  suggested  this  by  giving  it  the  corresponding  vowel, 
§  47.  According  to  Kimchi  "p  Euth  1 :  13  and  nrn  2  Sam.  4:  6,  Jer.  50:  5, 
stand  for  the  masculine  plural ;  this  assumption  is  unnecessary,  however,  as 
in  the  first  passage  the  feminine  may  have  the  sense  of  the  neuter  "these 
things"  and  in  the  last  two  it  is  an  adverb  of  place,  meaning  here. 

b.  Words  in  such  constant  and  familiar  use  as  the  pronouns  are  sub- 
ject to  more  or  less  irregularity  in  all  languages.  The  original  plural 
termination,  as  will  be  shown  more  fully  hereafter  in  the  case  of  verbs  and 
nouns,  is  C^i  or  '1  §§  85.  1.  a  (1),  201.  e.  In  the  first  person  the  nasal  is 
omitted  >i:x,  ^:ti:i<.  The  plurals  of  the  second  and  third  persons  were  origin- 
ally fi>iPX,  Mrt,  which  are  still  preserved  in  the  Arabic,  and  have  left  their 
traces  in  the  inflections  of  verbs,  e.  g.  'jl^Iip"^.,  i3~wbi:p.  The  vowel  il  how- 
ever, which  in  the  plurals  of  masculine  nouns  has  been  converted  into  I, 
has  in  the  pronouns  undergone  a  still  further  modification  into  the  diph- 
thongal e  Qn  or  e  tinx.  The  distinction  of  gender  is  indicated  in  the  plural 
not  by  affixing  the  characteristic  termination  of  that  gender  as  in  nouns, 
but  by  a  change  of  the  final  nasal.  An  unaccented  n  is  often  added  by 
§  61.  6,  to  relieve  the  harshness  of  the  consonantal  ending. 

c.  In  the  technical  language  of  the  Jewish  grammarians  pronouns  are 
called  D"^";'i3  cognomina;  the  first  person  is  ^at?'?  ^^'^  speaker,  the  second 
KSpa  present,  the  third  "ifnp?  hidden  or  absent. 

§  72.  When  the  pronouns  are  used  in  their  separate 
form  as  distinct  words  they  have  the  forms  already  given. 


104  ETYMOLOGY.  §72,73 

"WTien,  however,  they  stand  in  a  relation  of  dependence 
to  verbs,  nouns,  and  particles,  they  are  appended  to  them 
in  the  following  abbreviated  forms,  called  the  pronominal 
suffixes:  (See  Paradigm  I,  at  the  end  of  the  volume.) 


SIHOCIiAB. 

PIiUBAIi. 

1. 

Com. 

1 

•^5 

si5 

9 

f  Masc. 

^ 

D5 

£i. 

1  Fern. 

^ 

1? 

3. 

f  Masc. 

sin 

D       wn 

\  Fem. 

tn 

n 

1      in 

In  the  first  person  singular  *".  is  attached  to  nouns, 
and  ''5  to  verbs.  In  the  second  person  the  palatal  !D  is 
substituted  for  the  lingual  ri  of  the  separate  pronoun. 
For  a  similar  change  in  the  first  person  see  §  85.  a.  (1). 
The  modifications  in  the  forms  of  the  suffixes,  occasioned 
by  the  endings  of  the  words  to  which  they  are  attached, 
will  be  considered  hereafter,  §§  101, 222.  The  third  plural 
forms  Dn,  'fl  are  used  with  plural  nouns;  D,  "j  with  verbs 
and  singular  nouns. 

The  suffixes  of  the  second  and  third  persons  plural 
WD,  "(ID,  DH,  "ri  are  called  grave,  the  rest  are  lig/tt.  The 
former  being  mixed  syllables,  always  receive  the  accent, 
§  33.  3,  and  tend  more  strongly  to  shorten  the  words  to 
which  they  are  attached  than  the  latter. 

Demonstrative  Pronouns. 
§  73.  1.  The  ordinary  demonstrative  is — 

Masc.         Fem.  Common. 

Singular,    HT     ni<T  this.    Plural,    b5<    nViji  these. 

The  poetic  form  ^T  is  sometimes  a  demonstrative,  Ps. 
12:  8,  Hal).  1:  11,  but  more  frequently  a  relative  (like 
the  English  that),  in  which  case  it  is  used  without  change 


§  74  PEONOUNS.  105 

for  both  genders  and  numbers.  The  feminine  is  occasion- 
ally written  without  the  final  m  and  with  a  different 
vowel  letter  nt  or  il.  The  plural,  coming  from  a  different 
root,  is  sufficiently  distinguished  without  the  usual 
termination;  bi<  occurs  eight  times  in  the  books  of  Moses 
and  once  in  1  Chron.  20:  8;  in  all  other  places  the  con- 
sonantal termination  is  softened  by  an  appended  H.. 

2.  The  singular  of  this  pronoun  is  in  a  few  instances 
compounded  with  b  either  without  any  change  of  mean- 
ing, or,  as  Ewald  and  Nordheimer  follow  Jarchi  in  sup- 
posing, in  the  sense  of  the  remote  demonstrative  that. 
Thus  (with  the  article  t]  prefixed) — 

Masc.  Fern.  Com. 

Sing,  this  or  that    rifbri  ^T>n  T|n 

a.  The  first  form  occurs  twice  in  Genesis  (24:  65,  37:  19),  the  third  six 
times  in  the  post-Mosaic  hooks  as  a  masculine  (Judg.  6:  20,  1  Sam.  14:  1, 
17:  26,  2  Kin.  23:  17,  Dan.  8:  16,  Zech.  2:  8),  and  once  as  a  feminine  (2  Kin. 
4:  25),  the  second  once  in  Ezekiel  (o6:  35). 

3.  The  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  fc^^H  is 
used  for  the  remote  demonstrative  that. 


Relative  Pronoun. 

§  74.  The  relative  who,  which  is  ^irs;,  which  may  be 
employed  as  a  separate  word,  or  may  be  shortened  to  a 
prefix  12J  with  Daghesh-forte  compensative  in  the  follow- 
ing letter,  unless  it  be  a  guttural  and  consequently  in- 
capable of  receiving  it,  §  23.  1.  In  a  few  instances  the 
prefix  IT  takes  the  vowel  (_)  followed  by  Daghesh-forte, 
Judg.  5:  7,  Cant.  1:  7,  Job  19:  29;  once  it  has  Q  before 
i^  Judg.  6:  17,  and  twice  (.)  Eccl.  2:  22  (in  some  copies), 
3:  18.  The  relative  suffers  no  change  for  gender  or 
number  either  in  its  separate  or  its  prefixed  state.  Its 
objective  relation  to  verbs  and  particles  and  its  possessive 
relation  to  nouns  are  expressed  without  changing  the 


106  ETYMOLOGY.  §  75 

relative  itself,  or  removing  it  from  its  position  at  the 
beginning  of  its  clause  by  appending  the  appropriate 
pronominal  suffix  to  the  governing  word,  e.  g.  inbli:  liry; 
who  he  sent  him,  i.  e.  whom  he  sent,  ii'^T  ^ujy;  which  its 
seed,  i.  e.  whose  seed.  It  may  also  receive  an  adverbial 
sense  from  being  followed  by  the  pronominal  adverb  D'O 
there,  e.  ff.  Dili— ^'j:^^  where,  ni2'ij — TJ:Ji  whither,  DUJD — "rm 

'         O  T  V  -;  '         T  T  V  -:  '  T    •  V  -: 

ivhence. 

a.  The  prefix  ttJ  occurs  to  the  exclusion  of  the  full  form  of  the  relative 
in  the  Song  of  Solomon,  and  with  great  frequency  in  Ecclesiastes.  There 
are  besides  occasional  examples  of  it  in  other  books,  e.  g.  Judg.  5:7,  6:  17, 
7:  12,  8:  26,  2  Kin.  6:  11,  1  Chron.  5:  20,  Job  19:  29,  Ps.  122—124,  129, 
133—137,  144,  Lam.  2:  15,  16.  The  word  DSi'^Ti  Gen.  6:3  is  in  several 
ancient  versions  and  in  the  common  English  translation  rendered  as  though 
it  were  made  up  of  the  preposition  2,  the  relative  'O  and  the  particle  D5 
for  thai  also;  but  the  most  recent  interpreters  derive  it  from  the  verb  aid 
to  err,  and  translate  in  their  erring. 

b.  "i'C^  or  u:  is  also  used  for  the  conjunction  that.    Comp.  Lat.  quod. 


Interrogative  and  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

§  75.  1.  The  pronouns  ^'J  who?  or  whoever  relating  to 
persons,  and  ITJ  what  ?  or  tvhatever  relating  to  things,  are 
employed  both  as  interrogatives  and  in  an  indefinite 
sense.  They  experience  no  change  for  gender  or  number. 

The  vowel  of  tV2  is  regulated  by  the  initial  sounds  of 
the  succeeding  word.  Before  a  letter  capable  of  receiving 
Daghesh-forte  it  is  pointed  H^  and  the  following  letter 
is  doubled,  e.  g.  ibll^'n"^  Ex.  3:  13.  Before  the  stronger 
gutturals  n  and  n  it  also  commonly  receives  (_),  e.  g. 
VCTrrC2  Ps.  39:  5,  ^n^^ton  ri'J  Gren.  31:  36.  Before  the 
weaker  gutturals  i^,  V  and  "i,  it  commonly  takes  (J,  e.  g. 
n:i<-n"9  Zech.  1:  9,  ^"^1?  nr  2  Kin.  8:  13,  an\S;n  T'L  Judg. 
9:  48.  Before  H,  n  and  "$  with  Kamets  it  takes  (J,  §  63. 
1.  a,  e.  g.  ib  rrh'rriZ  Ex.  32:  1,  T5<t:rrn52  Gen.  20:  9, 

'  C3  T    T  V  '  "  T    T  V  ' 

ri'^'iryTT^  ib.;  and  occasionally  before  other  letters  especi- 
ally when  it  has  a  disjmictive  accent  b'yp  f'2  1  Sam.  4: 14, 


§  76  SPECIES  OP  VERBS.  107 

t:S123^  n'2^  2  Kin.  1:7.  In  a  few  instances  the  final  vowel 
letter  is  omitted  and  the  interrogative  is  joined  with  the 
following  word,  e.  g.  Jir^  Ex.  4:  2,  nbVQ  Isa.  3:15,  nisbn^ 
Mai.  1:13,  Drrj  Ezek.  8:  6  K'thibh." 

2.  Another  interrogative  is  formed  by  prefixing  the 
particle  ^^^  to  the  pronoun  PIT,  T\ikJ,  thus  HT  •'ijJ  which?  or 
what?  1  Kin.  13: 12,  Eccles.  11:6,  asib  ^ijt/or  what?  why? 
Jer.  5:7. 

3.  The  words  *'i53bx  ''ibs  which  are  always  used  in 
combination,  or  contracted  into  one  ""iisbs,  are  in  usage 
equivalent  to  an  indefinite  or  indeterminate  pronoun, 
Eng.  a  certain  one,  Lat.  quidam,  Gr.  6  Zsiva;  they  are,  how- 
ever, derived  not  from  pronominal  but  verbal  roots. 

Verbs. 

THEIK   SPECIES. 

§  76.  1.  Hebrew  verbs  have  seven  different  forms 
which  have  been  denominated  species  or  conjugations 
(D^i^3;i  buildings).  These  represent  as  many  modifications 
of  the  verbal  idea,  and  are  as  foUows,  viz.: 


1. 

% 

Kal 

Simple  active. 

2. 

^?s? 

Niphal 

„      passive. 

3. 

^?s 

Piel 

Intensive  active. 

4. 

b?Q 

Pual 

„      passive. 

5. 

b^ysrj 

Hiphll 

Causative  active. 

6. 

bi-'sn 

-  :    T 

Hophal 

„           passive. 

7. 

bi?Bnn 

Hithpael 

Refiexive. 

a.  The  term  conjugations  was  introduced  by  Reuchlin,  and  is  very 
generally  employed  in  Hebrew  grammars  and  in  those  of  the  cognate  lan- 
guages. It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  Hebrew  conjugations 
are  totally  unlike  the  conjugations  of  Latin  and  Greek.  The  latter  denote 
the  various  modes  of  inflection  adopted  by  different  roots.  The  former  are 
modifications  of  the  same  root,  which  differ  in  meaning  while  their  inflec- 
tions are  substantially  alike.  They  correspond  rather  with  voices  or  with 
derivative  verbs,  such  as  frequentatives  and  causatives,  although  they  not 


108  ETYMOLOGY.  §  77 

infrequently  require  to  be  translated  by  words  radically  distinct.  The 
term  species  proposed  by  Schultens,  though  less  commonly  adopted,  is 
more  descriptive. 

2.  Kal  means  light,  and  denotes  that  species  in  which 
no  other  than  the  three  radical  letters  appear,  and  these 
only  in  their  single  power.  The  other  species  are  called 
heavy  (□"'^23),  because  burdened  by  the  reduplication  of 
the  radicals  or  the  addition  of  other  letters.  Their  names 
are  derived  from  bi'2  to  do,  which  was  the  model  for  in- 
flection, the  form  assumed  by  this  verb  in  each  species 
serving  as  its  designation.  Unusual  verbal  forms  are  in 
hke  manner  denoted  by  the  corresponding  forms  imposed 
upon  its  radicals. 

3.  Other  technical  expressions,  such  as  the  names  of 
the  various  classes  of  verbs,  are  also  to  be  traced  to  this 
source.  A  verb  whose  first  radical  is  a  guttural,  a  Nun, 
or  a  Yodh,  is  called  a  Pe  Guttural,  Pe  Nmi  ("|"5),  or  Pe 
Yodh  (■'"3)  verb,  Pe  as  the  initial  of  by5  becoming  the 
technical  designation  of  a  first  radical  generally.  So  a 
verb  whose  second  radical  is  Vav  is  called  an  Ayin  Vav 
(T'^');  one  in  which  He  takes  the  place  of  the  third  radical, 
a  Lamedh  He  (r/'b) ;  one  whose  second  and  third  radicals 
are  ahke  an  Ayin  Doubled  (y":?),  etc. 

§  77.  The  general  idea  of  the  several  species  already 
stated  is  liable  to  certain  modifications  in  the  variety  of 
cases  to  which  it  is  applied. 

1.  The  Niphal  is  commonly  the  passive  of  Kal  or  of 
the  simple  idea  of  the  verb,  223  to  steal,  Ni.  to  be  stolen; 
shs  to  ivrite,  Ni.  to  he  written. 

2.  Sometimes,  like  the  Greek  middle  voice  which 
coincides  with  the  passive  in  certain  of  its  forms,  it  has 
a  reflexive  signification,  ybt:  to  hide,  Ni.  to  hide  one's  self; 
^'b"i  to  keciJ,  Ni.  to  keep  one's  self,  (j)vXdTTsaSar,  Dn:  Ni.  to 
repent,  lit.  to  grieve  one's  self,  jusra/ieXsGdar,   or  expresses 


§  78  SPECIES  OF  VERBS.  109 

reciprocal  action,  ^^^  to  counsel,  Ni.  to  take  counsel  together; 
Urb  Ni.  to  fif/ht,  judxsaSai,  lit.  to  devour  one  another.  In 
some  verbs  it  has  both  a  passive  and  a  reflexive  sense, 
^yi2  Ni.  to  he  sold  and  to  sell  one's  self;  rk^  Ni.  to  be  seen 
and  to  let  one's  self  he  seen,  to  appear. 

3.  Sometimes  when  the  Kal  is  intransitive  and  does 
not  admit  of  a  proper  passive,  the  Niplial  is  either  iden- 
tical with  it  in  signification,  L'nj^  K.  and  Ni.  to  approach, 
or  retains  a  shade  of  its  original  force  by  representing 
the  state  or  condition  not  absolutely  as  in  Kal,  but  as 
something  effected  and  involving  a  change  from  another 
previous  condition,  \^12  to  he  full,  Ni.  to  he  filled,  njn  to 
he,  Ni.  to  become. 

§  78.  1.  The  Piel  gives  new  intensity  to  the  simple 
idea  of  the  verb,  by  which  its  meaning  is  variously  modi- 
fied according  to  the  nature  of  the  case,  t^^'J  to  befeiv, 
Pi.  to  he  very  feiv;  Z^Tl  to  follow,  Pi.  io  folloiu  ardently,  to 
pursue;  ImD  to  fear,  Pi.  to  fear  constantly,  to  he  timid;  bk^ 
to  ask,  Pi.  to  ask  repeatedly  and  earnestly,  to  beg;  S'^^ln  to 
create,  as  God,  Pi.  to  form  with  pains  and  labour,  as  man; 
^ri2  to  ivrite.  Pi.  to  ivrite  much  with  the  implication  that 
it  is  to  httle  purpose,  to  scribble;  "i2]^  to  bury.  Pi.  to  bury 
great  numbers. 

2.  The  energy  resident  in  this  species  displays  itself 
by  signifying  the  producing  or  causing  of  that  which  is 
denoted  by  the  simple  idea  of  the  verb,  thus  quickening 
intransitive  verbs  into  transitives,  and  making  such  as 
were  transitive  before  to  be  doubly  so.  In  this,  which  is 
the  more  frequent  case,  it  becomes  virtually  equivalent 
to  a  causative,  liiji  to  perish.  Pi.  to  make  to  perish,  to 
destroy;  T.:b  to  learn.  Pi.  to  teach,  i.  e.  cause  to  learn.  Both 
these  senses  are  occasionally  found  united  in  the  same 
verb,  Lnj>  Pi.  to  he  very  near  and  to  bring  near;  rn^r  Pi. 
to  be  very  corrupt  and  to  corrupt  or  destroy. 


110  ETYMOLOGY.  "  §79,80 

a.  If  the  action  be  directed  to  the  removal  of  its  object,  the  Piel  be- 
comes privative,  xbn  to  sin,  Pi.  to  free  from  sin^  expiate,  ^jbo  to  stone,  Pi. 
to  free  from  stones, 

3.  Pual  is  the  passive  of  Piel,  and  therefore  can  only 
exist  when  the  sense  of  the  latter  is  such  that  a  passive 
is  possible. 

§  79.  1.  The  Hiphil  denotes  the  causing  or  producing 
of  that  which  is  signified  by  the  simple  form  of  the  verb, 
and,  as  in  the  corresponding  case  of  Piel,  intransitive 
verbs  become  transitive,  and  such  as  admitted  of  one  ob- 
ject before  are  now  capable  of  receiving  two:  IT  to 
descend,  Hi.  to  cause  to  descend,  bring  down;  J!<iS  to  come, 
Hi.  to  bring;  nk'i  to  see,  Hi.  to  show. 

a.  The  causative  sense  in  both  Piel  and  Hiphil  is  sometimes  weakened 
into  a  simple  permissive,  ii'^^U  permit  to  live  Ex.  22:  17,  Deut.  20:  16,  ns^ 
perhaps  permit  to  suffer  Ex.  22 :  21,  iinSti  liermit  to  he  redeemed  Ex.  21:  8. 

2.  In  some  verbs  Hiphil  has  an  intransitive  sense,  but 
in  most  of  these  cases  there  is  either  an  ellipsis  of  the 
object  or  the  idea  of  production  and  causation  can  still 
be  obscurely  traced,  ZilJj^  Hi.  to  be  attentive,  prop,  to  make 
{one^s  ear)  attend;  pp"^  Hi.  to  be  sweet,  prop,  to  cause  sweet- 
ness; bb'ir  Hi.  to  be  wise,  prop,  to  act  iviseUj,  exhibit  wisdom; 
y!bi<  Hi.  to  be  brave,  prop,  to  act  bravely;  "jpj  Hi.  to  grow 
old,  prop,  to  acquire  age.  In  a  few  instances  both  senses 
are  found  united  in  the  same  verb,  vhB  Hi.  to  cause  to 
bud  and  to  put  forth  buds;  "^^^^  Hi.  to  pifolong  and  to  be 
long;  ^iz::^  Hi.  to  enrich  and  to  grow  rich;  I'bir  Hi.  to  make 

fat  and  to  become  fat  (comp.  Eng.  fatten), 

3.  Hophal  is  the  passive  of  Hipliil. 

a.  When  Kal  has  both  a  transitive  and  an  intransitive  sense,  Hiphil, 
as  the  causative  of  the  latter,  becomes  substantially  identical  with  the 
former,  nu3  K.  to  extend  or  to  bend,  trans,  and  intrans.,  Hi.  id,  trans.  In 
Job  23:  11,  Ps.  125:  5,  Isa.  30:  11,  where  the  Hiphil  of  this  verb  appears  to 
be  used  intransitively  in  the  sense  of  turning  aside,  there  is  an  ellipsis  of 
its  proper  object,  to  bend  (the  steps). 

§  80.  1.  The  Hithpael  is  reflexive  or  reciprocal  of  the 
idea  of  the  verb,  mostly  as  this  is  expressed  in  the  Piel 


§  80  SPECIES  OF  VERBS.  Ill 

species  (from  which  it  is  formed,  §  82.  5),  the  particular 
shade  of  meaning  being  modified  according  to  the  circum- 
stances of  the  case.  (1)  It  indicates  that  the  subject  is 
hkewise  the  direct  object  of  the  action,  xSi"^  Pi.  to  deliver, 
Hith.  to  escape,  deliver  one's  self;  p^.i:  Pi.  to  justify,  Hith.  to 
justify  one's  self;  irsn  Pi.  to  seek,  Hith.  to  disguise  one's 
self,  prop,  to  let  one's  self  be  sought  for;  n|n  Pi.  to  make 
sick,  Hith.  to  make  one's  self  sick  whether  in  reahty  or  in 
the  esteem  of  others,  i.  e.  to  feign  sickness;  Di"  Hith.  to 
shoiv  one's  self  luise  whether  in  reahty  or  in  his  own  con- 
ceit. (2)  Or  that  he  is  the  indirect  object  of  the  action, 
which  is  for  his  benefit,  or  relates  entirely  to  him,  r.FiB 
Pi.  to  open,  Hith.  to  open  for  one's  self;  bnD  Hith.  to  inherit 
(for  one's  self)]  '^T^  Pi.  to  make  gracious,  Hith.  to  implore 
favour,  prop,  to  make  to  he  gracious  to  one's  self.  (3)  Or 
that  the  action  is  mutual  between  two  or  more  parties, 
"ntjp  Pi.  to  hind,  Hith.  to  conspire,  prop,  to  hand  together; 
ni<"J  to  see,  Hith.  to  look  upon  one  another. 

2.  This  species  is  sometimes  a  mere  passive  like  the 
Niphal  TiDTT  to  forget,  Hith.  ^o  he  forgotten;  "iS3  Pi.  ^o  atone, 
Hith.  to  he  atoned;  17}^  Pi.  to  prepare,  Hith.  to  he  prepared. 
In  a  few  instances  the  reflexive  and  the  passive  senses 
are  found  in  the  same  verb,  1D";2  Hith.  to  sell  one's  self  and 
to  he  sold. 

a.  (1)  The  af3finity  between  the  Piel  and  Hiphil  species  is  such  as  in 
very  many  verbs  to  render  it  unnecessary  to  retain  them  both,  and  one  or 
the  other  has  been  allowed  to  fall  into  disuse.  Where  both  exist,  they  are 
often  nearly  or  quite  synonymous,  and  are  used  indiscriminately,  'd^p  Pi, 
and  Hi.  to  sanctify,  or  differ  only  in  the  frequency  of  their  employment, 
n^TU  Pi.  and  Hi.  (rare)  to  send,  r'b":3  Pi.  (rare)  and  Hi.  to  ccniM  to  hear.  In 
other  cases  they  are  distinguished  by  adhering  to  those  significations  of  the 
species  in  which  they  depart  palpably  from  one  another,  nb"^  Pi.  (intens.) 
to  grow  luxuriantly,  Hi.  (caus.)  to  make  to  groiv,  Vz'o  Pi.  (caus.)  to  make 
foolish,  Hi.  (intrans.)  to  act  foolishly',  or  by  developing  them  from  different 
significations  of  the  root,  Vtia  Pi.  to  cook  (food),  Hi.  to  ripen  (fruit);  "b^ 
Pi.  to  bless  (prop,  to  kneel  in  worship).  Hi.  to  cause  to  kneel  (as  a  ydiysical 
act),  tir  Pi.  to  break  the  bones  ip'TJ),  Hi.  to  render  strong ;  or  by  restricting 
them  to  special  applications,  "ibp  Pi.  to  burn  incense  (to  idols).  Hi.  to  burn 


112  ETYMOLOGY.  §  80 

incense  (to  God),-  'cbt\  Hi.  to  change,  Pi.  to  change  (the  clothes);  K'CS  Hi. 
to  strip^  Pi.  to  strip  (the  slain  in  battle). 

(2)  It  is  still  less  common  to  find  both  Niphal  and  Hithpael  in  the  same 
verb.  Wliere  this  does  occur  they  are  sometimes  used  interchangtably,  at 
others  a  distinction  is  created  or  adhered  to,  TjEVJ  Ni.  and  Hith.  to  be  poured 
out;  "lin  Ni.  and  Hith.  to  talk  ivith  one  another;  "na  Ni.  to  he  blessed,  Hith. 
to  bless  one's  self;  d'in  Ni.  to  be  ploughed,  Hith.  to  keep  {one's  self)  quiet; 
icir  Ni.  to  be  bound,  Hith.  to  conspire. 

(3)  When  in  particular  verbs  two  species  have  substantially  the  same 
sense,  it  sometimes  happens  that  parts  only  of  each  are  in  use,  one  supple- 
menting the  deficiencies  of  the  other,  or  that  one  of  the  active  species, 
losing  its  proper  passive,  is  supplied  by  another  whose  correspoiiiling  active 
is  wanting.  Thus  bb^  to  be  able  has  a  Kal  preterite  and  infinitive;  but  its 
future  is  Hophal  (strictly,  to  be  made  able,  but  in  usage  the  equivalent  of 
Kal);  "03  to  be  pale,  UJij  to  dratv  near,  TjCJ  to  be  poured  out,  have  their 
futures  in  the  Kal  but  their  preterites  in  the  Niphal;  V'iJ3  to  stumble,  has  a 
Kal  preterite  but  future  Niphal  (Ni.  pret.  only  in  Daniel);  nfiD  to  lead  has 
the  preterite  and  imperative  Kal,  but  future  and  infinitive  Hiphil  (Hi.  pret. 
twice);  filj^  to  tvait  for  is  used  in  the  Piel  except  the  participle  which  is 
Kal;  tb'^  to  add  has  both  a  Kal  and  a  Hiphil  preterite,  which  are  synonymous, 
but  only  a  Hiphil  future.  Again,  in  bn2  to  separate  and  ni'J  to  destroy,  the 
Kal  has  yielded  to  the  Hiphil  (strictly,  to  cause  separation,  destruction)  but 
the  Niphal  is  retained  as  its  passive;  YTf]  to  bathe  and  pnj  to  sprinkle,  have 
in  the  active  the  Kal  form  and  in  the  passive  the  Pual. 

(4)  All  verbs  are  found  in  one  or  more  of  these  species  or  conjugations, 
but  vei-y  few  in  the  whole  of  them.  Of  the  1,332  triliteral  verbs  in  the 
Hebrew  Bible.  530  appear  in  some  one  species  onl}',  360  in  two  species, 
235  in  three,  118  in  four,  70  in  five,  12  in  six,  and  but  7  in  the  entire  num- 
ber,  viz.:   rr>2  to  cleave  asunder,   nlij  to  uncover,   nin  to  be  sick,  5ni  to 

•t  l"*"^  I  'TT  '-T 

know,  Ipi;  to  bring  forth,  IpS  to  visit,  U^i  to  be  high.  The  number  of 
species  in  which  a  given  verb  appears,  is  sometimes  limited  by  the  ne- 
cessity of  the  case,  as  when  its  meaning  will  not  admit  of  the  modifications 
denoted  by  all  the  species;  or  by  usage,  as  when  certain  species  are  dropped 
as  unnecessary,  the  ideas  which  they  would  convey  being  expressed  in 
another  manner;  or  by  the  circumstance  that  in  the  small  volume  of  the 
Old  Testament,  examples  may  not  occur  of  all  the  species  which  actually 
were  in  use. 

b.  Instances  occur  in  which  the  active  species,  and  less  frequently  the 
passives,  derive  their  meanings  not  directly  from  the  root,  but  from  s^me 
noun  which  has  sprung  from  it.  These  are  called  Denominatives.  Thus, 
Tins  K.  to  break  the  neck  (q"?);  ^'^'-l  K.  to  tithe  (-rs  ten);  "jib  to  make 
bricks  (pzzh);  "333  Ni.  to  be  possessed  of  understanding,  or,  according  to 
others,  /o  be  devoid  of  understanding  (331?  heart);  ]r\^  Pi.  to  act  as  priest 
("™);  'dp.  Ti.  to  build  a  nest  ("jp);  ^2"^':  Pu.  part,  square  (rs~X  four);  ifs^"^ 
Pu.  almond-shaped  (li^ir);  r^r^a  Vwl  dyed  scarlet  {vVx^);  J-'iJn  Hi.  to  snow 
(^Vt')!  "i"'i?v!  ^^'-  to  give  ear  Ctn);  rsn  Hi.  to  snare  (na);  n^,-2n  Ho.  to  be 
salted  (rti);  ■in:nri  Hith.  to  make  one's  self  a  Jetv  C^nnn-;);  l.'^-J^n  Hith.  to 


§   81,  82  PERFECT  VERBS.  113 

supply  one^yi  self  with  provision  (l"^).  A  verbal  form  may  occasionally 
arise  even  from  an  adverb,  f^N^i^S  Ni.  part,  removed  far  away  (i^X^n),  or 
an  interjection,  orri  Hi.  and  lie  stilled  (Ort  hush!). 


Perfect  Verbs. 

§  81.  There  is  one  normal  standard  for  the  formation 
of  these  several  species  and  their  further  inflection,  to 
which  aU  verbs  conform  unless  prevented  by  the  character 
of  their  radicals.  There  are  no  anomalous  or  irregular 
deviations  from  this  standard,  such  as  are  found  in  other 
languages,  for  which  no  explanation  can  be  given  but 
the  fact  ol  their  occurrence.  Whatever  deviations  do 
occur  result  from  the  presence  of  letters  in  the  root  which 
do  not  admit  of  certain  combinations  and  forms,  and 
compel  the  adoption  of  others  in  their  stead.  Verbs  are 
hence  distinguished  into  perfect  and  imperfect.  They  are 
styled  perfect  when  their  radical  letters  are  capable  of 
entering  into  all  those  combinations  and  exhibiting  all 
those  forms  which  conformity  with  the  standard  requires. 
They  are  imperfect  when  the  root  contains  a  weak  letter, 
§  7.  2,  or  is  otherwise  so  constituted  as  to  lead  to  a  de- 
parture from  the  standard  inflections. 

§  82.  1.  In  perfect  verbs  the  Kal  is  formed  by  giving 
Pattahh,  or  more  rarely  one  of  its  compounds,  Tsere  or 
Hholem,  to  the  second  radical  as  its  essential  or  cha- 
racteristic vowel,  and  to  the  first  radical  a  pretonic 
Kamets,  §  64.  2,  thus:  bpj^,  nil3,  -itii:. 

a.  The  number  of  verbs,  perfect  and  imperfect,  whose  second  radical 
has  Tsere  or  Hholem  or  as  they  are  technically  called  middle  e  and 
middle  o,  is  quite  inconsiderable.  They  are  mostly  of  an  intransitive 
signification. 

(1)  The  following  have  Tsere,  viz.: 

lib:  to  be  old.  ^•£n  to  hew.  Kpi:  to  be  unclean, 

yin  to  delight.  nfia  to  be  clean.  MJi:^  to  be  dry. 


114  ETYMOLOGY.  §  82 

Sn'i  to  fear.                        i'^^'^  trans,  or  intrans.(Esth.  sis  to  thirst. 

na-s  (Isa.  24:  20  123)  to               7:5  i(^^tra,ns.)  to  fill  ^hp^  (Isa.  33:  9   Vp]^) 

be  heavy.  or  be  full.  to  loither. 

"I'cis  to  be  right.                  TD  to  die.  xia  to  hate. 

"C^h  and  ^'^h  to  put  on.    ^ij  to  fade.  ^Sia  to  be  brought  low. 

(2)  The  following  have  Tsere  in  pause,  §  65,  or  as  a  pretonic  vowel, 
§  64,  2,  before  a  suf3fix,  but  Pattahh  in  other  cases.  Such  as  only  occur  in 
pause  or  with  suffixes  are  printed  with  Tsere. 

Stnx  to  love.  'ipn  to  lack.  irn|5  to  be  holy. 

nfcx  to  be  guilty.  ^ti'P  to    blush    (distin-  :n'nj3  to  come  near. 

pia  to  sivell.                                  guished  from  ^sn  2y"n  to  be  hungry. 

ni^j  to  prevail.                             to  dig).  sau  to  be  safed. 

b-;,5  to  be  or  become  great.  CiJ?^  to  be  weary.  J".^'::  to  rejoice. 

pan  to  cleave  to.  "ii^l  to  possess.  ni'iJ  to  forget. 

'OT  to  grow  fat.  si'J  to  he  pleasant.  "i^  to  dwell. 

hhrt  to  cease.  ci^  to  be  strong.  fii'r  to  be  desolate, 

vin  to  be  leavened.  n^s  fo  come  upon,  to  sha  to  hear. 

Clin  to  be  profaned.  prosper. 

Several  others  are  marked  with  Tsere  in  the  lexicon  of  Gesenius,  in 
which  that  vowel  does  not  occur. 

(3)  The  following  have  Hholem: 

lix  to  shine.  Vzil  to  be  able.  ah  (Ps.  18:  15  n]n)  to 

llJia  to  be  ashamed.  ^pl  to  snare.  shoot. 

niu  to  be  good.  Vi:   (see%86.a)to  flow,  biia  (Gen.43:  U-'n^n'r) 

"li"!  to  dread.  "jibr?  to  be  small.  to  be  bereaved. 

2.  The  Niphal  is  formed  by  prefixing  D  to  the  letters 
of  the  root;  thus,  btppD,  which  by  §  61.  1,  becomes  bbpD. 

3.  The  Piel  and  Pual  are  formed  by  doubling  the 
second  radical  and  attaching  the  appropriate  vowels; 
thus,  bbp,  btap. 

4.  The  Hiphil  and  Hophal  are  formed  by  prefixing 
n  with  the  proper  vowels ;  thus,  b^bpH ,  bbpn. 

5.  The  Hithpael  is  formed  by  prefixing  VT}  to  the  con- 
struct infinitive  of  the  Piel;  thus,  btsplTiJl.  If  the  first 
radical  be  one  of  the  sibilants  D,  123  or  123,  the  T\  of  the  pre- 
fixed syllable  will  be  transposed  with  it,  biiricri,  "SP'lin, 
rrl^irn.  If  the  first  radical  be  2,  the  n  will  be  transposed. 


§82 


PERFECT  VERBS.  115 


and  in  addition  changed  to  Li,  e.  g,  p'^pl^r^.  If  the  first 
radical  be  one  of  the  Hnguals  1,  t:  or  T\,  the  n  will  be 
assimilated  or  united  to  it  by  Daghesh-forte,  pS'^M,  "^hx^Tl, 

a.  In  one  instance  iiJ^bicrrt  Jer.  49:  3  h  remains  before  113  without 
transposition,  which  would  bring  three  Unguals  in  close  connection,  and 
once  it  is  assimilated  to  V,  Eccl,  7:  16  ciit""^,  elsewhere  CsiFl'w*"] ;  n  is  like- 
wise assimilated  to  the  sibilant  T  in  the  only  Hithpael  form  in  which  that 
letter  is  the  initial  of  the  root  ^"I'li  Isa.  1:  16;  in  the  Aramsean  lisjl^i  the  n 
is  transposed  and  changed  to  1.  In  one  instance  d'^pS'^np  Judg.  1 9 :  22  H 
remains  without  assimilation  before  *1.  The  n  may  either  be  assimilated  or 
not  to  the  initial  3  of  two  verbs  xi:3,  Sii:,  and  the  initial  D  of  two  "i^S,  1S|. 
It  is  assimilated  to  the  3  of  C23,  which  occurs  but  twice  in  the  Hithpael, 
to  the  3  of  ]'X3,  which  only  occurs  once  and  in  one  instance  to  "i,  viz.  fbilX 
Isa.  33:  10  but  Cpi-in';  Dan.  11:  36. 

b.  The  seven  species  may,  agreeably  to  their  formation,  be  reduced  to 
three  with  their  derivatives,  viz.: 

Active  1.  Kal  2.  Piel  3.  Hiphil 

Passive  Pual  Hophal 

Middle  Niphal  Hithpael 

(1)  The  prefixed  letters  of  the  Niphal  and  Hithpael  3  and  Vi  (with  n 
prosthetic,  §  53.  1.  a)  are  probably  in  their  origin  fragmentary  pronouns 
signifying  self.  The  idea  primarily  suggested  is  that  of  performing  an 
action  upon  one's  self;  but  in  the  Niphal  usually,  and  in  the  Hithpael 
occasionally,  the  reflexive  signification  has,  as  in  certain  tenses  of  the  Greek 
middle  and  in  the  reciprocal  verbs  of  some  modern  languages,  given  place 
to  the  passive.  In  the  Aramsean  the  forms  with  a  prefixed  pX  have  not 
only  quite  lost  their  original  character  as  reflexives,  but  have  superseded 
all  other  passives. 

(2)  The  idea  of  causation  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal,  is  not  due,  as  in 
the  Indo-European  causatives,  to  the  introduction  of  a  syllable  directly 
suggesting  it.  It  appears  to  be  primarily  another  intensive  form,  with  which 
usage  has  ordinarily  connected,  as  it  frequently  has  with  the  Piel,  the  notion 
of  productive  energy  or  the  quickening  of  an  intransitive  into  a  transitive 
As  in  the  Piel  and  its  derivatives,  the  idea  of  intensity  is  suggested  by 
giving  a  doubled  and  consequently  more  intense  pronunciation  to  the  central 
radical;  so  in  the  Hiphil,  by  a  like  symbolism,  the  power  of  the  root  is 
augmented  by  the  accession  of  a  new  initial  syllable,  the  weak  letter  n 
merely  supporting  the  vowel,  like  the  corresponding  X  in  Aramsean  and  Arabic. 

(3)  The  distinction  between  active  and  passive  in  the  intensive  and 
causative  species  is  made  by  the  vowels  alone.  In  Arabic  all  the  active 
forms  have  the  vowel  a,  katala,  kattala  etc.,  and  the  passives  u  and  i,  kutila, 
kuttila  etc.  So  in  Hebrew,  as  is  obvious  from  their  inflections,  a  was  orig- 
inally the  vowel  not  of  Kal  only  but  of  all  the  active  species,  biJsj:?  and 


1. 

Kal 

bbp^ 

2. 

Niphal 

bbpD 

3. 

Piel 

btop 

4. 

Pual 

bt^ip 

5. 

Hipliil 

^'^pn 

6. 

Hophal 

bbpn 

7. 

Hitlipael 

-^i^j^n 

116  ETYMOLOGY.  §  83 

P"i:~n  being  modifications  of  hattal  and  haJctal.  "When  in  Arabic  i  or  u,  as 
in  Hebrew  e  or  o,  is  tlie  second  vowel  of  the  first  or  Kal  species,  it  has  an 
intransitive  signification. 

§  83.  If  bbp  to  kill  be  taken  as  the  representative  of 
the  regular  verb,  the  various  species  with  their  signifi- 
cations will  be  as  follows,  viz.: 

to  kill. 

to  he  killed. 

to  kill  many  or  to  massacre, 

to  he  massacred. 

to  cause  to  kill. 

to  he  caused  to  kill, 

to  kill  one's  self. 

a.  It  is  in  each  case  the  third  person  masculine  singular  of  the  preterite 
which  is  given  above,  and  the  strict  signification  therefore  is  he  has  killed, 
etc.  Tliese  being  the  simplest  forms  of  the  various  species,  however,  and 
destitute  of  any  sign  of  tense  or  person,  are  commonly  used  to  represent 
the  sjjecies;  and  in  this  sense  the  proper  equivalent  is  the  infinitive,  which 
is  the  form  used  for  designating  verbs  in  English. 

b.  The  verb  hhp  is  well  fitted  for  a  model,  and  is  now  generally  so 
employed.  The  consonants,  which  compose  its  root,  have  no  peculiarities 
to  interfere  Avith  its  inflection,  it  has  a  signification  capable  of  being  car- 
ried through  all  the  species,  and  as  it  exists  likewise  in  the  cognate  lan- 
guages, it  offers  a  good  basis  for  their  comparison.  It  occurs,  indeed,  but 
three  times  in  the  Bible,  Job  13:  15,  24:  14,  Ps.  139:  19,  and  in  but  one 
species;  still  the  very  rarity  of  its  occurrence  only  restricts  it  more  com- 
pletely to  its  use  as  a  representative  or  tj'pical  verb.  The  old  Jewish  model 
hv^,  §  76.  2,  is  objectionable  on  account  of  its  weak  letter  2>,  and  on  ac- 
count of  the  twofold  sound  of  its  initial  radical  Q,  which,  with  its  Daghesh- 
lene,  might  prove  perplexing  to  beginners. 

c.  (1)  The  existence  of  other  and  less  usual  species  is  a  needless  as- 
sumption. The  Poel,  Pilel,  Pilpel  and  the  like,  are  not  additional  species 
but  identical  in  character  and  signification  with  those  already  n  tmed.  The 
more  copious  Arabic,  with  its  nicer  shades  of  distinction,  has  greatly  mul- 
tiplied the  number  of  its  species  or  conjugations,  incorporating  into  its 
standard  paradigm  forms  corresponding  to  some  of  these  which  the  Hebrew 
only  occasionally  employs.  In  the  latter  language,  hoAvever,  tliey  are  at  the 
utmost  alternate  forms  substituted  in  place  of  the  ordinary  ones,  and 
found  for  the  most  part  in  the  imperfect  verbs,  to  the  nature  of  whose 
radicals  they  owe  their  peculiarities  of  structure.  When,  as  is  the  case  in 
a  very  few  instances,  there  is  a  double  form  to  a  particular  species  in  the 
same  verb,  usage  has  mostly  created  an  arbitrary  distinction  between  them, 


8  84  PEEFECT  VEBKS.  117 

e.  g.  Pi.  ^^'^  to  uproot  and  dn"i  to  take  root;  Pi.  d*|5  to  cause  to  stand, 
applied  to  covenants  and  oaths,  to  ratify,  and  Ci3"ip,  in  a  physical  sense,  to 
raise  up;  Hi,  rnri  to  cause  to  rest,  to  set  dcivn,  and  l^^2f^  to  leave,  to  let 
alone.  There  is  no  objection  to  the  employment  of  these  names  as  con- 
venient designations  of  particular  modes  of  formation,  provided  it  is  under- 
stood that  they  mean  nothing  more. 

(2)  There  are  very  few  instances  of  what  may  he  called  compound 
species:  thus,  Niphal  of  Pual  *'5x;.3  Isa.  59:  3,  Lam.  4:  14,  to  he  exceed- 
ingly di filed,  stronger  than  the  simple  Niphal  Vxro;  Niphal  of  Hithpael 
!in&-j  Ezek.  23:  48,  IS??  Deut.  21:  8,  i^'I^^'r  P^'ov.  27:  15. 

§  84.  To  each  of  these  species  belong  a  preterite  or 
perfect  and  future  or  imperfect,  two  forms  of  the  in- 
finitive, an  absolute  and  a  construct,  a  participle,  and, 
except  to  the  Pual  and  Hophal  which  as  pure  passives 
cannot  express  a  command,  an  imperative.  The  Kal  has 
both  an  active  and  a  passive  participle,  one  more,  con- 
sequently, than  the  other  species.  The  preterite  or 
perfect  of  each  species  is  the  form  already  described, 
§  83.  The  remaining  parts  are  formed  in  the  following 
manner,  viz.: 

1.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  formed  by  changing  the 
last  vowel  in  Hiphil  and  Hophal  to  Tsere,  and  in  each  of 
the  other  species  to  Hholem,  observing  hkewise  that 
Hhirik  in  the  penult  of  Piel  and  Hiphil  is  to  be  changed 
to  Pattahh.  (See  Paradigm  of  the  Perfect  Verb.)  This 
rule  gives  to  Niphal  the  infinitive  '^h^i:'^^  which  form  actu- 
ally occurs,  §  91.  6.  If,  hoAvever,  the  original  Sh'va  be 
suffered  to  remain  after  the  prefixed  5,  §  82.  2,  thus, 
bbp:,  a  prosthetic  H  will  be  required  in  order  to  its  pro- 
nunciation, §  53.  1.  a,  after  wliich  D  will  be  assimilated 
to  the  following  letter,  §  54.  2,  and  a  pretonic  Kamets, 
§  64.  2,  added  to  the  p  in  order  to  give  full  effect  to  the 
reduplication;  thus  ^ibj>n,  which  is  the  form  written  in 
the  paradigm. 

2.  The  construct  infinitive  is  formed  from  the  absolute 
in  the  Kal  by  rejecting  the  pretonic  Kamets,  §  82.  1,  in' 


118 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§84 


Niplial  by  changing  the  last  vowel  to  Tsere,  and  in  the 
remaining  species  by  making  the  last  vowel  conform  to 
the  corresponding  vowel  of  the  preterite. 

3.  The  future  or  imperfect  is  formed  from  the  con- 
struct infinitive  by  the  appropriate  personal  prefixes;  if 
the  first  letter  of  the  infinitive  be  Jl,  it  is  rejected,  §  53.  3, 
and  its  vowel  given  to  the  prefix. 

a.  As  the  preterite  tense  is  in  certain  cases  used  of  the  present  or  the 
future,  and  the  future  pf  the  present  or  the  past,  it  has  been  supposed  that 
primarily  and  radically  they  denote  the  mode  of  an  action  as  complete  or 
incomplete  rather  than  the  time  of  its  occurrence.  It  has  hence  become 
customary  to  designate  them  as  the  Perfect  and  the  Imperfect. 

h.  (1)  Some  verbs  take  Pattahh  in  the  last  syllable  of  the  Kal  future 
instead  of  the  Hholem  of  the  construct  infinitive.  This  is  particularly  the 
case  with  intransitive  verbs.  Such  as  have  Tsere  in  the  preterite  regularly 
take  I'attahh  in  the  future;  of  the  list  given  §  82.  1.  a.  (1)  and  (2)  but  three 
3ijn,  bz: ,  "iP"^  take  Hholem,  and  two  "j'Sri  and  did  take  indifferently 
Hholem  or  Pattahh.  Of  verbs  with  middle  o  in  the  preterite  tliree  ^13, 
"t:;r  and  hz'd  take  Pattahh  in  the  future;  the  rest  either  do  not  occur  in 
the  future,  or  have  imperfect  letters  in  their  root  which  obscure  their  true 
formation. 

(2)  The  following  verbs  with  Pattahh  in  the  preterite  have  Pattahh 
likewise  in  the  Kal  future.  Those  Avbich  do  not  occur  in  the  Kal  preterite, 
or  occur  only  in  forms  which  do  not  reveal  the  chai"acter  of  tlie  vowel  fol- 
lowing the  second  radical,  are  distinguished  by  an  asterisk.  Verbs  having 
a  Pattahh  in  the  future,  which  is  due  to  imperfect  letters  in  the  root, 
(e.  g.  Pe  Yodh,  Ayin  Guttural,  Lamedh  Guttural),  are  not  included  in 
this  list. 


bix  to  mourn. 

ttji; 

to  come  near. 

*at'|?  to  be  attentive. 

"q^X  to  learn. 

bbl 

(intrans.)  to  fall  off. 

yz"^  to  lie  doivn. 

yt^  to  he  strong. 

p^; 

to  kiss. 

lin   to  rage  or  tremble. 

*qiN  to  be  angry. 

*~r3 

to  be  poured. 

*2i:n  to  be  tvet. 

*V'zT\  to  become  vain. 

P^t:^ 

(§  86.  b.)  to  ascend. 

nin   to  ride. 

p]n  to  he  strong. 

'^h 

to  love. 

♦ngT  to  spread. 

fisn  to  he  tvise. 

1^? 

to  smoke. 

'nfr-n  to  rot. 

'r\^r\  to  be  dark. 

*pr^' 

to  be  removed. 

arr  to  lie  down. 

*^lb3  to  be  foolish. 

*pn:i 

to  he  righteous. 

a^d  to  rule. 

"Kh  to  learn. 

"^^P. 

to  be  lightly  es- 

*c|'r to  be  complete. 

phin  to  he  sweet. 

teemed. 

*'ipir  to  groio  fat. 

(3)  The  following  with  Pattahh  in  the  preterite  have  both  Pattahh  and 
Hholem  in  the  future. 


§  85  PERFECT  VERBS.  119 

lia  to  deal  treacher-  cpn  to  be  hot.  T^iis  to  bite. 

ously.  'in  to  be  gracious.  bvs  to  do. 

^h  fut.  0,  to  tear,  fut.  *irnn  fut.  o,  to  pZoM^A,  'jiJQ  to  sfri;)  o^. 

a,  to  resolve.  iut.a,tohesilent.  ^hp^  to  me  divination. 

Ti^n  (mostly  fut.  e)  to ^0.  qyj  to  tear.  "-kp^  {nt.d,tocuto/f,i\it. 

UV1  to  curse.  '^kl  to  form.                             a,  to  be  short. 

*UJhn  to  bind.  ^i"9  ^'  trespass.  ni'j  to  rest. 

*ttj|n  fut.  5,  to  subdue,  in;  to  /Zee.  D'cn  to  6e  finished. 

fut.  a,  to  6e  rweafc.  "in  3  to  ?;ow. 

C.  Some  imperfect  verbs,   chiefly  Pe  Yodh,  take  Tsere  in  the  second 
syllable  of  the  Kal  future,  e.  g.  ni'-^,  'Pir 

4.  The  imperative  has  the  same  form  with  the  con- 
struct infinitive  except  in  Hiphil,  where  the  last  vowel  is 
Tsere  as  in  the  infinitive  absolute. 

a.  Where  the  Kal  future  has  Pattahh  or  Tsere  the  imperative  takes 
the  same. 

5.  The  Kal  active  participle  takes  the  form  bpp  and 
the  passive  b^b]^.  The  participle  of  the  Niphal  lengthens 
the  last  vowel  of  the  preterite  from  Pattahh  to  Kamets; 
those  of  the  other  species  are  formed  by  prefixing  '2  to 
the  construct  infinitive,  rejecting  Jl  where  this  is  the 
initial  letter,  §  53. 3,  and  lengthening  the  last  vowel  where 
this  is  short. 

§  85.  1.  The  preterite  and  future  are  inflected  through 
three  pt>rsons,  the  imperative  only  in  the  second  person, 
a  command  presupposing  the  form  of  direct  address. 
There  are  also  distinct  forms  for  the  singular  and  plural 
numbers  and  for  the  masculine  and  feminine  genders. 
Verbal  inflections  are  made  by  means  of  pronominal  frag- 
ments added  to  the  end  of  the  preterite  and  imperative, 
and  for  the  most  part  prefixed  to  the  future. 

a.  The  following  are  the  fragments  used  for  this  purpose  in  the  various 
parts  of  the  verb: 

Preterite  or  Perfect  (^i^). 

(1)  Singular.  3rd  pers.  masc.  The  third  person  alone  has  no  per- 
sonal ending  in  any  of  its  forms;  as  each  of  the  others  has  such  a  termi- 


120  ETYMOLOGY.  §  85 

nation,  none  was  needed  for  the  sake  of  distinction.  Nothing  more  was 
required  than  to  indicate  the  gender  and  number.  The  masculine  singular 
is  expressed  by  the  simple  form  of  the  species  with  no  appended  sign 
whatever. 

3  fern.  The  original  feminine  termination  is  T\_ ,  which,  appended  to 
the  masculine,  would  give  r'^^p^,  a  form  used  before  suffixes,  §  101.  1,  in 
Lamedh  He  verbs  and  occasionally  elsewhere,  §  86.  b.  Commonly,  how- 
ever, in  verbs  as  in  nouns  and  adjectives,  the  final  n  is  dropped,  §  55.  2.  c, 
and  the  previous  vowel,  which  thus  comes  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable,  is 
lengthened,  "^^^i^- 

2  masc.     The  appended  Pi  is  derived  from  nPX. 

2  fern.     V\  from  PN. 

1  com.  "ipi  changed  from  "^3  of  ''rix ;  compare  the  similar  relation  of 
the  suffixes  T],  DS  to  the  pronouns  HPiX,  dPX  §  72.  The  Ethiopic  retains  the 
k  unaltered,  katalku. 

Plural.  2  com.  The  original  plural  termination  §  71.  6.  is  a  nasal  D 
or  ')  preceded  by  the  vowel  ^  The  full  ending  "jsi  is  still  found  in  a  very 
few  instances,  §  86.  b,  generally  the  *|  is  dropped  §  55.  2.  a. 

2  masc.  tPl  from  filhs. 
2  fern.    )v\  from  )Pi<. 

1  com.    ^3  from  WX. 


Future  or  Imperfect  {TX)'/). 


(2)  In  the  inflections  of  this  tense  the  signs  for  person  are  prefixed, 
those  for  gender  and  number  are  mostly  affixed;  the  fragmentary  pronoun 
stands  first  as  the  subject  and  the  verbal  predicate  assumes  the  appropriate 
forms  of  gender  and  number  to  agree  with  it. 

Singular.  3rd  per s.  masc.  The  prefixed  "^  is  from  it^lrt;  the  vowel  u, 
which  distinguishes  the  masculine  pronoun,  is  changed  to  the  correspond- 
ing semivowel  1,  and  this  at  the  beginning  of  words  becomes  '^,  §  56.  2. 

3  fern.    PI,  the  sign  of  the  feminine,  is  here  prefixed. 

2  masc.  and  fern.  The  prefixed  Pi  is  from  rrx,  ipiX,  from  the  latter  of 
which  is  derived  the  appended  "^    of  the  feminine, 

1  com.    The  prefixed  X  is  from  "^iVi. 

Plural.  3  masc.  and  2  masc.  The  same  plural  termination  as  in  the 
preterite  is  appended  to  the  corresponding  singular  forms. 

3  fern,  and  2  fern.  The  feminine  plural  is,  as  in  the  pronouns  nsn, 
rtjPiS,  denoted  by  Hi  appended  to  the  singular,  the  2  fern.  sing,  termina- 
tion ">.  being  dropped  as  superfluous. 

1  (Om.    The  prefixed  2  is  from  13X. 


§  85  PERFECT  VERBS.  121 

Imperative  i^'^'^),  etc. 

(3)  No  designation  of  the  person  is  here  necessary  as  the  second  is  the 
only  one  in  use.  Gender  and  number  are  indicated  by  the  same  termina- 
tions as  in  the  corresponding  person  of  the  future.  The  future  forms  will, 
in  fact,  in  every  case  directly  yield  those  of  the  imperative  by  rejecting 
the  prefixed  in,  the  sign  of  the  second  person,  and  restoring  the  n  in  those 
cases  in  which  it  has  been  suppressed. 

(4)  The  Infinitive  ("i'ip'3  fountain,  whence  other  forms  are  derived)  is 
an  abstract  verbal  noun  commonly  masculine,  but  sometimes  with  a  femi- 
nine termination. 

(5)  The  Participle  ("'ilS'^a  intermediate  between  the  preterite  and  the 
future)  shares  the  inflections  of  nouns  and  adjectives.  The  "0  prefixed  in 
several  of  the  species  is  from  the  indefinite  pronouns  "''O  or  ti^. 

2.  The  inflections  of  the  perfect  verb  in  all  the  species 
are  shown  by  Paradigm  II  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

a.  In  order  to  a  better  understanding  of  the  paradigm,  it  should  be 
observed  that  certain  changes  result,  from  attaching  the  personal  inflections 
to  the  verb,  which  are  to  be  explained  by  the  general  laws  of  sounds  and 
syllables. 

(1)  The  prefixes  of  the  future  occasion  no  changes  unless  they  stand 
before  n  which  is  rejected,  and  its  vowel  given  to  the  prefix,  §  53.  3,  e.  g. 
bijp";  for  hhpT}";,  or  stand  before  a  voweiless  letter  wlien  the  Sh'va  of  the 
prefix  becomes  Hhirik,  §  61.  1,  thus  forming  a  new  syllable  to  which  the 
initial  radical  is  attached,  e.  g.  h'jpl  for  bbp"^..  Where  X  of  the  first  person 
singular  would  receive  Hhirik,  it  takes  the  diphthongal  Seghol  instead, 
§  60.  1.  a  (5),  e.  g.  VJps,  bbisx. 

(2)  Terminations  consisting  of  a  vowel,  viz.,  n^  and  "^  of  the  feminine 
singular  and  1  of  the  plural,  occasion  the  rejection  of  the  vowel  in  the 
ultimate,  §  66.  2,  which  is  no  longer  needed,  except  in  the  Hiphil  whose 
long  "^  is  retained  in  the  preterite  and  future,  and  takes  the  place  of  (  ) 
in  the  imperative,  e.  g.  f^^^ij^,  "^^^1?^^  but  Hb^bpT}.  In  the  Kal  imperative 
the  rejection  takes  place  although  it  creates  a  necessity  for  the  formation 
of  a  new  syllable,  '^!i::p,  si^-Jp  for  ib::p,  sibpp  from  btip,  §  61.  1. 

(3)  Terminations  consisting  of  a  consonant  P  or  of  a  simple  syllable 
tn,  "ipi,  >i5.  <13  occasion  no  change,  except  the  compression  of  the  antecedent 
vowel,  which  now  stands  before  two  consonants,  to  (_)  in  the  preterite,  and 
from  '^.  to  (. )  in  the  future,  ^hbpi-},  ii^bi^pri,  §61.4.  But  verbs  with  middle 
0  retain  the  Hholem  in  the  Kal  preterite,  "'rilpD"'. 

(4)  Terminations  consisting  of  a  mixed  syllable  QSJI,  )V\  occasion  the 
same  compression  of  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate,  and  inasmuch  as  they 
always  receive  the  accent,  §  33.  3,  they  likewise  cause  the  rejection  from 
the  penult  of  the  Kal  preterite  of  the  pretonic  Kamets,  which  owes  its  ex- 
istence to  the  proximity  of  the  tone  syllable,  §  82.  1,  ntib'^'p  from  V:;:p. 


122  ETYMOLOGY.  §  86 


Kemaeks  on  the  Peefect  Veebs. 

KAL. 

§  86.  a.  Preterite.  Verbs  with  middle  Tsere  exchange  this  for  Pattahh 
upon  the  accession  of  a  personal  affix  beginning  with  a  consonant.  Those 
with  middle  Hholem  retain  this  vowel,  unless  it  be  deprived  of  the  accent 
when  it  is  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph,  ri"ir,  "^n^r,  "'Fibi^,  nbs^-l,  1^iri^3'l. 
The  second  vowel,  whatever  it  be,  is  regularly  dropped  before  affixes 
beginning  with  a  vowel,  but  here,  as  elsewhere  throughout  the  paradigm, 
is  restored  and  if  need  be  lengthened  on  the  reception  of  a  pause  accent, 
e.  g.  !l"i;?D,  ;n"^£n,  'lbb\  The  words  si^TJ  Judg.  6:  5,  t^lSTJ  Isa.  63:  19,  64:  2, 
are  by  Kinichi,  Mikhlol  fol.  5  regarded  as  Kal  preterites  from  Vt5  /lowed,  in 
which  case  the  second  must  be  added  to  the  list  of  forms  with  Daghesh- 
forte  emphatic,  §  24.  c,  by  Gesenius  as  Niphal  preterites  from  V^J  shook, 
comp.  n3i5  Gen.  11:  7,  ^533  Am.  3: 11  from  b^3,  tb. 

6.  Sing.  3  fem.  The  old  form  with  n  is  found  constantly  in  Lamedh 
He  verbs,  occasionally  in  Lamedh  Aleph,  and  in  two  instances  besides,  r^TX 
Deut.  32 :  36  (with  the  accent  on  the  penult  because  of  a  following  mono- 
syllable, §  35.  1),  and  rrJ  Ezek.  46:  17  from  iTd.  The  vowel  letter  X  is 
once  written  in  place  of  n,  xnnj  Ezek.  31:  5  IVfJiibh,  §  11.  1.  a. 

2  masc.  The  vowel  letter  n  is  sometimes  appended  as  in  the  pronoun 
npiX  from  which  the  termination  is  taken,  nJ^i53  Mai.  2:  14,  nt;i:;r'jj  Jer. 
17:4;  so  in  other  species  besides  Kal,  nriBprS  Gen.  31:  30,  nrv'ri"  Job 
38:  12  K'thilh,  i-i7\^'sr[  Ps.  73:  27.  In  the  last  example  the  n  of  the  root 
is  united  by  Daghesh- forte  with  the  n  of  the  personal  affix;  this  union 
regularly  occurs  between  roots  ending  with  H  and  affixes  beginning  with 
the  same  letter  "'nr:iD  Job  23:  17,  PrJri  Ps.  89:45,  ^nsrn  Isa.  16:  10, 
tiriadn  Ex.  5:  5,  nnp  Ezek.  28:  8,  "^02  Gen.  19:  19,  '^nm^'l  Jer.  49:  37. 

2  fem.  The  full  termination  ^ri  of  "'PIS  is  frequently  added  in  Jeremiah 
and  Ezekiel  and  occasionally  elsewhere,  "^O^bT  Ezek.  16:  22,  and  repeatedly 
in  the  same  chapter,  '^Pi'i'^^  Euth  3:3;  so  in  other  species  '^Jn'ns'^  Jer.  3:  5, 
•^Fin^ls  Jer.  13:  21.     See  also  Jer.  4:  19,  22:  23,  46:  11. 

1  com.  The  vowel  letter  "^  is,  contrary  to  the  ordinary  rule,  §  11.  1.  a, 
omitted  in  four  instances  in  the  K'thibh,  though  it  is  supplied  by  the  K'ri, 
KT,  Ps.  140:  13,  Job  42:  2,  nija  1  Kin.  8:  48,  n-^bt'  Ezek.  16:  59;  and  per- 
haps fl'itx  Ps.  16:  2  may  in  like  manner  be  for  ''ri*ipi<. 

Plur.  3  com.  The  full  ending  '^^  only  occurs  in  l^i'']"  Deut.  8:  3,  16, 
"(Jljra  Isa.  26:  16,  and  "i^Op"^  Isa.  29:  21  from  tip;,  the  restoration  of  the 
Hholem  before  the  pause  accent  causing  the  rejection  of  the  Kamets,  which 
is  a  pretonic  vowel  and  can  only  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity'  of  the 
accent;  the  form  is  thus  sufficiently  explained  without  the  neces^sity  of 
assuming  it  to  be  the  future  of  a  verb  \^^p  which  nowhere  else  occurs.  An 
otiant  X,  §  16.  1,  is  twice  added  to  this  person,  as  is  regularly  the  case 
in  Arabic,    H^ibhr:   Josh.  10:  24,    Nlhx   Isa.  28:  12.     The   forms    of   similar 


§  87,  88  BEMAEKS  ON  THE  PEEFECT  VEEBS.  123 

appearance  K^ii'3  Ps.  139:  20,  N>103'^  Jer.  10:  5,  are  in  reality  of  different 
character  as  the  it  is  in  these  a  radical,  whose  vowel  has  been  shifted  to 
the  preceding  letter,  §  57.  2.  (3).  The  occasional  omission  of  the  vowel 
letter  1  from  the  K'thibh,  e.  g.  npx  1  Sam.  13:  19,  ^2p  Esth.  9:  27,  nisilj 
Deut.  21:  7,  i^^ri  Josh.  18:  12.  14.  19,  tr?^;^  Ezek.  35:  12  indicates  a 
difference  of  reading.  The  words  of  the  text  are  in  the  singular,  and 
require  the  pointing  "i^X  etc.  <^3Si;J  etc.;  the  K'ri  has  substituted  ^^^5<, 
"■-St::  etc.  for  the  sake  of  a  more  exact  concord  of  the  verbs  with  their  sub- 
jects, §  48. 

2  masc.  and  fern.  There  is  no  example  of  a  verb  middle  5  in  the  second 
person  plural;   the  forms  in  the  paradigm  are  inferred  from  analogy,   to 
indicate  which  they  are  enclosed  in  parentheses.    In  n3Ii:V:;ti  Am.  4:  3,  fl 
is  added  to  the  2  fem.  as  to  the  corresponding  pronoun. 

1  com.  "When  the  last  radical  is  )  it  combines  with  the  3  of  this  person 
by  Daghesh-forte,  Mh  Gen.  34:  16,   ^irr?  2  Chron.  14:  10,  !12^  Judg.  19: 13. 

§  87.  Infinitive.  The  Hholem  of  the  construct  is  usually  written  with- 
out 1,  Ij'^  Isa.  33:  1,  though  not  invariably,  'pd  and  "p2">p,  nis  and  liJi-3, 
and  before  Makkeph  is  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph,  §  64.  1,  ~T\^'0  Gen. 
36:  31,  -nop  Ezek.  21:  26.  28.  34,  -11=5  Nah.  2:  1.  The  Hholem  of  the 
absolute  infinitive  is  usually  though  not  invariably  written  with  1,  e.  g.  lii3 
Isa.  48:  8  but  2i'j  Lev.  15:  24,  and  is  immutable.  The  construct  infinitive 
has  Pattahh  in  place  of  Hholem  in  ni'r  1  Kin.  1:  21  et  passim  and  bsiy 
Eccles.  12:  4.  The  feminine  form  of  the  construct  infinitive  occurs  repeat- 
edly in  imperfect  though  it  is  of  rare  occurrence  in  perfect  verbs,  e.  g. 
nj:a'n  Deut.  11:  22,  i-'h-:;-0  Ex.  29:  29,  ni-i;;^  Ex.  36:  2,  n-jn^  Ezek.  21:  16, 
niJSn  Lev.  20:  16,  ni<3b,  ii^^.^,  i^i$']^  ^k''^^-  '^^^-  31:  12,  n?:2n  Ezek.  16:  5, 
Mxra  Lev.  15:  32.  The  prep,  h  is  invariably  prefixed  to  infinitives  of  this 
description  with  the  exception  of  i^iin"^  Hos.  5:2.  In  PeYodh  andLamedh 
He  verbs  the  feminine  is  the  customary  form. 

§  88.  FuTCBK.  3  masc.  The  Hholem  is  commonly  written  without  Vav, 
though  often  with  it  T('^0"^,  3^3"]  and  Sin:"],  and  before  Makkeph  is  shortened 
to  Kamets  Hliatuph,  §  64.  1,  "Tj^^'^  Isa.  32:  1,  the  Vav  being  in  such  cases 
rejected  by  the  K'ri  if  found  in  the  K'thibh,  e.  g.  ~aiFi:X  Hos.  8:  12;  in 
-'bia?';  Josh.  18:  20  the  Hholem  remains.  The  vowel  of  the  last  syllable  is 
rejected,  as  is  the  case  throughout  the  paradigm,  upon  the  reception  of  a 
vowel  affix,  §  66.  2,  unless  retained  or  restored  by  the  pause  accent,  §  65.  2, 
!lD'b"3"^  Prov.  8:  15,  lltbri  Jer.  10:  2;  twice,  however,  instead  of  rejection 
Hholem  is  changed  to  Shurek  li'Q'J'^  Ex.  18:  26,  'in^3^;n  Euth  2:  8.  A  like 
form  appears  in  the  K'thibh,  Prov.  4:  16  iblda"!. 

3  fem.  The  sign  of  the  feminine  is  in  two  instances  added  both  at  the 
beginning  and  the  end  of  the  verb,  viz.:  firxiin  Deut.  33:  16,  rinxian  Job 
22:  21,  paragogic  ii  being  appended  to  the  former,  §  97.  1,  and  a  pro- 
nominal suffix  to  the  latter.  A  like  duplication  of  the  sign  of  the  second 
person  feminine  occurs  in  rixin  1  Sam.  25:  34  K'ri,  where  the  K'thibh  has 
the  fuller  ending  "^riOn,  comp.  §§  168.  1,  171.  1. 


124  ETYMOLOGY.  §  88 

2  fern.  *  is  sometimes  added  to  the  long  vowel  with  which  this  person 
ends  "ppsin  Ruth  2:  8,  T^ib^rn  Ruth  3:  4,  'p'nsnpm  1  Sam.  1:  14,  'pB^riFi  Isa. 
45:  10.  Occasionally  the  feminine  ending  is  omitted  and  the  masculine 
form  used  instead,  e.  g.  Ti'^sn  Isa.  57 :  8. 

1  com.  pSN  Ps.  139:  8,  though  by  some  grammarians  referred  to  pDJ, 
is  probably  for  "^pX  from  p^D,  the  liquid  b  being  excluded,  and  Daghesh- 
forte  conservative  inserted  in  the  previous  letter,  §  53.  3. 

Plur.  2  masc.  and  3  masc.  The  full  plural  termination  y^  is  of  more 
frequent  occurrence  here  than  in  the  preterite,  the  vowel  of  the  second 
radical  bfing  either  retained  or  rejected,  'I'l'niip';  Ruth  2:  9,  'j^l^fl  Josh. 
24:  15,  'y^-^rr,  Ex.  9:  29,  '\'^^-:^-^.  Josh.  4:  6,  "^'JP^^  "I'li'a'^l  Ps.  104:28,  '^bs-j^. 
1  Sam.  2:  22,  Josh.  2:  8,  "i^in-prn  Deut.  11:  22,  ""^pxri  Jer.  21:  3;  so  in  other 
species,  "|l:r3-;  Job  19:  23,  ''i^Bis";  Job  21:  24,  "I'l'iann  Gen.  32:  20  and  "nii^ri 
Ps.  58:  2,  ITrjTi^ri  2  Kin.  6:  19,  V-J"^"?^  ^ic.  2:  8,  :'in^Qr;'"]  Job  9:  6.  It  is 
chiefly  found  at  the  end  of  a  clause  or  verse,  the  pausal  emphasis  delight- 
ing in  lengthened  forms,  or  before  words  beginning  with  a  weak  letter, 
to  separate  the  final  vowel  more  completely  from  that  of  the  following 
initial  syllable.  In  the  judgment  of  Nordheimer  mbi";  Isa.  35:  1  preserves 
this  ending  in  a  still  older  form;  Ewald  thinks  the  final  "i  has  been  assimil- 
ated to  the  initial  "Q  of  the  following  word,  §  55.  1;  possibly  however, 
d  may  here  be,  as  it  usually  is,  the  3  plur.  suffix,  and  may  be  rendered  as 
in  the  common  English  version  shall  he  glad  for  them. 

3  fern.  In  a  very  few  cases  the  initial  "^  of  the  masculine  form  is  re- 
tained, the  distinction  of  gender  being  sufficiently  marked  by  the  termina- 
tion njl^;;;:  Dan.  8:  22,  ^y^rr;  Gen.  30:  38,  nnt";  1  Sam.  6:  12;  or,  on  the 
other  hand,  the  termination  i  of  the  masculine  is  retained,  the  gender  being 
sufficiently  indicated  by  the  prefixed  Fl  :  inantn  Jer.  49:  11,  !ia"ipFi  Ezek. 
37:  7;  sometimes  the  gender  is  neglected  entirely  and  the  masculine  form 
used  for  the  feminine,  e.  g.  ^-ti"i"^  Hos.  14:  1.  The  assumption  that  the 
3  fern.  plur.  is  used  for  the  3  fern.  sing,  in  niN'npri  Ex.  1 :  10,  HJ-i'^ri  Job 
17:  16,  n:ci-iri  isa.  28:  3,  nj-CT^'ri  Isa.  27:  11,  n;ri3';:n  Judg.  5:  26,  is  un- 
necessary; in  the  first  passage  iTcnii"0,  ihe  subject  of  the  verb,  is  used  in 
a  collective  sense,  tears  shall  occur.  Conip.  1  Kin  5:  17;  the  others  are  to 
be  similarly  explained  with  the  exception  of  the  last,  where  ilj  may  be  the 
suffix  with  Nun  epenthetic  in  place  of  the  more  usual  form  nsnbian  her 
hand — she  puts  it  forth.  Comp.  Obad.  ver.  13. 

2  and  3  fern.  The  vowel  letter  n  is  occasionally  in  the  Pentateuch,  and 
more  rarely  in  other  books,  omitted  from  the  termination  tii,  particularly 
when  there  are  other  vowel  letters  in  the  word,  J'^^l^I^l5  Gen.  27:  1,^1X30 
Gen.  30:  38,  ;]-"?ni  Gen.  33:  6,  j"i=Tn  Ezek.  3:  20,  ^'''',^:^,  nine  times  in  the 
Pentateuch,  three  times  in  Ezekiel,  and  once  in  1  Samuel. 

When  the  root  of  the  verb  ends  with  ')  this  is  united  by  Daghesh-forte 
with  the  affix  na,  n^srn  Ezek.  17:  23,  nsiiptn  Ezek,  32:  16,  or  without  Da- 
ghesh,  §  25,  njis'n  Ruth  1 :  13,  iHS^xri  Isa.  60:  4,  njhn  Ps.  71:  23  in  most 
editions.    So  in  the  fern.  plur.  imperative,  iiSTNii  Gen.  4:  23. 


§  89,  90  BEMAEKS  ON  THE  PEKFECT  VERBS.  125 

§  89.  Imperative.  Sing.  masc.  The  Hholem  of  the  last  syllable,  as  in 
the  future  and  infinitive  construct,  is  mostly  written  without  1,  e.  g.  1p3, 
yet  not  always,  "SiiJ  and  TpSi^;  before  Makkeph  it  is  shortened  to  Kamets 
Hhatuph  "~^^  Judg.  9 :  14.  It  may  perhaps  be  similarly  shortened  without 
Makkeph  in  1"p  Judg.  19:  5,  comp.  ver.  8,  §  19.  2.  b,  or  the  vowel  may  be 
Kamets  lengthened  from  Pattahh  by  the  accent,  which  does  occur,  though 
rarely,  with  conjunctives,  §  65.  b. 

Fern.  sing,  and  masc.  plur.  The  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  commonly 
Hhirik,  but  under  the  influence  of  the  rejected  Hholem  it  is  occasionally 
Kamets  Hhatuph,  §  61.  1,  "^bh^  Judg.  9:  10,  !l=w'?2  Ezek.  32:  20  (but  ^izir'a 
Ex.  12:  21,  for  the  Methegh  see  §  45.  2),  ^\i'J  Zeph.  3:  14,  ^•rnp^  Mic.  1:  16, 
and  (with  T  retained  in  the  K'thibh)  "ipiC).;?  1  Sam.  28:  8,  Judg.  9:  12.  Upon 
the  restoration  of  the  original  vowel  by  the  pause  accent,  the  vowel  under 
the  first  radical  is  dropped  as  no  longer  necessary,  Si::E'i3  Zech,  7:  9,  lib? 
Nah.  2:  9.  When  the  third  radical  is  an  aspirate  it  rarely  receives  Daghesh- 
lene  in  this  mood  though  preceded  by  Sh'va,  §  22.  a.  (1);  such  cases  as 
■^Bpn  Isa.  47:  2,  i5QS  Jer.  10:  17,  are  exceptional. 

Fern,  pliir.  The  final  vowel  n^  is  dropped  in  '(Shia  Gen.  4:  23,  §  61.  2; 
occasionally  In  is  not  written  though  the  vowel  remains,  ^^^"^  Ruth  1 :  9, 
JXnp  Ruth  1 :  20. 

§  90.  Partictples.  Active.  The  Hholem  of  the  first  syllable  is  written 
indiff'erently  with  or  without  Vav,  ^53  and  liia,  mostly  without  when  addi- 
tions are  made  to  the  word.  In  Tnv>i-o  Pro  v.  25:  19  Shurek  is  substituted 
for  Hholem,  unless,  as  Ewald  suggests,  it  is  a  Pual  participle  with  '0  omitted ; 
or,  as  others  propose,  it  is  to  be  taken  as  an  abstract  noun.  The  Tsere  of 
the  second  syllable  is  written  without  "^  except  3'^ilb  2  Kin.  8:  21;  it  is 
shortened  to  Seghol  in  d^in  Isa.  41:  7,  upon  the  recession  of  the  accent, 
and  to  Pattahh  in  Inx  Deut.  32:  28.  Tj'^ri'in  Ps.  16:  5  and  tjoi'^  Isa.  29:  14, 
38:  5,  Eccles.  1:18  have  been  improperly  regarded  as  participles  with  Hhirik 
in  place  of  Tsere.  The  former  is  the  Hiph.  fut.  of  the  verb  ~^^,  which  is 
found  in  Arabic  though  it  occurs  only  in  this  place  in  Hebrew,  and  means 
thou  wilt  enlarge;  the  latter  is  the  ordinary  Hiphil  future  of  Cip^ ,  and  the 
construction  is  elliptical,  I  (am  he  ivho)  will  add.  Participles  are  rarely 
formed  from  neuter  verbs,  yet  hbS  fading,  dpii:  desolate,  t:^k'J  strong;  verbal 
adjectives  of  the  same  form  with  the  preterites  middle  ^  and  o  being  mostly 
used  instead,  n3^  full,  '|]bT  old,  "yi."^  afraid. 

Passive.  This,  in  the  few  cases  in  which  it  is  in  use  in  intransitive 
verbs,  has  the  sense  of  the  active,  UJiib  and  ^lib  ivearing,  "ipiu  and  "lid 
dwelling,  raba  trusting ;  there  are  occasional  instances  of  the  same  thing 
in  transitive  verbs,  "ilDT  remembering,  tlliK  holding.  The  last  vowel  is  with 
few  exceptions  as  ois  Deut.  32 :  34,  Dn^,  DX3  written  with  Vav. 

There  are  a  very  few  instances  in  which  participles  appear  to  be  in- 
flected in  the  different  persons  by  means  of  the  terminations  proper  to  the 
preterite.  This,  although  common  in  Syriac  and  Palestine  Aramseic,  occurs 
in  Hebrew  onlj*  in  the  following  examples. 


126  ETYMOLOGY.  §  91 

2  fern.  sing.  P^"'  Gen.  16:  11,  Judg.  13:  5.  7;  and  with  the  fuller  end- 
ing "^n^'r^,  ■*P:3p'3  Jer.  22:  23,  "'Fisiii:  Jer.  51:  13.  The  punctuators  must 
have  recrarded  these  terminations  as  personal  inflections,  because  the  simple 
form  of  the  feminine  participle  and  that  which  it  always  has  when  joined 
with  a  noun  of  the  third  person,  is  rri^"  Gen.  17:  19,  and  with  "^  paragogic 
•"nsinx  Hos.  10:  11  or  in  the  K'thibh  "^na:;-"  Ezek.  27:  3. 

2  masc.  plur.  aniinnir'a  Ezek.  8:  16,  the  Hithpael  participle  of  "^n'iJ. 
The  prophet  instead  of  simply  describing  their  act,  may  be  supposed  to 
repeat  the  language  of  the  idolaters  themselves  regarding  it,  thus  indicating 
their  complacency  in  their  iniquitous  worship,  and  they  (said  to  one  an- 
other) ye  are  worshipping;  the  anomalous  word,  which  is  less  surprising  in 
Ezekiel  than  it  would  be  elsewhere,  being  indicative,  as  Lightfoot  and 
others  suggest,  of  the  anomalous  character  of  the  transaction.  Such, 
however,  is  the  abruptness  and  the  difficulty  of  the  construction  that  the 
greater  number  of  interpreters  assume  an  error  of  the  text  for  D"i";nr]'a^  the 
proper  plural  of  the  participle. 

3  plur.  :"'5lbb|2'Q  they  are  cursing  me,  Jer.  15:  10.  Kimchi  explains  this 
word  as  a  compound  of  the  roots  b^|5  to  curse,  and  n^j?  to  treat  as  vile; 
Gesenius,  as  a  confusing  of  two  distinct  readings,  the  participle  ''S^^p^  and 
the  preterite  "^Jllipp;  and  Ewald  changes  the  text  to  '^5?^'?i:?,  though  his 
conjecture  is  unsustained  by  a  single  manuscript,  and  Nun  epenthetic  never 
occurs  Avith  participles.  The  word  may  be  regarded  as  the  plural  of  the 
participle  inflected  after  the  manner  of  the  preterite,  with  the  added  suffix, 
so  that' the  proper  pointing  would  be  ■':i3b;?p.  It  has  been  plausibly  suggested 
that  the  initial  :a  belongs  to  the  preceding  word,  comp.  2  Sam.  23 :  6,  and 
that  the  verb  is  a  preterite. 

NIPHAL. 

§  91.  a.  Preterite  Sing.  3  masc.  Some  copies  have  ynJi  Jer.  50:  23 
with  Seghol  under  the  prefixed  Nun  for  i"n5i3. 

h.  Infinitive.  The  following  may  be  mentioned  as  examples  of  the 
shorter  form  of  the  absolute  t\tz}  Gen.  31 :  30,  cri??  Judg.  11:  25,  nBs?  1  Sam. 
2 :  27,  fii'^p?  2  Sam.  1:6;  of  the  longer  form  given  in  the  paradigm  '\T\ji} 
Jer.  32:  4,  which  once  appears  with  prosthetic  N  in  place  of  ti  Ezek.  14:  3 
^''■'''3'*)  §  53.  1.  a.  The  construct  infinitive  usually  has  Tsere  ~3T^"n  Ezek. 
16:  36,  but  is  in  one  instance  r|4:n  Ps.  68:  3,  formed  as  in  Kal  by  rejecting 
the  pretonic  Kamets  from  Ihe  absolute.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  the 
construct  form  used  for  the  absolute  Ijtrsri  1  Kin.  20:  39,  ''\h:tr\  Deut.  4:  26. 
The  prosthetic  tl  is  commonly  retained  after  prefixed  prepositions  ''i]:^T\h 
which  are  less  closely  connected  with  the  word  than  the  formative  prefixes 
of  the  future;  it  is,  however,  rejected  in  i^'^^a  Prov.  24:  17,  comp.  fi3":J3n3 
Dan.  11  :  34,  three  times  in  riik'^b  Ex.  34  :  24,  Deut.  31:  11,  Isa.  1 :  12 
(where  some  suspect  that  the  infinitive  is  Kal  and  propose  to  point  riix";!?) 
but  riis-^nb  2  Sam.  17:17,  and  in  nrV  Ex.  10:  3.  The  Tsere  of  the  last  syl- 
lable of  the  construct  infinitive,  as  well  as  of  the  future  and  imperative 
which  are  formed  from  it,  is  shortened  to  Seghol  upon  losing  its  accent. 


§92 


KEMAEKS  ON  THE  PEEFECT  VEEBS.  127 


irfel-l  Job  34:  22,  Cn^n  Judg.  9:  38,  nr^"]  Eccles.  7:  26,  rarely  to  Pattahh, 
ajsn  Job  18:  4.  In  the  Imperative  ^^li^n  the  form  with  Seghol  is  the  usual 
one,  that  with  Tsere  only  occurring  in  Isa.  7 :  4.  The  pretonic  Kamets  of 
this  species  is  singular  In  not  being  liable  to  rejection  on  the  shifting  of  the 
tone,  e.  g.  ti="!r,!|r'  Ezek.  21:  29,  )^r\'}^''  Ps.  37:  9. 

e.  Future  Sing.  1  com.  The  prefixed  N  occasionally  has  Hhirik,  wSTl'X 
Ezek.  20:  36,  1  Sam.  12:  7,  UiS'^X  Ezek.  14:  3,  nipSX,  ir^^Si?  but  133S. 

Plur.  fern.  Tsere  rarely  remains  in  the  second  syllable  ~;"'^"ri  Euth 
1 :  13,  being,  as  in  the  Piel  preterite,  commonly  changed  to  Pattalih  before 
the  concurring  consonants,  n;bixri  Jer.  24:  2,  so  with  a  pause  accent, 
njnsian  Isa.  13:  16  K'ri,  Zech.  14:  2  K'ri,  f^:05";r!  Isa.  28:  3;  the  first,  as 
the  original  form,  is,  however,  placed  in  the  paradigm. 

d.  Imperative.  Ewald  regards  'l^Sp?  Isa.  43:  9,  Joel  4:  11,  sil^S  Jer. 
50:  5,  as  imperatives  without  the  usual  ti  prosthetic;  Bottcher  as  preterites 
used  in  a  precative  sense;  both  assumptions  appear  to  be  needless  and  un- 
warranted. 

e.  Participle.  In  1  Sam.  15:  9  iiT3p3  contemptible,  is  in  form  a  Niphal 
participle  from  the  noun  Hin'a  contempt. 

PIEIi. 

§  92.  a.  The  intensive  species  is  usually  formed  by  doubling  the  second 
radical;  in  b^33  Ezek.  28:  23,  and  the  passive  form  bBiON  the  third  radical 
is  doubled  instead,  an  expedient  resorted  to  repeatedly  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs 
and  occasionally  in  Ayin  guttural.  In  "^S^irnBlI  Ps.  88:  17  both  radicals  are 
doubled;  the  entire  second  .syllable  is  repeated  in  "in"!TO  Ps.  38:  11,  'n^Tari 
Lam.  2:  11,  1 :  20  a  passive  form,  as  shown  by  the  Hhateph-Kamets,  §  82. 
5.  b  (3),  and  in  iiariQIiN  Hos.  4:  18,  which  is  probably  to  be  read  as  one 
word,  §  43.  6;  according  to  the  division  in  the  Massoretic  text,  ^idli  is  a 
separate  word,  and  is  the  imperative  of  2^^  to  give,  though  this  is  always 
elsewhere  pointed  ^idn.  In  ri^S^S^  Ps.  45:  3,  the  first  syllable  might  seem 
to  be  repeated;  but  as  such  a  formation  would  be  unexampled,  it  is  more 
probably  a  passive  (hence  o  under  the  first  letter)  of  tls'^S"',  which  redupli- 
cates the  last  syllable  of  !-!S';  =  ^S"i  §  170. 

b.  Intensity  may  likewise  be  denoted  without  a  reduplication  by  insert- 
ing the  long  vowel  Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  root.  This  is  often 
done  in  Ayin  doubled  verbs,  but  only  in  the  following  instances  in  others, 
pref.  "^n:"nii  l  Sam.  21:  3,  cnilj  Isa.  40:  24,  sii-iT  Ps.  77:  18,  iniid  Isa, 
10:  13  fut.  lyb":  Hos.  13:  3  inf.  abs.  iih  and  I'lli  Isa.  59:  13,  inf.  const. 
nip-ria  Am.  5:  n,  part.  '^•JSti:^  Job  9:  15,  "^idlba  Ps.  101:  5  K'thibh.  These 
are  called  Poel  forms,  and  those  in  the  preceding  paragraph  Pilel,  Pulal, 
Pealal,  etc.  to  denote  their  peculiar  formation.  They  ai-e  in  reality,  however, 
only  modified  forms  of  the  Piel,  whose  signification  they  share. 

c.  Preterite  Sing.  3  masc.  The  original  Pattahh  of  the  first  syllable 
§  82.  5.  b  (3)  is  preserved  in  "^3^3  Gen.  41:  51.     The  second  syllable  has 


128  ETYMOLOGY.  §  93 

Seghol  in  nan  (in  pause  najn),  -iss,  or^s  (twice  022),  Pattalih  in  T:^X,  bVs 
C^'rij.  in  pause),  pin,  s'fs,  w'^p,  n;fp,  Cil'j  (in  pause  m^y-^  Isa.  19:  21),  y^'V, 
and  before  Makkeph  in  "1B^,  "^|^  ('^pl?  in  pause);  a  appears  likewise  in 
the  pausal  form  n'-isp  Mic.  1:  7.  The  Tsere  is  always  retained  in  the  infini- 
tive construct  and  future,  and  with  the  exception  of  j'is  Ps.  55:  10,  in  the 
imperative;  though  throughout  the  species  it  is  shortened  to  Seghol  upon 
losing  the  accent,  T]^3p  Deut.  30:  3,  "^^p  Ex.  13:  2,  -D^i^:-^  Deut.  7:  10. 

d.  Infinitive.  The  primitive  form  of  the  infinitive  absolute  is  of  rare 
occurrence,  e.  g.  ns:'  Ps.  118:  18,  NSp  1  Kin.  19:  10,  SSI  Ex.  21:  19,  Tli^B 
Josh.  24:  10.  Most  commonly  it  has  Tsere  in  the  second  syllable  like  the 
infinitive  construct,  13X  Jer.  12:  17,  Tab  Jer.  32:  33,  a|"a  Jer.  39:  18,  ]^ap 
Mic.  2:  12,  b|'^  Ex.  21:  36;  and  in  one  instance  it  has  Hhirik  in  the  first 
syllable  like  tlie  preterite  I'XJ  2  Sam.  12:  14.  There  is  no  need  of  assum- 
ing a  similar  form  for  the  infinitive  construct  in  y^U  Lev.  14:  43,  which  can 
readily  be  explained  as  a  preterite.  Tsere  of  the  construct  is  shortened  to 
Seghol  before  Makkeph,  ""i2'^  Isa.  59:  13,  or  on  the  recession  of  the  accent 
pns  Gen.  39:  14,  17,  and  in  one  instance  besides,  'c'Hb  Judg.  5:  8.  There 
are  a  few  examples  of  the  construct  infinitive  with  a  feminine  termination, 
nn&;:i  Lev.  26:  18,  nnaT  Ps.  147:  1,  n:|^  Isa.  6:  13,  T|np^^  Ezek.  16:  52. 

e.  Future  Sing.  1  com.  X  is  commonly  prefixed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh; 
it  has,  however,  the  diphthongal  Hhateph-Seghol  in  irnTN  Lev.  26:  33, 
§  60.  3.  b,  and  draws  to  itself  the  full  vowel  which  has  hence  arisen  to  a 
preceding  1,  in  tS'ns'DS'l  Zech.  7:  14  for  dnsOXI,  §  60.  3.  c. 

Plur.  2  and  3  fern.  Tsere  under  the  second  radical  is  sometimes  changed 
to  Pattahh,  though  not  with  the  same  frequency  as  in  the  Niphal,  il3cii"in 
Isa.  13:  18,  but  nj-isnpi  Job  27:  4,  and  in  pause  Prov.  24:  2. 

PUAL. 

§  93.  a.  Of  the  vowels  proper  to  the  first  syllable  of  the  passive,  §  82. 
5.  b  (3),  Pual  ordinarily  has  m,  which  is  preferred  before  a  doubled  con- 
sonant d|'J,  §  61.  5,  and  Hophal  o  before  concurrent  consonants  "^t^i^-  This 
distinction  is  not  steadfastly  adhered  to,  however,  and  Pual  occasionally 
appears  with  Kamets  Hhatuph,  n'hs  Ezek.  16:  4,  tTi'n'^  Nah.  3:  7,  1I3  Ps. 
72:  20,  !l&3  Pa.  80:  11,  Prov.  24:  31,  iyi^'n'',  Ps.  94:  20,  ti^^^-Q -passim.  This 
seems  to  furnish  the  best  explanation  of  the  disputed  words  ^nsipi  or  tifi^nn 
Ps.  62:  4,  •^ir^D-a  Ps.  101:  5  K'ri,  in!i:xn  Job  20:  26.  Gesenins  regards  these 
as  Piel  forms  with  (.)  lengthened  to  (^)  on  the  omission  of  Daghesh  forte, 
§  59.  a;  but  the  absence  of  Methegh,  which  Gesenius  inserts  without 
authority,  shows  the  vowel  to  be  0  not  a.  Others  think  that  inli^xn  is  the 
Kal  future  for  iltibsxh,  the  vowel  being  attracted  to  the  guttural  from  the 
previous  letter,  §  60.  3.  c.  There  is  no  difficulty,  however,  in  regarding 
them  all  as  Pual  forms,  and  translating  severally  may  you  be  slain,  armed 
with  the  tovffue  (of  a  slanderer),  shall  be  made  to  consume  him.  In  Ps.  62:  4 
the  reading  of  Ben  Naphtali  ^TXSnT}  is  probably  to  be  preferred  to  that  of 
Ben  Asher,  which  is  found  in  the  common  text;    the  former  is  a  Piel  and 


§94 


EEMAEKS  ON  THE  PEEFECT  VEEBS.  129 


has  an  active  sense:  (how  long)  icill  ye  slay  or  murder?  In  Ps.  101:  5  the 
K'thibh  is  ''Spiba  an  active  Poel  form,  slandering. 

h.  The  vowel  m  of  the  first  syllable  is  occasionally  written  with  Vav, 
njilt  Ezek.  16:  34,  ;ilb^in  Ps.  78:  63,  l|^"i  Judg.  18:  29,  13:  8,  Job  5:  7,  Vns^ 
Ezek.  27:  19,  but  mostly  without  it. 

c.  Preterite  Sing.  3  masc.  An  instance  of  paragogic  ti  appended  to 
the  preterite  is  found  in  I'lfebs  Ezek.  31: 15,  unless  it  may  better  be  regarded 
as  a  verbal  adjective. 

d.  Infinitive.  The  absolute  form  occurs  in  n'fa  Gen.  40:  15;  there  ia 
no  example  of  the  construct. 

e.  Participle.  As  )i'o^_,  T\%'S>2,  1|5tra;  in  a  few  instances  the  initial  a 
is  omitted,  bsx  Ex.  3:  2  for  bkx'Q,  n^V2  Kin.  2:  10  for  n^sb^,  nu^nb  (with 
Daghesh-forte  euphonic)  Ezek.  21:  15,  i6,  Qiiii^^'i  Eccles.  9:  12  for  U'^^p^'O, 
§  59.  a.  Some  of  the  forms  in  which  this  has  been  alleged  may  however  be 
better  explained  as  preterites. 

HIPHIL. 

§  94.  a.  Preterite.  The  first  vowel  is  usually  Hhirik  but  occasionally 
Seghol,  e.  g.  Cli^bsn  1  Sam.  25:  7,  particularly  in  Pe  guttural  and  a  few 
Lamedh  He  verbs.  Once  X  is  prefixed  instead  of  M,  :''r}bN5X  Isa.  63:  3;  in 
Isa.  19:  6  ^ir^DTxri  is  not  a  double  Hiphil  with  both  S<  and  h  prefixed,  but 
is  a  denominative  from  JiJIN,  a  derivative  of  nit,  which  does  not  indeed 
occur  in  its  simple  form  but  is  justified  by  the  analogy  of  2T5X  from  2^3. 
n  takes  the  place  of  ii  in  ''Plbji'nri  Hos.  11:  3;  so  likewise  the  future  SThnnFi 
Jer.  12 :  5,  and  participle  iTinnia  Jer.  22  :  15,  though  the  corresponding 
preterite  is  rrnrtirt  Neh.  3:  20. 

Sing.  3  masc.  The  i  of  the  second  syllable  is  almost  always  written 
with  Yodh,  rarely  without  it,  e.  g.  b'njn  1  Sam.  12:  24,  but  in  every  other 
place  b'^Til-i.  So  inf.  const,  i^'h^'^'n  1  Sam.  1:6;  fut.  lanp;;!  Lev.  27:  14,  Ti^aS 
2  Kin.  10:  5,  ilsbyDn  1  Sam.  1:  7;  part,  b'ia-a  Ps.  18:  51,  dlisp  Job  11:  3. 

b.  Infinitive.  Absolute.  The  Tsere  of  the  second  syllable  which  before 
Makkeph  is  shortened  to  Seghol  "'isri  Prov.  24:  23,  28:  21,  is  mostly  written 
without  1,  thus  b'nan,  i2Dn,  ^abn,  bc?ori,  ispii,  lanpn,  ascri,  "bcin,  though 

sometimes  with  it  T^aTJJri  Am.  9:  8  but  itPv?  Isa.  14:' 23,  b'^Sbii  and  bsirn, 
twice  tiiST^n,  nine  times  didn,  I'^iip^i,  'T^psfi.  Hhirik  in  this  syllable  is 
rare  and  exceptional,  b'^fe^an  iEzek.  21:  31,  I'^i^rt  Josh.  7:7.  K  is  prefixed 
instead  of  n  in  tnbisii<  Jer.  25:  3  and  T^^asi!  Gen.  41:  43,  provided  the  latter 
is  a  Hebrew  and  not  a  Coptic  word. 

Construct.  The  second  vowel  is  commonly  Hhirik  written  with  '', 
'25'''']^'!?)  "'^i^"^  rarely  and  as  an  exception  without  "i,  "la'^b  Isa.  23:  11,  or 
with  Tsere  bnili  Deut.  32:  8,  ^ibl^b  Deut.  26:  12,  Neh.  10:  39,  T\Or^  Jer. 44: 19, 
■jsbb  Dan.  11:  35.  In  a  few  instances  the  first  vowel  is  Hhirik  as  in  the 
preterite  T^l^a^n  Deut.  7:  24,  28:  48,  Joh.  11:  14,  1  Kin.  15:  29,  'fi'Ti  Jer. 
50:  34,  nD-in-in  Jer.  51:  33,  rnkp^ii  Lev.  14:  43.  The  initial  il  is  mostly 
retained  after  prefixed  prepositions,    though   it  is  sometimes  rejected,   as 

9 


130  ETYMOLOGY.  §  95,  96 

niap^  Am.  8:  4  but  ri'^apn^  Ps.  8:  3,  Ti"3  once  but  ^T'ttTati^  fifteen  times, 
n™b  Isa.  3 :  8. 

c.  FuTORE  Sing.  Tsere  is  substituted  forHhirik  in  T^aPi  Ex.  19:3,  h'^^'P'2 
2  Chron.  5:  2,  and  without  Yodh  bh^':  1  Kin.  8:  1,  ?|p^  Num.  22:  19,  '-ik^i 
1  Sam.  14:  36,  p.inx  Isa.  42:  6. 

Plur.  In  a  very  few  instances  Hhirik  is  rejected  upon  the  addition  of 
the  masculine  phiral  termination  ^p^^^^  1  Sam.  14:  22,  31:  2,  ^3'J"'!?  Jer. 
9 :  2.  There  is  no  example  of  this  without  the  presence  of  Vav  conversive 
unless  it  be  -l-isriri  Job  19:  3,  which  may  be  regarded  as  Kal. 

d.  Imperative  Sing.  masc.  The  second  syllable  usually  has  Tsere  with- 
out Yodh  •Jjbrn,  T\^':i^,  and  before  Makkeph,  Seghol  -i=pn  Job  22:  21,  — isn, 

1  Sam.  23:  11,  "1230  Isa.  64:  8.  There  are  a  very  few  examples  with  Hhirik 
in  pause,  t^^S'in  Ps.  94:  1,  to  which  some  would  add  ^^1iI^i^  Isa.  43:  8,  but 
see  Alexander,  n'^i'in  Prov.  19:  25,  X'^in  Jer.  17:  18. 

e.  Participle.  In  N^ria  Ps.  135:  7,  Tsere  is  taken  in  place  of  Hhirik 
upon  the  recession  of  the  accent ;  '^^G^  Isa.  53 :  3  is  not  a  participle  but  a 
noun,  Alexander  in  loc.  Hhirik  is,  in  a  few  exceptional  cases  occurring  in 
the  later  books,  rejected  in  the  plural,  t^ilpJ^"?  Zech.  3:  7  for  C^^-^blri^, 
D'^i'bri^  Jer.  29:  8,    tr^yV'q  2  Chron.  28:  23,    Din^fl"?  1  Chron.  15:  24   K'ri, 

2  Chron.  7 :  6  K'ri.     Comp.  Chald.  "pi?^np  Dan.  3  :  25. 

HOPHAL. 

§  95.  a.  The  first  vowel,  though  mostly  Kamets  Hhatuph  "T^^aJn,  'I'^^^n, 
nis^tJn,  is  occasionally  Kibbuts,  both  vowels  even  appearing  in  the  same 
verb,  ns'rn  Ezek.  32:  32,  ni:3'i3vj  ver.  19,  33':3'2  2  Kin.  4:  32;  T^:y>}  Dan. 
8:  11,  ri;5rn  isa.  14:  19,  '^'£yVT\  Ezek.  16:  5,  'T|^':3t3  2  Sam.  20:  21;  :^:j3prt 
Lev.  6:  15,  -i-jpia  Mai.  1:  11,  '^il^^J,  Ci-^ii^S^;  I3''^i^'=^,  P^l^.  ^^^P^  Ezek. 
29:  18.  ' 

6.  Preterite.  In  "^P^'ififi  am  1  obliged  to  leave?  Judg.  9:  9.  11.  13,  the 
characteristic  n  is  rejected  after  H  interrogative. 

c.  Infinitive.  The  absolute  has  Tsere  in  the  second  syllable,  b^Hfi  Ezek. 
16:  4,  1?n  Josh.  9:  24.   The  construct  has  Pattahh,  "iWii  Ezr.  3:  11. 

d.  Imperative.  This  mood  occurs  twice,  rtisiijrt  Ezek.  32  :  19,  ^135^ 
Jer.  49 :  8. 

e.  Participle.  In  niS'Sprip  Ezek.  46:  22  M  remains  after  the  preforma- 
tive  a. 

HITHPAEIi. 

§  96.  a.  Preterite.  In  two  instances  HX  is  prefixed  instead  of  rrt,  viz., 
"lannx  2  Chron.  20:  35,  iilib'inax  Ps.  76:  6.  In  the  verb  1;r3  Daghesh-forte 
.is  omitted  in  the  second  radical  and  the  previous  vowel  lengthened  §  59.  cu 
^"HpBnn,  InpBn-;  Judg.  20:  15.  17,  'ipsn";  Judg.  21:  9,  in  addition  to  which 
the  vowel  of  the  prefixed  syllable  is  o  in  'I'ips"!^  Num.  1 :  47,  2:  33,  26:  62, 
1  Kin.  20:  27.  In  three  verbs  upon  the  assimilation  of  n  to  the  first  radical, 


§  97  PAEAGOGIC  rUTUEE,  ETC.  131 

the  prefix  takes  w,  §  61.  5,  nsp^H  (the  accentuation  is  unusual)  Isa.  34:  6, 
.  MXTS-^ri  Deut.24:  4  (but  in  the  future  always  Nri;?'^  Lev.  21:  1  and  repeatedly 
elsewhere),  D33fi  {inf.  const.)  Lev.  13:  55.  56.  These  are  sometimes  called 
Hothpaal  and  regarded  as  passives  of  Hithpael.  "Where  both  forms  exist 
in  the  same  verb,  however,  as  in  IpQ  and  xii:,  there  appears  to  be  no 
distinction  in  their  meaning;  they  seem  rather  to  have  arisen  from  a  dis- 
position to  give  to  the  Hithpael,  where  it  has  a  passive  signification,  §  80.2, 
the  vowels  of  a  proper  passive  species,  §  82.  5.  h.  (3).  In  Vr>;rtn  Jer.  25:  16, 
!|d?.;;^n"i  Jer.  46:  8  (elsewhere  vi,"i;;n";),  and  !")'Sb"3  Isa.  52:5,  o  prolonged  from 
it  on  account  of  the  absence  of  Daghesh-forte,  is  for  a  like  reason  given  to 
the  first  radical. 

h.  The  last  vowel  of  the  preterite,  infinitive  construct,  future,  impera- 
tive and  participle,  is  Tsere  written  without  Yodh,  which  before  Makkeph 
is  shortened  to  Seghol,  "tJ^prri  Isa.  30:  29,  "Ti^tir^!  Gen.  6:  9,  "Cbw  Job 
6:  16.  Frequently,  however,  Pattahh  is  used,  or,  with  a  pause  accent, 
Kamets,  Ciapnri  pret.,  p^tTTi  pret.  and  imper.  (but  inf.  const,  and  part,  with 
c,  fut.  a  and  e),  bs^rx,  PJ^J^J,  'd^irn";,  :')'N3^  Isa.  52:  5.  Pattahh  is  also 
sometimes  found  in  the  feminine  plural  of  the  future,  nssffirn  Zech.  6:  7 
but  n:r5ri":;tn  Lam.  4:  l,  where  some  copies  have  n3:Eri":3ri.  Hhirik  occurs 
instead  of  Pattahh  in  the  preterites,  ^nlp'qsinrfi ,  "^rp^J^nni.  Ezek.  38:  23, 
tin'r^prii'l  Lev.  11:  44,  20:  7,  each  of  which  has  Vav  conversive,  throwing 
the  accent  more  strongly  on  the  final  syllable. 

c.  There  is  no  example  of  the  infinitive  absolute.  The  infinitive  con- 
struct once  has'a  feminine  ending  n!i"i3ririn  Dan.  11:  23,  comp.  §  128. 


Paeagogic  and  Apocopated  Futuee  and  Impeeative, 

§  97.  The  paucity  of  moods  in  Hebrew  is  partially 
compensated  by  modifications  of  the  future,  known  as  the 
paragogic  and  apocopated  futures. 

1.  The  paragogic  or  intentional  is  formed  from  the 
ordinary  future  by  appending  the  termination  Sl^  to  the 
first  person  singular  or  plural,  and  in  a  very  few  instances 
to  the  third  person  singular,  thus  converting  it  from  a 
simple  declaration  of  futurity  to  an  expression  of  desire 
or  determination,  ^'^'^rs  I  shall  keep,  TTpyL^_  I  will  surely 
keep  or  let  me  keep,  Ps.  39:  2 ;  njjPDD  let  us  break,  riS^ViTD  let 
us  cast  away,  Ps.  2:  3;  HCT^  let  him  hasten,  Isa.  5:  19. 

a.  The  name  "intentional"  proposed  by  Eottcher  seems  more  appro- 
priate than  "cohortative",  which  though  commonly  adopted  is  only  applic- 
able to  the  plural  forms.    The  third  person  of  the  paragogic  future  occurs 


132  ETYMOLOGY.  §  97 

besides  the  example  just  given,  in  nxirP  let  it  come  Isa.  5:  19,  tnSVin  he  it 
dark  (by  some  explained  as  a  noun,  darkness)  Job  11:  17,  M.i^^t?"?  *"«y  '*« 
accept  (as  fat),  or,  according  to  Kimchi,  may  he  reduce  to  ashes,  Ps.  20:  4, 
nsSn  Prov.  1:  20,  8:  3,  and  after  Vav  conversive  <^3^"til5  Ezek.  23:  20,  and 
ver.  16  K'ri.  It  has  also  been  suspected  in  nnipi  Lev.  21:  5  K'thibh. 

b.  Instead  of  n^,  n  is  appended  in  tiX'^pXl  1  Sam.  28:  15,  iiith"]  Ps. 
20:  4,  §  63.  1.  c;  so  in  the  imperative  ny^  or  n>"n  Prov.  24:  14. 

2.  The  apocopated  or  jussive  future  is  an  abbreviation 
of  the  second  or  third  person  singular  and  expresses  a 
wish  or  command,  or  with  a  negative,  dissuasion  or  pro- 
hibition. In  the  perfect  verb  it  has  a  separate  form  only 
in  the  Hiphil  species,  the  ■•.  of  the  ultimate  being  changed 
to  (.),  or  before  Makkeph  to  (..),  p^3l^  he  will  cause  to 
cleave,  pial!!  may  he  or  let  him  cause  to  cleave;  b^Sicri  thou 
wilt  understand,  bSilJSn  thou  mayest  understand  or  under- 
stand thou,  Dan.  9:  25,  "DbirFi'bj^  may  it  not  or  let  it  not 
rule,  Ps.  119:  133.  In  some  classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  as 
in  the  Ayin-Yav  and  particularly  the  Lamedh-He,  it  is 
used  in  other  species  still. 

a.  The  2nd,  pers.  of  the  Jussive  is  rare  except  with  Vx.  The  1st.  pers. 
of  the  future  is  abbreviated  in  a  very  few  instances,  1  Sam.  14:  36,  2  Sam. 
17:  12,  Job  23:  9.  11,  Isa.  41:  23  K'thibh,  28. 

h.  The  paragogic  and  apocopated  futures,  which  have  been  aptly  de- 
nominated voluntatives,  may  be  regarded  as  mutually  supplementary,  and 
as  forming  together  something  like  a  complete  Optative  or  Subjunctive 
mood.  The  apocopated  future  has,  it  is  true,  no  separate  form  for  the 
second  fern.  sing,  or  the  second  and  third  pers.  plur.,  in  which  the  verb  has 
terminal  inflections,  but  it  may  be  regarded  as  coinciding  in  these  with  the 
ordinary  future,  except  that  it  never  has  the  final  ").  See  Ruth  2:  8  and 
comp.  Deut.  20:  3  with  1 :  29.  So  in  those  species  in  which  it  is  indistinguish- 
able from  the  ordinary  future,  it  may  yet  be  regarded  as  included  under  it. 
Neither  the  apocopated  nor  the  paragogic  futures  occur  in  the  strictly 
passive  species,  viz.,  the  Pual  and  Hophal,  self-determination  and  command 
both  implying  that  the  subject  is  the  originator  of  the  action.  The  more 
flexible  Arabic  has  three  varieties  of  the  future  in  addition  to  the  ordinary 
one,  to  express  as  many  modifications  or  moods. 

c.  The  apocopated  future  derives  its  name  from  the  apocopation  of  the 
final  letter  by  which  it  is  characterized  in  n"b  verbs;  the  brevity  of  its 
form  is  adapted  to  the  energy  and  rapid  utterance  of  a  command.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  speaker  dwells  upon  the  word  expressive  of  his  own 
desire  or  determination,  thus  giving  rise  to  the  prolonged  form  of  tha 
paragogic  future.     The  appended  t\^  may  perhaps  be  identical  with  a  like 


§  98  PABAGOGIC  FUTUEE,  ETC.  133 

termination  added  to  nouns  to  indicate  motion  or  direction,  denoting  as  it 
does  the  direction  of  the  speaker's  will  or  wishes  towards  that  which  the 
verh  expresses. 

§  98.  1.  Paragogic  H^  is  sometimes  appended  to  the 
masculine  singular  of  the  imperative,  softening  the  com- 
mand into  an  earnest  entreaty  or  expression  of  strong 
desire,  :f'h'3  hear  (thou),  ni^pir  oh,  hear!  or  pray,  hear! 
'D^Jijj'n  listen,  riTirpn  ^:>ray,  listen!  The  addition  of  this 
vowel  to  the  imperative  and  to  the  future  causes,  as  in 
the  regular  inflections  of  the  paradigm,  §  85.  2.  a.  (2), 
the  rejection  of  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  syllable,  except 
in  the  Hiphil  where  '',  remains  in  the  future  and  is 
restored  in  the  imperative.  Li  the  Kal  imperative  this 
rejection  occasions  the  concurrence  of  two  vowelless  con- 
sonants, the  first  of  which  must  accordingly  take  a  short 
vowel,  §  61.  1;  if  the  rejected  vowel  was  Hholem  this 
will  be  Kamets-Hhatuph,  otherwise  it  will  be  the  briefest 
of  the  vowels,  Hhirik,  nf?,  Th'V  Jer.  49:  11;  "^DT,  r»nDT 
2  Chron.  6:  42,  'ibt,  rh'ZXD  Gen!  39:  7.  12.  AVhen  the 
vowel  of  the  second  radical  is  restored  by  a  pause  ac- 
cent the  inserted  vowel  falls  away  JHlTT  Deut.  33:  23, 
m:'D  1  Kin.  13:  7;  so  in  the  i<"b  form  nN^n  Ps.  41:  5.  In 

T  AT  t:  '  T    T     : 

the  Hiphil  bbpH  becomes  nb^DpH. 

a.  In  a  few  instances  the  vowel-letter  remains  in  the  K'thibh  though 
invariably  thrown  out  in  the  K'ri,  e.  g.,  nSIIU  K'thibh,  •iS'iS  K'ri  Ps.  26;  2, 
T^^^h■0  K'thibh,  n^3'3  K'ri  Judg.  9:8;  n^lplTXT  K'thibh,  iniiJ.TyN1  K'ri  Ezr. 
8:  25;  ni:lpax  K'thibh,  lni:;?dx  K'ri  Isa.  18:  4.  This  may  not  indicate, 
however,  the  retention  of  the  full  vowel  but  only  of  an  audible  remnant  of 
it,  §  13.  a,  which  is  likewise  attested  by  the  occasional  appearance  of  Hha- 
teph  Kamets,  "np'i'N  1  Kin.  19:  20,  nij^'^XI  Dan.  8:  13  (in  some  copies)  or 
Hhateph  Pattahh  ti^p'ixi  Ezr.  8:  26,  Jer.  32:  9,  and  by  the  fact  that  the 
resulting  Sh'va,  even  when  simple,  is  alwav"  ■>'ocal,  §  22.  a.  (1).  Occasion- 
ally Kamets-Hhatuph  is  found  in  the  paragogic  imperative  when  the  vowel 
of  the  ordinary  imperative  is  Pattahh;  thus,  3jp  Lev.  9:  7,  1^3"})^  Ps.  69:  19, 
and  on  the  contrary,  nn3'2  Gen.  25:  31,  fiit.  nsp"^  Ex.  21:  7,  n'la?  (with 
Daghesh  separative)  Ps.  141 :  3,  though  Delitzsch  regards  it  as  a  noun. 

2.  As  the  imperative  is  itself  a  shortened  form  there 
is  httle  room  for  further  abbreviation;  it  sometimes,  how-' 


134  ETYMOLOGY.  §  99 

ever,  suffers  apocopation  of  the  final  n^  of  the  feminine 
plural,  ]^b^  Gen.  4:  23  for  rij^JTr,  §  61.  2,  ",k'^p  Ex.  2:  20 
for  ns^^'ip,  §  60.  3.  c,  and  in  Lameclh  He  verbs  of  final  n_ 
of  the  masculine  singular,  ~Tfn  2  Kin.  6:18  for  nSH  Ezek, 
6:  11,  bs  Ps.  119:  18  for  m^5;  X\y}  Deut.  9:  14  for  nby] 
Judg.  11: 37,  but  without  any  evident  change  of  meaning. 


Vav  Conversive  or  Consecutive. 

§  99.  1.  The  primary  tenses  the  preterite  and  the 
future  are  supplemented  by  two  secondary  tenses,  formed 
in  a  peculiar  maimer  by  what  is  called  Vav  Conversive 
(Tj^sn  11)  or  Yav  Consecutive.  This  prefix  has  the  remark- 
able eff"ect,  from  which  its  name  is  derived,  of  convertmg 
the  ordinary  future  into  a  preterite  and  the  ordinary 
preterite  into  a  future.  The  following  appear  to  be  the 
reasons  of  this  singular  phenomenon.  Past  and  future 
are  relative  and  depend  for  their  signification  in  any 
given  case  upon  the  point  of  time  from  which  they  are 
reckoned.  This  may  be  the  moment  of  speaking,  when 
all  anterior  to  that  moment  will  be  past,  and  all  posterior 
to  it  future.  Or  by  some  conventional  method  under- 
stood between  the  sjoeaker  and  his  hearers,  an  ideal  pre- 
sent may  be  fixed  distinct  from  the  real  present  and  the 
measurements  of  past  and  future  made  from  the  former. 
Now  Vav  Consecutive  placed  before  a  future  indicates 
that  its  tense  is  to  be  reckoned  not  from  the  actual  pre- 
sent but  from  the  time  denoted  by  some  previous  word, 
whether  verb,  noun,  or  adverb.  And  when  the  stand- 
point is  thus  taken  in  the  past,  events  may  be  described 
as  futm-e  with  reference  to  it,  though  they  have  actually 
taken  place  at  the  time  of  narration.  Vav  is  properly 
the  copula  mid;  when  thib  is  prefixed  to  the  future  for 
the  purpose  already  designated,  it  is  followed  by  Pattahli 


§  99  VAV  CONSECUTIVE.  135 

and  Daghesh-forte,  which  give  to  it  the  force  of  and  then 
or  and  so,  indicating  that  what  follows  is  the  sequel  of 
what  precedes.  Consequently  a  narration  begun  in  the 
preterite  may  be  continued  in  the  future  with  Vav  Con- 
secutive, the  opening  words  fixing  the  initial  point  from 
which  all  that  come  after  proceed  in  regular  succession; 
and  the  future  so  employed  is  converted  into  what  may 
be  called  a  continuative  preterite.  Thus,  in  the  account 
of  the  creation  in  Gen.  1,  the  original  condition  of  things 
is  described  in  the  preterite,  ver.  2,  the  earth  tvas  TT\'''r[ 
without  form  and  void.  The  subsequent  scene  is  then  sur- 
veyed from  this  point.  The  next  statement  is  accordingly 
made  by  a  future  with  Vav  Consecutive,  ver.  3,  ^'-2Sh 
and  God  said,  in  its  primitive  import,  and  then  God  says 
or  will  say,  his  speaking  being  future  to  the  state  of 
things  previously  described.  This  fixes  a  new  stand- 
point from  which  the  next  step  in  the  process  is  a  fresh 
advance;  it  is  hence  followed  by  another  future  with  Yav 
Consecutive,  ver.  4,  t5*^^1  and  he  saiu;  and  so  on,  b"i^^1  and 
he  divided,  ver.  5,  5^'np^.!]  and  he  called,  etc. 

a.  The  nature  of  this  prefix  is  more  precisely  expressed  by  calling  it 
Vav  Consecutive,  as  Ewald  and  others  propose.  But  as  Vav  Conversive  iS 
the  name  in  common  use,  and  as  this  sufficiently  characterizes  its  most 
striking  effect,  there  is  no  impropriety  in  retaining  it.  There  have  been 
various  conjectures  respecting  its  origin.  Some  have  fancied  that  1  is  an 
abbreviation  of  the  verb  iilfi  tvas,  hence  'ipk'^l  he  was  or  it  was  (so  that) 
he  will  say  i.  e.  he  was  about  to  say  or  was  saying,  which  is  then  likened 
to  the  Arabic  combination  of  the  preterite  of  the  substantive  verb  with  the 
future  tense  to  express  past  action;  but  1  evidently  has  the  sense  of  the  con- 
junction and,  "i^N''1  does  not  mean  he  said,  but  and  he  said.  Others  have  re- 
garded it  as  an  abbreviation  of  ii^ni  and  he  was;  Ewald  of  TNI  and  then. 
Schultens,  Instit.  p.  424,  conjectured  that  'T9S<''1  may  be  for  "i^x-ni.,  by 
§  53.  3;  rt  prefixed  to  a  noun  is  the  definite  article,  and  points  it  out  as 
one  previously  known;  its  use  in  this  particular  case  might  be  to  define 
the  time  of  the  action  of  the  verb  before  which  it  stands  by  pointing  it  out 
as  known  from  what  preceded.  The  vowel  of  this  prefix  would  upon  this 
hypothesis  be  analogous  both  in  its  origin  and  its  efi'ects  to  the  augment  e 
in  Greek,  or  a  in  Sanskrit,  by  which  a  preterite  is  formed  from  a  present 
or  a  future,  tvtttu,  stvtttov;  Tv\pca,  ervipa,  and  which  is  traced  by  Bopp  to 


136  ETYMOLOGY.  §  99 

a  pronominal  root  having  a  demonstrative  sense,  Vergleichende  Grammatik 
pp.  786  ff.  The  fact  that  the  Samaritan  Pentateuch  sometimes  substitutes 
n  for  1  consecutive  might  seem  to  lend  confirmation  to  this  theory  of  its 
derivation.  But  as  n  stands  with  equal  frequency  for  1  copulative,  and  1 
for  the  article  ii,  it  is  probable  that  these  commutations  are  to  be  classed 
with  the  other  numerous  inaccuracies  of  this  edition.  Perhaps  the  best 
suggestion  is  that  of  Eodiger,  who  attributed  no  inherent  significance  to 
the  vowel,  but  thought  that  it  was  attached  to  Vav  Consecutive  on  account 
of  the  emphasis  of  its  peculiar  use. 

2.  Vav  Consecutive,  it  has  already  been  stated,  is  pre- 
fixed to  the  future  with  Pattahh  and  Daghesh-forte  in  the 
following  letter,  yiip^l,  ^D^^'^^nV,  1^31.  If  the  first  letter 
of  the  future  be  Yodh  with  Sh'va,  Daghesh  is  commonly 
omitted,  §  25,  but  rarely  if  it  be  p,  and  never  if  it  be  H, 
since  its  removal  in  this  case  would  change  the  sound  of 
the  letter  by  restoring  its  aspiration,  ^!iLl']'1,  '^SZD";1  but 
-cl'jril,  "^BCSI.  Before  U5  of  the  first  person  singular,  which 
cannot  receive  Daghesh,  §  23.  1,  Pattahh  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets,  §  60.  4,  1]b5<1,  ^nnj^tX  In  the  Hiphil  \  is,  with 
few  exceptions,  e.  g.  Tj'i'ri^^  Ps.  105:  28,  compressed  to  (J 
as  in  the  apocopated  future,  ntjp^l,  b'^Ij^ril,  and  before 
Makkeph  it  is  shortened  to  (..)  ''10\  In  the  first  person 
singular,  however,  *'.  remams  in  the  Hiphil,  and  a 
paragogic  H^  is  not  infrequently  appended  in  all  the 
species,  e.  g.  tj^^^Ti^^^,  '^)ti^'^  or  ns^birt^l;  Th^^  or  iftNl; 
l^/JUJi^V,  ribbl2SV,  ^sn^^  or  rn::^^^^^;  paragogic  n  also 
occurs  though  more  rarely  in  the  first  pers.  plur.  HiubuSI 
Gen.  41:  11,  raksi,  nir)Dn31  Ezr.  8:  23,  r^^m  ver.  31." 

a.  The  tendency  to  abbreviation  produced  by  Vav  Consecutive  is  much 
more  apparent  in  some  classes  of  imperfect  verbs.  Thus,  final  ii  _  is  re- 
jected from  ST'b  verbs  as  in  the  apocopated  future  i^^^l,  ^^''J,  fii^"!,  ^l<'',y, 
the  accent  is  drawn  back  from  a  mixed  ultimate  to  a  simple  penult  in  the 
Kal  and  Hiphil  of  Ayin  doubled  verbs  and  of  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
for  their  first  or  second  radical,  in  consequence  of  which  the  vowel  of  the 
last  syllable,  if  long,  is  shortened,  §  64.  1,  no';',  n&^i;  bix-^,  ^=it'1;  :^'^, 
ailj^l;  3ii!:3'i^  ^lai'^l;  t>ip^,  Ci|5'jl;  d'^p^,  dj^'jl.  The  same  drawing  back  of  the 
accent  and  shortening  of  the  ultimate  syllable  occurs  in  the  Piel  of  the 
following  verbs,  whose  middle  radical  is  "l,  "'lii'^T,  ^'!!'^'^!)»  ^f^"^?  ^^^  ^'^^  "^ 
tlbO'^nJ  ^°  ^^  '^T^''^  ^^^-  2-  ^>  ^"^  *^®  Hithpaei  DSCrm  Dan.  2:  1.    It  oc- 


§  100  VAV  CONSECUTIVE.  137 

curs  also  in  the  Niphal  of  a  few  verbs,  which  form  the  exception,  however, 
not  the  rule,  ri:h_;),  tir\h\  tph^  or  t]bii^},  t^BW  but  2n3':i,  l?^*!!,  "1=53''^ 
"'i?I5'!?i  M?^*^'  ^^^'  '^^^  ^^^*  person  singular  is  mostly  exempted  from 
shortening  or  change  of  accent,  ^3X1,  ^'iix;;,  Qlp'J.'J  or  D-sX^,  Qipxi^,  though 
it  sometimes  suffers  apocopation  in  ii"^  verbs  Nl^Kl,  ''f^XI.  The  prolonged 
plural  ending  'jl  is  very  rarely  used  after  Vav  Consecutive;  it  does,  how- 
ever, occur,  e.  g.  '|ln"ipni  Deut.  1:  22,  ■)>inri?F!1  Deut.  4:  11,  ')>lin*1  Judg. 
11:  18. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  Vav  Consecutive  takes  Pattahh  before  N,  its 
vowel  being  conformed  to  the  compound  Sh'va,  which  follows,  e.  g.  liJ'^5^'^ 
Judg.  6:  9,  JinnrbST  2  Sam.  1:  10,  TiS?Xl  Ezek.  16:  10  but  ns?it;i  ver.  8, 
nSn^l  Job  30:  26,VliTrmi  Ps.  73:  16. 

§  100.  1.  Vav  Consecutive  prefixed  to  the  preterite 
makes  of  it  a  continuative  future  or  imperative,  by  con- 
necting with  it  the  idea  of  futurity  or  command  ex- 
pressed in  a  preceding  verb.  It  is  properly  the  conjunc- 
tion 1  and,  whose  pointing  it  takes,  its  pecuhar  force 
being  derived  from  its  connecting  power.  Accordingly, 
in  speaking  of  coming  events,  the  stand-point  is  first 
fixed  in  the  future  by  the  opening  words,  and  the  de- 
scription is  then  continued  by  the  preterite  with  Vav 
Consecutive.  Thus,  in  Samuel's  recital,  1  Sam.  10:  1 — 8, 
of  what  was  to  happen  to  Saul,  he  first  refers  the  whole 
to  the  future  by  the  word,  ver.  2,  ^ri^^^^  upon  thy  depart- 
ing, and  then  proceeds  with  preterites  with  Vav  prefixed, 
rjU^k^^  thou  shalt  find,  ^^535*1  and  they  shall  say,  ver.  3, 
rsbri'l  and  thou  shalt  pass  on,  etc.  etc.  In  Hke  manner  in- 
junctions begun  in  the  imperative  are  continued  in  the 
preterite  with  Vav  Consecutive.  Thus  the  Lord  directed 
Elijah,  1  Kin.  17:  3  T|b  (imper.)  go,  n^is^  (pret.)  and  turn, 
TpT\ZT\,  (pret.)  and  hide,  •"pn'l  (pret.)  and  it  shall  he. 

2.  This  prefix  commonly  has  the  efi'ect  of  removing 
the  accent  to  the  ultimate  in  those  forms  in  which  it 
ordinarily  stands  upon  the  penult;  and  if  the  penult  be 
a  long  mixed  syllable,  as  in  the  Kal  preterite  of  verbs 
with  Hholem,  it  will  in  consequence  be  shortened,  riVi^, 


138  ETYMOLOGY.  §  101 

a.  The  shifting  of  the  accent,  which  served  in  some  measure  to  indicate 
to  the  ear  the  alteration  in  the  sense,  takes  place  chiefly  in  the  following 
cases,  viz.: 

(1)  It  occurs  with  great  regularity  in  the  first  and  second  persons  sin- 
gular of  every  species,  P!3^f7  thou  hast  gone,  fjs^f^l  and  thou  shalt  go, 
■'fnabrtn  and  I  xvill  go,  so  )h"i2'i'i,  ''nb'iJiiT,  iri3|nnni,  though  irnrini  Zeph. 
1:  17,  except  in  X"b  and  ri"b  verbs,  where  the  accent  usually  remains  in 
its  original  position  although  the  usage  is  not  uniform,  "^n'^is^  Lev.  26 :  9, 
■^nxi^l  1  Kin.  18: 12,  n'la'iril  l  Chron.  4:  10,  '^n'^iriPiT^l-l'l  1  Sam.  15:  30,  "^nisni. 
Isa,  8:  17  but  n'^SS'i  Lev.  24:  5,  rX31  Gen.  6:  18,  "'n'^nsri'l  '^fl'^airi')  Lev.  26:  9J 
nxafil  Ex.  26 :  33.  In  the  first  person  plural  of  all  verbs  the  accent  generally 
remains  upon  the  penult,  ^linnTI  Ex.  8:  23,  :^33bni,  ^JPiibbl  Gen.  34:  17. 

(2)  It  occurs,  though  less  constantly,  in  the  third  feminine  singular  and 
third  plural  of  the  Hiphil  of  perfect  verbs,  and  of  the  various  species  of 
Ayin-Vav  and  Ayin-doubled  verbs,  n^i^ani  Ex.  26:  33,  nit'^nni  Lev.  15:  29. 
nnjl  Isa.  11:  2,  illpl,  n^ni.  Hab.  1:  8  but  >13'^3"::n"i  Ezek.  43:  24,  VdSI  Hab.  1:  8, 


Vekbs  with  Sutflxes. 

§  101.  Pronouns  are  frequently  suffixed  to  the  verbs 
of  which  they  are  the  object.  The  forms  of  the  suffixes 
have  already  been  given  §  72.  It  only  remains  to  con- 
sider the  changes  resulting  from  their  combination  with 
the  various  parts  of  the  verb. 

1.  The  personal  terminations  of  the  verbs  undergo 
the  following  changes: 

Preterite. 
SmG.    3 /em.    The  old  ending  n_,  §  85.  1.  a  (1),  takes 
the  place  of  H^. 
2  masc.    V\  sometimes  shortens  its  final  vowel 

T 

before  the  suffix  ^3  of  the  first  person. 
2 /em.  The  old  ending  T\,  §  86.  6,  instead  of  P. 
Plue.  2  masc.  ^P  from  the  old  pronominal  ending 
ffln,  §  71.  h,  takes  the  place  ot  Dri.  The 
feminine  of  this  person  does  not  occur 
with  suffixes. 


§  101  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  139 

Future. 
Plur.  2  and  3  fern.    The  distinctive  feminine  termina- 
tion is  dropped,  and  that  of  the  masculine 
assumed,  ^5ppri  for  nD^tipP. 

a.  In  several  of  these  cases  it  would  be  more  correct  to  say  that  it  is 
he  uncompounded  state  of  the  verb  in  which  the  change  has  taken  place, 
and  that  before  suffixes  the  original  form  has  been  preserved,    the  added 
syllable  having  as  it  were  protected  it  from  mutation. 

2.  (1)  Changes  in  the  suffixes:  The  suffixes  are  joined 
directly  to  those  verbal  forms  which  end  in  a  vowel; 
those  forms  which  end  in  a  consonant  insert  before  the 
suf&xes  of  the  second  pers.  plur.  DID,  "(ID,  and  the  second 
masc.  sing.  ^Tj,  a  vocal  Sh'va,  and  before  remaining  suf- 
fixes a  full  vowel,  which  in  the  preterite  is  mostly  a  and 
in  the  future  and  unperative  mostly  e. 

(2)  The  3  fem.  sing,  preterite  inserts  a  before  the  suf- 
fixes of  the  third  pers.  plural,  and  e  before  the  second 
fem.  singular;  when  it  stands  before  the  third  sing,  suf- 
fixes ^n,  fl,  there  is  frequently  an  ehsion  of  H,  requirmg 
Daghesh-forte  conservative  in  the  verbal  ending  T\  to 
preserve  the  quantity  of  the  previous  short  vowel,  ^ribtjp 
for  ^nnbtip,  nnbtip  for  nnbt^p,  see  S  57.  2.  h. 

(3)  When  the  third  masc.  sing,  suffix  ^n  is  preceded 
by  (J,  the  f\  may  be  elided  and  the  vowels  coalesce  into 
i,  i5t2p  for  ^nbt^p;  when  it  is  preceded  by  ^  ^,  Shurek  may 
be  hardened  to  its  corresponding  semi- vowel  1,  Vribt3i:p 
for  ^rrnbpj:  §  62.  2. 

(4)  When  the  third  fem.  suffix  H  is  preceded  by  (^), 
final  Kamets  is  omitted  to  prevent  the  recurrence  of  the 
same  sound,  nbtDp  for  nbtip. 

*  T     T';  T  T    T  *; 

(5)  When  ^H,  T\  of  the  third  pers.  singular  are  pre- 
ceded by  (, ),  the  vowel  of  union  for  the  future,  a  D,  called 
ISTim  Epenthetic,  is  sometimes  inserted,  particularly  m 
emphatic  and  pausal  forms,  to  prevent  the  hiatus  between 
the  two  vowels,  {)  being  at  the  same  time  shortened  to 


140  ETYMOLOGY.  §  101 

{);  Ti  is  then  commonly  elided  and  a  euphonic  Daghesh- 
forte  inserted  in  the  Nmi,  ^^)>ppp,  for  ^J"i5pp\  The  same 
shortening  of  the  (..)  and  insertion  of  Daghesh  may  occur 
in  the  first  person  singular  and  plural  and  the  second 
mascuhne  singular;  this,  hke  the  precedmg,  takes  place 
chiefly  at  the  end  of  clauses. 

o.  The  Nun  Epenthetic  of  the  future  and  the  Preterite  vowel  of  union 
a,  which  is  abbreviated  to  Sh'va  before  ^,  Ds,  'p,  may  be  relics  of  old 
forms  of  the  verb  still  represented  in  the  Arabic,  where  the  preterite  ends 
in  a,  and  one  mode  of  the  future  has  an  appended  Nun.  Daghesh-forte  in 
the  suffixes  of  the  first  and  second  persons  may  be  explained,  as  is  usually 
done,  by  assuming  the  insertion  and  assiinilation  of  Nun  Epenthetic,  ^\^'-^p'] 
for  ?j5^i:p'^;  or  it  may  be  Daghesh-forte  emphatic,  §  24.  6,  and  the  few 
cases  in  which  Nun  appears  in  these  persons  may  be  accounted  for  by  the 
resolution  of  Daghesh,  §54.3,  instead  of  the  Daghesh  having  arisen  from  the 
assimilation  of  Nun,  so  that  rijBpp"^  may  be  for  !^\^'^p']  instead  of  the  reverse. 

b.  The  suffixes,  since  they  do  not  in  strictness  form  a  part  of  the  word 
with  which  they  are  connected,  are  more  loosely  attached  to  it  than  the 
pronominal  fragments  which  make  up  the  inflections ;  hence  vowels  of 
union  are  employed  with  the  former  which  serve  to  separate  as  well  as  to 
unite.  Hence  too  the  vocal  Sh'va,  inserted  before  the  suffixes  of  the  second 
person,  does  not  so  completely  draw  the  final  consonant  of  the  verb  to  the 
appended  syllable  as  to  detach  it  from  that  to  which  it  formerly  belonged ; 
this  latter  becomes,  therefore,  not  a  simple  but  an  intermediate  syllable, 
§  20.  2.  A  like  distinction  exists  between  prefixed  prepositions,  etc.,  and  the 
personal  prefixes  of  the  future.  The  latter  form  part  and  parcel  of  the  word, 
while  the  former  preserve  a  measure  of  their  original  separateness.  Hence 
when  they  form  a  new  initial  syllable  by  the  aid  of  the  first  consonant  of 
the  word,  this  is  properly  a  mixed  syllable  after  a  personal  prefix  but  inter- 
mediate after  a  preposition,  IS'itn::'^  but  i'insa,  §  22.  a.  Hence,  too,  a  liability 
to  contraction  in  one  case  which  does  not  exist  in  the  other,  'bhpl  but 

3.  Changes  in  the  body  of  the  verb: 

(1)  Except  in  the  Kal  preterite  those  forms  which 
have  personal  terminations  experience  no  further  change 
from  the  addition  of  suffixes;  those  which  are  without 
such  terminations  reject  the  vowel  of  the  last  syllable 
before  suffixes  requiring  a  vowel  of  union  and  shorten  it 
before  the  remainder,  ^^tpj^^,  ^J^^pp^  btip^,  ^r^tip":,  ^bt:]^';; 
but  '',  of  the  Hiphil  species  is  almost  always  preserved, 


§  102  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  141 

(2)  In  the  Kal  imperative  and  infinitive  the  rejection 
of  the  vowel  occasions  the  concurrence  of  two  vowelless 
letters  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  which  impossible 
combination  is  obviated  by  the  insertion  of  Hhirik  to 
form  a  new  syllable;  or,  if  the  rejected  vowel  was  Hho- 
lem,  by  the  insertion  of  Kamets  Hhatuph. 

(3)  In  the  Kal  preterite,  where  both  vowels  are  liable 
to  mutation,  a  distinction  is  made  by  rejecting  the  first 
before  suffixes  and  the  second  before  personal  inflections 
where  this  is  possible,  e.  g.  bt:]?,  H^pjD,  ^5t:j5  but  n^t2p, 
ibttp.  Accordingly  upon  the  reception  of  a  sufiix  the 
vowel  of  the  second  radical,  whether  it  be  a,  e,  or  o,  must 
be  restored,  and  if  need  be  lengthened,  whenever,  in  the 
course  of  regular  inflection,  it  has  been  dropped,  and  the 
vowel  of  the  first  radical,  wherever  it  remains  in  the 
regular  inflection,  must  be  rejected. 

a.  Final  mixed  syllables,  as  shown  in  2  h,  ordinarily  become  interme- 
diate upon  appending  03,  "jS,  t],  and  consequently  take  a  short  vowel  not- 
withstanding the  following  vocal  Sh'va.  This  is  invariably  the  case  before 
03  and  ")3,  unless  the  word  to  which  they  are  attached  has  a  long  im- 
mutable vowel  in  the  ultimate  which  is  of  course  incapable  of  being  short- 
ened; it  is  also  usually  the  case  before  ?],  the  principal  exception,  so  far  as 
verbal  forms  are  concerned,  being  the  a  and  e  of  the  Kal  preterite,  a  of  the 
Kal  future,  and  i  of  the  Hiphil,  Tjinj,  r^^'ca,  Tjnnx,  ?]V^'l'x,  T]3in3N,  T]a"'Tyn  but 
^"!2?n,  Tf£2p,  fpax. 

§  102.  1.  The  first  and  second  persons  of  the  verb  do 
not  receive  suffixes  of  the  same  person  with  themselves, 
for  when  the  subject  is  at  the  same  time  the  object  of 
the  action  the  Hithpael  species  is  employed  or  a  reci- 
procal pronoun  is  formed  from  the  noun  TTEil  soul,  self, 
as  "^izjSS  myself.  Suffixes  of  the  third  person  may,  how- 
ever, be  attached  to  the  third  person  of  verbs,  provided 
the  subject  and  object  be  distinct. 

a.  There  is  a  single  example  of  a  verb  in  the  first  person  with  a  suffix 
of  the  first  person,  but  in  this  case  the  pronoun  expresses  the  indirect  ob- 
ject of  the  verb,  "'Sr'^'^^?  I  have  made  for  me,  Ezek.  29:  3. 


142  ETYMOLOGY.  §  ^03 

2.  Neuter  verbs  and  passive  species,  whose  significa- 
tion does  not  admit  of  a  direct  object,  may  yet  receive 
suffixes  expressive  of  indirect  relations,  such  as  would 
be  denoted  by  the  dative  or  ablative  in  occidental  lan- 
guages, "ri"^^  ye  fasted  for  me  Zech.  7:  5,  ^5il?il\i  thou  shalt 
be  forgotten  by  me,  Isa.  44:  21. 

3.  The  infinitive  may  be  viewed  as  a  noun,  in  which 
case  its  suffix  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  possessive,  and  re- 
presents the  subject  of  the  action;  or  it  may  be  viewed 
as  a  verb  when  its  suffix  represents  the  object,  '"^,^'1  my 
speaking,  "hbllj  my  sending,  ^'^T\y[  to  Mil  me,  ^^^JtiD  to  com- 
fort me.  The  participle  may  also  receive  the  suffix  either 
of  a  verb  or  a  noun,  the  pronoun  in  either  case  denoting 
the  object,  ''vkh  seeing  me  Isa.  47:  10,  ''k]'^  hating  me,  lit. 
my  haters,  Ps.  35:  19. 

a.  In  a  few  exceptional  cases  a  verbal  suffix  with  the  infinitive  repre- 
sents the  subject  "^aivra  at  my  returning  Ezek.  47:  7,  or  a  nominal  suffix 
the  object  "^rnn  to  permit  me  Num.  22 :  13,  "^aa^  Deut.  25 :  7,  12:jS  1  Chron.  4:10. 

§  103.  Paradigm  III.  exhibits  certain  portions  of  the 
regular  verb  bbj^  with  all  the  suffixes. 

a.  The  parts  of  the  verb  selected  are  sufficient  representatives  of  all 
the  rest,  and  by  the  aid  of  the  rules  already  given  will  enable  the  student 
to  determine  any  other  required  form  for  himself.  The  third  person  sin- 
gular of  the  Hiphil  preterite,  which  undergoes  no  change  in  the  body  of 
the  verb,  will  answer  mutatis  mutandis  for  all  the  forms  in  that  species 
ending  with  the  final  radical.  The  third  singular  of  the  Piel  preterite, 
which  suffers  a  change  in  its  last  syllable  only,  will  in  like  manner  answer 
for  all  the  forms  in  that  species  ending  with  the  final  radical.  The  Kal 
preterite  is  given  in  all  the  persons,  both  on  account  of  the  peculiarity 
of  that  tense,  which  suffers  changes  in  both  its  vowels,  and  in  order  to 
exhibit  the  changes  in  the  personal  terminations  which  apply  equally  to 
the  preterites  of  the  other  species.  The  Kal  infinitive  and  imperative  are 
peculiar  in  forming  a  new  initial  syllable  which  echoes  the  rejected  vowel. 
The  third  person  singular  of  tlie  Kal  future  affords  a  type  of  all  the  forms 
in  that  tense  which  end  with  the  final  radical;  and  the  third  plural  of  the 
same  tense  is  a  type  of  all  the  future  forms  in  this  and  in  the  other  species 
which  have  personal  terminations  appended.  The  participles  undergo  the 
same  changes  in  receiving  suffixes  with  nouns  of  like  formation  and  are 
therefore  not  included  in  this  table. 


§  104 


PEEFECT  VEEBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  143 


Remaeks  on  the  Peefect  Yeebs  with  Suffixes. 

PBETERITE. 

§  104.  a.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  (  )  as  the  union  vowel  of  the 
preterite,  "iJ^Sl  Isa.  8: 11,  T|BiXi:3  4:  20,  1  Sam.  25:  32,  Ezek.  27:  26,  Daghesh- 
forte  euphonic  is  twice  inserted  in  the  suffix  of  the  first  pers.  sing.,  '^S'^S'^ 
Ps,  118:  18,  ■^ri'n  Gen.  30:  6. 

h.  The  suffix  of  the  second  masc.  sing,  is  occasionally  T^^  in  pause  *'"^XQ 
Isa.  55 :  5,  so  with  the  infinitive,  "^^'p^'v'  Deut.  28 :  24.  45 ;  and  a  similar 
form  with  the  future  may  perhaps  he  indicated  by  theK'thibh  in  Hos.  4:  6 
"XOS^X,  §  11.  1.  a,  where  the  K'ri  has  'TipX'aN.  With  X"b  and  n"b  verbs 
this  form  of  the  suffix  is  of  frequent  occurrence,  :~3^'  Isa.  30:  19,  Jer.  23:37, 
"nJ<"i3n  Ezek.  28:  15.  In  a  few  instances  with  the  future  and  infinitive  the 
final  a  is  represented  by  the  vowel  letter  tl,  and  the  suffix  is  written  tis, 
nsklCiQi,   n2-i::s'i   l  Kin.  18  :  10.  44,    Prov.  2  :  11,    Ps.  145:  10,   Jer.  7  :  27, 

T    V   T    :    •  '  T    :  T  -:i-  '  f  t  9 

Ezek.  40:  4. 

c.  The  suffix  of  the  second  fern.  sing,  is  commonly  T]^,  "n^^^P  Isa.  54:  6, 
•nnXB  Isa.  60:  9,  except  after  the  third  fem.  sing,  of  the  verb,  when  it  is 
Tj..}  T^nbl^X  Euth  4:  15,  Tinissii^  Isa.  47:  10;  sometimes,  especially  in  the 
later  Psalms,  it  has  the  form  ''s  coi'responding  to  the  pronoun  "^RX,  "'w^STX 
Ps.  137:  6,  "^sn-jsriri  Ps.  103:  4. 

d.  The  suffix  of  the  third  masc.  sing,  is  written  with  the  vowel  letter 
n  instead  of  1  in  ninsi  Ex.  32:  25,  t^i.X>  Num.  28:  8,  and  in  some  copies  n'?DX 
1  Sam.  1:  9,  where  it  would  be  feminine;  this  form  is  more  frequently  ap- 
pended to  nouns  than  to  verbs. 

e.  In  a  few  instances  the  tn  of  the  third  fem.  suffix  is  not  pointed  with 
Mappik,  and  consequently  represents  a  vowel  instead  of  a  consonant,  n"^'^ 
(with  the  accent  on  the  penult  because  followed  by  an  accented  syllable) 
Am.  1:  11,  so  with  the  infinitive,  ^r'lDJf^  Ex.  9:  18,  f^i5^?;!^  Jer.  44:  19,  and 
the  future,  n'jrinni  Ex.  2:  3. 

f.  The  suffix  of  the  third  masc.  plur.  receives  a  paragogic  "i  once  in  prose, 
■iOT'r^ii  Ex.  23:  31,  and  repeatedly  in  poetry,  i^axbTsn,  'i'O'iiin'in  Ex,  15:  9; 
once  ^  is  appended,  'I'^^p?']  Ex.  15:  5;  Qfi  is  used  but  once  as  a  verbal  suffix, 
Dn'^XSN;  Deut.  32 :  26.   ' 

g.  The  suffix  of  the  third  fem.  plur.  "  is  seldom  used,  'ppy'l'!  Isf^-  48 :  7, 
34: 16,  Hab.  2:17,  Zech.  11:5;  more  frequently  the  masculine  D  is  substituted 
for  it,  d^inp  Gen.  26:  15,  18,  DVjnS'i'i  Ex.  2:  17,  B^-^OXl;;!  1  Sam.  6:  10,  so 
Num.  17:  3,  4,  Josh.  4:  8,  2  Kin.  18:13,  Hos.  2:  14,  Prov.  6:  21;  "itl  is  never 
used  with  verbs.  When  attached  to  infinitives  a  paragogic  n  is  sometimes 
added  to  1,  nssia  Euth  1:  19,  n:n'ib  Job  39:  2. 

'  '  T     T  '  T     T     :   • 

h.  Vei-bs,  which  have  Tsere  for  the  second  vowel  in  the  Kal  preterite, 
retain  it  before  suffixes,  T|!:ns  Deut.  7:  13,  Q"i3n^  Lev.  16:  4,  nxr:;  Deut, 
24:  3,  iniix;*!-^  Job  37:  24.  The  only  example  of  a  suffix  appended  to  a 
preterite  whose  second  vowel  is  Hholem,  is  I'^n^D'^  Ps.  13:  5  from  "^rilji:". 


144  ETYMOLOGY.  §  105 

the  Hholem  being  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph  by  the  shifting  of  the 
accent.  Tsere  of  the  Piel  species  is  ntiostly  shortened  to  Seghol  before  T], 
63,  IS,  V-|i£3p  Deut.  30:  3,  ^^fSp";  ver.  4,  but  occasionally  to  Hhirik,  dz^JlzNX 
(the  Methegh  in  most  editions  is  explained  by  §  45.  2)  Job  16:  5,  ?]0^'i'iX 
Isa.  25:  1,  CiDWpri  Ex.  31:  13,  diiy'iS  Isa.  1:  15;  before  the  Seghol  in- 
troduced by  a  pause  accent  it  is  rejected,  TlSti^"^  Gen.  49:  25,  ^"^nV^??  2  Sam. 
11:  12.  Hhirik  of  the  Hiphil  species  is  retained  before  all  suffixes  with  very 
few  exceptions,  ^SnirJS!^  1  Sam.  17:  25,  Ps.  65:  10;  in  ^lb  Deut.  32:  7,  the 
verb  has  the  form  of  the  apocopated  future. 

i.  The  third  fem.  preterite  sometimes  takes  the  third  masc.  sing,  suffix 
in  its  full  form,  ^Ttr}^^  Prov.  31:  12,  Ezek.  15:  5,  so  in  pause  iinnsnx 
1  Sam.  18:  28,  'li^r?^^^?  Gen.  37:  20,  sinriDTaC)  Isa.  59:  16,  and  sometimes  con- 
tracted by  the  exclusion  of  il,  ^iFlBiaa  1  Sam.  1:  24,  ^P\^Y-  ^^^^  4:  15,  ^inhaa 
Job  21:  18.  The  third  fem.  suffix  is  always  contracted,  nniriN  Jer.  49:  24, 
nnj^^n  isa.  34:  17,  riPlpys  1  Sam.  1:  6.  The  suffix  of  the  third  masc.  plural 
is  D_,  notd^,  with  this  person  of  the  verb,  the  accent  falling  on  the  penult, 
tarn:?,  Gen.  31:  32,  QnxrJia  Ex.  18:  8,  Qn'i^S  Ps.  119:  129,  Dnsn'J  Isa.  47:  14. 
In  the  intermediate  syllable  before  ?]  the  vowel  is  usually  short  in  this 
person,  ^f}l'^']  Jer.  22:  26,  ?]r'^3X  Ezek.  28:  18,  though  it  is  sometimes  long, 
V]rt2ri  Cant.  8:5,  as  it  regularly  is  in  pause  i'^jHl^'^  ibid.;  so  before  "^3  and 
!13  of  the  first  person,  '^ifb^H.  Ps.  69:  10,  t^linx::^  Num.  20:  14. 

*  '       •   :  AT  T  -:  '  :  IT  T   : 

j.  The  second  masc.  sing,  preterite  usually  takes  Pattahh  before  "^S  ex- 
cept in  pause,  '^iFi-ipn  Ps.  139:  1,  "'SnPin  Job  7:  14,  "^iPinT^  Ps.  22:  2.  It 
takes  the  third  masc.  sing,  suffix  either  in  its  full  form,  ;*inri"iB3  Ezek. 
43:  20,  or  contracted,  "irisOX  2  Kin.  5:  6,  "itnob  Hab.  1:  12,  ina;?  (accent 
thrown  back  by  §  35.  1)  Num.  23:  27,  isibj^il  Ps.  89:  44. 

k.  The  second  fem.  sing,  preterite  assumes  (  ),  commonly  without  Yodh, 
§  11.1.  a,  before  suffixes,  and  is  accordingly  indistinguishable  from  the  first 
person  except  by  the  suffix  which  it  receives,  §  102. 1,  or  by  the  connection 
in  which  it  is  found,  ''SPi'ib'i  Jer.  15:  10,  !innii:Jri  Ex.  2:  10,  Judg.  11:  35, 
1  Sam.  19:  17,  Cant.  4:  9,  Jer.  2:  34,  Ezek.  16:  19.  58;  once  it  takes  (  . ), 
ilSn'i^'iin  Josh.  2:  18,  and  in  a  few  instances  the  masculine  form  is  adopted 
in  its  stead,  niPissiari  Josh.  2:  17,  20,  Cant.  5:  9,  ^iiri^'!  Jer.  2:  27  K'ri, 
•inxnn  2  Sam.  14^10.' 

I.  The  plural  endings  of  the  verb  may  be  written  fully  1  or  defectively 
(),  thus,  in  the  third  person,  *'5>ldnp  Ps.  18:  6,  "^Snap  Hos.  12:  1;  the 
second  i3n^2  Zech.  7:  6,  ^n'^^ilv!  Num.  20:  5,  21:  5;  and  the  first  siniirnn 
1  Chron.  13:  3. 

FUTURE. 

§  105.  a.  The  union  vowel  a  is  sometimes  attached  to  the  future,  thus 
•la.,  '*;p:3'iri  Gen.  19:  19,  '^^b.tiVtT},  Gen.  29:  32,  Ex.  33:  20,  Num.  22:  33,  Isa. 
56:  3,  Job  9:  18;  «^,  ^3n"i3:i' Isa.  63:  16;  i  (for  in  J,  is^n-i  Hos.  8:  3,  Ps. 
35:  8,  Eccles.  4:  12,  1  Sam.  21:  14,  so  in  the  K'thibh,  1  Sam.  18:  1  i:ins-'1, 
where  the  K'ri  has  !inhnx|"1;  rt^  (for  ilj),  rtni3;^1  Gen.  37:  33,  2  Chron. 
20:  7,  Isa.  26:  5;  D^,  Diaab^Ex.  29:  30,  Deut.  7:^^  15,  Num.  21:  30,  Ps.  74:  8, 


§  106        PEEPECT  VEEBS  WITH  SUFTIXES.         145 

Ps.  118:  10;  T^,  )'i}':i^'^  Ex,  2: 17.  In  1  Kin.  2:  24  the  K'ri  has  ''b5'^•::'i^  while 
the  K'thibh  has  the  vowel  letter  "^  representing  the  ordinary  e,  i2"iaiU5r. 
The  union  vowel  a  is  also  occasionally  found  with  the  imperative,  Pi35<^ 
Ps.  69:  19,  Deut.  31:  19,  Isa.  30:  8,  Am.  9:  1. 

6.  The  suffixes  with  Daghesh  inserted  occur  chiefly  in  pause;  thus  "'S ., 
''S'lSi-'  Jer.  50:  44;  ''3.,  ''Sb'inri  Gen.  27:  19,  Job  7:  14,  9:  34;  Sl3.  (1st  plur.), 
siSSiiD";  Job  31:  15;  ^j..,  !7\^3i?5  Isa.  43:  5,  44:  2,  Ps.  30:  13;  iiS..  (3  masc. 
sing.j,  ISnpSn  Job  7:  18,'  41:  2  K'ri,  Hos.  12:  5;  ns..,  t^^7rs»^l  Ps.  65:  10, 
(once  with  an  infinitive  HS-an^  Gen.  30:  41),  or  without  Daghesh,  ninpirn 
Judg.  5:  26,  Obad.  ver.  13;  the  unemphatic  form  of  the  suffix  and  that 
with  Daghesh  occur  in  conjunction,  •n^'^sp:  ■^S^'^S'::^  Isa.  26:  5.  There  are 
a  very  few  examples,  found  only  in  poetry  of  3  inserted  between  the  verb 
and  the  suffix  without  further  change,  '':?,'7Sd'i  Ps.  50:  23,  !;"|3;rnx  Jer. 
22:  24,  ^ns^ay;;  Jer.  5:  22,  :!in?=.':3'i  Ps.  72:  15,\rj3na";  Deut.  32:  10,  :!in?^^'nx 
Ex.  15:  2.  *"  '" 

c.  The  plural  ending  'I  is  in  a  few  instances  found  before  suffixes,  chiefly 
in  pause,  ''3:i<'^p":,  ''SSnnd";,  j-'SSXri-?";  Prov.  l  :  28,  !Ti:!inad"'  Ps.  63:  4,  ?i3^X'^'^. 
Ps.  91:  12,  Tii^n-T^";  isa.' 60:  7,  10,'  I'lns'nnr;;  Jer.  5:  22,  :  ns^lXST?'^  Jer.  2:  24: 
twice  it  has  the  union  vowel  a,  ■'33!iX3nn  Job  19:  2,  ii'isls'i  Prov.  5:  22. 

d.  When  the  second  vowel  of  the  Kal  future  is  o,  it  is  rejected  before 
suffixes  requiring  a  union  vowel,  compound  Sh'va  being  occasionally  sub- 
stituted for  it  in  the  place  of  simple,  d^SX  Hos.  10:  10,  ^iSS-in;!  Num.  35:20, 
:n3'na:X  Isa.  27:  3,  iISS;?.':  Isa.  62:  2,  "S^T  Ezek.  35:  6,  t^iJP^i^  Jer.  31:  33; 
once  tiie  vowel  remains,  but  is  changed  to  Shurek,  :Q1i1'2"rri  Prov.  14:  3;  a, 
on  the  other  hand,  is  retained  as  a  pretonic  vowel,  §  64.  2,  "^S^iab";  Job 
29:  14,  tib:^1  Ex.  29:  80,  Cant.  5:  3,  Gen.  19:  19;  and  even  restored,  where 
it  is  dropped  in  the  regular  inflection,  T|^3i'a'^  Isa.  62:  5,  inri|3"i.  Gen.  37:  24, 
Job  3:  5,  Jer.  13:  17;  so  in  the  Imperative  '^jy'Ca  Gen.  23:  11,  Ps.  6:  3, 
"iSiij-^d  Gen.  23:  8,  1  Chron.  28:  2.  Hholem  is  shortened  before  T],  M,  'i^, 
though  the  vowel  letter  1  is  occasionally  written  in  the  K'thibh,  '?|"]"'SX 
Jer.  1 :  5. 

e.  The  following  are  examples  of  feminine  plural*  with  suffixes :  2  fern, 
plur.  "^SKin  Cant.  1 :  6,  3  fern.  plur.  '^si'irnn  Job  19:  15,  T(fi3l'n  Jer.  2:  19. 
The  masculine  form  is  sometimes  substituted  for  the  feminine,  Hl'iTi'S*'],  •^''^^'^"1 
Cant.  6:  9. 

INFINITIVE  AND  IMPEEATIVE. 

§  106.  a.  Kal  infinitive.  Before  ^,  Q?,  13,  Hholem  is  shortened  to  Ka- 
mets  Hhatuph,  t^z^  Gen.  2:  17,  T\^^-J  (Methegh  by  §  45.  2)  Obad.  ver.  11, 
dDlpnx  Gen.  3:  5,  oi'^'^X  Mai.  1:  7.  Pattahh  remains  in  the  single  example, 
dbssn  Isa.  30:  18;  sometimes  the  vowel  of  the  second  radical  is  rejected 
before  these  as  it  is  before  the  other  suffixes,  and  a  short  vowel  given  to 
the  first  radical,  commonly  Kamets  Hhatuph,  Tj'ins  Deut.  29:  11,  T^S^ttJ 
2  Kin.  22:  19,  niia:?  Deut.  27:  4,  rarely  Kibbuts,  £15-1:1^?  Lev.  19:  9,  23:  22, 
sometimes  Hhiriki  wia©  Gen.  19:  33.  35  but  inaTU  Ruth  3:  4,  iiljto  Zech. 
3 :  1,   1323  2  Sam.  1 :  10,    "inns  Neh.  8 :  5,    and  occasionally  Pattahh,  r\V'p';\ 

10 


146  ETYMOLOGY.  §  107 

Ezek.  25:  6.  In  the  feminine  form  of  the  infinitive,  as  in  nouns  the  old 
feminine  ending  n  is  substituted  for  n,  inSri'::  Isa.  30:  19,  iri^^iri  Hos.  7:  4, 
Ex.  30:  32.  The  Niphal  infinitive  retains  its  pretonic  Kamets  before  suffixes, 
DinDtn  Ezek.  21 :  29,  Deut.  28:  20,  Ps.  37:  33.  Hhirik  of  the  Hiphil  Infinitive 
becomes  Pattahh  before  Resh  in  Ci='i3'tri  Ezek.  21:  29. 

b.  Kal  Imperative.  The  first  radical  commonly  receives  Kamets  Hhatuph 
upon  the  rejection  of  Hholem,  "^S'^SJ,  ''3'ipS  Jer.  15:  15,  but  occasionally  it 
takes  Hhirik,  rj^S?  (with  Daghesh-forte  euphonic)  Prov.  4: 13.  In  the  Hiph. 
imp.  2  masc.  sing.  Hhirik  is  restored  before  suffixes  '^Jn'^S'tti  Isa.  43:26. 


Imperfect  "Verbs. 

§  107.  Imperfect  verbs  depart  more  or  less  from  the 
standard  already  given,  as  the  nature  of  their  radicals 
may  require.   They  are  of  three  classes,  viz.: 

I.  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  guttural 
letter  in  the  root. 

II.  Contracted  verbs,  two  of  whose  radicals  are  in 
certain  cases  contracted  into  one. 

in.  Quiescent  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
or  vowel  letter  in  the  root. 

These  classes  may  again  be  subdivided  according  to 
the  particular  radical  affected.  Thus  there  are  three 
kinds  of  guttural  verbs: 

1.  Pe  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is 
a  guttural. 

2.  Ayin  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  radical 
is  a  guttural. 

3.  Lamedh  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  a  guttural. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  contracted  verbs: 

1.  Pe  Nun  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Nun, 
and  is  liable  to  be  contracted  by  assimilation  with  the 
second. 

2.  Ayin  doubled  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  and  third 
radicals  are  aUke,  and  are  liable  to  be  contracted  into  one. 


§  1 08  PE  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  147 

There  are  four  kinds  of  quiescent  verbs : 

1.  Pe  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is 
Yodh. 

2.  Ayin  Yav  and  Ayin  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose 
second  radical  is  Yav  or  Yodh. 

3.  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  Aleph. 

4.  Lamedh  He  verbs,  or  those  in  which  a  quiescent 
He  takes  the  place  of  the  third  radical. 

The  guttural  differ  from  the  perfect  verbs  in  the 
vowels  only;  the  first  division  of  the  contracted  verbs 
differ  only  in  the  consonants;  the  quiescent  and  the 
second  division  of  the  contracted  verbs  differ  from  the 
perfect  verbs  in  both  vowels  and  consonants. 

a.  The  third  class  of  imperfect  verbs  may  either  be  regarded  as  hav- 
ing a  quiescent  letter  in  the  root,  which  in  certain  forms  is  changed  into 
a  vowel,  or  as  having  a  vowel  in  the  root,  which  in  certain  forms  is 
changed  into  a  quiescent  letter.  As  the  settlement  of  this  question  is  purely 
a  matter  of  theory,  the  usual  name  of  quiescent  verbs  has  been  retained 
as  sufficiently  descriptive. 

6.  The  origin  of  these  various  technical  names  for  the  different  kinds 
of  imperfect  verbs  is  explained  §  76.  3. 

Pe  Guttural  Yerbs. 

§  108.  Gutturals  have  the  four  following  peculiarities, 
§  60,  viz.: 

1.  They  often  cause  a  preceding  or  accompanying 
vowel  to  be  converted  into  Pattahh. 

2.  They  receive  Pattahh  furtive  at  the  end  of  a  word 
after  a  long  heterogeneous  vowel  or  before  a  vowelless 
final  consonant. 

3.  They  take  compound  in  preference  to  simple  ShVa. 

4.  They  are  incapable  of  being  doubled,  and  conse- 
quently do  not  receive  Daghesh-forte. 

10* 


148  ETYMOLOGY.  §  109 

§  109.  Pe  guttural  verbs  are  affected  by  these  pe- 
culiarities as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  The  Hhirik  of  the  preformatives  is  changed  to  Pat- 
tahh  before  the  guttural  in  the  Kal  future,  if  the  second 
vowel  be  Hholem,  i'DT  for  il2T;  but  if  the  second  radical 
has  Pattahh  this  change  does  not  occur,  because  it  would 
occasion  a  repetition  of  the  same  vowel  in  successive 
syllables,  §  63.  1.  &.  In  the  Kal  future  a,  therefore,  in 
the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle,  where  the  vowel  of 
the  second  syllable  is  hkewise  a,  and  in  the  Hiphil  prete- 
rite, where  7  is  characteristic  and  therefore  less  subject 
to  change,  Hhirik  is  compounded  with  Pattahh,  or,  in 
other  words,  is  changed  to  the  diphthongal  Seghol,  pTH^, 
tb^D ,  l^/J^n.  Seghol  accompanying  5<  of  the  first  person 
singular  of  the  Kal  future,  §  60.  1.  a  (5),  and  Kamets 
Hhatuph,  characteristic  of  the  Hophal  species,  suffer  no 
change.  The  same  is  true  of  Hholem  in  the  first  syllable 
of  the  Kal  participle,  Hhirik  of  the  Piel  preterite,  and 
Kibbuts  of  the  Pual  species,  for  the  double  reason  that 
these  vowels  are  characteristic  of  those  forms,  and  that 
their  position  after  the  guttural  renders  them  less  hable 
to  mutation,  §  60.  1.  6J  (2);  the  second  reason  applies 
likewise  to  the  Hhirik  of  the  feminine  singular  and 
masculine  plural  of  the  Kal  imperative,  which,  as  the 
briefest  of  the  short  vowels,  is  besides  best  adapted  to 
the  quick  utterance  of  a  command,  ^'^2^,  ^I'C^,. 

2.  As  the  guttural  does  not  stand  at  the  end  of  the 
word,  there  is  no  occasion  for  applying  the  rule  respect- 
ing Pattahh  furtive ;  this  consequently  does  not  appear 
except  in  "iri^  apocopated  future  of  Hin,  and  in  one  other 
doubtful  example,  §  114. 

3.  Wherever  the  first  radical  should  receive  simple 
ShVa  the  guttural  takes  compound  Sh'va  instead;  this, 
if  there  be  no  reason  for  preferring  another,  and  especi- 


§  110  PE  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  149 

ally  if  it  be  preceded  by  the  vowel  Pattahh,  will  be  Hha- 
teph  Pattahh,  whose  sound  is  most  consonant  with  that 
of  the  gutturals;  this  is  the  case  in  the  Kal  second  plural 
preterite,  construct  infinitive,  future  and  imperative  with 
Hholem,  and  in  the  Hiphil,  infinitives,  future,  imperative, 
and  participle,  Drin^?,  ISi?"!.  If,  however,  the  guttural  be 
preceded  by  another  vowel  than  Pattahh  the  compound 
Sh'va  will  generally  be  conformed  to  it;  thus,  after  Seghol 
it  becomes  Hhateph  Seghol  as  in  the  Kal  future  and 
imperative  a,  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle,  and 
the  Hiphil  preterite,  pTH^,  I'^b^n,  and  after  Kamets  Hha- 
tuph  it  becomes  Hhateph  Kamets  as  in  the  Hophal 
species,  Tb3>ri.  If  this  compound  Sh'va  in  the  course  of 
inflection  comes  to  be  followed  by  a  voweUess  letter,  it 
is  changed  to  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  §  61.  1, 
thus,  (.,)  becomes  (.)  in  the  second  feminine  singular  and 
the  second  and  third  masculine  plural  of  the  Kal  future; 
(  )  becomes  ( _)  in  the  third  feminine  singular  and  the 
third  plural  of  the  Niphal  preterite;  and  (^)  becomes  (^) 
in  the  corresponding  persons  of  the  preterite  and  future 
Hophal,  ^i?:??P,  HTjy?.,  t'n')2^n 

a.  The  simple  Sli'va  following  a  short  vowel  thus  formed,  remains 
vocal  as  in  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  perfect  verb,  the  new  syllable 
being  not  mixed  but  intermediate,  and  hence  a  succeeding  aspirate  will 
retain  its  aspiration,  thus  ^in'^S'^  yaam'dhu,  not  ^^^"^  yaamdu,  §  22.  a.  In 
like  manner  the  Kal  imperative  has  '^'i^S',  I'H^S"  not  "'^'Oi',  Way,  showing 
that  even  in  the  perfect  verb  "^BlJp,  'l3::p  were  pronounced  hitHl,  kit'lu,  not 
kitll,  kitlu. 

4.  The  reduplication  of  the  first  radical  being  im- 
possible in  the  infinitive,  future  and  imperative  Niphal^ 
the  preceding  vowel,  which  now  stands  in  a  simple  syl- 
lable, is  lengthened  in  consequence  from  Hhirik  to  Tsere, 

8  60.  4,  152rn  for  it^n. 

O  '  T    I"  T      • 

§  110.  1.  The  verb  17b:?  to  stand,  whose  inflections  are 
shown  in  Paradigm  IV,  may  serve  as  a  representative  of 


150  ETYMOLOGY.  §111 

Pe  guttural  verbs.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  are  omit- 
ted, as  they  present  no  deviation  from  the  regular  verbs. 
The  Niphal  of  ~bv  is  not  in  use,  but  is  here  formed 
from  analogy  for  the  sake  of  giving  completeness  to  the 
paradigm. 

2.  TheKal  imperative  and  future  of  those  verbs  which 
have  Pattahh  in  the  second  syllable  may  be  represented 
hy  pin  to  he  strong  in  the  same  Paradigm. 

3.  Certain  verbs,  whose  first  radical  is  5^,  receive 
Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future  after  the 
following,  which  is  distinctively  called  the  Pe  Aleph  (5<"3) 
mode. 

Future  op  Pe  Aleph  Yeebs. 
3  masc.  3  fern.  2  masc.  2  fern.  1  com. 


Sma. 

bbi^-' 

bb^T\ 

bbi^n 

'^?^Pi 

bbi^ 

Plub. 

t'Dik'^ 

HDbii^n 

iibiiin 

nDbbu<n 

bb^: 

Five  verbs  uniformly  adopt  this  mode  of  inflection, 
viz.:  1n5<  to  perish,  niij  to  be  willing,  bix  to  eat,  ^^2^  to 
say,  ns^  to  bake;  a  few  others  indiff"erently  follow  this  or 
the  ordinary  Pe  guttural  mode,  ^h^  to  love,  tHjj  to  take 
hold,  jTiOJJ  to  gather. 

Remarks  on  Pe  Guttural  Yerbs. 

§  111.  1.  The  preformative  of  the  Kal  future  a  has  (_)  in  one  instance, 
airni  Ezek.  23:  5.  That  of  the  Kal  future  0  has  (  )  in  tfi'n'^^  Prov.  10:  3, 
Clibni  Ps.  29:  9.     Three  verbs  with  future  o,  n3n,  Dnn,  ^hn  have  Pattahh 

'        -'-r.'  '         -t'  -t'  -t 

in  the  first  syllable  when  the  Hholem  appears,  but  Seghol  in  those  forms 
in  which  the  Hholem  is  dropped,  Oinni^  Job  12:  14,  ^oSn^  2  Kin.  3:  25  but 
^ib-in;::  Ex.  19:  21,  24;  so  with  suffixes,' ""iii^ni  Ps.  141:  5,':]!bnn';  Isa.  22:  19, 
iirrionD  Isa.  63:  2.     ^i?n  has  si'iQm  but  ^'^'S/i\ 

2.  a.  If  the  first  radical  be  K,  the  preformative  takes  Seghol  in  most 
> verbs  in  tlie  Kal  future,  whether  a  or  o,  pb'x;;!,  ^p^!;}.,  ^^'XPI,  inxn  as  well  as 
yhK^^,  tiis;;;,  bisn,  r^xri;  in  a  few  with  future  a,  §110.  3',  it  takes  Hholem, 
the  (.)  of  the  second  syllable  usually  becoming  (..)  in  pause,  and  in  a  few 


§111 


EEMAEKS  ON  PE  GUTTURAL  VEEBS.  151 


instances  without  a  pause  accent,  ihlX'',  '^^^\  113X'',  tfiX"^,  but  ^^si"^;  in  two 
verbs  it  becomes  (..)  after  Vav  conversive,  ^^S<*T,  tnx^l,  but  with  a  pause 
accent  ^3i<'^!i,  "i^X'l  or  in  the  first  verses  of  several  chapters  of  Job  !"i?X"'5. 
Hholem  in  these  verbs  is  probably  modified  from  a,  so  that  bbx^  is  for 
bhi<1  from  biw^:;,  §  201.  e. 

b.  As  K  is  always  quiescent  after  Hholem  in  this  latter  form  of  the 
future,  §  57.  2.  (2)  a,  Pe  Aleph  verbs  might  be  classed  among  quiescent 
verbs,  and  this  is  in  fact  done  by  some  grammarians.  But  as  i<  has  the 
double  character  of  a  guttural  and  a  quiescent  in  different  forms  sprung 
from  the  same  root,  and  as  its  quiescence  is  confined  almost  entirely  to  a 
single  tense  of  a  single  species,  it  seems  better  to  avoid  sundering  what 
really  belongs  together,  by  considering  the  Pe  Aleph  as  a  variety  of  the 
Pe  guttural  verbs.  In  a  few  instances  N  gives  up  its  consonantal  character 
after  (..),  which  is  then  lengthened  to  (J,  rtnxn  Mic.  4:  8.  When  thus 
quiescent  after  either  Tsere  or  Hholem,  X  is  always  omitted  jn  the  first 
person  singular  after  the  preformative  N,  ^hx  Gen.  32:  5  for  inxx,  nnx 
Prov.  8:  17  for  snxx,  bait  Gen.  24:  33  for  baxx,  and  occasionally  in  other 
persons,  i^Tn  Jer.  2:  36  for  ■'^TXri;  so  HTP  Deut.  33:  21,  xh'n  Prov.  1:  10, 
qbh  Ps.  104:  29,  ^"ian  2  Sam.  19:  14,  tnpil  2  Sam.  20:  9,  iinsni  1  Sam.  28:  24; 
in  a  few  instances  the  vowel  letter  1  is  substituted  for  it,  ilbai"!  Ezek.  42:  5 
for  lliax;',  ■^^h^i(  Neh.  2:  7,  Ps.  42:  10. 

c.  A  like  quiescence  or  omission  of  K  occurs  in  bSN'"1  Num.  11:  25  Hi. 
fut.  for  hilVi'p,  b-ibn  Ezek.  21:  33  Hi.  inf.  for  biixii,  ^'^fij  Job  32:  11  Hi. 
fut.  for  "prxx,  "jifp  Prov.  17:  4  Hi.  part,  for  ^TN^,'  §  63.  2.  a,  ^B^p  Job 
35:  11  Pi.  part,  for  ^liS^X^,  §  53.  3,  '^i'lTn  2  Sam.  22:  40  Pi.  fut.  for  "^snTXri, 
y^\^  1  Sam.  15:  5  Hi.  fut.  for  nnx;;;!,  ii-'flti  Isa.  21:  14  Hi.  pret.  for  rfjxtl, 
\iiy:  Isa.  13 :  20  Pi.  fut.  for  briN"i ,  and  after  prefixes  "lixb  for  "loxb ,  the 
Kal  infinitive  of  "lax  with  the  preposition  b,  ^13X1  Ezek.  28:  16  Pi.  fut. 
with  Vav  conversive  for  T^'iaxxiJ ,  "iiTSXI  Zech.  1 1 :  5  Hi.  fut.  with  Vav  con- 
junctive for  'lii^yxi,  d"''n!lDti  Eccles.  4:  14  Kal  pass.  part,  with  the  article 
for  niniaxn. 

d.  Hholem  is  further  assumed  by  Pe  Aleph  roots  once  in  the  Niphal 
preterite,  ilinxs  Num.  32:  30  for  ^inX5,  and  five  times  in  the  Hiphil  future, 
m'lnN  Jer.  46:  8  for  rrniaxs*,  b-^DlX  Hos.  11:4  for  b^hi<^,  Hn^Jix  Neh.  13:  13 
for  rrn-^ixx,  b.^'l  l  Sam.  14:  24  abbreviated  from  nbs<iT  for  nbx;;;!,  -irTi«5 
2  Sam.  20:  5  K'ri  for  "ifiN^I. 

e.  X  draws  the  vowel  to  itself  from  the  preformative  in  ^SliXPl  Pror. 
1:  22  Kal  fut.  for  idnstn  in  pause  ^ai^XP  Zech.  8:  17,  Ps.  4:  3,  §  60.  3.  c. 
Some  so  explain  ^n^DXH  Job  20:  26,  regarding  it  as  a  Kal  future  for  inbaxn 
with  the  vowel  attracted  to  the  X  from  the  preformative;  it  is  simpler, 
however,  to  regard  it  as  a  Pual  future  with  Kamets  Hhatuph  instead  of 
Kibbuts,  §  93.  a,  as  Q-jX^  Nah.  2  :  4,  T^nan-i  Ps.  94:  20. 

3.  a.  Kamets  Hhatuph  for  the  most  part  remains  in  the  Kal  infinitive 
and  imperative  with  suffixes  or  added  vowels,  as  iHTas,  T]i?15.  '^I'^s,  being 
rarely  changed  to  Pattahh,  as  in  inban  Prov.  20:  16,  or  Seghol,  as  "HSGX 
Num.  11:  16,   rti'ns  Job  33:  5.     In  the  inflected  imperative  Seghol  occurs 


152  ETYMOLOGY.  §  112 

once  instead  of  Hhirik,  ""^Q'^n  Isa.  47 :  2,  and  Kamets  Hhatuph  twice  in 
compensation  for  the  omitted  Hholem,  "^ibs  Zeph.  3:  14  but  ^ihs  Vs.  68:  5, 
sii'in  Jer.  2:  12  but  ^iyi  Jer.  50:  27,  though  the  o  sound  is  once  retained 
in  the  compound  Sh'va  of  a  pausal  form,  "'^^n  Isa.  44:  27.  Ewald  explains 
tanayri  Ex.  20:  5,  23:  24,  Deut.  5:  9,  and  ti'i3?3  Deut.  13:  3  as  Kal  futures, 
the  excluded  Hholem  giving  character  to  the  preceding  vowels;  the  forms, 
however,  are  properly  Hophal  futures,  and  there  is  no  reason  why  the 
words  may  not  be  translated  accordingly  be  induced  to  serve.  In  a  few  Kal 
infinitives  with  a  feminine  termination  U  has  (.),  n3^n  Ezek.  16:  5,  "in^ipn 
Hos.  7:4. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  Pattahh  is  found  in  the  first  syllable  of  the 
Niphal  preterite  and  participle  and  of  the  Hiphil  preterite,  <n.:i??,  1'ii??, 
nia?3  but  nnia?3, 'j/nyD  Ps.  89:  8,  dn-inn  Judg.  8:  19. 

§  112.  1.  The  guttural  invariably  receives  compound  Sh'va  in  place  of 
simple,  where  this  is  vocal  in  the  perfect  verb;  and  as  in  these  cases  it 
stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  it  is  more  at  liberty  to  follow  its  na- 
tive preferences,  and  therefore  usually  takes  (  ).  In  Bni";fi  2  plur.  pret., 
iypiji  inf.,  rt'^H  imper.  of  i^^f^,  the  initial  rt  has  (...)  under  the  influence  of 
the  following  '^;  N  receives  (_  )  in  the  second  plural  of  the  Kal  preterite, 
and  in  the  feminine  and  plural  of  the  passive  participle,  dPi^nx,  DPibrx, 
d'^plDX,  but  commonly  (^)  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive,  §  60.  3.  6,  bix 
imper.,  bix  and  bix  inf.,  mx  and  thx  inf.,  yhit.  imper.,  ^iix  inf.  and  imper. 
(but  ^'6^'i^  Job  34:  18  with  ti  interrogative),  p':^.,  C]OX  (with  n^  paragogic 
nbpN),  and  in  a  very  few  instances  the  long  vowel  (_),  §  60.  3.  c,  siSS  Ex. 
I6V23  for  siSN,  si-inx  Isa.  21:  12. 

2.  Where  the  first  radical  in  perfect  verbs  stands  after  a  short  vowel 
and  completes  its  syllable,  the  guttural  does  the  same,  but  mostly  admits 
an  echo  of  the  preceding  vowel  after  it,  inclining  it  likewise  to  begin  the 
syllable  which  follows.  In  the  intermediate  syllable  thus  formed,  §  20.  2, 
the  vowel  remains  short,  only  being  modified  agreeably  to  the  rules 
already  given  by  'the  proximity  of  the  guttural,  which  itself  receives  the 
corresponding  Hhateph.  The  succession  is,  therefore,  usually  (  ),  (  )  or 
(,.  J.  In  a  very  few  instances  this  correspondence  is  neglected;  thus,  in 
"Tilnjn  3  fem.  fut.  of  T\?^  to  go  (comp.  pn^;;  from  pra  to  laugh)  the  Hhirik 
of  the  preformative  remains  and  the  guttural  takes  Hhateph  Pattahh;  in 
ribsn  (once,  viz.,  Hab.  1:  15  for  inBrn)  and  H^^H  Hiphil  and  Hophal  prete- 
rites of  nlis  to  go  up,  and  n*h?!l  (once,  viz..  Josh  7:  7  for  ri"ihsJri)  Hi.  pret. 
of  ^'ZS  to  pass  over,  the  guttural  is  entirely  transferred  to  the  second  syl- 
lable, and  the  preceding  vowel  is  lengthened.  The  forms  rii'^nb,  n^fi'^, 
dn'i'^iil ,  fi^ilj!  from  n^in  to  be,  and  like  forms  from  ti^n  to  live,  are  peculiar 
in  having  simple  vocal  Sh'va. 

3.  Where  (...)  or  (...  )  are  proper  to  the  form  these  are  frequently 
changed  to  (,  )  or  (  ^ )  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  word  or  the  removal 
of  its  accent  forward.  Thus,  in  the  Kal  future,  riDX"]  2  Kin.  5:  3,  lEpK^  Ex. 

4:  29,  •'SeONl  Ps.  27:  10,  ''BDNn  Josh.  2:  18;  >l5nN;'.''lsa.  59:  5,  "^i-iNPi  Judg. 
16:  13;  the  Niphal,  D^?.3  1  Kin.  10:  3,  fia^?3  Nah.'3:  11,  d'^Jabr?  iPs!"26:  4; 


112 


BEMAEKS  ON  PE  GUTTUKAL  VERBS. 


153 


and  especially  in  the  Hiphil  preterite  with  Vav  conversive,  Pll^^i^  Job 
14:  19,  nirxni  Deut.  7:  24,  Dniaxni.  Deut.  9:  3  (comp.  OnbDXn  Ps.  80:  6), 
•^n-iaxil'l"  Lev.  23:  30;  "ipi^rNni.  Isa.  49  :  26;  "'Pli^inn  Neh.  5:16,  "'n^pinm 
Ezek.  30:  25;  rptinasn  Isa.'43:  123,  ^I'^n-iSyni  Jer.  17:  4;  'pixn  Deut.  1:  45, 
flDtxni  Ex.  15:  26,  ''nnnti'i  Jer.  49:  37;  after  Vav  conjunctive,  however, 
the  vowels  remain  unchanged,  ""npirivll  1  Sam.  17:  35,  "^nipbClvJl  ^s.  50:  21, 
Neh,  10:  33,  Ezek.  37:  2.  The  change  from  ( )  to  (..__)  after  Vav  con- 
versive occurs  once  in  the  third  person  of  the  Hiphil  preterite,  VTNfl'l  Ps. 
77:  2,  but  is  not  usual,  e.  g.  Tfievll  •  •  •  'i'^""??v!'^.  Lev.  27 :  8.  There  is  one 
instance  of  (...  .)  instead  of  (_  _.)  in  the  Hiphil  infinitive,  '^p'^irin  Jer.  31 :  32. 

4,  A  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va  in  consequence  of  the  rejec- 
tion of  the  vowel  of  a  following  consonant,  will  be  dropped  in  guttural  as 
in  perfect  verbs  upon  the  latter  vowel  being  restored  by  a  pause  accent, 

^^^?,^  ''"■^i,.;  '1'^^?.  ^■''5?' 

5.  Sometimes  the  silent  Sh'va  of  the  perfect  verb  is  retained  by  the 
guttural  instead  of  being  replaced  by  a  compound  Sh'va  or  a  subsidiary 
vowel  which  has  arisen  from  it.  This  is  most  frequent  in  the  Kal  future, 
though  it  occurs  likewise  in  the  Kal  infinitive  after  inseparable  preposi- 
tions, in  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle,  in  the  Hiphil  species,  and  also 
though  rarely  in  the  Hophal.  There  are  examples  of  it  with  all  the  gut- 
turals, though  these  are  most  numerous  in  the  case  of  n,  which  is  the 
strongest  of  that  class  of  letters.  In  the  majority  of  roots  and  forms  there 
is  a  fixed  or  at  least  a  prevailing  usage  in  favour  either  of  the  simple  or 
of  the  compound  Sh'va;  in  some,  however,  the  use  of  one  or  the  other  ap- 
pears to  be  discretionary. 

a.  The  following  verbs  always  take  simple  Sh'va  under  the  first  radical 
in  the  species  whose  initial  letters  are  annexed  to  the  root,  viz.: 

hhn  K.  to  spare. 

bin  K.  Ni.  to  do  vio- 
lence to. 

yhn  K.  to  be  leavened. 

npn  K,  to  ferment. 

T(in  K.  to  dedicate. 

bbn  K.  to  devour. 

dpri  K.  to  muzzle. 

iibn  K.  Hi.  to  lack. 

nsn  Ni.  to  cover. 

TSn  K.  Ni.  to  be  panie- 
strucJc. 

yhn  K.  to  delight, 

•nan  K.  to  dig. 


Ci-iS  Hi.  to  be  red. 

*"i brt  'K.to  injure, loound. 

"I'is  Ni.  Hi.  to  be  illus- 

Xan Ni.  Hi.  Ho.  to  hide. 

trious. 

13 ?n  K.  to  beat  oif. 

tax  Hi.  to  close. 

^nn  Hi.  to  join  together. 

h-js  K.  to  shut. 

^in  K.  to  gird. 

tl^X  K.  to  learn. 

"h^n  K.   (not  Ho.)    to 

lax  K.  to  gird  on. 

cease. 

dlBx  K.  Ni.  (not  Hi.) 

nian  K.  to  cut. 

to  be  guilty. 

n^n  K.  (not  Hi.)  to 

bhii  K.  Hi.  to  be  vain. 

live. 

nin  K.  Hi.  to  meditate. 

con  K.  Hi.  to  be  wise. 

Cinrt  K.  to  thrust. 

*a^n  K.  meaning  doubt- 

•nnn K.  Ni.  to  honour. 

ful. 

njn  K.  Ni.  to  be. 

"lan  K.  Ni.  to  desire. 

-    T 

*  Sii:ai  XsyifAs^^ov, 

154  ETYMOLOaY.  §  H^ 

isn  K.  Hi.  to  blush.        tafin  K.  Ni.  Hi.  to  seal,  bfcs  Hi.  to  be  presump- 

Tusn  K.  Ni.  to  search.      t\hr\  K.  to  seize.  tuous. 

nsn  K.  (notm.)  to  hew.  ^f)n  K.to break  through.  TWps  K.  m.  to  pervert. 

fii-n  K.  Ni.  to  investi-    sb  K.  to  love,  dote.  ^iu»  K.  Hi.  to  tithe. 

gate.  IT^^  K.  <o  jpwf  on  as  an  *Dns  Ni.  to  be  burnt  up. 

♦j-nn  K.  to  tremble.                    ornament.  pb^^  K.  Hi.   to  be  re- 
nnn  K.  to  take  up.          ^^  Hi.  to  gather  much.              moved. 

r^rn  Ni.  to  be  destined.     ^^S  Ni.  to  be  wanting,  ^b^  K.  Ni.  Hi.  to  en. 
Vnn  Ho.  io  be  swaddled,   "iss  K.  Ni.  to  trouble.                 treat. 

-    T  ■  T 

6.  The  following  are  used  with  both  simple  and  compound  Bh'va,  either 
in  the  same  form  or  in  different  forms,  viz.: 

nbx  to  bind.  tion  to  trust.  n6s  to  ivear. 

•nsn  to  turn.  T^iin  to  withhold.  "i6y  to  encircle. 

bbn  to  take  in  pledge.        tipr}  to  uncover.  d^:?  to  conceal. 

tzn  to  bind.  SiBn  to  think.  "is^  to  shut  up,  restrain. 

p'm  to  be  strong.  Tjt'^  to  be  dark.  ap.5  to  supplant. 

nlin  to  be  sick.  ^?»  to  pass  over.  )W  to  smoke. 

pin  to  divide.  ^js  to  help.  ^iiJ5  to  be  rich. 

c.  The  following  have  simple  Sh'va  only  in  the  passages  or  parts  al- 
leged, but  elsewhere  always  compound  Sh'va,  viz.: 

anx  2  Chr.  19:  2,  Pr.  15:  9,  to  love.  "i^H  Ezek.  26:  18,  to  tremble. 

-iTX  Ps.  65 :  7,  to  gird.  Jiibn  Hi.  part,  to  be  silent. 

Cipx  Ps.  47:  10,  to  gather.  mhn  Jer.  49:  37,  to  be  dismayed. 

■n^n  Ps.  109:  23,  to  go.  inS  Eccl.  5:  8,  ^o  serve. 

a^n   2  Kin.  10:  9,  to  slay.  t^S  Jer.  15:  17,  Ps.  149:  5,  and 

tJ^n  Job  39:  4,  Jer.  29:  8,  to  dream,  j'^lj  Ps.  5:  12,  to  exiilt. 

Cjlin  Job  20:  24,  to  change,  pierce.  "^'S  Isa.  44:  7,  to  set  in  order. 

All  other  Pe  guttural  verbs,  if  they  occur  in  forms  requiring  a  Sh'va 
under  the  first  radical,  have  invariably  compound  Sh'va. 

The  use  or  disuse  of  simple  Sh'va  is  so  uniform  and  pervading  in  cer- 
tain verbs,  that  it  must  in  all  probability  be  traced  to  the  fixed  usage  of 
actual  speech.  This  need  not  be  so  in  all  cases,  however,  as  in  other  and 
less  common  words  its  occurrence  or  non-occurrence  may  be  fortuitous; 
additional  examples  might  have  been  pointed  differently. 

§  113.  1.  The  Hhirik  of  the  prefix  is  in  the  Niphal  future,  imperative 
and  participle,  almost  invariably  lengthened  to  Tsere  upon  the  omission  of 
Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical,  "jDn^.,  '^??^^.  ^^^'  23:  18,  'JSli"'  (the  retro- 
cession of  the  accent  by  §  36.  1)  IsaV  28:  27,  pbrr;  Job  38:  24,  ')'■]?«  Num. 

*  ana^  "ksyofisvov.  f  Except  Ps.  44:  22. 


§114-116  AYIN  GUTTUEAL  VERBS.  155 

32:  17,  p^Ti^)  2  Sam.  17:  23,  wliich  is  in  one  instance  expressed  by  the 
vowel  letter  '^,  Mii^'^Fi  Ex.  25:  31.  The  only  exception  is  ini'Z  (two  accents 
explained  by  §  42.  a)  Ezek.  26:  15  for  apnna;  Baer's  edition  has  S^ina. 
According  to  some  copies,  which  differ  in  this  from  the  received  text,  Seghol 
likewise  occurs  in  tTilSX  Job  19:  7,  "ifjiiUi'ti  Ezek.  43:  18,  dpi?)!;"]  1  Chron. 
24:  3,  vli?y3  Lam.  2:11.  In  Job  34:  31  "i^Xli  is  neither  the  infin.  nor  the 
imper.  Niph.,  as  it  has  sometimes  been  explained,  but  the  Kal  pret.  I^X  with 
He  Interrogative,  §  232.  4. 

2.  The  initial  fi  of  the  Hiphil  infinitive  is,  as  in  perfect  verbs,  rarely 
rejected  after  prefixed  prepositions,  as  p3nb  Jer.  37:  12  for  pl?H<iV,  ^"^PD^ 
Eccles.  5  :  5,  "T^hsb  2  Sam.  19  :  19,  'iwh  Deut.  26  :  12,  'iw^  Neh.  10:  39, 
^■^TSb  2  Sam.  18:  3  K'thibh;  and  still  more  rarely  that  of  the  Niphal  infin- 
itive, vlbS'S  Lam.  2:  11  for  t'jsna,  snna  Ezek.  26:  15. 

§  114.  The  letter  "i  resembles  the  other  gutturals  in  not  admitting 
Daghesh-forte,  and  in  requiring  the  previous  vowel  to  be  lengthened  in- 
stead, Ql"i'si  Jon.  1:5,  '135"!'''!  Ps.  106:  25.  In  other  cases,  however,  it  causes 
no  change  in  an  antecedent  Hhirik,  Cj^'i'^  Deut.  19:  6,  l^'y]  2  Sam.  7:  10, 
Fjns'^ri  Ps.  66:  12,  except  in  certain  forms  of  the  verb  fiN'n  to  see,  viz.,  6<"i51 
Kal  future  with  Yav  conversive,  shortened  from  tiN'i'^ ,  nx"irt  which  alter- 
nates with  ns'iri  as  Hiphil  preterite,  and  once  with  Vav  conversive  prete- 
rite, '•ri'^X'^ri'i  Nah.  3:5.  It  is  in  two  instances  preceded  by  Hhirik  in  the 
Hiphil  infinitive,  S''?'!?!,  'T''?'^'!  Jer.  50:  34.  In  the  Hophal  species  the 
participles  tl^'ip  Isa.  14:  6,  HDa'np  Lev.  6:  14  take  Kibbuts  in  the  first  syl- 
lable, but  f^it'^,  ?^"l  have  the  ordinary KametsHhatuph.  Eesh  always  retains 
the  simple  Sh'va  of  perfect  verbs  whether  silent  or  vocal  tfi")  Gen.  44:  4, 
"'SIS'i'i  Ps.  129:  86,  except  in  one  instance,  tp^"^,  Ps.  7:  6,  where  it  appears 
to  receive  Pattahh  furtive  contrary  to  the  ordinary  rule  which  restricts  it 
to  the  end  of  the  word  §  60.  2.  a. 

§  115.  The  verb  bbx  reduplicates  its  last  instead  of  its  second  radical 
in  the  Pual,  ^^^N;  ^rn  reduplicates  its  last  syllable,  I'l^'i?)!  Lam.  2:  11, 
§  92.  a. 

^nn  is  a  secondary  root,  based  upon  the  Hiphil  of  ^5n.    See  3>"5  verbs. 
For  the  peculiar  forms  of  vlbx  and  T^5n  see  the  ''"S  verbs,  Cib"i  and  T^\ 


Attn  Guttueal  Verbs. 

§  116.  Ayin  guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a 
guttural  for  their  second  radical,  are  affected  by  the 
peculiarities  of  these  letters,  §  108,  in  the  following 
manner,  viz.: 

1.  The  influence  of  the  guttural  upon  a  following 
vowel  being  comparatively  shght,  this  latter  is  only  con- 
verted into  Pattahh  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal, 


156  ETYMOLOGY.  §  117,  118 

and  the  feminine  plural  of  the  future  and  imperative 
Niphal,  Piel,  and  Hithpael,  where  the  Hke  change  some- 
times occurs  even  without  the  presence  of  a  guttural 

bkT  for  bier;  nDbxsn  for  nabxnn. 

-;•  :•'  t:-t"  t:"t» 

2.  No  forms  occur  which  could  give  rise  to  Pattahh 
furtive. 

3.  When  the  second  radical  should  receive  simple 
ShVa,  it  takes  Hhateph  Pattahh  instead  as  the  compound 
Sh'va  best  suited  to  its  natiu-e;  and  to  this  the  new  vowel, 
formed  from  Sh'va  in  the  feminine  singular  and  mas- 
cuhne  plural  of  the  Kal  imperative,  is  assimilated,  ''bsa 
for  •'biJlS. 

4.  Daghesh-forte  is  always  omitted  from  the  second 
radical  in  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  in  which  case  the 
preceding  vowel  may  either  remain  short  as  in  an  inter- 
mediate syllable,  or  Hhirik  may  be  lengthened  to  Tsere, 
Pattahh  to  Kamets,  and  Kibbuts  to  Hholem,  §  60.  4, 
in3,  biis. 

§  117.  The  inflections  of  Ayin  guttural  verbs  may  be 
shown  by  the  example  of  bi<3,  (Paradigm  Y.)  which  in 
some  species  means  to  redeem,  and  in  others  to  pollute. 
The  Hiphil  and  Hophal  are  omitted,  as  the  former  agrees 
precisely  with  that  of  perfect  verbs,  and  the  latter  differs 
only  in  the  substitution  of  compound  for  simple  Sh'va  in 
a  manner  sufficiently  illustrated  by  the  foregoing  species. 

a.  The  Pual  infinitive  is  omitted  from  the  paradigm  as  it  is  of  rare 
occurrence,  and  there  is  no  example  of  it  in  this  class  of  verbs.  As  the 
absolute  infinitive  Piel  mostly  gives  up  its  distinctive  form  and  adopts  that 
of  the  construct,  §  92.  d,  it  is  printed  with  Tsere  in  this  and  the  following 
paradigms. 

Remarks  on  Ayin  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  118.  1.  If  the  second  radical  is  ^,  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  com- 
monly have  Hholem;  but  the  following  take  Pattahh,  T^nX  to  be  long,  T^'^a 
to  kneel,  a^n  to  he  dried  or  desolate,  T^n  to  tremble^  t\^r\  to  reproach,  to 


§119 


HEMAEKS  ON  AYIN  GUTTUEAL  VEEBS.  157 


winter,  ynn  to  sharpen,  a^»  (S'T'S)  to  he  sweet,  '^^'^  to  come  near,  t:n|3  to 
cover;  Ci^li  to  tear  in  pieces,  has  either  Hholem  or  Pattahh;  \IJ^n  to  plough 
has  fut.  0,  to  be  silent  has  fut.  a. 

2.  With  any  other  guttural  for  the  second  radical  the  Kal  future  and 
imperative  have  Pattahh;  only  Dnj  to  roar,  and  tnn  to  love,  have  Hholem, 
di>T  to  curse,  hv'O  to  trespass,  and  bi's  to  do,  have  either  Pattahh  or  Hho- 
lem ;  the  future  of  Tnx  to  grasp,  is  trix^^  or  tnxi. 

3.  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  is  as  in  perfect  verhs  commonly  prolonged 
to  Kamets  before  suffixes,  where  Hholem  would  be  rejected,  rjsrj^  Prov. 
4:  6,  b^cjnp":  2  Kin.  10:  14,  D]b™x  2  Sam.  22:  43,  "^i^llixui  Isa,  45:  11,  "'S^f^^'J, 
Gen.  29:  32. 

4.  The  feminine  plurals  of  the  Niphal  and  Piel  futures  have  Pattahh 
with  the  second  radical  whether  this  be  "i  or  another  guttural,  ti;bn3P\  Ezek. 
7:  27,  njsK^an  Prov.  6:  27,  njrnnri  Ezek.  16:  6,  !!^5BX3n  Hos.'4:  13,  but 
Tsere  occasionally  in  pause,  njnnpn  Jer.  9:  17. 

§  119.  1.  With  these  exceptions  the  vowel  accompanying  the  guttural 
is  the  same  as  in  the  perfect  verb;  thus  the  Kal  preterite  mid.  e  s^i^.X 
Gen.  27:  9,  rpnx  Deut.  15:  16;  infinitive  p'i'1  1  Sam.  7:  8,  srip  Jer.  15:  3, 
with  Makkeph,  "nns  1  Kin.  5:  20;  Niphal  infinitive,  Cn^n  Ex.  IT:  10,  with 
suffixes,  '^\''^^^  2  Chron.  16:  7,  8,  with  prefixed  3,  dH1=3  Judg.  11:  25,  Vxa? 
1  Sam.  20:  6,  28,  and  once  anomalously  with  prefixed  N,  ti'i'nx  Ezek.  14:  3 
(a  like  substitution  of  X  for  n  occurring  once  in  the  Hiphil  preterite  !  "^r^^XSiX 
Isa.  63:  3);  future  CnS"^  Ex.  14:  14,  with  Vav  conversive,  :0Xa''1  Job  7:  5, 
hh'p^  Ex.  32:  1,  p">-T''1  Judg.  6:  34,  instni  Ex.  9:  15,  ]-TSni  Num.  22:  25, 
or  with  the  accent  on  the  penult,  fin|'^i  Ex.  17:  8,  crsni  Gen.  41:8; 
imperative,  tin'^ri  1  Sam.  18:  17,  or  Avith  the  accent  thrown  back,  'T}B'7 
Gen.  13:  9;  Hiphil  infinitive,  'Cik'l'n  1  Sam.  27:  12,  pTpT}  Gen.  21:  16,  nnnn 
Deut.  7:  2,  apocopated  future,  DSi;!  1  Sam.  2:  10,  nncn  Deut.  9:  26,  nna^  Ps. 
12:  4,  with  Vav  conversive,  0^;;^1  1  Kin.  22:  54,  Tnaxn  Zech.  11:  8;  impera- 
tive, nSpn  Ex.  28:  1,  with  Makkeph,  "nn-in  Ps.  81  :*  11,  'p^]^  2  Sam.  20:  4, 
-bripri  Deut.  4:  10,  with  a  pause  accent  the  last  vowel  sometimes  becomes 
Pattahh,  Pp'^Li  Job  13:  21,  n^?:n  Ps.  69:  24,  though  not  always,  ^r^.Pv?  Lev. 
8:  3.  Hophai  infinitive,  nSnn  2  Kin.  3:  23.  Tsere  is  commonly  retained  in 
the  last  syllable  of  the  Piel  and  Hithpael,  which  upon  the  retrocession  or 
loss  of  the  accent  is  shortened  to  Seghol,  Tlins  Lev.  5:  22,  lynri"^  Hos.  9:  2, 
pnk>  Gen.  39:  14,  "pnbb  Ps.  104:  26,  ri'ih";  74:  10,  n-iij-^^  Gen.  39:  4,  BSSntni 
Dan.  2:  1,  2';;ivnn  2  kin.  18:  23,  and  occasionally  before  sufiixes  to  Hhirik, 
dbto-iQ  Isa.  1:  15,  '.^'n'J'l'O  (fem.  form  for  ^inri:^2T3,  §  61.  5)  1  Sam.  16:  15  but 
DSpn'nb  Isa.  30:  18,  Ci^nri'^j  Ezek.  5:  16;  in  a  few  instances,  however,  as  in 
the  perfect  verb,  Pattahh  is  taken  instead,  thus  in  the  preterite,  Utib  Mai. 
3:  19,  dn-i  Ps.  103:  13,  ptnn  Isa.  6:  12,  irnx  Deut.  20:  7,  rp?  Gen.  24:  1 
(Tl'na  rarely  occurs  except  in  pause),  UJ^S  Isa.  25:  11,  and  more  rarely  still 
in  the  imperative,  :in;^  Ezek.  37:  17,  and  future  ^IJJH'^.  Prov.  14:  10,  hk^Tp^, 
ih^^ry^  Dan.  1:  8. 

2.  hkv,  which  has  Kamets  in  pause,  bXTij,  iVxia,  but  most  commonly 
Tsere  before  suffixes,   r,bxd,   >i3>l'iN'a,    exhibits  the  peculiar   forms,   Qin^N'a 


158  ETYMOLOGY.  §  120,  121 

1  Sam.  12:  13    Jl'^ln^X'^y   1  Sam.  1:  20,    iirr^l^bNl^  Judg.  13:  6,    sUT^Fibxtrt 
1  Sam.  1 :  28. 

3.  Kamets  Hhatuph  sometimes  remains  before  the  guttural  in  the  Kal 
imperative  and  infinitive  with  suffixes  or  appended  rt,  dhrix  Hos.  9:  10, 
r)3N3  Kuth  3:  13,  tDOX^  Am.  2:  4,  CidDX^  (by  §  61.  1)  Isa.  Vo'^  12,  tih'2'y^^ 
Deut.  20:  2  (the  alternate  form  being  Dinnp  Josh.  22:  16),  M^nn  Ex.  30:18, 
iijrHi  Ezek.  8:  6,  and  sometimes  is  changed  to  Pattahh,  "jb^lT  Isa.  57:  13, 
ti^V:?  Ezek.  20:  27,  non'^zj  Hos.  5:  2,  nhlix  Deut.  10:  15,  nhnji  Jer.  31:  12, 
or  with  simple  Sh'va  under  the  guttural,  T|^3>2  Ps.  68 :  8,  issiT  2  Chron. 
26:  19.  In  tirr'T  Num.  23:  7,  Kamets  Hhatuph  is  lengthened  to  Hholem  in 
the  simple  syllable.  Once  the  paragogic  imperative  takes  the  form  iibXTC 
Isa.  7:  11,  comp.  Sin^O,  TO^Tp  Dan.  9:  19,  nxs"!  Ps.  41:  5. 

4.  Hhirik  of  the  inflected  Kal  imperative  is  retained  before  *i,  irTiS 
Josh.  9:  6,  and  once  before  n,  ^Trt^  Job  6:  22;  when  the  first  radical  is  H 
it  becomes  Seghol,  ^'^k}^  Ps.  31:  24,  "ItriX  Cant.  2:  15;  in  other  cases  it  is 
changed  to  Pattahh,  -"ipyt  Isa.  14:  31,  !ip?t  Judg.  10:  14. 

§  120.  1.  The  compound  Sh'va  after  Kamets  Hhatuph  is  (^ ),  after 
Seghol  (.„),  in  other  cases  (  ),  as  is  sufficiently  shown  by  the  examples  al- 
ready adduced.  Exceptions  are  rare,  '^fO'^  Buth  3:  15,  ''nril^Pi  Ezek.  16;  33, 
sinnsn'i  t/'thd°rehu  Isa.  44:  13. 

2.  The  letter  before  the  guttural  receives  compound  Sh'va  in  priS^ 
Gen.  21:  6;  in  ^i<^N3  Ezek.  9:  8,  this  leads  to  the  prolongation  of  the 
preceding  vowel  and  its  expression  by  the  vowel  letter  X,  §  11,  1.  a.  This 
latter  form,  though  without  an  exact  parallel,  is  thus  susceptible  of  ready 
explanation,  and  there  is  no  need  of  resorting  to  the  hypothesis  of  an  error 
in  the  text  or  a  confusion  of  two  distinct  readings,  li<03  and  "iSU3x. 

3.  Resh  commonly  receives  simple  Sh'va,  though  it  has  compound  in 
Bome  forms  of  T^na,  e.  g.  ^3^nn  Num.  6:  23,  '1=^3  Gen.  27:  27. 

§  121.  1.  Upon  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte  fi-om  the  second  radical 
the  previous  vowel  is  always  lengthened  before  "i,  almost  always  before 
it,  and  prevailingly  before  2>,  but  rarely  before  tl  or  U.  The  previous  vowel 
remains  short  in  n?a  to  terrify,  Dys  to  provolce,  Xi'V'O  to  be  few,  ^Si  to 
shake,  and  p?2  to  cry.  It  is  sometimes  lengthened,  though  not  always,  in 
*1X3  to  make  plain,  &i^3  to  commit  adultery,  yki  to  despise,  1X3  to  reject, 
bk'W  to  ask;  lya  to  consume,  lyb  to  sweep  away  by  a  tempest,  a'^ri  to  abhor; 
Vina  to  affright,  inihs  to  be  dim,  bhi  to  lead.  It  is  also  lengthened  in  mnj? 
to  be  dull,  which  only  occurs  Eccl.  10:  10.  The  only  instances  of  the  pro- 
longation of  the  vowel  before  n  are  Un^  Pi.  inf.  Judg.  5:  8,  "na  Pu.  pret. 
Ezek.  21:  18,  >l)i^  Pu.  pret.  Ps.  36:  13,  imn-inn  Job  9:  30,  the  first  two  of 
which  may,  however,  be  regarded  as  nouns.  Daghesh-forte  is  retained  and 
the  vowel  consequently  remains  short  in  nViS  Ezek.  16:  4,  i^iN"!  Job  33:  21, 
unless  the  point  in  the  latter  example  is  to  be  regarded  as  Mappik,  §  26. 

2.  When  not  lengthened,  Hhirik  of  the  Piel  preterite  commonly  re- 
mains unaltered  before   the  guttural,    I'Hns  Job  15:  18,   iriri"^  Jer.  12:  10, 


§  122,  123     LAMEDH  GUTTUEAL  VERBS.  159 

though  it  is  in  two  instances  changed  to  Seghol,  ^ntiK  Judg.  5 :  28,  ''?t!'?l^)! 
Ps.  51 :  7. 

3.  When  under  the  influence  of  a  pause  accent  the  guttural  receives 
Kamets,  a  preceding  Pattahh  is  converted  to  Seghol,  §  63.  1.  a,  ''Pi^n^fi 
Ezek.  5:  13,  0^.3^'!  Num.  23:  19,  :n'iL3ri  Num.  8:  7. 

§  122.  1.  "jisJ"!  and  13X113  are  Piel  forms  with  the  third  radical  redupli- 
cated in  place  of  the  second;  "in"irit3  doubles  the  second  syllable;  and  ^'^i2^ 
lari  Hos.  4:  18,  is  by  the  ablest  Hebraists  regarded  as  one  word,  the  last 
two  radicals  being  reduplicated  together  with  the  personal  ending,  §  92.  a. 

2.  irbd  and  1^0  liave  two  forms  of  the  Piel,  V^'O  and  W'niu,  ijjp  and 
^Vb,  §  92.  b.;  and  UJi'a  two  forms  of  the  Hithpael,  Tijysn"^,  ^'C^r\1  Jer.  46: 
7.  8;  '."I'XbTa  Isa.  52:  5,  follows  the  analogy  of  the  latter;  "j'Nr  Eccl.  12:  5, 
is  sometimes  derived  from  yxj  to  despise,  as  if  it  were  for  'j^'^i*?^;  such  a 
form  would  however  be  unexampled.  The  vowels  show  it  to  be  the  Hiphil 
future  of  y^2  or  rather  yia  to  flourish  or  blossom,  the  t^  being  inserted  as 
a  vowel  lettei-,  §  11.  1,  a,  siBxJJ  Isa.  59:  3,  Lam.  4:  14  is  a  Niphal  formed 
upon  the  basis  of  a  Pual,  §  83.  c.  (2).  'SiV^i'-i  Ezra  10:  16  is  an  anomalous 
infinitive  from  UJ'h'n,  which  some  regard  as  Kal,  others  as  Piel. 


Lamedh  Guttueal  Veebs. 

§  123.  Lamedh  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whicli  have 
a  guttural  for  their  third  radical,  are  affected  by  the 
pecuharities  of  these  letters,  §  108,  in  the  following 
manner,  viz.: 

1.  The  vowel  preceding  the  third  radical  becomes 
Pattahh  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal,  and  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  Piel,  Hiphil, 
and  Hithpael,  nbt\ 

2.  Tsere  preceding  the  third  radical,  as  in  the  Piel 
and  Hithpael  and  in  some  forms  of  the  other  species, 
may  either  be  changed  to  Pattahh  or  retained;  in  the 
latter  case  the  guttural  takes  Pattahh-furtive,  §  17,  after 
the  long  heterogeneous  vowel,  e.  g.  'ni'&]  or  t^,'0\ 

3.  Hhirik  of  the  Hiphil  species,  Hholem  of  the  Kal 
and  Niphal  infinitives,  and  Shurek  of  the  Kal  passive 
participle,  suffer  no  change  before  the  final  guttural, 
which  receives  a  Pattahh-furtive,  Jl''^i^»7>  T^^^' 


160  ETYMOLOGY.  §  124,  125 

4.  The  guttural  retains  the  simple  ShVa  of  the  per- 
fect verb  before  aU  afformatives  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, though  compound  ShVa  is  substituted  for  it  be- 
fore suffixes,  which  are  less  closely  attached  to  the  verb, 

5.  A^Tien,  however,  a  personal  afformative  consists  of 
a  single  vowelless  letter,  as  in  the  second  feminine  sin- 
gular of  the  preterite,  the  guttural  receives  a  Pattahh- 
furtive  to  aid  in  its  pronunciation  without  sundering  it 
from  the  affixed  termination,  TiTd^. 

a.  Some  grammarians  regard  this  as  a  Pattahh  inserted  between  the 
guttural  and  the  final  vowelless  consonant  by  §  61.  2,  and  accordingly 
pronounce  fin^O  shdlahhat  instead  of  shdla"'Jtht.  But  as  these  verbs  do 
not  suffer  even  a  compound  Sh'va  to  be  inserted  before  the  affixed  per- 
sonal termination,  it  is  scarcely  probable  that  a  full  vowel  would  be  ad- 
mitted. And  the  Daghesh-lene  in  the  final  Tav  and  the  Sh'va  under  it 
show  that  the  preceding  vowel  sign  is  not  Pattahh  but  Pattahh-furtive, 
§  17.  a. 

6.  There  is  no  occasion  in  these  verbs  for  the  apphca- 
tion  of  the  rule  requiring  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte 
from  the  gutturals. 

§  124.  The  inflections  of  Lamedh  guttural  verbs  may 
be  represented  by  n5i2  to  send  (Paradigm  VI).  The  Pual 
and  Hophal,  which  agree  with  perfect  verbs  except  in 
the  Pattahh-furtive  of  the  second  feminine  preterite  and 
of  the  absolute  infinitive,  are  omitted  from  the  paradigm. 
The  Hithpael  of  this  verb  does  not  occur,  but  is  here 
formed  from  analogy,  the  initial  sibilant  being  transposed 
with  T\  of  the  prefix,  according  to  §  82.  5. 

a.  Instead  of  the  Niphal  infinitive  absolute  with  prefixed  M,  which  does 
not  happen  to  occur  in  any  verb  of  this  class,  the  alternate  form  with  pre- 
fixed 3,  §  91.  b,  is  given  in  the  paradigm,  fj'iiii^  being  in  actual  use. 

Remaeks  on  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  125.  1.  The  Kal  future  and  imperative  have  Pattahh  except  n'ia  Gen. 
43:  16;  in  one  instance  the  K'thibh  inserts  1,  ni^DX  Jer.  5:  7,  where  the 


§126 


EEMAEKS  ON  LAMEDH  GUTTUEAL  VERBS.      161 


K'ri  is  "rtpX.  The  vowel  a  i3  retained  before  suffixes,  remaining  short 
in  DSS2  Am.  9:  1,  but  usually  lengthened  to  Kamets,  fiWI^S"!  2  Chron.  21 :  17, 
ijyai^  Gen.  23:  11.  It  is  also  retained  in  pause  before  paragogic  n  ,  n;5?SX 
Ps.  77:  2,  nnVo,  raiia  Dan.  9:  19;  elsewhere  it  is  rejected  fin^dx  2  Sam. 
14:  32,  and  in  the  imperative  Hhirik  is  given  to  the  first  radical,  -ns"^;^ 
Job  32:  10,  nnb^  Gen.  43:  8.  Hhirik  appears  in  nnap  Gen.  25:  31,  but 
verbs  whose  last  radical  is  1  commonly  take  Kamets  Hhatuph  like  perfect 
verbs  both  before  paragogic  n^,  and  suffixes,  "m^d  1  Chron.  29:  18,  thwp 
Prov.  3:3. 

2.  The  Kal  infinitive  construct  mostly  has  o,  S'Bslp  Jon.  2:  1,  t?"!?!?  Num. 
17:  28,  ~iSJ  Isa.  54:  9,  rarely  a,  nB'>p  Isa.  58:  9,  515  Num.  20:  3,  ^rjnir^  1  Sam. 
15:  1.  With  a  feminine  ending,  the  first  .syllable  takes  Kamets  Hhatuph, 
ntnaa  Zeph.  3:  11;  so  sometimes  before  suffixes,  iriat  2  Sam.  15:  12,  "'SJ^TZJ 
Neh.  1:  4,  oisJ^)!!:  Josh.  6:  5,  but  more  commonly  Hhirik,  CSJpa  Am.  1:  13, 
•ii'JQ  Num.  35:  19,  irins  Neh.  8:  5,  rarely  Pattahh,  T]:;pn  Ezek.  25:  6. 

3.  Most  verbs  with  final  1  have  Hholem  in  the  Kal  future  and  impera- 
tive. But  such  as  have  middle  e  in  the  preterite  take  Pattahh,  §  82.  1.  a; 
and  in  addition  the  following,  viz.:  "liiX  to  shut,  Tax  to  say,  "iTrt  to  honour, 
"lin  to  grow  pale,  "inj  to  shake,  "lis  to  be  rich,  "^hs  to  entreat,  "lijc  to  slip 
aivay,  ^^3  to  press,  "liiy  to  drink  or  he  drunken.  The  following  have 
Pattahh  or  Hholem,  "ib  to  decree,  "TiJ  to  voio,  "i3p  fut.  o,  to  reap,  fut.  a, 
to  be  short. 

§  126.  1.  Tsere  is  almost  always  changed  to  Pattahh  before  the  guttural 
in  the  preterite,  infinitive  construct,  future  and  imperative;  but  it  is  re- 
tained and  Pattahh-furtive  given  to  the  guttural  in  pause,  and  in  the  in- 
finitive absolute  and  participle  which  partake  of  the  character  of  nouns 
and  prefer  lengthened  forms.  Thus,  Niphal:  infin.  constr.,  ybdr]  Esth. 
2:  8,  nrsn  isa.  51:  14,  future,  nblT'^  Ps.  9:  19,  irpTi'i  Job  17:  3,'impera- 
tive,  even  in  pause,  risxn.  Piel:  preterite,  n|j  Lev.  14:  8,  S-[5  2  Chron. 
34:  4,  infin.  constr.,  2>|a  Hab.  1:  13,  s|3  Lam.  2:  8,  future,  n|Si*Job  16:  13, 
:?;5riPl  2  Kin.  8:  12,  ")li>^5n  Deut.  7:  5",  imperative,  t\\6  Ex.  4:  23.  Hiphil: 
apocopated  future,  nbn^  2  Kin.  18:  30,  fut.  with  Vav  consecutive,  v'yy^'\ 
Judg.  4:  23,  fern,  plur.,  tijsan  Ps.  119:  171,  imperative,  sijin  Ps.  86:  2, 
and  even  in  pause,  n^^Jti  l  Kin.  22:  12.  Hithpael:  2>|5rirt  Prov.  17:  14, 
'^?3n'^  Dan.  11:  40,  IjSWiJn  Ps.  106:  47;  this  species  sometimes  has  Kamets 
in  its  pausal  forms,  ^"isapri  Josh.  9:  13,  :35|ann  Ps.  107:  27.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  absolute  infinitives:  Piel,  tjz;d  Deut.  22:  7,  Hiphil,  iiias^)  Isa. 
7:  11,  Hophal,  n^^ri  Ezek.  16:  4.  Participles:  Kal,  niiin  Deut.  28:  52,  but 
occasionally  in  the  construct  state  with  Pattahh,  Sub  Ps.  94:  9,  5>i'l  Isa. 
51:  15,  rp  Isa.  42:  5,  i'fa'ii  Lev.  11:  7,  Piel,  r\%V2  1  Kin.  3:  3,  Hithpael, 
i'srnL'ri  1  Sam.  21:  15.  Tsere  is  retained  before  suffixes  of  the  second  person 
instead  of  being  either  changed  to  Pattahh  or  as  in  perfect  verbs  short- 
ened to  Seghol,  Pi.  inf.  const.  ^n^JO  Deut.  15:  18,  fut.  ^nk^ax  Gen.  31:  27. 
There  is  one  instance  of  Pattahh  in  the  Hiphil  inf.  const.,  niin  Job  6:  26, 
and  one  before  a  grave  suffix  fiDlSin  Ezek.  21:  29,  comp.  fut.  dDSd"^  Isa. 
35:  4;  ISSn  1  Sam.  15:  23  Hiph.  abs.  inf.  in  pause  is  by  §  65.  a. 

11 


162  ETYMOLOGY.  §  127-129 

2.  In  verbs  with  final  1  Pattahh  takes  tlie  place  of  Tsere  for  the  most 
part  in  the  Piel  preterite  (in  pause  Tsere),  and  frequently  in  the  Hithpael 
(in  pause  Kamets);  but  Tsere  (in  pause  Tsere  or  Pattahh,  §  65.  a)  is  com- 
monly retained  elsewhere,  12^  Ps.  76:  4,  :"i3^  Ex.  9:  25,  "i^tirn  Prov.  25:  6, 
l^xnri  Ps.  93:  1,  "iibx^.  Gen.  22:  14,  IpS';'.  Gen.  10:  19,  :"ip?.?jr|  Zeph.  2:  4. 
Two  verbs  have  Seghol  in  the  Piel  preterite,  "i3'i  (in  pause,  "i3'n)  and  "M. 

§  127.  1.  The  guttural  almost  always  has  Pattahh-furtive  in  the  second 
fern.  sing,  of  the  preterite,  FiS^lU  Kuth  2:  8,  :Pi?5':j  Ezek.  16:  28,  FirJ,!"!  Esth. 
4:  14,  Pri^-^n  Ezek.  16:  4,  scarcely  ever  simple  Sh'va,  PHp^  1  Kin.  14:  3, 
Piniia  Jer.  13:  5,  and  never  Pattahh  (which  might  arise  from  the  concur- 
rence of  consonants  at  the  end  of  a  word,  §  61.  2),  unless  in  rri~b  Gen. 
30:  15,  and  mrjDa  Gen.  20:  16,  the  former  of  which  admits  of  ready  ex- 
planation as  a  construct  infinitive,  and  the  latter  may  be  a  Niphal  participle 
in  the  feminine  singular,  whether  it  be  understood  it  is  rectified  or  thou 
art  righted,  i.  e.  justice  is  done  thee  by  this  indemnification.  Pattahh  is 
once  inserted  before  the  abbreviated  termination  of  the  feminine  plural 
imperative,  'shv  Gen.  4:  23  for  i13"tiiJ. 

2.  The  guttural  takes  compound  instead  of  simple  Sh'va  before  suffixes, 
not  only  when  it  stands  at  the  end  of  the  verb,  5^"3^  Num.  24:  11,  r^^Sw'"] 
Prov.  25:  17,  but  also  in  the  first  plural  of  the  preterite,  ^^injDTT  Ps.  44:  18 
(^jriDiy  ver.  21),  Isa.  59:  12,  Ps.  35:  25,  2  Sam.  21:  6,  Ps.  132:  6;  "i  retains 
simple  Sh'va  before  all  personal  terminations  and  suffixes,  Fi*p5<  Judg.  4 :  20, 
Q3-i^X  Mai.  1:  7,  tDS-inr  Josh.  4:  23. 

3.  In  a  few  exceptional  cases  the  letter  before  the  guttural  receives 
compound  Sh'va,  ni;JSX  Isa.  27:  4,  ""T^i^.^  Gen.  2:  23. 

§  128.  The  Hiphil  infinitive  construct  once  has  the  feminine  ending  M, 
TOi'^'rn  Ezek.  24:  26;  rij^nasril  Ezek.  16:  50  for  njnbw  perhaps  owes 
its  anomalous  form  to  its  being  assimilated  in  termination  to  the  following 
word,  which  is  a  Lamedh  He  verb.  In  ilplUS  Am.  8:  8  K'thibh  for  t^^pi:^? 
the  guttural  S  is  ehded,  §  53.  3. 

Pe  Nun  (]"t>)  Verbs. 

§  129.  Nun,  as  the  first  radical  of  verbs,  has  two 
peculiarities,  viz.: 

1.  At  the  end  of  a  syllable  it  is  assimilated  to  the 
following  consonant,  the  two  letters  being  written  as  one, 
and  the  doubling  indicated  by  Daghesh-forte.  This  oc- 
curs in  the  Kal  future,  Niphal  preterite  and  participle, 
and  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species  throughout;  thus, 
irhT  becomes  ^y.r,  written  UJB^,  so  UJ3D  for  U:^p3,  iL'^h'Tl  for 
■ffi'^bn.  In  the  Hophal,  Kamets  Hhatuph  becomes  Kibbuts 
before  the  doubled  letter,  §  61.  5,  thtl  for  liJiiri. 


§  130,  131     EEMAEKS  ON  PE  NUN  VERBS.  163 

2.  In  the  Kal  imperative  with  Pattahh  it  is  frequently 
dropped,  its  sound  being  easily  lost  from  the  beginning 
of  a  syllable  when  it  is  without  a  vowel,  IZia  for  iri:,  §  53. 2. 
A  like  rejection  occurs  in  the  Kal  mfinitive  construct  of 
a  few  verbs,  the  abbreviation  being  in  this  case  compens- 
ated by  adding  the  feminine  termination  T\;  thus,  tTsh 
for  ri'Jih  (by  §  63.  2.  a),  the  primary  form  being  I2ji]. 

a.  In  the  Indo-European  languages  likewise,  n  is  frequentlj'^  conformed 
to  or  affected  by  a  following  consonant,  and  in  certain  circumstances  it  is 
liable  to  rejection,  e.  g.  iy/pixipco,   sjul^ccXKu,  auuTpsipca. 

§  130.  1.  The  inflections  of  Pe  Nun  verbs  may  be 
represented  by  llifo  to  approach  (Paradigm  VII).  In  the 
Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  they  do  not  differ  from  perfect 
verbs.  The  last  column  of  the  paradigm  is  occupied  by 
the  Kal  species  of  "jnD  to  give,  which  is  pecuhar  in  assi- 
milating its  last  as  weU  as  its  first  radical,  and  in  having 
Tsere  in  the  future. 

a.  The  Kal  of  1IJ53  is  used  only  in  the  infinitive,  future,  and  imperative, 
the  preterite  and  participle  being  supplied  by  the  KiphaJ,  which  has  sub- 
stantially the  same  sense;  the  missing  parts  are  in  the  paradigm  supplied 
from  analogy. 

h.  The  future  of  ')r3  has  Pattahh  in  one  instance  before  Makkeph,  "Fia 
Judg.  16:  5. 

Eemaeks  on  Pe  Nun  Verbs. 

§  131.  1,  If  the  second  radical  be  a  guttural  or  a  vowel  letter,  Nun  be- 
comes strong  by  contrast  and  is  not  liable  to  rejection  or  assimilation, 
Vrii  Num.  34:  18,  Sri?  2  Kin.  4:  24,  '^:ri3r!  Gen.  24:  48,  inijN;  Ex.  15:  2.  It 
is,  however,  always  assimilated  in  cfj?  the  Niphal  preterite  of  Dri3  to  repent, 
and  occasionally  in  riri3  to  descend,  e.  g.  TTT]  Jer.  21:  13,  ^irin  Prov.  17:  10, 
iinnj  Ps.  38:  3  but  nri5n  ibid.,  nwn  Joel  4:  ll. 

2.  Before  other  consonants  the  rule  for  assimilation  is  observed  with 
rare  exceptions,  viz.:  ;Tir53n  Isa.  58:  3,  r|H?ri  Ps.  68:  3,  ^I'iij?']  Jer.  3:  5, 
nni^?'^  Deut.  33:  9  (and  occasionally  elsewhere),  "31^3"^  Job  40:  24,  nsj^3'i 
Isa.' 29:  1,  Ti'Fi.SlI  Ezek.  22:  20,  bc3^  (for  b^3n>)  Num.  5:  22,  ^,r^33  (for 
^jribsns  with  Daghesh-forte  separative,  §  24.  5)  Isa.  33: 1,  IpMH  Judg.  20:  31. 

3.  Nun  is  commonly  rejected  from  the  Kal  imperative  with  a,  tJa  2  Sara. 
1:  15  (once  before  Makkeph,  "d^  Gen.  19:9,  in  plural  li'S  1  Kin.  18:  30  and 
in  order  to  permit  the  retrocession  of  the  accent,  §  35.  1,   TO5  Josh.  3:  9, 

11* 


164  ETYMOLOGY.  §  132 

1  Sam.  14:  38),  "Vr  Ex.  3:  5,  S?5  Job  1:  11,  ^i'ti  Deut.  2:  24,  '')r:Q  Ezek.  37:  9, 
"npTTI  Gen.  27:  26,  though  it  is  occasionally  retained,  >iya3  2  Kin.  19:  29, 
M\b3  Ps.  10:  12,  or  by  a  variant  orthography,  tifas  Vs.  4:  7  but  always  else- 
where 5<t3.  In  imperatives  with  0,  and  in  Lamedh  He  verbs  which  have  e 
in  the  imperative,  Nun  is  invariably  retained,  UiiaS  Prov.  17:  14,  12£3  Pa. 
24:  14,  Dp?  Num.  31:  2,  yn!  Ps.  58:  7,  nipJ  Gen.  30:  27,  tib  Ex.  8:  1." 

4.  The  rejection  of  Nun  from  the  Kal  construct  infinitive  occurs  in  but 
few  verbs;  viz.:  f^ds  (with  suffix,  iiniyy)  from  Ui53,  rJlB  from  HEJ,  n^a  (twice) 
and  ra?  from  2?i3,  n?!?  (once)  and  ?b3  fromS-Jj,  Ni^J  has  nkb  (by  §  60.  3.  c), 
with  tile  preposition  \,  nxBl;  by  §  57.  2.  (3),  once  nb  (§  53.  3)  Job  41:  17, 
once  without  the  feminine  ending,  XiiU  Ps.  89:  10,  and  twice  K05;  "J^iS  has 
commonly  nPi  (for  nh),  with  suffixes  ■'fin,  but  "jn?  Num.  20:  21,  and  ""jnj 
Gen.  38:  9. 

5.  The  absolute  infinitive  Niphal  appears  in  the  two  forms  "jfiSJl  Jer. 
32:  4,  and  tf\ii  Judg.  20:  39. 

6.  The  r\  of  the  prefix  in  the  Hithpael  species  is  in  a  few  instances 
assimilated  to  the  first  radical,  §  82.  5.  a,  "^PfUViSTi  Ezek.  5:  13,  ''ns<3_sn  Ezek. 
37:  10,  Jer,  23:  13,  xikstn  Num.  24:  7,  Dan.  11:  14,  syxs^  Isa.  52:  5. 

§  132.  1.  The  last  radical  of  )'h'3  is  assimilated  in  the  Niphal  as  well  as 
in  the  Kal  species,  DririJ  Lev.  26:  25.  The  final  Nun  of  other  verbs  remains 
without  assimilation,  P?^,  W?'^,  f^?!??.  In  2  Sam.  22:  41  nnn  is  for  njnna 
which  is  found  in  the  parallel  passage  Ps.  18:  41.  *|fnPl  1  Kin.  6:  19.  17:  14 
K'thibh,  is  probably,  as  explained  by  Ewald,  the  Kal  construct  infinitive 
without  the  feminine  ending  Cjin)  prolonged  by  reduplication,  which  is  the 
case  with  some  other  short  words,  e.  g.  ^sis'a  from  ')P,  '^B'^ri  for  "i^;  others 
regard  it  as  the  infinitive  TFi  with  the  3  fern.  plur.  suffix  or  with  )  paragogic; 
Gesenius  takes  it  to  be,  as  always  elsewhere,  the  2  masc.  sing,  of  the  Kal 
future.  riDn  is  the  imper.  with  parag.  fl^  except  in  Ps.  8:  2,  where  it  is  the 
Kal  const,  inf.  with  the  fem.  ending  il^  instead  of  n,  comp.  iTn"i  Gen.  46:  3. 

2.  The  peculiarities  of  Pe  Nun  verbs  are  shared  by  npV  to  take,  whose 
first  radical  is  assimilated  or  rejected  in  the  same  manner  as  3,  Kal  inf. 
const,  rnf:  (with  prep,  b,  I^Hp^,  to  be  distinguished  from  Snpb  2  fem.  sing, 
pret.),  once  -ntip  (by  §  60.  3.  c)  2  Kin.  12:  9,  with  suffixes  "iPinp,  fut.  H;?";, 
imper.  Up,  "^np  rarely  npl?,  ^hph,  Hoph.  fut.  np^,  but  Niph.  pret.  np^3.  In 
Hos.  11:  3  bnp  is  the  masculine  infinitive  with  the  suffix  for  Di'nnp;  the 
same  form  occurs  without  a  suffix,  np  Ezek,  17:  5,  or  this  may  be  explained 
with  Gesenius  as  a  preterite  for  Jipb. 

3.  In  Isa.  64:  5  ^331  has  the  form  of  a  Hiphil  future  from  ^^3,  but  the 
sense  shows  it  to  be  from  b^i  for  Is^SI,  Daghesh-forte  being  omitted  and 
the  previous  vowel  lengthened  in  consequence,  §  59.  a. 

Ayin  Doubled  (3>"3?)  Yeebs. 

§  133.  The  imperfect  verbs,  thus  far  considered,  differ 
from  the  perfect  verbs  either  in  the  vowels  alone  or  in 


§134,135  AYIN  DOUBLED  VEEBS.  165 

the  consonants  alone;  those  which  follow,  differ  in  both 
vowels  and  consonants,  §  107,  and  consequently  depart 
much  more  seriously  from  the  standard  paradigm.  The 
widest  divergence  of  all  is  found  in  the  Ayin  doubled 
and  Ayin  Vav  verbs,  in  both  of  which  the  root  gives  up 
its  dissyllabic  character  and  is  converted  into  a  mono- 
syllable; a  common  feature,  which  gives  rise  to  many 
striking  resemblances  and  even  to  an  occasional  inter- 
change of  forms. 

§  134.  1.  In  explaining  the  inflections  peculiar  to  Ayin 
doubled  verbs,  it  will  be  most  convenient  to  separate  the 
intensive  species  Piel  and  Pual  with  their  derivative  the 
Hithpael  from  the  other  four.  That  which  gives  rise  to 
all  their  peculiar  forms  in  the  Kal,  Niphal,  Hipliil,  and 
Hophal  species,  is  the  disposition  to  avoid  the  repetition 
of  the  same  sound  by  uniting  the  two  similar  radicals 
and  giving  the  intervening  vowel  to  the  previous  letter, 
thus,  no  for  nnc,  ZO  for  nzD  §  61.  3. 

2.  In  the  Kal  species  this  contraction  is  optional  in 
the  preterite;  it  is  rare  in  the  infinitive  absolute  though 
usual  in  the  construct,  and  it  never  occurs  in  the  parti- 
ciples. With  these  exceptions,  it  is  imiversal  in  the  spe- 
cies already  named. 

§  135.  This  contraction  produces  certain  changes  both 
in  the  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back,  and  in  that  of  the 
preceding  syllable. 

1.  When  the  first  radical  has  a  pretonic  Kamets, 
§  82. 1,  as  in  the  Kal  preterite  and  infinitive  absolute,  and 
in  the  Niphal  infinitive,  future  and  imperative,  this  is 
simply  displaced  by  the  vowel  thrown  back  from  the 
second  radical,  thus  nio,  ID,  nino,  nb;  ^n'QTl,  Tibtl; 
2nDn,  nsn. 

••   T     •   '  ••      • 

2.  When  the  first  radical  ends  a  mixed  syllable  as  in 
the  Kal  future,  the  Niphal  preterite,  and  throughout  the 


16G  ETYMOLOGY.  §  135 

Hiphil  and  Hophal,  this  will  be  converted  into  a  simple 
syllable  by  the  shifting  of  the  vowel  from  the  second 
radical  to  the  first,  whence  arise  the  following  mutations: 

In  the  Kal  future  nliC';  becomes  ib"^.  with  Hn  a  simple 
syllable,  contrary  to  §  18.  2.  This  may,  however,  be  con- 
verted mto  a  mixed  syllable  by  means  of  Daghesh-forte, 
and  the  short  vowel  be  retained,  thus  ib^;  or  the  syllable 
may  remain  simple  and  the  vowel  be  lengthened  from 
Hhirik  to  Tsere,  §  59,  thus,  in  verbs  fut.  a,  TJ";  for  "1*1 52';; 
or  as  the  Hhirik  of  this  tense  is  not  an  original  vowel 
but  has  arisen  from  Sh'va,  §  85.  2.  a  (1),  it  may  be 
neglected  and  a,  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  given 
to  the  preformative,  which  is  the  most  common  expedient, 
thus  l26^  The  three  possible  forms  of  this  tense  are  con- 
sequently nb^,  nb';  and  lb";. 

In  the  Niphal  preterite  nspD  becomes  by  contraction 
305.  In  a  few  verbs  beginning  with  n  the  short  vowel  is 
retained  in  an  intermediate  syllable,  thus  ^Hd  for  "i^^V? 
in  other  cases  Hliirik  is  lengthened  to  Tsere,  '\ji2  for  "jiriD, 
or  as  the  Hhirik  is  not  essential  to  the  form  but  has 
arisen  from  Sh'va,  §  82.  2,  it  is  more  frequently  neglected, 
and  Kamets,  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  substituted 
in  its  place,  thus  HOD.  The  forms  of  this  tense  are,  there- 
fore, nb?,  "jro,  ^hD. 

In  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species  the  vowels  of  the 
prefixed  Ti  are  characteristic  and  essential.  They  must, 
therefore,  either  be  retained  by  inserting  Daghesh-forte 
in  the  first  radical,  or  be  simply  lengthened;  no  other 
vowel  can  be  substituted  for  them,  '2tTl  for  l''3pn,  2^*^  or 
3b|'  for  n^SC'^,  DbT)  (Kibbuts  before  the  doubled  letter  by 

§  61.  5)  or'isbn  for  nncri. 

3.  The  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back  from  the  second 
radical  to  the  first,  stands  no  longer  before  a  single  con- 
sonant, but  before  one  which,  though  single  in  appear- 


§  136,  137        AYIN  DOUBLED  VERBS.  167 

ance,  is  in  reality  equivalent  to  two.  It  is  consequently 
subjected  to  the  compression  which  affects  vowels  so 
situated,  §  61.4.  Thus,  in  the  Niphal  future  and  impera- 
tive Tsere  is  compressed  to  Pattahh,  233';',  2by,  SnDH, 
isri  (comp.  bb]),  ribtap)  though  it  remains  m  the  infini- 
tive which,  partaking  of  the  character  of  a  noun,  prefers 
longer  forms.  So  in  the  Hiphil  long  Hhirik  is  compressed 
to  Tsere,  i^iyn,  ncn  (comp.  b^ap:',  r;:bi:pp). 

§  136.  Although  the  letter,  into  which  the  second 
and  third  radicals  have  been  contracted,  represents  two 
consonants,  the  doubling  cannot  be  made  to  appear  at 
the  end  of  the  word.  But 

1.  When  in  the  course  of  inflection  a  vowel  is  added, 
the  letter  receives  Daghesh-forte,  and  the  preceding  vowel, 
even  where  it  would  be  dropped  in  perfect  verbs,  is  re- 
tained to  make  the  doubling  possible,  and  hence  pre- 
serves its  accent,  §  33.  1,  H^O,  ^ll6\ 

2.  Upon  the  addition  of  a  personal  ending  which 
begins  with  a  consonant,  the  utterance  of  the  doubled 
letter  is  aided  by  mserting  one  of  the  diphthongal  vowels, 
0  (i)  in  the  preterite,  and  e  (^)  in  the  future.  By  the 
dissyllabic  appendage  thus  formed  the  accent  is  carried 
forward,  §  32,  and  the  previous  part  of  the  word  is 
shortened  in  consequence  as  much   as  possible,   Scn, 

nincri;  nb-,  nrncn. 

T  •    -: '  T '  TV"..: 

3.  When  by  the  operation  of  the  rules  already  given, 
§  135. 2,  the  first  radical  has  been  doubled,  the  reduplica- 
tion of  the  last  radical  is  frequently  omitted  in  order  to 
relieve  the  word  of  too  many  doubled  letters.  In  this  case 
the  retention  of  the  vowel  before  the  last  radical,  con- 
trary to  the  analogy  of  perfect  verbs,  and  the  insertion 
of  a  vowel  after  it,  are  ahke  unnecessary,  and  the  accent 
takes  its  accustomed  position,  ^nO';,  nsiferi. 

§  137.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  sometimes  pre- 


168  ETYMOLOGY.  §  138,  139 

serve  tlie  regular  form,  as  b^H,  b^H,  'b'^TT\'n.  The  triple 
repetition  of  the  same  letter  thus  caused  is  in  a  few 
instances  avoided,  however,  by  reduplicating  the  con- 
tracted root  with  appropriate  vowels,  as  I^C^D,  b)bbptirj. 
Or  more  commonly,  the  reduplication  is  given  up  and 
the  idea  of  intensity  conveyed  by  the  simple  prolongation 
of  the  root,  the  long  vowel  Hholem  being  inserted  after 
the  first  radical  for  this  purpose,  as  lllio,  bbsrn. 

§  138.  In  Paradigm  VIII  the  inflections  of  Ayin 
doubled  verbs  are  shown  by  the  example  of  DID  to  sur- 
round. The  Pual  is  omitted,  as  this  species  almost  in- 
variably follows  the  inflections  of  the  perfect  verb;  certain 
persons  of  the  Hophal,  of  which  there  is  no  example,  are 
likewise  omitted.  An  instance  of  Piel,  with  the  radical 
fjyllable  reduplicated,  is  given  in  1\t'D0  to  excite. 

a.  The  Hithpael  of  iaO  does  not  actually  occur;  but  it  is  in  the  para- 
digm formed  from  analogy,  the  initial  sibilant  being  transposed  with  the  n 
of  the  prefix,  agreeably  to  §  82.  5. 

Kemabks  on  Ayin  Doubled  Yeebs. 

§  139.  1.  The  uncontracted  and  the  contracted  forms  of  the  Kal  preterite 
are  used  with  perhaps  equal  frequency  in  the  third  person;  the  former  is 
rare  in  the  first  person,  "^Rppt  Zech.  8:  14.  15,  >13lia  Deut.  2:  35,  and  there 
are  no  examples  of  it  in  the  second;  13T  Gen.  49:  23  and  ^1531  Job  24:  24 
are  preterites  with  Hholem,  §  82.  1.  In  Ps.  118:  11,  ■'SIsnG-Cia  iJiio  the 
uncontracted  is  added  to  the  contracted  form  for  the  sake  of  greater  em- 
phasis. Compound  Sh'va  is  sometimes  used  with  these  verbs  instead  of 
simple  to  make  its  vocal  character  more  distinct,  §  16. 1.  b,  ^Vp}>  Gen.  29:  3,  8, 
siB^a  Ex.  15:  10,  T]!i3^n  Isa.  64:  10,  "'i;:?  Gen.  9:  14,  >l2n;3.n  Num.  23:  25. 

2.  The  following  are  examples  of  the  contracted  infinitive  absolute, 
yp  Num.  23:  25.  bla  Ruth  2:  16,  IIS  Isa.  24:  19,  TOT  (with  a  paragogic 
termination)  ibid.;  of  the  uncontracted,  "linx,  "liia,  "jiin,  C|iSM,  nihs,  nine, 
Tin^U;  of  the  infinitive  construct,  iV?  and  Th,  n'io  and  30,  Ofei3,  I'i^a,  13,  dh, 
once  with  ic  as  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs,  "il3  Eccles.  9:  1,  and  occasionally  with 
a,  -Tn  Isa.  45:  1,  T|tt3  Jer.  5:  26,  d^3  (with  3  plur.  suf.)  Eccl.  3:  18,  DrSSn 
Isa.  30:  18  (TOjn  Ps.  102:  14);  tihrh  Isa.  17:  14,  though  sometimes  explained 
as  the  noun  Ur\b  with  the  suffix  their  bread,  is  the  infinitive  of  d^n  to  groio 
warm;  dsi^3  Gen.  6:  3  Eng.  ver.  for  that  also,  as  if  compounded  of  the 
prep,  a,  the  abbreviated  relative  and  da,  is  by  the  latest  authorities  regarded 


§140 


EEMAEKS  ON  ATIN  DOUBLED  VEEBS.  169 


as  the  infinitive  of  siiia  in  (heir  erring;  %t\  Job  29:  3  has  Hhirik  before  the 
suffix.  The  feminine  termination  fTl  is  appended  to  the  following  infinitives, 
niin  Ps.  77:  10.  Job  19:  17,  rrko  Ezek.  36:  3,  '^nJaT  Ps.  17:  3.  The  impera- 
tive, which  is  always  contracted,  has  mostly  Hholem,  Sb,  Di'^  and  d^  but 
sometimes  Pattahh,  ^a  Ps.  119:  22  (elsewhere  ^h),  n23  Ps.  80:  16.  Fiirst 
regards  nn  as  a  contracted  participle  from  f^inrt,  analogous  to  the  Ayin  Vav 
form  Dp. 

3.  The  following  uncontracted  forms  occur  in  the  Kal  future,  '{:'r\^_  Am. 
5:  15,  ni-i-i  and  "i^n  from  1^3;  in  the  Niphal,  ni^":  Job  11:  12;  Hiphil,  cim 
Mic.  6:  13,  B"'i':3p  Ezek.  3:  15,  •^HPinri'l  Jer.  49:  37,  and  constantly  in  'lin  and 
^3^;  Hophal,  Tn^  Job  20:  8  from  TnJ.  In  a  few  instances  the  repetition  of 
the  same  letter  is  avoided  by  the  substitution  of  i<  for  the  second  radical, 
>lbxs3";  =  ilbp^'^  Ps.  58:  8  and  perhaps  also  Job  7:  5,  "iijt"?^  =  "'"^'IP?  Ezek. 
28:  24,  Lev.  13:  51,  52,  -iDNlJ  =r|":'bpilj  Jer.  30:  16  K'thibh.  Comp.  in  Syriac 
tjjj  part,  of  >-fi?.  According  to  the  Eabbins  !lS<^a  =  ITTS  Isa.  18:  2,  but  see 
Alexander  in  loc. 

§  140.  1.  Examples  of  different  forms  of  the  Kal  future:  (1)  With 
Daghesh- forte  in  the  first  radical,  tA"],  nsx,  sb'^,  ^p-i,  Dik'^,  Dtn"^;  or  with  a 
as  the  second  vowel,  hlT^,  "is"),  !!l^n\  (2)  With  Tsere  under  the  personal 
prefix,  cn"],  nn";!,  "li^,  Tp.?j  ^p^?)  ^^Tj?.,  ^  being  once  written  by  means  of  the 
vowel  letter  ^,  or'^X.  (3)  With  Kamets  under  the  personal  prefix,  'ih^,  3b^, 
iy^,  lik^,  p'i^,  ?'"'i;;,  nhy,  this  occurs  once  with  fut.  a,  'in'j  Prov.  27:  17.  With 
Vav  Consecutive  the  accent  is  drawn  back  to  the  simple  penult  syllabe  in 
this  form  of  the  future,  and  Hholem  is  consequently  shortened,  §  64.  1,  tS'^l, 
1^0^'^^ ,  ivh'^ ,  Dfi*;i ,  'Till-  There  are  a  few  examples  of  u  in  the  future  as  in 
Ayin  Vav  verbs,  "i^l'n';  Prov.  29:  6,  fV^"^  Isa.  42:  4,  Eccles.  12:  6,  Dnn  Ezek. 
24:  11  and  perhaps  li";  Gen.  49:  19,  Hab.  3:  16,  l^lb^  Ps.  91:  6,  though 
Gesenius  assumes  the  existence  of  115  and  lid  as  distinct  roots  from  It  a 
and  liia. 

2,  The  Niphal  preterite  and  participle:  (1)  With  Hhirik  under  the 
prefixed  3,  ninJ?  Job  20:  28,  hm,  1n3,  nn3.  (2)  With  Tsere  under  the  prefix, 
inrfl.?  Jer.  22  :'^  23,  tD'i'iXS  MalT  3:  9,  fiiins  Isa.  57:  5.  (3)  With  Kamets 
under  the  prefix,  sbj,  ln3,  "133;  sometimes  the  repetition  of  like  vowels  in 
successive  syllables  is  avoided  by  exchanging  a  of  the  last  syllable  for  Tsere, 
b|p3  and  bp3,  OcS  and  0^3,  n3C3  Ezek.  26:  2,  or  for  Hholem  as  in  Ayin  Vav 
verbs,  p3  Eccl."l2:  6,  1^23  Am!  3:  11,  wis  Nab.  1:  12,  13:3  Isa.  34:  4. 

3.  The  Niphal  future  preserves  the  Tsere  of  perfect  verbs  in  one  ex- 
ample, bnPi,  Lev.  21:  9,  but  mostly  compresses  it  to  Pattahh,  b^"],  ^5"^,  W"^, 
IB"^,  ~~:%  Cai,  l^^l,  v)2it;  like  the  preterite  it  sometimes  has  Hholem,  fiin 
Isa.  24:  3,  pisri  ibid.  If  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural  and  incapable  of 
receiving  Daghesh,  the  preceding  Hhirik  is  lengthened  to  Tsere,  "in';'.,  ^nx, 
fiin;i,  I'i'^P,  1B~i;i.  The  Kal  and  Niphal  futures,  it  will  be  perceived,  coincide 
in  some  of  their  forms;  and  as  the  signification  of  these  species  is  not 
always  clearly  distinguishable  in  intransitive  verbs,  it  is  often  a  matter  of 
doubt  or  of  indifference  to  which  a  given  form  should  be  referred.    Thus, 


170  ETYMOLOGY.  §  141 

^i!l>  Ti^"^,  ^U"]  are  in  the  Niphal  according  to  Gesenius,  while  Ewald  makes 
them  to  be  Kal,  and  Fiirst  the  first  two  Niphal  and  the  third  Kal. 

4.  The  Niphal  infinitive  absolute:  fian  Isa.  24:  3,  p'isfi  ibid,  or  with 
Tsere  in  the  last  S3'llable,  Ofe"  2  Sam.  17:  10.  The  infinitive  consti-uct: 
bin  Ps.  68:  3,  bnn  Ezek.  20:  9,  and  once  with  Pattahh  before  a  suffix, 
ilnn  Lev.  21:  4.    The  imperative:  nan  Isa.  52:  11,  ^5a'"in  Num.  17:  10. 

6.  In  the  Hiphil  preterite  the  vowel  of  the  last  syllable  is  compressed 
to  Tsere,  2lbn,  "ikn  (in  pause  lEn,  so  :l52dn,  :"5;rn),  or  even  to  Pattahh, 
Pl^,  ^i^^}.  '^tr',  "i^C.  T\^\},  2-' 'in,  ni-n,  ^izhri,  ^apn.  Both  infinitives  have 
Tsere,  thus  the  absolute:  P2^,  "ipn,  nkn,  "isn,  hr.^;  the  construct:  ^"bn, 
"Of^,  "^S^!  (1"S\!  Zech.  11:  loj,  "ii:n,  ^^n]  crn^!  in  pause  :l3n,  pin,  with 
a  final  guttural,  Snn,  snn.  The  imperative:  nnn,  "isn,  bjb'n",  bnn,  i'qn; 
iiailJn  Job  21:5  is  a  Hiphil  and  not  a  Hophal  form  as  stated  by  Gesenius, 
the  first  vowel  being  Kamets  and  not  Kamets  Hhatuph.  Futures  with  a 
short  vowel  before  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical:  23^,  ct^,  ""i^^ri,  ^rs^; 
with  a  long  vowel,  "i;;,  di",  "ib^,  hr}-^  or  bn^,  bn^,  li^ntn  and  vy^,  Ticn,  j'sr 
(e  expressed  by  the  vowel  letter  X,  §  11.  1.  a)  Eccles.  12:  5.  When  in  this 
latter  class  of  futures  the  accent  is  removed  from  the  ultimate,  whether  by 
Vav  Consecutive  or  any  other  cause,  Tsere  is  shortened  to  Seghol,  ^S'^l, 
P^\'^ .  ^?t^  J  'T^'t-  '  M^i  >  '''^^ »  ^^^  i^  O"^  instance  to  Hhirik,  y^'t})  Judg.  9  :  53 
("fi^fj!!  would  be  from  ■j'^i'-i)  before  a  guttural  it  becomes  Pattahh,  5.n*1,  ""i^^, 
-^^\  Participles:  ipp,  "nbp,  ^nri,  b^p  Ezek.  81:  3,  i'ip  Prov.  17:  4.  In  a 
very  few  instances  the  Hhirik  of  the  perfect  paradigm  is  retained  in  the 
last  syllable  of  this  species  as  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs,  T\^b^  Judg.  3:  21,  D'^t'^ 
Jer.  49:  20,  Ci"'t|1  Num.  21:  30. 

6.  Hophal  preterites:  ^rnn,  niron,  siisn;  futures:  ub^'^,  ^Nli,  py^^,  )h^, 
*1Sin,  "IT^I"^,  ^W"",  ns';',  "Pt';  participles:  fhw,  'iSp  or  in  some  copies  13a 
2  Sam.  23:  6;  infinitive  with  suffix,  n'.:Ti-n  Lev.  26:  34,  with  prep.,  n!3:;ra 
ver.  43. 

§  141.  1.  Upon  the  addition  of  a  vowel  aflfix  and  the  consequent  inser- 
tion of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  last  radical,  the  preceding  vowel  and  the  posi- 
tion of  the  accent  continue  unchanged,  ^37,  I'fi^,  t^'Bii'l  (distinguished  from 
the  fern.  part.  n:br;),  ^irn^;  if  the  last  radical  does  not  admit  Dayhesh-forte 
a  preceding  Pattahh  sometimes  remains  short  before  n,  but  it  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets  before  other  gutturals,  n'n^,  siini  (100.  2),  ^bn,  nn'ij  and  ^ina. 
When  the  first  radical  is  doubled,  Daghesh  is  omitted  from  the  last  in  the 
Kal  fut.  0  ^il'i,  Jinp"),  'irPi'^,  and  occasionally  elsewhere  ^m"^  Hi.  fut.  >lD53n 
Ho.  pret.  Other  cases  are  exceptional,  whether  of  the  shifting  of  the 
accent,  sis'^  Ps.  3:  2,  ^'s'^  Ps.  55:  22,  ^li^p  Jer.  4:  13,  and  consequent  short- 
ening of  the  vowel,  ''h  Jer.  7:  29  for  "'•rSi,  4n,  ^iH  for  "^p,  !isn,  ^il'::  Jer. 
49:  28  (with  the  letter  repeated  instead  of  being  simply  doubled  by  Daghesh, 
so  likewise  in  tjil^i";  Jer.  5:  6,  ijisn  Ps.  9:  14)  for  ^ni";  the  omission  of 
Daghesh,  nt'ij  1  Bam.  14:  36,  njyn  Prov.  7:  13,  >i:jin  Cant.  6:  11,  7:  13, 
tilpn'i  Job  19:  23,  -nap  Num.  22:  11,  17  (Kal  imper.  with  n^  parag.  for 
-nap,  shortened  by  Makkeph  from  naji,  so  "TiX  ord  Num.  23:  7),  or  in 
addition,  the  rejection  of  the  vowel,  ^hl'^  K.  fut.  Gen.  11:  6  for  lar,  nliaa 


§142 


EEMAEKS  ON  AYIN  DOUBLED  VEKBS.  171 


Gen.  11:  7   K.  fut.  for  n^'ij,  np^3  Isa.  19:  3  Ni.  pret.  for  iishs  or  nfe23, 

T        T  '  '  T     -.  IT  ■'■  't    -  ▼  't        T   ' 

naaa  Ezek.  41:  7  Ni.  fut.  for  H2DD;  !l3n  Judg.  5:  5  according  to  Gesenius 
for  ^'iii  Ni.  pret.  of  b^T  to  shake,  according  to  others  K.  pret,  of  hh  to  floiv ; 
62.;ri1  Ezek.  36 :  3  for  ^izini  (Ewald)  from  bh'J  to  enter,  or  for  ^l^rrn  Ni.  fut. 
of  n!is  to  go  up,  l3n3  Ezek.  7:  24  Ni.  pret.  for  ^bn,  -!lin3  Cant.  1:6  Ni. 
pret.  for  "^^03.  Once  instead  of  doubling  the  last  radical  "^  is  inserted,  vh"^ 
Prov.  26:  7  for  ^isn,  comp.  Tai^nn  Ezr.  10:  16  for  ^yr\r\;  or  it  may  be  for  vi"^ 
from  n'i'n  §  174.  1. 

2.  Upon  the  insertion  of  a  vowel  before  affixes  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, the  accent  is  shifted  and  the  previous  part  of  the  word  shortened 
if  possible;  thus,  with  o  in  the  preterite,  f^'i^p,  *if]'i"iX1  (Kamets  before  1 
which  cannot  be  doubled),  cnisj',  !i3iT2,  ''r'S;??,  dnjs-^Sj'n'ip-in,  ''rn^n  (the 
vowel  remaining  long  before  "i),  ririnrt  (Pattahh  instead  of  compound  Sh'va 
on  account  of  the  following  guttural,  §  60.  3.  c),  "^r'Srifi,  once  with  u,  13'h;r3 
Mic.  2:4;  with  e  in  the  future,  nD-'ion,  nr!J:iPi,  lnr|npi.  If  the  first  radical 
be  doubled,  Daghesh  is  omitted  from  the  last,  and  the  customary  vowel  is 
in  consequence  not  inserted,  tiSiT^ri,  tiibsri;  other  cases  are  rare  and  ex- 
ceptional, inn-isn,  phh:,  "^^3113,  cn^?3,  !i3?2n  which  is  first  plur.  pret.  for 
«52Pi  not  third  plur.  for  ^sn  (Ewald),  §  54,  3;  ^h'irv  Deut.  32:  41,  "inian 
Isa.  44:  16,  ''t^'i^n  Ps.  116:  6  have  the  accent  upon  the  ultimate  instead  of 
the  penult, 

3.  Before  suffixes  the  accent  is  always  shifted,  and  if  possible  the  vowels 
shortened,  "^3???'^,  ^inaO"^  from  nb^,  ^SO^,  ^l'^:!^"!  from  il^ia;,  ^353"in  from  d'iri, 
D'nSn  from  nsri;  in  ^3ri;  Gen.  43:  29,  Isa.  30:  19,  from  ^fr,  BinEnLev.  26:  15 
from  "isn,  the  original  vowels  have  been  not  only  abbreviated  but  rejected, 
and  the  requisite  short  vowel  given  to  the  first  of  the  concurring  conso- 
nants, §  61.  1.  In  a  very  few  instances  a  form  resembling  that  of  Ayin  Vav 
verbs  is  assumed,  Daghesh  being  omitted  from  the  last  radical  and  the 
preceding  vowel  lengthened  in  consequence,  "ipn  Prov.  8 :  29  for  "ipri  ver.  27, 
j]riinn  Isa.  33:  1  for  T^^rn,  ^!T'r'i?:i^n  Ezek.  14:  8  for  iirT^rriti'rn',  fflB^iri 
Lam.'l:  8  for  ri^'itn  Hi.  pret.  of  h'^],  )ry^rp,  Hab.  2:  17  for  "inn^  Hi.  fut.  of 
nnn  with  3  fem,  plur.  suf.,  Dib-iN  2  Sam.  22:  43  in  a  few  editions  for  C:;51X. 
Nun  is  once  inserted  before  the  suffix  in  place  of  doubling  the  radical,  "isniT 
Num.  23:  13  for  "iaf;. 

§  142.  1.  Of  the  verbs  which  occur  in  Piel,  Pual,  or  Hithpael,  the  fol- 
lowing adopt  the  forms  of  perfect  verbs,  viz.: 

^•is  to  curse.  an'j  to  cry.  "ii^  to  make  a  nest. 

Tis  to  plunder.  rr©  to  smite,  break.  yk]^  to  cut  off. 

"ina  to  purify.  nnV  to  take  away  the  S3n  to  he  many. 

latra  to  grope.  heart.  Tj?'^  to  he  tender. 

pi?T  to  refine.  ppb  to  lick.  into  to  harrow. 

dt'7  to  warm.  laib^a  to  feel,  to  grope,  "yyo  to  rule. 

Y^'n  to  divide.  ttb  to  leap.  "lito  to  sharpen. 

nnn  to  he  hroken.  b|B  to  judge,  to  inter-  daJn  to  be  perfect. 

b^u  to  cover.  cede. 


172 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§143 


2.  The  following,  which  are  mostly  suggestive  of  a  short,  quick,  re- 
peated motion,  reduplicate  the  radical  syllable,  viz.: 

S>?^  to  sport,  delight. 
p]b':3  to  run. 
^i'T\  to  mock. 


inn  to  burn.  S^no  to  linger. 

lis  to  dance.  T\~^  to  excite. 

t^b  to  be  mad.  t\k:i  to  chirp. 

3.  The  following  insert  Hholem  after  the  first  radical,  viz.: 


113  to  fly. 
&05  to  lift  up. 
t)BD  to  occupy  the  thres- 
hold. 
lis  to  bind. 
o6|^  to  cut  off. 
^^I^  fo  gather. 

4.  The  following  employ  two  forms,  commonly  in  different  senses,  viz. 


•jSx  to  complain, 
\\'z  to  mix. 
Pi^a  to  empty. 
lis  to  cut. 
"lia  to  sweep  away. 
Df^  to  he  still. 
rrn  to  break  loose. 


5>?i  to  break, 

nnia  to  sink. 

b^"j  to  spoil. 

diii:  to  be  desolate  or 

amazed. 
C)BP!  to  beat. 


1??  to  gather  clouds,  "ii:?  to  prac- 
tise sorcery. 
"liis  to  burst,  IQIQ  to  shake  to  pieces. 

^|p  to  curse,  ^pbp  to  whet. 

yu")  and  '^i'ii  to  crush. 

lilU  and  Ti'iD  to  treat  with  violence. 


bpb^  and  ^^ia  /o  roZ/. 

V|i7  to  praise,  VBin  ?o  wjaJe  mad. 

bin  fo  profane,  b^in  io  wound. 

T^n  fo  mo^e  gracious,   "jiin   fo   6e 

blp  to  speaA:,  bbio  to  mow. 

330  to  change,  33'iD  to  swrrottwi. 

5.  The  following  use  different  forms  in  different  species,  viz.: 

ppn  Pi.  to  decree,  Pu.  p;^n.  "(Sn  Pi.  to  shout,  Hith.  "jiiinn.* 

1153  Pi.  to  measure,  Hith.  libnii-  ^^"^  ^'i'  to  break,  Pu.  \airi . 

lia  Pi.tomaA;e6i<fe»',Hith.iilrinn.  I^TIJ  Pi.  to  inculcate,   Hith.  "jSindrt 
bobo  Pi.  to  ea;a^^,  Hith.  bbinpn.  to  pierce. 

b^rj  Pi.  to  maltreat,  Hith.  b!)Snir» 
and  bbi:?nn, 

6.  The  following  examples  exhibit  the  effect  of  gutturals  upon  redupli- 
cated  forms:    Preterite,  2!fea   Isa.  11:  8;   Infinitive,  "ininb   Prov.  26:  21, 

Pirn-anfi  Ex.  12:  39;  Future,  i'a^nm  Ps.  119:  47,  siS'lli^'lji'i   Ps.  94:  19;  Impe- 
rative, ^rarn-iUn  Isa.29:  9;  Participle,  iwnp  Gen.  27:  12,'  iipribno  Prov.  26: 18. 

§  143.  1.  The  Pual  species  adheres  to  the  analogy  of  perfect  verbs  with 
the  exception  of  the  preterites,  IliS  Nah.  3:  17,  bbis  Lam.  1  :  12,  the  future 
tWiySttjri  Isa.  66:  12,  and  the  participles,  Sibbiap  Isa.  9:  4,  bVn'3  Isa.  53:  6. 


*  "jiilTO  Ps.  78:  65  is  not  from  "Jll  (Gesenius)  but  from  "jil,  see  Alexander 
in  loo. 


g  144  PE  YODH  VERBS.  173 

2.  "QBtn  2  Sam.  22:  7  is  contracted  for  I^JJ^f?'?  ^^'  1^:  27;  in  regard  to 
i^QOFi  in  the  same  verse,  Nordheimer  adopts  the  explanation  of  Alting  that 
it  is  a  similar  contraction  of  the  Hithpael  of  bSs  thou  ivilt  shotv  thyself  a 
judge,  but  as  it  answers  to  ibtnantn  Ps.  18:  27,  the  best  authorities  are  almost 
unanimous  in  supposing  a  transposition  of  the  second  radical  with  the  first 
and  its  union  with  n  of  the  prefix. 

3.  inn  and  b^n.  The  prefixed  M  remains  in  the  Hiphil  future  of  bbpi, 
e.  g.  'briii'^,  ^ibfiiT^,  '''CrjP'  and  in  the  derivative  nouns  cinrt,  riiSnrta, 
whence  these  forms  are  in  the  lexicons  referred  to  the  secondary  root  bnn. 


Pe  Yodh  0"S)  Verbs. 

§  144.  In  quiescent  verbs  one  of  the  original  radicals 
is  Jji,  1  or  ■',  which  in  certain  forms  is  converted  into  or 
exchanged  for  a  vowel.  As  {^  preserves  its  consonantal 
character  when  occupying  the  second  place  in  the  root, 
and  also  (with  the  exception  of  the  Pe  Aleph  future, 
§  110.  3,  and  a  few  occasional  forms,  §  111.  2)  when  it 
stands  in  the  first  place,  verbs  having  this  letter  as  a 
first  or  second  radical  belong  to  the  guttural  class;  those 
only  in  which  it  is  the  third  radical  (Lamedh  Aleph)  are 
properly  reckoned  quiescent.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the 
first,  second,  or  third  radical  be  either  Yodh  or  Yav,  the 
verb  is  classed  as  quiescent.  AU  verbs  into  which  either 
1  or  ■*  enter  as  a  first  radical  are  promiscuously  called  Pe 
Yodh,  as  the  modes  of  inflection  arising  from  these  two 
letters  have  been  blended,  and  Yodh  in  either  case  ap- 
pears in  the  Kal  preterite  from  which  roots  are  ordinarily 
named,  §  83.  a.  In  the  second  radical  the  Vav  forms 
(Ayin  Vav)  preponderate  greatly  over  those  with  Yodh 
(Ayin  Yodh).  In  the  third  radical  the  Yodh  forms  have 
almost  entirely  superseded  those  with  Vav,  though  the 
current  denomination  of  the  verbs  is  derived  from  neither 
of  these  letters  but  from  He  (Lamedh  He),  which  is  used 
to  express  the  final  vowel  of  the  root  in  the  Kal  preterite 
after  the  proper  radical  has  been  rejected. 


174  ETYMOLOGY.  §  145,  146 

a.  Verbs  whose  third  radical  is  the  consonant  tl  belong  to  the  guttural 
class,  e.  g.  niii ,  rrbn  and  are  quite  distinct  from  tlie  quiescent  verbs  n"b  in 
which  n  always  represents  a  vowel,  e.  g.  ri3j,  !13Q. 

§  145.  1.  In  Pe  Yodh  verbs  the  first  radical  is  mostly 
Yodli  at  the  beginning,  §  5fi.  2,  and  Yav  at  the  close  of 
a  syllable.  It  is  accordingly  Yodh  in  the  Kal,  Piel,  and 
Pual  species,  and  commonly  in  the  Hithpael,  ;2*J3^,  2'©';, 
3^"^,  Sia^nn.  It  is  Vav  in  the  Niphal  and  commonly  in 
the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species,  nizJiS,  a^izJin,  nti^n. 

2.  In  the  Kal  future,  if  Yodh  be  retained,  it  will 
quiesce  in  and  prolong  the  previous  Hhirik,  and  the 
second  radical  will  take  Pattahh,  e.  g.  'Oi^';;  if  the  first 
radical  be  rejected  the  previous  Hhirik  is  commonly 
lengthened  to  Tsere,  l|b.'],  the  Pattahh  of  the  second  syl- 
lable being  sometimes  changed  to  Tsere  to  correspond 
with  it,  §  63.  2.  c,  e.  g.  aiZJ';  in  a  few  instances  Hhirik  is 
preserved  by  giving  Daghesh-forte  to  the  second  radical 
as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs,  the  following  vowel  being  either 
Pattahh  or  Hholem,  n^";,  p!!';. 

3.  Those  verbs  which  reject  Yodh  in  the  Kal  future, 
reject  it  likewise  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive  con- 
struct, where  it  would  be  accompanied  by  Sh'va  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable,  §  53.  2.  a,  the  infinitive  being 
prolonged  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs  by  the  feminine  termina- 
tion, nip,  td^. 

§  146.  1.  In  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle  Yav 
quiesces  in  its  homogeneous  vowel  Hholem,  n'ijiD,  n"^i3; 
in  the  infinitive,  future,  and  imperative,  where  it  is  doubled 
by  ]3aghesh-forte,  it  retains  its  consonantal  character, 

n-ii^n,  niijv. 

"T      •   '  -T  • 

2.  In  the  Hiphil  Yav  quiesces  m  Hliolem,  T^ljin,  l^izjV; 
a  few  verbs  have  Yodh  quiescing  in  Tsere,  n^'b^H,  n'D''.']; 
more  rarely  stiU,  the  first  radical  is  dropped  and  the 


§  147,  148  PE  TODH  VEEBS.  175 

preceding  short  vowel  is  preserved,  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs, 
by  doubling  the  second  radical,  ykri,  Tk\ 

3.  In  the  Hophal  Yav  quiesces  in  Shurek,  ^iD'^lTi,  '2WT; 
occasionally  the  short  vowel  is  preserved  and  Daghesh- 
forte  inserted  in  the  second  radical,  jjl\ 

a.  The  Hholem  or  Tsere  of  the  Hiphil  arises  from  the  combination  of 
a,  the  primary  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  in  this  species,  §  82.  5.  b.  (3),  with 
u,  or  i,  into  which  the  letters  1  and  ''  are  readily  softened,  §  57.  2.  (5).  The 
Hholem  of  the  Niphal  is  to  be  similary  explained :  the  Hhirik  of  this  species, 
which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va  and  cannot  combine  with  Vav,  is  exchanged 
for  the  simplest  of  the  vowels  a  (comp.  ;io5 ,  cipj),  and  the  union  of  this 
with  1  forms  o.  The  Hophal  retains  the  passive  vowel  u,  which  is  occasio- 
nally found  in  perfect  verbs,  §  95.  a. 

§  147.  The  inflections  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs  may  be  re- 
presented by  those  of  ZW"^  to  sit  or  chvell,  (Paradigm  X).  The 
Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  are  omitted  as  they  do  not 
differ  from  perfect  verbs.  The  alternate  form  of  the  Kal 
future  is  shown  by  the  example  of  ^i^  to  he  dry. 


Remakks  on  Pe  Yodh  Yeebs. 

§  148.   1.   The  following  verbs  retain  Yodh  in  the  Kal  future,  viz.: 

lai^  to  he  dry.  Tjo^  to  he  poured,  K"!)^  to  fear. 

S"i^  to  toil.  ^b"^  to  appoint.  frni  to  cast. 

"in^  to  delay.  '^'J'^  to  he  iceary.  ttjn^  to  possess, 

iii^  to  oppress.  yb"^  to  counsel.  dii)"^  to  put. 

pi'2  to  suck.  ns^  to  he  beautiful.  '^^  to  sleep. 

The  concurrence  of  Yodhs  in  the  third  person  of  the  future  is  some- 
times prevented  by  omitting  the  quiescent  Tl'i"^,  "sn'[;,  ^iw*)],  the  long  vowel 
receiving  Methegh  before  vocal  Sh'va,  and  thus  distinguishing  the  last  two 
words  from  the  Lamedh  He  forms,   ^IXTi   from   rtit"!  and  nv"^    from  fliuJ, 

'  ;  •  T  T  ;  •  T   t' 

§  45.  2. 

2.  The  following  have  Tsere  under  the  preformative ;  those  in  which 
the  second  vowel  is  likewise  Tsere  are  distinguished  by  an  asterisk: 

55n^  to  hioic.  *  l^-  to  hear.  sj^"^  to  be  dislocated. 

in^  to  he  joined.  *  nk"^  to  go  out.  *  I'b"'  to  go  down. 

cn^  to  conceive.  ^si  to  he  straitened.       *  2'i3'j  to  sit,  dwell. 


176  ETYMOLOGY.  §  149 

The  second  syllable  has  Pattahh  in  inPi  Jer.  13:  17,  Lam,  3:  48,  and 
in  the  feminine  plurals,  njn^Pl,  fis'iipi;  Sijxkpl  has  Seghol  after  the  analogy 
of  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs;  n:aiain  (with  the  vowel-letter  i  for  e)  occurs  only 
in  the  K'thibh,  Ezek.  35:  9,  and  of  course  has  not  its  proper  vowels.  In 
•  35111  Ps.  138:  6  the  radical  Yodh  remains  and  has  attracted  to  itself  the 
Tsere  of  the  preformative.    Comp.  §  60.  3.  c. 

3.  The  following  insert  Daghesh-forte  in  the  second  radical,  viz.:  IDi 
to  chastise,  wstruct,  ti^l  to  burn.  In  iin^itn  Isa.  44:  8  short  Hhirik  remains 
before  a  letter  with  Sh'va;  "^iii^l  Job  16:  11  is  explained  by  some  as  a  Kal 
future,  by  others  as  a  Piel  preterite. 

4.  The  following  have  more  than  one  form:  "X^"^^  to  be  good  fut.  j^"^"], 
once  '^a:?'^?!  Nah.  3:  8;  pi;;  to  pour  p'^"!,  once  p:£^^  1  Kin.  22:  35;  l^'j  to 
form,  'ni':  and  "121^1 ;  Ijb;;  to  burn,  "ip;;  Isa.  10:  16,  and  ip-'P  Deut.  32:  22; 
frp^  to  atvake,  y^^"^']  once  yfs'i  1  Kin.  3:  15;  ^p^  to  he  precious,  ipi"^  and 
"ip"!,  or  with  a  vowel  letter  for  e,  lp''.7;  t3'i3^  to  be  desolate,  di"n  once  nj^'ljin 
Ezek.  6:6;  "iiii^  to  be  right,  ^XD'^I ,  once  HJ'iTai  (3  fem.  plur.,  §  88)  1  Sam. 
6:  12.    Some  copies  have  >lS>ai  Isa.  40:  30  for  ^Si^"^. 

^  AT  •  AT  • 

5.  In  futures  having  Tsere  under  the  preformative,  the  accent  is  shifted 
to  the  penult  after  Vav  Consecutive  in  the  persons  liable  to  such  a  change, 
viz.:  3  sing.,  2  masc.  sing.,  and  1  plur.,  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  being  in  con- 
sequence shortened  to  Seghol,  S>'1''1,  ibni,  ^^21.  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate 
becomes  Seghol  in  '^S^^jl,  ^S"^^^  (with  a  postpositive  accent)  Gen.  2:  7,  19, 
Ciia'i'll  Gen.  50:  26;  but  261*5,  \yn'i'^1,  •)ij'''^1,  yp"'*!,  only  once  before  a  mono- 
syllable, §  35.  1,  I'p"^'.!  Gen.  9:  24.  The  accent  remains  on  the  ultimate  in 
the  Lamedh  Aleph  form  xk'^l,  unless  the  following  word  begins  with  an 
accented  syllable,  e.  g.  K^i^l  Gen.  4: 16,  8:  18.  The  pause  restores  the  accent 
in  all  these  cases  to  its  original  position,  i'^Vi^'}  Euth  4:  1,  tSJ'iCT  Ps.  139:  1, 
'rn."f:i  Ps.  18:  10,  §  35.  2. 

§  149.  1.  Kal  construct  infinitives  with  Yodh:  uSd"^  and  with  a  feminine 
ending  H^j"),  t^^i"!,  iB"]  with  suf.  ''IP';,  once  with  prep.  Tisi^p  2  Chron. 
31:  7,  Dagliesh  conservative  after  t,  §  14.  a;  MX'i'^,  §  87,  once  XT;  Josh. 
22:  25  and  with  prep.  iH?  1  Sam.  18:  29  from  Sr\y,  niTi  once  xin^  2  Chron. 
26:  15  from  nn'i,  )'ya\ 

2.  Infinitives  without  Yodh:  nS'T  (with  suf.  itni?^),  ni??  Ex.  2:  4,  and 
without  the  feminine  termination  ^'n,  ri"T^  (with  suf.  ''t^'f^)  and  tiT^,  once 
rh  1  Sam.  4:  19,  §  54.  2.  nx^  (with  suf.  ^pN^),  npk,  rrin  (with  suf.  ■'fni'1), 
once  nn'i  Gen.  46:  3,  ndi  (with  suf.  Pn^-i),  nn{y  (n3"i,  with  suf.  ipin'j  once 
ifniia  Ps.  23 :  6).  Yodh  is  perhaps  dropped  from  the  absolute  infinitive  iid 
Jer.  42:  10,  which  is  usually  explained  to  be  for  iiiji;  it  may,  however,  be 
derived  from  the  Ayin  Vav  verb  13Va. 

3.  Imperatives  with  Yodh:  ^"ii,  S^n'',  nn-i.  Without  Yodh:  25'n  (with 
n  parag.  ni"'n  Prov.  24:  14),  2(1  (with  si  parag.  nan;  for  ^lin  Hos.  4:  18, 
see  §  92.  a),  iq:  (nxi,  fem.  plur.  nj'^Ni:  Cant.  3:' 11),  2'^  (-ad.  Mad). 
With  both  forms:  ps'and  pi"]  (^iprf)),  ^D C^l";).  twice  in":  Judg.  5:  13, ^dn 

;a-i  and  nuin'i. 


§  150-152  EEMAEKS  ON  PE  YODB.  VEEBS.  177 

§  150.  1.  The  Niphal  of  ni^  has  u  instead  of  o,  "^J^S  Zeph,  3:  18,  nWJ 
Lam.  1:4;  ^^\^:  1  Chron.  3:  5,  20:  8  has  w  followed  by  Daghesh.  T.ki, 
which  according  to  Gesenius  is  from  Tik"^,  has  z;  Ewald  assumes  the  root 
to  be  nr:i ,  and  refers  to  it  likewise  the  Kal  future  and  the  Hiphil  ascribed 
to  nk;,  §  148.  3.  and  §  151.  4.  In  that  case  the  Daghesh  in  in^"^  Isa.  33:  12, 
J«r.  51 :  58,  will  not  require  the  explanation  suggested  in  §  24.  c,  but  the 
K'thibh  iT^niain  2  Sam,  14:  30  will  be  unexplained,  ^ibis  Ps.  9:  17  is  not 
the  Niphal  preterite  or  participle  of  lufe^,  but  the  Kal  participle  of  UJp3. 

2.  Yodh  appears  in  the  Niphal  future  of  two  verbs  instead  of  Vav, 
^tlil'5  ^6^-  ^-  12,  1  Sam.  13:  8  K'ri,  tin*^  Ex.  19:  13.  In  the  first  person 
singular  N  always  has  Hhirik,  2)i;X,  iVjx,  lojx,  ttJnjK,  ^TUJS,  injX. 

§  151.  1.  In  the  Hiphil  the  following  verbs  have  Yodh  preceded  by 
Tsere,  viz.:  si:^  to  be  good,  V?"^  to  howl,  'h'^  to  go  to  the  right,  ^i^  to 
change,  pi;  to  stick.  Yodh  is  likewise  found  in  ■'3^2\'n  Judg.  16:  26  K'thibh, 
and  in  the  following  instances  in  which  the  prefix  has  Pattahh  as  in  per- 
fect verbs,  ta'^'^D"'^  Hos.  7:12,  >n^.i;"':^  Prov.  4:  25,  "i'i:"]n  Ps.  5:  9  K'ri  (K'thibh 
-I'liin,  comp.  Isa.  45:  2  K'thibh  naix,  K'ri  "i^rx),  i<'Tj7  Gen.  8;  17  K'ri 
(K'thibh  N:iin),  C'ii-ir-]:3  1  Chron.  12:  2. 

2.  In  n-^i?.''':  Job  24 :  21  (elsewhere  n'^i^.  a°^  ^"^"^T.  (once  rt'^B'^X  Mic. 
1:8),  the  radical  Yodh  attracts  to  itself  the  vowel  of  the  preformative, 
comp,  §  148.  2.  He  remains  after  the  preformative  in  ^b''li^'^']  Isa.  52:  5, 
nnin"!  Neh.  11:  17,  Ps.  28,  7,  S'libirt'i  l  Sam.  17:  47,  Ps,  116:  6.  "Both  Yodh 
and  \'av,  quiescing  in  their  appropriate  vowels,  are  liable  to  omission, 
'["'rrt,  1p'^3rt,  I'^Bh,  !iUJ''3rt,  and  once  the  vowel  Tsere  is  dropped  before  a 
suffix,  sinpin  Ex.  2:  9  for  sinpim. 

3.  Vav  consecutive  draws  the  accent  back  to  the  penultimate  Tsere  or 
Hholem  of  the  Hiphil  future  in  the  persons  liable  to  be  affected  by  it, 
§  148.  5,  and  shortens  the  final  vowel,  :3l5i^;j,  pr?^,  ^V.'^ht  ^vJ^I,  »SFl1;  but 
with  a  pause  accent  f^tvn)  Euth  2:  14. 

4.  The  following  verbs  insert  Daghesh  in  the  second  radical  in  the 
Hiphil,  viz.:  sk^  to  set,  place,  S^;;  to  spread,  pk;  to  pour,  except  :np^'i^ 
2  Kin.  4:  5  K'ri  (K'thibh  npsia),  ni^  to  burn,  except  rr^nisin  2  Sam.  14:^30 
K'thibh,  see  §  150.  1. 

5.  In  the  Hophal  a  few  examples  occur  of  u  followed  by  Daghesh,  as;* 
Ex.  10;  24,  S2-1  Isa.  14:  11,  Esth.  4:  3,  ^b^^  Isa,  28:  16,  pko  Job  11;  15 ' 
and  a  few  of  Hholem,  snin  Lev,  4:  23,  28,'x-ii"i  Prov.  11:  25  for  nnii  from 
rri;.  The  construct  infinitive;  loin  Ezr.  3:  11,  and  with  the  feminine  ter- 
mination nihn  Ezek.  16:  4,  T^^lTi  Gen.  40:  20,  Ezek.  16:  5. 

§  152.  1.  In  the  Kal  preterite  Yodh  is  once  dropped,  Ti  Judg,  19:  11 
for  I'll .    Hhirik  occurs  with  the  second  radical  of  iB"'  and  lljn''  in  the  first 

"'  «  -T  -T 

and  second  persons  smgular  with  suffixes,  and  in  the  second  person  plural, 
which  is  perhaps  due  to  the  assimilating  power  of  the  antecedent  Yodh, 
«•  s-  ■'tPI^'],  "^PPT.  tind-i'^, 

2.  In  the  Piel  future  the  prefix  Yodh  of  the  third  person  is  contracted 

12 


178  ETYMOLOGY.  §  153,  154 

with  the  radical  after  Vav  consecutive,  1!iii33*5  Nah.  1 :  4  for  IfTiis;^'!^ ,  tilfi^ 
Lam.  3:  33,  S|^11  Lam.  3:  53,  D^V^ll  2  Chron.'  32:  30  K'ri  (K'thibh  Ql^iil), 

3.  Three  verbs  have  Vav  in  the  Hithpael,  <Thirri,  "tl^rri,  f^Sj^r";  ^ 
is  assimilated  to  the  following  1  and  contracted  with  it  in  >in&Vi  Ezek. 
23:  48  for  I^S^ir?  a  peculiar  Niphal  formed  on  the  basis  of  a  Hithpael, 
§  83.  c.  (2).  In  2knn  Ex.  2:  4  for  33^nn  Yodh  is  rejected  and  its  vowel 
given  to  the  preceding  letter,  §  53.  3.  b. 

§  153.  1.  T)^ii  and  T^^  T^'n  to  go  in  the  Hiphil  and  for  the  most  part 
in  the  infinitive  construct,  future  and  imperative  Kal  follows  the  analogy 
of  Pe  Yodh  verbs,  as  though  the  root  were  T\?'^.  Thus,  Kal  inf.  const. 
nD^  (rsb ,  with  suf.  "^sHd^)  rarely  T\^ti ;  fut.  Tj^i;  (once  with  the  vowel  letter 
■^  for  e,  nbyN  Mic.  1 : 8,  fern.  pi.  nsi^n),  occasionally  in  poetry  T^'^li'^  (3  fern, 
sing.  T(^!jn);  imper.  Tj^  (with  n^  parag.  niV,  or  without  the  vowel  letter 
7^,  fem.  pi.  ti33^  and  ^jdI?)  once  ^ih>i  Jer.  51;  50.  Hiphil:  Tp^in  once  in 
the  imper.  '^D'^^iri  Ex.  2;  9,  and  once  in  the  participle  W'bhr}^  Zech.  3:  7 
for  Ci"'i5'^l?rt-?,  §  94.  c. 

2.  CJOX  to  gather  and  tib"^  to  add  are  liable  to  be  confounded  in  certain 
forms.  In  the  Hiphil  future  of  v|D'^,  o  is  twice  represented  by  the  vowel 
letter  K,  tlDN';]  1  Sam.  18:  29,  '^>lSOxn  Ex.  5:  7;  qox  drops  its  N  in  the 
Kal  future,  when  it  follows  the  Pe  Aleph  inflection,  §  110.  3,  which  it  does 
only  in  the  following  instances,  ClO^'l  2  Sam.  6:  1,  ClpFi  Ps.  104;  29,  nsGlSl 
Mic.  4:  6,  ?jBC5J<  1  Sam.  15:  6,  where  the  Hhirik,  being  abbreviated  from 
Tsere,  is  short,  notwithstanding  the  Methegh  in  the  intermediate  syllable, 
§  45.  2.  The  apoc.  Hiph.  fut.  of  ti6^  when  joined  with  the  negative 
particle  bx  is  accented  on  the  penult,  rjOirrbx  Deut.  3 :  26,  and  in  one  in- 
stance the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  is  dropped  entirely,  pipirrbx  Prov.  30:  6. 

3.  C^niapiti  Zech.  lO:  6  is  probably,  as  explained  by  Gesenius  and 
Hengstenberg,  for  d'^Fl^Tain  from  3^3^  to  dtvell,  though  Ewald  derives  it 
from  STa  to  return,  as  if  for  Q'^nim^rt ,  and  Kimchi  supposes  it  to  be  a 
combination  of  both  words  suggesting  the  sense  of  both,  in  Avhich  he  is 
followed  by  the  English  translators,  I  ivill  bring  them  again  to  place  them. 

^jixih  Isa.  30:  5  "is  regarded  by  Gesenius  as  an  incorrect  orthography 
for  la'^hin;  but  Maurer  and  Knobel  read  it  \lJ'^&<3i7  and  assume  a  root  \lJSja 
synonymous  with  tjia".    Alexander  in  loc 

T^iJa-in  Ps.  16 :  5,  see  §  90. 

Ayin  Vav  (Y'3>)  and  Ayin  Yodh  (''"3>)  Verbs. 

§  1 54.  Yodh  and  Vav,  as  the  second  radical  of  verbs, 
have  the  following  peculiarities,  viz.: 

1.  They  may  be  converted  into  their  homogeneous 
vowels  i  and  u. 

2.  They  may  be  rejected  when  accompanied  by  a 


§  155       AYIN  VAV  AND  AYIN  TODH  VERBS.         179 

heterogeneous  vowel,  which  is  characteristic  of  the  form. 
Yodh  forms  are  confined  to  the  Kal  of  a  few  verbs;  in 
the  other  species  Vav  forms  are  universal. 

a,  Yodh  is  never  found  as  a  quiescent  middle  radical  in  any  species 
but  Kal:  it  enters  as  a  consonant  into  the  Piel  of  two  verbs,  and  the  Hith- 
pael  of  two,  §  163.  1,  the  Niphal  of  n^n  to  he,  and  the  Hiphil  of  n^n  to  live. 

§  155.  1.  In  the  Kal  preterite  and  active  participle 
and  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species,  the  quiescent  is 
rejected  and  its  vowel  given  to  the  preceding  radical 
Thus, 

Kal  preterite:  D]^  for  D'1|^  where  a,  which  arises  from 
blending  a  with  the  pretonic  Kamets,  §  62. 1,  is  in  partial 
compensation  for  the  contraction,  T\'2  for  T\'\12,  123  forl2:'i3, 
a"!  for  S^"i.   For  an  exceptional  formation,  see  §  160.  1. 

Active  participle:  Dj^  for  Di]^,  n?J  for  T\)^2,  ITS  for  iziis, 
n'n  for  sj;^,  the  ordinary  participial  form  being  super- 
seded by  that  of  another  verbal  derivative,  as  is  the  case 
in  some  perfect  verbs  of  a  neuter  signification,  §  90. 

Hiphil  and  Hophal:  D^pn  for  D'ipn,  D"p^  for  D^ip^ 
Dp^n  for  DlpM,  the  short  vowel  of  the  prefix  being  pro- 
longed in  a  simple  syllable,  §  59. 

2.  In  the  Kal  construct  infinitive,  future,  imperative 
and  passive  participle,  the  quiescent  is  softened  into  its 
homogeneous  vowel,  D^p,  l"""] ;  in  the  future  the  preforma- 
tive  commonly  takes  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels  a, 
n^l6;,  n^V,  comp.  nb\ 

3.  In  the  Kal  absolute  infinitive  and  in  the  Niphal 
species  a  similar  softening  of  1  occurs,  which,  with  the 
accompanying  or  preceding  a,  forms  o,  §  57.  2.  (5),  Dip 
(kom  =  kaum)  for  Dilp;  Dip]  for  D^pD,  the  prefix  usually 
taking  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels  a;  Dip";  for  DIIS";. 

4.  In  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  Niphal  and 
Hiphil  preterites  b  (i)  is  inserted  before  the  affixed  ter- 
mination in  order  to  preserve  the  long  vowel  of  the  root 

12* 


180  ETYMOLOGY.  §  156,  157 

from  the  compression  incident  to  standing  before  two 
consonants,  §  61.  4;  in  the  feminine  plurals  of  the  Kal 
future  e  (''..)  is  sometimes  inserted  for  a  similar  reason, 
this  prolongation  of  the  word  being  attended  by  a  shift- 
ing of  the  accent  and  a  consequent  rejection  of  the  pre- 
tonic  vowel  of  the  first  syllable,  DnV-3ip3,  inib^pJl,  tlD^b^pi^. 
In  the  Niphal  preterite,  when  the  inserted  i  receives  the 
accent,  the  preceding  i  is  for  euphony  changed  to  ^,  e.  g. 

5.  In  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  species  the  apocopated 
future  takes  the  diphthongal  vowels  o  and  e  in  distinc- 
tion from  the  ordinary  future,  which  has  the  pure  vowels 
u  and  2,  §  66. 1.  (2)  b,  thus  liij;,  niD\  With  Vav  Conversive 
the  accent  is  drawn  back  to  the  simple  penult,  and  the 
vowel  of  the  last  syllable  is  shortened,  3^Jl,  '^V!^^- 

§  156.  1.  In  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  the  form  of 
perfect  verbs  is  rarely  adopted,  the  second  radical  ap- 
pearing as  1,  e.  g.  ^-ly,  or  as  '',  e.  g.  D^p. 

2.  Commonly  the  third  radical  is  redupKcated  instead 
of  the  second,  which  then  quiesces  in  Hholem,  Pi.  Dt;ip, 

Pu.  Dbip,  Hith.  Dbiprn. 

a.  In  the  Pual  o  is  the  passive  vowel  here  adopted  in  preference  to  u: 
in  the  Piel  and  Hithpael  it  arises  from  the  combination  of  u,  to  which  1  is 
softened,  with  the  antecedent  a,  d"b"ip  for  Bplp ,  §  82.  5.  6  (3). 

3.  Sometimes  the  quiescent  letter  is  omitted  from  the. 
root,  and  the  resulting  bihteral  is  reduphcated,  Pi.  bsbs, 
Pu.  b3b3. 

-  ;  T 

a.  The  two  forms  of  the  intensive  species,  which  depart  from  the  regu- 
lar paradigm,  precisely  resemble  in  appearance  those  of  Ayin  doubled  verbs, 
though  constructed  upon  a  different  principle,  as  already  explained. 

§  157.  The  inflections  of  Ayin  Vav  verbs  are  shown 
in  those  of  D^p  to  stand  or  rise,  in  Paradigm  IX;  the 
divergent  forms  of  Ayin  Yodh  verbs  in  the  Kal  species 
are  exhibited  by  n^n  to  contend. 


§158,159      ATIN  VAV  AND  AYm  YODH  VERBS.  181 

a,  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Todh  verbs  are  named  not  from  the  Kal  pre- 
terite, in  which  the  quiescent  is  rejected,  but  from  the  construct  infinitive, 
the  simplest  form  in  which  all  the  radicals  appear. 

6.  No  Hophal  forms  occur  in  those  persons  in  which  the  inflective  ter- 
minations begin  with  a  consonant.  The  same  is  true  of  the  Ayin  Yodh 
imperative. 

Eemaeks  on  Attn  Yav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Yeebs. 

§  158.  1.  Medial  Yodh  and  Yav  remain  without  quiescence  or  rejection 
in  a  few  verbs,  whose  root  contains  another  feeble  consonant  by  contrast 
with  which  these  letters  acquire  new  strength.  This  is  always  the  case  in 
Lamedh  He  verbs,  e.  g.  t^'H  ,  fi13;  so  likewise  in  the  following  guttural 
verbs  and  forms,  5."_15  to  expire,  :  ^i,!jri;;;  Isa.  29:  22,  '>^'n\2r>_  Isa.  42:  11,  ni)5< 
to  he  an  enemy,  "1.^15  1  Sam.  18:  9  K'ri  (K'thibh  "pr),  nsij^  Jer.  4:  31,  which 
are  confined  to  the  Kal  species,  and  in  ni"i  to  he  airy  or  refreshing,  which 
is  besides  found  in  the  Pual  participle. 

2.  The  Kal  preterite  has  Pattahh  in  two  instances  as  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs, 
T3  Zech.  4:  10,  HU  Isa.  44:  18  but  na  Lev.  14:  42.  It  has  Tsere  in  na 
to  die,  ^},  Isa.  17:  11  (unless  this  is  a  noun  as  explained  by  Delitzsch  and  in 
the  common  English  version)  but  ^13  Jer.  50:  3,  and  Hholem  in  "lix  to  shine, 
iria  to  be  ashamed,  nia  to  he  good,  §  82.  1.  a,  and  in  siKa  Jer.  27:  18,  elsewhere 
!ixa,  I'l'i  Isa.  1 :  6,  Ps.  58 :  4,  elsewhere  ^"IT .  Hhirik  once  occurs  instead  of 
Pattahh  in  the  second  person  plural,  CWi'S  Mai.  3;  20.  The  following  par- 
ticiples have  Tsere,  U^'ih,  "j'^,  yo,  Tcq,  "iS";  the  following  have  Hholem, 
D-ipia,  G-^tia,  n-^iip  2  Kin.  16:  7  (comp.  Dni-3p  Ex.  32:  25  in  the  Sama- 
ritan copy),  elsewhere  D"'^)^,  n3in  Jer.  4:  31  if  from  h^T\  and  not  from  n^n. 

3.  The  vowel  letter  X  is  written  for  a,  §  11.  1.  a,  once  in  the  preterite, 
DXf?  Hos.  10:  14,  and  occasionally  in  the  particii^le,  liXb  Judg.  4:  21,  rii^N") 
Prov.  24:  7,  ^xn  2  Sam.  12:  1,  4,  Prov.  10:  4,  13:  23,  D'^i;x'J  despising 
Ezek,  16:  57,  28:  24,  26,  to  be  distinguished  from  tr^-QJ  rowing  Ezek.  27:  8, 
26.  The  consonant  S  is  once  introduced  in  place  of  the  omitted  1,  iTaXT 
Zech.  14:  10  for  n^"i ;  the  ancient  versions  favour  the  assumption,  that 
"i^SS  Ps.  22:  17  is  in  like  manner  for  D'^'^3  piercing,  though  the  most  recent 
and  ablest  expositors  take  it  to  be  a  preposition  and  noun  like  the  lion. 

4.  The  accent  regularly  remains  upon  the  radical  syllable  before  affixes 
consisting  of  a  vowel  or  a  simple  syllable,  though  with  occasional  exceptions, 
e.  g.  nsp?  Lev.  18:  28,  sia'i  Gen.  26:  22,  ^lab  Gen.  40:  15,  ^inn  Num.  13:  32. 
In  a  few  instances  it  is  shifted  by  Vav  conversive  preterite,  §  100.  2,  ^I'b'i 
Obad.  ver.  16,  ilSOl  Am.  3:  15,  nn31  Isa.  11:  2,  siPJI  Isa.  7:  19  but  JiX2!1  ibid., 
nxai  Zech.  5:  4,  ns^"!  ibid.,  where  the  feminine  ending  is  n_  instead  of  il  ; 
so  in  the  passive  participle,  tr\^^  Isa.  59:  5  for  rri^lT. 

§  159.  1.  Hholem  is  in  a  few  instances  found  instead  of  Shurek  in  the 
construct  infinitive,  Xis,  ^ia  Judg.  3:  25,  aio,  nii  and  ^3,  Sii  Isa.  7:  2, 
elsewhere  ?>13 ,  tis  Isa.  30:  2,  which  is  not  from  fTS,  aizj  Josh.  2:  16,   else- 


182  ETYMOLOGY.  §  160 

where  aiia,  and  with  suf.  tsJsii  Ezek.  10:  17,  "^t^'s  Ps.  71:  6,  which  is  not 
the  participle  from  ni.n  (Gesenius),  ^nj  wy  breaking  forth,  i.  e.  the  cause 
of  it  Ps.  22;  10,  see  Alexander  in  loc;  Gesenius  explains  this  form  as  a 
participle,  but  is  obliged  in  consequence  to  assume  a  transitive  sense  which 
nowhere  else  belongs  to  the  verb. 

2.  The  following  imperatives  have  Hholem,  '^'n'ix  Isa.  60;  1,  NS,  TZJia, 
Tii  Mic.  4:  10,  '^d'i'n  Mic.  4:  13.  "With  paragogic  n,  rrbp  or  Haip,  nhlC 
or  nsvij.    Examples  of  the  feminine  plural,  nS'lp,  iiJU'd . 

3.  The  following  futures  have  Hholem,  xi^i,  "jin^  Gen.  6;  3,  elsewhere 
I'ln';,  aioj  Ps.  80:  19,  birr;  and  tifxri,  aih'?  where  the  Hhirik  of  the  perfect 
paradigm  is  lengthened  to  Tsere  under  the  preformative.  Examples  of  the 
feminine  plural:  ri5-':<3rn  and  nsxiiri,  nji-Jil-aPi,  nri^isri  and  Zech.  1:  17 
nsiliisri  (in  Baer's  edition  without  Daghesh),  hsinwri  and  nsaiyn,  nj'ixln, 
•iSM^ri  Ezek.  13;  19  (Baer  no  Daghesh).  The  accent  is  shifted  and  Kamets 
rejected  from  the  preformative  up  jn  the  addition  of  a  suffix  or  paragogic 
Nun,  the  latter  of  which  is  particularly  frequent  in  this  class  of  verbs  both 
in  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  future,  ''lEil'r-^,  T];23?25<,  n^.ltn,  Q'liD'^,  "i^^p^,  l^lTO^ri, 
nsas^ri  Ezek.  4;  12,  with  Daghesh  euphonic  in  the  J  and  3  which  Baer  omits. 
Apocopated  future:  Vrcr^,  Sii;'^  and  '^iil,  13!^,  X'pr^,  ^"r*^,  ^p")  with  the  ac- 
cent thrown  back  to  the  penult  Cj^^.     Future  with  Vav  consecutive:  ln^'1 

(in  pause  ^i^^lO,  ^1^'^^  (^^^IJ).  ^t-'  '^I^t^  '  T'l^t^'  ^'^T-.'^'i  the  last  vowel  is 
changed  to  Pattahh  before  a  final  guttural,  5-':^l,  ri:j],  and  sometimes  be- 
fore "I  or  after  an  initial  guttural  i]^1  but  "15^!!,  t]?^!]  he  was  weary,  CiSJ'^ 
he  fieiv,  ti'nv\'];  the  vowel  of  the  preformative  is  likewise  changed  to  Pattahh 
in  t^nm  Job  31;  5,  •c'Sl^  l  Sam.  14:  32,  a?m  l  Sam.  15:  19  but  asj]  1  Sam. 
25:  14. 

§  160.  1.  The  verbs  which  exhibit  peculiar  Ayin  Yodh  forms  in  Kal, 
with  unimportant  exceptions,  either  do  not  occur  in  the  Hiphil  or  retain 
the  same  signification  in  both  these  species.  This  has  led  some  gi*am- 
marians  to  entertain  the  opinion  that  these  are  not  Kal  but  abbreviated 
Hiphil  forms,  while  others  suppose  that  the  Hiphil  in  these  verba  is  a 
secondary  foi'mation,  and  has  arisen  from  the  Kal  future  having  the  form 
of  the  Hiphil.  Only  three  examples  occur  of  quiescent  Yodh  in  the  Kal 
preterite,  nin'^'l  Job  33:  13  (nnn  Lam.  3:  58),  "'n'i^a  Dan.  9;  2  (nn33  Ps. 
139:  2)  d^i'i'n  Jer.  16:  16;  '|"'3  Dan.  10:  1  has  been  variously  explained  as 
3  pers.  preterite,  imperative  or  infinitive. 

2.  The  following  verbs  have  "^  in  the  Kal  future  and  imperative,  'p^ 
to  understand,  m  (once  "^n^  Mic.  4:  10)  to  break  forth,  h''i.  (once  h^V^  Prov. 
23:  24  K'thibh)  to  exult,  "p^  (once  "jin;;  Gen.  6:  3)  to  judge,  ■j'^P  to  lodge, 
y^'^  to  contend,  Ty^'b  to  miise^  fiiia  (once  Ci^i'^^  Ex.  4:  11)  to  put,  b'^b  (once 
tsiiuib";  Isa.  35:  1)  to  rejoice,  T^a  (once  ^C^  Job  33:  27)  to  sing,  rTi':3  to 
place;  b^n  or  b*^n  to  twist,  ivrithe,  has  both  Yodh  and  Vav.  To  these  are 
to  be  added  r^^i  Jer.  4:  3,  Hos.  10:  12,  rr^jin  Ps.  71:  12  K'thibh,  K'ri  riOTr 
as  always  elsewhere;  }"^IS;^  to  urge,  y^^l  to  flourish,  T^n^  to  tvander,  are  in 
the  Hiphil  according  to  Gesenius:  but  as  the  corresponding  preterites  are 
not  Hiphil  but  Kal,  and  there  are  no  other  forms  of  the  Kal  future,  they 


§161,162      AYIN  VAV  AND  AYIN  YODH  VERBS.  183 

might  with  equal  propriety  he  regarded  as  Kal  futures  of  Ayin  Yodh  roots ; 
the  second  of  them  is  so  regarded  by  Ewald.  Apocopated  futures:  'fh"^, 
Vi';  and  h'^,  nn^,  D'j^,  n"i3^,  '^n  and  i'^'n.  With  Vav  consecutive:  Wl, 
V^T-'  ^"^'t-'  h^^'  'U*^!])  I^?P!]i  "iiiJni.  "With  paragogic  Nun  and  suffixes: 
">:,■;,  ""i'nP'i  Q"^""^";'  Feminine  plural:  ilj^in. 

3.  The  infinitives  show  a  stronger  disposition  to  adopt  Vav  forms. 
Yodh  is  only  retained  in  the  following  absolute  infinitives;  ','^3  Prov.  23:  1, 
ryi  and  nr.,  b^a  Prov.  23:  24  K'ri  (bl5  K'thibh),  a^n  Jer.  50:  34,  elsewhere 
3'"i.  Construct  infinitives:  'p'^,  *pb  Gen.  24;  23,  elseAvhere  'lb,  i^")  once  21*1 
Judg.  21:  22  K'thibh,  ni'j  and  TO^,  D^b  Job  20:  4,  2  Sam.  14:  7  K'ri,  else- 
where dTJ,  ni;a  1  Sam.  18:  6  K'ri  (K'thibh  "iva),  n'^D,  also  with  suf.  iiii^'n 
Deut,  25:  4,  elsewhere  ll'W.  In  the  difficult  verse  Hos.  7:  4  ^"^i'p  has  been 
variously  explained,  as  the  Kal  infinitive  preceded  by  the  preposition  )'0  or 
as  the  Hiphil  participle.  The  only  certain  instance  of  a  Kal  passive  par- 
ticiple of  Ayin  Yodh  verbs  is  nirj  2  Sam.  13:  32  K'ri  (K'thibh  n^-'iZJ); 
some  explain  C^'U  Num.  24:  21,  Obad.  ver.  4,  as  a  passive  participle,  others 
as  an  infinitive. 

4.  Aj'in  Yodh  verbs  adopt  the  Vav  forms  in  all  the  derivative  species, 

e.  g.  "iniia? ,  "jiiij,  ^nijia-^,,  "S'isriri,  nfe"!;  T'n  cooked,  i.e.  pottage,  is  the 
only  instance  of  a  Niphal  participle  with  Yodh. 

§  161.  1.  Examples  of  the  Niphal  preterite:  Siia,  aioj,  '{''ib,  IINJ;  the 
accidental  Hhirik  of  the  perfect  paradigm  is  preserved  in  hihi  by  means 
of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical;  in  "liis  it  is  lengthened  to  Tsere  be- 
fore the  guttural;  in  ;'n?33  Jer.  48:  11  the  radical  1  is  rejected,  which  gives 
it  the  appearance  of  an  Ayin  doubled  verb.  Inflected  forms:  iisiis  (part, 
fem.  niiDS),  iiD'i:,  si^^is,  vji^a;,  ^iba?,  ''niTOs,  "'n'i^a?,  cniiriEs,  Brb'ppj. 

2.  Infinitive  absolute:  biiari.  Construct:  biart,  niliti,  with  ii  rejected 
after  the  preposition  "lixb  Job  33;  30,  §  91.  b;  once  it  has  Shurek,  d^l'nri 
Isa.  25:  10.    Imperative,  "iti^i,  ^bail. 

3.  Future:  Tis^,  wisi.,  b^'n'],  'pr  Ps.  72:  17  K'ri  (K'thibh  pi),  iisil'i, 
'J^:•;,  ^x"',  sinii;!,  "lis^.    Participle:  "pi;,  lib;,  d'^iiss,  d'^iio?,  D'^in?,  ta-^bisa?. 

§  162.  1.  The  short  vowel  of  the  perfect  paradigm  is  in  a  few  in- 
stances preserved  in  the  Hiphil  by  doubling  the  first  radical,  thus  tp\n 
and  niin,  n-^sn  and  n-'Drt,  rh,  "pi:!,  and  I'^b';,  'rr\^  and  ^n.*1  2  Sam.  22:  33. 

2.  Hiphil  preterite  inflected:  ni?ikli,  ^^''h'n,  «''^ri  and  Wnri;  with 
.syllabic  affixes:  nirsn,  niB-^an,  niii"!"!!!  and  t^'6'\'^,  trs'^'nn  and  Drb^irt, 
ni;;h'irn,  '^rii:jiani ,  or  when  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural,  T'i'^'^?^!.  Tfr^ 
and  nnx'n,  or  without  the  inserted  Hholem,  t^sili,  '^nnSfl  and  "^nin'^Dfl, 
!i3=n  and  >i:'ir3n,  nnxan  and  nnx-inin,  irn^ri  and  ofn^n,  §  61.  4.  a.  With 
suffixes,  ir^n,  n^""??!!,  '^|P'"2ti,  '^?b-'-jn',  iriNpr!. 

3.  Hiphil  future  inflected:  ^'^b'^,  ^TTian,  feminine  plural  tlSniyri,  napippl, 
ni")2"^tlP.  With  Nun  paragogic  and  suffixes:  'pii'^p'^,  dni^"!.  Apocopated 
future:  "pS';,  3'i"';,  ns'; ,  n^^.  With  Vav  consecutive:  na^l,  qri,  d)3^1,  lysi 
and  1'^^x;;,  if  the  last  radical  be  a  guttural,  3>^^:i,  nJ*],  n^ip,  orN,  xi;^:; 


184  ETYMOLOGY.  §  1^3 

once  tt*'i''1  and  once  K'^i'';!;  upon  the  reception  of  a  suffix  the  vowel  is 
restored  to  its  original  length,  dniTU"^],  'ItiS"'?']!. 

4.  Hiphil  infinitive  absolute:  S'rn,  npn,  Dpn  once  d^ibn  Jer.  44:  25; 
construct,  b'lin,  n^nn,  S-^irifi,  D-ir^ri,' with  suffix' "'ii'in,  'rji'^Dri,  oiri^^n, 
oiS'^jn  and  once  with  a  feminine  termination  >^S3n  Isa.  30:  28. 

5.  In  a  few  instances  ii  is  found  in  the  Hophal  before  Daghesh-forte 
or  Sh'va,  T^tr^Ti  Zech.  5:  11,  n2?3  Ezek.  41:  9,  11  but  niin  Lam.  5:  5,  and 
in  some  editions  Cibn  2  Sara.  23:  1,  :ba^  Job  41:  1,  siTOn  2  Sam.  21:  9, 
though  others  read  Dj^n,  i^^^'^,  sitTon, 

§  163.  1.  The  following  verbs,  which  are  only  found  in  one  or  more 
of  the  three  reduplicated  species,  double  the  middle  radical  either  as  Vav 
or  as  Yodh,  viz.:  'Dfin  to  render  liable,  bb  to  do  wielcedly,  i^s"  to  blind,  tks 
to  pervert,  y-i'd  to  cry  for  help,  l^iro^in  Josh.  9:  12,  ^"^'^^V.  Jos'^-  9=  *;  so 
also  d'p  fut.  DJ;i5"]  and  Q'b'ip'i,  "k'S  fut.  ini'';,  which  have  quiescent  Vav  in 
other  species,  and  t\^'},  which  has  consonantal  Vav  likewise  in  the  Kal. 

2.  The  following  omit  the  quiescent  in  the  Piel  and  double  the  result- 
ing biliteral,  ^3^3  to  suntain,  tiiPX-JX-J  Isa.   14:   23,  ?)VjVjo  Isa.   22:   17, 

ri'iij7:?t?3  Hab.  2:  7,  ''S-iE-JS-;  Job  16:  12  but  ykti-^,  Jer.  23:  29,  "ip-ip  Num. 
24:  17  and  ^p"ipp  Isa.  22;  5,  ''Sirairri  Isa.  17:  11;  :nx;i";  Isa.  15:  5  is  for 
:^"iSJ"i?'i,  §  57.  1;  Ilib"";  Job  39:3  is  perhaps  for  fcb"";  from  h^S ,  comp. 
pox  Ps.  139:  8  for  p'^^ij),  §  88,  though  Gesenius  conjectures  that  it  is  an 
erroneous  reading  for  ^v'^vh  from  Sl^.  The  only  Hithpael  formed  by  a  like 
reduplication  is  ^n^nrn  Esth.  4:  4,  elsewhere  b^pinnn. 

3.  Other  verbs  double  the  third  radical  in  the  Piel  and  Hithpael.  Ex- 
amples of  the  feminine  plural:  ns'iiisri,  iisiipn,  :fn355i^rn,  nrj-jirnp. 
Hholem  is  changed  to  U  before  the  doubled  letter  in  the  contracted  form, 
!13:W1  Job  31:  15  for  ^sil'ir'^l,  §  61.  3.  Fiirst  explains  ^:i^^Pi1  Isa.  64;  6  as 
in  like  manner  for  iirasi^ril ,  while  Gesenius  makes  it  a  Kal  future,  used  in 
this  single  instance  in  a  transitive  sense.  D^ptuia  Am.  6:  11  is  probably  a 
variant  orthography  for  ciscia,  §  92.  b. 

4.  The  following  are  the  only  examples  of  the  Pual  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs, 
viz.:  With  1  doubled,  t^'S-Q  Eccles.  1:  15,  d-'nj'nti  Jer.  22;  14.  Reduplicated 
biliteral,  ibsbs  1  Kin.  20:  27.  The  third  radical  reduplicated,  b^in  to  be 
born,  !  15 5-13  Ezek.  28:  13,  Ps.  37:  23,  ni^^'b'int^  Ps.  75:  11  and  D^ila  Neh. 
9:  5,  yrn-]  Isa.  16:  10,  'iSSiT  Job  26:  11,  nahi^i:^  Ezek,  38:  8. 

5.  D3'iri'".:i'iEn  Jer.  25:  34  is  an  anomalous  preterite  from  'j^'IS  to  scatter, 
with  n  prefixed  and  inflected  after  the  analogy  of  Niphal;  some  copies  have 
the  noun  di'nis'isn  your  dispersions. 

In  Tb-jri'i  Ezek.  36;  11  for  "^nblini  from  avj,  Tsere  is  retained  under 
the  prefix  as  though  the  word  were  from  the  related  Pe  Yodh  verb  ^'■i'^, 
e.  g.  •^nrjin';.  On  the  other  hand,  in  inp-'ini  Ex.  2:  9  from  pr,  Tsere  is 
rejected  as  though  it  were  from  an  Ayin  Vav  verb. 


§  164,  165  LAMEDH  ALEPH  VEBES.  185 

Lamedh  Aleph  (5<"b)  Verbs. 

§  164o  1.  Aleph,  as  the  third  radical  of  verbs,  retains 
its  consonantal  character  only  when  it  stands  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable,  nJ^lS'^ ,  ^K^:k52n. 

2.  At  the  end  of  the  word  it  invariably  quiesces  in 
the  preceding  vowel,  §  57.  2.  (2),  ^^53,  i/^k'Z,  i^±'::r}.  If 
this  vowel  be  Pattahh,  as  in  the  Kal  and  Mphal  prete- 
rites and  in  the  Pual  and  Hophal  species,  it  is  in  the 
simple  syllable  lengthened  into  Kamets,  §  59,  )Xt^2  for 
5^'^,  SjS7J3  for  si'::D:  so  likewise  in  the  Kal  future  and 
imperative,  where  i<  as  a  guttural  requires  a,  iX^^'OI  for 
^'0',  ^^"^  for  5^±a.  A  hke  prolongation  of  Pattahh  to 
Kamets  occurs  before  medial  5^  in  the  first  and  second 
persons  of  the  Kal  preterite,  T\i<^p2,  UtyH^Tq. 

3.  With  the  single  exception  just  stated,  medial  J5 
quiesces  in  the  diphthongal  vowel  e  before  syllabic  affixes; 
thus,  in  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  preterites  of 
the  derivative  species  in  Tsere,  r)i5k''ID,  "tii^k'Jrj,  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  all  the  futures  and  imperatives  in 

Seghoi,  Mjsr^n,  n:>^ia. 

a.  This  e  may  arise  from  the  diphthongal  preferences  of  N,  §  60.  1.  a  (5), 
or  it  may  be  borrowed  from  the  corresponding  forms  of  n "?  verbs,  between 
■which  and  K  b  verbs  there  is  a  close  affinity  and  a  strong  tendency  to 
mutual  assimilation.  In  Palestine  Aramaeic  and  Syriac  no  distinction  is 
made  between  them. 

§  165.  This  class  of  verbs  is  represented  in  Para- 
digm XI  by  i^i^'2  to  find;  the  Piel  and  Hithpael,  though 
wanting  in  this  verb,  are  supplied  from  analogy.  The 
Pual  and  Hophal  are  omitted  because  they  are  of  rare 
occurrence,  and  they  present  no  peculiarities  but  such 
as  are  common  to  the  other  species. 

a.  In  their  ordinary  inflection  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs  differ  from  the 
perfect  paradigm  in  the  vowels  only. 


186  ETYMOLOGY.  §  166,   167 


Remarks  on  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs. 

§  166.  1.  Verbs  having  Tsere  as  their  second  vowel,  §  82.  1.  a,  retain 
it  in  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  Kal  preterite,  f^S<!^^  (but  dnxi'^ 
Josh.  4:  24),  nsi'J,  T^*.?!^* 

2.  Quiescent  N  is  occasionally  omitted  from  the  body  of  the  word, 
e.  g.  Kal  pret.  "ini^  Job  1:  21  for  '^rixk';,  "ip-k^  Num.  11:  11,  -^nps  Judg. 
4:  19,  ir^-o  Job  32:  18,  !153  1  Sam.  25:  8  for  !13X3:  fut.  nryan  and  nJN^ZJn; 
nk'i  Deut.  28:  57  part.  fem.  sing,  for  Pxk''';  "in'vap  Job  41:  17  for  inX'^aa 
const,  inf.  with  prep,  and  suf.  from  S<iij3.  Niph.  pret.  DnariD  Josh.  2:  16, 
DnpiJS  Lev.  11:  43.  Otiant  N,  §  16.  1,  may  in  like  manner  be  dropped  from 
the  end  of  the  word  after  quiescent  Vav  or  Yodh,  e.  g.  "11:)!  Gen.  20:  6  for 
Xrjn,  ^i^^  1  Kin.  12:  12  for  Kld^l,  ^b'nj^  2  Kin.  13:  6,  ''iinn  Jer.  32:  35, 
•^3^  Ps.  141:  5,  '^  Ps.  55:  16,  ii:J<  1  Kin.  21:  29,  Mic.  1:  15,  1=0  2  Sam.  5:  2, 
and  in  three  other  passages;  ''in  Euth  3 :  15  is  Hiph.  imper.  fem.  for  ''X'^5«^| 
§  62.  2. 

3.  The  vowel  following  S<  is  in  a  few  instances  given  to  a  preceding 
vowelless  consonant,  and  the  X  becomes  otiant  or  quiescent,  §  57.  2  (3), 
St^liaj  Ps.  139:  20  for  sjxbJ,  Klirs-i  Jer.  10:  5  for  Wr|"i,  JlX-ii  imp.  for  !1X'1% 
NS'^  Eccles.  10:  5  Kal  part.  fem.  for  nss-;,  DiN-Jh  1  Sam.  14:  33  for  D'^X-jri, 
DXnia  Neh.  6:  8  Kal  part,  with  suf.  for  bij-iia,  ^XQ"13  Ezek.  47:  8  for  'IND"!?; 
and,  on  the  contrary,  quiescent  !!<  attracts  to  itself  the  vowel  of  the  pre- 
ceding consonant  in  )k-\p  Ex.  2:  20  Kal  imp.  for  njX'np  and  Jirx:!  Cant. 
3:  11  for  naxk  from  xk^. 

TV  T  T 

4.  Final  S<  resumes  its  consonantal  character  upon  the  addition  of 
suffixes  "iX'iJS,  receiving  (,)  before  ?],  Ca  and  )p,  in  consequence  of  which 
a  previous  Tsere  or  Sh'va  is  converted  into  Pattahh,  §  60.  1,  ^|>«'w?,  ^^^"^1 
j;xpia,  v^xpsn,  r,xnp  Pi.  inf.,  fiixri?,  tsis^b  Kal  inf.  for  d^s:?^,  §61'.  1,  c. 

5.  Kamets  in  the  ultimate  is  mostly  retained  before  suffixes  and  para- 
gogic  n,  TiX^TD"^,  nxBp  Ps.  41:  5,  riSpi^XI  1  Sam.  28:  15,  but  ns2p3  Isa. 
56:  12.  Tsere  is  rejected  MiJ^fX  Neh.  2:  13,  2  Chron.  1:  10,  or  retained  only 
in  pause  s^NS  Judg.  9:  29. 

§  167.  1.  He  is,  in  a  few  instances,  substituted  for  K,  tlij'n  Ps.  60:  4  for 
KOp,  f^p'^r^^  Jer.  19:  11  for  XEpn,  HOD  Ps.  4:  7  for  iti?,  §  3.  1."  a,  n^ns  Jer. 
49:  10  for  X2n3,  Mnnn  1  Kin!  22:^25,  2  Kin.  7:  12^  for  xhnn,  n'^Tji'  Job 
8:  21  for  J^Sa";. 

2.  Sometimes  X  remains,  but  the  vowels  are  those  of  n"b  forms,  ''nxlpS 
Ps.  119:  101   for  ''^i6'2,   K-JH  Eccl.  8:  12,  9:  18,  Isa.  65:  20  for  xifh,   X"iJ3 

1  Sam.  22:  2,  Isa.  24:  2,  X^io  Eccl.  7:  26,  Xir?  1  Kin.  9:  11,  Am.  4:  2  Pi. 
pret.  for   X'^as,   XS'n  Ps.  143:  3   for  X3^,   x|-3  Jer.  51:  34   for   x'f^,   "^nXEn 

2  Kin.  2:  21  for  ■^nxb'i,  WXS"-.  Jer.  51:  9  for  «XQ'l,  "Xa?-;  Job  39:  24  for 
-NSl?\  X^sn  Deut.  28:  69  Hiph.  pret.  for  X'^Bsfi,  xsi^  Ps.  135:  7  Hiph. 
part,  const,  for  xikia  from  X^^;  to  which  may  be  added  njiX'^n  Ezek. 
23:  49,  n5"ix^an  Jer.  50:  20,  with  1  inserted  as  in  n"b  verbs. 


§168-170  LAMEDH  HE  VERBS.  187 

3.  Sometimes  the  ti"h  form  is  adopted  both  in  consonants  and  vowels, 
^l-Q  Ezek.  28:  16  for  ^ixbTD,  ^"^3  1  Sam.  6:  10,  ^liia  Ezek.  39:  26,  isnbs  1  Sam. 
25:  33  for  ""Srxbs,  ni:i  Ruth  2:  9  for  T\nb-S,  rA^I  Gen.  23:  6  for  K^^l , 
nrs-in  Job  5:  18  for  n3XD"in  comp.  Jer.  8:  11,  61 :  9,  2  Kin.  2:  22,  V'p^ 
Jer.  25:  27  is  2  pi.  imp.  of  Nip,  "ilii?  Ps.  32:  1  for  xrij,  n^^aj  Jer.  26:  9  for 
nxa?,  niasnn  i  Sam.  lO:  6,  niiinn  i  Sam.  lO:  i3,  ^n-'ii^ri  2  Sam.  3:  8, 
rfh::  Isa.  29:  7  for  ri'^Nail;  nip"?  Ezek.  8:  3  is  by  some  interpreters  thought 
to  be  for  N'^ip^  provoking  to  jealousy,  and  hy  others  explained  in  the  sense 
of  the  n"b  verb  selling  (Israel  to  their  foes). 

§  168.  1.  The  3  fem.  preterite  has  the  old  ending  n^,  §  86.  6.  in  iTiNan 
Ex.  5:  16  for  nNun,  nxnp  Deut.  31:  29,  Isa.  7:  14,  Jer.  44:  23,  nxan  Gen. 
33:  11  Hoph.  from  xia,  nx^sa  Ps.  118:  23  (^^^33  Deut.  30:  11  is  the  fe- 
minine participle),  to  which  the  customary  ending  in  is  further  added  in 
nnxbsa  2  Sam.  1:  26,  nnxann  Josh.  6:  17  for  nsjiann. 

2.  A  feminine  termination  Jl  ,  n,  or  as  in  T\"h  verbs  r^l,  is  occasionally 
added  to  the  construct  infinitive,  e.  g.  Kal,  «^i$ti::,  nxn*;,  nx:b,  f^X'ip  from 
JK^P  to  meet,  distinguished  from  X"ip  and  mi!<"ip  Judg.  8 :  1  from  Xn|5  to 
call,  rixBia  and  mx^-a  never  xBia,  rxib  Prov.  8:  13,  with  suf.  inxan  Ezek. 
33:  12.  Niphal,  inNarri  Zech.  13:  4.  Piel,  nxip  and  n|p,  inssp  2  Sam. 
21:2;  niti'v^?  Ezek.  17:  9  is  a  Kal  inf.  const.,  formed  as  in  Chaldee  by  pre- 
fixing 53. 

3.  There  are  two  examples  of  the  Niphal  infinitive  absolute,  l!<"ipa 
2  Sam.  1:  6  and  xilBii  Ex.  22:  3:  the  analogy  of  the  former  has  been  re- 
tained in  the  paradigm  for  the  sake  of  distinction  from  the  construct.  Piel 
infinitive  absolute:  NSp,  NQT,  X^a.    Hiphil  inf.  abs.:  X^Sti,  S<'i"lLi. 

4.  The  Hiphil  future  with  Vav  consecutive  commonly  has  Tsere  in  the 
ultimate,  though  Hhirik  also  occurs  NnpS?:! ,  Np'^:! ,  i<'jn*1 ,  xariCT ,  xki'l  and 
itk'i'nl,  5<a*1,  once  K'la^l  Ezek.  40:  3,  and  once  St'^a'^l  Neh.  8:  2. 

5.  Kamets  sometimes  occurs  in  the  ultimate  of  the  Hithpael  future, 
5<">a3n";  Num.  23:  24  but  x'^arn  Ezek.  29:  15,  so  xr^nn-i,  xiau'^,  xlsntn, 
.'l^ixt^n^;  more  rarely  in  the  preterite,  tiX^ISln. 

§  169.   1.  The  following  are  the  only  Pual  forms  which  occur.     Pret.: 

!ix3T,  sisan,  xnp.     Fut.:  ^^i.^.     Part.:  it3"in,  nxjiaia,  diit^ioTa,  D'^kbtao, 
nixlJiaa,  with  suf.  ii<"ip?3. 

2.  The  following  are  the  only  Hophal  forms:  Pret.  IJ^arin,  Mi<iin, 
Ka>i!i,  nxan,  nnxan,  ^ixa^n.    Fut.:  xa^i'i,  !iita!i'^.    Part.:  xh^:2,  rx-i^iia. 

3.  For  the  anomalous  forms,  nnxian  Deut.  33:  16,  'Tiv^^'i^P'  Job  22:  21, 
nxan  l  Sam.  25 :  34  (K'thibh  inxan),  see  §  88  (sing.  3  fern.). 


Lamedh  He  (n"b)  Verbs. 

§  170.  In  these  verbs  the  third  radical,  which  is  Yodh 
or  Vav,  does  not  appear  at  the  end  of  the  word  except 


188  ETYMOLOGY.  §  171 

in  the  Kal  passive  participle,  e.  g.  ^^iBb;  in  all  other  cases 
it  is  rejected  or  softened,  the  resulting  vowel  termination 
being  usually  expressed  by  the  letter  n,  §  11.  1.  a. 

In  the  various  preterites  H  stands  for  the  vowel  a, 
and  is  hence  pointed  H^ . 

In  the  futures  and  participles  it  stands  for  e,  and  is 
pointed  Ti  . 

In  the  imperatives  it  stands  for  e,  and  is  pointed  H... 

In  the  absolute  infinitives  it  stands  for  o  or  e;  in  the 
Kal  it  is  pointed  H*,  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  H  ;  in  the 
Niphal  and  Piel  H "  or  H,..  There  are  no  examples  in  Pual 
and  Hithpael. 

The  construct  infinitives  have  the  feminine  ending  Hi. 

a.  In  this  class  of  verbs  the  Yodh  forms  have  almost  entirely  super- 
seded those  virith  Vav.  The  latter  are  confined  to  the  construct  infinitive 
where  mi,  occurring  in  all  the  species,  is  best  explained  by  assuming  ^  to 
be  radical  (comp.  nix^  Ezek.  28:  17  as  an  alternate  of  nixn)  and  to  a  few 
other  sporadic  cases,  viz.:  a  single  Kal  preterite,  "'iHl,'?"^  Job  3:  25,  the  re- 
duplicated forms  of  three  verbs,  mxi,  "^iriL:^,  in'inpiy'r!,  and  the  pecuhar 
form,  "li'j^X  Isa.  16:  9. 

h.  In  the  Kal  preterite,  Yodh  is  rejected  after  the  heterogeneous  vowel 
Pattahh,  §  57.  2.  (5),  which  is  then  prolonged  to  Kamets  in  the  simple 
syllable,  n3a  for  "^Bj.  As  Pattahh  is  likewise  the  regular  vowel  of  the  ulti- 
mate in  the  preterites  of  Niphal  and  Hophal,  and  besides  was  so  originally 
in  all  the  active  species,  as  is  shown  by  the  Arabic  §  82.  5-  h  (3),  the  final 
Kamets  of  these  species  may  be  similarly  explained.  Yodh  is  in  like  manner 
rejected  after  the  heterogeneous  Hholem  of  certain  infinitives,  while  it 
leaves  the  homogeneous  Tsere  of  others  unmodified. 

c.  The  futures,  imperatives,  and  participles  of  certain  of  the  species, 
(including  the  Hiphil  as  shown  by  some  of  its  inflections)  have  e  (Arabic  t) 
as  the  normal  vowel  of  their  ultimate;  in  this  Yodh  can  quiesce,  leaving 
it  unchanged.  Those  of  the  other  species  have  or  may  have  a  in  the  ulti- 
mate; this,  combined  with  the  i  latent  in  "i,  will  again  form  e.  In  the 
future  this  becomes  6  (  )  in  distinction  from  the  ending  e  (  )  of  the-,  more 
energetic  imperative ;  and  the  absolute  is  distinguished  from  the  construct 
state  of  the  participle  in  the  same  waj'. 

§  171.  1.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a 
vowel  the  last  radical  is  occasionally  retained  as "',  j^articu- 
larly  in  prolonged  or  pausal  forms,  n"Dn,  Vcn,  I'jVf^n;^.;  it 
is,  however,  commonly  rejected  and  its  vowel  given  to 


§  172,  173         LAMEDH  HE  VEEBS.  189 

the  antecedent  consonant,  ^l^B  for  ^^bs,  ^brin  for  ^^bsri;  so 
in  the  preterite  3  fern.,  which  in  these  verbs  retains  the 
primary  characteristic  n^,  §  86.  &,  t\^^  for  H^bs,  to  which 
is  further  appended  the  softened  ending  H^,,  thus  Hrbs, 
in  pause  nn:3. 

-■■  Tat  t 

a.  The  rt  of  the  3  fern.  pret.  is  frequently  explained  as  a  second  fem- 
inine ending  added  after  the  first  had  lost  its  significance  in  the  popular 
consciousness.  It  might,  perhaps  with  equal  propriety,  he  regarded  as 
paragogically  appended,  §  61.  6,  comp.  such  nouns  as  iir"?*i\:j"' ,  (ir^lS, 
inri'^S;,  in  order  to  produce  a  softer  termination  and  one  more  conformed 
to  that  which  obtains  in  the  generality  of  verbs.  Nordheimer's  explanation 
of  the  ri  as  hardened  from  fi,  i^t^h^  for  T^hh^f  labours  under  the  double 
difficulty  that  there  is  neither  proof  nor  probabUity  for  the  assumption  that 
the  consonant  ti  could  be  exchanged  for  n,  and  that  tl  in  the  preterite  of 
these  verbs  is  not  a  radical  nor  even  a  consonant,  but  simply  the  represen- 
tative of  the  vowel  a. 

2.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  consonant 
the  third  radical  "^  remains  but  is  softened  to  a  vowel,  so 
that  in  the  Kal  preterite  it  quiesces  in  Hhirik,  in  the 
Pual  and  Hophal  preterites  in  Tsere,  ia  the  Niphal,  Piel, 
Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  preterites  in  either  Hhirik  or  Tsere, 
and  in  the  futures  and  imperatives  of  all  the  species  in 
Seghol,  Tfi^,  ^n"b::,  riD^b^n. 

3.  Forms  not  augmented  by  personal  endings  lose 
their  final  vowel  before  suf&xes,  e.  g.  "^^b^,  Tjbs,  from  nby, 
V^:*;  from  nb:>^,  ?jb:»n  from  nbjn.  The  preterite  3  fem. 
takes  its  simple  form,  e.  g.  ^Jinba  or  ^nbs,  and  in  pause 

§  172.  The  Lamedh  He  verbs  will  be  represented  in 
Paradigm  XII  by  Jlb^  to  uncover,  reveal,  which  is  used  in 
all  the  species. 

SHORTENED  FUTURE  AND  IMPERATIVE. 

§  173.  1.  The  final  vowel  n_.  is  rejected  from  the 
futures  when  apocopated  or  when  preceded  by  Vav  con- 
secutive. The  concurrence  of  final  consonants  thence  re- 


190  ETYMOLOGY.  §  174 

suiting  in  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  is  commonly  relieved  by 
inserting  an  unaccented  Seghol  between  them,  §  61.  2, 
to  which  the  preceding  Pattahh  is  assimilated  in  the 
Hipliil,  §  63.  2.  a,  the  Hhirik  of  the  Kal  either  remain- 
ing unchanged  or  being  lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple 
syllable. 

KAL.  NIPHAL.        PIEL.        HIPHIL.      HITHPAEL. 

Future.       T^T  Ti^T    ^Ht    t^t    rhjr)\ 

Apoc.  Fut.      bT  or  b^i^      bi^      bT      bjh^      b^n^ 

Vav  Consec.     b:;^,1    or  V^^^        bs^;!       bi'-l        b^^.l        b^^^l 

2.  The  final  vowel  H..  is  sometimes  rejected  from  the 
imperative  in  the  Piel,  Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  species,  e.  g. 

Pi.  bs  for  nbs,  Hiph.  b±\  for  nbi^H,  Hith.  b^nn  for  nb^nn. 

Remaeks  on  Lamedh  He  Yekbs. 

§  174.  1.  Kal  preterite:  The  third  person  feminine  rarely  occurs  with 
the  simple  ending  n^,  thv  Lev.  25:  21,  n^"^  2  Kin.  9:  37  K'thibh;  so  in 
the  Hiphil,  nxbn  Ezek.  24:  12,  nk^n  Lev.  26:  34,  and  Hophal,  n'xn  Jer. 
13:  19.  Yodh  is  occasionally  retained  before  asyllabic  affixes,  l^'^^H  Ps. 
57:  2,  the  only  instance  in  which  the  feminine  has  the  ending  usual  in 
other  verbs,  rbn  Deut.  32:  37,  vij3  Ps.  73:  2  K'ri,  and  perhaps  l^bii  Prov. 
26:  7,  see  §  141.  1;  so  in  the  imperative,  rnx,  !l''i:2  Isa.  21:  12;  future, 
',^32-;,  'i^^bD'i,  '^r>vrr_,  'ii^Bn;;,  'i'l^np'^,  'ji^an::,  V?^'?.'  'tyn^.,  'i!;iT'  ''''^^^ 
l"'!^-'*,'!! )  Niphal  preterite,  ^i^aJ ,  Piel  future,  '(1^53'^n,  ^I'a^pD';,  Hipiiil  future, 
'^^sni  imperative,  I'^rn  for  1"'nxri. 

2.  Infinitive:  Vav  is  sometimes  written  for  the  final  vowel  of  the  in- 
finitive absolute  instead  of  fi,  tia,  "isij,  iiti,  i'ln,  inij,  iiis,  ii;:?,  ixn,  "irid, 
and  in  a  few  instances  the  feminine  termination  is  added,  riBx,  niN'n,  tTinia. 
There  are  also  examples  of  the  omission  of  this  termination  from  the  con- 
struct infinitive,  tvhv  and  ib?  (with  suf.  ^inb??  Ex.  18:  18),  nb'p,  nx-i,  ^Tp] 
once  it  has  the  form  niX'n  Ezek.  28:  17. 

3.  Future:  There  are  a  very  few  examples  of  Tsere  as  the  last  vowel 
of  the  future,  nxir,  Dan.  1:  13,  nfcn  Josh.  7:  9,  9:  24,  2  Sam.  13:  12, 
-fT^nn  Jer.  17:  17;  80  in  the  Piel,  n|5P  Lev.  18:  7  ff.,  Nah.  1:3;  and,  on  the 
other  hand,  there  is  one  instance  of  an  imperative  ending  in  Seghol,  viz., 
the  Piel,  n^'n  Judg.  9:  29.  The  radical  "^  remains  and  rests  in  Ilhirik  in 
ijim  (3  fern.)  Jer.  3:  6,  in  the  Hiphil,  'ryc':r\  (2  masc.)  Jer.  18:  23,  and  in 
the  Kal  imperative,  izn  (2  masc.)  Isa.  26:  20.  Yodh  appears  once  as  a 
consonant  before  a  suffix,  ■'r^jrN;!*  Job  3 :  25,  and  once  before  ii  paragogic, 


§  175,  176  EEMARKS  ON  LAMEDH  HE  VEEBS.  191 

n^^atiS  Ps.  77:  4,  which  is  very  rare  in  these  verbs,  but  perhaps  displaces 
the  final  vowel  in  njj'rx  Ps.  119:  117,  and  the  Hithpael,  ili'np?  Isa.  41;  23. 
In  a  few  instances  ">  is  restored  as  a  quiescent  before  suffixes,  ISi'^tl']  Hos. 
6:  2,  ''psn  1  Kin.  20:  35,  i^''S?'?  Ps.  140:  10  K'ri,  dn-^NSX  Deut,  32:  26. 
Examples  of  the  feminine  plural:  iiaisnn,  njB'in,  ^'j^'^nFll,  •^;''^?nn,  nrbn 
and  nsirtn,  nrx-in  Mic,  7:  10. 

4.  The  future  of  a  few  verbs  when  apocopated  or  preceded  by  Vav 
consecutive  simply  drops  its  last  vowel,  either  retaining  Hhirik  under  the 
personal  prefix  or  lengthening  it  to  Tsere,  F}3'J,  S'liJ'.l,  T\'?!.^,  '^^!])  ^^.?> 
Pllii'l;  so  in  the  Pe  Nun  forms,  t*J  and  ri ,  la^,  and  Pe  Yodh  Ci^'.l,  with 
Pattahh-furtive  under  the  first  radical  of  the  Pe  guttural,  '^TV ,  §  17.  1,  or 
the  vowel  of  the  personal  prefix  changed  to  Pattahh,  §  60.  1,  HN^T,  J<'i51 
but  ^t'^■) ,  ii~}V\^ .  Most  commonly  Seghol  is  inserted  between  the  concurring 
consonants,  TS';],  "il^  b^^,  ^r.l,  h^\  and  h^h,  'j'p';],  )ti•^^  and  "iSni,  q:i^.,  ",p^.1, 
^I?'.!!.  l^in'.]>  ^T.  an<i  n^^^l,  ti^^,  y^h^,  Xlh,  Xbni,  b^%  or  Pattahh  if  one 
of  the  consonants  is  a  guttural,  §  61.  2;  thus,  in  Ayin  guttural  verbs,  2-"43'.T, 
i^zm,  S'V,  rnn,  in  Pe  guttural  )rp^  from  n;n|i,  §  60.  1,  a.  (3),  nn^  from 
'^'^'!!!|!li  or  with  the  additional  change  of  the  vowel  of  the  prefix  to  Pattahh, 
""r^Ji!]!  '"ji?  from  f^in^,  'fri?5  from  n^n";,  nyrfl,  ::"i'1  Isa.  59:  17  (in  1  Sara. 
15:  19,  14:  32  K'ri,  this  same  form  is  from  W^  or  "J'^S',  §  159.  3),  bvj^l,  -jsil, 
bs'j'1.  The  rejection  of  the  final  vowel  takes  place  frequently  even  in  the 
first  person  singular,  which  in  other  verbs  is  commonly  exempt  from  short- 
ening, §  99.  3.  a,  "jSNi,  N;ii{,  niiJNi,  inx,  'jx  (from  nbi),  bvki,  )?k),  ia?ki 
and  n'TONT.  In  a  few  instances  the  final  vowel  is  retained  in  other  persons 
after  Vav  consecutive,  e.  g.  nib^;^1  1  Kin.  16:  25,  f^iV^_^  2  Kin.  1:  10,  nin'^l 
Josh.  19:  50,  nsnw  1  Sam.  1:  9,' n^y^l  1  Kin.  16:  n.'nxT.?  I  Sam.  17:'42, 
nnD'=!l  2  Kin.  6:  23,  "^m  Deut.  32:  18  is  fut.  apoc.  of  H^ia  as  irr  or  ^"^■) 
ofh^n. 

5.  The  passive  participle  drops  the  final  "^  in  1S^  Job  15:  22  for  ''^SJS, 
Hxay  Job  41:  25  for  -^-Triy,  and  fem.  plur.  nirj3  Isa.  3:  16  K'thibh  (K'ri  nv-jj), 
r\1TOS  1  Sam.  25:  18  K'thibh. 

§  175.  1.  In  the  Niphal  preterite  Yodh  may  quiesce  in  either  Tsere  or 
Hhirik,  though  the  former  is  more  frequent,  ri'ifsl  and  ''in'^is?,  ^i"^^??  and 
^i'-liaj,  dnp-ji  and  nrJ2-j3,  w!iS3  and  !ir!is3. 

2.  Examples  of  the  infinitive  absolute:  nS^S,  tlial?,  ili^Sln.  Construct; 
n^iyn  and  ni^:?,  i^ibn,  niii'^n  and  nxnri;  with  suiffixes,  '"in^'n,  inibsn, 
once  as  though  it  were  a  plural  noun,  db'^n'i'njri  Ezek.  6 :  8,  so  the  Kal 
infiu.,  ri^^iJS  Ezek.  16:  31. 

3.  Future  apocopated  and  with  Vav  consecutive:  ^ri,  M^JW,  PibN", 
ynn,  iri;n,  xVl,  -ijs'^i,  and  in  one  verb  with  Pattahh  before  ri,  rrb'^l  Gen. 
7:  23,  Ps.  109:  13,  though  Baer's  edition  omits  the  Daghesh-forte  in  the 
former  passage,  thus  making  it  a  Kal  future. 

§  176.  1.  Piel:  Two  verbs,  ifiii  to  be  becoming  and  tin::  to  draw  (the 
bow),  having  a  guttural  for  their  second  radical,  double  the  third  insteac , 
which  in  the  reduplication  appears  as  Vav,  though  the  general  law  is  ac'- 


192  ETYMOLOGY.  §  177 

hered  to  requiring  its  rejection  from  the  end  of  the  word  and  the  substitu- 
tion of  the  vowel  letter  n.  The  only  forms  which  occur  are,  of  the  former, 
the  preterite  njx?  Ps.  93:  5,  *11N;  Cant.  1:  10,  Isa.  52:  7,  and  of  the  latter 
the  participle  plur.  constr.  "^jrjljj^  Gen.  21:  16.  There  are  three  examples 
of  Hholem  inserted  after  the  first  radical,  §  92.  h,  ^ribi^U  Isa.  10:  13  from 
nbd,  the  b  being  an  orthographic  equivalent  for  0,  §  3.  1.  a,  and  in  the 
infinitive,  "iih,  nh  Isa.  59:  13. 

2.  In  the  first  person  singular  of  the  Piel  preterite  "^  sometimes  quiesces 
in  Tsere;  in  all  the  other  persons,  however,  and  even  in  the  first  singular, 
when  a  suffix  is  added,  it  invariably  quiesces  in  Hhirik,  Tfh'^  and  '^H'^la, 
wiip,  once  ''n'^^h',  ini|3  and  '^ri'^??,  ?i"'i:i'^*'2i ,  D'^niss. 

3.  Infinitive  absolute:  li^ip  and  ti-ip,  n|si,  njsJ,  nb,  iih,  inh,  riTO. 
The  construct  always  ends  in  T\i  with  the  exception  of  ri|3  also  ni23,  and 
■isn  Hos.  6:  9. 

4.  Future:  in  T(!l'^"iX  Isa.  16:  9  from  nin,  the  second  radical  is  doubled 
as  "i,  §  156.  1,  and  the  third  appears  as  1,  §  170.  a;  ?(1?5X  Ex.  33:  3  is  for 
Tj'rrN,  §  63.  \.h.  With  Vav  consecutive:  h'y^^,  bb-^l,  tib^^,  ik":!,  ^pW, 
"lyni,  so  in  the  first  person  singular,  -?^5^^,  1?J?.1;  once  Pattahh  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets,  ^T\'^^^  1  Sam.  21:  14;  so  in  pause,  :i'2n  Prov.  25:  9. 

5.  The  imperative  has  Seghol  in  a  single  instance,  •nis'n  Judg,  9:  29 

and  sometimes  drops  its  final  voAvel  b|,  b)l,  "j^,  OD,  IS  and  XVi"!, 

6.  Pual  infinitive  construct  with  suffix:  inis?  Ps.  132:  1. 

§  177.  1.  Hiphil  preterite:  The  prefixed  n  has  occasionally  Seghol, 
n^r^n  and  n^Jn,  rk'^n,  ntjsn,  nx^n,  ^'^r\v;"nn.  Yodh  may  quiesce  in 
Hhirik  or  Tsere,  !n''3^!7,  '^ri''5??f7,  r}'^.?!'7,  '^^''^^f^'  Yodh  once  remains  as  a 
quiescent  in  the  3  masc.  sing.,  "'inn  Isa.  53:  10,  and  ouce  in  the  3  masc, 
plur.,  1-o-2n  Josh.  14:  8  for  ^I'^O-sn,  §  62.  2. 

2.  The  infinitive  absolute  has  Kamets  in  Ma'itn  by  way  of  distinction 
from  nx";?i  and  nz"!!!  Jer.  42:  2,  which  are  always  used  adverbially.  Con- 
struct: The  prefixed  n  has  Hhirik  in  one  instance,  J^ikpri  Lev.  14:  43; 
nr!inb  2  Kin.  19:  25  K'thibh  is  for  nix^lib. 

3.  The  future,  when  apocopated  or  preceded  by  Vav  consecutive,  some- 
times simply  rejects  its  final  vowel,  PS;^,  N");^1,  '^'j^,  p^l ,  ^i'l  from  Irn^, 
f';!  from  T\\^,  i;^^  from  ni;D ,  Tj!!]  from  nbi;  commonly,  however,  Seghol  is 
inserted  between  the  concurring  consonants',  bx'^S  from  tiBx,  §  111.  2.  a, 
mi!!  I  ')!!b>  S'?^}!],  l^fD],  "iS':1,  S'1^1,  tjtn,  or  Pattahh  if  one  of  the  consonants 
is  a  guttural,  "ini^l,  H^Pi,  ^^i^l,  Sn^l .  Occasionally  the  final  vowel  remains, 
n'i?;;:]  1  Kin.  16:  17,  18:  42,  tia^ini  Ezek.  23:  19,  once  the  radical  "^  appears 
quiescing  in  Hhirik,  Ti'sri  (2  masc.  apoc.  for  Jra?)  Jer.  18:  23.  The  reten- 
tion or  rejection  of  the  vowel  is  optional  in  the  first  person  singular, 
nanxi,  nj^rxi,  nssn  and  T^NI  from  hbj,  Vj\^),  i:'A  from  irj;. 

4.  The  imperative  is  sometimes  abbreviated,  ii3"iri  and  a'ln,  T\^y\  and 
tl^rj.    ^?n   for   n^rn,    T^^r^  and   an,    nan  and  T^n;'  ran    (accent  on  the 


§  178,  179   REMARKS  ON  LAMEDH  HE  VERBS.         193 

ultimate)  Ps.  39:  14  is  for  nsian,  the  same  word  Isa.  6:  9  is  from  5?ia, 
§  140.  5. 

5.  Hophal  infinitive  absolute:  M^Sfi  Lev.  19:  20. 

§  178.  1.  Hithpael:  One  verb  nn\a  reduplicates  its  third  radical,  which 
appears  as  1,  ninPidn  to  worship,  fut.  MinS'::'),  with  Vav  conv.  ^irrrr'^l  for 
inri!:*!,  §  6i.  2,  piur.  linn^*?,  infin.  n'"i'nr,-i'ri ,  and  once  with  suf.  TC^tl^lT^O 
2  Kin.  5:  18,  the  accent  being  thrown  back  by  a  following  monosyllable. 
For  the  inflected  participle,  nr'^inna^  Ezek.  8:  16,  see  §  90,  page  126. 

2.  In  the  preterite  "^  mostly  quiesces  in  Tsere  in  the  first  person  singu- 
lar, and  in   Hhirik  in  the  other  persons,    '^H'^.^Nnrt,    ''n'^.^inntiri,    t^iinnujn, 

cip'^inFidri,  n'^bnn,  n'^etinn,  n-inann,  n^srim. 

3.  The  future  apocopated  and  with  Vav  consecutive:  ^?r>*!!,  ^SH'^l!, 

'^bT'^}  ^?r''?.  S^i^nPi,  ynilJn,  or  with  Kamets  in  the  accented  syllable,  li$r('^], 
lann,  so  always  in  pause,  ^nn*1,  iOsnni  Gen.  24:  65. 

4.  The  shortened  imperative:  "laHSi,  ^^r^f?* 

§  179.  1.  n^rj  to  be,  fut.  n^ri';;,  Hhirik  being  retained  before  the  guttural 
under  the  influence  of  the  following  Yodh,  whence  the  Sh'va,  though  vocal, 
remains  simple;  so  in  the  inf.  const,  with  prep.  W'^lna ,  STi^rt,  ri"'!!^,  though 
without  a  prefix  it  is  ni^n,  once  STiin  Ezek.  21:  15.  The  apocopated  future 
"^n"^  (in  pause  "Tli)  and  with  Vav  consecutive  "^n^l,  is  for  ''t^l,  and  •'liP  Nab. 
3:  11  is  apoc.  2  fem.  sing,  for  "^^riPl,  the  vowel  of  the  prefix  returning  to 
the  Sh'va  from  which  it  arose,  §  85.  2.  a  (1),  when  the  quiescence  of  the 
middle  radical  gives  a  vowel  to  the  first.  The  same  thing  occurs  in  the 
peculiar  form  of  the  future  X^IH")  Eccl.  11:  3,  where  the  second  radical  ap- 
pears as  1,  which  it  sometimes  does  in  the  imperative,  •1';'^  and  nirt  Gen. 
27:  29  or  Xin  Job  37:  6,  and  in  the  participle  tiin  Neh.  6:  6,  Eccl.  2:  22, 
fem.  n^in  Ex.  9:3. 

2.  P^n  to  live.  The  root  ''^n  is  usually  inflected  as  a  Lamedh  He  verb 
pret.  iTjn,  fut.  iH^ri^,  apoc.  in';,  with  Vav  consecutive  ''rp.lt  though  in  the 
preterite  3  masc.  it  occasionally  takes  an  Ayin  doubled  form,  "'li,  e.  g.  Gen. 
3:  22,  5:5,  and  once  in  the  3  fem.  an  Ayin  Yodh  form  !<^^H  Ex.  1:  16,  or  it 
may  be  explained  as  an  Ayin  doubled  form  with  Daghesh-forte  omitted,  §  25. 

3.  In  a  few  instances  K  is  substituted  for  the  third  radical  in  Lamedh 
He  verbs,  '^r.xk'i  Ezek.  43:  27,  StnX  Isa,  21:  12,  Xirj  Jer.  23:  39,  X'i'i'; 
2  Chron.  26:  15,  shh  Prov.  1:  10  from  nhx,  Stn'''!  Deut.  33:  21  from  t^hi<, 
K^n^l  2  Chron.  16:  12,  S<5'0-;  Lam.  4:  1,  NSd  2  Kin.  25:  29,  XSd';  Eccl.  8:  1, 
C^ixln  2  Sam.  21:  12  K'ri  for  Ci!l3r!,  n^X^bri  Hos.  11:  7,  Deut.  28:  66  for 
n-i^il^Pi,  §  56.  4,  dixnian  flX-i^^  2  Sam.  11:  24  from  nn^;  the  vowels  are 
those  of  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs  in  «rx  Jer.  3:  22  for  ^irnx,  ti^sn  1  Kin. 
17:  14  for  n^3Fi,  nnp-^  Dan.  10:  14  for  nnp"^;  and  the  full  Lamedh  Aleph 
form  is  adopted  in  i<"''is;j  Hos.  13:  15  for  nnsr 


13 


194  etymology.  §  180,  181 

Doubly  Imperfect  "Verbs. 

8  180.  Verbs  which  have  two  weak  letters  in  the 
root,  or  which  are  so  constituted  as  to  belong  to  two 
different  classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  commonly  exliibit 
the  peculiarities  of  both,  unless  they  interfere  with  or 
limit  one  another.  Thus,  a  verb  which  is  both  ^5"^  and 
n"b  will  follow  the  analogy  of  both  paradigms,  the  former 
in  its  initial  and  the  latter  in  its  second  syllable.  But  in 
verbs  which  are  both  Y'y  and  n"b  the  1  is  invariably 
treated  as  a  perfect  consonant,  and  the  n"b  pecuharities 
alone  preserved.  All  such  cases  have  been  remarked  upon 
individually  under  the  several  classes  of  verbs  to  which 
they  respectively  belong. 

Defective  A^rbs. 

§  181.  1.  It  has  been  seen  in  repeated  instances  in  the 
foregoing  pages  that  verbs  belonging  to  one  class  of  im- 
perfect verbs  may  occasionally  adopt  forms  from  another 
and  closely  related  class.  Thus  a  !5<"b  verb  may  appear 
with  a  in"b  form,  or  an  i'^  verb  with  an  ^"^  form  or  vice 
versa.  The  occurrence  of  an  individual  example,  or  of  a 
few  examples  of  such  divergent  forms,  may  be  explained 
in  the  manner  just  suggested  without  the  assumption  of 
an  additional  verb  as  their  source.  Sometimes,  however, 
the  number  of  divergent  forms  is  so  considerable,  or  the 
divergence  itself  so  wide,  that  it  is  simpler  to  assume  two 
co-existent  roots  of  the  same  signification,  and  differing 
only  in  the  weak  letter  which  they  contain,  than  to  refer 
all  to  a  single  root. 

a.  Thus,  nBs  means  to  shut  up  or  restrain,  and  n?i3  to  be  fitiished:  yet 
a  few  n  b  forms  occur  in  the  sense  not  of  the  latter  hut  of  the  former  verb. 
They  are  accordingly  held  to  be  from  N^S,  but  assimilated  in  inflection  to 
the  n"b  paradigm.     On  the  other  hand,   Unp  means   to  call,  and  nnp  to 

nr  '  t't  '  t't 

meet;  but  so  many  N  ?  forms  are  found  with  this  latter  signification  tha*" 


§  182  QUADEILITERAL  VEEBS.  195 

it  seems  necessary  to  assume  a  second  root  xnp  having  that  meaning.  The 
verb  to  run  is  ordinarily  Y'r\;  but  N'i:£'i  Ezek.  1:  14  is  too  remote  from  an 
1  ^  form  to  be  referred  to  that  root;  hence  it  is  traced  to  another  verb 
Xri"^  of  the  same  sense.  No  clear  line  of  distinction  can  be  drawn  between 
the  cases  in  which  divergent  forms  are  to  be  traced  to  a  single  root,  and 
those  in  which  the  assumption  of  a  second  is  admissible  or  necessary.  This 
must  be  decided  in  detail,  and  the  best  authorities  not  infrequently  differ 
in  their  judgment  of  particular  examples. 

2.  Where  two  verbs  exist  which  are  thus  radically 
connected  and  identical  in  signification,  it  not  infrequently 
happens  that  they  are  defective  or  mutually  supple- 
mentary, that  is  to  say,  that  one  of  them  is  in  usage  re- 
stricted to  certain  parts  or  species,  the  remainder  being 
supplied  by  the  other. 

a.  The  following  are  examples  of  defective  verbs:  2iii  to  he  good,  used 
in  the  Kal  species  only  in  the  preterite,  the  corresponding  future  is  from 
3^'^;  lii^  Kal  pret.  to  fear,  the  fut.  and  imper.  from  ^^J;  pni  Kal  pret.  and 
inf.  to  spit,  fut.  from  pp*;  "j'SJ  Kal  pret.  and  inf.  to  break  or  disperse,  fut, 
and  imp.  from  'j'^lQ;  "pD  Kal  pret.  to  be  alienated,  fut.  from  yp"^;  ii^'Ci  Kal 
pret.  to  be  a  prince,  fut.  from  "Vi'Zi;  shn  Kal  pret.  and  inf.  to  be  many,  fut. 
from  ni:'!  which  is  used  throughout  the  species;  dn^  Kal  fut,  to  be  hot, 
pret.  and  inf.  from  dpn,  which  is  also  used  in  the  future;  YT^  ^^  counsel, 
borrows  its  Kal  imper.  from  I'^l";  'j'PI'  Kal  fut.  to  awake,  pret.  from  the 
Hiphil  of  y^p,  which  is  also  used  in  inf,  imper.  and  fut.;  2^3  to  place,  the 
reflexive  is  expressed  by  ^iS^Tiri  from  siji;  nrd  to  drink,  the  causative  is 
Hpipn  from  >ip^3;  iT'^h'iri  from  dh^  is  used  as  the  causative  of  iria  to  he 
ashamed,  as  well  as  ^■'hfl;  "^n  to  go,  derives  many  of  its  forms  from  "^"i; 
Sn^  to  give,  is  only  used  in  the  Kal  imperative,  it  is  supplemented  by  "ihs 
of  totally  distinct  radicals. 

QUADEILITEEAL  YeEBS. 

§  182.  Quadriliteral  verbs  are  either  primitives  formed 
from  quadriliteral  roots,  whose  origin  is  explained,  §  68.  a, 
or  denominatives,  the  formative  letter  of  the  noun  or  ad- 
jective being  admitted  into  the  stem  along  with  the  three 
original  radicals.  The  former  class  adopt  the  vowels  and 
inflections  of  the  Piel  and  Pual  species,  while  the  latter 
follow  the  Hiphil. 

a.  The  only  examples  of  quadriliteral  verbs  are  the  following,  viz.. 
Piel  pret.  'jia'iQ  he  spread.  Job  2.6:  9,    where  the  original  Pattahh  of  the 

13* 


196  ETYMOLOGY.  §  183 

initial  syllable  of  the  Piel,  §  82.  5.  b  (3),  is  preserved;  fut.  with  suf.  !^2tC>"|?'^ 
he  shall  icaste  it,  Ps.  80:  14.  Pual  pret.  'il'SV^  it  freshened,  Job  33:  25,  the 
Methegh  and  the  Hhateph  Pattahh  being  used  to  indicate  that  the  Sh'va 
is  vocal,  and  that  the  form  is  equivalent  to  Tl^SC3"i;  part.  CspriD  scaled  off 
or  resembling  scales,  Ex.  16:  14,  bin'i2^  clothed,  i  Chron.  15:  27.  Hiphil 
pret.  ^in^iTxn  they  stank,  Isa.  19:  6  for  ^ir^iiNri  as  ^^t)"3  for  ^I'i'as'a,  derived 
from  riilN  putrescent,  which  is  simpler  than  to  make  it  with  Gesenius  a 
double  or  anomalous  Hiphil  from  nST,  §  94.  a,  comp.  Alexander  in  loc; 
fut.  rt-'N^irx  I  will  turn  to  the  left.  Gen.  13:  9;  llsix^bn  Isa.  30:  21,  part. 
D'l^iXriiL'p  1  Chron.  12:  2  from  bistb  the  left  hand,  elsewhere  reduced  to  a 
triliteral  by  the  rejection  of  K,  ^"'iirri^  2  Sam.  14:  19,  '^Ir'^brn  Ezek.  21:  21. 
To  these  may  be  added  the  form,  Avhich  occurs  several  times  in  the  K'thibh 
d'i12:jnD  1  Chron.  15:  24,  etc.,  and  QiTisn^  2  Chron.  5:  12,  for  which  the 
K'ri  substitutes  D'^'^Sinp  or  Di'niiriri.  As  it  is  a  denominative  from  n'n:!^!!!  a 
trumpet,  it  has  been  suspected  that  the  form  first  mentioned  should  be 
pointed  Q^n^Jiiraj  the  other,  if  a  genuine  reading,  is  probably  to  be  read 


Nouns. 

THEiK  FOBMATiON  (See  Paradigm  XTTT), 

§  183.  Nouns,  embracing  adjectives  and  participles 
as  well  as  substantives,  may  be  primitive,  i.  e.  formed 
directly  from  their  ultimate  roots,  or  derivative,  i.  e.  formed 
from  preexisting  words.  Those  which  are  derived  from 
verbs  are  called  verbals;  those  which  are  derived  from 
nouns  are  called  denominatives.  The  vast  multiplicity  of 
objects  to  which  names  were  to  be  appHed  and  the  di- 
versity of  aspects  under  which  they  are  capable  of  being 
contemplated,  have  led  to  a  variety  in  the  constitution 
of  nouns  greatly  exceeding  that  of  verbs,  and  also  to  con- 
siderable laxity  in  the  significations  attached  to  indivi- 
dual forms.  But  whatever  complexity  may  beset  the  de- 
tails of  this  subject,  its  main  outlines  are  sufficiently  plain. 
All  nouns  are,  in  respect  to  their  formation,  reducible  to 
certain  leading  types  or  classes  of  forms,  each  having  a 
primary  and  proper  import  of  its  own.  The  derivation 
of  nouns,  as  of  the  verbal  species,  from  their  respective 
roots  and  themes  calls  into  requisition  all  the  expedients, 


§  184  FOBMATION  OF  NOUNS.  197 

whether  of  internal  or  external  changes,  known  to  the 
language,  §  69.  Hence  arise  four  classes  of  nouns  accord- 
ing as  they  are  formed  by  internal  changes,  viz.: 

1.  The  introduction  of  one  or  more  vowels. 

2.  The  redupHcation  of  one  or  more  of  the  letters  of 
the  root.    Or  by  external  changes,  viz.: 

3.  The  prefixing  of  vowels  or  consonants  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  root. 

4.  The  affixing  of  vowels  or  consonants  at  the  end. 

a.  The  mass  of  nouns  are  to  be  regarded  as  primitives  and  not  as  de- 
rived from  their  cognate  verbs.  Many  roots  are  represented  by  nouns 
alone,  without  any  verbs  from  which  they  could  have  sprung,  e.  g.  3K 
father,  y^k  earth.  And  where  verbs  of  kindred  meaning  do  exist,  it  is 
probable  that  they  are  not  the  source  or  theme  of  the  nouns,  but  that 
both  spring  alike  directly  from  their  common  root,  as  ~^^  to  reign,  and 
T(Vb  king  from  the  root  "|^^.  Since,  however,  these  roots  or  elemental 
themes  are  destitute  of  vowels,  and  consequently  are  incapable  of  being 
pronounced  in  their  primitive  or  abstract  state,  it  is  customary  and  con- 
venient in  referring  to  them  to  name  the  verb  which  though  a  derivative 
form  has  the  advantage  of  simplicity  and  regularity  of  structure,  and  is 
often  the  best  representative  of  the  radical  signification.  Accordingly,  T^b 
king  may  be  said  to  be  derived  from  the  root  ~5"2  to  reign,  that  is,  it  is 
derived  from  the  root  "jb^  of  which  that  verbal  form  is  the  conventional 
designation,  §  68. 

b.  Infinitives,  participles,  nouns  Avhich  follow  the  forms  of  the  secon- 
dary or  derived  species,  §  189.  2.  a,  and  some  others,  are  evidently  verbals. 
Most  nouns  of  the  fourth  class,  as  well  as  some  others,  are  denominatives. 

Class  I. — Nouns  formed  hy  the  insertion  of  votvels. 

§  184.  The  first  class  of  nouns,  or  those  which  are 
formed  by  means  of  vowels  given  to  the  root,  embraces 
three  distinct  forms,  viz.: 

1.  Monosyllables,  or  those  in  which  the  trihteral  root 
receives  but  one  vowel. 

2.  Dissyllables,  in  wliich  the  second  is  the  principal 
vowel  and  the  first  a  pretonic  Kamets  or  Tsere. 

3.  Dissyllables,  in  which  the  first  is  the  principal 
vowel  and  "he  second  a  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere. 


198  ETYMOLOGY.  §  185,  186 

1.  Triliteral  Monosyllables. 

§  185.  The  formative  vowel  may  be  given  either  to 
the  second  radical  bh[^^  ^^P|>,  bibp,  b^bp,  or  to  the  first, 
bpp,  bt:p,  bpp;  in  the  latter  case  an  unaccented  Seghol 
is  conimonlj  interposed  between  the  concurring  con- 
sonants, §  61.2,  to  which  a  preceding  Pattahh  assimilated, 
§  63.  2.  a,  bt:p,  bt^p,  bt:p.  Forms  thus  augmented  by  the 
introduction  of  an  auxiliary  vowel  are  termed  Segholates. 

a.  In  this  and  the  following  sections  bi:p  is  used  as  a  representative 
loot  in  order  more  conveniently  to  indicate  to  the  eye  the  formation  of  the 
different  classes  of  nouns.  No  root  could  be  selected  which  would  afford 
examples  in  actual  use  of  the  entire  series  of  derivative  forms ;  bup  has  but 
one  derivative  b::^  slaughter,  and  this  only  occurs  in  Obad.  ver.  9. 

6.  As  I,  0  and  u  rarely  or  never  occur  in  mixed  accented  syllables, 
tj  19,  they  are  excluded  from  monosyllabic  nouns.  Every  other  vowel  is, 
however,  found  with  the  second  radical,  thus  c,  xzb^  a  little  prop,  paucity, 
dh'^  honey,  ^ha  man;  a,  b^x  strength,  nns  ivriting,  ^S'J  residue;  e,  Qsd 
shoulder,  nio^bush;  e,  Vi";  holding,  3X3  grief,  ::N|  a  icolf;  especially  i,  5, 
and  u,  which  occur  with  greater  frequency  than  any  others.  When  the 
first  radical  receives  the  vowel,  ^  and  il  are  likewise  excluded,  in  as  much 
as  they  rarely  or  never  stand  before  concurrent  consonants,  §  61,  4.  Few 
of  these  nouns  remain  without  the  auxiliary  Seghol  X";!!  a  valley,  Nid 
vanity,  Xun  sin,  nnD  spikenard,  arp  truth.  Kamets  is  only  found  before 
Vav,  §  63.  2.  a,  ni^,  and  in  pause,  §  65,  ',nx,  WQ. 

c.  When  the  second  radical  receives  the  vowel,  there  is  a  concurrence 
of  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  which  is  sometimes  relieved 
by  prefixing  X,  §  53.  1.  a,  with  a  short  vowel,  mostly  e,  §  60.  1.  a  (5),  but 
occasionally  a,  S-aiJX  finger  for  v'^yi,  Didx  lattice,  ^i^X  belt,  sints  and  si'n'T 
arm,  ^"iirx  and  bi^n  yesterday. 

§  186.  These  nouns,  standing  at  the  first  remove  from 
the  root,  express  as  nearly  as  possible  its  simple  idea 
either  abstractly,  e.  g.  b^b^J;  emptiness,  bi-UJ  bereavement, 
T^t:^  strength,  p"k  rigliteoushess,  ITJ^  lielp^  bib'  greatness,  or 
as  it  is  realized  in  some  person  or  object  which  may  be 
regarded  as  its  embodiment  or  representative,  'T'ilS  lord 
from  ^ia  to  he  mighty,  '^I:ii^<5  man  from  irii^  to  be  sick,  b^za 
boundary,  TjCp  libation  prop,  pouring  out,  pt::?  valley  prop. 
depth,  Y?^n  vinegar  prop,  sourness. 

a.   That  the  position  of  the  formative  vowel  before  or  after  the  second 


§186  FOEMATION  OP  NOUNS.  199 

radical  does  not  materially  affect  the  character  of  the  form,  appears  from 
the  following  considerations:  (1.)  The  sameness  of  signification  already 
exhibited,  and  which  may  be  verified  in  detail.  (2.)  The  occasional  ap- 
pearance of  the  same  word  in  both  forms,  e.  g.  "^Z^^  and  "lia  man,  yz^_  and 
r'j:  plant,  xbs  and  N^Bs  j^^^^'^''^^  '\T}^  ^^"1  T'^^  thumb,  TOJ'  and  'nrv-M  Lright- 
?'fs.9.  (3.)  The  concurrence  of  both  forms  in  the  Kal  construct  infinitive 
":;t!3P  and  n3::p,  §  87,  ■'!i:;p  and  Cr^ljp.  (4.)  The  fact  that  Segholates  may 
arise  alike  from  hii'p  and  bi:|?,  §  61.  1.  6.  (5.)  The  cognate  languages; 
monosyllables  in  Arabic,  whose  vowel  precedes  the  second  radical,  answer 
to  those  whose  vowel  succeeds  the  same  radical  in  Aramaean,  and  both  to 
the  Hebrew  Segholates,  e.  g.  13?  servant,  Aram,  iss;,  Arab.  j'-«^. 

b.  The  presence  of  imperfect  lettei'S  in  the  root  may  occasion  the  fol- 
lowing modifications: 

it's  roots.  Aleph,  as  a  first  radical,  sometimes  receives  a  long  vowel 
(..)  instead  of  Sh'va  (...),  §  60.  3.  c,  "j^l^X  fidelity  for  ■|>liN,  n-jx  ffirdle  for  "li'JN. 

5j"  Guttural  and  b"  Guttural.  If  the  third  radical  be  a  guttural,  Pattahh 
is  substituted  for  the  auxiliary  Seghol,  §  61.  2,  n^3  confidence,  V^t:J  hear- 
ing,  PSi  height;  if  the  second  radical  be  a  girttural,  the  preceding  vowel  if 
Hholem  remains  unchanged,  otherwise  it  also  commonly  becomes  Pattahh 
"iSa  young  man,  "i>5  youth,  'ine  fear  but  bfibi  tent,  nri3  bread. 

'i"s  and  ")  "s  roots.  A  vowelless  "^  or  3  is  in  a  few  instances  rejected  from 
the  beginning  of  a  word,  §  53.  2.  a,  iilS  produce  for  ^13";,  TiD  familiarity 
for  Tio";,  N"^':;  elevation  for  Sf^ib?,  'Ti  lamentation  for  "^ni,  particularly  in 
feminines  and  secondary  derivatives;  thus,  ilTon,  fri?.  Inks,  n^n  drop  an 
initial  Yodh,  and  T\^p,  '^\'0  an  initial  Nun.  Nun  may  also  experience  as- 
similation when  it  is  a  second  radical,  C]X  anger  for  p]:N,  cis  cup  for  033. 

V's  and  "'"'$  roots.  In  Segholates  "i  is  preceded  by  Kamets  bp  (accord- 
ing to  Baer  hv  in  Ezek.  28:  18)  wickedness,  Tj'n  midst,  unless  the  last 
radical  is  a  guttural,  tnin  space;  "^  is  preceded  by  Pattahh  and  followed  by 
Hhirik,  b";^  night,  '{">}}  eye.  These  letters  frequently  give  up  their  conso- 
nantal character  and  become  quiescent,  §  57.  2.  Vav  is  rejected  in  a  few 
words  as  "^S  brand  for  lis,  ''X  island  for  "'"iX,  "^  watering  for  ii"i,  §  53.  3. 

fn'b  roots.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  proper  final  radical  is  rejected, 
as  it  is  in  verbs,  and  the  final  vowel  written  il,  as  nip  bush,  no3  weeping, 
n3n  thought.  When  ^  appears  as  the  radical,  it  prefers  the  form  "^32  weep- 
ing, i"[S  fruit,  '^bs  vessel;  1  retains  its  consonantal  character  in  inp  winter, 
l3b  quail,  or  it  may  be  changed  to  its  cognate  vowel  H,  which  combines 
with  the  preceding  a  to  form  o,  §  62.  1,  V"^  (for  d'yaH)  ink,  ixtn  antelope. 
In  Segholates  1  quiesces  in  Shurek,  §  57.  2.  (4),  ini  swimming  for  inc, 
*in2  emptiness;  the  lexicon  of  Gesenius  contains  the  forms  Tip  garment, 
^^2,\i  end,  ibi:  security,  but  these  words  only  occur  in  the  plural  or  with 
suffixes,  and  the  absolute  singular  is  quite  as  likely  to  have  been  11o ,  ISp , 
sib\23,  and  "hyn  may  similarly  be  referred  to  ^an  cleft. 


200  ETYMOLOGY.  §  187 

2.  TM  mam  voioel  in  the  ultimate. 

8  187.  1.  The  second  form  of  this  class  is  a  dissyl- 
lable with  one  of  the  long  vowels  in  the  second  which  is 
its  principal  syllable,  and  in  the  first  a  pretonic  Kamets, 
for  which  Tsere  is  occasionally  substituted  when  the 
second  vowel  is  Kamets,  thus  bb)^  or  bbp,  bt:]^,  b^bj^, 
bSbij,  b-ib|j. 

2.  These  are  properly  adjectives,  and  have  for  the 
most  part  an  intransitive  signification  when  the  vowel  of 
the  ultimate  is  a,  e,  or  o,  and  a  passive  signification  when 
it  is  t  or  u,  '[b]^  and  '|t:|^  small,  "jir'n  fat,  TlJ^n:  made  of  brass, 
l^riin  chosen.  Those  with  a  and  i  in  the  ultimate  are,  how- 
ever,  prevaihngly  and  the  others  occasionally  used  as 
substantives,  and  designate  objects  distinguished  by  the 
quahty  which  they  primarily  denote,  pV  herbs  prop. 
green,  *>D123  strong  drink  prop,  intoxicating,  ^!bD  leopard 
prop,  spotted,  Tfi^  and  t\^22  turban  prop,  wound  around, 
^iis  glory,  that  which  is  glorious. 

a.  The  intransitive  adjectives  supply  the  place  of  Kal  active  participles 
to  neuter  verbs,  §  90,  and  in  ^'^  verbs  they  have  superseded  the  regular 
formation,  §  155.  1,  D|3  for  D^)^.  Kal  passive  participles  are  verbals  vi^ith  u. 
This  formation  with  I  in  the  ultimate  is  adopted  in  several  names  of  sea- 
sons, ^■'ns  Abib,  the  time  of  ears  of  corn,  C)"bx  ingathering  prop,  the  being 
gathered,  "i"^ii3  vintage,  "i^^Dj  pruning-time,  UJi'Sn  ploughing-time,  l"'k|^  har- 
vest, Comp.  §  203.  1.  6. 

b.  Adjectives  with  o  commonly  express  permanent  qualities,  those  with 
e  variable  ones,  ^iny  great,  bna  growing  great;  pin  strong,  pin  becoming 
strong;  ainp  near,  -np  approaching;  piriT  remote,  prin  receding.  Hence 
the  former  are  used  of  those  physical  and  moral  conditions  Avhich  are  fixed 
and  constant,  such  as  figure,  colour,  character,  etc.,  Ti"!!!*  long,  h'i.v  round, 
pas  deep,  naj  high;  n^X  red,  l'"is  spotted,  Ip3  speckled,  pin^  green,  "ipv 
striped,  "in:i  white,  p""^©  bay,  "I'ric  black;  pinTa  sweet,  ^-in::  pure,  ^iTI?  holy. 
And  the  latter  are  employed  of  shifting  and  evanescent  states  of  body  and 
of  mind,  xprj  thirsty,  z.b'\  hungry,  ^iia  sated,  C]S^  weary,  ^hs  grieving, 
Vibn  desiring,  inn  fearing,  ii>'J  exulting. 

e.  The  active  signification  asserted  for  the  form  h'r^p^  in  a  few  instances 
cannot  be  certainly  established;  lirX  architect,  prop,  reliable  (in  building) 
is  intransitive  in  Hebrew  conception;  so  perhaps  is  ^ip^  or  t'lp^  fowler, 
comp.  Lat.  aucupari,  aucupatus.     Other  alleged  cases  are  probably  not 


§  188        roEMATiON  or  nouns.  201 

nouns  but  absolute  infinitives  of  Kal,  ''ina  Jer.  6:  27  may  as  well  be 
rendered  I  have  set  thee  to  try  as  for  a  trier  (of  metals);  yi'bri  Isa.  1 :  17  is 
not  oppressor  nor  oppressed  but  icrong-dowg,  to  doixeiv,  see  Alexander  in 
loc;  and  even  p'W'J  Jer.  22:  3  may  in  like  manner  be  oppression  instead 
of  oppressor. 

d.  rib  roots  are  restricted  to  forms  with,  i,  in  which  the  radical  "^ 
quiesces,  ^'i::  fresh,  •'i^  afflicted,  "^pi  or  i<"^p3  with  otiant  X,  §  16.  1,  pure, 
or  with  a  which  combines  with  it  to  form  e,  il  ,  "liilj  and  nniU  field,  HB'^ 
fair,  nsa  high;  in  a  few  nouns  this  final  vowel  is  dropped,  5'n  fish  for  nJ'n, 
in  marii  for  nin,  y:?  free  for  <i^^,  "i?  son  for  nia,  ns  mouth  for  n^s,  un- 
less, indeed,  these  and  the  like  are  to  be  regarded  as  primitive  biliterals. 
Vav,  as  a  final  radical,  may  be  preceded  by  a,  lis  meek,  or  e,  l^s'J  secure. 

3.  2%e  main  voM?eZ  ^■M  <^  penult. 

§  188.  1.  The  third  form  of  this  class  is  a  dissyllable 
having  an  immutable  vowel,  mostly  Hholem,  though  oc- 
casionally Shurek  or  Tsere  in  the  first,  which  is  its  prin- 
cipal syllable,  and  a  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the 
second,  thus  bt:ip,  bbip,  bt:^p,  bb^p,  bb^p. 

2.  These  indicate  the  agent,  and  are  either  active  par- 
ticiples, bbip  killing,  or  substantives,  Dinin  signet-7'ing  prop. 
sealer,  iry^  enem^j,  one  practising  Jwstility,  b^'^^r/ox  prop. 
digger,  Cib^lD  hammer  prop,  pounder,  bbTl  morning  star 
prop,  shining  one. 

a.  A  number  of  nouns,  indicative  of  occupation,  follow  the  participial 
form,  which  thus  serves  to  express  permanent  and  professional  activity, 
^2''3  herdsman,  hzn  sailor  prop,  rope-handler,  ilinin  ploughman,  ^ki"^  potter 
prop,  former.  Dais  fuller,  'ns  priest,  Dns  vine-dresser,  ^nio  merchant,  "isio 
scribe,  bbi"!  trafficker,  ns"!  shepherd,  HS"^  physician,  nibi  dealer  in  unguents, 
D^"i  embroiderer,  ipiu  watchman,  ''^vy:J  porter  prop,  gate-keeper,  'jh^^:i  judge. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  u  in  the  first  syllable  is  shortened  and  fol- 
lowed by  Daghesh-forte  conservative,  '2y\:)  and  aJS"  pipe,  yn'i,  pit. 

c.  ^'y  roots.  The  contraction  of  Sj's  and  the  quiescence  of  lis  roots,  by 
reducing  them  to  biliteral  monosyllables,  obliterates  to  a  considerable  ex- 
tent the  distinctions  which  have  been  described  and  which  are  possible 
only  in  triliterals.  The  contracted  forms  which  arise  from  "S  roots  are 
30,  ao,  ap,  ab,  §  185.  b.  Of  these  ab  =  aab  belongs  to  the  monosyllabic 
formation,  and  is  chiefly  used  of  abstracts,  "la  purity,  a'"i  multitude,  DPI  in- 
tegrity, bs  yoke;  and  ao  =  aaO  to  the  first  species  of  dissyllables,  embracing 
adjectives  and  concrete  nouns,  DFl  perfect,  Sn  feast;  while  ao  and  ao 
may  arise  indifferently  from  either,  pp  rottenness  is  an  abstract  noun  for 
pj^p,  but  T\2  tender  is  an  adjective  for  Tj^'^,  Kamets  being  compressed  to 


202  ETYMOLOGY.  §  189 

Pattahh  before  the  doubled  letter,  comp.  §  135.  3;  "rh  heart  is  for  the  dis- 
syllable 3ii5?5  ^D^  D?  f'^i  fo''  '!"!!''?)  but  "(n  favour  for  the  monosyllable  "iDn. 
IS  and  "ys  roots.  Nouns  from  quiescent  IS  and  "^'s  roots  may  be  divided 
into  three  pairs  of  forms,  D|5,  3*1;  dip,  S"^");  D^ip,  a^'i.  Of  these  the  last 
pair  (with  the  exception  of  Kal  passive  participles)  belong  to  the  primitive 
monosyllabic  formation,  !3'^"i  strife,  3^:3  goodvess;  the  first  pair  to  the  first 
species  of  dissyllables,  1:3'^  poor,  ^]  proud,  b^  God  prop,  the  mighty  one;  and 
the  second  pair  may  belong  to  either,  UJi^  =  la^^  poverty,  p'^^  =  p.'^l  empty 
■jix  =  J  IK  strength,  ni::  =  nVJ  good. 

Class  II. — Nouns  ivith  reduplicated  radicals. 

§  189.  1.  The  simple  form  proper  to  adjectives  is  ex- 
plained §  187;  it  may  be  converted  into  an  intensive  by 
doubling  the  middle  radical,  retaining  the  long  vowel  of 
the  second  syllable  and  giving  a  short  t  or  a  to  the  first. 
This  reduplicated  or  intensive  form  denotes  what  is 
characteristic,  habitual,  or  possessed  in  a  high  degree. 
Adjectives  of  this  nature  are  sometimes  used  as  de- 
scriptive epithets  of  persons  or  things  distinguished  by 
the  quality,  which  they  denote,  llj'in  very  weak,  njpD  seeing 
prop,  (having  eyes)  wide  open,  p"'n:i  righteous,  "iTlhSi  mighty 
man,  '^lT\full  of  grace,  D^fT]  merciful. 

a.  As  a  general  though  not  an  invariable  rule,  the  first  syllable  has 
Pattahh  when  a  pure  vowel  a,  i,  or  u  stands  in  the  ultimate,  but  Hhirik 
when  the  ultimate  has  one  of  the  diphthongal  vowels  e  or  o.  Several  nouns 
with  d  in  the  second  syllable  are  descriptive  of  occupations  or  modes  of 
life,  comp.  §  188.  2.  a,  "i3S  husbandman,  5^  fisherman,  ■''n  judge,  dnn 
(=  'c''^ti)  tvorkman,  nao  cook,  nsp  seaman  (from  n3p  salt),  bsp  bearer  of 
burdens,  1^^  hunter,  ntp  boioman,  :ib  thief,  not  a  mere  equivalent  to  iiia 
one  who  steals,  but  one  who  steals  habitually,  who  makes  stealing  his  oc- 
cupation. 

6.  Since  the  idea  of  intensity  easily  passes  into  that  of  excess,  the  form 
bisp  is  applied  to  deformities  and  defects,  physical  or  moral,  d|x  dumb,  Taa 
hump-backed,  Ui^n  (=  irtiH)  deaf,  "i.-is  blind,  nss  lame,  n'np  bald,  UJpS 
perverse. 

c.  In  a  few  instances  instead  of  doubling  the  second  radical,  the  pre- 
vious Hhirik  is  prolonged,  §  59.  a,  ui'kp  and  ^'i^'^p  nettle  prop,  badly  prick- 
ing, "I'iii^p  smoke,  Tin^^::  the  Nile  prop,  very  black,  pii^a  prison,  liT^s  spark.^ 
n'i'^iSi  battle,  "j'ik'^?  spark. 

d.  The  following  double  the  third  radical  in  place  of  the  second,  nn^Q 
brood,  •jirp  grem,  ^JNTU  quiet,  nix;  comely  from  ni<3,  the  last  radical  ap- 


§  190  FOEMATION  OF  NOUNS.  203 

pearing  as  1,  §  170,  ^lipx  feeble,  where  the  long  vowel  Tsere  is  inserted  to 
prevent  the  concurrence  of  consonants. 

e.  ""  and  more  rarelj*  VJ  roots  reduplicate  the  biliteral  formed  by  their 
contraction,  ^Jbsi  and  biibSt  xvheel  prop,  roller,  rinnn  frightful,  T^t'it  girt, 
^P'~ip^  crown  of  the  head  prop,  dividing  (the  hair);  so  fem.  fisnbn  severe  pain, 
n^:;??-;:  casting  down,  ribsba  skull,  and  plur.  T'liObo  baskets,  ^""b^V  turning 
upside  down  from  n^^  =  *^^" ,  riibb  (sing,  ""'i^?)  loops  and  D''3"b  (sing, 
probably  ni^lb  =  l^llp)  ivinding  stairs  from  !il3  =  11^ ;  a  root  bib  is  need- 
lessly assumed  by  Gesenius.  Sometimes  the  harsh  concurrence  of  consonants 
is  prevented  by  the  insertion  of  a  long  vowel,  b^b:i  (const.  bkb:J)  cymbal 
prop,  tinkling,  1^";?  and  '^H'n^  stark  naked,  totally  destitute,  b]bbp  despicable, 
or  the  softening  of  the  former  of  the  two  consonants  to  a  vowel,  §  57.  1, 
ibis  star  for  2333,  n'is::'iuJ  bands  worn  on  the  forehead  for  niEijS;:,  "jibp'^p 
(with  the  ending  "p  added)  ignominy  for  "jib^bp,  bhn  Bahylon  for  bzba,  or 
its  assimilation  to  the  succeeding  consonant,  "i33  something  circular,  a  cir- 
cuit for  ^is";3.  The  second  member  of  the  reduplication  suffers  contraction 
or  change  in  nt^r  chain  for  n'n":3"i"r  and  5."p"ip  floor  for  "ip"!p. 

2.  Abstracts  are  formed  with  a  doubled  middle  radical 
by  giving  u  to  the  second  syllable  and  ^  to  the  first,  piin 
folding  the  hands,  D^'iuj  retribution,  y^puj  abomination,  and 
in  the  plural  D^nSi)  atonement,  D'^l^pB  commandments, 
C^n^^jizj  divorce. 

a.  These  may  be  regarded  as  verbals  formed  from  the  Piel.  A  like 
formation  is  in  a  few  instances  based  upon  other  species,  e.  g.  Hiphil  "linn 
melting  from  T\t\<  ^'•^^D  cessation  from  the  l"s'  root  513,  Niphal  C^blPBS 
wrestlings;  B^^ins  when  derived  from  the  Niphal  means  repentings,  when 
from  the  Piel  consolations. 

b.  VV  roots  reduplicate  the  biliteral  to  which  they  are  contracted,  "irTin 
inflammation,  n"'r'r;.;':J  delight. 

c.  A  few  roots,  which  are  either  IS  or  S  guttural,  or  have  a  liquid  for 
their  third  letter,  double  the  last  radical  with  u  in  the  final  syllable,  VlkSD 
thorn-hedge,  linxs  (=ni"iN3)  ruddy  glow,  D^nin-pri  m^W^'/;^  eoZ»«ins  designed 
for  way-marks,  Ir'^ll^ti  horror,  D'lSlSNS  adulteries,  Q"'i?35  ridges,  also  with 
0  or  ^  in  the  last  syllable,  TJrn  acqiiiescence,  b'blij  pasture,  T^'^30  shoiver, 
^"I'ntiS  obscuration,  ninB-i  (K'thibh  "i"nS'JL^)  tapestry,  b-^bin  whence  "'B'^bin 
dark.  Tlie  concurrence  of  con.sonants  is  relieved  in  blba^y  (in  some  editions) 
snail  by  Daghesh-forte  separative. 

§  190.  A  few  words  reduplicate  the  two  last  radicals. 
These  may  express  intensity  in  general,  riip-rips  conqjlete 
oj^ening,  nJlETiS'^  very  beautiful,  or  more  particularly  re- 
petition, TiG^iri  tivisted  prop,  turning  again  and  again, 
P^p^n  slipijery,  -pbp?  crooked,  ^Tbr^  ^perverse,  "bscjJ;  mixed 


204  ETYMOLOGY.  §  191 

multitude  prop,  gathered  here  and  there,  lninSll!j  spots  or 
stripes,  ninB"lEn  moles  prop,  incessant  diggers.  As  energy 
is  consumed  by  repeated  acts  or  exliibitions  and  so  gradu- 
ally weakened,  this  form  becomes  a  diminutive  when 
applied  to  adjectives  of  colour,  t3'i;a'l5«5  reddish^  Ptip'!''! 
greenish,  ^ninip  blackish. 

a.  The  first  of  two  concurring  consonants  is  softened  to  a  vowel  in 
nniJisn  trumpet  for  trn^i^n,  and  probably  M^tS  Lev.  16:  8  for  hihyj. 

h.  "^'s  roots  drop  their  initial  radical,  D'^hnsn  ^i/iJs  from  3n^,  D'^KSSS 
offspring,  issue  from  xkv 

Class  III. — Nouns  formed  by  prefixes. 

§  191.  The  third  class  of  nouns  is  formed  by  pre- 
fixing either  a  vowel  or  a  consonant  to  the  root.  In  the 
following  instances  the  vowel  a  is  prefixed  with  a  in  the 
ultimate  to  form  adjectives  of  an  intensive  signification, 
nTp!!<  utterly  deceitful,  "i71j!!<  violent,  '^ir\^i<  (=]fy_^)  perennial, 
riDTi^  (only  represented  by  a  derivative,  §  94.  a)  very  foul, 
fetid,  1'b^i^  exceedingly  gross  or  thick  (applied  to  dark- 
ness, Isa.  59:  10),  or  verbal  nouns  borrowing  their  mean- 
ing from  the  Hiphil  species,  JT^IiTJ^  memorial,  nirii^  de- 
claration. 

a.  This  form  corresponds  with  J-Xs  \  the  Arabic  comparative  or  super- 
lative. Its  adoption  for  Hiphil  derivatives  corroborates  the  suggestion, 
§  82.  5.  6  (2),  respecting  the  formation  of  the  Hiphil  species  and  the  origin 
of  its  causal  idea. 

b.  The  letter  X  is  merely  the  bearer  of  the  initial  vowel  and  has  no 
significance  of  its  own  in  these  forms;  tl  is  substituted  for  it  in  bb"^!! 
(=  ^^'?!!?)  palace,  temple  prop,  very  capacious  from  bi^  in  the  sense  of  its 
cognate  b^lS  to  contain.  So,  likewise,  in  a  few  verbals  with  feminine  ter- 
minations, wis^'rn  Ezek.  24:  26  causing  to  hear  used  for  the  Hiph.  infin., 
§  128,  n^sn  deliverance  from  h^\ ,  "injn  grant  of  rest  (=  nnisti)  from  n^ii, 
iTiSln  aspect  from  133 ;  nii^ri  praises  from  rin^  may  perhaps  be  regarded  as 
a  like  formation  with  the  passive  vowel  M,  corresponding  to  the  Hophal, 
§  95.  a,  and  with  Daghesh-forte  separative,  §  24.  In  some  rare  instances  a 
sibilant  is  prefixed  instead  of  !!<  or  ri,  as  in  the  Shaphel  species  in  Aramaeic, 
n^nbo  flame  from  3nb,  b^iba';;  snail  from  bba,  ninnrp?"!::  depressions  from  'nvp. 

c.  The  short  vowel  prefixed  with  X  to  monosyllables  of  the  first  spe- 
cies, as  explained  §  185.  c,  has  no  eff'ect  upon  the  meaning,  and  does  not 
properly  enter  into  the  constitution  of  the  form. 


§192 


FORMATION  OP  NOUNS.  205 


§  192.  The  consonants  prefixed  in  the  formation  of 
nouns  are  12,  T\,  and  ''.  They  are  sometimes  prefixed  with- 
out a  vowel,  the  stem  letters  constituting  a  dissyllable  of 
themselves,  btOI^)^,  liliD53,  b|Dn,  l^isxri;  more  commonly 
fchey  receive  ci  or  ^  followed  by  a  long  vowel  in  the  ulti- 
mate, e.  g.  bbp?^,  bibp53. 

a.  Pattahh  commonly  stands  before  e,  I  and  u,  and  Hhirik  before  a  and 
0,  unless  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural  or  an  assimilated  Nun  when  Pattahh 
is  again  preferred,  ^^^?■3  food,  "i:^  planting,  "iViap  saiv,  oinPi  a  species  of 
bird,  sBnii  a  kind  of  gem,  Seghol  is  occasionally  employed  before  a  gut- 
tural or  liquid  followed  by  a,  §  63.  1.  b,  ^P^-o  depth,  33"!^  chariot,  Q']n;^ba 
pair  of  tongs.  These  rules  are  not  invariable,  however,  as  will  appear  from 
such  forms  as  nkl/q,  'h^^,  lEp'?,  HJip^p,  Cl'ip^?.  A  few  words  have  a  in 
the  ultimate,  r3n^  harp,  pili^  strangling.  The  insertion  of  Daghesh-forte 
separative  in  the  first  radical  is  exceptional,  v't^'O  Ex.  15:  17,  D'^Vna^  Job 
9:  18,  rrinJJiri  Joel  1:  17. 

b.  "I's  roots.    The  first  radical  appears  as  "^  resting  in  Hhirik  or  Tsere, 

"liia'^^  and  "ii3"'p  rectitude,  Ta'in"'n  new  wine,  )h'^'P\  south,  or  as  l  resting  in 
Hholem  or  Shurek,  "li'i'a  appointed  time,  lo^i^a  correction,  a'ijipi  sojourner, 
nain  sorrow.  In  a  few  instances  it  is  rejected,  bhpi  world,  or  assimilated  to 
the  following  radical,  skp  bed,  55  ^a  knotvledge. 

I's  and  "^V  roots.  The  root  is  reduced  to  a  monosyllabic  biliteral  by  the 
quiescence  or  rejection  of  the  second  radical,  the  prefix  receiving  Sh'va, 
ika  citadel,  orra  sound  place,  Dinn  ocean,  ^^p"}  living  thing,  or  more  com- 
monly a  pretonic  Kamets  or  Tsere,  ^ix?3  luminary,  "jina,  '(''I'a  and  "jna 
strife,  y^^'O  race,  I'^n';  adversary.  The  feminine  form  is  almost  always  ad- 
opted after  n,  nriiiiP  salvation,  ti^!i"ir\  oblation, 

SS  roots.  The  root  is  mostly  contracted  to  a  biliteral  and  the  vowel 
compressed  to  a,  o,  e  or  0,  §  61.  4,  the  prefix  sometimes  receiving  Sh'va 
which  gives  rise  to  a  Segholate  form,  §  61.  1.  b,  DDb  tribute  for  DsTa,  ipb 
bitterness  for  'rq-q,  hlih  defilement  for  bhsn,  "r^nia  fear  for  l]n?a,  inn  masf  for 
■jlpi ;  more  frequently  it  receives  a  pretonic  Kamets  or  Tsere,  t]D^  covering, 
"ja^  shield,  tii"^  fortress,  "ii|"3  anguish.  In  pi.""?  running,  the  short  vowel  of 
the  perfect  root  is  preserved  b}'  means  of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical. 
n  is  almost  always  followed  by  the  feminine  ending,  n^npl  folly,  n|nn  6e- 
ginning,  i'&'S'P\  prayer. 

f\h  roots.  The  ultimate  has  rt  ,  ni/ip  <?fseaS6,  fis'^ri  i^asfMre,  which  is 
apocopated  in  a  few  words,  ^rri  lifting  up,  hsh  higher  part,  )'Sh  and  ')l'^  on 
account  of,  and  always  disappears  before  the  feminine  ending  i1  ,  §  62.  2.  c, 
n^SD  ascent,  <i1:J'2  commandment,  nipri  /jo^e,  nx'^n  weariness.  Before  the 
feminine  termination  in  the  final  radical  appears  as  quiescent  '^  or  1,  ri'^3'iPl 
interest,  T\W7\  whoredom,  niinn  encamping,  T\'^b'\^  pasture.  Yodh  is  retained 
as  a  consonant  after  it,  D''";bn'a  diseases. 


206  ETYMOLOGY.  §  193 

§  193.  The  letter  '2  is  a  fragment  of  the  pronoun  ''53 
wJio  or  fi'D  what.  Nouns,  to  which  it  is  prefixed,  denote 

1.  The  agent  who  does  what  is  indicated  by  the  root, 
as  the  participles,  §  84.  5,  formed  by  an  initial  ?J,  and  a 
few  substantives,  ^"^'^'2  didactic  pscdm  prop,  instructor, 
bS'J  (from  bi j)  chaff  prop,  ivhat  falls  off. 

2.  The  instrument  hy  ivhich  it  is  done,  Tt\^'2  key  from 
nhs  to  open,  "^2^12  goad  f^.im  ibb  to  learn,  "iiU5"J  saiv  from 
^ITTD  to  saiv. 

3.  The  place  or  time  in  which  it  is  done,  t'\%'_l2  altar 
from  n^T  i(o  sacrifice,  '\%!^2  lair,  3^i7J  period  of  residence. 

a.  Several  denominatives  are  formed  by  prefixing  ^  in  a  local  sense, 
MiiJN'ip,  r.vi;i<^ti  place  at  the  head  from  TTXI,  n'3j'ip  -place  at  the  feet  from 
bsn,  riipnp  dunghill  from  y2y\,  "abp  brickkiln  from  ninb,  rtn?53p  storeho'ise 
from  ITnlSo,  bi"^  tvaqon  rampart  from  S^ij??,  ')^>?  place  of  fountains  from 
•J'y,  nip'?  field  of  encumbers  from  Xli'p,  "Sp?  /ier/^  o/"  sfraro  from  "nn. 

4.  The  action  or  the  quality  tvhicli  is  expressed  by 
the  root,  Ti%y^'2  slaughter^  "SP'-?  mourning,  ^i"53  sickness, 
f\Ji&2  error,  ^^^"''2  straightness.  Verbals  of  this  nature 
sometimes  approximate  the  infinitive  in  signification  and 
construction,  as  TOBri^  overturning,  mij^isa  Ezek.  17:  9, 
§  168.  2.  In  Palestinian  Araraaeic  the  infinitive  reg- 
ularly takes  this  form,  e.  g.  bbjp'J  to  kill. 

5.  The  object  upon  ivhicli  the  action  is  directed  or 
the  subject  in  ivhich  the  quality  inheres,  ^.t'^'^i  food  from 
bis  to  eat,  iTjr^  pscdm  from  "ilbj  to  sing,  nipb/Q  booty  from 
npb  fo  to^*e,  D"?'^T2:"J  /a^  things  from  "li^'d  to  &e  fat,  li?2213 
f/itt^  which  is  small,  phy2  that  which  is  remote. 

a.  These  different  significations  blend  into  one  another  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  it  is  not  alwaj's  easy  to  distinguish  the  precise  shade  of  meaning 
originally  attached  to  a  word:  and  not  infrequently  more  than  one  of  these 
senses  co-exist  in  the  same  word.  Thus,  IINTD  luminary,  may  suggest  the 
idea  of  agency,  dispenser  of  light,  or  of  place,  reservoir  of  light;  r'six^g 
knife,  may  be  so  called  as  an  agent,  a  devourer,  or  as  an  instrument,  used 
in  eating;  ^'^^p'O  means  both  a  holg  thing  and  a  holy  place;  '^^'O'C  sale  and 
something  sold  or  for  sale;  >^='^?'a  royal  authority  and  kingdom;  xki^  the 


§  194,  195       FOEMATION  OP  NOUNS.  207 

act,  place,  and  time  of  going  forth  and  that  trhich  goes  forth;  ^^ria  the  place 
and  time  of  sifting  or  divellivg  as  well  as  they  who  sit  or  divell. 

§  194.  Nouns  formed  bj  prefixing  "'  or  ri  denote  per- 
sons or  things  to  which  the  idea  of  the  root  is  attached. 

1.  "^  is  identical  in  origin  with  the  prefix  of  the  3  masc. 
future  in  verbs,  and  is  largely  used  in  the  formation  of 
names  of  persons,  ^""^'41  Isaac,  rriS';  Jejplithah,  but  rarely 
in  forming  appellatives,  D^V  adversary  prop,  contender, 
1^6"  apostate  prop,  departer,  t2^pb^  hag  prop,  gatherer,  D'lp"; 
living  thing  prop,  that  (which)  stands,  '^nll';  fresh  oil  prop. 
that  (which)  shines. 

2.  n,  probably  the  same  with  the  prefix  of  the  3  fern, 
future  of  verbs,  which  is  here  used  in  a  neuter  sense,  is 
employed  in  the  formation  of  a  few  concrete  nouns,  "hiri 
oak  prop,  that  (ivhich)  endures,  T|"''^.^ri  cloak  prop,  that 
(lohich)  wraps  up,  "1^17)  furnace  prop,  that  (which)  hums, 
XVBV]  apple  -pro^p.  ^hat  (tvhich)  exhales  fragrance.  But- it 
more  frequently  appears  in  abstract  terms  like  the  femi- 
nine ending  in  other  forms,  'yiZiT]  understanding,  I'^l'ZT) 
hitterness,  r^^iyp  delight.  It  is  very  rarely  found  in  de- 
signations of  persons,  and  only  when  they  occupy  a 
relation  of  dependence  and  subordination,  and  may  con- 
sequently be  viewed  as  things,  "i^bbin  learner,  li^in  one 
divelling  on  another's  lands,  tenant,  vassal. 

a.  The  gre^t  majority  of  nouns  with  ri  prefixed  have  likewise  a  femi- 
nine ending,  ni-i'iPi  deep  sleep,  r^byzv\  salvation,  rnxsn  beauf?/,  r^'^h'^V}  fraud. 

b.  The  few  nouns  formed  by  prefixing  Nun  are  originally  Niphal  parti- 
ciples, ^k3  handle  of  a  dagger  from  2^:,  ni:  excrement  from  the  crop  of  a 
bird  from  i<^1,  nip:  ftirn,  course  of  things  from  abo. 

Class  IV. — Norms  formed  by  affixes. 

§  195.  The  nouns  formed  by  means  of  an  affixed 
letter  or  vowel  are  chiefly  denominatives.  The  consonant 
•  appended  by  means  of  the  vowel  o,  or  less  frequently 
a,  forms 


208  ETYMOLOGY.  §  196 

1.  Adjectives,  'fi^'ni<  last  from  ini<  after,  'pLUO  first 
from  ISi^n  head,  'jib'^ri  middle  from  "qlri  midst,  irilcriD  hrazen 
from  ruinD  hrass.  A  very  few  are  formed  directly  from 
the  root,  '^''Z^  poor,  "p^b^  most  high,  "^ibbx  widowed. 

2.  Abstract  substantives,  the  most  common  form  ol 
which  is  "jibl^p,  e.  g.  "in^:?  blindness,  "pntsia  confidence,  "pii|? 
j9am,  'jip'^!!  paleness,  though  various  other  forms  likewise 
occur,  e.  g.  "p^n^Jt  and  "jini?  destruction,  'jiT'^B  dominion, 
■jin^'S  success,  "li"!]^  offering. 

a.  In  a  few  words  tlie  termination  I"!  has  been  thought  to  be  intensive, 
n3T;3  sabbath,  "pnai^  a  ^reaf  sabbath,  IT  proud,  "j'i'n'^'i  exceedingly  proud,  and 
once  diminutive  d'^i*  wan,  'jiir'^i*  /i7fZe  man,  i.  e.  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  so 
called  from  the  image  reflected  in  it.  The  word  'jl'n^'^  Jeshurun  from  "liJi 
upright,  is  by  some  explained  as  a  diminutive  or  term  of  endearment,  while 
others  think  that  the  termination  "I  has  no  further  meaning  than  to  make 
of  the  word  a  proper  name,  comp.  ")^3:iT .    See  Alexander  on  Isaiah  44 :  2. 

b.  )  is  occasionally  affixed  with  the  vowel  e,  "(Ha  axe,  "'n'QS  nail. 

c.  A  few  words  are  formed  by  appending  D,  e.  g.  Diins  and  ',"i"iQ  ran- 
som, t&Q  ladder  from  b^O  <o  Zi/i5  up,  Di:"iri  sacred  scribe  from  O'ln  stylus, 
D'in'n  soM/'/i  from  nn'n  fo  shine;  or  b,  e.  g.  ^p'lS  gaMen  from  0*13  vineyard, 
^ian  cn/ya?  or  CM^  o/"  a  floiver  from  S'^nj  Citp,  ^Oli?  anA;/e  from  D'n^  joint, 
bihri  locust  from  5^?^  indicative  of  tremulous  motion,  bsi?  thick  darkness 
from  Cl'''^>'  cloud,  ^7*13  iron  probably  from  na  to  pierce. 

§  196.  The  vowel  *•,  forms  adjectives  indicating  rela- 
tion or  derivation. 

1.  It  is  added  to  proper  names  to  denote  nationality 
or  family  descent,  ""Sliy  Hebrew),  ^C^n"^  Jebusite,  "'Fiicbs  Fhi- 
listine,  "i3")yt  Aramcean,  ''^^'^  Egyptian,  ''bx'^Tp';  Israelitish, 
an  Israelite,  "il  Danite,  ""hnp  Kohathite,  ''ltr\i  Gershonite. 

2.  It  is  also  added  to  other  substantives,  ^iiss  north- 
erner, ^'^53  foreigner,  ^nB  villager,  "'bro  footman,  "^riy  timely, 
''iD^rS  M?^er  from  the  plural  D^iD;  to  a  few  adjectives, 
"''iT-i^  and  *iTDt<  violent,  ''blu?  and  b^iu5  foolish,  and  even  to 
prepositions,  ^rinr}  lowest  from  nnn,  ^sb  /ro?^^  from 
^isb  +  \,  §  62.  2.' 

a.  The  feminine  ending  n^  is  dropped  before  this  ending,  "'l^n'^  J(?«« 
from  IrHsini,  i-SJi-ia  Beriite  from  ni^iia,  or  the  old  ending  n  takes  its 
place,  '^'rcv^  Maachathite  from  ?12?^,  or  3  is  inserted  between  the  vowels, 


§  197,  198       GENDEE  AND  NUMBEK  OF  NOUNS.  209 

''351:^  Shelanife  from  n3.;3.    Final  "^^  combines  witla  the  appended  ''.  into  I, 
§  62.  2,  "'lb  Levite  and  Levi,  '^i^'O  Shunite  and  Slmni. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  i_  takes  the  place  of  "^  ,  e.  g.  ^HTi  white 
stuffs,  ■'T^i'n  basket,  "^'iib  loop,  and  perhaps  "^iiiti,  in  a  collective  sense  t<?iwd[- 
oivs,  "^E^-t)  uncovered,  "'3i3  (for  *'^'^33)  crafty. 

MULTILITERALS. 

§  197.  1.  Quadriliteral  nouns  are  for  the  most  part 
evenly  divided  into  two  syllables,  iS^p?  scorpion,  1!i^T^ 
treasurer,  irb'in  sickle,  "l^^^S  barren.  Sometimes  the  second 
radical  receives  a  vowel,  that  of  the  first  radical  being 
either  rejected,  "p^^y^.  damask,  b^ZVn  frost,  ^'i-'O  vine  blossom, 
or  preserved  by  the  insertion  of  Daghesh-forte,  *Ji"^i3^n 
flint,  iT'is?  spider,  irr^Q  and  lliri^^S  concubine.  Occasionally 
the  third  radical  has  Daghesh-forte,  Ti'st^y  bat,  ^^330  fin. 

2.  Words  of  five  or  more  letters  are  of  rare  occurrence 
and  appear  to  be  chiefly  of  foreign  origin,  '|'J3^'^^5:  purple, 
yi'^t'^frog,  Tip^ir  cloth,  l^nipnj^  7mile,  ]by\tm  satrap. 

3.  Compound  words  are  few  and  of  doubtful  cha- 
racter, rillbb:?  shadow  of  death,  n!b^!}5"J  anything  prop,  what 
and  what,  Ti'C'bjl  ?wthing  prop,  no  zvhat,  'b'J^b'li  worthless- 
ness  prop,  no  profit,  nJb£iS!7j  darkness  of  Jehovah,  n^rz^bl? 
flame  of  Jehovah,  except  in  proper  names,  plk'^sb'-?  Melchi- 
zedek,  king  of  righteousness,  ^nJ"D2?  Obadiah,  serving  Je- 
hovah, D^p^in";  Jehoiakim,  Jehovah  shall  establish. 

GrENDER  AND  NuMBEE. 

§  198.  There  are  in  Hebrew,  as  in  the  other  Semitic 
languages,  but  two  genders,  the  mascuhne  ("'ij)  ^^^  ^^^ 
feminine  (nipD).  The  mascuhne,  as  the  primary  form,  has 
no  characteristic  termination;  the  feminine  ends  in  H   or 

'  T 

fi,  e.  g.  bbp  masc,  T^^'p^  or  Jnbbp/em. 

a.  The  only  trace  of  the  neuter  in  Hebrew  is  in  the  interrogative,  rtu 
ivhnt  being  used  of  things  as  ^"q  ivho  of  persons.  The  function  assigned  to 
the  neuter  in  other  languages  is  divided  between  the  masculine  and  the 
feminine,  being  principally  committed  to  the  latter. 

14 


210  ETYMOLOGY.  §  199 

6.  The  original  feminine  ending  in  nouns  as  in  verbs,  §  85,  1.  a  (1),  ap- 
pears to  have  been  n,  which  Avas  either  attached  directly  to  the  word, 
FiVi'p  which,  by  §  61.  2,  becomes  r^^iip,  or  added  by  means  of  the  vowel  a, 
thd'p  or  T^'^p,  which  by  the  rejection  of  the  consonant  from  the  end  of 
the  word,  §  55.  2.  c,  becomes  T\hdp .  The  termination  n  or  r^  is  still  found 
in  a  very  few  words,  rp-^  emerald,  nk;j  pelican,  tnrS'J  company  2  Kin. 
9:  17,  ri'nn^  morrow,  rip  portion,  nkp  end,  Tb'J;q  Josh.  13:  13,  and  the 
poetic  forms,  T\'yq\  song,  nljns  inheritance,  rinfjJ  help,  nVs  fruitful,  nip  sleep. 
Two  other  words,  rfll  Ps.  74:  19  and  ni'^JiS  Ps.  61:  1,  have  been  cited  as 
additional  examples,  but  these  are  in  the  construct  state,  which  always 
preserves  the  original  ri  iinal;  it  is  likewise  always  retained  before  suffixes 
and  paragogic  letters,  §  61.  6.  a,  ^p;^!!^';,  nnillU':,  "in":)!. 

e.  The  feminine  ending  rt  receives  the  accent  and  is  thus  readily  dis- 
tinguished from  the  unaccented  paragogic  T\^.  In  a  few  instances  gram- 
marians have  suspected  that  forms  may  perhaps  be  feminine,  though  the 
punctuators  have  decided  otherwise  by  placing  the  accent  on  the  penult, 
e.  g.  iTnia  burning  Hos.  7:  4.  ^Y^^  Galilee  2  Kin.  15:  29,  f^7Sp  destru^ition 
Ezek.  7:  25,  ti^n"i  vulture  Deut.  14:  17,  rtsp  low  Ezek.  21:  31. 

d.  The  vowel  letter  X,  which  is  the  usual  sign  of  the  feminine  in 
Aramaeic  takes  the  place  of  tn  in  Nib'!  threshing  Jer.  50:  11,  Nsti  terror 
Isa.  19:  17,  N^n  tvrath  Dan.  11:  44,  n\ib  lioness  Ezek.  19:  2,  H^'ii^  mark 
Lam.  3:  12,  H^-Q  bitter  Ruth  1:  20,  Nn"))^  baldness  Ezek.  27:  31,  si'^  sleep 
Ps.  127:  2.  No  such  form  is  found  in  the  Pentateuch  unless  it  be  St"iT 
loathing  Num.  11:  20,  where,  however,  as  Ewald  suggests,  X  may  be  a 
radical  since  it  is  easy  to  assume  a  root  N'lT  cognate  to  "ill.  The  feminine 
ending  in  pronouns  of  the  second  and  third  persons,  and  in  verbal  futures 
is  ^  '^.;  an  intermediate  form  in  e  appears  in  fri^T  Isa.  59:  5  and  ST^^'??  the 
numeral  ten,  or  rather  teen,  as  it  only  occurs  in  numbers  compounded  with 
the  units.  For  like  unusual  forms  in  verbs  see  §  86.  b,  and  §  158.  4. 

e.  The  sign  of  the  feminine  in  the  Indo-European  languages  is  a  final 
vowel,  corresponding  to  the  vowel-ending  in  Hebrew;  the  Latin  has  a,  the 
Greek  a  or  ly,  the  Sanskrit  i.  And  inasmuch  as  the  feminine  in  Hebrew- 
covers,  in  part  at  least,  the  territory  of  the  neuter,  its  consonantal  ending 
r\  may  be  compared  with  t,  the  sign  of  the  neuter  in  certain  Sanskrit  pro- 
nouns, represented  by  d  in  Latin,  id,  illud,  istud,  quid;  in  English  it, 
what,  that. 

§  199.  It  is  obvious  that  this  transfer  to  all  existing 
things,  and  even  to  abstract  ideas,  of  the  distinction  of 
sex  found  in  Hving  beings,  must  often  be  purely  arbitrary. 
For  although  some  things  have  marked  characteristics 
or  associations  in  virtue  of  which  they  might  readily  be 
classed  with  a  particular  sex,  a  far  greater  number  hold 
an  indeterminate  position,  and  might  with  quite  as  much 
or  quite  as  little  reason  be  assigned  to  either.    It  hence 


§  199 


GENDEE  AND  NUMBEB  OF  NOUNS. 


211 


happens  that  there  is  no  general  rule  other  than  usage 
for  the  gender  of  Hebrew  words,  and  that  there  is  a 
great  want  of  uniformity  in  usage  itself 

a.  The  following  names  of  females  are  without  the  proper  distinctive 
feminine  termination: 


dx  mother. 


'linx  she-ass.         lUa^'^Q  concubine.         \>yd  queen. 

So  the  names  of  double  members  of  the  body,  whether  of  men  or  ani- 
mals, which  are  feminine  with  rare  exceptions: 

"jlK  ear.  SinT  arm.                  r)?  palm. 

3J3::n  finger.  i;  hand.  V\TO  shoulder. 

'f\i.  thumb.  "qn;;!  thigh.               I":?  eye. 

'T^%  knee.  C)i3  wing.  V^l  side. 

The  following  nouns  are  also  feminine: 

nx  brazier.  2"in  sword.  T^S  city. 

"liHTN  footstep.  tsis  cup.  tnb   Great  Bear. 

^k^  tvell.  TO3  brightness.  iD'^3  couch. 

"jua  belly.  ^S'i  shoe.  n^  workmanship. 


V.b  horn. 
^^.  foot. 
'{a  tooth. 
piti  leg. 

ns  morsel. 
"ytii  light. 
6<i3'^  myriad. 
bin  world. 


b.  The  following  nouns  are  of  doubtful  gender,  being  sometimes  con- 
strued as  masculine  and  sometimes  as  feminine.  Those  which  are  com- 
monly masculine  are  distinguished  thus  (*);  those  which  are  commonly 
feminine  are  distinguished  thus  (f). 

*"ii2n^  fortress. 
*n5T^  altar. 
nin^  camp. 
*i'ib'g  rod. 
*D'ip^  place. 
ncri:  brass. 
t^si  soul. 


fjax  stone. 
'list  light. 
Piix  sign. 
''iwNt  fleet. 
•ji^ij  ark. 
nyk  path. 
iy^ik  earth. 
t^^x  fire. 
*ia3  garment, 
*n'i3  house. 
^na  wall. 
X"]!  valley. 
la  garden. 
nBi)  vine. 
*y^'i  threshing- 
floor, 
■frhh  door. 


T\^'^,  IV ay. 
'bb'^n  temple. 
'•jiir!  multitude. 
'llbT   beard. 
"jilsn  ivindow. 
isri  court. 
bii"'  jubilee. 
fjii'i  right  hand. 

^bl  peg. 
'Tias  glory. 

*i3  pail. 

f"i33  circuit. 

'd'lis  vineyard. 

*3b  ^ear^ 

dK?   bread. 

tTi'iib  tongue. 

*b3S^  /boci. 


*Jib5  cord. 

*C5  people. 
td:iy  io«e. 

anj  evening. 

t  ins  <ime  (ciwra- 
fion). 
*d''ia  face. 


f dr's  fme  (repc- 

*j<r^  Aosf. 

'ps^  worfA. 

n'ljp  ^ow. 
fpin  spirit. 
fan"!  s^reef. 
*drin  M)om6. 
*Dri''')  juniper. 
bixia  S/teoZ. 
*::a"ij  sceptre. 

niiy  sabbath. 

IWtJ'i:    SMM. 

dinFi  ocean. 

*')^''n  sowfA. 

**i?Fi  rozor. 
14* 


212  ETYMOLOGY.  §  200 

Gesenius  ascribes  only  one  gender  to  a  few  of  these  words,  but  '^h  is 
once  fern.  Prov.  12:  25;  so  ^i:Np  fern.  Hab.  1;  16,  "i!i^^  fem.  Hab.  1:  10, 
nba  fem.  Ezek.  43:  13,  ^'sb  masc.  Ezek.  24:  10.  The  list  might  be  re- 
duced by  referring  the  vacillation  in  gender,  wherever  it  is  possible,  to  the 
syntax  rather  than  the  noun.  Verbs,  adjectives,  and  pronouns,  which  be- 
long to  feminine  nouns  may  in  certain  cases,  as  wUl  be  shown  hereafter, 
be  put  in  the  masculine  as  the  more  indefinite  and  primary  form.  While, 
on  the  other  hand,  those  which  belong  to  masculine  names  of  inanimate 
objects  are  sometimes  put  in  the  feminine  as  a  substitute  for  the  neuter. 

c.  Some  species  of  animals  exhibit  a  distinct  name  for  each  sex,  the 
feminine  being  formed  from  the  mascuhne  by  the  appropriate  termination, 
13  bullock,  frns  heifer,  hj,b  calf,  fem.  n^:?,  bis  lamb,  fem.  ni^rp,  or  being 
represented  by  a  word  of  different  radicals,  li^H  ass,  fem.  'i'irx.  "When 
this  is  not  the  case,  the  name  of  the  species  may  be  construed  iu  either 
gender  according  to  the  sex  of  the  individual  spoken  of,  as  'bh^  camel,  l{33 
cattle,  lisa  bird,  or  it  may  have  a  fixed  gender  of  its  own  irrespective  of 
the  sex  of  the  individual;  thus,  3^3  dog,  DXT  tcolf,  "lid  ox,  are  masculine, 
raa'iN  hare,  niii  dove,  bnn  sheep,  are  feminine. 

d.  The  names  of  nations,  rivers,  and  mountains  are  commonly  mascu- 
line, those  of  countries  and  cities  feminine.  Accordingly,  such  words  as 
diix  Edom,  nxi-a  Moab,  nn-ir;  Judah,  t:';n:s?3  Egypt,  fii^bs  Chaldees,  are 
construed  in  the  masculine  Avhen  the  people  is  meant,  and  in  the  feminine 
when  the  country  is  meant. 

§  200.  The  feminine  ending  is  frequently  employed 
in  tlie  formation  of  abstract  nouns,  and  is  sometimes  ex- 
tended to  the  formation  of  official  designations  (comp. 
Ms  Honour,  his  Excellency,  his  Reverence),  nnB  governor, 
nis  colleague,  riblhp  2}reacher,  and  of  collectives  (comp. 
humanity  for  mankind),  j^  a  fish,  ni'l  fish,  "ji^  a  cloud, 
ni:5>  clouds,  ITS'  a  tree,  ni^J'  timber,  IT^J^  a  traveller,  nfr^j^ 
caravan,  Ttyb^  Zeph.  3:10  fJie  halting,  n^^bs  the  escaped. 

a.  (1)  The  feminine  ending  a.deJ  to  Segholates  gives  new  prominence 
to  the  originally  abstract  character  of  this  formation,  >cn  and  nrw'l 
wickedness,  distinguished  by  Ewald  as  to  ahiKov  and  dliKi'a,  ri3"in  shame, 
n^ss»  slothfulness. 

(2)  So  to  monosyllables  whose  second  radical  receives  the  vowel,  np"i:J 
righteousness,  which  is  more  abstract  and  at  the  same  time  used  more  ex- 
clusively in  a  moral  sense  than  the  Segholate,  p")^  rightness,  fiBsx  dark- 
ness, equivalent  to  bsx,  rinJS  (=  TOb)  brightness,  nrVyli'^  (=  S'3^)  salvation. 
Or  nouns  of  this  description  might  be  supposed  to  have  sprung  from  the 
adjectives  belonging  to  the  second  form  of  Class  I.,  the  pretonic  vowel  fall- 
ing away  upon  the  addition  of  the  feminine  ending,  bbx  dark,  fibEN  the 
dark,  to  oKoretvov,  ni;rr")  the  being  saved  from  ?Vw'^,  n^"^^Q  justice  from 


§  201  GENDER  AND  NUMBEE  OF  NOUNS.  213 

^•'liQ  jtirlge.  The  following  nouns,  descriptive  of  the  station  or  functions  of 
a  paiticnlar  class,  follow  this  form,  T\?,^  king,  ^z^'d  kingly  office  or  stvat/, 
K''h:  prophet,  ^ix^n:  prophecy,  ']ry2)  priest,  tiiH?  priesthood  or  priestly  duty, 
Vb't  merchant,  n'Jsi  traffic. 

(3)  The  feminine  ending  occasionally  gives  an  abstract  signification  to 
reduplicated  forms,  "I'lS  blind,  ri"i.v?  blindness,  'nz^  having  a  bald  forehead^ 
nriiaa  baldness  in  front,  ab'n  sinner,  nKibn  and  n5<i|ri  sin,  f^riVs  terror, 
ncr|2  scoffiyig,  n'irtn  anguish,  or  to  those  which  have  a  prefixed  letter  O, 
tizstio  overthroio^  ■^^^'r'?  dominion,  frb'tra  confusion,  or  particularly  n, 
ni^vriTi  salvation,  nn^i^n  testimony,  nipn  hope,  nxsn  weariness. 

(4)  It  is  likewise  added  to  forms  in  "^  _ ,  tT^^'^bQ  judgment,  i^l^'^'bs  icork- 
ing,  ^^wNt?  beginning,  n'^nnx  end,  r"'^S'J  remnant,  the  termination  M  being 
often  found  in  place  of  n\,  ni-isn  2  Chron.  26:  21  K'ri,  nrcsn  K'thibh, 
disease  prop,  freedom  from  duty,  "^'rEn  /Vee;  pii??:!!  redness,  "'^'^Iprt?  ^ed; 
nn'T'"i"2  bitterness,  '^^'^'i'?  bitter;  riT23  heaviness,  r^i'sbx  widoivhood.  In  a 
very  few  instances  the  termination  M  is  superimposed  upon  "'^  viz.:  W^TaX, 
Wap^p?.  The  termination  fT^.  or  M  in  abstracts  dex'ived  from  ri'b  roots  is 
of  a  different  origin  from  that  just  explained  and  must  not  be  confounded 
with  it;  "^^  or  ^  is  there  the  final  radical  softened  to  a  vowel,  §  170,  as 
n^hia  or  whilJ  captivity  from  iiTJ  to  lead  captive. 

b.  In  Arabic,  nouns  of  unity,  or  those  which  designate  an  individual, 
are  often  formed  by  appending  the  feminine  termination  to  masculines 
which  have  a  generic  or  collective  signification.  This  has  been  thought  to 
be  the  c.ise  in  a  few  words  in  Hebrew,  "'iX  fleet,  S^^IX  ship,  "li^b  hair,  M^5.;i2J 
a  hair,  y>>  swarm,  n^'is'n  a  bee. 

c.  Some  names  of  inanimate  objects  are  formed  from  those  of  animated 
beings  or  parts  of  living  bodies,  Avhich  they  Avere  conceived  to  resemble, 
by  means  of  the  feminine  ending,  taken  in  a  neuter  sense,  CX  mother,  nax 
metropolis,  Tp"]  thigh,  tib")^  hinder  part,  extremity,  v3  palm  of  the  hand, 
iik^  palm-branch,  f^sh  forehead,  tin-^'s  greave,  ns  mouth,  n^s  edge. 

§  201.  There  are  three  numbers  in  Hebrew,  the 
singular  (Th^  "pirb),  dual  (p'T^  "p-irb),  and  plural  (D^ian  -pibb). 
The  plural  of  masculine  nouns  is  formed  by  adding  D"'., 
or  defectively  written  tD^,  to  the  singular,  C^C  ho7''se,  D^i^D 
horses,  p"hs  righteous  (man),  Q^p^"S  or  Up^^^^'l  righteous 
(men).  The  plural  of  feminine  nouns  is  formed  by  the 
addition  of  t^i,  also  written  m*,  the  feminine  ending  of 
the  singular,  if  it  has  one,  being  dropped  as  superfluous, 
since  the  plural  termination  of  itself  distinguishes  the 
gender,  013  cup,  mibb  ciijjs,  Pib^nn  virgin,  nib^DS  andHb^nn 
virgins,  rii^^H  sin,  niktoH  sins;  in  two  instances  the  vowel- 


214  ETYMOLOGY.  §  202 

letter  5^  takes  the  place  of  1,  §  11. 1.  a,  n^^^b  Ey^k.  31:8, 
n«22a  Ezek.  47:  11. 

a.  The  masculine  plural  sometimes  has  l"^,  instead  of  S'',,  e.  g.  y^'a 
oftener  than  C'S^  in  the  book  of  Job,  •,''=^•3  Prov.  31:  3,  I'^k'n  2  Kin.  11:  13, 
"^'^'J  Mic.  3:  12,  Tl'T''^,  Lam.  1:  4,  -(^^n  Ezek.  4:  9,  -pi;;  Dan.  12:  13.  This 
ending,  ■which  is  the  common  one  in  Aramaeic,  is  chiefly  found  in  poetry  or 
in  the  later  books  of  the  Bible. 

h.  Some  grammarians  have  contended  for  the  existence  of  a  few  plurals 
in  ''.  without  the  final  D,  but  the  instances  alleged  are  capable  of  another 
and  more  satisfactory  explanation.  Thus,  "^^S  2  Kin.  11:  4,  ''n^S,  ""K?? 
2  Sam.  8:  18,  ^i-ib^  2  Sam.  23:  8,  and  "'Sn  I'sam.  20:  38  K'thibh  (K'ri 
0*1317),  are  singulars  used  collectively;  "^ki'  2  Sam.  22:  44,  Ps.  144:  2,  Lam. 
3:  14,  and  "'i'lB'i  Cant.  8:  2,  are  in  the  singular  with  the  suffix  of  the  first 
person;  '^I'Q  Ps.  45:  9  is  not  for  S'^iO  stringed  instruments,  but  is  the  poetic 
form  of  the  preposition  "jti  from;  "^".IJ^s  Ps.  22:  17  is  not  for  d'^ns  piercing, 
but  is  the  noun  "''nx  with  the  preposition  3  like  the  lion,  §  158.  3. 

c.  There  are  also  a  few  words  which  have  been  regarded  as  plurals  in 
\.  But  "^nti  Zech.  14:  5  and  "^^'D  Judg.  5:  15,  are  plurals  with  the  suflSx 
of  the  first  person.  In  i'^fin  2  Chron.  33:  19,  which  is  probably  a  proper 
name,  and  "^^h  Am.  7:  1,  Nah.  3:  17,  which  is  a  singular  used  collectively, 
final  "1  is  a  radical  as  in  "^Vo  =  M7.^.  :'i"i'iri  Isa.  19:  9  is  a  singular  with 
the  formative  ending  1.,  §  196.  h;  "^ii^n  Jer.  22:  14  and  "^SVIJri  Isa.  20;  4, 
might  be  explained  in  the  same  way,  though  Ewald  prefers  to  regard  the 
former  as  an  abbreviated  dual  for  D'^i'i~n  double  (i.  e.  large  and  slinioy) 
windows,  and  the  latter  as  a  construct  plural  for  "^SVrn;  the  diphthongal  e 
being  resolved  into  ay,  comp.  §  57.  2  (5).  ^T^  Ezek.  13:  18  is  commonly 
regarded  as  an  absolute  dual  for  C'^^'^,  though  it  is  always  elsewhere  my 
hands  with  1  pers.  suf.,  and  may  be  so  explained  here.  The  divine  name 
*i^a  Almighty  is  best  explained  as  a  singular;  the  name  "^iSx  Lord  is  a 
plural  of  excellence,  §  203,  2,  with  the  suffix  of  the  first  person,  the  original 
signification  being  my  Lord. 

d.  In  a  few  words  the  sign  of  the  feminine  singular  is  retained  before 
the  plural  termination,  as  though  it  were  one  of  the  radicals,  instead  of 
being  dropped  agreeably  to  the  ordinary  rule,  r^T  door  pi.  rinb'i.  So,  rOS 
pillorv,  ri^rp  boiv,  r^p  trough,  JT^in  spear,  ni^hif.  widowhood,  nw'^'iS  divorce, 
riiiifn  whoredom,  nkb  lip  pi.  MrSip.  To  these  must  be  added  vr'hv,  pro- 
vided it  be  derived  from  nri'i^  in  the  sense  oi pit;  it  may,  however,  signify 
destruction,  from  the  root  nri'IJ,  when  the  final  n  will  be  a  radical. 

e.  The  Arabic  noun  has  three  case-endings,  nom.  «n,  gen.  in,  ace.  an, 
which  drop  their  nasal  in  the  construct  nom.  u,  gen.  i,  ace.  a.  Although 
these  have  become  obsolete  in  Hebrew,  there  are  traces  of  their  existence 
in  i  and  "^^  occasionalh'  added  to  the  construct,  §  222,  and  in  n^  or  Q^  ad- 
ded to  nouns  in  an  accusative  sense  to  indicate  direction,  §  223,  or  to  form 
adverbs,  §  236.  2  (1).  The  plural  endings  are  formed  by  lengthening  those 
of  the  singular,  nom.  Una,  gen.  ina.  The  former  is  identical  with  the 
plural  ending  in  verbs,  in  Heb.  'y\;  the  latter  corresponds  to  the  Hebrew 


§202 


GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS. 


215 


plural  in  ff^  .  In  Arabic  the  fern.  sing,  ending  is  at,  plur.  at  =  T>i,  a  aa  in 
the  Kal  part,  (kdtil  =  hiip),  the  Piel  of  y's  verbs  (a^io  =  Arab.  3  conj.  kd- 
tola)  and  the  n"s  fut.  {yakul  =  b=X"^)  answering  to  d  in  Heb. 

§  202.  The  gender  of  adjectives  and  participles  is 
carefully  discriminated,  both  in  the  singular  and  in  the 
plural,  by  means  of  the  appropriate  terminations.  But 
the  same  want  of  precision  or  uniformity  which  has  been 
remarked  in  the  singular,  §  199,  characterizes  hkewise 
the  use  of  the  plural  terminations  of  substantives.  Some 
mascuhne  substantives  take  r\i  in  the  plural,  some  femi- 
nines  take  D"*,,  and  some  of  each  gender  take  indifferently 

□\  or  ni. 

a.  The  following  masculine  nouns  form  their  plural  by  adding  rii:  those 
which  are  distinguished  by  an  asterisk  are  sometimes  construed  as  feminine. 


as  father. 
")JN;  botvl. 
aix  familiar 
spirit, 
^six  treasure. 
*riiK  sign. 
*r\'yk  path. 
■jii'iN  palace. 
bis^ax  cluster. 
^ia  pit. 
aa  roof. 
bnia  lot. 


*)';!'i  threshing- 
floor. 
)'y^'^  goad. 
aJT  tail. 
y^n  street. 
riTrt  breast. 
"ji^jn  vision. 
tsilin  dream. 
"jiiirri  invention. 
nsa  hand- 
breadth. 
t<e3  throne. 
nsi^  tablet. 


b";^  night. 
*ri2TTa  altar. 

"ih'o  rain. 
^hy-o  tithe. 
*Tk?a  summit. 
♦nipia  place. 

b^:q  staff. 

1X3  bottle. 
13  lamp. 

li5>  skin. 

ISS  dust 
*a'n3J  evening. 

yob  herb. 


S>iQ  leader. 
loss  tube. 
lins  bundle. 
bip  voice. 
"I'^P  wall. 
anp  war. 
*^^rn  street. 
pipii  chain. 
•jrV^  table. 
bia  name. 
ibviJ  trumpet. 

tyei  pillar. 
*Dinn  deep. 


b.  The  following  feminine  nouns  form  their  plural  by  adding  Qi.:  those 
marked  thus  (f)  are  sometimes  masculine: 


tiax  stone.  tTjii  wa^.  f^^s?  spelt. 

nbs  terebinth.         ni  ^aw.  nin^  6ncA:. 

nii^abx  widowhood.  Hni^l   branch.  ii|?3  wori. 


tn^iST  whoredom.    <i^^3  om^ 
nun  tvheat.  MxD  rweaswre. 


t")Ba  wne. 
•1^21  fig-cake. 
nniai  tee. 


iiDian  darkness. 
ti?  pitcher. 


ly  she-goat. 
^5^3  concubine. 


na  morse/. 
bni  sheep. 
nnsJ'o  barley. 
rtido  ear  o/"  cor» 
ir^TU  acacia. 


Also  tiiijia  c^^s  which  is  not  found  in  the  singular. 


216 


ETYMOLOGY. 


203 


c.   The  following  noune'  form  their  plural  by  adding  either  f^,  or  n': 
MASCULINE   NOTINS. 

t^'^N  porch.  33^  heart,            ]\'?^  delicacy. 

*'nx  lion.  i'ix'3  light.              'j^S'^  fountain. 

li'n  generation.  ^^J'a  tower.          Ssira  &ei. 

nar  sacrifice.  '\b'\'o  foundation,  "p^^  divelling. 


•jins't  memorial,     'loiia  6o«(?. 
di'^  day. 
-iS'i'  /bresf. 


"ins  river. 
Cip  &asm. 
l'"is  iniquity. 


iir'^X  terror. 

nk^x  s^ea/. 

iTax  people. 


yct-o  seat. 
^pp^  nail. 

FEMININE   NOUNS. 

iTiii'iTX  grape-cake,      bri  sJioe. 
nVrx  Astarte.        n^'T'?  Aeop. 
ri'^Jn  spear. 

NOUNS    CONSTEUED   IN   EITHER    GENDER. 


y^b  breach. 
"ix^is  neck. 
^?P  ffrave. 

y^'2'6  week. 
5!i3s;p]  delight. 


Siiia  year. 


^''^rj??  ^"i^i^^  aloes,   'p'in  window.  tib-o  rod.  a^'-j  bone. 

153  garment.        ikn  cottrf.  'csi  sot«/.  ns"  h'me. 

aa  rim.                iss  eircZe.  'T^p  thorn.  d?E  /bo^ 

bb'^n  temple.         "i^=i?  fortress.           ns  c^owd  sbs  ^osf. 

Sint  arm.             f^?n^  camp.  Tas_  cord.  5.'^^  sifZe. 

d.  The  two  forms  of  the  plural,  though  mostly  synonymous,  occasion- 
ally differ  in  sense  as  in  Latin  loci  and  loca.  Thus  d'^nss  is  used  of  round 
masses  of  money,  talents,  ninsp  of  bread,  round  loaves;  ff^^'ip  thorns,  nin"ip 
hooks;  ts'^hiTSJ  heels,  nih^^;  foot-prints;  n^'brs  footsteps  of  men,  riii:s"s  /eei 
of  articles  of  furniture.  Comp.  §  200.  c.  Sometimes  they  differ  in  usage 
or  frequency  of  employment:  thus  ri^;  days,  niid  years,  are  poetical  and 
rare,  the  customary  forms  being  D''i'',  Q'^id. 

e.  Nouns  mostly  preserve  their  proper  gender  in  the  plural  irrespective 
of  the  termination  which  they  adopt;  though  there  are  occasional  excep- 
tions, in  which  feminine  nouns  in  Qi.  are  construed  as  masculines,  e.  g. 
Chilis  toomen  Gen.  7:  13,  tii|73  ivords  Job  4:  4,  ti"i^"a3  ants  Prov.  30:  25,  and 
masculine  nouns  in  ni  are  construed  as  feminines,  e.  g.  ri'iisipia  divellings 
Ps.  84:  2. 

§  203.  1.  Some  substantives  are,  by  their  signification 
or  by  usage,  limited  to  the  singular,  such  as  material 
nouns  taken  m  a  universal  or  indefinite  sense,  "d^  fire, 
2h7  gold,  nbnijj  ground;  collectives,  "p  children,  Z^>' fozvl, 
t:*;?  bwds  of  prey,  "nj^n  large  cattle  (noun  of  unity  ni'oj  an 
ox\  l^^il  small  cattle  (noun  of  unity  tiw  a  slieep  or  goat)] 


§  204  GENDEE  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  217 

many  abstracts,  3?^^,  salvation,  ri*-l?  hlmchiess.  On  the  other 
hand  some  are  found  only  in  the  plural,  such  as  nouns, 
whose  singular,  if  it  ever  existed,  is  obsolete,  D*b  water, 
D^D5  face  or  faces,  C^^TD  heaven,  D"i?t3  hoivels,  D^n'J  men, 
ni'l2:^^'^'J  adjacent  to  the  head,  and  abstracts,  which  have  a 
plural  form,  D'^^n  life,  D'^iillSt  love,  D^i^nn  mercy,  fiiD^sriri 
government. 

a.  The  intimate  connection  between  a  collective  and  an  abstract  is 
shown  by  the  use  of  the  feminine  singular  to  express  both,  §  200.  lu  like 
manner  the  plural,  whose  ofiice  it  is  to  gather  separate  units  into  one  ex- 
pression, is  used  to  denote  in  its  totality  or  abstract  form  that  common 
quality  which  pervades  them  all  and  renders  such  a  summation  possible, 
comp.  ra  ViKaia.  right,  to.  ahiKa  wrong.  Some  abstracts  adopt  indifferently 
the  feminine  or  the  plural  form,  ni^i^X  and  Q-^i^l^X  fidelity,  n'ixs  and  Q-liilxa 
redemption,  n^n  and  Q"".r!  life,  Msi^jn  and  D"'bdr)  darkness,  nkia  and  taikS'S 
setting  of  gems. 

6.  The  form  d^^!i::p  is  adopted  by  certain  words  which  denote  perioils 
of  human  life,  d'^n^y?  childhood,  d'^ip^iby  youth,  C^ria  adolescence,  CP^na 
virginity,  n'i^i^ibs  period  of  espousals,  n^ipT  old  age. 

c.  Abstracts,  which  are  properly  singular,  are  sometimes  used  in  the 
plural  to  denote  a  high  degree  of  the  quality  which  they  represent,  or  re- 
peated exhibitions  and  embodiments  of  it,  iT'ltQa  might,  rini^J  deeds  of 
might,  mi^an  exalted  tvisdom,  ni^^pin  intense  folly. 

2.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  the  employment  ot 
the  plural  form  when  a  single  individual  is  spoken  of,  to 
suggest  the  idea  of  exaltation  or  greatness.  It  is  thus 
intimated  that  the  individual  embraces  a  plurahty,  or 
contains  within  itself  what  is  elsewhere  divided  amongst 
many.  Such  plurals  of  majesty  are  D^nbi;{  God,  the  supreme 
object  of  worship,  ^ili^  Supreme  Lord  prop,  my  Lord, 
§  201.  c,  and  some  other  terms  referring  to  the  divine 
being,  ^"^^^2.  Eccles.  12:  1,  D^MinS  Eccles.  5:  7,  ^id'S  Isa. 
54:  5,  D^ilji-p  Hos.  12:  1;  also,  D"il.^  (rarely  with  a  plural 
sense)  lord,  D'^Dyin  (when  followed  by  a  singular  suffix) 
master,  t^i'ins  Behemoth,  great  beast,  and  possibly  D^S'^n 
Teraphim,  which  seems  to  be  used  of  a  single  image, 
1  Sam.  19:  13,  16. 

§  204.  The  dual  is  formed  by  adding  Q^_  to  the  sing- 


218  ETYMOLOGY.  §  205 

ular  of  both  genders,  T\  as  the  sign  of  the  feminine  re- 
maining unchanged,  and  H^  reverting  to  its  original  form 
n  ,  8  198.  &,  T  hand  du.  D^l%  Tbl  door  du.  D^hb^,  HS"^  Up 

du.  D^nsis. 

a.  The  dual  ending  in  Hebrew,  as  in  the  Indo-European  languages, 
Bopp  Verglelch.  Gramm.  §  206,  is  a  modified  and  strengthened  form  of  the 
plural  ending.  The  Arabic  goes  beyond  the  Hebrew  in  extending  the  dual 
to  verbs  and  pronouns.  The  Aramaeic  scarcely  retains  a  trace  of  it  except 
in  the  numeral  two  and  its  compounds. 

§  205.  The  dual  in  Hebrew  expresses  not  merely  two, 
but  a  couple  or  a  pair.  Hence  it  is  not  employed  with 
the  same  latitude  as  in  Glreek  of  any  two  objects  of  the 
same  kind,  but  only  of  two  which  belong  together  and 
complete  each  other.    It  is  hence  restricted  to 

1.  Double  organs  of  men  or  animals,  W^i]^  ears,  D'^SlJ? 
nostrils,  W'jy^^  horns,  C'StS  wings. 

2.  Objects  of  art  which  are  made  double  or  which 
consist  of  two  corresponding  parts,  D'^b^S  pair  of  shoes, 
D'DTi^'t]  pair  of  scales,  D'^nj^b/J  pair  of  tongs,  U^vb^^  folding 
doors. 

3.  Objects  which  are  conceived  of  as  constituting  to- 
gether a  complete  whole,  particularly  measures  of  time 
)r  quantity,  D'!bi^  period  of  two  days,  hiduum,  n^p_'y^  two 

weeks,  fortnight,  D'nDiT  two  years,  hiennium,  D';n&5D  tivo 
measures,  d'l'bSS  two  talents,  U^byi  Prov.  28:  6,  18  double 
way  (comp.  in  English  double  dealing),  D'J^rip.  pair  of  rivers, 
i.  e.  the  Tigris  and  Euphrates  viewed  in  combination. 

4.  The  numerals  W^'ui  tivo,  D'^bsiD  double,  D'^nu^'9  two 
hundred,  D'^Bbi?  two  thousand,  D";inia"}  tivo  myriads,  D';n^*2iu 
sevenfold,  Q'jlkbi)  of  tivo  sorts. 

5.  A  few  abstracts,  in  which  it  expresses  intensity, 
D";?!'*!??  double-slothf Illness,  tl'VrpZ  double-rebellion,  D^lg-^ 
double-light,  i.  e.  noon,  W'T\T&]  double-wickedness. 

a.  Names  of  objects  occurring  in  pairs  take  the  dual  form  even  when  a 
higher  number  than  two  is  spoken  of,   d"^|Ti"il  ^ii   1  Sam.  2:  13  the  thre4 


{5  206,  207       GENDER  AND  NUMBEE  OP  NOUNS.  219 

teeth,  Q"^b3  5?"i>?  Ezek.  1:  6  four  wings,  Q'^S53  TiJtJ  Isa.  6:  2  six  wings, 
D^rs  iisnd  Zech.  3:  9  seven  eyes,  S'^s'na-'bs'i  Q"]i*tT-^  aii  t^e  hands  and 
all  knees  Ezek,  7:  17.  Several  names  of  double  organs  of  the  human  or 
animal  body  have  a  plural  form  likewise,  which  is  used  of  artificial  imita- 
tions or  of  inanimate  objects,  to  which  these  names  are  applied  by  a  figure 
of  speech,  §  200.  c,  D'^i'ip  horns,  riiinp  horns  of  the  altar,  Q'^SSS  wings, 
nibss  extremities,  D'^Ens  shoulders,  TnkT}'z  slioulder-pieces  of  a  garment, 
D'^i'^y  eyes,  TKt'^'S  fountains,  Q'l^J.'n  feet,  d"^35"i  times  prop,  beats  of  the  foot. 
In  a  few  instances  this  distinction  is  neglected,  D'lriSiU  and  ITihsiy  lips, 
D')'!^  and  nin;;  sides,  Dlb^l!'  extremities. 

b.  The  dual  ending  is  in  a  very  few  words  superadded  to  that  of  the 
plural,  niain  walls  of  a  city,  0';ni3n  double  walls,  ninsib  boards,  n'^Qhb 
double  boarding  of  a  ship,  d'^n"i'7.?'  name  of  a  town  in  Judah,  Josh.  15:  36. 

c.  The  words  D'^'b  tvater  and  Uih5  heaven  have  the  appearance  of  dual 
forms;  they  are,  however,  commonly  regarded  as  plurals,  and  compared 
with  such  plural  forms  in  Aramaeic  as  "i"^?'^  Dan.  5:  9  from  the  singular  X3'J. 
In  d';^r!l"i''  Jerusalem,  or  as  it  is  commonly  written  without  the  Yodh 
D^i^jl"!"^,  the  final  Mem  is  not  a  dual  ending  but  a  radical,  and  the  pronun- 
ciation is  simply  prolonged  from  Cro'lT;,  comp.  Gen.  14:  18,  Ps.  76:  3, 
though  in  this  assimilation  to  a  dual  form  some  have  suspected  an  allusion 
to  the  current  division  into  the  upper  and  the  lower  city. 

§  206.  It  remains  to  consider  the  changes  in  the  nouns 
themselves,  which  result  from  attaching  to  them  the 
various  endings  for  gender  and  number  that  have  now 
been  recited.  These  depend  upon  the  structure  of  the 
nouns,  that  is  to  say,  upon  the  character  of  their  letters 
and  syllables,  and  are  governed  by  the  laws  of  Hebrew 
orthography  already  unfolded.  These  endings  may  be 
divided  into  two  classes,  viz.: 

1.  The  feminine  T\,  which,  consisting  of  a  single  con- 
sonant, causes  no  removal  of  the  accent  and  produces 
changes  in  the  ultimate  only. 

2.  The  feminine  n^,  the  plural  D'',  and  ni,  and  the 
dual  Ul_,  which  remove  the  accent  to  their  own  initial 
vowel,  and  may  occasion  changes  in  both  the  ultimate 
and  the  penult. 

§  207.  Nouns  which  terminate  in  a  vowel  undergo  no 
change  on  receiving  the  feminine  characteristic  ri,  "ii^i'J 
Moabite,  ri^ns^ia  Modbitess,  }^yi2  finding,  fem.  n^^ib,  &<l3n 


220  ETYMOLOGY.  §  208 

sinner,  rii^t^l^  sin^  §  200.  Nouns  which  terminate  in  a  con- 
sonant experience  a  compression  of  their  final  syllable, 
which  upon  the  addition  of  t\,  ends  in  two  consonants  in- 
stead of  one,  §  66. 2,  and  an  auxihary  Seghol  is  introduced 
to  relieve  the  harshness  of  the  combination,  §  61.  2.  In 
consequence  of  this  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  is  changed 
from  a  or  a  to  e,  §  63.  2.  a,  from  e  or  «  to  e,  or  in  a  few 
words  to  e,  and  from  o  or  u  to  o,  §  61.  4.  '^%'dl  Iroken 
fem.  ^';;ii^?,  QTi^jiril  reddish  fem.  n•«TI°^?,  1\tTl  going  fem. 
tllDBn,  l^ilB  master,  rilis  mistress,  "ilitin  five  fem.  I^t /^",  iC'lSi 
man,  tniTS^  tvoman,  §  216.  1.  &,  "pSD  scattered  fem.  nilits, 
MilD^nD  and  rTirip  brass.  When  the  final  consonant  is  a 
guttural,  there  is  the  usual  substitution  of  Pattahh  for 
Seghol,  ?t:i2j'  hearing  fem.  T\^'hw,  Th'O  touching  fem.  n^S^. 

a.  In  many  cases  the  feminine  is  formed  indifferently  by  n  or  by  n^ ;  in 
others  usage  inclines  in  favor  of  one  or  of  the  other  ending,  though  no  ab 
solute  rule  can  be  given  upon  the  subject.  It  may  be  said,  however,  thai,  ad- 
jectives in  "i.  almost  always  receive  ri;  active  participles,  except  those  of:."", 
l"y  and  ri  ^  verbs,  oftener  take  7\  than  n  ;  ri  is  also  found,  though  less  frequently, 
with  the  passive  participles  except  that  of  Kal,  from  which  it  is  excluded. 

h.  A  final  "j,  1  or  n  is  sometimes  assimilated  to  the  feminine  characteristic 
n  and  contracted  with  it,  §  54,  T'Z  for  P33  daughter,  Th'O  for  r'.rrzgift,  nis 
for  rs^X  truth,  nnx  for  T'lnX  one,  in^l^Jti  l  Kin.  l:  15  for  'rrn'::-2  minuteri'ng, 
inn'r73  Mai.  l:  14  for  rrfTii^  corrupt^  J^^t]'?  for  Tr^T;^  PC'^.  The  changes  of 
the  ultimate  vowel  are  due  to  its  compression  before  concurring  consonants, 

c.  The  voAvel  ii  remains  in  n";!l'in  Lev.  5:  21  deposit,  and  the  proper 
name  npn:ri  Tanhumeth.  From  JiiJ  brother,  dn  fathtr-in-lmo  are  formed 
ninx  sister,  tnibn  mother-in-law,  the  radical  ^,  which  has  been  dropped 
from  the  masculine,  retaining  its  place  before  the  sign  of  the  feminine, 
comp.  §  101.  1.  a;  PN^S?  difficult  Deut.  30:  11  is  for  nx3s3  from  X^SJ. 

§  208.  The  changes  which  result  from  appending  the 
feminine  termination  H^,  the  plural  terminations  D"'.  and 
ni,  and  the  dual  termination  D'_,  are  of  three  sorts,  viz.: 

1.  Those  which  take  place  in  the  ultimate,  when  it  is 
a  mixed  syllable. 

2.  Those  which  take  place  in  the  ultimate,  when  it  is 
a  simple  syllable. 

3.  Those  which  take  place  in  the  penult. 


§  209 


GENDEE  AND  NUMBEE  OF  NOUNS.  221 


§  209.  Wlien  the  ultimate  is  a  mixed  syllable  bearing 
the  accent,  it  is  affected  as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  Tsere  remains  unchanged,  if  the  word  is  a  mono- 
syllable or  the  preceding  vowel  is  Kamets,  otherwise  it 
is  rejected;  other  vowels  suffer  no  change,  tM2  dead  fern. 
r-it^'2,  pi.  n^h'Q;  ^V  thigh  du.n^by,,  nb-u:  complete  fern.  ni::iD, 
pi.  Q'i:bTi?,  f.  pi.  tyitbyb;  i^r\  going  fem.  nibn,  pi.  D'ibH' 
f.  pi.  niibh. 

a.  The  rejection  of  Tsere  is  due  to  the  tendency  to  abbreviate  words 
which  are  increased  by  additions  at  the  end,  §  66.  1.  It  is  only  retained 
as  a  pretonic  vowel,  §  64.  2,  when  the  Avord  is  otherwise  sufficiently  abbre- 
viated, or  its  rejection  would  shorten  the  Avord  unduly.  Tsere  is  retained 
contrary  to  the  rule  by  d'^'rrJ,  C^ifS"!  children  of  the  third  and  fourth 
generations,  by  a  fe^v  exceptional  forms,  e.  g.  <^^.-'^  '^^^*  3"  ^-  1^'  '^^?'4?t 
Ex.  23:  26,  (T^Lii  Cant.  1:  6,  ri'bpv:;  Isa.  54:  1,  and  frequently  with  the 
pause  accents,  §  65,  e.  g.  n^lpr  Isa.  21:  3,  taibpiO  Lam.  1:  16,  :n'i^-aillj 
Isa.  49:  8,  t2'i-J33>i:  Ex.  28:  40,  tl'^';;.150  Gen.  19:  11,  2  Kin.  6:  18  (once  with 
Tiphhha),  iCJ'^E^:;:??  Isa.  2:  20,  Ci''0?":Q  Eccles,  2:  5,  ninpT-o  Isa.  2:4.  It  also 
appears  in  several  feminine  substantives,  both  singular  and  plural,  e.  g. 
nbsng  overthrow,  niki'i'a  counsels,  nhrin  abomination,  ini^fj?  staff,  l^b":;?"? 
witch.  On  the  other  hand,  the  following  feminines  reject  it  though  pre- 
ceded by  Kamets,  b?^  wild-goat.,  fem.  n^j5^ ,  'fJ'^  ostrich,  fem.  HI l?;;!,  T]'^^ 
thigh,  fem.  inii;;'.  It  is  also  dropped  from  the  plural  of  the  monosyllable 
"2  son,  and  its  place  supplied  by  a  pretonic  Kamets,  D"'33  sons,  nisa  daugh- 
ters, the  singular  of  the  feminine  being  na  for  rsin,  §  207.  b\  so  5^)0  fork 
pi.  niiMri. 

6.  Kamets  in  the  ultimate  is  retained  as  a  pretonic  vowel,  p^  tvhite, 
fem.  i^i^b,  pi.  n^inl:,  f.  pi.  niin^;  "liia^  fortress,  pi.  d'^^^JH^  and  nin^a^, 
only  disappearing  in  a  few  exceptional  cases,  "i"'i)  hair,  fem.  ir^^'IJ,  ''3">!J 
quail,  pi.  Q'^iV'^.  £^'^2^'^  and  ninaSJ^  fords,  "133  talent  du.  D"]^33  but  in 
pause  B"^^S3,  ln3  river  du.  n';''i!i3,  ^nso  pasture,  pi.  C'^'ira  once  niirnj^ 
(with  Hholem).  So  in  the  t<"b  participles  X33  prophesying  pi.  Q"'K33,  nh'iJi 
polluted  pi.  D^X'CIJJ,  i<k?32  found  pi.  d"'i<2ri5;  but  with  the  pause  accents 
Kamets  returns,  Q'^xa:  Ezek.  13:  2,  :n"'i<".J^?  Ezr,  8:  25.  The  foreign  word 
"isns  suburbs  forms  its  plural  irregularly  D'^i'i'ia. 

c.  Hholem  and  Hhirik  commonly  suffer  no  change;  but  in  a  few  words 
Shurek  takes  the  place  of  the  former,  and  in  one  Tsere  is  substituted  for 
the  latter,  §  66.  2  (c),  "iii"3  terror  pi.  Di'i!iJ"2,  "p^^  habitation  pi.  n-'iwia, 
pin's  sweet  fem.  nf:Wri  pi.  n"'{?iri-a,  pi':!  distress  fem.  n;^^^,  "i'i'a  lodging 
fem.  niib^,  bii^  flight  fem.  f^c^iD-s,  rjii-a  rest  fem.  nffl:'3,  -i-,ii-3  fortification 
fem.  nn!i:jp,  p'o'J  deep  fem.  M^To;;  Prov.  23:  27  and  nis'sr,  pinn  chain  pi. 
nipiinn  1  Kin.  6:  21  K'ri;  li'^'^Q  escaped  pi.  Q-'a-'sS  or  ni-jbs  fem.  n-j-?Q  or 
nb;s. 


222  ETYMOLOGY.  §  209 

d.  Hholem  is  dropped  from  the  plural  of  112^  bird  pi.  D'^^BIJ ,  as  well 
as  from  the  plural  of  uouns  having  the  feminine  characteristic  Ji  in  the 
singular;  thus  rby'ba  sknll,  by  the  substitution  of  the  plural  ending  ni  for 
n.,  §  201,  becomes  PiBir^S,  ^P^^i^  course,  pi.  nip^no,  or  with  Hhateph- 
Kamets  under  a  doubled  letter,  §  16.  3.  b,  r:ns  coat  pi.  r\:'n3,  nba'^j  ear  of 
corn,  pi.  D'^lpailJ;  in  two  instances  a  pretonic  Kamets  is  inserted,  P»"}S3 
drought  pi,  nins?,  vfyrw^  Astarte  pi.  ninn-^?. 

e.  Seghol  in  nouns  with  the  feminine  characteristic  fl  affixed  mostly 
follows  the  law  of  the  vowel  from  Avhich  it  has  sprung,  §  207 ;  if  it  has 
been  derived  from  Tsere  it  is  rejected,  if  from  any  other  vowel  it  is  still  in 
some  instances  rejected,  though  more  commonly  it  reverts  to  its  original 
form  and  is  retained,  rpi'i'^  sucker  (from  pii"')  pi.  nipDI"',  n"iis<  epistle  (from 
lix)  pi.  niniiS;,  rhzii^  knife  (from  ^i:N*3)  pi.  nfcx^,  n^a^onx  reddish  (from 
t2-!'9':'>?)  pl-  J^'i'3?"9f^.  ^i^r?  nurse  (from  p'^i"'?)  pi.  nipip^,  Pirpt'p  scale  pi. 
tD%pbp  and  rriirpil'p,  Pattahh,  which  has  arisen  from  a  Seghol  so  situated 
under  the  influence  of  a  guttural,  follows  the  same  rule,  r^'hi:  ring  pi. 
niija-j,  mi:  (from  yib)  touching  pi.  ni'sb. 

f.  A  few  nouns  with  quiescents  in  the  ultimate  present  apparent  ex- 
ceptions which  are,  however,  readily  explained  by  the  contractions  which 
they  have  undergone.  Thus  ri",iri  for  ni",  §  57.  2  (5),  thorn,  has  its  plural 
D-^nin  or  ciT.in;  or  (di^)  day,  pi.  tT'iyi  (Q-'ii';);  Tin's  ('i":^)  strife,  pi.  ts'^iljip; 
^■iilj  Cjl^si)  ox,  pi.  tiinip;  "Tn  for  l'\r\  or  ni4,  §  188.  2.  c,  pot,  pi,  d'^nsn  or 
ti"'"!';'^.  §  210.  3;  p^i'i:  (p'^a  or  "p^^)  street,  pi.  ts-iprr;  T'S!  {'r^b  or  i::i')  e%, 
pi.  once  Q'^n';^  Judg.  10:  4  usually  contracted  to  C'nS;  li'N"i  C:JS''n)  /jeai, 
pi,  d'^i'Nl  (nitx^i).  So  nxo  measure  becomes  in  the  dual  DiflXt)  for  d^hxD 
and  nxp  owe  hundred,  du.  tD-jPiX^  for  C^'nxr);  n^xbo  (tiss^p,  §  57.  2  (3)), 
work,  probably  had  in  the  absolute  plural  rriixb^,  whence  the  construct  is 

2.  The  final  consonant  sometimes  receives  Daghesh- 
forte  before  the  added  termination,  causing  the  preced- 
ing vowel  to  be  shortened  from  a  to  «,  from  e  or  ^  to  «, 
and  from  o  or  u  to  u^  §  61.  5.  This  takes  place  regularly 
in  nouns  which  are  derived  from  contracted  3^"?  roots, 
UV)  perfect  fern.  M^ri,  D^  sea  pi.  U^hy,  "jia  (from  "jis)  shield, 
pi.  0^33"'^  and  riiSj^;  ph  statute  pi.  Cl''{?n,  fern,  njsn,  pl.lnipn, 
or  in  whose  final  letter  two  consonants  have  coalesced, 
r|55  for  p|pN  du.  U\ti<  nose;  T?  for  tD?  she-goat  pi.  Q'-b;  n:? 
for  mi?  /me  pi.  D^n:?  and  T\ir\^:  iL'^  for  ITDX  7nan,  niS« 
woman,  and  it  not  infrequently  occurs  in  other  cases. 

a.  Nouns  with  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  Avith  few  exceptions  double 
their  final  letter  being  either  contracted  forms,  bn  tveak  pi.  cH  fern,  nS'n 
pi,  nisn,  or  receiving  Daghesh-forte  conservative  in  order  to  preserve  the 


§209 


GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  223 


short  vowel,  DSN  ]pool  pi.  ta'^'a?^^;  so  'iSix  wheel,  Cnin  myrtle,  B^^  few,  T^hrt\ 
frightful,  pbp!}?  greenish,  "'ix^D  desire.  Before  n  Pattahh  may  be  retained 
in  an  intermediate  syllable,  vh  fresh  pi.  B'^n^;  before  other  gutturals  it  is 
lengthened  to  Kamets,  §  60.  4,  "liu  prince  pi.  D^^^i^  fern,  fiy^;  so  nvjasx 
fingers,  f^-^l^?  four,  O'^^'^'is  helmets,  D"'^.:S"2  straits  and  D^^'i^n  baskets,  nii'b'b 
loops,  which  do  not  occur  in  the  singular,  but  are  commonly  referred  to 
inW,  i^^ib,  §  196.  b,  ">  being  changed  to  X  as  in  §  210.  3.  d]  also  1^  breast, 
which  omits  Daghesh  du.  Bfl"^'  Pattahh  is  in  the  following  examples 
changed  to  Hhirik  before  the  doubled  letter,  §  58.  2,  1^  prey  fern,  nta,  pri 
fear  fem.  t^f^n,  m  wine-press  pi.  nina,  'to  garment  pi.  D^^p  and  tD'^^.'Q,  Op 
tribute,  CjO  fcasiw,  na  morsel,  1^  sit^e,  bibsi  ti;Aee/,  nirobo  baskets,  Q'^ipSD 
palm-hranches,  a^iTD  threshing-sledge  pi.  n'^^niD  or  by  the  resolution  of 
Daghesh-forte,  §  59.  a,  d^i'^'i'i'a.  It  is  rejected  from  ^'4\'4  cymbal  pi.  D'''i:£'bs, 
)}  sort  pi.  D"'i't,  D'^'^J'^S'  berries,  probably  from  IJ'ia  and  D'^na  wiew,  from  the 
obsolete  singular,  V2.  The  plural  of  C?  people  is  n'^2?  and  in  a  very  few 
instances  with  the  doubled  letter  repeated,  D"^':"2jJ;  so  ^li  mountain  pi.  D'^nn 
and  d"'^'^'>n  Deut.  8:  9,  b"J  shadow  pi.  C^V^'.^,  pn  statute  pi.  d'^p",  and  twice 
in  the  construct,  ""^Ppn  Judg.  5:  15,  Isa.  10:  1,  which  implies  the  absolute 
form  n'^jbpn. 

6.  The  final  letter  is  doubled  after  Kamets  in  the  following  words  be- 
sides those  from  ^b  roots,  fili'X  porch  pi.  ciibx;  so  "|irx  hire,  br."  camel, 
'h'  time,  T\^T^^2  darkness,  p)n"io  distance,  "jbp  small,  "ir"!  green,  "is'r  quiet, 
'l'i;":2J  lily,  'b'j  coney,  to  which  should  perhaps  be  added  i^p?  Deut.  8:  15 
scorpion,  though  as  it  has  a  pause  accent  in  this  place  which  is  the  only 
one  where  it  is  found  with  Kamets,  its  proper  form  may  perhaps  have  been 
^■^P?!  §  65.  The  Niphal  participle  'ISZD  honored  has  in  the  plural  both 
D'^n233  and  ^"^^2:3 .  Several  other  words,  which  only  occur  in  the  plural, 
are  in  the  lexicons  referred  to  singulars  with  Kamets  in  the  ultimate;  but 
the  vowel  may,  with  equal  if  not  greater  probability,  be  supposed  to  have 
been  Pattahh.  Kamets  is  shortened  to  Pattahh  before  n,  which  does  not 
admit  Daghesh-forte,  in  the  plurals  of  JiX  brother  pi.  D'>nx,  nn  hook,  riisp 
confidence,  §  60.  4.  a, 

c.  The  following  nouns  with  Hholem  in  the  ultimate  fall  under  this 
rule,  in  addition  to  those  derived  from  VV  roots,  "~^  ^Jeat  pi.  D'^il^a,  dti'in 
sacred  scribe,  i:i"ir!  band,  Oiib  nation,  dTS  naked,  and  several  adjectives 
of  the  form  btip,  which  are  mostly  written  without  the  vowel-letter  1, 
§  14.  3,  e.  g.  d^x  red  fem.  nis-N,  d-i^nx,  d'-'x  terrible,  T{^^^  long,  etc.;  nsm 
dunghill  takes  the  form  niripax  in  the  plural. 

d.  There  are  only  two  examples  of  doubling  when  the  vowel  of  the 
ultimate  is  Shurek,  d^"3"7n  Prov.  24:  31  nettles  or  brambles  from  b^~n,  ni'X"! 
Esth.  2:  9  from  i^lkn  Kal  pass.  part,  of  nxn. 

e.  \I5''X  (ii":n)  man  is  not  contracted  in  the  plural  d"iib5X  men;  in  the 
feminine,  for  the  sake  of  distinction,  the  initial  weak  letter  is  dropped, 
d"'"r3  women,  which  is  used  as  the  plural  of  ntx  ivoman;  n'^b''S  men  and 
ri-N  women  are  rare  and  poetic.  r>Vi  ploughshare  has  either  d'^nx  or  d'^Piij; 
in  the  plural. 


224  ETYMOLOGY.  §  210 

§  210.  1.  Segholate  nouns,  or  those  whicli  have  an 
unaccented  vowel  in  the  ultimate,  drop  it  when  any 
addition  is  made  to  them,  §  66.  2.  (a).  As  this  vowel 
arose  from  the  concurrence  of  vowelless  consonants  at 
the  end  of  the  word,  the  necessity  for  its  presence  ceases 
when  that  condition  no  longer  exists.  Segholates  thus 
revert  to  their  original  form  of  a  monosyllable  ending  in 
concurrent  consonants,  §  185. 

2.  Monosyllables  of  this  description  receive  the  femi- 
nine ending  with  no  further  change  than  the  shortening 
due  to  the  removal  of  the  accent,  in  consequence  of  which 
0  becomes  o  or  more  rarely  u,  e  becomes  t  or  more 
rarely  e;  e  may  be  restored  to  a  from  which  it  has  com- 
monly arisen,  §  185,  or  like  e  it  may  become  i  or  e, 
n±^  (pp)  strength  fern.  ntTJ,  iZJsn  (iTSh)  fem.  rribsn  free- 
dom, ^'2k  (I^kS)  saying  fem.  Trp2i^  and  n^'Ci^,  r\bt  (^b^) 
king,  nSb^J  queen,  fcb  slaughter  fem.  nhlt:. 

a.  Nouns  having  either  of  the  forms  ti^t?!?,  H^:?|5,  i^^ap,  !^^l:|5,  nVjp, 
are  consequently  to  be  regarded  as  sprung  from  monosyllables  with  the 
vowel  given  to  the  first  radical. 

3.  Before  the  plural  terminations  a  pretonic  Kamets 
is  inserted,  and  the  original  vowel  of  the  monosyllable 
falls  away,  t^b/b  ('i]^'-?)  king  pi.  D'^bb/J,  HSb/J  queen  pi.  HibblG, 

^m  (Tj5<)  saying  pi.  D^n/^s,  rr\i2)^  id.  pi.  nii^y;,  b?2  (bys) 
work,  pi.  D^b^s,  i<pn  sin  pi.  D"'i<t2r;. 

a.  Pretonic  Kamets  is  not  admitted  by  the  numerals  d'^'ic^y  twenty 
from  *iCi}j  ten,  tD'^ijn'J  seventy  from  i'nii:  seven,  Q'^ifcn  ninety  from  yip  nine. 
The  words  tn-:^'^  pistachio-nuts,  D'^Jan  ehony,  ti'^lixs  Job  40:  21.  22,  D'iin]n 
mercies,  D'^ispd  and  mopilj  sycamores,  which  do  not  occur  in  the  singular, 
have  been  regarded  as  examples  of  a  like  oinission;  though  the  first  is 
derived  by  Piirst  from  <13D3,  and  the  second  by  Gesenius  from  "'inri.  The 
plural  of  1^^311  rvisdom  is  not  ni^sn  but  m^an.  Quadriliteral  Segholates 
also  receive  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  plural  '|?:3  pi.  B'^;:>33  merchants,  un- 
less the  new  letter  creates  an  additional  syllable,  in  which  case  the  intro- 
duction of  Kamets  would  prolong  the  word  too  much,  UJJss  concubine  pi. 
tJ'^i'j^Q,  'I'lQS  nail  nii"iQ:i. 

h.  The  superior  tenacity  of  Hholem,  §  60.  1.  a  (4),  is  shown  by  the 


§  211  GENDER  AND  NUMBEE  OP  NOUNS.  225 

occasional  retention  of  o,  not  only  as  a  compound  Sh'va  under  gutturals 

rr^N  v-ny  pi.  ninis,  so  d'ln  month,  ^*in  thicket,  "laii?  sheaf,  ^tis  fawn;  but 
as  Hliatepli-Kamets  or  Kamets-Hhatuph  in  'J'lK  threshing-floor  pi.  with  art. 
nii-rin,  t-ip  holiness  pi.  nii"-ji^  and  with  art.  t,'^'4lJ5r\ ,  uJ^ii:  root  pi.  D'^ii'^llj, 
§  19.  2.  a,  or  as  a  long  vowel  in  hrxk  tent  pi.  C)i3nx,  ni"iX  stall  pi.  niSx, 
§  60.  3.  r,  or  shifted  to  the  following  letter  so  as  to  take  the  place  of  the 
pretonic  Kamets  in  '|i-f2  thumb  pi.  nii'na,  rab  brightness  pi.  niriM,  §  186.  a. 
Comp.  bOQ  (bcs)  graven  image  pi.  D^^"'DS.  In  the  other  nouns  it  is  rejected, 
"11^3  morning  pi.  D'^'ii^2;  so  'Q'i  threshing-floor,  IS's  cypress,  yap  handful, 
rran  spear,  Qnn  juniper,  bi'iij  holloiv  of  the  hand. 

c.  Middle  Vav  quiesces  in  the  plural  of  the  following  nouns:  T.^h  death 
pi.  tl^nio ,  n^"!?  iniquity  pi.  T^VJ.  Gesenius  regards  D'^J'ix  Prov.  11:  7, 
Hos.  9:  4,  as  the  plural  of  "(IX,  while  others  derive  it  from  "pX,  translating 
it  riches  in  the  former  passage  and  sorrow  in  the  latter,  the  primary  idea 
out  of  which  both  senses  spring  being  that  of  toil.  Middle  Yodh  quiesces 
in  the  plural  of  b-^x  ram  pi.  ts'i'iix,  it^t  olive  pi.  tDinij,  b"^^  night  pi.  niB"'!?, 
but  not  in  b'n  strength  pi.  D"'^^n,  y.k  fountain  pi.  tTii';?,  T?  ass-colt  pi. 
di^i?,  li:";n  ^oa^  pi.  niir^n.  The  plural  of  N'^J  valley  is  rii'^xa  by  trans- 
position from  the  regular  form  mx'^5  which  is  twice  found  in  the  K'thibh 
2  Kin.  2:  16,  Ezek.  6:3;  n";i3  house  has  as  its  plural  n"iri3  bdtfim  §  19.  2.  a, 
whether  this  be  explained  as  for  Cnia  from  1133  to  build  or  for  D'^nns  from 

-^  •  ;   T  T  T  •    ;    T 

W3  to  lodge.  Middle  Yodh  always  quiesces  before  the  feminine  and  dual 
endings,  "t";^  provision  fem.  Ji^"^^,  "t"^?  eye  da.  B'^3"'?. 

d.  Monosyllables  in  ^_  from  nb  roots  belong  properly  to  this  forma- 
tion, §  57.  2  (4)  and  §  186.  b,  and  follow  the  rules  given  above  both  in  the 
femmine  "^bn  ("^bn)  necklace  fem.  fTJbn,  and  the  plural  "^nx  C;"!^)  lion  pi. 
ni^'JX  and  ni'inx,  lia  /ticZ  pi.  D'^^.'i?,  or  with  the  change  of  "^  to  X,  §  56.  4, 
which  also  occurs  in  verbs,  §  179.  3,  "^bn  necklace  pi.  Q"^5<l5n,  '^ns  simple  pi. 
ni'ina,  dVq  and  n^.srs,  '^r.i  gazelle  pi.  n'''';3:i,  D"'j<a:!J  and  niN3:i;  in  like 
manner  D'XS^!  branches,  DN3b  lio7ts  are  referred  to  "'E^  and  '^hb  though 
these  singulars  do  not  occur;  "^bs  (^bs)  utensil  does  not  receive  Kamets  in 
the  plural  D"b3.  No  absolute  plurals  occur  of  Segholates  with  final  Vav, 
only  the  construct  forms  "^IjII,  "'l^p. 

4.  The  dual  sometimes  takes  a  pretonic  Kamets  like 
the  plural,  but  more  frequently  follows  the  feminine  in 
not  requiring  its  insertion,  T\)h_  {T}^"^)  door  du.  D';^>'n,  T^^l'H 
{"^p^)  tvay  du.  0:5"^^,  ^^y,  {pp)  horn  du.  t]";t'^p  and  Dti'i):, 
^rb  cheek  du.  D':^nb,  7]n^  (T|-i3)  ^^zee  du.  D":5":3,  so  D^in^:, 
D":?:;:,  Q-n";:^,  c-;^:!::. 

§  211.  When  the  ultimate  is  a  simple  syllable,  the 
following  cases  occur,  viz: 

1.  Final  n  is  rejected  before  the  feminine  and  plural 

15 


226  ETYMOLOGY.  §  211 

endings,  HS^  beautiful  fern,  ns^  f.  pi.  r^i^^,  nib3Jp.  work  pi. 

bibr;^;  so  nin?^,  camp  du.  D^.D^'-i?- 

a.  The  last  radical  in  words  of  this  description  is  properly  '^,  which  is 
rejected  after  a  vowelless  letter,  §  62.  2.  c,  so  that  rtB^  is  for  n^Si;  and 
Biii;s'72  for  n'^yj:2;'2.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  radical  "^  remains,  e.  g. 
iT''D2?  Cant.  1:  7  from  ni:i5  C^'jiy)  ti'^TO^  Isa.  25:  6  from  T\hyo  C^np^)  and  is 
even  strengthened  by  Daghesh-forte,  §  209.  2,  n^S'ia  Lam.  1:  16  from  naia, 
n;--Q  and  rVs,  §  196.  6,  fern,  of  nVs,  ri'-iti  Hos.  14:  1,  elsewhere  ninn, 
ns  moMf/i.  prf^re  pi,  d'lQ,  nrs  and  ni'S,  or  changed  to  K,  §  56.  4,  rf?::  C^^ZJ) 
young  lamb  D'lsbi:  (D'^'^b::),  so  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  assume  a  singular 
•'^i:  which  no  where  occurs;  tisbn  Ps.  10:  8  has  as  its  plural  D"^N3^n  ver.  10. 

2.  Final ''.  may  combine  with  the  feminine  and  plural 
endings,  so  as  to  form  H^ , ,  D''^ . ,  ni^ . ,  or  it  may  in  the 
masculine  plural  be  contracted  to  D'^. ,  §  62.  2,  ""^^"S  Hebreiv 
pi.  n^nny  and  D'^iniy  fem.  njnns?  f.  pi.  ni^ "]!>■;  ^k  ship  pi. 
D^::  and  D^i:,  'irsn  /ree  pi.  D^iz^EH,  ^p:  i?wre  pi.  d^^.pD.  So 
nouns  in  n"".  upon  the  exchange  of  the  feminine  singular 
foi'  the  plural  termination  ri'iil2?  Ammonitess  pi.  ni^5i525, 

n^nn  Hittitess  n'^rin. 

a.  In  D'^X'^S'iSi  2  Chron.  17 :  11  Arabians  from  '^il'iS'  an  K  is  interposed, 
elsewhere  D'^h'^S';  ri'i'b'n  branches,  ni'il'T  corners  and  rri'iTiSia  boiols,  which  do 
not  occur  in  the  singular,  are  assumed  to  be  from  rr*^^,  rr^lj  and  n"|Jii3T3. 

b.  A  few  monosyllables  in  ''^  form  their  feminines  in  this  manner, 
thoujrh  in  the  masculine  plural  they  follow  the  rule  before  given,  §  210.  3.  d, 
"^na  hid  fem.  n^a,  ^hb  lion,  X^a^  lioness,  §  198.  rf,  .^h^J  gazelle  fem.  n^2:i 
(iT^a^i  and  N'^2:£  are  used  as  proper  names),  ""rTU  drinking  fem.  iTHd. 

3.  There  are  few  examples  of  final  ^  or  i  with  added 
endings.  The  following  are  the  forms  wliich  they  assume : 
^p'^  drink  pi.  D^ip^S  n^ibJ?  kingdom  pi.  ni^^b';,  §  62.  2, 
fi^'i:?  testimony  pi.  nilS?,  riini^  sfs^er  pi.  Jninsj  and  rii^rij^  for 
niins,  in"]  and  Siin  myriad  pi.  nin"i,  r.is^iil']  and  niwSh"];  the 
dual  □"nn"]  inserts  the  sign  of  the  feminine,  or  as  others 
think  of  the  plural  §  205.  &. 

a.  rii'Sri  or  ri^rn  Jer.  37:  16  cells  is  referred  to  the  assumed  singular 
win;  niub  Isa.  3:  16  K'thibh  and  niicr  1  Sam.  25:  18  K'thibh  are  formed 
from  !i::3 .  ^t32V  abbreviated  Kal  passive  participles,  §  174.  5,  but  in  the  ab- 
sence of  tlie  appropriate  vowel  points  their  precise  pronunciation  cannot 
be  determiued. 

b.  Nouns  ending  in  a  quiescent  radical  K  may  be  regarded  as  terminating 


§  212  GENDEE  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  227 

in  a  consonant,  since  this  letter  resumes  its  consonantal  power  upon  a-. 
addition  being  made  to  the  word.  Comp.  §  164.  i<kp3  found  fem.  nNS'23, 
vr^k  wild  ass  pi.  Q'^k'ns. 

§  212,  The  changes,  which  occur  in  the  penult,  arise 
from  the  disposition  to  shorten  the  former  part  of  a  word, 
when  its  accent  has  been  carried  forward  by  accessions 
at  the  end,  §  66.  2.  They  consist  in  the  rejection  of 
Kamets  or  Tsere,  bilS  great  fem.  n5i~3  pi.  D'^biiS  f.  pi. 
nibiiy,  nn"n  ivord  pi.  ni^^n'n,  "pnST  memorial  pi.  t^i3''iST,  ris 
wing  du.  D's:^,  l^il'^  restoring  pi.  □^n'"ii53  fem.  ni''Ta!a,  ^^^'2 
distress  pi.  C'^.^'P,  ""ib  Levite  pi.  C'^^lb,  except  from  nouns 
in  n..  in  w^hich  the  place  of  the  accent  is  not  changed  by 
the  addition  of  the  terminations  for  gender  and  number, 
§  211. 1,  ns^  beautiful  fem.  ^s'pl.  t^iz";^,  Tn;^  field  pi.  M'lir, 
niri^  hard  pi.  D^"i?ip,  ni?7j  pi.  n'V)2  and  nii'a  hoivels,  nis 
smitten  pi.  Cpj.  Other  penultimate  vowels  are  mostly 
exempt  from  change. 

a.  Kamets,  which  has  arisen  from  Pattahh  in  consequence  of  the  suc- 
ceeding letter  not  being  able  to  receive  Daghesh-forte,  as  the  form  pro- 
perly requires,  is  incapable  of  rejection.  Such  a  Kamets  is  accordingly 
retained  without  change  before  "i,  e.  g.  Tlinn  for  l^nn,  §  189.  1,  workman 
pi.  D"''I:;'iri,  so  ^'''S  horseman,  H'^^a  fugitive,  O'^So  (const.  B'^'^^.p)  eunuch, 
yin:^  terrible^  V"^^.?  violent,  yi'^^ri  diligent,  or  shortened  to  Pattahh  before 
ri,  §  60.  1.  o  (4),  "i^ina  young  man  pi.  D'^^'ina.  Kamets  is  also  retained  in 
certain  'S'S,  ^'S  and  ri'b  derivatives  as  a  sort  of  compensation  for  the  reduction 
of  the  root  by  contraction  or  quiescence,  e.  g.  "2?3  shield  pi.  B''i3p  and  O'is^'a, 
\\b-Q  fortress  pi,  t3i-b^,  n^^'n  branch  pi.  J^'i''^^,  in^ij  corner  pi.  ni'lT,  nian 
(from  D>l"i)  height,  du.  C^r^al,  Other  instances  of  its  retention  are  rare  and 
exceptional,  Tiis  treacherous  fem,  iriisa,  S'^i^'i^  (const.  V'SC)  week  pi.  Cs'^JOiiJ 
and  T\\b-y^  but  du.  tin^'j,  d"i!ii;3  tvarrior  pi.  n'^^iJiVi;. 

6,  When  Kamets  following  a  doubled  letter  is  rejected,  and  Daghesh- 
forte  is  omitted  in  consequence,  §  25,  the  antepenultimate  vowel  is  in  a  few 
instances  changed  from  Hhirik  to  Seghol,  §  61.  5,  "rTn  vision  pi.  niiiiTn, 
y\^'-lS'J  a  tenth  plT  Q^ihr^ ,  but  "p'nST  memorial  pi.  r\'iii'-i=T . 

c.  Tsere  is  not  rejected  if  it  has  arisen  from  Hhirik  before  a  guttural 
in  a  form  which  properly  requires  Daghesh-forte,  's5'}r\  for  V'^'n,  §  189.  1.  b, 
deaf  pi.  D"^ir"in,  or  if  it  is  commonly  represented  by  "i,  §  14.  3,  "^""S  or  t^l^'^S, 
§  188,  hammer  pi.  nisb'^S,  or  a  radical  "^  quiesces  in  it,  'r'S:  or  "rx  (fioni 
ini,  §  191)  perennial  pi.  Qiin^N  or  Q'^inN,  hb^r^  temple  pi.  t3"^^3"^!i  and  H'i^s'^ri, 
Di-jiL'i-c  and  C^T^^'?.  rectitude,  n"'i'i"i'iT  (from  i^t  or  TiT)  proud.  Other  cases 
are  rare  and  exceptional,  e.  g.  D'^BlsTSX  Neb    3 :  34  feeble. 

15* 


228  ETYMOLOGY,  §  213 

d.  Hbolem  is  almost  invariably  retained  in  the  penult,  yet  it  yields  to 
the  strong  tendency  to  abbreviation  in  the  following  trisyllabks:  r^iindx 
Ashdodifess  pi.  riinnirx  Neh.  13:  23  K'ri  (K'thibh  nmiTrN),  r^'p^v  Am- 
monitess  pi.  n-':a"  id.  (K'thibh  WiltiS',  1  Kin.  11:  1  rriiar),  -p^^  Sido- 
nian  f.  pi.  r»:~:i  where  long  Hhirik  becomes  Tsere  before  concurrent  con- 
sonants, §  61.  4. 

e.  When  the  penult  is  a  mixed  syllable  containing  a  short  vowel,  it  is 
ordinarily  not  subject  to  change,  §  58.  2.  The  tendency  to  the  greatest 
possible  abbreviation  is  betrayed,  however,  in  a  few  examples  by  the  re- 
duction of  the  diphthongal  Seghol  to  Pattahh,  comp.  §  60.  3.  b.  bibm 
cluster  pi.  nferx  Cant.  7:  8,  33-1-3  chariot  fern,  nhs-p  pi.  niaanp,  pfil^ 
distance  pi.  Q'^isn-io  and  Gifsr!-!^,  or  of  Pattahh  to  the  briefest  of  the  shoi't 
vowels  Hhirik,  comp.  §  209.  2  a,  'nk'^}  fury  pi.  n'sS'b'i ,  j'iTp  fork  pi.  milbTia, 
§  192.  a,  nn?^  dish  pi.  nin?^  by  the  resolution  of  Daghesh-forte  for  nini;a, 
§  59.  a;  "iriN  for  "iriN  other  has  in  the  plural  D'^^nx,  ninnx  as  if  from  "ins, 
f^^™  coal  has  pi.  D"^lim  by  §  63.  1. 

§  213.  As  precisely  the  same  changes  result  from  ap- 
pending the  feminine  n^  and  the  plural  endings,  except 
in  the  single  case  of  Segholate  nouns  or  monosyllables 
terminating  in  concurrent  consonants,  §  210,  nouns  in  H 
become  plural  with  no  further  change  than  that  of  their 
termination  T'b)r.212  kingdom  pi.  niib^a"^;  only  in  the  excep- 
tional case  referred  to  a  pretonic  Kamets  must  be  inserted 
rabTJ  queen  from  ^'2,  pi.  by  §  210.  3.  nibb!2.  Nouns  in  n, 
after  omitting  the  feminine  ending,  are  liable  to  the  re- 
jection or  modification  of  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  in 
forming  the  plural,  as  explained  §  209.  1.  d  and  e,  n^^S! 
epistle  (from  13i<)  pi.  ninB^?,  lnnb^53  observance  (from  ^/bu'i:) 
pi.  nn^:2;7j.  As  the  dual  ending  is  not  substituted  for  that 
of  the  femmine  singular,  but  added  to  it,  it  is  simply 
necessary  in  applying  the  rules  for  the  formation  of  the 
dual,  to  observe  that  the  old  ending  m^  takes  the  place 
of  n^,  §  204.  Thus  nyo  (nt)  year,  by  §  212,  becomes  in 
the  dual  U^p}'^,  Tibl^  door  by  §  210.  4,  du.  D^nb*^.,  tvrm 
brass  du.  D^n'j:"]. 

a.  In  the  folloAving  examples  a  radical,  which  has  been  rejected  from 
the  singular  is  restored  in  the  plural,  nis  (for  nn-3X)  maid- servant  pi. 
n«hoS,  n-0  (for  rh^  from  n'i-o)  joortion  pi.  rr;:?  and  r,"'s:-2,  comp.  §  210.  3.  d, 


§  214-216      THE  CONSTEUCT  STATE  OP  NOUNS.  22^9 

nkp  (for  riiSp  from  •^3|5)  pi.  t^^p;  in  like  manner  rii'j?  colleagues  is  re- 
ferred to  the  assumed  singular  n33.  nns  (nins)  governor  has  in  the  pltiral 
both  n'iins  (const,  niins)  and  nins. 

The  Construct  State. 

§  214.  When  one  noun  stands  in  a  relation  of  depend- 
ence on  another,  the  second  or  specifying  noun  is,  in  occi- 
dental languages,  put  in  the  genitive  case ;  in  Hebrew,  on 
the  other  hand,  the  second  noun  undergoes  no  change, 
but  the  first  is  put  into  what  is  commonly  called  the 
construct  state  (Tj^^D  or  ':]''bpD  supported).  A  noun  which 
is  not  so  related  to  a  following  one  is  said  to  be  in  the 
absolute  state  (ri'^p^'a  cut  off).  Thus,  li'n  tvord  is  in  the 
absolute  state;  but  in  the  expression  Tjbian  "li'n  verbum 
regis,  the  word  of  the  king,  "i^'n  is  in  the  construct  state. 
By  the  juxtaposition  of  the  two  nouns  a  sort  of  compound 
expression  is  formed,  and  the  speaker  hastens  forward 
from  the  first  noun  to  the  second,  which  is  necessary  to 
complete  the  idea.  Hence  results  the  abbreviation,  which 
characterizes  the  construct  state. 

a.  The  term  absolute  state  was  introduced  by  Eeuchlin;  he  called  the 
construct  the  state  of  regimen. 

§  215.  The  changes,  which  take  place  in  the  formation 
of  the  construct,  aff'ect 

1.  The  endings  for  gender  and  number. 

2.  The  final  syllable  of  nouns,  which  are  without  these 
endings. 

3.  The  syllable  preceding  the  accent. 

§  216.  The  foUowmg  changes  occur  in  the  endings  for 
gender  and  number,  viz : 

1.  The  feminine  ending  H^  is  changed  to  T\_,  HnSTD 
handmaid  const.  rinS'iT ;  the  ending  T\  remains  unchanged, 
fij/rd"^  observance  const.  TT^iZ'Z'^. 

a.  The  explanation  of  this  appears  to  be  that  the  construct  state  re- 
tains the  old  consonantal  ending  in_ ,  the  close  connection  with  the  following 


230  ETYMOLOGY.  §  217 

noun  preserving  it  as  if  in  the  centre  of  a  compound  word,  §  55.  2.  c; 
whereas  in  the  isolation  of  the  absolute  state,  the  end  of  the  word  is  more 
liable  to  attrition  and  the  consonant  falls  away. 

b.  Some  nouns  in  n^  preceded  by  Kamets  adopt  a  Segholate  form  in 
the  construct,  i^i:^^?  kingdom  const.  n='i'2"a  instead  of  n?bT2^  §  61.  1.  &, 
nSa-a-i  dominion  const,  rtiijop,  nbx'br)  ivork  const.  ^2X^73,  nbsip  chariot 
const,  nns'^a,  tr^or  crown  const,  t^"-",  -^i^f^^.  flame  const,  nanb,  tr^b^;  ten. 
const,  rrry,  or  with  the  Seghols  changed  to  Pattahhs  under  the  influence 
of  a  guttural,  tins'iiri  family  const,  nned??,  nr3")i<  four  const.  rS'h'iX;  so 
Tihy^  fig-cake  const,  rt?'^;  riBX  woman,  though  it  occurs  in  the  absolute, 
Deut.  21 :  11,  1  Sam.  28:  7,  Ps.  58:  9,  is  mostly  used  as  the  construct  of  frli^X. 
On  the  other  hand,  Trqn  bottle  has  in  the  construct  !T?ri  Gen.  21:  14  (the 
accent  thrown  back  by  §  35.  1)  as  if  from  ilir;;  nitt'^  portion  const.  rikwO. 

2.  The  ending  D\  of  the  mascuHne  plural  and  D";,  of 
the  dual  are  ahke  changed  to  '',. ,  D'^ia:^  nations  const.  ''%p_^ 
Q^^IP  horns  const,  ^p.lp;  rii  of  the  feminine  plural  suffers 
no  change  tli^p  voices  const,  riibp. 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  vowel  ending  of  the  masculine  plural 
construct  is  added  to  feminine  nouns  '^ri'ca  (the  accent  invariably  thrown 
back' by  §  35.  1),  commonly  in  the  K'thib  "^ni^n  const,  of  n'i^S  high-places, 
•'riliX^ri  l  Sam.  26:  12;   this  takes  place  regularly  before  suffixes,  §  219.  2. 

§  217.  1.  In  a  mixed  final  syllable  Kamets  is  com- 
monly shortened  to  Pattahh:  so  is  Tsere  when  preceded 
by  Kamets;  other  vowels  remain  without  change,  T' 
hand  const,  "i",  niri?^  seat  const.  mb'i:j,  15^^^  neck  const. 
n5<5^,  1)^7  old  const.  "ipT,  ab  heart  const,  sb,  *ii33  mighty 
man  const.  "liilS. 

a.  Kamets  remains  in  the  construct  of  ti!:!lS  porch,  3n3  writing,  '^-2 
gift,  ny  cloud  (once  const.  3?  Ex.  19:  9),  tJrQ  decree  and  Di  sea,  e.  g. 
nbkrrn;^  sea  of  salt,  except  in  the  phrase  tiTO  D^  sea  of  weed,  i.  e.  Bed  Sea; 
so  too  in  rJO  portion,  and  niip  t'»iif7,  which  are  contracted  from  ri'b  roots, 
§  213.0;  ^n  milk  becomes  a5n,  and  "ihb  w/ii/e  "^^  Gen.  49 :  12  in  the  construct. 

h.  Tsere  remains  in  ^■^:n  five  const,  rcn,  ■'i"i  wire  const,  "i'; ,  tjb'' 
breathing  const.  riS";,  Sp:^  /tee/  const,  3ir>,  in  the  i"j>  derivative  "io  shield 
const,  "i^^  and  in  bhs  found  in  several  proper  names.  It  is  occasionally 
shortened  to  Seghol  before  Makkeph  in  ^ix  mourning  const,  ~^25<,  T'J  time 
const.  Piy,  -ns  and  ~V^'J,  Bu:  name  const.  Bi;3,  ~Dt;3  and  "DT^J;  "3  son,  which  in 
the  absolute  retains  Tsere  before  Makkeph,  Gen.  30:  19,  Ezek.  18:  10,  has 
in  the  construct  "ja,  -'JS  or  "la.  Tsere  is  shortened  to  Pattahh  in  a  few 
cases  not  embraced  in  the  rule,  viz.:  'p  nest  const,  "jp,  ^jr'a  rod  const,  bp,'? 
and  ^jsp,  "lix  Deut.  32:  28  perishing  const,  of  nhx,  the  Kal  participles  of 
Lamedh  guttural  verbs,  §  126,  1,  and  the  following  nouns  with  prefixed  a 


§218 


THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  OF  NOUNS.  231 


in  several  of  which  a  preceding  Pattahh  is  likewise  changed  to  Hhirik, 
§  192.  a,  ^'r'?,'q  tithe  const.  ^ib>^,  'ifes^  mourning  const.  "ISC'?,  JiriSri  ket/  const. 
nnB^  and  lnriS53,  ■j'2'ip  lair  const.  ■721^,  nnp  clamour  const,  ntn-s,  'iryiJ-Q 
matrix  const,  "tad's,  PTO-g  corruption  const.  inn'j"2,  n3T"a  a/to/-  const,  nai-a. 

c.  Hholem  is  shortened  to  Kamets-Hhatuph  before  Makkeph  in  the 
construct  of  monosyllables  from  SS  roots,  ph  statute  const,  pn  and  "pn, 
rarely  in  other  words  -'b'n^  Prov.  19:  19,  Ps.  145:  8,  Nah.  1:3  (in  the  last 
two  passages  the  K'thibh  has  b"l15),  "Ifl'J  Job  17:  9,  Prov.  22:  11,  "]'03p 
Ex.  30:  23,  ■'Cbu3  Ex.  21:  11;  this  becomes  Pattahh  before  the  guttural  in 
"TOa  for  i^ha  construct  of  i^ia  high.  ^3  kol  construct  of  bs  aZ^  occurs  twice, 
viz.:  Ps.  35:  10,  Prov.  19:  7,  without  a  Makkeph  following,  §  19.  2.  b;  it 
must  not  be  confounded  with  bs  kdl  Isa.  40: 12  he  comprehended  pret.  of  b^lS. 

d.  The  termination  1  becomes  "^^  in  the  construct,  §  57.  2  (5),  ^'n 
enough  const,  "i^,  "^n  /i/e  const,  "^ri. 

e.  Three  monosyllabic  nouns  form  the  construct  by  adding  a  vowel, 
IX  father  const.  SX  Gen.  17:  4,  5,  elsewhere  ""iiX,  ns  brother  const,  "'fix, 
?n  friend  const.  nb'-\  2  Sam.  15:  37,  1  Kin.  4:5,  or  nin  2  Sam.  16:  16, 
Prov.  27:  10  K'thibh.  These  may  be  relics  of  the  archaic  form  of  the 
construct,  §  222,  or  the  monosyllables  may  be  abridged  from  fib  roots, 
§  187,  2.  d. 

2.  In  a  simple  final  syllable  H,  is  changed  to  H.,,  TVIi'- 
sheep  const,  n"^,  Jl^h  shepherd  const.  ni;i,  rcvL  field  const. 
rn^Q]  other  vowels  remain  unchanged. 

a.  This  is  an  exception  to  the  general  law  of  shortening,  which  obtains 
in  the  construct.  It  has,  perhaps,  arisen  from  the  increased  emphasis  thrown 
upon  the  end  of  the  word,  as  the  voice  hastens  forward  to  that  which  is 
to  follow.  In  like  manner  the  brief  and  energetic  imperative  ends  in  Tsere 
in  ri'b  verbs,  while  the  future  has  Seghol,  §  170.  c.  An  analogous  fact  is 
found  in  the  Sanskrit  vocative.  The  language  of  address  calls  for  a  quick 
and  emphatic  utterance;  and  this  end  is  sometimes  attained  by  shortening 
the  final  vowel,  and  sometimes  by  the  directly  opposite  method  of  length- 
ening it.     Bopp  Vergleich.  Gramm.  §  205. 

h.  HQ  mouth  has  ""B  in  the  construct. 

c.  Nouns  ending  in  quiescent  X  preserve  their  final  vowel  unchanged 
in  the  construct,  X'n'j  fearing  const.  X'^'^,  xbs  host  const.  sijS. 

§  218.  1.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  commonly  rejected 
from  the  syllable  preceding  the  accent,  Dip'9  jJ^^ce  const. 
Dijpr,  Tiym  year  const,  thrq,  D^i^  years  const,  ^iizj,  inin::i>5 
treasures  const,  rii^ilit^,  D'^i"  hands  const.  ''T,  sib  heart 
const.  Dib,  n!bn  wrath  const,  inbri. 

a.  Kamets  preceding  the  accented  syllable  is  retained  (1)  when  it  has 
arisen  from  Pattahh  before  a  guttural  in  consequence  of  the  omission  of 
Daghesh-forte,  Tlinn  (for  dnri)  workman  const.  llitTi,  tJna  (u:^Q)  horseman 


232  ETYMOLOGY.  §  218 

const.  liJtiQ,  m'-iq  (ns^Q)  vail  const,  rone,  n'la  (Jn^S)  Jtsf.  ess  const,  nn^; 
(2)  in  words  from  i"y  and  '^""  roots,  di^^  (from  liS')  cities  const.  '''nU,  fi^xa 
(from  xia)  coming  const,  "^ita;  so  likewise  where  Kamets  quiesces  in  K, 
D'^iiX"!  heads  const,  '^irx'i ;  (3)  under  a  prefixed  to  SS  roots,  "b^a  (from 
T(bo)  covering  const.  ~b^,  "i'^  (from  'jia)  s/^ieW  const.  )ip2,  I'i'yo  (from  tis) 
fortress  const,  fi"^;  (4)  in  rib  derivatives  of  the  form  w!i5  (from  ii3y)  easife 
const.  ro^J,  fflan  meditation  const,  t^'tart.  (5)  in  the  construct  dual  and 
plural  of  triliteral  monosyllables  or  Segholates  from  xb  and  ri'b  roots,  f^l^n!? 
(from  ""ni)  cheeks  const,  "^^rfs,  Cii^.na  (from  I'lJ)  kids  const,  i.^na,  D'^X::)!  (from 
Xl?!!)  siws  const.  *'!J?l3r);  (6)  in  the  following  nouns  in  most  of  which  it  stands 
immediately  before  or  after  a  guttural,  §  60.  3.  c,  tiBx  curse,  i^'^'S'D  cave, 
n^^n  conduit,  and  the  plurals,  ''N'l^n,  ''^'}^,  ''5?1I?  ^^^-  7:  38,  "^xriN^,  "'Nli'ia, 
''^^yo,  "^y-^-g,  inao  2  Kin.  12:  8,  ^n^p  Ezek.  27:  9,  "^nay?  Job  34:^25,  "'X'lpa, 
■'■nasi  Eccles.  9:  1,  "^a'^Jin. 

••  T-:  '        ••    T      I 

6.  Tsere  is  retained  in  words  in  which  it  quiesces  in  the  vowel-letters 
it  or  "1,  H'^'rS"!  beginning  const.  r.inN"i,  ba""!  temple  const,  ba^'^,  and  in  ad- 
dition in  the  following,  01  ax  crib,  "liTX  girdle,  "jliax  thread,  ^33  foreign 
land  const,  "^a?,  tinax  loss  const,  m^as,  so  n^EX  Isa.  58:  10  darkness, 
nana  pool,  n^.n  robbery,  nasa  Ex.  22:  2  i/te/f,  nsari  plague,  nrQnp  orer- 
throw,  iinai2  Gen.  49:  5  sword,  nrSp  molten-image,  n^'np  Job  16:  13  ^a?/, 
rrb'ns'  Aeap,  nki:  eajcremewf,  iiixri  fig-tree,  na^i'iri  o^eep  sZee;?,  and  the  plurals 
"'^ax  mourning  from  D^liax  (bax),  so  "^ksn  desiring,  •^.iti";  sleeping,  "^npiU  and 
-'^n'sb  rejoicing,  "^nailj  forgetting,  "^hxT  wolves  from  D^^hxT  (axt);  fi'^sa'^  weary 
becomes  ''5"^5'^  in  the  construct,  and  B"*!?)?!?  escaped  "^is^lpB.  Tsere  also  re- 
mains in  the  const.  Jn^'T  sweat,  "^np  from  tip  deac?,  "ITS'  from  'iS  witness, 
which  are  from  IS"  roots,  and  ri?"^.,  ''V'l  from  ?^  friend,  root  Si^l. 

c.  Hholem  is  rejected  from  the  syllable  before  the  accent  in  WD'p'iX 
const,  pi.  of  "p^ix  palace,  Snfiat'x  and  ri^ars  const,  pi.  of  Vi'l'x  cluster, 
■'piXPi  Cant.  4:  5  and  "^pXPJ  Cant.  7:  4  <tt;ms,  ''r!'?^  from  nira  high-places, 
see  §  216.  2.  a;  it  is  changed  to  u  in  "^ipiip  from  d^iaup  treasures,  comp.  §  88. 

d.  Medial  Vav  and  Yodh,  though  they  may  retain  their  consonantal 
power  in  the  absolute,  quiesce  in  Hholem  and  Tsere  in  the  construct,  'T\}7\ 
midst  const.  T^in,  sniibp  cups  const,  niiap,  n-ia  house  const,  ri^a,  T\y:i'3_  foun- 
tains const,  miii^',  N";;!  valley  const.  X'^5,  pi.  nrxj,  §  210.  3.  c,  const.  nix"i,a 
Ezek.  35:  8.  Exceptions  are  rare,  hyj  (according  to  Kimchi  and  Baer  h*V) 
Ezek.  28:  18  iniquity,  '^r'lp  Prov.  19:  13  contentions,  ^NJ^  neck  const,  "ix-i? 
and  ''■nX!]^,  "ji's  iniquity  const.  I'W. 

e.  A  few  nouns  of  the  forms  bt3|3 ,  bb|r| ,  ba|5  have  bt:fe  or  bap  in  the 
construct  instead  of  bi;p,  §  61.  1.  6,  "ina  wa/Z  const.  nt!?i  ^.tj  robbery  const. 
^?.?.)  "^^^^  i/ii^/i  const.  T|';i|] ,  'laa  ^eoi^y  const,  laa  and  ^aa,  t|na  shoulder 
const,  tiria,  bSs  uncircumcised  const,  b'ns  and  b'lij,  'fe  smoke  const.  "iL"? 
and  "jTri),  2?bk  side  const,  ybk  and  ybk;  t]';?^?  /o«^  is  only  found  in  the  con- 
struct, the  corresponding  absolute  was  probably  T\'}^;  ^aia  helmet  simply 
shifts  its  accent  in  the  construct,  JJaia.  On  the  other  hand,  while  most 
Segholate  nouns  suffer  no  change  in  the  construct,  a  few  adopt  the  form 
bop,  "Tm  chamber  const,  ^nn,  2J^t  seed  const,  once  "J'til  Num.  11:  7  else- 


§  218  THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  OF  NOUNS.  233 

where  S^T,  5>:53  plant  const,  si:?,  "isi?  /cB^tts  const,  'yxq,  'S'l^  seven  const. 
5>5iy,  rtJin  niwe  const.  :)iun;  in  like  manner  b^n  vanity  const.  bi:n. 

2.  When  this  rejection  occasions  an  inadmissible  con- 
currence of  vowelless  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  a 
syllable,  §  61.  1,  it  is  remedied  by  inserting  a  short  vowel 
between  them,  commonly  Hhirik,  unless  it  is  modified  by 
the  presence  of  gutturals,  bilb:2  tinkling  const.  b^biS  for  bibiZ, 
D'^na'l  words  const,  ^nn'n  for  ^^n'^,  iTIj^'l^  righteousness  const. 

nibisr",  pi.  nip^^  const,  nijbii?,  rrbnz  ^eas^  const,  n'bnn, 

D'^hin  wfse  const.  TJpH.  In  the  construct  plural  and  dual 
of  Segholates,  however,  the  vowel  is  frequently  regulated 
by  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  singular  which  has 
been  dropped,  comp.  §  210.  2,  D^!?bp  from  'T^bi;  ("bi?)  kings 
const.  ^Db"a,  U'xzzt  (t^niij)  tribes  const.  ^x;zpz,  iniin^  ("j'^3) 
threshing-floors  const,  fiii"^!,  ^'^^'^'^  (»^^")rj)  ^e^^oac^es  const. 
nisin,  D^nb'n  (nb*!!  or  Fib'i)  folding  doors  const,  ^inb'n;  yet 
not  invariably  D^b^y:  (b?i2:)  handfuls  const,  ^bsjuj,  Jnpii: 
^row^/i  (pi.  ninp^r)  const,  ninpir. 

fl.  When  in  the  construct  plural  the  introduction  of  a  new  vowel  is 
demanded  by  the  concurrence  of  consonants,  the  syllable  so  formed  is  an 
intermediate  one,  so  that  the  following  Sh'va  is  vocal,  and  the  next  letter, 
if  an  aspirate,  does  not  i-eceive  Daghesh-lene,  thus,  ''hh'[,  '^bh'O,  tnihlpn, 
nib'iri  not  "^^hl  etc.  §  22.  a.  3.  Exceptions  ai-e  infrequent  as  nTiTN  Deut.  3:  17, 
itipn  Lam.  3:  22  (in  some  editions)  but  '^'ipn  Ps.  89:  2,  STlDnn  Ps.  69:  10, 
•"b-iM  Ezek.  17:  9,  -"^n^:?  Isa.  5:  10,  ''h-a'^.  Cant.  8:6  but  "iS^n  Ps.  76:  4; 
so  with  grave  suff.  CiniSp3  Gen.  42:  25,  35,  dn"'3p3  Lev,  23:  18  and  in  some 
editions  Cnvh'Ci^  Neh.  4:  7.  In  a  few  instances  Daghesh-forte  separative 
is  inserted  to  indicate  more  distinctly  the  vocal  nature  of  the  Sh'va,  §  24.  5, 
'^2'^n  Isa.  57:  6,  ^hiV  Lev.  25:  5,  ^bl'J  Isa.  58:  3,  '^bip-J  Gen.  49:  17,  niij?:? 
Ps.  89:  52,  rih^*^  Prov.  27:  25,  or  compound  Sh'va  is  taken  instead  of  simple 
for  the  same  reason,  mihi^UJ  Gen.  30:  38.  The  presence  or  absence  of 
Daghesh-lene  in  the  dual  construct  depends  upon  the  form  of  the  absolute, 
thus  "^nsia  from  D'^rab  lips  but  i3"ia  from  D'^3"i3  knees.  When  the  con- 
curring consonants  belong  to  different  syllables  a  new  vowel  is  not  needed 
between  them;  one  is  sometimes  inserted,  however,  after  a  guttural,  "ibns^, 
nib-i^'^'but  niTrnp.  in  the  opinion  of  Ewald  ^^"i^^^z  Ezek.  7:  24  is  for 
''ib^pri  from  D-i-iJ^pri,  and  ni"^p?a  Ex.  26:  23,  36:  28  for  n'ibjpia;  they  may 
be  better  explained,  however,  as  Piel  and  Pual  participles. 

b.  The  second  syllable  before  the  accent  rarely  undergoes  any  change. 
In  a  very  few  instances  Seghol  becomes  Hhirik  or  Pattahh,  the  pure  vowels 


234  ETYMOLOGY.  §  219 

being  reckoned  shorter  than  the  diphthongal,  comp.  §  212.  e.  "^^STo  cho' 
riot  const.  Ms"!"!?.  The  changes  in  !^if7^  flame  const,  nnnb  pi.  ri'ibn?  const. 
t^idlib,  D'^^ns  coals  const.  ''B>n5  are  due  to  the  influence  of  the  proximate 
vowels,  §  63.  1;  those  in  ')'i"'-Tn  vision  const.  'j'i"'fn,  KinS  coats  const,  nj'ns 
are  consequent  upon  the  dropping  of  Daghesh-forte,  §  61.  5;  that  in  d^lin'x 
(from  bnii)  tents  const.  "^l^i^JJ  arises  from  the  conversion  of  a  simple  into  an 
intermediate  syllable,  §  18.  3. 

Nouns  with  Suffixes. 

§  219.  The  pronominal  suffixes,  whose  forms  are  given 
§  72 ,  are  appended  to  nouns  in  the  sense  of  possessive 
pronouns,  T  hand,  ^T  my  hand,  etc.  They  sufler,  in 
consequence,  the  following  changes,  viz: 

1.  Of  the  suffixes,  which  begin  with  a  consonant,  T^, 
DID,  "jD  of  the  second  person  are  connected  with  nouns  in 
the  singular  by  a  vocal  Sh'va,  ^D  of  the  first  person  plural 
and  1\  of  the  second  fem.  singular  by  Tsere,  and  ^H,  tl,  D, 
^  of  the  third  person  by  Kamets;  ^H^  is  invariably  con- 
tracted to  i,  rarely  written  H*,  §  62.  1,  and  H^  to  n^, 
§101.2. 

a.  There  is  one  example  of  a  noun  in  the  construct  before  the  full  form 
of  the  pronoun,  X"!!!  "^ii";  her  clays  Nah.  2:9;  but  this  is  best  explained  as 
an  abbreviated  relative  clause  the  days  that  she  has  existed. 

h.  First  person:  >13  is  in  a  few  instances  preceded  by  Kamets,  13n^"ib 
Euth  3 :  2,  sisiip  Job  22 :  20. 

Second  person.  The  final  vowel  of  ?j  is  occasionally  expressed  by  the 
vowel  letter  n,  ni"!^^  Ex.  13:  16,  nb^'an  Jer.  29:  25.  In  pause  the  Sh'va 
before  r\  becomes  Seghol,  §  65,  i^'nnr'  Gen.  33:  5,  :!^=^^  Ps.  139:  5,  or 
Kamets  may  be  inserted  as  a  connecting  vowel,  particularly  after  nouns 
in  n . ,  whereupon  the  final  Kamets  is  dropped  to  prevent  the  recui-rence 
of  like  sounds,  T\^'n  Ps.  63 :  6.  In  the  feminine  the  connecting  vowel  e  is 
rarely  written  i,  T^'^nr^p  Ezek.  5:  12;  "'^  which  belongs  to  the  full  form 
of  the  pronoun,  §  71.  a  (2),  is  sometimes  added  to  the  suffix,  '^^t'^"'  Jer. 
11:  15,  "^abina  Ps.  116:  19,  "i^i^ya  2  Kin.  4:  7  K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  has 
".%■?.  Sometimes  the  distinction  of  gender  is  neglected  in  the  plural  and 
BS  is  used  in  place  of  the  feminine  )q,  cb'^as  Gen.  31:  9,  D^ptN,  C;?T22 
Jer.  9:  19;  M^  is  sometimes  added  to  the  feminine  suffix  as  to  the  full  pro- 
noun, f^5i:^'3'!  Ezek.  23:  49. 

Third  person.  The  connecting  vowel  before  in  and  ii  is  occasionally  e, 
sini'i^ls  Gen.  1:  12,  ini;;:yQ  Judg.  19:  24,  >in-jb  Nah.  1 :  Is'  iinilN  Job  25:  3, 
so  !in?n  from  ?n  and  in^'na  from  Sinp  and  frequently  with  nouns  in  n.,i 


§219 


NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  235 


iitik'^p  and  nx^p  from  iik'-tn,  iirtniU  from  STiia,  ^iniri^?,  1!^i?i5;  e  does  not 
occur  before  the  plural  D  unless  it  is  represented  by  the  vowel-letter  "^  in 
Dimnnt?3  2  Chron.  34:  5  K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  has  Dnins-TQ;  it  is  once 
found  in  the  fem.  plural  i^32"ip  Gen.  41 :  21.  The  form  n  in  the  masc.  sing, 
is  commonly  reckoned  an  archaism,  ii'^J^X  Gen.  12:  8,  tiSiiIJ  Ps.  42:  9,  Sils 
Jer.  2:  21,  so  several  times  in  the  K'thibh  ri'T^'J,  nniD  Gen.  49:  11,  n-\i2.'n 
Ex.  22:  4,  nn-D3  Ex,  22:  26,  ^303  Lev.  23:  13,  nd^ia  2  Kin.  9:  25,  nnxinn 
Ezek.  48:  18,  where  the  K'ri  in  each  instance  substitutes  i.  In  a  few  in- 
stances the  consonant  is  rejected  from  the  feminine,  ri  being  retained  simply 
as  a  vowel-letter;  where  this  occurs  it  is  commonly  indicated  in  modern 
editions  of  the  Bible  by  Kaphe,  ir^^O  Lev.  13 :  4,  nx'Jn  Num.  15:  28,  or  by 
a  Massoretic  note  in  the  margin,  HSDrx  Isa.  23:  17.  18  for  W3rs;  once  X  is 
substituted  for  n,  i<!r3  Ezek.  36:  5.  The  longer  forms  of  the  plural  suffixes 
^•^>  ir?  are  rarely  affixed  to  nouns  in  the  singular,  'H'nnb  Gen.  21:  28,  'iHab'S 
Ezek.  13:  17,  "nr^iad  Ezek.  16:  53,  or  with  the  connecting  vowel  Kamets, 
nrii'S  2  Sam.  23:  6,  or  with  n^  appended,  ri:n|3  1  Kin.  7:  37,  nsnbin  Ezek. 
16:  53.  The  vowel  n  is  also  sometimes  added  to  the  briefer  form  of  the 
fem.  plural,  HJ-nnb  Gen.  21 :  29,  n:r3  Gen.  42:  36.  The  distinction  of  gender 
is  sometimes  neglected  in  the  plural,  D  or  tn  being  used  for  the  feminine, 
C]|3  Cant.  4:  2,  6:  6  for  '{h'Z,  dnin"^  Job  1:  14  for  )ri'^T.' 

c.  The  nouns  2N  father,  nx  brother,  tiQ  mouth  take  the  ending  ^^  be- 
fore suffixes,  as  they  do  likewise  in  the  construct  state,  ^"'ix,  dD"^3X;  so 
too  Cn  father-in-law  T\^h'n,  fr^'^ri;  ''_  of  the  first  person  coalesces  with  this 
vowel,  "^^X,  ^riX,  "^3  and  ^fi  of  the  third  person,  commonly  becomes  1  §  62.  2, 
lihx,  l-inx,  110  more  frequent  than  ^lir^ix,  >llnif)X,  iirr^B.  In  ^.ia  Zeph.  2:  9 
the  vowel-letter  "^  of  the  first  person  suffix  is  dropped  after  the  final  "^  of 
the  noun. 

2.  The  masculine  plural  termination  D^.  and  the  dual 
D']_  are  changed  to  ^__  before  suffixes  as  in  the  construct 
state;  the  same  vowel  is  hkewise  mserted  as  a  connective 
between  suffixes  and  feminine  plural  nouns  §  216.  2.  a. 
This  ■*..  remains  unchanged  before  the  plural  suffixes; 
but  before  ^  the  second  masc.  singular  and  n  third  fem. 
singular  it  becomes  "^  ,  and  before  the  remaining  suffixes 
the  diphthongal  vowel  is  resolved  into  ^_,  which  combined 
with  "^^  the  first  singular  forms  ''_,  with  Tj  the  second 
feminine  T  ,  and  with  ^n  the  third  masculine  V  ,  8  62.  2. 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  suffixes  are  appended  to  feminine  plurals 
without  the  vowel  "^^  or  its  modifications,  "^rinn  2  Kin.  6:8  for  "'Kinn, 
■iflH";  Ps.  132:  12  for  ^rnv,  rfb-g  Deut.  28:  59  for  ^"'nS'?,  Tinrnx  Ezek.  16:52 

for  Tj'niinN,  tir-ins  and  Dn^rinix,  cnhix  Ps.  74:4,  t:ri<tin,  dninnn,  Dnh^ia, 
Dliaa^.     On  the  other  hand,  suffixes  proper  to  plural  nouns  are  occasionally 


236  ETYMOLOGY.  §  220 

appended  to  feminine  nouns  in  the  singular,  pei-haps  to  indicate  that  they 
are  used  in  a  plural  or  collective  sense,  T^nuirn  Lev.  5:  24,  tiin'^nn  Ps.  9:  15, 
Tj-^nxab  Ezek.  35:  11,  Tj^^:^??  Isa.  47:  13.     "    ' 

b.  The  vowel-letter  ^  is  not  infrequently  omitted  after  plural  and  dual 
nouns,  ^iD-in  Ex.  33:  13  for  ?]'^b'in,  Dd^-;  Ps.  134:  2  for  Cjdi^i,  IT^^  Ex.  32: 19 
K'thibh  (K'ri  T^n^p),  11325  1  Sam.  18:  22  K'thibh  (K'ri'  1""i2?),  t]n;:iia  Gen. 
10:  5  for  Dn^.-:ii5,  ")n?5n  Gen.  4:  4  for 'iH-in^n. 

c.  Second  person.  The  vowel  ■!  remains  unchanged  before  the  fern, 
sing.  T\  in  'Ti''b"^'5<  Eccl.  10:  17  and  with  ti  appended  :n:2xbp  Nah.  2:  14. 
Sometimes,  as  in  the  full  pronoun,  "^  ^  is  appended  to  the  feni.  sing,  suffix 
and  n^  to  the  plural,  : "^i-^Xlblir!  Ps.  103:  3,  :'i37^^n  ver.  4,  njiinirps  Ezek. 
13:  20. 

Third  person.  The  uncontracted  form  of  the  masc.  sing.  iilT^  occurs  in 
iini^iaa  Nah.  2:4  for  li^iaa,  ini'i;;  Hab.  3:  10,  in^rs-  Job  24:  23;  ehu  = 
aihu  by  transposition  of  the  vowels  becomes  auhi  =  ohl  '^rii  which  is  found 
once  "'rii^l^^iPi  Ps.  116:  12,  and  is  the  ordinary  form  of  this  sufiix  in  Palestine 
Aramaeic.  The  final  a  of  the  fem.  sing,  is  once  represented  by  N,  NfT'i^'PiX 
Ezek.  41 :  15.  In  a  few  instances  H  is  appended  to  the  plural  of  either  gender, 
'i'?6"^'?^.  Ezek.  40:  16,  Minin^lii  Ezek.  1:11,  and  i  to  the  abbreviated  masc. 
d,  iriinbx  Deut.  32:  37,  '^'O-'hz)  ver.  38,  i-a-^SS  Job  27:  23,  ib^iS  Ps.  11:  7. 

3.  The  suffixes  thus  modified  are  as  follows,  viz.: 

Appended  to  singulae.  PLUEAii. 


1  e.   2  m. 

2/".   3  m.    3f. 

le. 

2  m. 

2f- 

3  m. 

3f. 

Sing.  Nouns     *•  ^     ^ 

%.   ■*    ^, 

^3.. 

^?: 

v.: 

n 

T 

I 

Dual  and   )    ,,      ^^ 
Plur.  Nounsj      -     ^1  v 

5ir-  1%  7, 

^3^. 

05^ 

1='.. 

a-^. 

^-^ 

§  220.  Certain  changes  likewise  take  place  in  nouns 
receiving  suffixes,  which  arise  from  the  disposition  to 
shorten  words,  which  are  increased  at  the  end,  §  66.  2. 
These  are  as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  The  grave  suffixes,  §  72,  WD,  "j^?  ^n?  1»1  shorten  the 
nouns,  to  which  they  are  attached,  to  the  greatest  possible 
extent.  Before  them,  therefore,  nouns  of  both  genders 
and  all  numbers  take  the  form  of  the  construct,  jib  heart, 
Djllb  your  heart,  ]tl2^_  their  hearts;  Miir  lip  du.  Dh'^i^ 
pi.  Dn^iniriSlTr  their  lips. 

a.  d'n  blood  becomes  &?r)'n  and  1^  hand  db'i;),   §§  58.  2,  63.  2.  a. 

2.  Feminine  nouns,  both  singular  and  plural,  take  the 
construct  form  before  the  light  suffixes  likewise,  with 


§  220  NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  237 

the  exception  that  in  the  singular  the  ending  tl_  becomes 
r\^  in  consequence  of  the  change  from  a  mixed  to  a  simple 
syllable,  §  59,  nsifl  lip,  insis  his  lip,  DhSifl  their  lip, 
ifj^ninEUJ  thy  lips,  rt\T\t^  his  /  )js. 

a.  If  the  construct  has  a  Segho'ate  form  it  ■will  experience  the  change 
indicated  in  5,  nlsTIJ'ap  const.  rt'CP'a  suf.  'iriVnr'aia.  If  two  consonants  have 
coalesced  in  the  final  letter,  it  will  receive  Daghesh-forte  agreeably  to  6, 
•ina  from  na,  "inriSt  from  nix,  J^Pisa^  l  Sam.  16: 15  from  the  fern,  of  njja^, 
§  207.  b. 

b.  In  a  few  exceptional  instances  the  absolute  form  is  preserved  before 
suffixes,  "^n^as  Isa.  26:  19  from  ti^as  but  T;nb:i3,  in^^?;  "^rS^  Cant.  2:  10 
from  n;b';|  const,  ns"!;  so  "^nbx,  I'^n""!^.?,  T^n^pl,  B?T?^^  t)at  const.  T6yi3, 
comp.  Dniyp  const.  '^V'O. 

3.  Masculine  nouns,  both  singular  and  plural,  on 
receiving  light  suffixes  take  the  form  which  they  assume 
before  the  absolute  plural  termination,  nib  heart,  "'Sab 
my  heart,  Tjnnb  thy  heart,  ^rilb  our  hearts. 

a.  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  is  shortened  to  Hhirik  or  Seghol  before  7^, 
t3D,  '\2,  e.  g.  7]33,  DrilJ^j^^,  DD^^o,  or  with  a  guttural  to  Pattahh,  Tjasnij, 
dbbxa,  though  with  occasional  exceptions,  TjipiaX  Isa.  22:  21,  T^nhvi  1  Sam. 
21 :  3,  T1X03  from  N&3.  Before  other  suffixes  it  is  rejected  from  some  mono- 
syllables, which  retain  it  in  the  plural,  icTU  from  DIU  plur.  Sniiiy,  133  from  )'a. 
plur.  d-'ia  but  "^n,  ?]l.a ,  ^b'^^ ,  t^SJ*].  tibi-a'n  Ezek.  5:  7  from  Ti?in  is  exceptional. 

4.  Dual  nouns  retain  before  hght  suffixes  the  form 
which  they  have  before  the  absolute  dual  termination, 

"hi'^  my  lips,  ^rriSTT  our  lips,  ^DTiJ  my  ears,  ^D^p.TiJ  our  ears; 
D^ilp  ^^^^^  ^".V^P  horns,  TD"^i?  and  vb'np  his  horns. 

5.  Segholate  nouns  in  the  dual  and  plural  follow  the 
preceding  rules,  but  in  the  singular  they  assume  before 
all  suffixes,  whether  light  or  grave,  their  original  mono- 
syllabic form  as  before  the  feminine  ending  Jl^,  §  210, 
■Tjbb  king,  ''iib'2  my  king,  Disb"^  your  king;  "^TJ^  ear,  "'DTJij  my 
ear ;  in  like  manner  inpi V  sucker,  iripSi^  his  sucker. 

a.  Tsere  in  the  first  syllable  of  Segholates  is  commonly  shortened  to 
Hhirik  before  suffixes,  §  210.  2,  but  if  the  first  radical  be  H  or  5"  it  usually 
becomes  Seghol  e.  g.  sbn,  iabn;  153  and  123  retain  the  Seghol  of  the  first 
syllable.  Hholem  is  commonly  shortened  to  o,  but  in  a  few  instances  to  u, 
ik^ap,  "ilina  and  ili"!?;  'noa,  '■sn  and  nab'  irregularly  take  Hhirik  before  i 
3  pers.  suf.  "iiisn  but  "^iiin.     When  the  middle  radical  is  a  guttural  it  takes 


238  .  ETYMOLOGY.  §  220 

compound  instead  of  simple  Sh'va  before  suffixes,  which  before  T^  and  D3  is 
cljanyed  into  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  i'S?-;?,  T'pt':.  When  the  first 
ladical  has  Hholem  in  the  absolute,  Hhateph-Kamets  or  Kamets-Hhatuph 
^  is  sometimes  given  to  the  second  radical  before  suffixes,  i^i^Q  and  '"ivQ  from 
Vi"'q,  ^3^i]5  Hos.  13:  14,  with  Daghesh-forte  separative,  "i^np  Ezek.  26:  9, 
•>:::;?  l  Kin.  12,  10,  'i'iao  Isa.  9:  b,  "iilp  Jer.  4:  7;  1^3  garment  has  '^nja, 
•1152  instead  of  "^nsa,  i^Ja. 

6.  Middle  Yodh  and  Vav  mostly  quiesce  in  e  and  o  before  suffixes,  '^3"'S 
from  'lb  epe,  "^ni^  from  nib  death;  but  iTi"'S'  Gen.  49:  11  from  T^iJ  young 
ass,  inillJ  Isa.  10:  17  from  n-^ij  f/jorn,  ^Wj  Ezek.  18:  26,  33:  13  from  ^l-^ 
iniquity.  Final  Yodh,  which  quiesces  in  the  abs.  sing,  resumes  its  con- 
sonant character  before  suffixes  '^"'.'IQ  from  '^'iQ,  'vhT\  from  i^ri;  so  Vav  ''l^^, 

c.  Triliteral  monosyllables  sometimes  shift  their  vowel  from  the  second 
radical  to  the  first,  thus  assuming  the  same  form  with  Segholates,  comp. 
§  186.  a,  ilbri'i  from  "ilj^'n,  ^iiz'r  from  Dri,  but  i^ns  from  izJ'nSi;  Tj-^bs  from 
''Bs;  i^.'ID,  fj-]-lQ,  dD-^-iS,  dins  but  Bni"iQ  from  "'Hq;  VIT^,  T^-inia  but  oi'^nd 
from  "^^'IJ.   By  a  like  transposition  dbBDI"  Ezek.  36 :  8  is  for  C23S33.'  from  ClDSi. 

d.  The  noun  I'CN  blessedness,  which  only  occurs  in  the  plural  construct 
and  with  suffixes,  preserves  before  all  suffixes  the  construct  form,  ?]'^^ll3x;, 
rnirx  not  ?j'^^m,  1'1'nm. 

6.  Nouns  in  whose  final  letter  two  consonants  have 
coalesced,  or  which  double  their  final  letter  in  the  plural, 
§  209.  2,  receive  Daghesh-forte  likewise  before  suffixes, 
the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  being  modified  accordingly, 
^b  and  ^-i:?  from  T5  (root  TT^),  Dinn  from  nn  (ri?2l),  n3Jn^5 
from  -jiniJ^  (pi.  D^hriJ?). 

a.  ^5'^'5<  lattice,  b'b'ns  garden,  aiiiJ^  refuge,  which  do  not  occur  in  the 
plural,  take  Daghesh-forte  before  suffixes;  !n31^  has  in  the  plural  niriaia 
but  before  suffixes  ina'^;,  Qrna^;  '3  (root  "jis)  base  has  "^iS,  "133.  Pattahh 
becomes  Hhirik  before  the  doubled  letter  as  in  the  fem.  and  plur.,  §  209.  2.  a, 
in  the  following  from  i'S?  roots,  firi  fear,  Iri  garment  (i^a  and  i^a),  CjG  6a- 
sin,  ns  morsel,  ^:s  side. 

h.  In  a  very  few  instances  a  final  liquid  is  repeated  instead  of  being 
doubled  by  Daghesh,  comp.  §  209.  2.  a,  ^i'^n  Jer.  17:  3,  ^nnn  Ps.  30:  8, 
Dn-in  Gen.  14:  6  from  "ifi;  ^^h•^  Job  40:  22  and  ^i:i  from  b^;  Ti^lij  Ezek. 
16:  4  and  T\y^^  Cant.  7:  3.  Once  Daghesh-forte  is  resolved  by  the  insertion 
of  D,  n'^iti"^  Isa.  23:  11  for  vj'^h'^,  §  54.  3. 

7.  Nouns  ending  in  H ,  drop  this  vowel  before  suffixes 
as  before  the  plural  terminations,  §  211.  1,  tlljr  field  ^YlT, 
tj-b,  nYir;  ni)>'J  cattle  TjDpia. 

«.   The  vowel  e  commonly  remains  as  a  connecting  vowel  before  suf« 


§  221  NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  239 

fixes  of  the  third  person  singular,  §  219.  1.  b;  and  in  a  few  instances  the 
radical  "^  is  restored,  giving  to  singular  nouns  the  appearance  of  being 
plural,  n^iys  Isa.  22:  11,  rjiJ^B'?  Hos.  2:  16,  dniu^ij  Isa.  42:  5,  nb  sheephe- 
comes  'i'^iy  or  in.'l'b. 

§  221.  As  the  changes  produced  by  the  terminations 
for  gender  and  number,  the  construct  state  and  suffixes 
are  thus  dependent  upon  the  character  of  the  syllables, 
of  which  the  nouns  so  affected  severally  consist,  the  de- 
clension of  nouns  may  be  best  represented  by  dividing 
them  according  to  their  syllabic  structure.  Hence  results 
the  following  scheme. 

A.  Masculine  Nouns. 

Declension  1.  Segholates. 

Segholates  drop  their  unessential  vowel  and  revert 
to  their  primary  monosyllabic  form  in  the  singular  be- 
fore suffixes;  if  the  second  radical  is  a  guttural,  it  will 
take  compound  Sh'va,  which  before  ^ .  D^ .  becomes  a 
short  vowel  §  220.  5;  in  the  plur.  (as  other  nouns  in  both 
numbers)  they  take  with  light  suffixes  the  same  form  as 
before  the  abs.  plur.  ending,  with  grave  suffixes  the  form 
of  the  construct,  §  220.  1  and  3.  In  the  plur.  abs.  they 
drop  their  principal  vowel  and  take  pretonic  Kamets 
§  210.  3;  this  too  is  dropped  in  the  plur.  const.,  wliich 
gives  rise  to  a  new  syllable  §  218.  1  and  2.  Medial  Vav 
and  Yodh  quiesce  except  in  the  sing.  abs.  §  210.  3.  c, 
218.  1.  d,  220.  5.  b. 

Declension  2.  Mutable  Kamets  orTsere  in  the  penult. 

Nouns  of  this  declension  may  be  dissyllables  or  poly- 
syllables whose  first  vowels  are  unchangeable  as  '|i'^2T. 

These  vowels  are  dropped  in  the  const.  §  2 1 8,  before 
fem.  and  plur.  endings,  §  212,  and  suffixes.  Kamets  in 
the  ultimate  and  Tsere  preceded  by  Kamets  are  in  the 
const,  sing,  changed  to  Pattahh,  §  217. 1,  and  in  the  const. 


240  ETYMOLOGY.  §  221 

plur.  rejected,  thus  giving  rise  to  a  new  syllable  §  218. 
1  and  2. 

Declension  3.  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  and 
no  other  mutable  vowel. 

Nouns  belonging  to  this  declension  may  be  mono- 
syllables or  may  have  in  the  penult  either  a  long  un- 
changeable vowel  as  ^isi''  or  a  short  vowel  in  a  mixed 
syllable  as  T\%l'a.  The  few  words  in  which  Kamets  in 
the  ultimate  is  unchangeable  as  nih3,  W5a,  rip  §  217.  l.a 
do  not  belong  to  this  declension. 

Kamets  becomes  Pattahh  in  the  const,  sing.  §  217. 1, 
and  is  dropped  in  the  const,  plur.  §  218.  1.  Tsere  com- 
monly becomes  -;-  or  -^  before  ^,  DID  and  "jS,  §  220.  3.  a; 
it  is  dropped  in  the  plur.  and  before  light  suffixes  except 
from  monosyllables,  which  retain  it  in  the  abs.  plur., 
§  209. 1,  and  sometimes  also  before  light  suffixes,  §  220.  3. a. 

Declension  4.  With  final  in ,  (accented). 

These  nouns  are  from  f/'b  roots;  H..  becomes  n„  in 
the  const,  sing.,  §  217.  2,  and  is  dropped  before  fem.  and 
plur.  endings,  §  211,  and  before  hght  suffixes.  Kamets 
or  Tsere  in  the  penult,  though  rejected  in  the  const., 
§  218.  1,  is  retained  before  fem.  and  plur.  endings,  §  212. 

Declension  5.  Nouns  which  double  their  final  con- 
sonant. 

These  are  mostly  from  f^  roots  and  shorten  their  last 
vowel  (if  long)  before  the  doubled  letter. 

a.  The  first  three  declensions,  as  above  given,  correspond  remarkably  with 
the  three  divisions  of  Class  I  of  nouns  according  to  their  formation,  §  184. 
Declension  1  is  identical  with  the  first  division.  Declension  2  embraces  the 
second  division  and  in  addition  all  other  nouns,  of  whatever  class  they  may 
be,  which  have  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult.  Declension  3  em- 
braces the  third  division  and  in  addition  all  other  nouns  which  have  but 
one  mutable  vowel  and  that  a  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  ultimate.  The  two 
remaining  declensions  include  peculiar  forms  arising  from  imperfect  roots. 
Those  belonging  to  4  are  from  ri  b,  and  a  large  proportion  of  5  are  from  "S 
roots.  Declension  1  in  feminine  nouns  answers  to  masc.  declension  1 ;  fem.  2 
and  3  embrace  to  a  certain  extent  forms  derived  from  masc.  2  and  3. 


§  222  PAEAGOGIC  VOWELS.  241 

B.  Feminine  Nouns. 

Declension  1.   The  feminines  of  Segholates. 

This  embraces  the  forms  nbtpj:,  ri^pj:,  nbtpp,  »l5pl^, 
nbp)^,  which  reject  their  first  vowel  in  the  plur.  abs.  and 
insert  pretonic  Kamets  §§  210.  3,  213,  which  in  its  turn 
is  rejected  in  the  construct  thus  causing  the  return  of 
the  original  vowel,  §  218.  1  and  2.  Nouns  in  H^  have  n_ 
in  the  const,  sing.,  §  216.  1,  and  t^i  in  the  plur.  §  201; 
before  suffixes  they  take  the  form  of  the  const,  ex- 
cept that  they  have  H^  in  the  sing,  before  Hght  suffixes 
§  220.  2. 

Declension  2.  Nouns  in  »1^  with  pretonic  Kamets 
or  Tsere. 

These  are  rejected  in  the  const,  and  before  suffixes, 
thus  giving  rise  to  a  new  syllable,  if  an  initial  voweUess 
consonant  precedes  §  218.  1  and  2. 

Declension  3.  Nouns  with  the  fern,  ending  0. 

See  §§  213,  209.  1.  d  and  e. 

These  declensions  are  shown  in  Paradigms  XIV,  XV 
and  XVI.  Nouns  not  embraced  in  these  declensions 
undergo  no  change  in  the  body  of  the  word,  whether  in 
the  construct  or  on  receiving  fem.  and  plur.  endings  or 
suffixes;  they  may  be  represented  by  'O'Ti  and  mD^D,  which 
are  shown  in  all  the  forms  that  they  assume  in  both  num- 
bers and  with  suffixes  in  Paradigm  XV. 

Paragogic  Vowels. 

§  222.  The  termination  ^^  or  i  is  sometimes  added  to 
nouns  in  the  construct  singular,  §  61.  6,  ''is  Gen.  49 :  11 
for  -jn,  ^mbi:  Isa.  1:21  for  ns^bia,  ^nian  Lam.  1:1  for 
nin,  "Vb-^^^  Ps.  113:6  for  b^S?'aJ52,  "Tm  Gen.  1:24  for 
T?T].    This  occurs  chiefly  in  poetry  and  is  regarded  as  an 

16 


242  ETYMOLOGY.  §  223,  224 

archaism,  §  201.  e.  These  vowels  for  the  most  part  receive 
the  accent,  and  commonly  occasion  the  rejection  of 
Pattahh  or  Tsere  from  the  ultimate. 

a.  Examples  of  this  antique  formation  of  the  construct  are  likewise 
preserved  in  proper  names,  as  p'HjC'iS^a  Melchizedek,  n^iy^injs  Methuselah. 

§  223.  1.  The  unaccented  vowel  n^  added  to  nouns 
indicates  motion  or  direction  towards  a  place,  §  201.  e, 
nsi^^  northward,  HlSjip  southward,  H^'^'J^  heavenward, 
nr\';zn  to  the  house,  oiKovbs  tVhX)  to  the  mountain,  whence 
it  is  called  He  directive  or  He  local.  The  subsidiary 
vowel  of  Segholates  is  rejected  before  this  ending,  §  66, 
2  (2)  a,  but  other  vowels  are  mostly  unaffected,  T\T\i  from 
I^Si,  n^nk  from  -^-^  ST^^l^  from  "1^1^,  T^k^l^  1  Kin.  19:15 
from  the  construct  state  "li^'lla. 

a.  He  directive  is  appended  to  the  adverb  D^  there,  na'ly  thither,  and 
to  the  adjective  b'^Brj  profane  in  the  peculiar  phrase  •^^'^^n  ad  profanum 
i.  e.  he  it  far  from,  etc.  It  is  rarely  used  to  indicate  relations  of  time, 
!i53'^b"'  D"'C'^  1  Sam.  1 :  3  from  days  to  days  i.  e.  yearly,  nn-ijibllj  Ezek. 
21:  19  for  the  third  time,  txri'S  now  prop,  at  (this)  time.  For  the  sake  of 
greater  force  and  definiteness  a  preposition  denoting  direction  is  sometimes 
prefixed  to  words,  which  receive  this  ending,  so  that  the  latter  hecomes  in 
a  measure  superfluous,  ii^"rb  upwards,  fia^b  downwards,  nn^T53^  2  Chron. 
31:  14  to  the  east,  n^ixi^  Ps.  9:  18  to  Sheol,  comp.  aTro  fxaKpo'hsv. 

b.  The  ending  n  rarely  receives  the  accent  nrfiTp  Deut.  4:  41;  in 
6^X  nSTB  it  receives  in  some  editions  an  alternate  accent,  §  39.  4.  a,  in  others 
the  secondary  accent  Methegh,  §  35.  1.  In  fTin  Gen.  14:  10  and  njtiQ  a 
is  changed  to  e  before  this  ending,  §  63.  1,  in  •iS'h'n  Ezek.  25:  13,  tin'i  1  Sam. 
21:  2  the  vowel  of  the  ending  is  itself  changed  to  e. 

2.  Paragogic  tl^  is  sometimes  appended  to  nouns, 
particularly  in  poetry,  for  the  purpose  of  softening  the 
termination  without  affecting  the  sense,  §  61.  6. 

Numerals. 

§  224.  1.  The  Hebrew  numerals  (^Spl?*!!  T^ht)  are 
•)f  two  kinds,  cardinals  and  ordinals.  The  cardinals  from 
')'!ie  to  ten  are  as  follows,  viz.: 


224 

NUMERALS. 

Masculine, 

Absol. 

Constr. 

One 

T     •." 

in^ 

Two 

D-^jlT 

i.^ 

Three 

T^^'yji 

T\il}^ 

Four 

T    T  ;  — 

m^n^^^i 

Five 

J^'^^n 

Six 

nisu? 

f^^^ 

Seven 

T   :     • 

ni'Tu? 

Eight 

T        : 

ni'anD 

Nine 

T  :     • 

n?Tari 

Ten 

^Q'^Z 

nn-i? 

243 


Femik-inb. 

Absol. 

Constr. 

Tt^ 

T\m 

Diri^a 

v:^ 

T 

€yj3 

y^r^^ 

^k'^jk 

"    T 

^t?n 

tt 

IT'jj 

yn-i; 

yniD 

nib'^ 

nib^ 

yiari 

y"!?jn 

nto3> 

nici? 

a.  inx  is  for  ins,  §  63.  1.  o;  the  Seghol  returns  to  Pattahh  from  which 
it  has  arisen,  upon  the  shortening  of  tlie  following  Kamets  in  the  construct 
and  in  tlie  feminine,  nnx  for  n"inx,  §  54.  2,  but  in  pause  nnx;  'ijix  occurs 
in  the  absolute  in  Gen.  48:  22,  2  Sam.  17:  22,  Isa.  27:  12,  Ezek.  33:  30, 
Zech.  11:7,  and  once  "in  Ezek.  33 :  30.  The  plural  n'^'nr;X  is  also  in  use  in 
the  sense  of  one  or  the  same,  Gen.  11:  1,  joined  in  one  Ezek.  37:  17,  or 
some,  Gen.  27:  44,  29:  20.   Comp.  Span.  unos. 

C^nd  is  for  ff^riyia;  for  the  Daghesh  in  n  see  §  22.  b;  this  is  once 
omitted  after  Daghesh- forte,  '^r'i''3  Judg.  16:  28. 

A  dual  form  is  given  to  some  of  the  units  to  denote  repetition,  Q';Fiya"iX 
Jonrfold,  D"]ni'3'^  sevenfold. 

i^y^'^  occurs  once  with  a  paragogic  syllable,  nD"~"ia  Job  42:  13,  and 
once  with  a  suffix  in  the  form  SmntJ  2  Sam.  21 :  9  K'ri. 

2-  In  all  the  Semitic  languages  the  cardinals  from 
three  to  ten  are  in  form  of  the  singular  number,  and  have 
a  feminine  termination  when  joined  to  masculiue  nouns, 
but  omit  it  when  joined  to  feminine  nouns.  The  expla- 
nation of  this  curious  phenomenon  appears  to  be  that 
they  are  properly  collective  nouns  like  triad,  decad,  and 
as  such  of  the  feminine  gender.  With  masculine  nouns 
they  appear  in  their  primary  form ,  with  feminine  nouns, 
for  the  sake  of  distinction,  they  u  idergo  a  change  of 
termination. 

a.   An  analogous  anomaly  meets  us  in  this  same  class  of  words  in  Indo- 
le* 


244 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§  225,  226 


European  tongues.  The  Sanskrit  cardinals  from  five  to  ten,  though  they 
agree  in  case  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong,  are  in  form  of  the 
neuter  gender  and  in  the  nominative,  accusative  and  vocative  they  are  of 
the  singular  number.    In  Greek  and  Latin  they  are  not  declined. 

§  225.  The  cardinals  from  eleven  to  nineteen  are 
formed  by  combining  "lib:^  or  tTJW  modifications  of  the 
numeral  ten  with  the  several  units,  those  which  end  in 
n^  preserving  the  absolute  form  and  the  remainder  the 
construct.   Thus, 


MASCULINE. 

FEMININE. 

Eleven 

Twelve 

T  T       "    ; 

Thirteen 

nibs'  nizjb^a 

tiiw  ujbifl 

Fourteen 

nib::'  ni^sn^ 

T  T         T  T  ;  - 

Tf}W  s^in^ 

Fifteen 

T  T           T    •  -: 

nniry  tlhn 

Sixteen 

nib:?  riisuj 

T  T                    T      • 

rri^ir^  iruj 

Seventeen 

r  T            T    :     • 

tHw  yii^ 

Eighteen 

nib::'  nibir 

,  T  T         T        : 

nniry  niair 

Nineteen 

ni252?  rvt^ 

nniry  3?ibn 

c.  There  have  been  many  vain  conjectures  as  to  the  origin  of  ''Fi^?', 
the  alternate  of  InS  in  the  number  eleven.  E.  Jona  thought  it  to  be  an 
abbreviation  for  "liiy  *iwa  1?  next  to  twelve.  Comp,  Lat.  imdeviginti,  nine- 
teen. Kimchi  derived  it  from  7\^'2  to  think,  ten  being  reckoned  upon  the 
finger,  and  eleven  the  first  number  which  is  mentally  conceived  beyond.  It 
has  how  been  discovered  to  be  another  form  of  the  numeral  one,  of  which 
this  is  the  only  trace  in  Hebrew,  but  which  has  been  preserved  in  the  As- 
syrian istin  =  one. 

lilir  nttian  fifteen  occurs  Judg.  8:  10,  2  Sam.  19: 18,  and  "lOS  nibia  eigh- 
teen Judg.  20:  25. 

§  226.  1.  The  tens  are  lormed  by  adding  the  masculine 
plural  termination  to  the  units,  D^nir:^;  tiventy  being,  how- 
ever, derived  not  from  two  but  from  ten  *W$. 


Twenty 
Thirty 


Forty 
Fifty 


•   T  :  - 


227,  228 

NUMEEALS. 

2^ 

Sixty 

D^"ffil2? 

Eighty 

ni'^a-^ 

Seventy 

D^i?3T23 

Ninety 

D^:;w-ri 

245 


a.  These  numbers  have  no  distinct  form  for  the  feminine,  and  are  used 
indifferently  with  nouns  of  either  gender,  tnnc^'  Ex.  18:  21,  25,  Deut.  1:  15 
means  not  tiventy  but  tens. 

2.  The  units  are  added  to  the  teiis  by  means  of  the 
conjunction  1.  and\  the  order  of  the  precedence  is  not  in- 
variable, though  it  has  been  remarked  that  the  earhest 
writers  of  the  Old  Testament  commonly  place  the  units 
first,  e.  g.  D^Ui^l  n^nil?  two  and  sixtij  Gen.  5:  18,  while  the 
latest  writers  as  commonly  place  the  tens  first,  W'VZ^  D^^Uj 
sixty  and  two  Dan.  9:  25. 

§  227.  Numerals  of  a  higher  grade  are  T'\^'2  one  hun- 
dred, ^hk  one  thousand,  iTii-"',  iia"i  or  S^iin"^  ten  thousand. 
These  are  duplicated  by  affixing  the  dual  termination 
□*h5<7j  two  hundred,  WB^i^  tivo  thousand,  D'fii^"^  or  "FiiZJ 

•-T  7._._  /.-.  ... 

Mlll'1  twenty  thousand.  Higher  multiples  are  formed  by 
prefixing  the  appropriate  units  inij^e  ^^^  three  hundred, 
D^sbij?  r^irliir  three  thousand,  r\l5<n"]  UillJ  sixty  thousand,  '^^k 
D^Sb^i  one  million. 

•T   —. 

§  228.  1.  The  ordinals  are  formed  by  adding  "*.  to 
the  corresponding  cardinals,  the  same  vowel  being  like- 
wise inserted  in  several  instances  before  the  final  con- 
sonant; ■jiilJ!}<"}y?rs^  is  derived  from  iL'U^n  head. 


First 

■JlTTi^"! 

Sixth 

^iS'iz: 

Second 

i^ 

Seventh 

^'TZim 

Third 

^■ic'^bizj 

Eighth 

^Tiyi 

Fourth 

^r^i 

Ninth 

^TtT\ 

Fifth 

^Tijr;:n  or 

^^^n 

Tenth 

^V^? 

The   feminine   commonly 

ends 

in  n\, 

occasionally 

inn^  . 

a.  There  are  two  examples  of  the  orthography  "Vli'^N"!  Jojsh.  21 :  10, 
Job  15:  7,  and  one  of  'jSlla'^n  Job  8:8,  in  all  of  which  the  K'ri  restores  the 
customary  form. 


246  ETYMOLOGY.  §  229,  230 

2.  There  are  no  distinct  forms  for  ordinals  above  ten, 
the  cardinal  numbers  being  used  instead. 

3.  Fractional  parts  are  expressed  by  the  feminine 
ordinals,  n^ir^blT  one  third,  ^''T'^'^.  one  fourth,  etc.,  and  by 
the  following  additional  terms,  ^%r\  one  half,  y3"i  and  y^'n 
one  quarter,  l2J!an  one  fifth,  "ji^i^?  07ie  tenth. 

Prefixed  Particles. 

§  229.  The  remaining  parts  of  speech  are  indeclin- 
able, and  may  be  comprehended  under  the  general  name 
of  particles.   These  may  be  divided  into 

1.  Prefixed  particles,  which  are  only  found  in  com- 
bination with  a  following  word,  viz.  the  article.  He  inter- 
rogative, the  inseparable  prepositions,  and  Vav  con- 
junctive. 

2.  Those  particles,  which  are  written  as  separate 
words,  and  which  comprise  the  great  majority  of  adverbs, 
prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  interjections. 

a.  No  word  in  Hebrew  has  less  than  two  letters;  all  particles  of  one 
letter  are  consequently  prefixes.  There  is  one  example  of  two  prefixes  com- 
bined constituting  a  word  bn  Deut.  32:  6,  though  editions  vary;  three  are 
combined  in  bm  Eccles.  8:  17. 

The  Article. 

§  230.  1.  The  Definite  Article  (nrrn  ^r\)  consists 
of  n  with  Pattahh  followed  by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first 
letter  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  prefixed,  T]b"!2  a  king, 
Tjb^aln  the  king. 

a.  As  the  Arabic  article  ^1  is  in  certain  cases  followed  by  a  like 
doubling  of  the  initial  letter,  it  has  been  imagined  that  the  original  form 
of  the  Hebrew  article  was  hT\  and  that  the  Daghesh-forte  has  arisen  from 
the  assimilation  of  h  and  its  contraction  with  the  succeeding  letter.  Since, 
however,  there  is  no  trace  of  such  a  form,  it  seems  better  to  acquiesce  in 
the  old  opinion,  which  has  in  its  favour  the  analogy  of  other  languages, 
that  the  article  ri  is  related  to  the  personal  pronoun  X^in,  whose  principal 
consonant  it  retains,  and  that  the  following  Daghesh  is  conservative,  §  24.3. 


§  230  THE  AETICLE.  247 

The  Arabic  article  is  supposed  to  be  found  in  the  proper  name  ^'n'i^'bx 
Gen.  10:  26,  T!3"^i:5bx  hail,  the  equivalent  of  ^"^iia,  and  possibly  in  Dip^X 
Prov.  30:  31. 

b.  There  is,  properly  speaking,  no  indefinite  article  in  Hebrew,  although 
the  numeral  nnx  one  is  so  employed  in  a  few  instances,  as  inx  N'ij  a  pro- 
phet 1  Kin.  20:  13. 

2.  If  the  first  letter  of  the  word  have  ShVa,  Daghesh- 
forte  may  be  omitted  except  from  the  aspirates,  §  25, 

^iCii,  n^Tjn  but  nbnnn,  n:h3n. 

a.  Daghesh-fovte  though  usually  omitted  in  this  case  is  occasionally 
retained  e.  g.  J'i-dnn  2  Kin.  9:  11,  nii35>53n  Jer.  6:  2,  fi-'^'n^ssn  Ex.  8:  1  but 
?!]1S3n  ver.  2,  D'^SS"!!  Judg.  8:  15,  D"'i?3J''ti  1  Sam.  24:  3,  and  it  is  always 
written  in  inin^ri  the  Jew  and  D'^'i!in*ri  the  Jews. 

3.  Before  gutturals,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh- 
forte,  §  60.  4,  Pattahh  is  lengthened  to  Kamets;  the  short 
vowel  Pattahh  is,  however,  commonly  retained  before  H 
and  n,  and  sometimes  before  y,  the  syllable  being  con- 
verted into  an  intermediate,  §  18.  3,  instead  of  a  simple 

one,  br^ri,  Inn,  ti^i^n  Gen.  15: 11, 3>i2:nnbut  tiojnn,  mn, 

'  V  T  '  T     T  '  •  -     T  '  T  T   IT  I    V  "  '  "  ' 

t::?n  Jer.  12:  9. 

a.  The  article  very  rarely  has  Kamets  before  n,  "^nrt  Gen.  6:19,  d'^santi 
Isa.  17:  8;  in  a  very  few  instances  initial  K  quiesces  in  the  vowel  of  the 
article,  vlpSOXti  Num.  11:  4. 

4.  Before  n  with  Kamets  or  Hhateph-Kamets,  Pattahh 
is  changed  to  Seghol:  before  Si  or  ^  with  Kamets,  it  is 
likewise  changed  to  Seghol  if  it  stands  in  the  second  syl- 
lable before  the  accent,  and  consequently  receives  the 
secondary  accent  Methegh,  ^nn,  Dirjivl?  Q''^10v3>  ^"l^iivl' 

•  r  IV 

a.  This  change  very  rarely  occurs  before  X,  "I'l'^xri  Mic.  2:  7.  When 
n  is  followed  by  Kamets-Hhatuph,  Pattahh  remains  tih'D'n'n. 

b.  The  article  does  not  usually  affect  the  vowels  of  the  word  before 
which  it  stands;  in  "irt  mountain  and  fi?  people,  however,  Pattahh  is  changed 
to  Kamets  to  correspond  with  the  vowel  of  the  article  ^nrj,  Q^rj,  so  y^if. 
earth  but  y":i<n.  The  plurals  of  bnx  tent  and  ir"]p  hnlhiess  without  thp 
article  are  C'^nx  Gen.  25:27,  Q'^irn;^  Ex.  29:37,  but  with  the  article  tDi5f7>?3 
(for  d"'3nNn3)  Judg.  8:  11,  D'^iT'i^n  Ex.  26:  33,  §  210.  3.  b.  nxj?  pelican 
Isa.  34:  11,   Zeph.  2:  14,  is  pointed  nsisn  Lev.  11:  18,  Deut.   14:  17   upon 


248  ETYMOLOGY.  §  231 

receiving  the  article;  so  1Q  Num.  7:  15,  but  IBrt  Judg.  6:  26.  28.  The  em- 
phasis due  to  the  article  has  in  these  few  instances  an  effect  analogous  to 
that  of  the  pause  accent  in  prolonging  the  principal  vowel  of  the  word. 

5.  "V\Tien  preceded  by  the  inseparable  prepositions 
the  letter  "  of  the  article  is  mostly  rejected,  and  its  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition,  §  53.  3,  D^'-s^^  for  I3;'7JT2n3,  see 
§  232.  5. 

He  Inteeeogative. 

§  231.  1.  The  letter  fi  (n^iJIDn  i^ti)  may  also  be  pre- 
fixed to  words  to  indicate  an  interrogation;  it  is  then 
pointed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh,  Tj^Dfl  shall  we  go?  iXTT^b'Ti 
is  he  not? 

2.  Before  a  vowelless  letter  this  becomes  Pattahh, 
§  61.  1,  niiTilj  Gen.  34:  31,  =?jM^n  Job  18:  4,  ^nian  Jer. 
8:  22,         '    ' 

a.  The  new  syllable  thus  formed  is  an  intermediate  one,  §  22,  and  the 
succeeding  Sh'va  remains  vocal,  as  is  shown  by  the  absence  of  Daghesh- 
lene  in  such  forms  as  chv^'n  Gen.  29 :  5.  In  order  to  render  this  still  more 
evident  recourse  is  frequently  had  to  Daghesh-forte  separative,  §  24.  5,  '3^ln 
Gen.  17:  17,  JiriD:;^2n  18:  21,  Methegh,  §  45.  2,  hiJ-Qti  Judg.  9:  2,  n|OTn 
Job  38:  35,  or  compound  Sh'va,  §  16.  3.  b,  ^I3';?fl  Gen.  27:  38. 

b.  He  interrogative  has  Pattahh  and  Daghesh-forte  in  one  instance  be- 
fore a  letter  with  a  vowel  of  its  own,  a^'l*^^  Lev.  10:  19. 

3.  Before  gutturals  it  likewise  usually  becomes  Pat- 
tahh, r\),^T}  Ex.  2:  7,  nizj^n  2  Kin.  6:  22,  Tb"^n!l  Jer.  2:  11, 
n?n  Hag.  1:  4,  ysnn  Job  22:  3. 

a.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  He  interrogative  with  Kamets  before  X, 
UJ-^kn  Num.  16:  22,  Neh,  6:  11,  CinNn  Judg.  6:  31,  "'n'JSXr!  12:  5,  nwn  Jer. 
8:  19  (in  some  editions)  pointed  as  if  before  ''J"lX:  so  too  most  probably 
tilijn  Deut.  20:  19. 

4.  Before  gutturals  with  Kamets  it  is  changed  to 
Seghol,  nmn  Ezek.  28:  9,  nn":nn  Joel  1:  2,  UbrTi  Eccles. 
2:  19;  see  also  Num.  11:  12,'l3:  18,  2  Sam.  19:'43,  Job 
13:  25,  21:  4. 

a.  This  rule  does  not  apply  to  Resh,  nenn  Num.  13:  18,  Tr^i^"}^  1  Kin. 
20:  13. 


§  232  INSEPAEABLE  PEEPOSITIONS.  249 


Insepaeable  Peepositions. 

§  232.  1.  The  prepositions  n  in,  5  according  to,  b  to, 
are  regularly  prefixed  with  ShVa,  n^TDi^^^  in  the  beginning, 
bis  according  to  cell,  UtT)2i^b  to  Abraham. 

2.  Before  vowelless  letters  this  ShVa  is  changed  to 
Hhirik,  rj6^n  for  ?^k":3,  bir^Jb  for  bib'rb,  ^ni3  for  Til3,  in 
which  Yodh  quiesces  r!'i^ri"'Zl,  "ijb^B. 

3.  Before  gutturals  with  compound  ShVa  it  is  chan- 
ged to  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  ^^IStS,  bii^b,  ^"1"!^. 

a.  Occasionally  b  takes  Pattahh  or  Seghol  before  an  infinitive,  whose  first 
letter  is  a  guttural  with  simple  Sh'va,  "iBxb  Ps.  105:  22,  3t:nb  Deut.  19:  5. 
Initial  X  quiesces  in  the  following  words  after  the  inseparable  prepositions, 
§  57.  2.  (2)  a,  "pTX  master  when  connected  with  singular  suffixes,  "^:"IX  Lord, 
C-Tibn  God,  and  also  in  the  inf.  const,  "ijix  to  say  after  b,  ""j^xa,  "i''j^X3, 
n"inxb,  "^i^xb,  n-ribxa  for  Q^nbxa  the  Seghol  lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the 
simple  syllable,  'inbsb  but  W^xb,  "liixb  but  "i^N3,  ^^XS.  Before  the  divine 
name  tiin^  the  inseparable  prepositions  are  pointed  as  they  would  be  be- 
fore '^iHx  or  D"'^i31S; ,  whose  vowels  it  receives,  §  47,  f^jJT'b  Gen.  4 :  3,  t\'yrr^ 
Ps.  68^:  21. 

6.  In  a  very  few  instances  5<  with  Pattahh  and  "^  with  Hhirik  give  up 
their  vowel  to  the  preposition  and  become  quiesceut,  T'SX?  Isa.  10:  13  for 
-|iinX3,  '("i^nis  Eccles.  2:  13  for  linniS,  §  57.  2.  (3). 

4.  Before  monosyllables  and  before  dissyllables,  ac- 
cented upon  the  penult,  these  prepositions  frequently  re- 
ceive a  pretonic  Kamets,  §  64.  2,  nbks,  ini<T3,  iTSib. 

a.  This  regularly  occurs  with  the  Kal  construct  infinitive  of  "JD,  '^E, 
V" ,  I'V  and  •^""  verbs  when  preceded  by  b,  e.  g.  ririb,  T-bh,  ^•'inb,  anb,  a^nb; 
also  with  different  forms  of  the  demonstrative  fit  and  with  personal  suf- 
fixes; and  with  monosyllabic  or  Segholate  nouns  when  accompanied  by 
disjunctive  and  especially  pause  accents.  Before  the  pronoun  ti^  what  the^' 
are  commonly  pointed  !i^a,  iTsa,  T\i^  or  followed  by  a  guttural,  <T2b;  npb 
occurs  three  times,  all  in  the  same  verse  1  Sam.  1 :  8. 

5.  Before  the  article  its  H  is  rejected  and  the  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition,  ii'^5  for  "li'^HS,  y^l^^  ^^^  '\^^f:i 

n^nnn  for  D^nnnn . 

•    T  IV  "   T  IV    ; 

a.  ri  remains  eight  times  in  Q'i'»TO  e.  g.  Gen.  39:  11;  also  in  such  indi- 
vidual instances  as  d";t;"i"na  Ps.  36:  6,  ~~^na  Neh.  9:  19,  0^:1;^  Eccles.  8:3. 
n'ii'inna  Ezek.  40:  25,  D->:a?-ii3nb  l  Sam.'l3:'21,   n^-nnb  Neh.  12:  38,  tDvnb 


250  ETYMOLOGY.  §  233,  234 

2  Chron.  10:  7,  1^nSn>  25:  10,  natan^  29:  27,  t'^'^^jn^  Ezek.  47:  22,  tlr!> 
Dan.  8:  16.  The  initial  n  of  the  Hiphil  and  Niphal  infinitives  is  occasionally 
rejected  in  like  manner,  ir^iuJ^  Am.  8:  4  for  nizunl:,  "iBirsa  Prov.  24:  17 

for  6'J3n3. 

§  233.  The  preposition  ^12  from,  though  used  in  its 
separate  form,  may  also  be  abbreviated  to  a  prefix  by  the 
assimilation  and  contraction  of  its  final  Nun  with  the 
initial  letter  of  the  following  word,  which  accordingly 
receives  Daghesh-forte,  Tj'iTJ  for  'Tj'l^.  "j^.  Before  H  Hhirik 
is  commonly  retained  in  an  intermediate  syllable,  but  be- 
fore other  gutturals  it  is  for  the  most  part  lengthened  to 
Tsere,  ^"^hq  for  yiin  "j^,  but  ^tm,  ^im  1  Sam.  12:  23; 

piS/j,  uiyn^j,  Di?'^,  but  T\'\-'n'2,  tS'^xi. 

I   V  V   " '      i        T  I" '        T  •' '  :    ■ '      I       :  r 

a.  If  the  first  letter  of  the  word  "have  Sh'va,  Daghesh-forte  may  be 
omitted.  This  is  occasionally  the  case  even  when  it  is  an  aspirate  "T^k^^ 
Judg.  8:  2,  dnitJasri  Ezek.  32:  30.  Daghesh-forte  is  twice  retained  in  an 
initial  vowelless  Yodh,  ^l^'^'?'^^  2  Chron.  20:  11,  ii^'=;a  Dan.  12:  2,  but  com- 
monly it  is  dropped  and  the  Jodh  quiesces  QiiSiTS,  '>'~pi2,  ■pi""ti ,  "^''a.  ''\0 
is  sometimes  poetically  lengthened  to  "ija,  and  once  has  the  form  of  a  con- 
struct plural,  13a  Isa.  30:  11. 

§  234.  These  prepositions  are  combined  with  the  pro- 
nominal suffixes  in  the  following  manner: 

SiNGULAB. 

2f.       -qs  i[h  — 

3  m.       ia  ib  sinibs 

3f.      t^  nb  nibs 


le. 

2  m 


Plubal. 

siiia  ^5b  ^2ii33 

2f.       ]b:^  "jib     ''      '  — 

3  m.       on,  Dn^  ibb,  Dgb  Dn3,  DTO3 
3/:      1^3,  -jha     '    ihb    "'      "  — 

a.  The  syllable  i^  inserted  between  S  and  the  suffixes,  and  which  is  it 


"3^,      n^, 

^?^^ 

W^ 

r^)2^2 

^53^ 

iinsb,  iinsia, 

^2b;j 

.13^''? 

sisis':? 

C^"-3 

ll'^ 

tin?^, 

DriTj 

§235  VAV  CONJUNCTIVE.  251 

poetry  sometimes  added  to  3,  3  and  b  without  suffixes  to  convert  them 
into  independent  words,  "1^3,  i^aS,  i^^,  is  commonly  thought  to  he  related 
in  its  origin  to  the  pronoun  n^  what,  so  that  "^51733  would  in  strictness  de- 
note like  ivhat  I  am,  i.  e.  like  me.  The  preposition  ',13,  with  the  exception 
of  some  poetical  forms,  reduplicates  itself  before  the  light  suffixes,  "'Sa^  = 
"2^;ri .  Comp.  a  similar  reduplication  of  a  short  word,  "la^a  or  "^a  construct 
of  Ca  water. 

Yav  Conjunctive. 

§  235.  The  conjunction  and  is  expressed  by  1  pre- 
fixed with  Sh'va,  tjllihl ,  Y^Jjni .  Before  one  of  the  labials 
'2 J  '2,  3,  §  57.  2  (1),  or  before  a  vowelless  letter  Vav 
quiesces  in  Shurek,  ^^n^,  !]bia^  D^is^,  b^'inrt^.  Before  a 
vowelless  Yodh  it  receives  Hhirik,  in  which  the  Yodh 
quiesces,  DPpD^^,  %'l^'l.  Before  a  guttural  with  compound 
Sh'va  it  receives  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  ^Dljf;'!, 
T^T3';j,  '^br'jV  Before  a  monosyllable  or  a  dissyllable  ac- 
cented on  the  penult  it  frequently  receives  a  pretonic 
Kamets,  particularly  if  it  be  the  second  of  two  closely 
connected  words,  ^nil  T]^  Gren.  1:  2,  yil  nit:  2:  9,  njijl 
nb^y^  DVl  q^nj  y:^"]  nh)  8:  22.  See  also"l2:  19,  41:  llj 
Num.  16:  16,  beut.  32:  7,  Job  4:  16,  Ps.  55:  18,  63:  6, 
Eccles.  4:  8;  and  Pro  v.  24:  21,  25:  3,  Isa.  65:  17,  where 
a  word  is  interposed. 

a.  After  Vav  with  Shurek,  compound  Sh'va  is  sometimes  substituted 
for  simple  Sh'va  in  order  to  indicate  more  distinctly  its  vocal  character, 
an^l  Gen.  2:  12,  "lippnnn  Ezek.  26:  21,  !TjrD!i  1  Kin.  13:  7,  "^pisj^n  Jer.  22:  20. 

b.  Vav  receives  Hhirik  before  He  or  Hheth  followed  by  Yodh  in  th«» 
foi-ms  Dni-^n;!,  ^^ni,  dni-in;;,  si^ni  2  plur.  preterite  and  imperative  of  the 
verbs  !Tjn  to  be  and  iT^n  to  live;  before  the  2  masc.  sing,  imperative  of  the 
same  verbs  it  has  Seghol,  frini,  n^ni  for  TV;',^:}!}.,  i't^.r}^. 

c.  The  short  vowel  appropriate  to  the  guttural  is  taken  in  a  very  few 
instances,  even  when  the  latter  has  simple  Sh'va,  D^^i'l  Gen.  32:  16,  "liksi 
Job  4:2.  X  quiesces  after  Vav  conjunctive  as  after  the  inseparable  prepo- 
sitions, §  232.  3.  a,  in  lins  master  when  connected  with  singular  suffixes, 
•'inx  Lord  and  Ci'^ri^X  God,  "linNI,  ''pN^,  ''tf'ii).,  ^'^'^tf^i^l.  the  Seghol  being 
lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple  syllable.  Hence  also  niiril  when  mni 
has  the  vowels  of  "^yiVi.  A  very  few  instances  occur  in  which  N  with  Pat- 
tahh  and  "^  with  Hhirik  give  up  their  vowel  to  Vav  conjunctive  and  become 
:iuiescent,  'ifex.l  Zech.  11:  5  for  "iBSNI,  n3!?"'J  Jer.  25:  36  for  n^^;;"!. 


252  ETYMOLOGY.  §  236 

d.  The  rule  for  pvetonic  Kamets  is  sometimes  extended  to  the  last  of 
three  connected  words,  •^b^  nbbl.  I'iia  Lev.  7:  23,  Qni  nni.  bina  Deut.  2:  10. 
21,  and  even  the  last  two  i~iil  "^'ri  ^rih'i  Ezek.  27:  17;  and  to  Vav  con- 
versive  of  the  Preterite  at  or  near  the  end  of  a  clause  ni'i  Gen.  44:  9.  22.  31, 
n^ni  Ex.  1:  16,  Lev.  18:  5,  2  Kin.  7:  4,  Prov.  24:  16,  Isa.  6:  10.  Other  cases 
are  rare  and  exceptional  e.  g.  V^^XI  Isa.  26:  19,  the  first  vowel  of  V'nk  being 
as  usual  assimilated  to  a  preceding  Kamets,  §  63.  2.  b. 


Separate  Particles. 

ADVERBS. 

§  236.  1.  A  few  adverbs  of  negation,  place  and  time, 
are  commonly  classed  as  primitive,  although  they  are 
probably  related  to  pronominal  roots,  as  bt§  and  )^  not, 
DU3  there,  Ti<  then. 

a.  It  is  natural  to  suspect  that  the  pronominal  root  b,  which  gave  rise 
to  the  near  demonstrative  bx ,  ti^x  these  and  to  the  prepositions  indicative 
of  nearness  or  approach,  b  to,  bx  ic7ito,  and  which  has  a  remote  demonstra- 
tive force  in  Sisbn  ponder,  beyond,  may  also  be  the  basis  of  N'b  and  bs  the 
idea  of  remoteness  taken  absolutely  forming  a  negation.  The  same  idea,  in 
a  less  absolute  sense,  may  be  traced  in  the  conditional  conjunction  lb  if. 
The  pronoun  flT ,  of  which  probably  ^  is  originally  only  a  modification 
(comp.  the  relative  use  of  S|T,  §  73.  1),  is  plainly  connected  with  T!!<  at  that 
time  and  D^  in  that  place. 

2.  Derivative  adverbs  are  formed 

(1.)  By  affixing  the  terminations  D^  or  D",  §  201.  e, 

DD53N1  and  ^I'C^  truly  from  "Ci^  truth,  D|n  gratuitously  from 
"iH  grace,  D'bi''  by  day  from  Di"'  day,  Dib"]  in  vain  from  p'^'] 
emjjty,  DbitiB  suddenly  from  ^t^b  moment,  DibbiT  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday  from  irbia  three. 

(2.)  By  abbreviation,  as  Tji^  surely,  only  from  "DIS;. 

(3.)  By  composition,  as  Ti^^2  why?  from  >*^T  TV2  quid 
edoctus,  Tib^'hb'Q  from  above  from  "^2,  b  and  rib^h. 

3.  Besides  those  adverbs,  which  are  such  originally 
and  properly,  other  parts  of  speech  are  sometimes  used 
as  adverbs.    Thus 

(1.)  Nouns,  1^'2  mightily,  exceedingly  prop,  might,  H^iD 
around  prop,  circuit,  Tiy  again  prop,  repetition,  D3^5  no 


§  237  SEPAEATE  PAETICLES.  25o 

more  prop,  cessation',  with  a  preposition,  '^^i'-2;n  exceedingly, 
ihb  aj^ar^  prop,  to  separation,  or  a  suffix  1"n~r  together  prop, 
zw  i^s  union.  Compare  the  adverbial  accusative  and  ad- 
verbial phrases  of  Greek  and  other  languages. 

(2.)  Absolute  infinitives,  which  are  really  verbal  nouns, 
ib^Sl  tvell  prop,  recte  faciendo,  Mlh'nn  much,  '^h'2  quickly. 

(3.)  Adjectives,  particularly  in  the  feminine,  which  is 
used  as  a  neuter,  nit:  well,  ^)p2  fully,  ni'iT!^"]  at  first,  m^iu? 
the  second  time,  Hi*^  and  Tdr\  much,  T\'^~\^TT  in  Jeivish  i.  e. 
Hebrew,  T^'^'Q'y^.  in  Aramceic,  nisbSD  tvonderfully. 

(4.)  Pronouns,  HT  here,  now  prop,  this  place,  this  time, 
'%^'^h  hither  prop,  to  these  places,  with  a  preposition  nb  ?J/ms 
prop,  according  to  it,  15  so  perhaps  for  "jflS  according  to 
these  things,  though  others  explain  it  as  an  adverbial  of 
the  participle  "jS  right,  true,  HB  here  probably  for  i^  'in 
this  (place). 

§  237.  A  few  adverbs  are  capable  of  receiving  pro- 
nominal suffixes,  as  "jri  or  f^T)  behold,  ni3'"  yet,  "X  where, 
to  which  may  be  added  1';i<  there  is  not  prop,  non  existence 
and  125^  there  is  prop,  existence.  As  the  idea  of  action  or 
of  existence  is  suggested  by  them,  they  take  the  verbal 
suffixes,  frequently  with  D  epenthetic.    Thus 

1.  nsn.  First  person  ^iDH,  ^32r;  and  ^3271;  ^iDH,  ^-sn  and 
^DSri.  Second  person  masc.  TjSH  once  nDBH;  DiiH,  fern.  tjir]. 
Third  person  i^H  and  ^11311;  Q2n. 

2.  li:'.  First  person  ""jii^"  and  ^113?;  once  with  j^Zwr. 
^riiy  Lam.  4:  17  K'ri.  Second  person  masc.  tj^i:?  fem.  Ij'ii:'. 
Third  person  masc.  ^Bnis'',  Dli^  fem.  HSliS'. 

3.  ^i?,  Second  person  ty^^)^.    Third  person  i^^,U^^^. 

4:.  'fk.  First  person  ^liT^_.  Second  person  vndi^Q.  ^T)^^, 
DbD';^?,  fem.  T]r^.   Third  'person  masc.  ^2ri5,  Dr^  and  i^T« 

fem.  nsrjs?. 

5.  125,%  Second  person  'T^'^ii''.,  tDDTT';  and  Dil23^  Third  per- 
son iDT2:\ 


254  ETYMOLOGY.  ^      §  238,  239 


Peepositions. 

§  238.  1.  The  simple  prepositions  in  most  common 
use,  besides  the  inseparable  prefixes,  §  232,  are  chiefly 
"^hi^  behind,  after  "bb^  to,  unto,  b'^k  beside,  T\^  with,  "p4 
between,  ^nblli  tvithouf,  i?^  through,  nb^T  except,  '^T  on  ac- 
count of,  bil2  or  b^7j  over  against,  IJD  in  presence  of,  nlpD  in 
front  of,  before,  "7?  unto,  b^  upon,  D^  with,  XT\t\  under. 
Most  of  these  appear  to  have  been  originally  nomis;  and 
some  of  them  are  still  used  both  as  nouns  and  as  prepo- 
sitions. 

2.  Other  prepositions  are  compound,  and  consist  of 

(1.)  Two  prepositions,  as  "'^T\;^'i2  from  after,  Tk'2  and 
D3J52  from  with,  b'J'Q  from  upon,  tT\V02  from  under,  "l/jb 
from,  TOb  and  5nSDb  before,  b^i3"b&5  toward. 

(2.)  A  preposition  and  a  noun  lib  and  "inb^a  besides 
from  n;n  separation,  ^isb  before  and  'ilB13,  "isb"^  /rom  be- 
fore from  D''iB/(2ce,  bb:a  and  '"i^iS'ln/or  ^/«e  s«A:e  o/,  TO.  by 
prop.  &?/  ^/^e  hand  of,  ^!:23^"blJ5  beyond,  b  "'Iii'/^  /row  beyond, 
T\Wb  in  conjunction  with,  "j^ib  and  Hpi^'b?  on  account  of, 
^'SS,  *5b  and  "D'b:?  according  to  prop,  a^  if/^e  mouth  of. 

(3.)  A  preposition  and  an  infinitive,  ri^^^pb  toward 
p*rop.  ^0  meeif. 

(4.)  A  preposition  and  an  adverb,  ""lybin  and  '^'l^blD'J 
without  from  b^  not  1?  ^^?^i(o,  b  nujblr;i2  beyond,  ^bj^  witho^it. 

§  239.  The  prepositions  take  suffixes  in  the  same 
manner  as  singular  nouns,  e.  g.  ^b^i<  beside  me,  "'pb^T,  ^iro, 
"is?,  except  ^ns  «/ifer,  "biJ^  to,  "i?  mw^o,  b?  ?y2J6»«  and  riTjFl 
under,  which  before  suffixes  assume  the  form  of  nouns  in 
the  masculine  plural,  e.  g.  ""ins,  ?|"'^;nN,  V'Sniji;  ""in  between 
adopts  sometimes  a  singular,  sometimes  a  masculine  plu- 
ral, and  sometimes  a  feminine  plural  form,  e.  g.  "'D^S,  ir^ 

and  rrn,  ^D^rn  and  ^rhiD''^. 


§  240,  241  CONJUNCTIONS.  255 

a.  The  plural  form  '''^^^^t  occurs  without  suffixes  more  frequently  than 
'1'!'*?;  "'!?'?* I  "^1?)  "^^5  also  occur  in  poetry;  ""^ISS  from  the  absolute  '^523,  which 
appears  only  in  this  single  form,  is  used  as  an  alternate  of  "^as  from  Dl? 
with  and  the  1  pers.  sing,  suffix. 

h.  nnn  in  a  very  few  instances  takes  a  verbal  suffix,  "^jPtiFi  2  Sam.  22: 
37,  40,  48,  and  once  has  Nun  Epenthetic  before  the  suffix  SiSnnn  Gen.  2:  21 ; 
with  the  3  masc.  plur.  suffix  it  is  dtnnn  oftener  than  Dl'i'^nnri. 

§  240.  The  preposition  n^5  with  is  to  be  distinguished 
from  ^l^^  the  sign  of  the  definite  object,  which  is  prefixed 
to  a  pronoun  or  definite  noun,  to  indicate  that  it  is  the 
object  of  an  active  verb.  With  pronominal  suffixes  the 
n  of  the  preposition  is  doubled  and  its  vowel  shortened 
to  Hhirik,  thus  "ns,  ^Pi?,  t^nsi  (once  ?;n!S;  Isa.  54:  10), 
DiriN;;  the  sign  of  the  accusative  becomes  riii<  before 
suffixes  or  before  grave  suffixes  commonly  Di^,  thus  ""ni^, 
^T\^,  DDlnN  rarely  ^bTf\%  tip  (rarely  Uhxm)  and  ttX)\^^. 

a.  Sometimes,  particularly  in  the  books  of  Kings,  Jeremiah,  and  Eze- 
kiel,  the  preposition  takes  the  form  ""hix,  T^rnx, 

Conjunctions. 

§  241.  1.  In  addition  to  the  prefixed  copulative  1, 
§  235,  the  following  are  the  simple  conjunctions  inmost 
common  use,  ii^  or,  r|i5<  also,  Di?  and  ^b  if,  "iilJX  and  ''S  that, 
because,  "jS  lest. 

2.  Compound  conjunctions  are  formed  by  combining 

(1.)  Two  conjunctions  Di^  ""S  hut,  ^3  Tj^l  how  much  more 
prop,  also  that. 

(2.)  The  conjunction  "'S  or  ^'feiJ;  with  a  preposition,  as 
n1rs3  as,  nt'5<  "(?i2b  in  order  that,  n-dJN;  "|?!  and  nib'J^  n;:?  he- 
cause,  "3  15  until,  ■'3  nnfn  hecause. 

(3.)  An  adverb  with  a  preposition  or  conjunction, 
D'l^bn  hefore,  "pb  or  "Jiifb?  therefore^  "b^  unless  from  ^b  if 
^  not. 


256  ETYBIOLOGY.  §  242 

Inteejections. 

§  242.  The  Hebrew  interjections,  like  those  of  other 
languages,  are  of  two  sorts,  viz. : 

1.  Natural  sounds  expressive  of  various  emotions,  as 

ns,  nn,  nrii^  ah!  oh!  r\kr\  aha!  ^in  ho!  woe!  ^ix,  n^ix, 

T  '  T  '  T   -;  TV  '  T  ' 

^iilS!.,  ^5$  woe!  ^bb^  alas!  DH  hush! 

2.  "Words  originally  belonging  to  other  parts  of  speech, 
which  by  frequent  use  were  converted  into  interjections, 
n'D.'ri  come!  prop,  give,  Tob  come!  prop,  go,  nsn  behold! 
prop,  a  demonstrative  adverb,  nybn  far  be  it!  ^^  pray: 
from  ■'ij::!  entreaty,  &5D  now!  I jpray  thee! 


I.  Pabadigm.  Personal  Pbonouns,  §  71. 

SINGULAR. 

PliUBAIj 

1.     I                  'i3«5     i^ 

fThou  m.  nns,   r)« 
^*  I  Thou/     ns,  ^nj!< 
jHe           «^n 

We        l3ri?!S|,  iiDni,  Jiii^ 
Ye      m.  Dni< 
Ye     /.    ]m,  HDm 
They  m.     On,  n^h 
They/       in,n3ll 

Suffixes,  §§  72,  101,  219. 


With  Dual  and 
Simple        With  union  Vowels  of  Verbs    With  Sing.  Nouns       piur.  Nouns 


1  ^-  "?,\    '5. 

'?. 

'?.,  C?-) 

• 

•1 

• 

pi  il3            ^D^ 

^3.. 

13, 

«.  («,) 

a\ 

2  m.  ^(n5)(!]J 

(^J 

3...  (:i?v) 

'5.(1.) 

T. 

pl.UD 

=5. 

0^. 

2/      ^C5)       ^ 

^>^. 

• 

^ 

^:- 

i'M5 

V-. 

F- 

3  tn.iin       ^n  ,  i 

^n 

^3..  0^;...) 

i  (n',  w 

.)  i\(!irr.,''ni) 

1,/.  D(i7j)    D^,D 

0.. 

D 

T 

nn\  (ia\) 

3/.  n        n^ 

n 

TV 

0\ 

^;.  T(n5)    1, 

1.. 

\ 

F- 

Demonstrative,  §  73. 

Masc.  Fern.  Common. 

Smo.   njOT)    T^^l  (^i.ni)  this.  vi^wi.  b^,r\h^.  these. 


Eelative,  §  74. 
■nr«  w7iO  or  ?^;/^^c/^;  abbreviated  form  "©  (*i?,  »,  ^') 


Interrogative  and  Indefinite,  §  75. 
^12  who?  or  whoever.        m  (H^,  ni2)  «^/ia^.^  or  whatever. 


II.  Paeadigm  op 

KA.L.                NIPHAL.                PIEL. 

PUAIi. 

PUET. 

3  m. 

bb]? 

^^p? 

bt?p 

btop 

(Perf.) 

3/. 

5^^^9B 

{^^^P? 

nbtsp 

^^9P 

2  m. 

i^'p^i? 

nb-jpD 

T  :    -';  • 

rbtpp 

nbtDi; 

2/. 

nbbij 

f]>^P? 

ribiDp 

ribtop 

1  C. 

^ri^^P 

'r^T^P? 

^nbtop 

^f}t^P 

Plur. 

3  C. 

^^'^;P5 

iibtop 

^btap 

2  m. 

^i^^PP 

ti^r^p? 

DnbtDp 

DnbtDp 

2/. 

l^^^i? 

1^f^p5 

l^^^p 

l^^^l? 

1  c. 

^sbpi? 

^2^^P? 

^^btop 

^2t^p 

Infin. 

dbsol. 

bibjp 

btipn 

btDp 

blip 

constr. 

btip 

bt?i>n 

^^P 

(^toj:) 

FUT. 

3  m. 

^^1?' 

^Pp: 

btap-: 

btop'; 

(Impf.) 

3/. 

b^i^n 

bippn 

-^ppi 

biopn 

2  m. 

bibpn 

bi:pn 

-tpprn 

>fepri 

2/. 

^^^pi^ 

^bnpn 

•    ;  liT   • 

^^tapn 

^btapn 

1  c. 

^^1?!^ 

^^PS 

bt:py; 

b^ps; 

Plur. 

3  m. 

^^t2p: 

^^^P." 

iibtop-; 

^^^P' 

3/. 

nabtipn 

♦^5r^pr? 

n^btopn 

T  :  ■•'-   : 

»^?Tfepri 

2  w. 

iibtppn 

sibcpn 

:  (it   • 

^biapn 

^btopn 

2/. 

nDbbj^n 

n^bbpn 

T  :    ••  It     • 

riDbiopn 

T  :  ■■>-    : 

nrb^ppi 

1  c. 

-^p? 

^^p? 

^T^P? 

bfepp 

Imper. 

2  m. 

btijp 

^t?pn 

^^P 

2/. 

^bt)p 

^bt:pn 

•    :  It  • 

^^.^P- 

Plur. 

2  m. 

^btpp 

^^tipn 

^btop 

wanting 

2/ 

ri:btbi^ 

nsbbpn 

t:   •■It    • 

•^5^^P 

Part. 

act 

^^P 

b^P'9 

pass. 

^•'^P 

^^P? 

bbpi2 

PEEFECT  VeEBS,  §  81 

• 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

KAL  (mid.  e). 

KAL  (micZ.  o). 

b"ppn 

bDpn 

b^prr; 

••    T 

T 

^b-ppn 

Hbt:;:n 

•^bifpnrj 

T     ;   iT 

nb^'i 

T  ;    IT 

r^bDpn 

nbtbpn 

T  :   -  ':    T 

nbiapnn 

mi3 

T    ;  -  T 

nbbd 

T  :       T 

ribppn 

S^bt:pn 

nb^pnn 

;    ;  -  T 

nb'io: 

^pbDpn 

^nbbpn 

•  :   -':    T 

^nbibpnn 

^n-in3 

^nbb'd 

^b^t?pn 

!ibt2pn 

:  ':    T 

^bippnn 

:  IT 

^^iVr 

t33nbt:pn 

Dnbt^pn 

•.■  :    -  ' :    T 

Dnbtipnn 

^^1^^ 

(Drib^'i) 

■jribt^pn 

■,inbppn 

■jrjb-^pnn 

1^1^? 

(if)^;^) 

^=bbpn 

^3bt:pri 

^ib-jpnn 

^2nd3 

;  -  T 

^:biiT 

;        T 

bt?pn 

bbpn 

(biapnn) 

Tb3 

T 

biDTZJ 

T 

b-i:pn 

bi:pn 

btapnn 

in3 

b5"jj 

b"t2p: 

^^p: 

b^pr^": 

"i^?: 

b?"^: 

b'ppn 

bDpn 

bti?pnn 

izsn 

bitr\ 

b^Pi^n 

bDpn 

b^pnn 

"'^T^ 

b^'^n 

'b^^pn 

^bt:pn 

^btcpnn 

^l^?r:i 

^b^'dn 

b-pp5< 

"^m 

btQP^^? 

"I^pi? 

bsuiij 

^b^i:p: 

^bt:p^ 

:  ':  T 

^bppn*: 

^in^: 

^bs'i^ 

n^bbpn 

riDbtipn 

T  :    -  •;     T 

riDbtapnn 

nriirn 

T   ;  ~  ;     • 

nrbbirri 

^b^bpri 

^bppn 

^btppnn 

^issri 

^bsirn 

njbtspn 

nabtipn 

T  :   -*:    T 

n;btopnn 

Hj^nrn 

riDbOT 

b^bp= 

bt^pi 

-'IT 

bt?pnD 

^^t'? 

"biir? 

bbpn 

bispnn 

*i55 

^b^t?pn 

"bifpnn 

"1^3 

^b-ppn 

wanting 

iibtspnn 

iiins 

n?bt:pn 

Msbiopnri 

^5^23 

b^bpi? 

^^I?^ 

bii?pn23 

in.  Paradigm  of  the  Perfect 


SiNGULAE. 

1  com.        2  masc.        2  fern.        3  masc.  8  fern. 


Kal  Prkteeite  or  Perfect. 
Sing.  3  masc.        ^D^lD]^         ^bx^^         ^)x^'^        ^•^^'^Pl  Pl^tSp 

8 /em.     ^Dri^tijp    'fjt^^tii:    t;n^t:jp   ^r;n5t:p|    nn^i^p 


2  masc.     ^3fnb^):|     ^^j^^^pl 

8/ew.    ^rnbt:]!)      ^n^ribt:p|  r!'P?bt:p 

rnbt^pj 

1  com.  —    'fj'i^b^p  tj^nbpp    rnbpp  n^nljpi^ 

plur.  3  cow.  ^5^bt2)p     tj^btiip  tj^b^p    iin^bt:p  r^^^^p 

2»wase.  ^s^nbpp      iin^ribp):  rj^^t:p 

1  com.      wibtsn  wibttn  ^in^ibtsp  n^il3t:p 


iNFmrnvB.  ^bt:p|    ^bt^j^      !]btpp       ibpp        nbpp 

^Dbt:pj 


Future  or  Imperfect. 


Sing.   3  wosc.      ^DbtifM     '^jbt^p':  |     tjbt^P^    ^^^^^Pp:}        nbtip-; 

^sbtpi;):  1  ;|bt:p^.  j  ^i^btpp:  j    nsbt:p^ 

plub.  3  masc.  ''i^btpp^    ^'^^^]^1    tj^bpj:^  ^n^bpp";     f^^btpp^ 


Imperative. 
Smo.   2  wasc.       ^Sbtpp        ^?lbpp  nbpp 


PiEL  Preterite  or  Perfect. 
Sing.  3  wosc.       ''DbtDp        Tjb^p  ^btOp  ibtOp  ftbtpp 


HiPHiL  Preterite  or  Perfect. 

smG.  3  masc.  ^DVapn  ^^^t:pn    t|b^t)|:n   ib^tapn     nb^taipn 


Verbs  with 

Suffixes, 

§  101. 

Plural. 

1  com. 

2  masc. 

2  fern. 

3  wase. 

3 /em. 

^5?^1? 

Qibttp 

1^>^1? 

t^^^l? 

I^^l? 

^Dnbtjp 

QDnbDp 

V  ;  -  it': 

1^.^^^1? 

Dnbtip 

]^\^i? 

^Dnbtajp 

Dtnbtip 

inbt:p 

^D^nb^P 

D^nbttp 

r^r^i? 

Drnbtip 

■]D;ribt2p 

D^nbpp 

r^^^i? 

ii5^bt:p 

D5^bt:p 

•rl; 

1?^^^I? 

Q^btop 

■j^bt^p  . 

si3^nbt2p 

D^inbtip 

1iiribt:p 

fii^ibpp 

l^^^r^I? 

D^5bt:p 

l^ibtsp 

^^t:p 

Dibtip 

1^.^^I? 

^\m 

I^^I? 

^'^):^T.  \ 

t3?.^^I?^ 

l^.r^i?: 

^)!^T- 

te 

^D^btpp":      Di^btip^     l^.^^Pi?'     Q^^^i?':     i^^^i?": 


^5bt:p 

^>m 

^Dbtap 

Dib^P 

1=^^P 

Dbtop 

])^P- 

^D^ppn 

DDb^tjprj 

ibb^tppn 

Db^t:pn 

iV^)?n 

lY.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Guttueal  Verbs,  §  108. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIIi. 

HOPHAL.     KAL  (fut.  a) 

Pret. 

3  m. 

Tb:? 

"^^53. 

■^''t^P 

i::::-ri 

pi"' 

(Perf.J 

a/. 

T     ;  IT 

T    :  viv 

niT;^;n 

~  t:  it 

T      :    T     IT 

»     ~    T 

2  m. 

T   :  -  T 

riTb^;]. 

n-p^^n 

nTb:?ri 

T    ;    -  t:   IT 

2/. 

n":b5 

:    :  ~  T 

nnt^D 

nTb^:n 

m7::3'-n 

:    ;  -  t:  IT 

1  c. 

^f?Tr>:3. 

'^^ 

•    :   -  r:  IT 

Plur. 

3  c. 

:  IT 

^T^3?D 

^i^7b;^ri 

^^■-■^n 

2  m. 

OJ:!!^? 

°feT^??. 

tDnT^;^;n 

Dn-52:-n 

•■•    :    -  r:  IT 

2/ 

1^1^? 

l^T^?,?. 

IJ^I^Ivi 

■|nipyn 

1  c. 

^D"by 

^Diig_. 

^^T^S 

:   -  t:  IT 

Infin. 

Ahsol 

T 

T    I'" 

ib3?n 

"  -;   I- 

••  t;  it 

Constr. 

nixr 

••  T     1" 

•  -:  I- 

Tb^n 

FuT. 
(Impp.) 

3  m. 

^'52?; 

1±T 

ii33?;^ 

pi',!i 

3/. 

^■t?n 

'^'^^'^y}. 

-  t:  it 

pl"^. 

2  m. 

"i^a^ri 

^'"^?,iD 

-T.    IT 

vm 

2/ 

^l"T?ri 

■"i'r^Pl 

^T/b^n 

^i^?^ 

'^fjTnn 

1  c. 

l'tS;55 

•■  T  1" 

Ti]?« 

niDjij 

pins^. 

Plur. 

3  m. 

^^"t?,- 

:  IT" 

•  -If- 

^^'r?r. 

"Pm 

3/. 

ns-ayn 

n:7^^ri 

n3-7l:3'Ti 

T  :  •■  -:  1- 

T    :   -  t;  IT 

nrpinn 

2  »w. 

^Tjsn 

^^'rjr] 

^Tt]?;n 

:  r  IT 

^PID^l 

2/ 

T   :     —.  1- 

r;3iib2?n 

T   :  — :  r 

T     :    -  T:    IT 

njp-n 

1  c. 

"I'-^yp. 

..  Tl" 

^'^??. 

^  r:tT 

pinj. 

Imper. 

2  W. 

1^5 

ii2"n 

••  T     1" 

it:5n 

pin 

2/. 

'l"9? 

•    :  IT  •• 

^T^^O 

wanting 

'fcin 

Plur. 

2  m. 

"^iw 

^i52yn 

inH::^ri 

^P!' 

2/. 

T  ;      -; 

T   :  ••  T  1" 

n:"!^?n 

n:pin 

Part. 

^cf. 

ids 

•  -:  1- 

Pass. 

T 

1!b5D 

T-.;v 

T  t:   IT 

V.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  GuTTUEAii  Verbs,  §  116. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

PUAIi. 

HITHPAEL. 

PiiFrr.      3  m. 

b^53 

bwSjS 

bi^3 

b«a 

bssnn 

(Verf.) 

ri!i^^a 

nby.:3 

r^b^i3 

nbijib 

nb^^-inn 

T   -:iT    :     . 

2  m. 

rbka 

nb.s3D 

nbi<n 

nb^^■•i 

T  ;    - 

nb^^r^nn 

2/. 

nb^?a 

nb^tas 

P)^^? 

nbkb 

nbi^r-nn 

1  c. 

^pb^ia 

^nbN:D 

^nbii-i 

^nb^ib 

"nbj^rinn 

Plur.    3  c. 

^bx3 

^b^^jD 

!lb^5a 

^bj^b 

^bxiinn 

2  m. 

Dnbsa 

Dnbi^ro 

nribs3 

Dpbsb 

Dnbj^-inn 

2/. 

1P^^3 

l^r)^^''? 

l^V^?- 

Ft*^'^ 

■(nbii^nn 

1  c. 

:  ~  T 

^3^^?j? 

^2bK^3 

^;b^i■3 

^DbNsnn 

Infin.  Absol. 

bii^a 

biisn 

bxa 

••    T 

Constr. 

biia 

bxan 

••  T       • 

bk-i 

••  T 

b^Jsnn 

••  T    ;     • 

FuT.       3  m. 

bkT 

bkT 

bkj^ 

b^r 

b^sn^ 

(Impf.) 

^              3/ 

bk-jV} 

bkjr\ 

bN:n 

bkbn 

bjisnn 

*           2  m. 

bkjn 

bj^an 

bi^:»n 

bj^inn 

bN-inn 

2/ 

^bx:*n 

^b^5^.n 

^b^^.-n 

^bx'jPi 

^bssnn 

1  c. 

bj^jji 

b.NiJj? 

bN*."55 

biibj^ 

bkBni< 

Plur.    3  m. 

^bi^'^: 

^bi^r 

^bs'j^ 

^bi5> 

-:  >  : 

-:cT   :  • 

3/. 

nDbs:*n 

fubk^sX^ 

nrbN-'P 

nsbj^in 

riDbN;-inn 

2  W. 

^^^"»f: 

-:iT    • 

^b^jT] 

^bii'^n 

^bMBnn 

2/ 

nrbkjn 

njbkan 

n:bJ5jn 

njbkhn 

n'bt^iinn 

1  c. 

^i^^? 

bk3D 

••  T  • 

bJ<:o 

■•t  ; 

bikb: 

b.^.5nD 

••  T    :  • 

Imi'Er.    2  m. 

b^s 

bytsn 

bka 

bv^^nn 

2/ 

^bxa 

^b^^sn 

^bi^a 

wanting 

^b^J^,nn 

P/«r.    2  m. 

^bi^a 

^b^5•i^ 

^b«3 

^bji-inn 

2/. 

•nib^js 

T  :    -  T    . 

n:bk3 

T  :   -  T 

nDb.Aitrin 

T  ;    -  T     :      • 

Part.    J^cf. 

bN3 

bipa 

b.ssn^:: 

Pass. 

r 

bkT. 

biKyj 

T      : 

VI. 

Paeadigm  op 

Lamedh 

Guttural  Verbs,  §  123. 

KAIi. 

MPHAIi. 

PIEL. 

HIPHIL. 

HITHPABIi. 

Pret. 

3  m. 

inbTZJ 

nbira 

nbiij 

rr^birn 

nbn^n 

(Pekf. 

3/. 

nnbui 

nnb^3 

nnbia 

nn^b^rn 

nnbmzjn 

2  m. 

nnbiij 

nnbCD 

Pinbiij 

nnbipn 

nnbn;rn 

2/. 

nnb^zj 

nnbta 

nnb^ 

nnbtn 

nnbp^n 

1  c. 

'TinbTij 

^nnbpa 

'rinbus 

^nnbTrn 

^nribnirri 

Plur. 

3  c. 

sinbizj 

iinbuj] 

iinb^ 

^n^b-irn 

iinbnuin 

2  m. 

Dnn^T^ 

DrinbuJ3 

Dnnbiij 

Dnnbicn 

Dinnbnujn 

a/. 

1  c. 

■jrinbTr 
^3nbT23 

innbirs 
^Dnb'^rs 

■jnnbiz: 
iiDnbia 

■jinnbirn 
iiDnbdrj 

linnbriiari 
iiinbnirn 

t  -  -   :    • 

Ikfin. 

Absol. 

nibuD 

nbiDD 

n^^ 

ri^^jn 

( 

Oonstr. 

nb'jj 

-      : 

nbTsn 

~     T      • 

nb^a 

^'^■^n 

nbnirn 

FUT. 

3  m. 

nbui'' 

nb^" 

nbiij-' 

n^b^^ 

nbn^^ 

(Impf.^ 

3/ 

nbirn 

nbujn 

nbcn 

n^biijn 

nbn^n 

2  m. 

nbirn 

nbisn 

nbirn 

n^b^n 

nbniipi 

2/. 

^nb'^n 

^iibTsn 

^nbtn 

Tpbuin 

^fibnirn 

1  c. 

n^'^^ 

nb^5< 

nbiry; 

n^b'^i? 

nbniTJi 

Plur. 

3  m. 

iinbir": 

iinbTZJ" 

iinbu?: 

iin'^buj'' 

sinbniT"' 

3/ 

n^nbuin 

T  :  -    :  • 

nDnbian 

T  :  -  T    • 

-isnb'^rn 

T  ;   '  "    : 

riDnbirn 

nsnbnujn 

T   :  -   -    :    • 

2  w. 

iinbirpj 

:    IT    • 

iinbirri 

sin^buin 

^nbPTTP} 

2/ 

riDnb'dJn 

nsnbujn 

HDnbirn 

nanbizjn 

nsnbriirn  i 

1  c. 

nbir? 

nbTB3 

~     T  • 

nbuja 

^^^^5 

nbn^?  i 

Imper. 

2  W». 

nbir 

nb\Bn 

nb^j 

nbTrn 

nbnTzJn 

2/. 

Tib^ 

^nbisn 

"•nb^ 

^n^b'jjn 

^nbntn 

Plur 

2  w. 

iinbilj 

iinb^n 

iinb^ 

^n^bujn 

^nbn-i'n 

2/ 

ninb^ 

T   :  -    : 

ninbTsn 

T  :  -   T    • 

nrnbuj 

T   ;  ~    ~ 

nrnb-i-n 

n^nbmrn 

T  :  -  -   :    • 

Part. 

4c*. 

nb'is' 

nb^7j 

n-'b-jja 

nbnu:?j 

^ 

?as8. 

n^biD 

~               T 

nb^DD 

T    ;  ' 

vn. 

Paradigm  of  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  129. 

KAIi. 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAIi. 

KAL. 

Pret.      3  m. 

iri3 

^3? 

iL^hti 

izhri 

1^5 

(Pekf.)      ^ 
3/. 

T 

T  ;iT 

T  :  • 

T       •      • 

niDsn 

2  m. 

T    :  -T 

T    ;  ■  • 

nirsn 

T   :       \ 

nh3 

T     -T 

2/. 

:    :  ~T 

niEBD 

mriin 

:    :  -    • 

^^5 

1  c. 

^r}iri? 

^nirin 

^n'i'sn 

Tin3 

•    -T 

Flur.    3  e. 

:iT 

^izjs? 

JiTT^an 

:    \ 

^3n3 

:"T 

2  m. 

DfniT^J 

D^^3? 

ntfz-Mi 

Dn-ian 

dnn3 

2/. 

T^^55 

1^^52 

■jriirsn 

1^^5»7 

1^^? 

1  C. 

:  ~T 

iirisb 

^ri*an 

ii3"i'iri 

-T 

Infin.  4&so/. 

tii3 

T      • 

iran 

m 

Consfr. 

^^^ 

"T      • 

t^hri 

nn 

Fur.        3  m. 

^^: 

•■T    • 

^^k 

"p: 

(IMPF.)     ^^^ 

^rsn 

irijsri 

ir^sn 

TTsn 

■J^r? 

2  m. 

iij^n 

•■T      • 

125^5P 

^an 

inn 

2/. 

^■iij^n 

^t:3|ri 

'^TT'^iin 

^inn 

1  c. 

iri« 

^^>?^ 

^^35? 

■oax 

1^^ 

PJttr.    3  m. 

^i^'i*": 

:rT  • 

si^^a^ 

^t^i 

iiin: 

3/. 

T    ;  ~    • 

T    :  "T    • 

ns'i'^n 

ri'iran 

T   :  -    •. 

(!^5fen) 

2  w. 

TOD 

iiiii^^n 

^"i-yn 

^inn 

2/. 

T    :  -    • 

T   :  "T    • 

T    ;  -    - 

T   :  -   \ 

(-I'J^P}) 

1  c. 

^'^? 

;r^ii3 

^33 

1^3 

Imper.     2  w. 

■ira 

••T     • 

^in 

IP) 

2/ 

^iij'a 

•  :iT  • 

^ID^iin    wanting   | 

'?^ 

P/Mr.    2  w. 

fe 

^^?,in 

^t^hn 

iiin 

2/. 

T   :  - 

(nsn) 

Part.  Act. 

izjib 

iD^ii?j 

*'5 

Fass. 

T 

1233 

T  • 

■ffiit^a 

1^n3 

vin. 

Paradigm  of  Ayin 

KAIi. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

Pret.     3  m. 

2iD 

no 

noD 

-  T 

nbio 

(Peef.) 

nine 

T  :  IT 

nnb 

T    " 

nab3 

T    -T 

ninio 

T  :      1 

2  m. 

m^^) 

nizD 

T            -; 

nniio 

T   ;   - 

2/ 

(^^^9 

niio 

nine? 

nniio 

:   :  - 

1  c. 

•   :   "  T 

^nino 

^niipj 

^nnbio 

P/«r.   3  c. 

iiiino 

:  IT 

sinb 

-r 

iinnio 

2  m. 

(Dranc) 

Df:}inD 

cnincD 

ci^^^'^ip 

2/. 

(IPiniD) 

l^'i^P 

l^.i^Pj 

■jnnnio 

1  c. 

:  "  T 

^Diao 

iijinpj 

siwziio 

In  FIN.  Absol. 

niio 

T 

no 

libn 

nnio 

Constr. 

nno 

nb 

2^n 

nnio 

FuT.       3  m. 

T 

nb: 

-^t 

^aio"; 

(iMPF.)     ^^^ 

nbn 

nbn 

abn 

nnicn 

2  w. 

nbn 

T 

nbn 

nsp 

nnicn 

2/ 

•^^nbn 

•            T 

^nsn 

^abn 

'iaicri 

1  c. 

abj!^ 

T 

nbij< 

V 

nb^t 

- » 

^ii'ic.s 

Plur.    3  m. 

sinb^ 

T 

iliS^ 

ilSb^ 

iibnic"'. 

3/. 

nr:ncn 

T    ;          • 

n:nbn 

n:niicn 

2  m. 

^isbn 

siiDn 

^nbn 

^nnior} 

2/. 

nricn 

T     V  •.   : 

Hj-bn 

riDnbn 

nrniicn 

T  :  •• 

1  c. 

nb] 

T 

nb? 

nbD 

^aic: 

Imper.  2  m. 

3b 

-bn 

nnio 

2/ 

^ab 

^abn 

^bnic 

Flur.    2  m. 

lab 

iinbn 

^nnic 

2/ 

n: 

T 

-no 

n"-bn 

T    ;    -     • 

HDniic 

T    ;    " 

Part.  Act. 

^ib 

nnic'j 

Pass. 

n-iio 

r 

nbD 

TT 

10 


Doubled  Yerbs,  §  133. 

i 

HIPHIIi. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

PIBL. 

ncn 

np^n 

niincn 

^bsp 

rts6n 

T   *•      '• 

T    - 

nnnincn 

T    :    ;    • 

niicn 

rciincn 

ntcSD 

riincn 

•     -! 

npiinpn 

r^pb^P 

T'i^pn 

^rpiinpn 

"rirP^p 

^^?n 

^np^n 

^izincn 

iiippp 

Dhinpn 

onzzinon 

DHDCpp 

■jiniscn 

■jjnn^ircn 

■jripprp 

ii:i5pn 

^azp^incn 

^35650 

nfcn 

••     T 

t]p:o 

^cn 

niincn 

^b^Q 

no'' 

■T 

np^-' 

^ii'iJ^P! 

^b^p-; 

••     T 

np^Fi 

nnirpn 

^bspn 

36n 

••     T 

np^n 

niirpn 

tjbspri 

^inon 

-nc^n 

^ipinpn 

^byPPi^ 

36« 

••    T 

np^i5 

sninci^ 

^bspy? 

-T 

iiiap^"' 

iiinir.D^ 

^b!??Q^ 

T     V  •    : 

nrnnircn 

H^rbscn 

••     T 

ii:sb^n 

iinnincn 

^ip^pn 

nrncn 

T     V  •    : 

riDniircn 

rijjbrcn 

"T 

np^D 

niinp? 

"^bDpj 

••     T 

niincn  ■ 

■^bsp 

•     ••     T 
••     T 

wanting 

^nninpn 

^bppp 

n:-±cn 

T     V  •   -: 

nj^pincn 

•^j^bsp 

-Q'^ 

T 

nninc'i? 

mP.??^ 

11 


IX.  Paradigm  op  Ayin  Yav 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

FIEL. 

PUAIi. 

Pret.     3  m. 

(Peef.) 

mip; 

D:bip 

nb^ip 

Dbip 
nb^^ij: 

2  m. 

I?'Tf5 

nib^pa 

n7ji:ip 

n^^^ip 

2/ 

T\12p_ 

nTjiip? 

ri:ai?ip 

r;i7ji2ip 

1  c. 

"'^'^P- 

^ni/b^ipp 

••n^^/bip 

''n^Dbip 

Plur.   3  c. 

^^1? 

^7^ip3 

ii7baip 

^^'^ip 

2  m. 

t3P)'^P 

Dhi7jip5 

Dn-a7jip 

Dn:a7^ip 

2/. 

#915 

■jW/jipD 

•jn'fJip 

l^i'P'^ip 

1  e. 

^Tqp_ 

iiDii]^pD 

*i::a5Qip 

iiDabip 

Infin.  Absol. 

nip 

Dipn 

Constr. 

n^p 

Dijsn 

Dtiip 

Put.      3  m. 

(Impf.) 

3/. 

Dip: 

Dipn 

tit?ip: 
D:bipri 

D7bip: 

D-bipn 

2  m. 

U^pT\ 

dipn 

Di]ipri 

D7bipn 

2/ 

^is^pn 

••anpn 

"t^Jipn 

^t72ipri 

1  c. 

D^p&5 

m 

C3^T^: 

D7bip&|| 

Plur.   3  m. 

il^^p; 

mp^. 

^'^■•?ip"; 

sii:7.:ip'; 

3/. 

nj^t-iprn 

HD^^ipn 

n55::bipn 

nr^bippi 

2  m. 

ii/j^pn 

^7jipri 

^t52ipri 

sibjipri 

a/. 

nr^sD^pn 

nr^ipn 

HD^^ipn 

n:7-:bipri 

1  c. 

n^P; 

Dip? 

DijipD 

DisipD 

Imper.    2  w. 

n-ip 

Dipn 

D7bip 

2/. 

^^j^f) 

^npn 

^i]7jip 

wanting 

PZttr.   2  m. 

il?i^p 

ii'::ipn 

feip 

2/ 

^rri^ 

Hj'^ipn 

nD'.:-!2ip 

Part.    ^cf. 

t^i? 

Dbipia 

Pass. 

D^p 

Dip3 

utip^^ 

12 


AND  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs,  §  154. 

HIPHIL, 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

KAL. 

D^n 

Djb^n 

DiDipnn 

T 

j^^'fen 

ntpn 

ni97^ipnn 

n=i 

T           ••   -: 

(n^P^n) 

r'atipnn 

nan      D'ia'n 

T    ;    -                 T              • 

nii2^pn 

(niap^n) 

Fi7^7bipnn 

^^^ 

"nii^^pn 

(^n^^iin) 

^n7j55ipnn 

^nnn    "nii^*^ 

^''2"')bn 

si7bpri 

ii7b7jipnn 

T                                               • 

Dni^j-'i^n 

(Dr)7:pp^n) 

Dn7^7^ipnn 

Dnnn 

■j)hi7^^i:n 

(l^^P^^J) 

■jn:a"2ipnn 

■jni") 

siDi7b-"pn 

(^37jp^n) 

sir^iniprin 

iiDin 

Qfen 

3i-i        n'^'n 

D^fen 

Dbiprin 

^'1 

Q^: 

Dp!)'' 

D-bipn: 

^i: 

D-jbn 

Dp^n 

DiQipnn 

•     T 

D^fen 

Dp^n 

Dt;ipnn 

•     T 

"^'feJ? 

•tp^ri 

^a^jipnn 

•    T 

Dt« 

n{?^« 

C3^Vt;^2? 

•    T 

^^^fe: 

^'^i?^"! 

^b?jipri': 

•T 

nsisfen 

(ns^jpiin) 

nsr^bipnn 

T   ;  •'    T 

ii53^)bn 

^tj^iri 

feipnn 

•     T 

T   ;•••   T 

(n?rp^n) 

nD)jbipjnn 

T    :   ••    '     :    • 

T  :  ••   T 

DT5 

Dfe^3 

Dtiipin? 

•r 

Dfen 

Dripnn 

l^n 

''2?^t?T 

wanting 

"is^jipnn 

^^'1 

'•     T 

!i73:aiprn 

ill'^n 

T    :•••   T 

n5ti7j"ipnn 

(^}t) 

D-'feX? 

naipn?:? 

T 

Dj:^^ 

n^-1 

13 


X. 

Paradigm  of  Pe  Yodh  Verbs,  §  144 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

KAL. 

Pret.      3  m. 

-T 

n'ijis 

n^iijin 

niii^n 

wh-" 

(Pkkf.) 

rht^ 

T    ;     1 

T          • 

nz-'^n 

fiizz^ 

2  m. 

T    ;    -T 

T    ;     - 

T   : 

pnib'^n 

n^ii"^ 

2/ 

nn-j;^ 

nniriD 

niirin 

nn-ji^n 

T\zy 

:    :   -  T 

1  e. 

■    :    ~T 

^nu'^jt 

^nrjiin 

^nz'ij^n 

•    :   "T 

Phir.    3  c. 

.IT 

^h'ljio 

^n^irin 

iih'oi^n 

vijn* 

2  m. 

t^ri^'^i 

Dfnniris 

Dnn'iin 

Dnzci^n 

Dniri': 

2/. 

l^^^l 

"Pt^"^? 

inn-oiin 

■jnn'i^n 

■jn^i'; 

1  c. 

:     "T 

^DnirjiD 

^Dn-^ijin 

!i:niD^n 

Infin.  Absol. 

r 

s^'H 

T 

Constr. 

^^^ 

^"!?!!n 

n^iifin 

n^&n 

th) 

FuT.        3  m. 

^^!: 

••T  • 

z'iLr^ 

y^r 

TZJi^'' 

(IMPF.)     ^ 

^^s^ 

•*  T      • 

n-irin 

niii^n 

^2-r 

2  m. 

^'^j^ 

nir^n 

ririn 

iMn 

^i-n 

2/. 

•^i-i-n 

•      .  IT     • 

"S^irin 

^hizi^n 

^iet-n 

1  c. 

i"^:^ 

^l'^^"? 

r"[r-:i< 

ri^s 

da^jj! 

P/itr.    3  m. 

^i'u:^ 

^i'ii^^ 

ta^iDi^ 

^y^^^ 

ijjzf^^ 

3/. 

T   ;    ~    •' 

T   :    ••  T    • 

n3"*rn^r. 

T     :  ~       ■ 

2  w. 

^i'jjn 

^n^-^D'in 

^h'zTi 

!i"izjn-n  1 

2/ 

T   :    -    •• 

T   :    -• 

T    :   -      •     [ 

1  c. 

^"^2 

■•t  • 

n^iijiD 

niD^D 

ty: 

Imper.    2  m. 

^V. 

■■T       • 

mijin 

th: 

2/. 
PZwr.    2  m. 

•    :iT   • 

wanting    | 

2/ 

T   ;    ■• 

T  :    "T    • 

T   ; 

T   ;   -  ; 

Part.  Act. 

nia-« 

n^Tbi:j 

^i"" 

Pass. 

T 

T 

mb^^j 

Uj^n^ 

14 


XI.  Paradigm 

OF  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs, 

§164. 

KAIi 

NIPHAIi. 

PIEL. 

HIPHIL. 

HIIHPABL. 

Pret.    3  m. 

/n             \ 

T     T 

^^^? 

^ir2 

^'i"^n 

^^-^" 

(Perf.) 

nj$"4i3 

r,k-i-2 

T      •    :     • 

ni<2ii2nri 

2  m. 

T        T    r 

T        '•     ;  • 

^^%-^ 

T       "   :    • 

r.w^r^nn 

2/. 

T     T 

t^i^V^^ 

tM^k2 

nsr^n 

1  c. 

•           T     T 

^T\^t2^ 

^T^iliku 

^ins-^^n 

^r^52":nn 

Plur.   3  c. 

:   IT 

^^12) 

^11'2 

^^'^^n 

^kT2T\'n 

2  w. 

T    : 

^t^'4r^^ 

tiH<-l'2 

Dh^^rin 

t]fnx52;-;nn 

2/. 

■jnx:i?j 

1f}.^^^? 

t}>^%^ 

inj^^'.pn 

■jln^^!l"::nrI 

1  c. 

r    T 

^2^^"t? 

r.i<k-2 

ii:.si:^jn 

^D.sk":nn 

Infin.  46so^. 

T 

sr^? 

ifk'2 

^^pn 

Constr. 

b^r^ 

^^'^ 

^"^rH 

t^ii":rr! 

Put.     3  w. 

^■9: 

^V^l 

^^■^' 

^'^'9.^ 

^'4-^' 

(Impf.) 

3/. 

T    ;     • 

••     T      • 

iifi-:n 

i<^krn 

i<k?;rri 

2  m. 

N-:-:n 

••     T      • 

^^'ri^i 

t<"i'9n 

i^r:nn 

2/. 

*i?r:n 

^k'Ji'm 

^i^iiw 

••K^i/^n 

^NS5:r;in 

1  e. 

^^^T^ 

i(^12^ 

■•     T    V 

m:c^^ 

^^"^535^ 

2^^^f^5< 

Plur.  3  m. 

sij^r;': 

:  IT  • 

^^•^2) 

ili^^i/J^ 

^i<2i-;ri: 

3/. 

T          V     T      • 

n':mi2P\ 

T       V  ~    ; 

n:j!d72n 

T      V    :    - 

T       .    -   :    • 

2  W. 

^kT2T) 

;    IT    • 

iiN^^n 

iii^^is'jri 

^x^irrin 

2/. 

T          V     :       •              T          V     T      • 

n;5<2i':n 

n:xr:n 

T       v    :    - 

n:siii:nn 

1  c. 

••     T  • 

^k'^'? 

i^'i?5a5 

^k^^^ 

Imper.  2  w. 

T   : 

idi2n 

^%'^ 

^^^n 

mi2rri 

2/. 

^kT2 

•    :    rT    • 

''H^^ 

^j^^-^n 

\<<t2:!:rin 

PAer.    2  m. 

^k^-2 

:    IT    • 

^T2 

iii^^iirri 

^m'2T\ri 

2/ 

np^d^a  n;5<r/:;ri 

T             .•      " 

riDNkisnn 

Part.  u4c#. 

atizp 

id?ji3 

s-i'ia 

t^2i"jn:^ 

Pass. 

^'^'D 

|}<r^3 

15 


r 

XII. 

Paeadigm 

OF  Lamedh 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

Pret.     3  m. 

nba 

nblJ? 

nba 

T    • 

(Perf.) 

^              3/. 

nnba 

T  :  IT 

n^b^? 

nnba 

2  m. 

n^ba 

T    ••  :  • 

n4a 

T       •    • 

2/. 

•   T 

f^'??^? 

n-'k 

1  e. 

•        "   T 

'^'??^? 

Ti? 

P^wr.   3  c. 

^53 

T 

Slb33 

4 

2  m. 

t3i;i;b3 

C35n^^j5 

2/. 

ff^^. 

*^5?53 

Ih'^ba 

1  C. 

•    T 

^3'^^? 

iirba 

Infin.  46so/. 

n'3a 

T 

r\%}. 

n^a 

Consfr. 

nib^ 

T      • 

niba 

FuT.       3  m. 

nbr 

nbs: 

nba": 

(Impf.) 

3/. 

nb^n 

nbsn 

ti^yp^ 

2  m. 

inban 

nban 

nb5i\i 

2/. 

"""W^ 

"    T      • 

^ban 

1  c. 

J^^5^ 

nbs« 

V  T    V 

nbas 

P^wr.   3  m. 

&: 

T  • 

^^5: 

3/ 

ns^bsn 

T      V  T      • 

riD^ban 

2  m. 

6:n 

iiban 

T      • 

^ban 

-     ; 

2/. 

T    V :    • 

nrban 

T      V  T      • 

nrban 

1  e. 

xty: 

nbaD 

V  r  • 

nb:3 

I3IPER.      2   W. 

n?!a 

nbsn 

nba 

2/. 

^^^ 

^^^n 

^^a 

P^wr.    2  w». 

iiba 

siban 

T     • 

^ba 

2/. 

T    V  : 

riD^ban 

T     V  T     • 

^5^5 

Part.    Act 

n53 

ri|5'^ 

Pass. 

4-^ 

T 

nb:o 

16 


He  Verbs,  § 

170. 

PUAIi. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL 

n|3 

n^jti 

nb^rn 

nn^5 

ninb.-n 

T  ;  ;     • 

nnb:.n 

KM 

T     •  :    • 

jn^b:n 

r^-barn 

r^-|3 

n^5:»n 

n-^lsnn 

Ti? 

^r^b:n 

^n^bjH 

^n^biinn 

^%ri 

^5:n 

^bsnn 

... ..  ,^ 

on'^^'H 

ch^bsnn 

1^'^-? 

ir!'^?n 

tr'^in 

•^^bann 

•■••• 

^D^l?:n 

••  :    T 

ifli^nn 

(n55) 

n^jH 

nb:;n 

(-■"b^nn) 

ni^a 

ni!::^n 

(nibr^n) 

"1?: 

*'^Z 

{^?'.3''' 

n^sn^ 

nl=n 

tibjT\ 

nl::;n 

nbanm 

ii?? 

n^r^n 

V  :    T 

nbann 

1<n 

^^^p) 

^5jn 

^barm 

"!<'$ 

n3:« 

nb« 

nbsnv^^ 

% 

^B>r 

^5r 

^bsn-' 

nsiJFi 

ns^^jn 

ns^brin 

nrbarn 

^^:n 

^!::r) 

^bjn 

^^3rn 

nr'jjn 

ni^bsn 

nrbjD 

nrbsrn 

'■"I?? 

n^^5 

nb:o 

•"!^5r^3 

{^?!5n 

nbsrn 

wanting 

"^?n 

wanting 

•'bann 

*i^?n 

^^nnn 

n"/^:n 

^?i5r:n 

^).^^ 

nb3n53 

nfjf'n 

V  :    T 

17 


Xin.  Pakadigm  of  the 


Class  I. 
1.  Monosyllables  and  Segliolates;  Abstract  Nouns. 


I 

Vowol  with            Perfect  Roo'3  lig  ^  -j       5I3J      -JJ  ^  >^^            J^^ 

let.  Radical  2d.  Radical     Segholates  Guttural  I 

a^lj      nis      ^[^t     "^^h  p7J      b:5          r^^ 

:    T                        T   ;                                                    V  :■  Iv   T                      T           T    : 

Di;^^      pii    ntn  n!5n(^)  ^          nin    r^i:^  *3a 
b^,n(^)           nit: 


■n^D  I   Tin  brx  ^ 


tp-dp     bii"^^     y::n      *?5 

i?  prosthetic:  ^^225^,  lilTS*,  t:b«,  bTbnjJ. 
IS2  unessential  long  vowel:  "^iii^,  "1!bs;. 

2.  Long  ultimate  with  pretonic  -^  or  -j^-. 

Adjectives:  a,  e,  b  intrans.  'bp,  '^'^,  "lij'l. 
^,  ?^  passive  ^"ns,  iL'^rtD,  blbj^. 

/:? :  T]") ,  on ,  nb .       "iy  and  h :  ^^,^1,  p''^, ,  yyi^. 
nb:  r;r,^^?i,^P;03?0'r^- 

a,  0  qualities  existing:  b^'ir. ,  pin,  I'i^p,  p'^^'l. 
e  „        becoming'.  biS,  pin,  IT^ ,  pn'i. 

6  permanent,  as  figure  T]'"^^ ,  b'i> ,  nihs ,  p"b^ ,  3py. 

colour  Dix,  iSs,  pin:,  "^n::,  nntD. 

character  D'-'uj ,  pih"2 ,  n^'rit: ,  iriijD. 
e  variable  states  of  body  ri;^,  ^"l^ia,  zi?"^ ,  jiir. 

mind  bi^ ,  ytn ,  inn ,  5<n^^ ,  tV. 
Concrete  Nouns:  nib  ("Y;r),  ^^'^,  ^'^?,  "li-?,  "Tii^- 
Names  of  seasons:  n^ii^\  "^Ct^,  n^lin,  n^^T,  b-^nn,  n^i:p. 

3.  Long  immutable  penult,  —  or  —  in  ultimate. 

Agents:  btjp,  Dihin,  bi^TD,  "iVs ,  brn. 
Occupations:  "^jbis,  bin,  iTjin,  -ii%  chi3,  "jhis. 

18 


Formation  of  Nouns,  §  183. 


Class  II.    Eeduplicated. 
Intensive:  IT^n,  r.J3£,  p^-n^,  ^iii^,  'yl-^n,  D^fTl. 
Daghesh  resolved:  "^iti^p,  '^it^-'p,  "pk^S. 

;^y:  nfinn,  np^p,  nlirbn,  n^Dbt:,  nbbb3. 

do.  vowel  inserted  biibl?,  ^ii^?,  bpibp. 

do.  consonant  softened  ziis ,  "pbp''p ,  nzi3 ,  HliJ']^. 

^3:  Q-iiMnnc^),  D'N2rx;2(")-        f^'^:  s^ll^^:. 

Occupations:  ^3Si ,  nh ,  j^'^ ,  "j^'n ,  ^^n,  nntt. 
Defects:  Dbi5,  "iy,  'ijnn,  ^ii:?,  irp>",  nos,  nnp. 
Abstracts:  D^b'jp,  D^"^S3,  D'n^buJ.       53?:  nnnn,  D^yr:?;ir. 
Reduplicate  3d.  Kadical:  with  a  nn";S,  "jiy'i,  bb-i<. 
i  Tn7^5 ,  T-^no.    0  bbn: ,  nn^].    u  y^i:?,?,  n^ii^s. 
Red.  two  Radicals:  TiipTipB,  n^::b:n,  blXT:?. 

-    »  I-   :   '         T  :    I   -:  '       ••     t  -: 

repetition  7]SpSr],  pbpbn,  bnbnB,  "jCSpN;. 
diminutives  of  colour  DT::'15< ,  p^'^y, ,  *in"}ll^. 

Class  III.    With  Prefixes. 
« :  superlative  2T jS  ,  nipx ,  "jn^Ji. 
13 :  agent  b^Sira ,  bb'2 ,  participles  with  12, 

instrument  nrsa,  ^2b'2,  niUJa. 

place  or  time  t:±V2,  Via";"^,  "jilbr ,  Qlbia. 

action  or  condition  Tjip'^,  ^bc'2,  mI-S,  ^Tfl^tl. 

object  or  subject  hb^;'2,  ^X2]'2 ,  ^i":^";:,  pn"}7j. 
^:  names  pn^^  ^i^?';  appellatives  t^^pb*,  ^h^^. 
TM  abstracts  j^i^ri,  H'b'l'^r!;  concrete  ^llIP,  TiDbn. 
Class  IV.     With  Affixes.    Denominatives. 

■ji  or  1^:  adjectives  li"ni<,  "jFi'irri],  irb:^. 

abstracts  "jii^y,  "pp*;.,  "pi^K,  "jini^. 

augmentative  "i^l^aJ;  diminutive  "Tl^^ii^, 
1 ,  C3  or  b :  -na ,  Qbp ,  Dbnn ,  b"!:-i3. 
^  :  relation  ^"^ns?,  ^C^n\  ^iiE".!,  ^n53. 
\:  ^Tn,  ^l^l'l,  ^b^b,  ■'Vs. 


19 


XIV. 

Paradigm  of  thf. 

king 

covert 

1. 

drought 

boy 

Sing 

abs. 

^t 

^D? 

^■^n 

^?3 

const 

^P. 

^no 

^■^^ 

n>'5 

Plur 

.  abs. 

•  T     ; 

D^nno 

•    T  TJ 

*  T : 

const. 

^5f'^ 

^"Dr^Q 

•   :  T 

S?p. 

Sing. 

l.suf. 

"Sb^j 

^"ir^P 

•    ;  T 

gr.  mf. 

C??^'-? 

Qi^r.p 

V    :    :  T 

C3i'^?p. 

Plub 

.  I.  suf. 

"5^-9 

^i^9 

-  T  r: 

"  T : 

gr.  suf. 

Qi'5r^ 

cii'TiriD 

Dri")n 

*But  ^;s': 

feet 

knees 

loins 

shoes 

Dp. 

aha. 

Ci:^?!! 

t^:?";^ 

•-   :   T 

ci:^??- 

const. 

^b^n 

'?1^ 

••   :   T 

^b^D 

lord      vengeance            c 

2. 

>oud 

old  man 

heart 

Smo. 

abs. 

r^^ 

Dp2 

'tt 

V. 

tl 

:2ib 

T   •• 

const 

v% 

C3p.5 

P-. 

Ife? 

nib 

Plur. 

abs. 

D^hi^     D^inpa      c:-i]2? 

-!                         •  It  :                           •  r  -! 

C^ipT 

D^nnb 

const 

'?.'"^« 

^';p? 

i}^. 

^5pT 

^inb 

Smo. 

I  suf. 

i^^ 

^^1^? 

^5i?J 

gr.  suf 

Di:\s;      D5;^p3 

tiinnb 

Plub. 

I.  suf 

^?"*T^ 

-  't  : 

ir.! 

-  T  ; 

gr.  suf. 

Dranj^    Dir^p. 

t3b;?.pT 

tJi'nnb 

great 

Strong 

dry           l": 

J  Hiph.  part 

SiNO. 

mase. 

bii-i 

T 

VV) 

t^i: 

^VJ^. 

fern. 

nbiia 

T              5 

^feP: 

nb^p^j 

PtDR. 

masc. 

Q^bia 

ti^pTn 

<  'T  -: 

D'^ip?" 

DTj-p^ 

fern. 

nib'-s 

nipTn 

'     T    -1 

nii-n^ 

nib^p:^ 

20 


Declension  of  Masculine  Nouns, 

-1 

§  221  A. 

perpetuity 

deed                   ( 

ieath 

V   T 

olive 

sickness 

•  t; 

nsi 

b?Q 

mi^a 

in"! 

D"n:|3 

•  T  :                              • 

n^n^T 

•T  t: 

Ti2^ 

^b^B 

^rji:a 

''^M 

••T  t: 

^^22? 

•  t:  it 

^ni7j 

't!'.! 

^:bn 

D^.l;^? 

Dib:>'B        d: 

:rr^ 

^^•^7 

V  :  :  T 

~  t: 

~  T    ; 

^ni7j 

'"h"] 

^^bn 

-  T  t: 

...     ..  t:  IT                             ¥      "       • 

...  ••  1" 

Qi^^bn 

V    "IT  t: 

*But  r,3rs 

noon 

eyes 

cheeks 

•  -    TilT 

''^nb 

••    T  t 

3. 

4.  (rib) 

work                field 

tree 

name          potter 

seal 

Y? 

U'4      ^r 

nh-in 

T 

r^T2 

*.•      T 

T? 

^%r 

Dhin 

~^?*9 

^1^ 

ti'i?? 

fi^i^'? 

•      T 

Cl^^?!?- 

•     T 

'^^ 

^i^!' 

^"nTjn 

"^.?p- 

"T^ 

^i?? 

*^7iiD      *in:2'"' 

^tT\n 

"^?,?. 

•     T 

...   :    •                V  :  vi 

nyzrp 

''^? 

^I'njj'i 

-     T 

^ib?;j 

-     T 

Di-225 

*But  7\^^           *^1^) 

...       ••-;  1- 

V    "   : 

dead 

Kal  act.  part 

Niph.  part. 

ii'h  part. 

fair 

VT 

T     •■ 

T 

TT 

n-ir\^2 

t3'bt:p 

Ci^<t:p3 

D^'ia 

n-r 

•t 

nih-^ 

nibt:p 

nibi:pD 

nib3 

T 

21 


XV.  Paeadigm  of  Masculine  Nouns  (continued). 

*■ 

5  {h 

and  the  like). 

camel 

garden 

goat 

statute 

Sing.   abs. 

T  T 

15 

T? 

pn 

const. 

b7ba 

)5 

T? 

ph 

Plur.  abs. 

•   -  : 

D^h 

d^t:? 

n-pn 

const. 

^^■23 

^33 

i."^. 

^i??r:. 

Sing.   /.  suf. 

i^a 

4a 

i? 

;{?r! 

gr.  suf. 

niy;3 

DD33 

Di-T? 

cppn 

Pldr.  I.  suf. 

^l"<2S 

^33 

^•t? 

^{?n 

gr.  suf. 

Clii52?» 

C)i;?5 

DD;pn 

small 

much  or  many 

deep 

fresh 

Sing.   masc. 

1^1? 

y\ 

P^? 

•    T 

fern. 

m2^P 

T  - 

^fe"?? 

Plur.  masc. 

Oi^I? 

n-iin 

D^p-a:? 

Di'^p 

fern. 

M3D)5 

ninn 

nippj^ 

ni^"]t: 

Nouns 

WITH  Suffixes. 

horse 

horses 

mare 

mares       i 

Abs. 

So.  C^D 

PL.    D^p^D     So 

T 

PL.  nio^D 

Const. 

D^ID 

^DtlD 

nc^D 

mic^D 

Sing.    1  c.     my 

^p^D 

^0^0 

•    T         1 

^nio^D 

2  m.  thy 

Tj9^D 

TP.^^ 

?jnciiD 

iTj^niD^p 

2/.    thy 

T]D^D 

•q-C^D 

t^H^^ 

Tj-nic^o 

3  m.  his 

ic^D 

T 

ihc^iD 

T                    1 

3/.    her 

T 

T 

T   T         t 

T        •.•                    1 

Plur.  1  c.    our 

ilSC^lD 

^Tb^'O 

••    T         1 

^rniD^p 

2  m.  your 

V     -.1^     1 

C3i.'?^9 

Dirp^D 

Dp^nio^o 

2  /.    your 

t^^ 

irp^D 

-pnp^o 

■rnip^D 

3  m.  their 

T 

nrrp^D 

T    T        1 

nn^ric^o 

3/.    their 

IC^D 

•,n^p^D 

tc^9 

•jrrnip^o 

22 


XVI.  Paradigm  of  ^ 

Feminine  Nouns,  §  221 

B. 

1. 

queen 

covert 

desert 

girl 

SiNO.   dbs. 

niibia 

rrno 

T    ;    • 

const. 

nsb'^ 

n-^np 

~   :  T 

r^i??- 

Plur.  abs. 

T    ; 

T    ; 

T  t: 

T  ; 

const. 

nisba 

rrnro 

:  T 

niiyp. 

Sing.    I.  suf. 

T^b"^ 

•  T    ;     • 

•   T  :  T 

•  T-:i- 

gr.  suf. 

c^irsb--? 

ciiin'^np 

Dbnn-^n 

Drin^?] 

Pldr.  I.  suf. 

^fiibb^j 

-hinnp 

-         :  T 

'ri'i^5!D 

gr.  suf. 

Di^nbb:j 
.. , .  - 

Drp'^np 

V       ••    1      J  T 

V        ••     1  -.1- 

sides      ( 

iouble  embroidery 

Du.      abs. 

citri^")^ 

n-h-pn 

•   -     T»|     • 

const 

.. .  ,- 

2. 

3. 

sucker 

counsel 

vengeance 

cry 

Sing.   abs. 

T    •• 

riaj:? 

np5T 

It  t; 

^I^P" 

const. 

fl^? 

i^^P? 

rip^t 

f^)^?T 

Plur.  abs. 

nii? 

ni^i^s 

nip^T 

r\ip:i^ 

const. 

niky 

nibp? 

t^T?J 

nipji"; 

Sing.    I.  suf. 

'^^? 

^nap3 

^^i??J- 

^npDi^ 

gr.  suf. 

°5^^? 

^i.r'^P? 

t3?r>P?J- 

o|^i?5'i' 

Plur.  I.  suf. 

^ni2? 

^r]i-ip? 

"j^'ip?! 

^hipr 

gr.  suf. 

lips 

DD-n'^pD 

Drrp3^T 

twofold  sloth 

Du.      abs. 

D^nsiD 

D-nb:2? 

const. 

T5'l? 

23 


**; 


\  ^  "v* 


>\'^* 


'«?»■$ 


Mt^vr  .  ^ 


> /*         X  . 


V     \J* 


